.V\37 
 
CORNELL UNIVERSITY LIBRARY 
 
 3 1924 096 046 374 
 
Cornell University 
 Library 
 
 The original of tiiis bool< is in 
 tine Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://www.archive.org/cletails/cu31924096046374 
 
A Treatise of the Greek Prepositions 
 
.)■ 
 
 TEEATISE 
 
 (^H,Tn> 
 
 GREEK PREPOSITIONS, 
 
 AND OH TBI 
 
 CASES OF NOUNS 
 
 WITH WHICH these are used. 
 
 GESSI^T.Il HARRISON, M.D. 
 
 PBOFESBOa or LATIN IN THK VNIVEB3ITY OF VIBQINIA. 
 
 rHILADELrniA: 
 J. B. LIPPINCOTT & CO. 
 
 1858. 
 
Entered accordlDg to Act of Ci>ngrMn, In the year 1H&8, by 
 
 OESSNEK UAIIKISON, 
 
 In th« rierk'i Office of the Dlitrlct Court af the United Statce for the Eoatcm District of 
 Virginia. 
 
 f ^) 
 
 ^ 
 
 PRErACE. 
 
 In the daily instruction of the Greek classes in the University 
 of Virginia, for many years committed to his hands, as well aa 
 in the more systematic course of lectures on the grammar of the 
 Greek language, -which it was his custom to deliver annually, 
 the author of the treatise here offered to the public found no 
 little difficulty and embarrassment in the treatment of the pre- 
 positions. Although he had a long time since obtained a distinct 
 notion, as he thinks, of the general office of this class of words, 
 and of their relations to other words in discourse, yet he met 
 with constantly recurring perplexity in the interpretation of 
 individual members of it. The various significations attributed 
 to a proposition would, in some cases, present soomingly irre- 
 concilable inconsistencies; and, in others, the meanings, though 
 not wholly inconsistent, did not appear to be capable of being 
 combined into a rational system pervaded by one common idea. 
 Pressed by these difficulties, and feeling, on the one hand, that 
 a proper understanding of this class of words was hardly second 
 in importance to that of any other in the language, and having 
 some confidence, on the other, that a more careful and thorough 
 investigation might overcome the difficulties adverted to, he set 
 about the task of reviewing the whole subject. This was done, 
 it may be proper to say, not with any view to writing for the 
 public, but solely for his own satisfaction, and for the benefit of 
 his classes. 
 
 As he advanced in the work of investigation which ho had 
 
 assigned himself, he found more and more encouragement to go 
 
 iU 
 
IV 
 
 PBBFAOB. 
 
 on. Bosidea the obtainiitg other reeults that amply rewarded 
 the labor of research, a few-principle8.of interpretation, which, 
 tboDgh simple and obvioos, and of the most satisfactory appli- 
 cation, had been wanting to make possible a complete explana- 
 tion of the prepositions, developed themselves to his mind as the 
 occasion required, or, rather, were brought to light by the 
 scrutiny of facts as they came under examination. And though 
 often checked in his progress, and baffled time after time in the 
 search for an adequate solution of some enigma, being sometimes 
 obliged to spend days upon days in pondering a single use of a 
 single preposition, he was gratified at being able to arrive at 
 length at a satisfactory issue of his inquiries. 
 
 Having reached the conclusion that, by employing proper 
 methods, the meanings and uses of the prepositions of the Greek 
 language might be set forth and explained so as to leave on the 
 mind no serious doubt of their interpretation, that, in fuct, these 
 particles were capable of being reduced to a simple and con- 
 sistent theory, he decided, after first submitting his views to the 
 practical test of the lecture-room and to the judgment of compe- 
 tent scholars, to write out for others the result of his labors, and, 
 at the sumo time, to set forth the process by which it had been 
 obtained. He naturally thought, or, it may be, fondly fancied, 
 that what had caused himself the perplexity of an insoluble 
 problem might have caused the same perplexity to others ; and 
 that they might share -the satisfaction he felt in finding that 
 phenomena in language so numerous and important, and that 
 yet seemed so often confused and discordant, were really, when 
 fairly interpreted, capable of being reduced to the highest degree 
 of order and harmony. 
 
 Of the method adopted in presenting these investigations to 
 the reader, it is not deemed necessary to speak at length in this 
 place. It may be remarked, however, that the work was not 
 designed to bo a mere exhibition of doctrines that had obtained 
 the author's credence, whether with or without authority. It 
 was intended, on the contrary, to present, together with the 
 conclusions reached, the process by which they had been arrived 
 
 PREFACK. 
 
 at, so that the reader might at each step form for himself a just 
 opinion of the truth of the doctrine proposed. It is an attempt 
 to apply to a difficult and complicated problem or series of 
 problems, embracing a ^eat multitude and variety of facts and 
 groups of facts, the strictest method of induction. Consequently, 
 the object being to set down in their turn the doctrines or prin- 
 ciples resulting from the examination xtt facts in succession, it 
 could not but happen that, in proportion as progress was made 
 towards a satisfactory generalization, there would be a frequent 
 recurrence and repetition of the same doctrine or principle. 
 And such repetition, being due to the number of successive 
 inductions and to the method pursued of presenting those one 
 after the other as they were reached, so far frpm being a just 
 ground of objection, is, if the author may venture to express tho 
 opinion, among the few and humble claims that the work may 
 possibly have to the reader's attention. For, to tho lournor 
 who seeks to derive the greatest benefit from the study of 
 language, it will bo found far more profitable to exercise himself 
 in the simple but cftcctive methods of strict philosophizing than ' 
 to store his memory, however richly, with the mere results of 
 learned labor without attending to the processes by which they 
 have been obtained. 
 
 For the helps which he has used, the author has striven to 
 make everywhere suitable acknowledgment in the text. It may 
 bo proper to state, however, that in the chapter on the cases of 
 nouns he has availed himself chiefly of Kuhner's Ausfiihrlicho 
 Grammatik, and made reference to it almost exclusively. This 
 course seemed preferable to citing various authorities, both for 
 other reasons, and because tho grammar just mentioned has 
 been employed, as others equally must have been, almost solely 
 as a collection of materials, no use being had for its author's 
 theory. 
 
 In tho treatment of the prepositions in detail, the largest use 
 has boon made of Passow's Ilandwortorbuch dor Gricchischen 
 Sprache. And, while the author could not adopt Passow's 
 explanation of the use of the propositions, ho has a grateful 
 
fc' 
 
 VI 
 
 PBBFACB. 
 
 pleasure in avowing that, without the aid afforded by this exoeU 
 lent work, he could never, with his limited time, have accom- 
 plished the task of reviewiiig the doctrine of these particles. 
 
 In conclusion, the author submits the work to the candid 
 judgment of the reader, asking a liberal indulgence for the many 
 imperfections which it will doubtless be found to have. Some 
 of these, he may be pardoned for saying, may justly be charged 
 to the necessity of preparing the work at such intervals of time 
 only as could be spared from the daily burden of exhausting 
 labor. Others may not unfairly be referred to the nature of the 
 subject, demanding as it does for its perfect exhibition, not only 
 an amount of patient and attentive consideration that leisurely 
 study alone can afford, but a degree of nice discrimination and 
 of sound judgment to which the writer cannot pretend to lay 
 claim. But, however this may be, it is due to himself to say 
 that he has not set down any doctrine without having weighed 
 it as carefully as he could, nor without a full conviction of its 
 truth. Where he had doubts remaining, he has not failed to 
 express them. 
 
 VHpnsiTT OF ViKQiNiA, May 1, 1868. 
 
 
 r 
 
 
 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 FAQl 
 
 Preiaoi iii-vi 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 OF THE NATURE OF THE PREPOSITIONS, 
 AND OF TUE UETHOD OF TBEIR IN- 
 VE8TI0ATI0N. 
 
 Nature of the prepositions 1-2 
 
 Prepositions not supplementary to 
 
 the caset of nouns 2 
 
 Relation to other adverbs 3 
 
 Importance of their functions 4 
 
 Difficulties attending thoir interpre- 
 tation ib. 
 
 Elements iuTolTcJ in a question of 
 the signification of a preposition 
 
 with the case of a noun 4-7 
 
 Method of inTestigation 7-14 
 
 Primary and secondary meanings of 
 the propoaitiou, and their order 
 
 of arrangement 7-11 
 
 The meanings of the case to be con- 
 sidered apart from the prepo- 
 sition 11-12 
 
 When the case depends upon the 
 
 preposition 12-18 
 
 The meaning of the preposition may 
 arise from the circumstances in 
 which it stands 18-14 
 
 CH.\rTEn II. 
 
 OF TUE SIGNIFICATION OF THE CASES 
 WITH WniCH I-REfUSITlONS ARE USED. 
 ■* 
 I. or TUB GENITIVE OASB. 
 
 l.Withanoun; Engl. 'of 16 
 
 Distinguished from tlie accusative 10 
 An affinity between the aoan in 
 the genitive and the term de- 
 fined by it... A. 
 
 rial 
 Qenitive of^he subject and of the 
 
 object .....16-17 
 
 Does not of itself express origin 
 
 or source 18 
 
 2. u. With thai and ytyvcaiai ; de- 
 
 scent, &o. ; the notion of de- 
 scent not expressed by the 
 genitive.....'. 18-19 
 
 i. With elvai ; ' it belongs to,' * is 
 the part, property, duty, &o. 
 of a person' 19-20 
 
 e. With eivai ; the person to whom 
 a thing is referred as a fa- 
 oulty or capacity 20 
 
 d. With that ; object to which 
 
 an action is referred as ap- 
 propriate to its characteV or 
 office 21-22 
 
 e. With eluat ; natural result, &o. 22 
 /. With thai and ylyvca^ai ; gives 
 
 the character of a personal 
 object by marking its cate- 
 gory 22-28 
 
 g. With clvai and yiyveadai ; and 
 with TiUlvai, Ti<j£<n>oi, iroi- 
 cidi^ai ; class or category 23 
 
 A. < Of the number of,' 'one of... ib. 
 
 i. With the superlative... 24 
 
 A:. Of the material ib. 
 
 I. Of price 25-27 
 
 3. a. Wilh verbs of motion. Does 
 
 not properly signify ' from' .. : 27 
 b. With ipx"v, ipxi^a^at, &e... 27-28 
 ■;. With adjectivea, nouns, and ad- 
 verbs expressing freedom, se- 
 paration, &o. ; e^Otfr/Hic, &c. 28 
 dljOf the period of time to which 
 
 an event is referred 28-29 
 
 Tii 
 
Till 
 
 TABLE OF, COin^NJIS. 
 
 '. Of deDominationa of time ; viw- 
 
 Tdr, 'by nigUt,' &c .\.*S^9 
 
 Diatinguiabed from tha loMti- , 
 
 Tua with ev 
 
 Diatinguiahed froni the local 
 
 81 
 
 *. 
 t. 
 
 4. a. 
 
 b. 
 
 C. 
 
 d. 
 
 DLitiiigulahed flruD) the aocuiMi' 
 tivi) 
 
 Of reliitive poaition ; aiuartpAf, 
 ie(ia(, &c , ib. 
 
 Attn Keia^ai, aitlx^tv ib. 
 
 In poetry, * iii,' ' ou,' &c 82 
 
 With advorba of place, di- 
 rection, tii:. ; I'vi)!', irov, oi, 
 &e. ; of time ; o^ii, &o 82-83 
 
 With KV, KoXuf, lx"v, ^KCIV, 
 
 aeia^ui, eivai 83 
 
 The ndvei'ba or, utuu, iroir, oit' 
 
 daftov, &c ib. 
 
 With prepositiooa 83-84 
 
 In exclamatioua 84 
 
 With in-omft6Cea&ai and iirit- 
 
 vi//«)f ;' after,' 'for' 84-36 
 
 With jitTlx'"', iitrtari /wt 86 
 
 With ^);iavH», rvyxovv, &o. ift. 
 With i^tyyavtiv, ^Imvciv, anrea- 
 ' Sat, Au/iftavcadai, ixcaiai, 
 
 &o 35-86 
 
 With poet. iiri/iaUa^ai, bpiyta- 
 i9<ii, intiytadiu, ofijiav, 6p/iaa- 
 
 ^aif i^ira^at 36-37 
 
 With Tofcbeiv, auniTil^eiv, &o 87 
 
 , With (ivruv, irtAdsfiv, &c...7T8i-88 
 , With n^i/^eiv, 7rAij/»i», &o. ; 
 
 yr/iciv, irAiof, irX^piK, &0 88 
 
 Witli iaOinv, ^yclv, &o ib. 
 
 Diatinguiahed from the accuas- 
 
 tive • 38—89 
 
 With Hciv, mlciv., 40 
 
 . With ttwMeiv, npmiviiv, im- 
 
 Xrio^ai ib. 
 
 With amdeiv, nmSivea^at, fiav- 
 
 ^metv, owihai, &0 41-42 
 
 I. With ipivctv, {(trdiitv, einelv ; 
 
 ■of,' 'about," concerning'... 42 
 .With Tiaae^ai, Tifiapela&at, n- 
 
 fujpeiv; 'for' 48 
 
 . With ahtairSai, itiauiv, &c. ; 
 
 'for,' 'on the charge of;' 
 
 ■ of,' • to,' the penalty 43-41 - 
 
 .^•p. With KvpuiitiVf Kotpdven', &o. ; ' 
 
 'of ^ 44-46 
 
 ;. With irpo(x€iv, nepiyiyvea^i, 
 irpureiiuVf ^rrao^ait Stc 46 
 
 r. With in/ivZ/aKtivi hiv^avca^ai, 
 
 eTTiiiv/ieiv, &o 40 
 
 Diatinguiahed from the aocuea- 
 titp 47 
 
 I. With lfiKtipo(, aveipoi, &c. ; 
 'in' i6. 
 
 (. With im^tpiiv, iiiijinpot, dXXof, 
 ivovriof, &o. J ' from,' ' to,' 
 &o t*. 
 
 u. With the comparative ; 'than'.. 48 
 With itirUatof, itirXovf, &o ib. 
 
 V. With iXSeiv, oi,i;vrii', iru}.c'iaSat 49 
 
 u>. Toil and the infinitive ; ' in or- 
 der to,' 'with a view to' ib. 
 
 X. With a partioiple ; called the 
 
 genitive abaolute 60-61- 
 
 Geoeriilview 62-63 
 
 II. or TUB DATIVE CA3S. 
 
 The dative proper acparatcd from 
 the inHtrumcntalla and the 
 
 locativua 68-J54 
 
 1 , Commonly uaed of a personal ob- 
 ject; 'for,' 'to' 64 
 
 ' a. With iMvai, aipaiptlaSai ib. 
 
 b. With ipiCnv, paxea^at, «'""'- 
 
 ffotfof, &c 65 
 
 e. With ovrov, inomiivai, eikciv; 
 
 and with like adjcctivce ib. 
 
 ,d. With apf/yeiv, aplnviv, &c 66 
 
 e. With irrta^ai, oKoAoinJti)', mt- 
 
 ^ea^ai •*• 
 
 With corrcaponding adjcotivos ' 
 
 and adverbs '&. 
 
 /. AVith KeXebetv, ivriUta^at, &o. 67 
 
 ^.With fei, XP*I : **• 
 
 A. With the verbal -Tfnf, -ria, 
 
 -rim •*■ 
 
 I. With irplveiv, app6TTUv, &o. ; 
 
 with eixrfy ior< i*. 
 
 ft. With iuolMyt'iv, inaivelv, pi/i- 
 
 '^adai, tie t 68 
 
 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 IZ 
 
 I" 
 
 t 
 
 I 
 
 
 >4 
 i. ' 
 
 rioi 
 
 I. With ividvfiv, &o 69 
 
 1)1. With i/u^iv, Koivoini^ to. ; and 
 with like adjeotivea and ad- * 
 
 verba.... ib. 
 
 n. In H tart ifoi Tivi ib. 
 
 0. With ioulvai, bpotoiv, &o. ; 
 and with like adjeotivoa and 
 
 adverba ib. 
 
 With aiiT^ in attraction ; ' to- 
 gether with,* .< and all' Cl-62 
 
 J). With x/>^<"l"V, ayadSs, &o., 
 ' and (jvai, yiyviadat ; dativut 
 
 eommodi 02 
 
 With a noun and tlvai, ytyvea- 
 
 iJai; 'to have' 63 
 
 2. Dative of the final objeot more 
 obaourely marked : 
 
 a. Of peraona ' before,' ' among,' 
 
 'in the case of,' whom an 
 
 action is performed 64-66 
 
 ft. Of the final object or end; 
 
 ' for,' ' to' 05-00 
 
 e. With a participle, as ^uvXo- 
 
 uivifif &c 06-08 
 
 d. Of a peraon, commonly with 
 
 <jf ; 'for,' 'in the case of... 08 
 
 e. With i(io(, alTU>(, &0 ib. 
 
 J. Moi, aoi; 'my,' 'your;' ' I pray 
 
 you,' &c 69 
 
 g. With the third poraon paaaive ib. 
 General view '. 09-70 
 
 III. or TUB ABI.ATIVK CAai. 
 
 Includes the locativua and inatru- 
 
 meutalis 71-72 
 
 a. Loeativui, 
 
 1. a. Of position in space ; ' at,' 
 
 ' 'on,"in' 71 
 
 b. Of the point of time ; ' at,' 
 
 'on,'&o 72 
 
 2. a. Of circumatance or condition 73-74 
 
 6. Of way or manner 74 
 
 e. In r^ bvrif &o ib. 
 
 3. Marka in what oaae a quality .or 
 
 state exists : 
 a. With the comparative ; mMj^ 
 
 • by much,' &o 76 
 
 vol 
 b. In other ezpressiona ; ' in,' 
 
 ' Ac i 76-76 
 
 4. With xpio^o't vofil^tiv. ', 76 
 
 f.Jfith ;|fal/>eiv, ^ito'Sai, &a. ; 'in,' 
 
 ' 'at,' 'with' 76-77 
 
 6. T^, ro(, and compounds of rof ... 78 
 
 Appendix to tht loeativui. 
 
 Ty, 'then,' • therefore;' form 79 
 
 Signification u a demonstrative.. 80-81 
 
 " " locativus •_ 81 
 
 To/:, etymology of I'i. 
 
 Origin of itf meanings; 'then,' 
 ■ accordingly then,' ' indeed ;' 
 « therefore ;' ' however,' ' yet 
 
 notwithstanding' 81-89 
 
 Summary and table 88-89 
 
 Olroj 90-92 
 
 MivTot 92-95 
 
 Ko(ro( 95-100 
 
 •Hto 100-101 
 
 •Hrip 101 
 
 'Hro( ib, 
 
 Totwv 102-104 
 
 T;ipa ;. 104-105 
 
 ToiyAp 105 
 
 ToiyiSpToi 106-107 
 
 Toiyopovv ,', 107 
 
 b. Initrumentttlii. 
 
 1. Means or instrument; 'by,' 
 
 'with' 78 
 
 With yiyvixKtiv, &o 78-79 
 
 2. Of the material 79 
 
 IT. or THl AOODBATITK CASK. 
 
 1. a. With verbs of motion ; object 
 
 reached 107-108 
 
 b. AVith verbs of action 109 
 
 2. a. Of weight and meaBure.«.109-l ID 
 
 noX(; TToUd, &0 110 
 
 b. Of the amount of time ; 
 
 ■during,' 'for* ib. 
 
 e. With verbs of motion ; object 
 to which the motion is con- 
 fined; ''as to,' 'as re- 
 
 • garda' 110-111 
 
 T^Taximiiv, &o ; 112 
 
lABIiB or COKTEHTS. 
 
 d. With ulo'Sai, m^ixu, ^6aaeiv, 
 
 xa0i(nv. > _.„..t. 118 
 
 (. With aOTpinrtiv, dtptttv, ^, ; , 
 
 describes the oharMter of 
 
 the Mtion _ 118-114 
 
 8. a. Of the period of time to which 
 
 ■n OTeot is referred 114-116 
 
 Th TkXo(, &c ib. 
 
 h. TTith intransitire Terbs ; of 
 
 iiDuns of the Bnme or like 
 
 signification _ 116 
 
 t. Of the object had in view ; 
 
 'for' 117-118 
 
 d,X&piv, Supcdv, fto 118 
 
 e. With Tcrbs intraositiTe ; as 
 
 ii^eXtiv, &o 119-120 
 
 /. With ritpyiTriv, &c 120 
 
 ff. With iilvctv, &c 121 
 
 A. With hiv9ivetv, &c ib. 
 
 i. With ^iSovciv, &c ib. 
 
 k. With aiaipc'urSai, &c 122 
 
 I. With <5fi, Xf>^ •*■ 
 
 m.With palvciv, &c ib. 
 
 n. With KpoTFiv, KpoToXi^etv, &c. 128 
 
 0. With xop^"", IMaauv 128-124 
 
 p. With i/ivbvai 124 
 
 q. With Tcrbs of the emotions ; 
 
 08 ^fleia^ai, to 124-126 
 
 With KSwTcirSai, &c 126 
 
 r. With neuter and paasiTO rerbs, 
 
 and with adjeotiTCS ; ' as to,' 
 
 'as regards,' 'in'.".. 126-126 
 
 With such Terbs and adjectives 
 
 haTing rif, irp^, nari added 126 
 
 1. 'AKfiipi, ipxi", Ac 127 
 
 t. ilvrlpa, Od. L 276 127-128 
 
 I 
 
 Double aeeiuativt. 
 
 4. a. Of the person, and of the 
 thing of the same or a like 
 
 idea with the Terb. 128-180 
 
 A. In noulv Ttva aya^d, &0 180 
 
 t. With irouiv, Tt^lvai, &c 181 
 
 d. With alrriv, aiTtia^at, &o 182 
 
 (. With 6i66aKtiv, avaiuim^autv, 
 
 &c ib. 
 
 /. With Twbi '(0 dividt,' 'dU- 
 
 risi 
 tri)>ate,' iiaaedat, xarovi- 
 
 fuiv 188-184 
 
 g. With a^pe'Mriat, aripeiv.. 184-185 
 k. With ii/>6irrciv, lab'Seiv, &c.... 186 
 i. With irei^tiv, tKorpivav, 
 
 &o 186-186 
 
 k. With Mieiv, Uiietv, &o 186 
 
 {. With aiTtiaiai 187-188 
 
 m. With irepiPaUa^at 188 
 
 fi. In the axvi"' "<"'' ^^■' "o' 
 
 /ilpot 189 
 
 Qeneralview 189-140 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 OP TBI SErlRAL rREPOSITIONS. 
 •Ajua. 
 
 Etymology of 142-144 
 
 Significations : 
 
 1. 'At the same time with' 144 
 
 2. 'With,' 'together with,' 'equally 
 
 with' 144-146 
 
 Summary 146 
 
 Ut* at an adverb, and with iti cote, 
 
 1. As an adverb 146 
 
 2. With the dative case 146-140 
 
 Table 146 
 
 •A/i#i. 
 
 Etymology of. 147 
 
 Significations : 
 
 1. 'On both sides' ib. 
 
 2. 'About,' 'around' ib. 
 
 3. * All about,' ' quite about,' ' quite' ib. 
 
 4. • About," near' ., 148 
 
 6. 'About,' 'of,' 'concerning' ib. 
 
 6. 'About,' 'for,' 'on account 
 
 of 148-149 • 
 
 Summary 149 
 
 With eatet of nouns. 
 
 I. WITH TBI QBMITIVB CASI, 
 
 1. 'About;' in a local sense 149 
 
 2. 'About,' 'concerning,' 'of 149-160 
 8. 'About; 'for' 160 
 
 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 U 
 
 n. WITH TBB DATIVI OASI. 
 
 1. 'About;' in a local sense 160 
 
 2. '4bout,' 'concerning,' 'of 161 
 
 8. 'About,' 'for,' 'on account of ib. 
 
 III. WITH THI INSTBCMKNTALIS. 
 
 'About' 162 
 
 IT. WITH THI ACCUSATIVI OASI. 
 
 1. 'About;' in a local sense.... 162-163 
 
 2. 'Of a person and his attend- 
 
 ants;' ol aiiil Sfpiea.. ..laa-Ui 
 
 8. 'About;' mctiiphorically 164 
 
 4. 'Concerning,' 'relating to' ib. 
 
 6. 'About;' of time, numbers, &o. ib. 
 Table 166 
 
 •Avi. 
 
 Etymology of 166 
 
 Significatioas : 
 
 1. 'Up' ib. 
 
 2. 'Back' 166-169 
 
 8. 'Again' 159-160 
 
 4. 'Out,' 'aloud' 160 
 
 With eaia of nount. 
 
 I. WITH Tin QENITITI CASI. 
 
 'Up (on)' 161 
 
 II. WITH Tin DATIVI (or THI LO- 
 CATIVUS !) 
 
 •Up (on)' 161-162 
 
 III. WITH Till ACCUSATIVI OASI. 
 
 1. II. 'Up to;' measure 162 
 
 b. 'Throughout,' 'all tbrough'l 62-68 
 e. 'During,' 'throughout;' of 
 
 time 168-164 
 
 d. 'Up to;' of numbers 164 
 
 e. 'Ava Kpdrof, ava plpof, Ao li. 
 
 /. 'Ava Uyov 164-166 
 
 g. 'Every,' 'each' 166-167 
 
 2. 'As to,' 'as regards' 167 
 
 Table 168 
 
 'Avcv. 
 
 Etymology of 168 
 
 Signifloations : 
 
 1. 'Without' 168 
 
 2. 'Away front,' 'apart from'..168-169 
 8. 'Except'.'. 169 
 
 With tht gmilivt eate. 
 
 'Without,' &o 169 
 
 Table ib. 
 
 •Avt(. 
 
 Etymology of. 170 
 
 Significations : 
 
 1. 'Over against,' 'opposite,' 'face 
 
 to face' 170-171 
 
 2. 'For:' 
 
 a. 'For;' of equivalent value.... 171 
 
 b. 'For,' 'in exchange for,' 'in 
 
 return for' ti. 
 
 e. 'For,' 'instead of 171-172 
 
 rf. 'For,' 'before,' 'in prefer- 
 ence to' 172 
 
 e. 'For,''why,"wherefore,'»on 
 
 account of ib. 
 
 f. ' By ;' in entreaties 173 
 
 Used with the genitive alone ib. 
 
 Table 174 
 
 'K-k6. 
 
 Etymology of 174 
 
 Significations : 
 
 1. 'Ofi',' 'away,' 'from' 174-175 
 
 2. 'From,' 'after,' 'since' 175-176 
 
 8. 'Back' 176 
 
 4. ' Different from,' ' at variance 
 
 i with,'&c 177 
 
 a. 'Un-,' 'without' li. 
 
 . b. • Beside,' • different from' 177-178 
 
 6. 'Quite,' 'entirely' 178 
 
 Summary ib. 
 
 With the genitivt eatet 
 
 1. ' From,' ' away from ;' with and 
 
 without motion 178-179 
 
 2. u. 'On,' 'in;' a^' Innov, &o. 179-180 
 *. 'From,' 'after,' 'since' 180 
 
 8. a, 6, i!, d. 'From,' <of,' 'on,' 
 
 Ao 180-182 
 
 I. 'On the quarter of,' 'on' 183 
 
xu 
 
 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 /. 'On the put of,' *80 f>r u 
 
 depends on,' &e 184-186 
 
 y. ' From,' ■ in consequenee of,' 
 
 'by reaaon of 186 
 
 *. ' From," 'by,' 'with' 185-186 
 
 i. 'From,' 'of;' of the material 186 
 Table _ 187 
 
 Ati. 
 
 Etymology of 187 
 
 8igni6cationB: 
 
 1. 'Between' 188 
 
 2. a. 'At successive interTals' ii. 
 
 b. 'In turn,' 'one by one;' dii- 
 
 tribution 16. 
 
 c. ' Apart,' &c. ; distinction, dif- 
 
 ference ib' 
 
 d. Superiority in comparison 188-180 
 c. Contrast, rivalry, enmity 189 
 
 8. 'Through' 189-190 
 
 4. a. ' I^ means of,' ' through the 
 
 agency of 190 
 
 b. ' Of,' ' (made) of ;' of the ma- 
 
 terial 191 
 
 e. 'For,' 'oD account of ii. 
 
 6. 'Through and tlirough,' 'quite,' 
 
 'utterly' ib. 
 
 Summary 192 
 
 I. WITH TUK QENITITI CASE. 
 
 1. o. 'Every ;• distributipn 192 
 
 4. ' At the interval of/ ' after,' 
 
 'every;' of time 192-198 
 
 2. 'In comparison of,' 'above' 194 
 
 8. 'Through:' a, of space; b, of 
 
 time 196 
 
 c. Marking the manner and cir- 
 
 cumstances of an action; 
 6ia ji&xvt fpX'<'^<"t &o ^BB 
 
 (f. Aia airmS^s irouiv, 81' oiidevdt 
 
 iTott'ia'Sai, &c 197 
 
 «. With ilvai and yiyvitriai ; itii 
 ^Spovtlvai 197-200 
 
 /. ' By means of,' ' by the agehcy 
 of,' 'through,' 'by reason 
 of 200-202 
 
 g. 'Of,' '(made) of;' of the ma- 
 terial 202 
 
 U. WITH THE ACC08ATIVE OASE. 
 
 1. d. 'Through;' of space 202-208 
 
 Distinguished from itij 
 'through,' with the geni- 
 tive 203-204 
 
 b. ' Through,' ■ throughout,' 
 
 'during;' of time 204-206 
 
 Two distinct meanings of iii, 
 ' through,' with the nccusa- 
 Uve 205-200 
 
 2. 'Through,' 'by means of'...207-2U8 
 8. ' On account of,' ' by rcasun of,' 
 
 'for' 208 
 
 Table 209 
 
 Eif. 
 
 Etymology of 209-210 
 
 Significations 210 
 
 With the acciaalive cait. 
 
 1.0. 'Into,' 'to' 211-212 
 
 'Among' 212-218 
 
 'Against' 213 
 
 b. ' Id ;' tit una liea^ai, &C...218-215 
 2. ' Up to,' ' as far as,' ■ to the 
 
 amount of,' * to the number 
 of,' 'for,' 'against,' 'un- 
 til' 215-217 
 
 a. Of Dumbur and amount gene- 
 rally; 'up to,' &c 216 
 
 ft. Of time ; ' up to the time of,' 
 
 'against,' 'until,' 'for' 210 
 
 Not to be rendered by 
 'about' 210-217 
 
 c. 'By — ;' distribution 217-218 
 
 Compared with the nccuna- 
 
 tive without cir 217 
 
 8. ' Of,' ' in regard to,' ' in the case 
 
 of,' 'against' 218 
 
 'On,' 'against' 219-220 
 
 'For;' object had in view; re 
 
 anit or effect 220-226 
 
 Tftbl 226 
 
 'E(£. 
 
 226 
 
 Etymology of 
 
 Significations : 
 1. 'Out,' 'without' 16. 
 
 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 XIU 
 
 2. 'Out of,' 'from out' 326-231 
 
 a With regard to space 227 
 
 ft. With regard to a class of ob- 
 jects it. 
 
 I,. 'Of,"from;' origin, &c... 227-228 
 
 d. 'From,' 'on,' 'in:' 
 
 a.) Of space, &c 228-229 
 
 p.) Of time 229 
 
 X.) Point of attachment H. 
 
 i.) 'On,' 'in;' cf apiarepaf, 
 
 Ac 229-230 
 
 e.) ' After,' * from,' ' in oonse- 
 
 qucDce of,' &c 230 
 
 e. 'Out and out,' 'utterly,' 
 
 'quite' 281 
 
 Summary ib. 
 
 With the genitive eate. 
 
 l.'Out,' 'without' 282 
 
 2. 'Out of," from out;' 'of,' 'by,' 
 &o. : 
 a. With regard to any object 233-284 
 ft. With regard to a class of ob- 
 jects 234-235 
 
 c. Origin, source, cause, &c 236 
 
 Agent, means, instrument 236 
 
 The material ib. 
 
 d. 'From (out of):' 
 
 Of space; 'from' 236-237 
 
 Of time; 'from,' 'in,' 'by;' 
 
 U vvKTif 237-238 
 
 Of the point of attachment; 
 
 'from' 240 
 
 Relative position; 'on,' 'iu;' 
 
 If a/wtrnyinc, &c 240-241 
 
 >. Of time; 'after' 241 
 
 Of any occasion ; ' after,' 
 
 'upon' 241-242 
 
 Of that upon which any thing 
 
 follows; 'from,' 'after' 242 
 
 Of cause, reason, &c. ; < from,' 
 
 'byreaBonof,''upon,' &0.242-48 
 Table 248 
 
 Ev. 
 
 Etymology of. 243 
 
 Significations : 
 «.'Iii,' 'within' 244 
 
 A. 'Among' 244 
 
 e. 'With;' instrument ift. 
 
 d. 'On,' 'at,' 'near' 244-248 
 
 With the loeativue. 
 
 a. Of space; 'in,"within' 248 
 
 ft. Of time; 'in,' 'within' 248-249 
 
 e. Of any object, of circumstances, 
 
 &c. ; 'in,' 'with' 249 
 
 (f. 'In the hands of,' 'depending 
 
 on' 249-260 
 
 «. Instrument; 'with,' 'by' 260 
 
 /. 'Bv Tdxa, 'swiftly,' &C.......26I-262 
 
 y. 'Among' 252 
 
 A. 'At,' 'on,' 'near' 262-253 
 
 I. 'In,' 'into' , 264-266 
 
 t. With the genitive, elliptically ; 
 
 eiv 'AUao 268 
 
 Table 267 
 
 'Evrni. 
 
 Etymology of. 267 
 
 Signification : 
 'Only,' 'merely,' 'especially' ift. 
 
 With the genitive ease. 
 o. 'Only,' 'merely,' 'especially 
 
 ... on account of 257-268 
 
 ft. ■ Merely ... in consequence of 268 
 e. 'Merely ... for the sake of... ift. 
 
 d. ' Only, merely ... as regards' 258-69 
 
 e. 'Only, merely. . . by means of 269 
 Table i*. 
 
 ■Eir(. 
 
 Etymology of 260 
 
 Significations : 
 1. ' On,' ' upon ;' in a local sense... ift. 
 'On,' 'upon;' metaphorically: 
 
 a. ' On,' ' depending upon' ib. 
 
 ft. 'At,' 'near,' 'by,' 'In,' 'in 
 
 the time of 200-261 
 
 e. 'On condition of,..., 261 
 
 d. 'For,' 'on acconnt of '....261-202 
 
 c. 'For;' object had in view 202 
 
 ' For ;' final personal object... ift. 
 /. Looking upon, with a direction 
 upon ; ' towards,' ' for,' 
 
zir TABLI 0? 
 
 •Kgaiost,' <to,' 'with » 
 ▼iew to' _ 268-266 
 
 2. 'Orer.' 
 
 8. Addition: a. Mn addition to,' 
 
 <bedd«s;' ft. <»fl«r' 266-266 
 
 Bummu'jr 266 
 
 I. WITB TBI OBBITIVn OASI. 
 
 1. 'On,' 'npon:' 
 
 a. Of apace; 'on,' 'npon' 266-267 
 
 ft. 'At,' 'near' 267-268 
 
 c. 'In;' relatiTO position, «ir- 
 
 eumstaDcei 268-269 
 
 ' On,' ' upon ;' iij,' bpan, &o. 269-70 
 
 rf. 'In thetimeof : 270 
 
 «. ' Towards,' • for,' (' upon' ) 270-27 1 
 
 /. ' At,' ' near,' (' towards') 272-273 
 
 'At,' 'before,' apud, coram 273-76 
 
 'By;* i^' lavrini 276-276 
 
 ' Of,' ' concerning,' ' about' 276-77 
 
 'Against,' 'at' 277 
 
 ' For,' ' to meet,' ' according 
 
 to' i». 
 
 •With respect to,' 'in,' 'in 
 the case of,' ■ upon,' ■ witli a 
 
 view to' 278 
 
 'On the ground of,' 'for the 
 reason,' 'in view of 279 
 
 2. 'Orer;' saperpoiition ib. 
 
 8. ' On,' ■ npon ;' anperaddition : 
 
 a. ' At a time,' ' — by —'....280-281 
 ft. 'After,' 'for,' 'fh)m':„...281-282 
 
 II. WITB THC DATITI CASI. 
 
 l.d. 'On,' 'upon' 282-288 
 
 A. 'On,' 'at,' 'near' ;...288-284 
 
 «. 'On,' 'at,' 'in* 284-286 
 
 if. ' Depending upon,' 'in the 
 
 power of 286-286 
 
 (. 'On condition' 266 
 
 /. 'For,' 'on account of,' 'up- 
 on' 286-287 
 
 g. 'For,' 'with a Tiew to*. ...287-288 
 A. 'For,' 'against;' tnal per- 
 sonal object. 288 
 
 u ' For,' ' so as to cause,' &c. ; 
 result or effect 2'J0-292 
 
 OONTBNTB. 
 
 2. 'OTor,' • hating charge of 298 
 
 8. a. 'In addition to,' 'besides,' 
 
 'with;' ft, 'after' 298-294 
 
 III. WITH TBI ACOOSATIVl OASS. 
 
 1, 'On,' 'upon:' 
 a. With motion ; ft. without mo- 
 tion 295-296 
 
 e. 'At,' 'on,' 'to;' inl rifv rpi- 
 
 irefov 290 
 
 2.0. 'To," at' 296-297 
 
 ft. ' To the extent of,' ' for'...298-299 . 
 
 'On,' 'upon,' 'by' 299 
 
 'For;' of time 299-300 
 
 c. 'Among' 800 
 
 d, ' As far as coucerus,' ' as re- 
 gards' 301 
 
 (, 'On,' 'upon;' tir' apiarrpi, 
 
 ke 801-808 
 
 /. 'Against' 303-304 
 
 g. 'For,' 'withariowto,' 'after;' 
 
 i^'vdup 804-307 
 
 A. 'For,' 'as regards' 806 
 
 Tab! 807 
 
 Karii. 
 
 Significations : 
 
 1. 'Down' .' 807 
 
 2. a. 'Down;' metaphorically 308 
 
 ft. 'Under' ift. 
 
 c. 'Back,' 'again' 308-809 
 
 if. 'Quite,' 'utterly' 809 
 
 c. 'Against,' 'at' 309-311 
 
 /. 'For,' 'after;' the object had 
 
 luTiew 311-812 
 
 Summary • 312 
 
 I. WITH TBB OINITITI 0A8I. 
 
 1. ' Down from,' ' down upon,' 
 
 'down in,' ' down under' 312-14 
 
 2. d. 'At;' To^cbtiv Kara okotoii 814-815 
 ft. ' Of,' ' concerning ;' Kot*' Mow, 
 
 xord iravrdc 316 
 
 e. 'Upon,' 'by' 816-816 
 
 J. 'Against' 816 
 
 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 Z7 
 
 HOI 
 U. WITB TBI AOOUSATITI OASI. 
 
 1. ' Down' 816-817 
 
 2. a. 'Throughout,' 'all through' 817-19 
 ft. 'At,' 'on,' 'by,' 'in;' «or' 
 
 olxov, &e 819-822 
 
 e. 'On,' 'in;' piUeiv rar' aa- 
 iri'dn, Kara y^ Kal Kara ^&- 
 
 iarrav, &o 822-826 
 
 i. 'By,' 'at a time' 325-330 
 
 Singular and plural distin- 
 guished; Kari ttiXiv, Kara 
 
 «6'Ui(, &o 829 
 
 Kara lUpof, ks 380 
 
 «. ' Up to,' 'as far as reaches;' 
 Kara Kpirof, &o. ri Kor* ip(, 
 
 ke 880-881 
 
 /. 'According to,' 'after,' 'oou- 
 furmably to,' 'like;' xora 
 ^{latv ; compare with ^ luirii 
 
 and acousatire 381-832 
 
 g. 'About,' 'near' 882-888 
 
 ft. ' At,' ' near ;' of places, &c. 383-334 
 
 i. 'In,' 'of the lime of 834-335 
 
 k. ' Against,' ' orer against,' 'op- 
 posite to' 886-887 
 
 I. 'For,' 'on,' 'upon,' 'after;' 
 
 object bad in view 837 
 
 m. 'For,' 'onaccouotof ;' ground, 
 
 motive 837-338 
 
 n. 'Relatiug to,' 'belonging to' 338 
 Table 339 
 
 Ucri. 
 
 Etymology of 839 
 
 Significations : 
 l.a.'In the midst,' 'amid,' 
 
 'among' tft. 
 
 ft, ' With ;' community ; distin- 
 guished from irdv 889-840 
 
 e. 'Between' 840-841 
 
 2. a. ' After ;' sequence 841-842 
 
 ft. ' After;' object had in view 342-344 
 
 e. Change, alteration 844-846 
 
 Summary 846 
 
 I. WITH TBI OIIIITITI OASI. 
 
 1. 'Among,' 'In tha midst of 846 
 
 2. 'With;' commanity 846-847 
 
 8. a. • Of the party of,' ' on the ride 
 
 of 847 
 
 ft. ' With ;' attendant circum- 
 stances ift. 
 
 e. ' With ;' accompanying means 
 or agent 847-848 
 
 d. 'With ;' in conformity with... 848 
 <. 'Against' ift. 
 
 II. WITB TBI DATITI OASI. 
 
 1. a. 'Among,' 'with;' of per- 
 
 sons 848-849 
 
 ft. 'Among,' 'between,' 'with;' 
 
 of things 849 
 
 2. 'After;' sequence. 849-860 
 
 III. WITH TBI ACOnSATIVI OASI, 
 
 1. 'Among;' a. with motion; ft. 
 
 without motion 861 
 
 c. 'Among;' with the superla- 
 
 tire 851-862 
 
 if. Mci>' ilplpav, iaterdiu 362-368 
 
 I. ' According to,' ' in conformity 
 
 with,"after' 858 
 
 /. <iro,' 'against' 853-364 
 
 2. a, ' After ;' the object had in 
 
 Tiew 856-867 
 
 ft. ' After ;' subsequent to ; ' with,' 
 
 ' among,' but < after' in point 
 
 of order ,..867-368 
 
 e, ' After ;' of a series of erents ; 
 
 /ura raira 358-369 
 
 if. 'After;' of a single event 359-860 
 t. 'After,' 'next after;' com- 
 monly with a BuperlatiTe 360-61 
 Table '. 862 
 
 •Oiriotff, 
 
 Etymology of 862 
 
 Significations : 
 
 1. 'Behind,' 'at the back' tft. 
 
 2. 'After,' 'in future,' •here- 
 after' 862-368 
 
 Used with the genitite case 368 
 
 Table ift. 
 
 Tlapi. 
 
 Etymology of 
 
 Significations: 
 
 868 
 
ZTl 
 
 lABLB or CONIBNTS. 
 
 1. a.' Alongside,' * beside,' ' by the 
 
 side of 863-3G4 
 
 b. 'Daring' 8C4 
 
 e. 'With,' 'at,' 'near' i'6. 
 
 'Among' ib. 
 
 d. 'To (alongside of)' 804-366 
 
 e. • From (alongside of)' 865-367 
 
 2. 'lake,' 'equiTalent to,' 'as 
 
 much as ;' comparison... 367-368 
 
 8. a. 'At or on one side of 868 
 
 6. 'Beyond,' 'by,' 'past' it. 
 
 ' Very' ib. 
 
 c. 'Besides' 869 
 
 d. 'Against,' 'contrary to'...869-370 
 c. 'Lacking,' 'wanting' 370 
 
 Summary ib. 
 
 I. WITH TUI ailllTlVI OASI. 
 
 1. 'By,' 'at,' 'near' 871 
 
 2. a. 'From' 871-374 
 
 b. 'By;' of the agent 374 
 
 II. WITH TBI DATITI CASE. 
 
 •Beside,' 'by,' 'near,' 'at,' 
 
 'with' 874-876 
 
 III. WITH THE ACCDSATIVl OABK. 
 
 1. a. * Alongside of,' ' beside ;' with- 
 
 out and with motion 376-376 
 
 b. 'Beside,' 'by,' 'near,' 'at' 876 
 
 e. 'With' 876-877 
 
 d. 'During (the time <Sf )' 877-878 
 
 «. 'On account of,' 'by reason 
 of,' 'conformably to'....878-379 
 
 /. 'To (beside)' 879-880 
 
 y. Comparison with • stand- 
 ard 880-881 
 
 a.) 'As muoh as,' 'as good 
 
 as,' 'as' 881-482 
 
 n^T}^ irapa nii/y^, ko.... 882 
 no(/ iva ylpovnt ml vta- 
 
 vitu • 882—883 
 
 Ilapa ^iTVO Tpirm 883 
 
 p.) 'Above,' 'more than'..883-884 
 
 2. 'At or on one side of;' not coin- 
 
 ciding with 884 
 
 a. 'At or on one side of,' 'by,' 
 'past' 384-385 
 
 b. a.) 'Beside,' 'except' 885 
 
 p.) ' Wanting,' ' lacking,' ' less 
 
 by,' 'within' 385-886 
 
 c. 'Beside,' 'beyond,' 'against,' 
 
 'contrary to' 886-887 
 
 Table 888 
 
 Etymology of. 405 
 
 Signification : 
 
 1. As a preposition with the geni- 
 
 tiTo; 'except' 405-406. 
 
 2. As an adTerb ; 'except' 406 
 
 nXiiv t'l. My, « fi^, iiTi, aXU, 
 
 baov •&• 
 
 np6. 
 
 Etymology of 407 
 
 Significations : 
 
 a. 'Before,' 'in front' ib. 
 
 b. • Forwards,' ' onwards' 407-408 
 
 c. 'Before," in advance of 408 
 
 ' Before ;' of time ; ir/)4 roOrov, 
 
 ITfA TOV »*- 
 
 d. ' Before," ' sooner than,' ' ra- 
 
 ther than' ib. 
 
 c. ' For,' ' in behalf of »». 
 
 /. 'For,' 'in the room of,' 'in- 
 stead of 408-409 
 
 g. ' For,' ' out of,' ' from ;' 
 
 ground, motive 400 
 
 Summary •*• 
 
 Yfith the genitive eate. 
 
 a. • Before,' ' in front of 409-410 
 
 b. 'Forwards,' 'onwards', 410 
 
 c. 'Before;' antecedence: a.) of 
 
 any abject; 0.) of time; 
 y.) 'before,' 'sooner than,' 
 'rather than' ib. 
 
 (1. 'For,' 'in behalf of 411 
 
 «. 'For,' 'in the room of,' 'in- 
 stead of «1 
 
 / ' For,' 'out of,' ' from ;' ground, 
 
 motive 411-412 
 
 Table "2 
 
 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 XVII 
 
 Etymology of. 418 
 
 Significations : 
 1. a. 'Before:' 
 b. 'By,' 'before;' in adjurations 414 
 e. 'Towards,' 'on the quarter 
 
 of ib. 
 
 'Against,' 'on the quarter 
 of 414-415 
 
 d. 'On or by the side of,' 'near' 416 
 
 e. ' On the side of;' of descent... ib. 
 
 f. • On the side of,' ' of the party 
 
 of 416-416 
 
 y. 'On the part of,' 'with,' 
 
 'among' 416 
 
 h. ' According to the customs, 
 
 &o. of 416-417 
 
 'Conformably to'.. 417 
 
 I. ' From,' • at the bands of,' 'by' i6. 
 2. 'Before,' 'with the face to- 
 wards' 418 
 
 d. 'At,' 'near' I'i. 
 
 b. 'At,' 'about;' of employ- 
 
 ments 418-419 
 
 e. 'To (before);' with verbs of 
 
 motion 419-420 
 
 d. 'Against' 420 
 
 ' With ;' uf mutual actions..., ib. 
 
 c. 'For," with a view to'.... 420-421 
 'For;' the end served 421 
 
 /. 'For,' 'in exchange for' ...421-422 
 g. 'In regard to,' •concerning'... 422 
 h. • By,' &o. ; np<){ (iiav, &C...422-428 
 i. ' In accordance with,' ' con- 
 formably to' 423 
 
 A. 'Compared with' ib. 
 
 8. 'Before,' 'forwards,' 'in ad- 
 vance' 423-424 
 
 0. 'On;' properly, 'forwards'... 424 
 b. ' In addition to,' ' besides' 424-426 
 
 Summary 426-427 
 
 I. WITH THI OBNITIVl OASI. 
 
 1. a. ' Before,' ' in the presence of;' 
 
 'by,' in adjurations 427 
 
 (.'Towards,' 'on the quarter 
 of,' 'on' 428-429 
 
 e. 'Towards,' 'on the side of,' 
 
 •against' 428 
 
 d. ' Towards,' ' on the side of,' 
 
 'near' 428-429 
 
 e. 'Towards,' 'in the eyes of... 429 
 /. 'On the side of;' of descent... ib. 
 g. < On the side of,' ' of the party 
 
 of 429-430 
 
 A. <0n the part of,' 'with,' 
 
 'among' 430-431 
 
 I. 'According to the character, 
 
 &o. of 481 
 
 Upus S'tKiK ib. 
 
 *. 'At the hands of,' 'from,' 
 
 •by' 432-433 
 
 II. WITH THE DATIVE CASE. 
 
 1. a. 'Before,' 'in front of,' 'in 
 
 presence of 483-434 
 
 *. 'At,' 'near' 484 
 
 c. ' At,' ' about ;' of employ- 
 ments 434-435 
 
 2.«. 'To' 435 
 
 b. 'To,' 'on,' 'against;' looking 
 
 towards 436-437 
 
 8. 'In addition to,' 'besides' 487 
 
 III. WITH TUE AOOUHATIVK CASE. 
 
 l.u. 'Before,' 'in the presence 
 
 of 437-438 
 
 'In the eyes of,' ' with' 438 
 
 6. 'Towards,' 'to' 438-440 
 
 ' By,' ' to ;' irput aiiXiv opxcia- 
 
 t»a(, &c 439 
 
 Tlp6^ Ttva elirclv, &c ib. 
 
 'For,' ■ towards,' erya, in 440 
 
 e. ' To ;' with verbs of motion 440-41 
 
 <f. 'Against' 441-442 
 
 e. 'At,' 'near;' in front of 442-448 
 ' Near,' ' towards ;' of time and 
 
 of numbers 443 
 
 /. 'With,' CUM ; oirovduf noulo^at 
 
 iti)6{ Tiva 443-444 
 
 ■ Having relation to,' ' that 
 
 concerns' 444 
 
 g. ' In regard to,' ' concerning ;' 
 
 wpit Tavra, &o 444-445 
 
 A. 'For,' 'with a view to' 445 
 
XVIll 
 
 TABLE OV C0MTBNT8. 
 
 t. ■ For ;' the •nd wrrad ; vpif 
 iliavtpi, &o 446 
 
 h. ' For,' ■ ia axohtng* for,' 
 •ogiunst,' 'with' 44ft-447 
 
 I 'In Mcordanee with,' 'm be- 
 comes,' 'foitably to' ....447-448 
 npAf piav, fto 448-449 
 
 m. ' In proportion to,* ' in com- 
 parison with' 449 
 
 Table 460 
 
 Etymology of 460 
 
 BignificBtion and use with the 
 genitive ease : 
 
 1. 'Before,' 'in front of:' o. of 
 
 space; 6. of time 450-461 
 
 2. 'Before,' 'in defence of 461 
 
 'For,' 'in behalf of ti. 
 
 £irv. 
 
 Etymology of. 461-462 
 
 Signification : 
 'Together with,' 'with' 462 
 
 With thi dative eau. 
 1. a. 'With,' 'together with' ...462-468 
 
 b. 'With,' 'against' 453 
 
 2. a. 'With the help of j' abv ie^, 
 
 &o 458-464 
 
 b. 'With ;' attendant quality, oir- 
 
 cumstancea, or condition... 464 
 e. 'With,' 'on the side of i*. 
 
 d. > With,' ' in accordance 
 
 with' 464-466 
 
 e. ' With ;' accompanying instru- 
 
 ment or means 466 
 
 Table 466 
 
 I. 'For,' 'because of,' 'on ao- 
 
 oount of,' 'in regard to' 469 
 
 4. a. 'OTor,' 'beyond' 469-460 
 
 i. ' Beyond,' ' contrary to,' 
 
 ' against' 460 
 
 Summary 460-461 
 
 I. WITH TUa OEMTIVK OASC. 
 
 1. ' Over,' ' above ;' in a local sense 461 
 
 2. a. ' For,' 'on behalf of 461-462 
 
 6. 'For,' 'insUad of 462 
 
 e. 'For,' 'to the end that;' with 
 
 Tov and the infinitive.... 462-468 
 
 d. 'Of,' 'concerning,' 'about' 463-64 
 
 e. ' For,' ' by reason of,' ' on ac- 
 count of,' 'in regard to' 464 
 
 II. WITH TBI ACCUSATIVE CASI. 
 
 1. 'Over,' 'above,' 'beyond:' 
 
 a. Of space, or of any object in 
 
 space 464-466 
 
 b. 'Of time and of numbers 466 
 
 e. ' Over,' ' beyond ;• generally... ib. 
 d. 'Beyond,' 'against' 466-466 
 
 Table 468 
 
 •r»<. 
 
 466 
 
 466 
 
 •Tvip. 
 
 Etymology of 
 
 Significations : 
 
 1. 'Over,' 'above' 466-467 
 
 2. a. 'For,' 'on behalf of 457 
 
 4. ' For.' 'to the end that'. ..467-468 
 t. 'For,' 'instead of 468 
 
 8.0. 'Of,' 'concerning,' 'about,' 
 
 Jt 468-469 
 
 Etymology of 
 
 Significations : 
 
 1. ' Under,' ' beneath ;' in a local 
 
 sense 466-467 
 
 2. a. ' Under;' in subjection to 467 
 
 b. ' Under ;' of circumstances or 
 
 condition ti. 
 
 e. ' Under,' ' for,' ' from,' ' by 
 
 reason of;' motive 467-468 
 
 d. ' By,' 'by means of;' agent 468-469 
 
 8. ' Under,' ' near,' ' not quite,' 
 
 ' about,' ' towards,' &c... 469-470 
 
 4. 'Secretly," imperceptibly," 'on- 
 ly a little at a time,' ' only 
 Utile by litUe' 470-471 
 
 Summary 471 
 
 I. WITH TBI aiNITIVE CASE. 
 
 1. o. ' Under,' ' beneath ;' in a local 
 
 sense 471-472 
 
 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 ZIX 
 
 rAoa 
 
 ». 'From under' 472-473 
 
 2. a. ' Under;' in subjection to 473 
 
 4. 'Under,' 'to,' 'in;' of cir- 
 
 cumstnnces or condition 473-474 
 e. 'Under,' 'for,' 'from,' 'out 
 of,' 'by reason of,' 'of,' 
 'through ;' iird X"!'^!! Ao.474-76 
 d. ' By,' ' by means of;' agent 476-78 
 
 II. WITH THE DATIVE CASE. 
 
 1. 'Under,' 'beneath;' in a local 
 
 sense 478-479 
 
 2. a. ' Under ;' in subjection to 479-480 
 b. 'Under;' of circumstances or 
 
 condition 480-481 
 
 e. 'By,' 'through,' 'by reason 
 of 481-482 
 
 III. WITH THE AOOUSAIIVE OASE. 
 
 1. 'Under,' 'beneath,' 'at the foot 
 
 of 482-483 
 
 2. a. 'Under,' ' under the power of 484 
 4. 'Before;' properly, 'under;' 
 
 imi iuuurriipiov 484-486 
 
 rAsa 
 e. 'Under,' 'under cover of;' 
 
 'behind' 485-486 
 
 d. ' Under ;' of circumstances Dr 
 
 condition 486 
 
 'Under direction, &o. of;' im' 
 
 mUv 486-487 
 
 I. 'Under cover of,' 'in;' of time 487 
 8. 'Near,' 'just before or after,' 
 
 'about,' 'towards' 487-489 
 
 'In a measure,' 'rather,' 
 
 'somewhat' 489 
 
 Table 490 
 
 •Of. 
 Accounted a preposition ; with the 
 
 accusative 490-491 
 
 Origin, meaning, and mode of in- 
 terpreting 491-492 
 
 With the partieiple 492-498 
 
 With the infinitive ; uf cin'»i<...493-497 
 
 With the superlative 497 
 
 With the accusative attended by 
 
 eif, titi, and npdf 497-498 
 
THE 
 
 GREEK PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 OF THE NATURE OF THB PREPOSITIONS, AND OF THE METHOD 
 OF INVESTIQATINQ THEIR BIONIFIOATION AND USE. 
 
 The various actions, motions, and states which may be 
 a£Srmed of an object require often to be qualified as to 
 their manner, extent, relative position, and direction with 
 regard to other objects. Thus, when it said of a house, 
 o7xoc, that it is built in the village, iv rfj xioft^g oixodofieTrai, 
 iv Ty "uifijj, 'in the village' is added to oixodofteirai, 'is 
 built,' by way of more definite qualification, to show the 
 position of the building relatively. When it is said of any 
 persons that ' they reached their destination quickly,' rdj^a 
 Aipixovro, the term ' quickly,' rd'j[a, is added to the action 
 contained in the expression 'they reached their destina- 
 tion,' dfixovro, to show the manner of their arriving. When 
 it is said, ' he built a house,' olxov <pxo36fi7}ae, the accusative 
 o7xov, in the Greek, is added to (fixodS/njae to set forth the 
 actual extent in which tho act of building is to be taken, 
 namely, 'as far as a house goes.' To certain of these added 
 qualifications of the actions, motions, and states expressed 
 by the verbs, the grammarians have agreed in giving the 
 name of adverbs, as indicating that they are attached to 
 verbs chiefly and quality them. They include, for the 
 Qreek language, in the class of adverbs, words that are 
 seemingly without inflection; as rd'^a, 'quickly,' mxu, 
 'swiftly,' d/jta^ri, 'without battle,' and that describe 
 the manner of the verb's action or motion with regard to 
 
 1 
 
2 THE a&IBE PREPOSITIOHS. 
 
 time, place, &c. Very many, however, of the words in 
 Qreek called adverbs are really cases of nouns ; as rd^a, ra^d, 
 wxu, d/ia^u; and the same is probably true of the rest. 
 But it is only important to the present purpose to observe 
 that the adverbs are in sense immediately attached to the 
 substantive idea of the verb ; that is, to its action, motion, 
 or state, qualifying it in regard to its manner, extent, time, 
 place, &c. 
 
 To certain other words, introduced likewise to qualify 
 the action, motion, or state expressed by verbs, the 
 grammarians give the name of prepositions, this name 
 being suggested by their ordinary position before the 
 nouns, which, with them, wait upon the verbs to qualify 
 their subatantive idea. Thus, ^c Tupov inXeuaa, *I sailed 
 into Tyre;' that is, 'I sailed in ... as regards Tyre;' 
 napa xbv noTuphv bSomopiav li:oit]ae, 'he made a journey 
 alongside ... as regards the river.' This class of words 
 also, and with more seeming propriety, though not, per- 
 haps, with sufficient reason, is regarded commonly as being 
 without inflection ; as, elc, irpic, iJte. For the rest, they 
 have a more arbitrary definition in the grammars, it being 
 difficult to separate the prepositions from the other words 
 in the language by applying the description given of them ; 
 namely, that they are without inflection, and stand before 
 nouns to aid in expressing the relations conveyed by the 
 cases. A more careful inspection of the list of words re- 
 ferred to this class, say in the Greek language, will show that 
 they too attend upon verbs to define their action, motion, 
 or state, and specifically by giving its direction and relative 
 position. Thus, in the phrase ^Xdev e/c rijv nSXiv, ' he came 
 into the city,' the action of ' coming' contained in ^Xdev is 
 qualified by e/c, 'in,' and shows that, with regard to the 
 city, the coming is *in,' 'within.' The noun that fol- 
 lows the verb in the proper case does likewise go to define 
 its action, motion, or state, by marking its extent, position, 
 final object, &c. ; but this does not alter the relation of the 
 preposition to the verb, nor show that the cases are 8U[iple- 
 mented by the prepositions. It only renders the qualifi- 
 cations attached to the verb more varied and complete. 
 
 METHOD OF THEIR INVESTIGATION. 
 
 3 
 
 Sometimes, also, the noun depends more immediately upon 
 the preposition itself rather than upon other words in the 
 sentence, marking the object afibcted by the proper sense 
 of the preposition, as in some cases of the use of ini, 
 auv, &c. 
 
 The prepositions, so regarded as has been just set forth, 
 are, in their general features, of the same nature with the 
 adverbs, and difl'cr from them in this alone, that, while 
 the adverb qualifies the action, motion, or state of the verb 
 as to its manner, extent, place, time, &c., generally, the 
 preposition denotes specifically its direction and relative 
 position. The prepositions and adverbs having so much 
 in common, it cannot be surprising that the same word 
 should sometimes be referred to both classes, and be called 
 a preposition or an adverb according to its present use or 
 to the view of the writer. At the same time, this absence 
 of entire distinctness in the classification is not a matter of 
 much moment, beyond the mere application of a name; 
 since the word, whether called a preposition or an adverb, 
 will be attached in sense to tVie substantive idea of the 
 verb; and, if a noun follow the verb, its case will be de- 
 termined in the same way, whether the particle qualifying 
 the verb be accounted a preposition or an adverb. And, 
 notwithstanding the occasional confusion in the use of the 
 terms adverb and preposition to which reference has just 
 been made, it is possible to distinguish a number of words 
 as having the character above attributed to the preposi- 
 tions, and to agree upon a list for the Greek language 
 which, with few exceptions, all will admit. The following 
 enumeration admits a few, the claims of which to a place 
 among the .prepositions may be questioned, but which 
 could hardly be omitted in a discussion of the preposi- 
 tions without needlessly encountering commonly-received 
 opinions; as, dveu, ivexa, nXijv, and (i>c. "^/m, dfupi, dud, 
 dveu ?, dvTi, dito, did, etc, ix, iv, ivexa ?, ini, xavd, /isTd, oneaOev, 
 napd, Ttepi, nX^jvl, npo, npo;, jtpotrdev, auv and fuv, Imip, Cnto, 
 
 This, then, being the nature and office of the preposi- 
 tions, to mark the direction and relative position of the 
 
4 TUB QBBKK PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 action, motion, or other substantive idea expressed by the 
 verb; and considering the almost endless modifications 
 which the action or other substantive idea of the verb may 
 undergo in regard to these particulars of direction and re- 
 lative position ; it is manifest that the words which in any 
 language are destined to express these must constitute a 
 very important part of its means of distinct representation. 
 If it be added that of the Greek prepositions some, in 
 virtue of their own signification of 'upon,' 'under,' 
 ' about,' • with,' iTii, Imi, dfifi, aw, may have nouns imme- 
 diately depending upon them, being added to mark the 
 objects affected by the sense which they express; just as 
 other words, as taoi, 'equal,' Sftoio^^ 'like,' are followed 
 by nouns in the proper case to express the objects affected 
 by the notions of equality, likeness, &c., conveyed by 
 thcra; it will appear yet more evidently that these words 
 have a just claim to a large share of attention in the study 
 of the language. 
 
 The same considerations would of themselves suggest 
 also the difiUculty likely to attend the investigation of the 
 meaning of these particles, and of the proper interpreta- 
 tion of their uses. But they do not reveal the whole of it: 
 and it may be worth while to consider more nearly the 
 elements that enter into a question concerning the signifi- 
 cation and use of a preposition with the case of a noun 
 following. 
 
 First, the propcF-^r primaiy signification of the preposi- 
 tion itself is to be ascertained, and then its secondary or 
 derivative significations; for it will be found upon examina- 
 tion that the preposition, with the same case even, appears 
 at one time in one signification and at another time in an- 
 other. Thus, ijti with the dative signifies 'on,' 'upon;' 
 as, ini rote Sptoi, ' on the mountains,' if' irmip, ' on horse- 
 back ;' but it has also, with the same case, the meaning of 
 'for,' 'on the ground of;' as, iif 'd/>erj ircalveTat, 'ho is 
 commended for, on the ground of, his virtue;' napd with 
 the accusative signifies 'alongside of;' as, najia rbv nora- 
 ftitv, 'along the river;' but it also means 'against,' 
 ' contrary to ;' as, ffo/u' iinida, ' contrary to expectation.' 
 
 METnOD OF THEIR INVESTIOATION. 
 
 And, generally, the merely sensible and local meaning may 
 become more or less changed by its metaphorical applica- 
 tion. Thus, £m6 signifies 'under' in a local sense, and 
 nefii, 'around;' but the former obtains the sense of 'under 
 subjection to,' and the latter that of 'about,' with the 
 idea of a loose computation ; as, nepi pupiooz, ' about ten 
 thousand;' and of 'concerning;' aB, lij-etv ntp\ toutwv, 'to 
 speak about, concerning, these things.' 
 
 Secondly, connecting, as they do, the action, motion, or 
 state contained in the verb with the different cases of 
 nouns, according to the peculiar relations in which the 
 nouns stand to the substantive idea of the verb, it can 
 hardly fail to happen that the prepositions will be appa- 
 rently affected in their meaning, and really altered in their 
 rendering into English, by the conjunction. Thus, xatd 
 with the genitive case is translated either 'down upon' 
 or ' down from,' according to the circumstances in which 
 it is employed; but with the accusative case it has, ap- 
 parently at least, and so as to require explanation, the 
 sense of 'according to,' and 'by the measure of;' e.g. 
 xar' Ouiuftnoto xapi^vtov, ' down from the heights of Olym- 
 pus,' xara rouf fS/woi, 'according to the laws,' xara tpuXa, 
 ' by tribes,' where the difference is owing, however, not 
 to any change in the meaning of the preposition, but to 
 the predominant influence of the case. 
 
 Accordingly, it is requisite to a proper interpretation of 
 the prepositions as used in connection with the cases of 
 nouns to mark the exact sense of the cases also, and to 
 distinguish not only which one of the several meanings 
 of the preposition is involved, but which also of the sig- 
 nifications of the case. Thus, for example, to determine 
 what is the proper interpretation of the expression Trap' 
 ilniSa; 'contrary to expectation,' it must be noted which 
 of the significations of i:apd is present, and, further, which 
 of the significations of the accusative case. If napd signify 
 ' alongside of,' and nothing more, and the accusative case 
 mai'k only the extent of an action, then the phrase is be- 
 yond solution; for these two notions, however combined, 
 can never give the sense of 'contrary to' expectation. 
 
6 THB OBEEK PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Nor will it answer the ends of a scientific inquiry to say 
 at once, cutting the knot, that itapd signifies both ' along- 
 side of and 'contrary to;' for this is to give, without 
 explanation, two seemingly opposite meanings to the same 
 preposition. Here the problem becomes complicated and 
 difficult, as may be seen, if no other proof offer itself, in 
 the total failure of the grammars and lexicons to explain 
 such phenomena so often occurring in the use of the pre- 
 positions. 
 
 Again, the difficulty of interpreting the use of the pre- 
 positions does not end here. It will sometimes be found 
 that, after the various significations of the preposition and 
 of the case have been carefully determined and all their 
 possible combinations examined, the just interpretation of 
 the preposition as used with the case eludes the search, 
 and the question seems to admit of no solution. When 
 found, as it may yet be by close and patient attention, it 
 will be detected by searching narrowly into the mutual 
 relations in which the parties to the action of the verb 
 which the preposition qualifies stand to each other and to 
 this action. Thus, what possible combination of any one 
 of the significations of /aerrf, and of any one of those of the 
 accusative case, can afford even a plausible explanation of 
 the use of this preposition with the accusative in the sense 
 of 'after'? If the grammars and lexicons be consulted, 
 they ^ve no answer, contenting themselves with assorting, 
 what, in any strict -sense, is not true, that lurd signifies 
 'after,' or render one that is, to say the least, unintelligi- 
 ble. Yet, as will be seen in the proper place, if, together 
 with the appropriate sense of the preposition and of the 
 case, the relations which the parties to the action have to 
 each other and to the action be considered, nothing can be 
 simpler nor more certain than the explanation of this phe- 
 nomenon that may be given consistently with the usual 
 meaning of both fttzd and the accusative. 
 
 Considering, then, all these sources of difficulty in the 
 interpretation of the use of the prepositions as they stand 
 connected with the cases of nouns, it would be surprising 
 if it were found less perplexing than it is. It is rather a 
 
 METHOD OP TUEIR INVESTIGATION. 
 
 proof of the remarkable accuracy and perspicacity of the 
 Qreek mind, as preserved in the language, that, amid all 
 the changes of meaning which the prepositions have under- 
 gone by daily use, there remain perhaps no examples in 
 which these particles admit not of a satisfactory explana- 
 tion by the application of proper methods. 
 
 In seeking to determine the proper or primary significa- 
 twn of a preposition itself, it is necessary to gather up its 
 various meanings, not only in all its uses with and with- 
 out cases of nouns, but also as it occurs in' composition, as 
 with verbs, nouns, adjectives, &c., and in its derivatives, 
 if it have any ; and then, by a careful comparison of all 
 these, separating what properly belongs to the preposition 
 and what to the case or to the other member of the com- 
 pound or derivative, to endeavor to arrive at the simple 
 and primary notion of the preposition. This may be 
 recognised by more marks than one, chiefly by its being 
 a sense to which all the rest may bo referred as deriva- 
 tives; or, what it is more proper to say in this view, a 
 sense which is obtained by finding that in which all the 
 others essentially agree, and which, therefore, enters into 
 them all, and is characteristic of them all. Commonly, this 
 meaning will be the expression of sensible or local direc- 
 tion or position, and will relate to material objects. Thus, 
 /iertt, which has a variety of seemingly very different nican- 
 iiigs, 'among,' 'with,' 'after' in two senses, will be found, 
 by such a course of investigation, to have one meaning, that 
 of ' amid,' that enters as the chief element into all the 
 rest, and gives them their characteristic sense ; a meaning 
 that is as truly present in fiizd, 'after,' as in /ierrf, 'with,' 
 'among.' It was purposely said that, in seeking to deter- 
 mine the proper meaning of a preposition, its use in com- 
 pound and derivative words, and where it stands without a 
 case, must be studied, as well as its use with cases ; for it 
 will be found that, in these latter circumstances, the pre- 
 position is retained in its original sense, or in one little 
 removed from this, even more frequently than when occur- 
 ring in connection with the cases. The reason of this is 
 obvious. On the one hand, it is not complicated with the 
 
8 THI QBEEK FBBPOSITIONS. 
 
 meaning of the case, and may be more easily separated 
 from what is foreign to it; and, on the other hand, by 
 being united in k compound of larger import, or augmented 
 by derivative syllables, it has often escaped the changes of 
 signification to which otherwise, and standing apart, it 
 would have been exposed; just as the fragments of ancient 
 art have sometimes owed their preservation to their having 
 been built into some strong wall. Accordingly, the com- 
 pound and derivative words of which the prepositions form 
 a part, and the Examples in which these particles are used 
 adverbially, as it is expressed, that is, without cases of 
 nouns, may be studied with very great advantage, as being 
 likely to furnish the primary signification of the preposi- 
 tion, when it would not be seen, or seen less distinctly, in 
 connection with the cases; or as aiding, at least, by the 
 additional light which they afford, in deciding what is the 
 true primary sense. Thus, in the case of d/npi, that its 
 primary signification is • on both sides' may be pretty well 
 determined by its meaning as it occurs in difupidiSioz and 
 other compounds, when it would be rather difficult to 
 ascertain it from its use with the cases of nouns ; and in 
 regard to Std, ini, Ac, what is seen to be their primary 
 signification from considering their use with the cases is 
 abundantly confirmed by observing their obvious force in 
 many compounds. It is because of the more common 
 occurrence of the -adverbial use of the prepositions in 
 Homer that the 'Iliad' and 'Odyssey' are so valuable a 
 help in searching for the primary meanings of the pre- 
 positions. 
 
 Besides the means afforded by the records of the Greek 
 language itself for ascertaining the primary signification 
 of its prepositions, another of considerable value is to be 
 found in the prepositions, and other words of the same 
 origin, met with in kindred languages. Thus, the proper 
 meaning of find is more readily determined by comparing 
 it, not only with the Greek /jiiaoz, hut with the Latin 
 medius, the German mil, and the English mid, &c. It 
 should be remembered, however, that this auxiliary can be 
 of real service in so far only as the related forms in other 
 
 METHOD OF TUEIR INVESTIGATION. 
 
 languages exhibit at the same time kindred meanings, so 
 as to add to our knowledge of the signification of the word 
 under investigation. This it may do sometimes by afford- 
 ing additional illustrations of meanings already ascertained, 
 and supplying a wanting link to connect significations that 
 would otherwise appear to be too widely separated to have a 
 common origin ; and sometimes by furnishing the primary 
 sense, which could else be hardly so'much as divined. The 
 common sense of 'to desire' belonging to the Greek 
 iplyeoOat, and that of ' king' and ' king'dom' belonging 
 to the Latin rex and regnum, could hardly be connected 
 together, notwithstanding the acknowledgment of a com- 
 mon origin in the radical reg, without the signification of 
 stretching out in a straight line, and hence of a straight 
 line, or being in a straight line, furnished by the English 
 reach. The mere fact of words occurring in different 
 languages, that belong maybe to regions widely removed 
 from each other, is both curious, and, for certain purposes 
 in etymology, highly useful to observe ; but, in such an in- 
 vestigation as is here under consideration, little is gained 
 unless the comparative etymology yield something more, 
 and unless, by showing that the same radical has like or 
 related additional meanings, it bring the object of inquiry 
 more clearly iiiio view, and reveal it under new aspects. 
 Whether the fault lie in the actual incapacity of compara- 
 tive etymology to aid efficiently and in largo measure in 
 the interpretation of the signification and use of the Greek 
 prepositions, or in the fact that the etymologists have too 
 much contented themselves with searching into the mere 
 correspondence of form, and attended too little to the like- 
 ness in signification and use, it must be admitted that this 
 science has made but small contributions comparatively to 
 the better apprehension of the doctrine of the Greek pre- 
 positions. This may be taken for granted: that ho who 
 aims at gaining a distinct notion of the proper sense of 
 these words, and at finding a right interpretation of their 
 uses, cannot dispense with the strictest scrutiny of the 
 actual phenomena of the Greek language itself, relying 
 upon what kindred languages may furnish only so far aa 
 
10 
 
 THB QBEBK PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 they contribute concurring facta both of form and of signi- 
 fication. 
 
 In arranging the secondary meanings of the prepositions, 
 no less than in determining the primary sense of each, 
 much care is of course demanded in order that each sig- 
 nification may hold its appropriate place. The import- 
 ance of a just arrangement of the primary and secondary 
 meanings of the prepositions can hardly fail to be seen, 
 if it be considered how almost countless in variety are in 
 some instances the uses of these words, and how indis- 
 .pensable to a right understanding of these is a natural and 
 orderly disposition of the moauings which they bear ; and, 
 further, how groat a relief to the memory of the student it 
 must be, as well as an indispensable aid to a proper appre- 
 hension of the relations which one signification has to 
 another, to afford him the opportunity of seeing the several 
 meanings of a preposition set forth in such order that the 
 mind may pass from one to another naturally and with 
 comparatively little effort. Add to this, that in nothing is 
 the study of language more beneficial as a discipline of the 
 mind than in training the learner to trace the often delicate 
 connections which bind together the different significa- 
 tions of words. It may perhaps be permitted to say that, 
 in this particular of the just arrangement of the meanings 
 of the prepositions, there is much to be desired in even the 
 larger grammars and lexicons. Such, in too large propor- 
 tion, is the arrangement they give, that not only is that 
 sometimes set down as primary which is really secondary, 
 but, not uncommonly, meanings are made to follow each 
 other that do not naturally stand in this connection, while 
 others are placed widely asunder between which there 
 exists the closest affinity. As a consequence, the student 
 labors in vain to take in a complete and satisfactory view 
 of all the uses of those prepositions that are most multi- 
 form in their applications, of most constant recurrence, 
 and most important to be understood. To remove this 
 defect, in some measure at least, if not completely, much 
 labor has been bestowed in this treatise. Taking the pre- 
 position apart from any influence of the case, its meanings 
 
 METHOD OF THEIR INVESTIGATION. 
 
 11 
 
 have been set down, as nearly as it could be determined, 
 in their logical sequence. And that this might the better 
 be ascertained, the investigation, in every case, was begun 
 by collecting together as complete a list as could be made, 
 /with the means at command, of all the important and 
 characteristic uses of the preposition. Having, by a dili- 
 gent conijmrison of these, with thQ aid of whatever light 
 could be derived from auxiliary sources, determined the 
 primary sense, the other and Bec6ndary meanings were set 
 down, as nearly as might be, in the order in which they 
 appeared to be related to the primary sense and to each 
 other. Wlien two meanings seemed to be parallel, they 
 were placed immediately one after the other, but with 
 some suitable recognition of their equal proximity to the 
 primary sense. It may be added that, when once this 
 order was determined, it was of course followed in the 
 after-explanation of the uses of the preposition with cases. 
 If this method shall have failed in securing entire accuracy 
 in the arrangement of the meanings of each preposition, the 
 want of success, it will be agreed, should be attributed to 
 want of skill in applying it, and not to any defect in the 
 method itself. 
 
 To overcome the difficulty arising from the complication 
 of the meaning of the preposition with that of the case 
 with which it is brought into connection, it is requiHite, after 
 ascertaining the meanings of the preposition apart from 
 the cases, to mark also the significations of the cases, in 
 order that, when the two are brought together, the exact 
 force of each may be measured. Without this, indeed, it 
 is not rensonahlc to expect that it can be explained what 
 part each contributes to the sense which sometimes results 
 from the two combined, nor how this has arisen. It has 
 been necessary, accordingly, to bestow all possible care to 
 ascertain the true signification of the cases, that it may be 
 separated by the mind from the complex meaning wliich 
 has arisen from the combination of the notion of the pre- 
 position with that of the case, and that so it may be made 
 possible to account for the origin of this complex sense. 
 By adopting this method, and by impartially assigning to 
 
12 
 
 THE OBIBK PKIPOSITIONS. 
 
 METHOD OF THEIR INVESTIQATION. 
 
 13 
 
 the prepoBition and to the case each its own value, many 
 uses of the preposition, it is believed, admit of a satisfactory 
 explanation that would otherwise remain enigmas too per- 
 plexing to solve. Among the instances more especially 
 requiring this method of proceeding may bo mentioned 
 those in which the sense of the case cither largely or wholly 
 predominates, leaving to the preposition hardly any other 
 office than that of marking, in a very general way, the direc- 
 tion or relative position which an action or motion originally 
 had with regard to the object introduced by the case, but 
 which has been lost sight of through the prevalence of the 
 meaning of the case. Thus, in the example of dvd and xard 
 used with the accusative case to mark distribution according 
 to a standard of measure, the accusative case became so far 
 predominant that the two prepositions came to be used in- 
 diflercntly, and this though they arc properly of opposite 
 significations, and though neither contains the idea of dis- 
 tribution, any more than that of a standard of measure. 
 
 It may not be improper to add, that to be able to assign 
 right values to the cases as found in connection with the 
 prepositions, it is necessary to bear in mind continually 
 that, besides their office of qualifying the ideas conveyed by 
 nouns, adjectives, &c., the cases are to be considered as 
 introduced, very commonly at least, to define the sense of 
 the action, motion, or other substantive idea of the verb 
 or verbal upon which the preposition also attends ; and this 
 sometimes without, but oftener with, regard to the qtialifi- 
 cation which it has already received from the preposition. 
 Thus, for example, in the phrase e/c ttjv noXcv JiWev, 'he 
 came into the city,' nbXivia to be regarded as defining more 
 exactly the notion of 'coming' contained in fiW^v, 'he 
 came,' or, perhaps more accurately, the sense of ' coming 
 in or within* expressed by ^Xdtv as qualified by e«c ; for the 
 meaning of this example is, 'he came in or within ... as 
 regards the city.' Yet it must be equally borne in mind 
 that there are instances in which the case is employed to 
 mark an object affected by the peculiar sense of the prepo- 
 Bition itaelf. This will be seen in some examples of the use 
 of ini and auv with the dative. It is in such cases alone 
 
 : 
 
 I 
 
 ; 
 
 that it may be allowable to say that the case depends upon, 
 or, as it is sometimes expressed, is governed by, the prepo- 
 sition. 
 
 Lastly, reference must be made to the method used in this 
 treatise of dealing with a peculiar difficulty, above alluded 
 to as attending the interpretation of some examples of pre- 
 positions with cases ; examples, namely, in which no satis- 
 factory explanation of the sense in which the preposition is 
 used with the case could be given by the application of all 
 the means hitherto enumerated. As, for instance, repeating 
 an illustration before employed, in the use of furd with the 
 accusative and dative in the sense of 'after.' Here, neither 
 the preposition nor the case supplying the sense of ' after,' 
 and it being afforded by no conceivable combination of the 
 two, some other and adequate source of it must be found, 
 or the interpretation must be abandoned as beyond reach. 
 It seemed probable that, in such cases, some aid towards 
 the solution of the question might be found by carefully 
 examining the history of the circumstances in which these 
 very peculiar meanings of prepositions occur; to sec, namely, 
 if the nature of the action contained in the verb, and its re- 
 lations to the object attending it and introduced by the case, 
 or the relations of the subject of the verb to its object, 
 might not furnish the interpretation of the apparently 
 anomalous sense borne by the preposition. That such an 
 examination might possibly prove useful in regard to 
 obscurer cases also seemed to be rendered probable by the 
 fact that, in some instances belonging to this class, this pro- 
 ceeding was palpably available and almost forced upon the 
 inquirer. Thus, np6z signifying ' before,' and liaving with 
 the accusative the meaning of 'to,' in a qualified sense, 
 comes to signify 'against,' whenever the subject of the 
 verb's affirmation and the object of its action stand in the 
 relation of enmity ; and so of rcapd, e/c, and ii:l. And if, in 
 cases like this, the preposition zpiz obtained an entirely 
 new sense, one in no wise involved in either the preposition 
 or the case, nor in any combination of the two, why might 
 not ptrd have obtained the sense of ' after' from something 
 to be found in the peculiar circumstances in which this 
 
14 
 
 THE aSBBE PBBP08ITI0NB. 
 
 meaning occurs? Upon trial, the result answered to the 
 reasonable conjecture, and /terd, for example, was found to 
 have obtained the meaning of ' after' from the natural and 
 obvious relations which the subject of the proposition in 
 which it stood held to the object pointed to by /isrd. And 
 thus vanished at once the only remaining, and seemingly 
 insurmountable, obstacle in the way of a consistent theory 
 of the prepositions of the Greek language. 
 
 The proper meaning of the cases with which prepositions 
 are used being necessary to be known, according to the pre- 
 ceding views, in order to the satisfactory interpretation of 
 the signification and use of the prepositions, the ensuing 
 chapter will be devoted to a detailed examination of these 
 cases, with a view to determine their exact meanings, both 
 primary and secondary. 
 
 s» 
 
 QENIIIVJS CASE. 
 
 15 
 
 CHAPTER IL 
 
 OF THE 8IGMIFI0ATION OF THE CASES* WITH WHICH PRBFOBI- 
 TIOMS ARE USED. 
 
 I. or TUE QENITIVK CASI. 
 
 1. The simplest case, apparently at least, of the use of 
 the genitive in Greek is that in which, corresponding to 
 the English 'of,' it is employed to qualify the meaning of 
 a preceding noun,, and to show in what more definite sense 
 it is to be taken ; e.g. rd tou diudpou tpuXXa, ' the leaves of 
 the tree.' The term tpuXXa, if left unqualified, may be 
 understood of all possible kinds of leaves; but, so soon as 
 rou Si^dfiou is added, it is restricted to a particular kind, 
 that of the tree. And so in Xen. Anab. I. i. 1, dndmreus 
 TehuTTjv TOU ^iou, ' he was apprehending an end of his life,' 
 the word rehuri^u is limited by the addition of tou fieou to a 
 specific object, bo as to mean not any end indifl'ereutly, but 
 definitely an end of hia life. The genitive, it is true, does 
 not here express, as in the case of tou divdpou, a particular 
 variety of the object qualified, but the specific thing with 
 reference to which it is to be understood, the different 
 character of the qualification which the genitive introduces 
 depending upon the different nature of the noun which it 
 adds. Again, in the phrase ra t&v Avdimnmv nptlj-fiaTa, 
 'the affairs of men,' the expression r« nfidj-fMra, if left 
 unqualified, may include all possible affairs, as those of the 
 state, of the king, &c. ; but, when rtSv AvOpumtov is added, 
 it is restricted to one of its many possible applications, the 
 affairs, namely, of men. In such cases, then, as the above, 
 the genitive names an object to which the term which it 
 qualifies is to be restricted in its sense, so as to refer to 
 it exclusively, and thus to be distinguished from all other 
 possible varieties and aspects of the same term. And the 
 
16 
 
 BIOHIFKUXIDM Oft IBM OASBS. 
 
 nature of the. qualification made by the genitive, whether 
 it shall mark A partionla* varietTf of the term which it de- 
 fines, or some other natural restriction, will depend upon 
 the nature of the noun introduced by this case. 
 
 It is important to observe, in order that, when the geni- 
 tive is spoken of as limiting a term in its meaning by re- 
 stricting it to its relations with a specific object, it may not 
 be confounded with the accusative case, which also is used 
 to set bounds to a preceding action or statement, that the 
 limitation marked by the genitive is not one of measure or 
 extent, but consists merely in noting the object to wliich 
 the term defined is to be referred for a more exact determi- 
 nation of its meaning. The accusative marks how far an 
 action, motion, or statement goes, what point it reaches, 
 what object it comprehends, or as to which it is atiirmcd, 
 and so is, in various ways, the measure of its extent ; the 
 genitive introduces the specific object among many pos- 
 sible objects to which a preceding term, whether it be the 
 name of an object, or of a quality, state, or any other sub- 
 stantive idea, is to be confined, so as to distinguish it from 
 the same term as related to other objects, and hence to 
 give it a specific character and relation. 
 
 Again, it should be observed that the noun in the geni- 
 tive case added to a term by way of more exact specifica-' 
 tion of its actual character and relation must needs have 
 some obvious point of affinity with the term defined. Thus, 
 there is a natural relationship between the terms ^Ma and 
 roS divdpou, such that the former may properly be referred 
 for its specification to the latter ; and so between ra npij- 
 fiaza and raiv . dvOptimatv, between releurrju and ro5 filoo. 
 And, although the same thing may be said in some sense 
 of the relation between- the accusative and the action, 
 motion, &c. which it measures, it is. by no means true in 
 the same way, nor to the same extent. 
 
 It may be added here, as belonging to the interpretation 
 of the particular use of the genitive under consideration, 
 that the distinction between the genitive of the subject and 
 the genitive of the object, or what is sometimes called the 
 Bubjective and the objective genitive, does'not result, pro* 
 
 GENITIVE CASE. 
 
 IT 
 
 \ 
 
 perly speaking, from any thing different in the nature of 
 the genitive itself in the two cases, but from the obvious 
 relations in which, by the circumstances, the genitive and 
 the noun which it qualifies are made to stand to each other. 
 The genitive marks only that the two terms have the re- 
 lation of the thing qualified and of the object by which 
 it is specifically characterized, and thus shows that they 
 have different relations ; but it goes fio further, and does 
 not express whether the object which it introduces is the 
 subject of any influence residing in the substantive idea 
 conveyed by the term which it qualifies, or an object from 
 which such influence proceeds. Thus, in the phrase, 
 Eurip, Androm. 1060, fuvatxix; alxftaXtorldoc <p6^o(:, ' the fear 
 of a captive woman," that is, 'the fear entertained of a 
 captive woman,' the genitive ptvauxhz alxi^aXioudoz simply 
 qualifies tpi^oz by marking the object to which it is to be 
 referred, and thereby restricted in its acceptation, by which 
 it is to be characterized, excluding every other relation of 
 <fo^z, and making it to mean •fear,' not in any other 
 possible sense, but specifically 'the fear that refers to a 
 captive woman.' But whether it shall moan, the fear 
 which a captive woman feels, or the fear which a captive 
 woman inspires, is not indicated by the genitive: it is 
 gathered from the obvious relations in which ipS^oz stands 
 in the text, and which show that it is a feeling dwelling in 
 the mind of another, and not in that of yuvacxd^ aij(fiaXw- 
 TiSoi:; that the captive woman is the object and not the 
 subject of the feeling of fear. So, again, Soph. Antig. 
 1185, in eu-fiiUTa IJaXXdSoz, 'vows made to Pallas,' the geni- 
 tive JlaUddoi; docs no more, by its proper office, than mark 
 the term euy/iara, * vows,' as having this specific character 
 or distinctive relation, that they are 'vows having reference 
 to I'allas,' and no other vows. Whether they shall bo 
 understood to mean ' vows made to Pallas,' or * vows made 
 by Pallas,' may be gathered, indeed, from the obvious rela- 
 tions of the objects euypuira and FlaMASoz themselves, or 
 from the connection which euj-fiara has with some other 
 object ; but it is not expressed by the genitive. But if this 
 be so, then it cannot be said that the genitive does in itself 
 
 2 
 
18 
 
 BIQNIFICAIION OF THE CASES. 
 
 contain the idea of the origin or source from which a thing 
 springs, any more than that it expresses in itself the object 
 upon which any action or feeling exerts itself. If the geni- 
 tive expresses the one notion, it must also be admitted to 
 express the other. According to the examples it expresses 
 neither ; and to assign to this case the idea of origin or 
 source is to assume as the proper sense of the genitive that 
 which is suggested wholly by the natural relations of the 
 thing qualified and that by which it is qualified; to say 
 nothing of its making that to be the cause which, by the 
 same reasoning, must also be the cfl'ect. 
 
 2. a. But the genitive is employed in other cases in which 
 the sense above assigned to it is hardly so obvious. Thus, 
 where it is used after the verbs ilvai, « to be,' and ■fiYV£a9at, 
 •to become,' with their subjects, to explain the precise 
 sense in which they are to be taken; e.g. Od. iv. 611, 
 a^fiazoz cTc dfadoio, 'you are of noble race.' The phrase 
 to be more exactly defined is e7c, 'you are,' and the quali- 
 fication is o?/*oroc dj-a&oTo, 'of noble race.' The genitive, 
 of itself, merely denotes the object to which the person 
 described by ere, 'you are,' is referred, as heing thereby 
 characterized, or distinguished from the sapie person under 
 other aspects. For any thing expressed by the genitive, 
 this person may bear to atfiaroi:, 'blood' or 'race,' any 
 relation that is in the nature of things allowable; but, 
 alftaroz being here used figuratively for 'race,' 'stock,' 
 there is suggested by the term the natural and most ob- 
 vious relation between the person and the qualifying noun, 
 namely, that of descent or family; and the former, by 
 being referred through the genitive sign to this term of 
 ' race' or * stock,' with its attributive dj-a&oTo, ' good,' is in 
 fact characterized as being ' of a noble stock,' and so dis- 
 tinguished from the same person viewed in other relations. 
 According to this view, the notion of descent is contained 
 in something apart from the genitive, and is not to be 
 referred to the case. And if so, the genitive has hero 
 also the same force essentially as in the simple case men- 
 tioned above, namely, that of marking the object to which 
 a term is referred for its specific distinction, whether as to 
 
 GENITIVE CASE. 
 
 19 
 
 I 
 
 kind, race, descent, or any other characteristic. And the 
 difference between the character or distinctive description 
 given by the genitive in one case and in another lies not in 
 the case, but in the nature of the idea expressed by the 
 noun which it introduces. 
 
 So, again, in Eurip. Or. 725, elxdrwz xauc^c yuvatxhc dudpa 
 yipieadae xax6v, 'it is proper that a bad. man should be born 
 of a bad woman,' the genitive xax^c yovaix6t: does not, of 
 itself, express the idea of descent from, but only refers the 
 phrase dvSpa pyvea&at xax6v, 'a bad man's being born' or 
 ' coming into being,' to a specific object, xax^z j'uvatxS;, ' a 
 bad woman,' to show that it is to be taken in this and no 
 other relation ; so that ' a bad man's being bom' or ' com- 
 ing into being' shall be understood with specific reference 
 to ' a bad woman,' and confined to this exclusively. But 
 the most obvious relation between the idea of ' a man being 
 born' and ' a woman,' when the former is referred to the 
 latter for its more exact sense, is that of ' a man being born 
 of a woman.' Here, then, as before, the notion of origin 
 or source, which has been attributed to the genitive, is not 
 to be found in the case itself, but in the natural relations 
 existing betweep the qualifying term and the term which 
 it qualifies ; and the genitive has the same sense as in the 
 preceding cases, namely, that of marking the object to 
 which another is referred for its specific character and 
 relation. The same remark applies to the genitive used 
 after fUTtuBa&m, 'to be born,' properly, 'to be planted.' 
 
 b. In like manner, the genitive is used with elvac, 'to 
 be,' to mark the object to which some action, practice, or 
 habit is to be referred as belonging to it, as a thing of its 
 duty, capacity, ofiice, &c., where in English we say 'it 
 belongs to,' 'is the part, property, duty, &c. of a person.' E.g 
 Eur. Ilec. 844, kaOXoo fup dvdpoz rj dexig 0' ItnrjpereiVf 'it is the 
 part of a good man to promote justice,' or 'the promoting 
 justice is the part of a good man.' Here the proposition ry 
 dixTj 0' 6mjpeTuv is q\ialificd by iaOXou dvdpizi added to show 
 to whom distinctively this practice of promoting justice is 
 to bo referred, and with respect to whom, therefore, it is to 
 be understood ; the sense being, that ' the practice of pro- 
 
20 
 
 BIOMIFIOAZION OF THE CASES. 
 
 mo ting justice,' as here introduced, is not to be taken 
 absolutely and without any qualification, but as specifically 
 confined to, or spoken exclusively of, ' a good man.' The 
 idea which is here conveyed, that this practice is the part» 
 property, or duty of a good man, is suggested by the mutu- 
 ally corresponding character of the action or habit qualified 
 and of the object by which it is qualified. As the one is a 
 being capable of moral actions, and the other an action 
 having a moral quality, the latter can hardly be specifically 
 referred to the former, that is, it can hardly bo said, for 
 example, that the promotion of justice is a thing aflirmcd 
 exclusively of a good man, without giving rise to the notion 
 that it forms a part of his character or duty. 
 
 c. In yet other instances, the notion suggested by the 
 mutual relation of the action or practice, and of the quali- 
 fying noun introduced by the genitive, will be rather that 
 of a faculty or a capacity, belonging to the latter. Thus, 
 Demosth. Ol. iii. 13, 26, t6 ftku imrtftdv, laax; tpi^aat u<: dv, 
 Ptj.iiov xal atutxix: elvai, 'some one will, perchance, say that 
 to censure is easy, and a faculty or capacity belonging to 
 eveiy one.' Here, again, the genitive navr^ would, pro- 
 perly speaking, merely show to whom the 'act of cen- 
 suring' is to be referred, so that it should be understood to 
 be an act affirmed with respect to ' every man.' But from 
 the corresponding character of the term imuftdv, 'to cen- 
 sure,' and of the object Jtavzdz, 'every man,' to which it is 
 referred, the former being a variety of the expression of 
 moral judgments or sentiments of approval or disapproval, 
 and the latter a being accounted capable of such judgments, 
 there is suggested, under the circumstances, the idea that 
 the act of censuring is to be regarded as a faculty or a ca- 
 pacity of an object of which' it may be suitobly affirmed. 
 That this notion is suggested by the mutual correspond- 
 ence of the noun in the genitive and of the action which it 
 qualifies may be seen by observing that it belongs dis- 
 tinctly to neither, if taken apart. The term imu/iav ex- 
 presses no more than the aet or habit of censuring, and the 
 genitive no more than that the object which it introduces is 
 that to which this act is referred or belongs; and neither, 
 
 OSNITIVB CASE. 
 
 21 
 
 therefore, conveys the idea of an act regarded as a faculty 
 or a capacity of an object. And yet this idea is expressed 
 by the two conjoined, and must result from their mutual 
 relations. It may be repeated, therefore, that in such in- 
 stances of the use of the genitive as those above examined, 
 this case simply serves to mark the object to which a term 
 is referred as being that with respect to which it is to be 
 taken, and which gives a more exact specification of its 
 meaning. 
 
 d. In other examples, the notion conveyed by the refer- 
 ence of an action to a particular object by means of the 
 genitive case is that of what is appropriate to, to be ex- 
 pected of it, as suited to its character or office ; e.g. Dem. 
 p. 54, init. xaxoupyou fiiv ydp ian xptOiw' dirodavetv, tnpaTTjYOU 
 8e na^opsvov TOiz noXtfuotz, 'it belongs to, is befitting the 
 character of, a robber, to die under sentence of condemna- 
 tion, of a military officer (to die) fighting with the enemy.' 
 Here xptOivr' dnoOavttv, ' to die under sentence of condem- 
 nation,' is referred to xaxoupj-ou, ' a robber,' as the object of 
 which exclusively it is to be understood, and pa^6fievou toTc 
 Ttok/iioic {dnodavuv), 'to die fighting with the enemy,' is 
 referred to arpaT^you, as the object of which exclusively it is 
 to be understood ; and there arises, from the natural relation 
 of the actions and the objects to which they arc respectively 
 referred, the idea of u suitableness, of a mutual adaptation, 
 and so of what is reasonably to bo expected. In the same 
 sense nearly the genitive is used in Demosth. 01. i. p. 18, 
 2, eau T&v aiajfpaiv, /tuXkov 8i rtou aia^j^iarmv, 7:6Xewv, . . . . div 
 ^piv noze xuptot, ifuiveaOai npoitpivoof, 'it is to be counted 
 among shameful things, nay, rather, among the things that 
 are most shameful, that we should be seen to surrender 
 cities of which we were once masters.' In this case, the 
 fact of ' surrendering cities of which the Athenians were 
 once masters' is referred by the orator for its more exact 
 character to the term alaj^pwv, 'things that are shameful,' 
 and, upon second thought, to raiu ala^larmv, 'the things that 
 * are most shameful ;' and it is plain from the nature of the 
 things brought together, and from the circumstances in 
 which they are introduced, that the design is to represent 
 
22 
 
 8IONIFI0ATI0N OF THE CASES. 
 
 the fact of ' Barrendering cities of which the Athenians 
 were once masters' as fit, deserving, to be counted among 
 or classed with ' things that are shameful, and even most 
 shameful.' That is, there is suggested by the natural rela- 
 tion between the action characterized and the noun intro- 
 duced by the genitive to characterize it, and by the circum- 
 stances in which they stand, the idea that the action is 
 fit or deserving to be counted among or classed with the 
 objects named by the genitive. 
 
 e. The genitive just mentioned strongly resembles that 
 which is used with the superlative, and other genitives 
 marking the class to which an object is referred ; and this 
 resemblance may be noticed as showing how nearly related, 
 in fact, is this use of the genitive to that met with in other 
 instances which appear to be very diftcrent. The same 
 thing may bo said of the case in which the idea arising from 
 the peculiar character of the noun in the genitive, and from 
 its relation to the action qualified or characterized, is that 
 of a natural eftect or result involved in it, or of a neccBsary 
 concomitant. E.g. Demosth. de Chers. p. 102, 48, Soxei raura 
 xai iaatdirji; fOjdXTj^ xai nbviov noXXSv xal itpaj^/iareiaz tlvcu, 
 'these seem to be matters involving both great expense, 
 and much toil and trouble.' For the genitive, in such a 
 case, does really only refer an action to an object that names 
 the category to which it belongs ; and the sense of natural 
 result, or of the necessary attendant circumstances, is due 
 to the character of- the noun brought in by the genitive, 
 considered as it stands related to the thing qualified. 
 
 /. The genitive is used with tlvat, ' to be,' and yiyveodat, 'to 
 become,' 'to be,' in cases apparently difierent from those 
 already noticed, but having essentially the same interpreta- 
 tion ; e.g. Thnc. i, 113, Saoi r^c aur^c T'"^ft>l<: f^aav, * all that 
 were of the same opinion.' Here the genitive r^c aor^c 
 fvt&fojz qualifies the proposition 8aot Ijaav, 'all that were,' by 
 marking with reference to what specific object it is to be 
 understood, showing that they are persons to be taken not 
 in any conceivable character, but specifically in that of per- 
 sons ' of the same opinion.' In this case, also, the genitive 
 is very like that used with the superlative, and elsewhere, 
 
 GENITIVE CASE. 
 
 23 
 
 to indicate the class to which an object belongs ; and the 
 explanation is the same. 
 
 g. In the preceding instances, the genitive with eTvat and 
 ■ppteadai is used to define a term more exactly by giving its 
 precise relation, and so, through the mutual connection of 
 the object qualified and that qualifying it, to express its 
 character, &c. And it has been noticed that, in some of 
 these, there is a deal of resemblance to the genitive used to 
 mark the class or category to which an object belongs. 
 There are other examples of this case employed with etvat 
 and pp/ea&at, in which it more distinctly denotes the class 
 to which a term is referred. Thus, Herod, iii. 141, dLrceatede 
 orparrjybu ' Ordvea dvdpaiv r<3v hzra yev6fievov, ' who was of the 
 seven men.' In this example, the genitive dvdpaiv Inrd de- 
 fines 'Ordvea yevofievovy 'Otanes who was,' by referring the 
 person thus named to the class or category of 'the seven 
 men.' 
 
 In the same way is to be explained the genitive used with 
 Ttdivat, rideadat, noiuaOat, 'to consider,' 'to account;' e.g. 
 Plat. Rep. ii. p. 376, e. fiouaixljz, S" elitov, t19^^ Xoj-ou^ ; ' do you, 
 said they, account arguments to belong to music ?' Here the 
 ■ genitive pouatxrjZ denotes the class or category of things to 
 which Xoyouz belongs or is to be referred. 
 
 h. Of llio Bivnio nature is the genitive occurring in such 
 examples as II. xiv. 121, '/idp^aroto S" ipjpe duj-arpwu, 'he 
 married one of the daughters of Adrastus ;' Ucrod. i. 67, 
 i<: ou Sii Aij(rjz uov dj-aSotpyaiv xaXtopivatv I'napurjriwv dveupe, 
 ♦ one of the Spartans called well-doers found out.' (See 
 KUhn. Ausf. Gr. Qr. § 518, 3.) In the former example, the 
 proposition ipipe, 'he married,' is qualified by referring it to 
 'AdpijuToto dujaTpwv, ' the daughters of Adrastus,' that is, to a 
 class of persons corresponding in sense, and with respect to 
 whom it is to be understood. The sense is that he married, 
 and that this statement is to be taken, not absolutely, but 
 with reference to the daughters of Adrastus. The mind 
 readily supplies the rest ; namely, that he married one of this 
 class of persons. Although the English language might 
 hardly admit the expression ' he married of the daughters 
 
24 
 
 BIQSriFICATIOIf 07 THB CASES. 
 
 of Adr^tus,' yet it has similar nses ; aa, < he took of the 
 flowers.' 
 
 t. With the superlative degree, also, the genitive is used 
 in the same way ; e.g. Xen. Cyrop. i. 3, 2, Tlepawv (ilv noHl} 
 xdJJitaroz l> i/^c ttanjp, ' my Mher is far the handsomest of 
 the Persians.' The genitive here marks the class of objects 
 to which the preceding affirmation, noXh xdiiitno^ 6 ifthz 
 nar^p, is to he taken as referred, namely, that 'of the 
 Persians.' 
 
 ^ k. Here belongs the genitive employed to mark the 
 material of which a thing is made ; e.g. Herod, v. 82, ^aXxou 
 noiiovTOi ri d^dXftara, 'they make their statues of brass.' 
 The phrase noiiovrat rd dydXpara is not left to be taken in 
 the absolute sense of < they make their statues,' but is limited 
 in its application by the genitive j^cJixou so as to refer to a 
 particular metal, that of 'brass,' and so that the statues 
 made arc described as belon^ng to this metal and not to 
 another ; and this is, in fact, to assign them to a particular 
 class or category; for the two things can hardly occur 
 together, namely, the fact of statues being made, and the 
 reference of them to a particular metal, 'brass,' without 
 giving origin to the idea of their being connected as the 
 thing made and the material of which it is made. The 
 proper use of the genitive case in such examples need not be 
 perplexed by the fact that the verb of ' making' precedes, nor 
 by the fact that the prepositions dnS, ' from,' ix, ' out,' and Std, 
 'through,' 'with the interval of,' are frequently added to 
 the verb of making ; for it is plain that the' genitive, in the 
 absenoe of the preposition, qualifies, strictly speaking, not 
 the act of making, but the thing made ; that is, that the 
 material stands related to the object fashioned, and not to 
 the mere act of fashioning ; and, further, that if the pre- 
 position bo added, the sense of the genitive will be nearly 
 the same, only it will now be the qualification of the prepo- 
 sition, or of the compound expression of which it forms 
 part, instead of describing, as it did before, the thing made. 
 The sense, with the preposition, would be, ' they made their 
 statues from, out of, intermediately, . . . said with respect 
 to brass,' the genitive still marking the material to which 
 
 GENITIVE CASE. 
 
 25 
 
 the thing made from, out of, &c. is to be referred. Either 
 way, the genitive serves the single purpose of placing the 
 material within view and alongside, as it were, of the 
 thing made, or of this object after it has been qualified by 
 the additional indexes of reference furnished by dno, ix, 8id, 
 and of showing that to this specifically it is to bo referred. 
 
 I. Here may be mentioned, also, the genitive of price, or 
 of cxchaiigoublc value, occurring with a number of verbs 
 of buying, selling, exchanging, valuing, reckoning, &c., as 
 A.vsta9ai, dXUdrretu, ripav, itoiua^at, and with some adjec- 
 tives and nouns, as d;(Oc, dvrdUaj-fta, &c. e.g. Herod, v. 6, 
 dtviovrai rdc yuvuixaz j^/oi^/icCrcuii ptfdhitv, 'they purchase their 
 wives for large sums of money ;' Soph. Od. Col. 905, ti ftev 
 dt' ipfifi ^xov, ^cod' aStoz, ' if I indulged the anger thatthis man 
 deserves,' or ' of which he is deserving.' This genitive, as 
 in tJie example from Herodotus, docs of itself no more than 
 mark the object with respect to which specifically the buy- 
 ing is to be understood as afi&rmed; and, accordingly, the 
 sense would be, ' they buy their wives . . . this buying to 
 he taken with exclusive reference to large sums of money ;' 
 or, which is the same thing in substance, the genitive adds 
 a qualification of mviovrai rdc juvaXxaz, by which it is shown 
 that the buying their wives is to be taken in a specific and 
 not in an absolute sense, as a buj'ing that respects, or 
 belongs to, the case of largo sums of money ; just as in the 
 phrase rd too Sivdpou yuUa, 'the leaves of the tree,' the 
 genitive tou divSpoo qualifies the term rd tpuXXa, by showing 
 that it is to be taken in a specific sense and with exclusive 
 reference to this object. But the noun which is added by 
 the genitive to the verb of buying as its qualification cor- 
 responds in its nature to that of the verb which it qualifies; 
 the term ■^pripdrutv, ' money,' answers to the action of ' buying* 
 in wviiaOat ; that is, the medium of exchange is connected 
 with the act of purchasing by being made, through the 
 genitive sign, the object to which it is referred for its 
 exact specification. And then the notion of price or 
 exchangeable value arises, not from the genitive alone, this 
 having no more than its usual power of denoting the object 
 to which the act of purchasing is to be exclusively referred ; 
 
26 
 
 6IQNIFI0ATI0N OF TUB CASES. 
 
 nor from the term ^fnifidrav considered apart from its geni- 
 tive form, this expressing, not the price or exchangeable 
 value, but the medium of exchange; but properly, and 
 naturally, from the mutual relations of the things thus 
 brought together ; that is to say, of the act of purchasing 
 and the medium of exchange, the former being made, by 
 the means of the genitive form, to refer to the latter. And 
 what is true of this particular example is true of the rest 
 of this class. The notions of buying, selling, exchanging, 
 valuing, are naturally defined by referring thcni to the 
 names of the usual mediums of exchange or denomina- 
 tions of value, either particular, as gold, money, &c., or 
 general, as much, little, &c. ; and these, taken with reference 
 to the actions of buying, selling, and the like, become, from 
 the mutual relation between them, expressions of price. 
 When it is said, o ofof fKi^mv iare rou irarpo^, 'the son is 
 larger than his father,' the term fuif^tov is referred for its 
 qualification to itarpSz ; and when it is said, ndurtov aotptaraToz 
 ioTt, 'he is the wisest of all,' that is, 'with respect to all,' 
 the term ffoftoraroi: is qualified by referring it, by means of 
 the genitive, to the class xdwwv ; and so, when it is said, 
 itvtovToe rdc yuvStxaz jfpTifidrwv /lejrdXcov, ' they purchase their 
 wives for large sums of money,' that is, ' with respect to, in 
 view of, much money,* the purchase is qualified by referring 
 it to the specific case of ' much money.' But in the last case 
 the genitive introduces, not simply an individual object, nor 
 a class of objects of the same kind, which in the two former 
 cases was a sufficiently definite qualification, but a denomi- 
 nation of value exactly answering to the antecedent idea of 
 purchasing. And, there being thus introduced a denomina- 
 tion of value to which the idea of purchasing is referred 
 and by which it is defined, there naturally arises the notion 
 of price or equivalent exchange; so that to purchase, sell, 
 &c. with reference to much money, as marked by the geni- 
 tive, is the same thing as to purchase, sell, &c. for much 
 money, or at the price of much money. In one word, the 
 genitive with verbs of buying, selling, and the like, qualifies 
 them, and marks the price, by referring their action to a 
 denomination of value, the idea of price arising from the 
 
 4 
 
 GENITIVE CASE. 
 
 27 
 
 mutual relations in which the act of purchasing, selling, &c. 
 and the sign of value are placed to each other. And, if so, 
 this genitive entirely accords in its meaning and office with 
 the other instances of the same case already examined. 
 
 3. But besides these and other like cases, which hardly 
 require separate examination, in which the genitive with 
 nouns, and with the verbs elvat, yeYvsaOcu, &c., marks the 
 specific relation in which a term or action is to be under- 
 stood as standing, by adding an individual object, or a class 
 or category, or a denomination of value, as that to which it 
 is to be distinctively referred, this case is further used in the 
 definition of a variety of actions, motions, states of mind, &c., 
 by introducing an object with respect to which specifically 
 it is intended that their sense shall be admitted. 
 
 a. Thus, with verbs that express motion : e.g. II. i. 859, 
 dviSu TioXiffi ditic, 'she went up from the hoary sea;' pro- 
 perly, ' she went up . . . with respect to the hoary sea.' 
 That the genitive signifies merely that the going up is to be 
 understood as qualified in its sense by this special reference 
 to the sea, and does not in itself contain the notion of 
 'from,' which is to be gathered rather from the circum- 
 stances of the case, may be seen plainly enough in the fact 
 that, with a like genitive after a verb of motion, xard is used 
 both in the sense of 'down from' and in that of 'down 
 upon,' according to the circumstances. If the genitive 
 signified ' from,' xard and the genitive used with a verb of 
 motion should always mean ' down from ;' but, as just 
 observed, it signifies also 'down upon;' and this can only 
 be on the supposition that either xard or the genitive sig- 
 nifies ' upon,' which no one pretends. Allowing that the 
 genitive has merely the meaning of 'with respect to,' which 
 is essentially that which it has been thus far found to have, 
 then nothing is easier than to see how xard with the genitive, 
 used with a verb of motion, may have both the senses above 
 mentioned, and how, in the same way, when tbe genitive is 
 used with a verb of motion, as in the example given, the 
 notion of ' from' arises from the circumstances in which it 
 stands. 
 
 b. In the same way may be explained the genitive used 
 
28 
 
 siaNiFicAtnoK or thb cases. 
 
 with such verhs as dp^uv, ipxtoOai, ' to begin,' nadtiv, naueaOaif 
 ♦to cause to cease,' 'to cease,' eJfpftiv, 'to keep away,' 'to 
 restrain,' &c. (See Eiifan. Ausf. Qr. § 512, 2, and § 613.) 
 E.g. Od. i. 28, Toiot 3i pu&atv Ijp^e narijp dudpwu re i?eoiv rt, 
 'began to speak,' properly, 'began,' or 'was at the begin- 
 ning,' for dpj^etv, dpxea&ai, mean no more, . . . ' with respect 
 to his words ;' II. ii, 696, Mouaai . . . Bdpuptv . . . nauaav 
 dotd^Z, ' caused to cease from singing,' that is, 'caused to 
 cease . . . with respect to singing.' 
 
 c. And so with many adjectives having the notions of 
 freedom, separation, emptiness, fulness, difference, and the 
 hke, as iM&epoi;, pivoz, x»v6c, Tti^piji, tpyjfioz, dcd^opa;, 
 diioTpioz, cUAoFof ; witli nouns of similar meaning, as ^ffoxta, 
 'quiet,' 'repose,' liiatz, 'release,' 'exemption;' and with 
 adverbs, such as dveu, drep, and drep^e, 'without,' dndveude, 
 • apart,' (see Kuhn. Ausf. Gr. § 513, 4 and 5,) the genitive 
 is used to mark in what respect the sense is to be taken. 
 E.g. Ilcrod. i. 82, dTtadi/i mu&v, « free from, unaffected by, 
 ills,' that is, 'without suffering . . . with respect to ills;' 
 Id. vii. 287, npiaat dper^z dvijxetv, 'to be far advanced, to 
 have made good progress in virtue,' that is, ' with respect 
 to virtue ;' Plat. Apol. p. 38, c, nSpfxo i^dij iar) too ^iou, 
 ifavdrou 8e ijjut, ' far advanced in life, and nigh to death,' 
 that is, 'with respect to life,' 'with respect to death.' In 
 this, and in the preceding case, it is plain that, when the 
 genitive is to be rendered by 'from,' as after iXeu3epo:, this 
 sense is not due to the case, but is attributable to the nature 
 of the term which it qualifies. 
 
 d. Rarely the genitive alone, the preposition dnd or ix 
 being commonly added, is employed to mark the period of 
 time, whether before or after, to which an event is referred 
 for its more exact specification; e.g. Herod, vi. 40, rptTtp 
 piv j-dp iret Touritov Ixu&az ixipeuj-si, ' the third year . . . 
 with reference to these events,' that is, as the connection 
 shows, 'before these events;' Id. vi. 46, dturep<p Irei rourituv, 
 •the second year . . . with respect to these events,' that is, 
 'after these events.' (See KUhn. Ausf. Qr. § 514.) Here 
 the genitive simply marks the period to which an event is 
 referred, it may be indifferently before or after : this is to 
 
 GENITIVE CASE. 
 
 29 
 
 be determined by the context. And if dit6 or ix be pre- 
 sent, the proper sense of the genitive remains unaltered. 
 
 e. Of the same nature, so far as the genitive itself is con- 
 cerned, are the examples in which this case is employed to 
 mark the time to which an event is referred by introducing 
 various denominations of time, as vuxric, ' by night,' -^pipa;, 
 ' by day,' deiiijz, ' in the evening,' dntiprjz, ' in the autumn,' 
 &ipouz, *iu the summer,' j^etpcovoz, 'in the winter,' &c. (See 
 Kuhn. Ausf. Gram. § 524.) E.g. Od. vii. 117-18, ouiT dKo- 
 lei7iei\xetfiaTO(:,oi>dk dipeoi;, iittv^aioz, 'fails not, either winter 
 or summer;' Ilcrod. iv. 48, "larpoz iaoz altt oor^c itoortji ^iei 
 xai dipMz xai xsipoivoz, 'both summer and winter.' And 
 BO, likewise, with some more general expressions of time ; 
 e.g. Herod, vi. 12, toD komou jirj iteidtltpeda abrou, 'for the 
 future, let us not obey him.' The noun in the genitive, in 
 such examples, marks a period or denomination of time to 
 which an action is referred- for its determination, so that it 
 shall either belong to it generally, and be thus embraced by 
 it, or fall distinctly within it, as the case may be. In the 
 latter case, as when we say j^etpdivoz, 'in the winter,' dnayprjz, 
 ' in the autumn,' the meaning is that the action or event 
 defined belongs to the period or denomination of time, and 
 may properly enough be said to occur ' in' or ' within' the 
 space which it comprises ; and yet it would hardly bo accu- 
 rate to say, without qualification, that the noun in the geni- 
 tive case marks the period within which an event occurs. 
 For this it does only incidentally, and because, the denomi- 
 nation employed in the genitive as a definition comprising 
 a space of greater or less extent, it is very likely that an 
 action referred to it, and thus marked as belonging to it, 
 will fall within its limits. So that it may be said that tho 
 proper olKce of the genitive case, in such examples, is 
 merely to introduce the denomination of time to which an 
 action is referred as belonging to and embraced in it, and 
 that in a secondary sense, and incidentally, it conveys the 
 notion of ' within.' This view will make it practicable to 
 distinguish tho genitive case, as here used to denote the 
 period of time to which an event is referred, from iv with 
 the ablative (locativus) in expressions of time, although this 
 
80 
 
 SIQNIFIOAnON OF THB CASES. 
 
 latter ia tranalated by the same tcrma ; as iu vuxri, ' in the 
 night.' In this use oiiv with the ablative, the leading idea 
 ia to mark that an action occurs in or within a period of 
 time, that being the proper force of the proposition ; while, 
 on the other hand, iv vuxri cannot convey the sense which 
 the genitive is properly fitted to express, namely, that an 
 action is referred to a period of time as belonging to it, and 
 not as being necessarily within it, although this latter 
 meaning may incidentally arise. The distinction here in- 
 tended to be made between the genitive vu*r6c, for example, 
 and iv vuxri, may perhaps be made more obvious by ob- 
 serving, that it ia preciaely of the same nature with that 
 which is seen to exist between the genitive and iv with the 
 ablative (locativus) of names of places ; as in such phrases 
 as of ri^c noXemz oixot, * the houses of the city,' and ol iv rjj 
 7t6Xee oixot, ' the houses in or within the city.' In the former 
 case, the houses, o'xot, are defined by t^c noXewi; and referred 
 to it, so that they belong to it, and are really within it ; but 
 this is not the sense mainly intended, however certainly it 
 is incidentally conveyed ; while, in the latter case, the very 
 object of using iv with the ablative noJiet is' to mark this pre- 
 cise relation of ' within.' 
 
 Between the genitive as above used, and the ablative 
 (locativus) of time, for example, between voxroc, 'by night,' 
 and vuxri, ' at night,' the distinction may be made by ob- 
 serving, that while the genitive, as has been repeatedly 
 stated, shows the period to which an action is referred, and 
 to which it may be said to belong, the ablative (locativus) 
 introduces the period, whether large or small, as the point 
 of time at which an event occurs, just as the ablative of 
 place (locativus) marks the point iu space at which any 
 thing is. Thus, when it is said, vuxroz dnijX^ev, 'he went 
 away by night,' or 'in the night,' the going away is referred 
 to the period of night, and may be considered as occurring 
 within its limits, as above explained ; but when it is said, 
 vuxri ibi^A(?ew, *he went away at night,' the period of night 
 ia regarded as a point of time, and the action as occurring 
 at this point. Observing the caution above given, it might 
 not be erroneous to say that the genitive marks the denomi- 
 
 OENITIVE CASE. 
 
 31 
 
 nation of time to which an action is referred, as belonging 
 to it and occurring within its limits, the ablative (locativus) 
 the point of time at which an action is placed, the denomi- 
 nation of time, in the latter case, being always regarded as 
 a point. 
 
 It can hardly be a matter of difilculty to distinguish be- 
 tween the genitive, as used to mark the time of an event, 
 and the accusative, as employed in expressions of time, 
 the latter usually denoting the extent of time occupied by 
 an action. Thus, vuxrSz dninXeuaev would mean ' he sailed 
 away by night,' or ' in the night,' but rijv vuxra dninXeuaev, 
 'he sailed away during the night,' or ' throughout the night.' 
 But see below, uuder the accusative, 8 a. 
 
 f. Of the same character is the genitive employed in 
 such expressions as dptarepaz, ' on the left hand,' XatitZt ' on 
 the left hand,' de^tS^, ' on the right hand,' that is, to mark 
 the direction by reference to which the position of an ob- 
 ject is determined ; e.g. Herod, v. 77, r6 3k Apiarep^z X^P^C 
 iorijxe, ' this stands on the left hand.' The genitive dpiare- 
 p^Z X^P^Z defines the term earrjxe by marking a known point 
 or direction to which an object is referred in order to fix its 
 position : ' it stands, has its position, . . . with respect to 
 the left hand.' Or, which is the same thing in another 
 aspect, the genitive restricts the position to a specific view 
 or direction; shows that the position is not any one in- 
 dificrently, but one that belongs to or is referred to ' the 
 left hand.' Such genitives have the same meaning with 
 respect to space that the genitives vuxr6i;, &c. have with 
 the respect to time, and have essentially the same inter- 
 pretation. 
 
 It may be observed, further, that such genitives as dpia- 
 repai;, 'on the left hand,' are to be explained in the same 
 way with those used after xetadat, 'to lie,' 'to be situated,' 
 dnix^tv, ' to be away,' ' to be distant,' &c., (sec Klihn. Ausf. 
 Gr. §512,) with and without the prepositions dno, ix, napd, 
 npiz. E.g. Herod, vi. 139, ■^ yap 'Arrixij npbz vorov xUrat 
 TioXXov rr^z Aijfivou, ' Attica lies towards the south, at a great 
 distance from Lemnos ;' Id. vi. 22, )J dk xaXi] oCri; ^Axrij xaXeo- 
 [dvtj lari fjtkv SixeXmv, upbz dh Tupayjvt^v rerpa/i/tivr] xjfi Sexe- 
 
82 
 
 EIOMIFIOATION 0? THB CASES. 
 
 Ibjz, 'and looks towards Tyreenia from Sicily,' that is, 
 •with reference to Sicily.' 
 
 Here belongs, also, the genitive, used, almost exclusiyely 
 in poetry, to mark the place to which ail action is referred 
 for its more exact definition as to position, and rendered in 
 English by ' in' or ' on ;' e.g. II. xvii. 372, vi^oc d' ou <paiveTO 
 ndaijZ I r'")??' ''^^' ^pit^^t ' fl'^d a cloud appeared not on all the 
 land, nor on the mountains;' Plat. Symp. p. 182, b, ttjz Si 
 'Itovlat, xai dkko&c noUa'j^ou, alajipbv venSfuarae, ' in Ionia, and 
 in many places elsewhere, it is considered disgraceful.' So 
 likewise the genitive which occurs with verbs of motion, 
 especially in epic poetiy, to denote the space with refer- 
 ence to which the motion is to be taken ; e.g. II. iv. 244, 
 ixa/iov noXio^ neSioio &iouaae, ' they were weary with running 
 over the vast plain;' properly, 'with reference to the vast 
 plain,' the running being restricted by the genitive to this 
 specific case in which it has reference to the plain. II. ii. 
 801, Ip^ourai nedioio, ' they are coming through the plain,' 
 that is, ' they are coming,' and this coming is to be under- 
 stood with reference to the plain : whether the direction is 
 one through the plain, or over it, or some other, can be 
 gathered only from the attending circumstances. 
 
 g. To the same class with the preceding cases belongs 
 the genitive as it occurs with a number of adverbs : (a) of 
 place, direction, &c., as, eltt9u, ' straight on,' /iixp', ' as far 
 as,' 'up to,' dvra, Avztjv, 'against, 'over against,' woD; 
 ' where ?' woiJ, ' sonSbwhere,' ;rji ; 'in what way ?' T:69tv ; 
 •whence?' oh, 'where,' ^, 'in what way,' Iva, 'where,' 
 oiSafxou, 'nowhere,' Travraj^, 'in every way,' &c. ; (ft) of 
 time; as, d^i, 'late,' npwt, 'early,' oun'xa, 'presently,' 'im- 
 mediately,' &c. E.g. Od. i. 170, r/c> nSdev tlz avdpiov, * who 
 are you, and from what people?' that is, 'whence . . , 
 with respect to men ?' ^Herod. ii. 48, ouda/t^ AIyutctou, ' no- 
 where in Egypt,' that is, 'nowhere . . . with respect to 
 Egypt.' Theocr. ii. 119, Ijvifov jap . . . abuxa voxrJc, 'I 
 came as soon as ever it was night,' that is, ' immediately 
 . . . said with respect to night.' Herod, iv. 120, iSiatxou 
 rooc nipaaz Idv zdit "farpou, 'they pursued the Persians 
 straight to the Ister,' that is, 'right on . . . said with re- 
 
 GENITIVE CASE. 
 
 33 
 
 spect to the Ister.' The preposition inl, which is some- 
 times introduced with <W or el)96, &c., does not alter the 
 signification of the genitive. And it is plain that this case 
 has the same meaning here as in the preceding instances, 
 confining the sense of the preceding term to the particular 
 view indicated by the noun in the genitive. (For the 
 list of adverbs, and for the examples, see Kiihn. Ausf. Gr. 
 §519, 3.C.) 
 
 The same explanation applies to the genitive used after 
 tl, xaXtoc, /urpcMZ, tiK, iztoz ; fewc, ^, 8ffjj, oBrwf , aide, dwaorwc, 
 with Sxsiv, rjxetv, xCiadtu, and sometimes with that, in tlie 
 sense of ♦ to be in a good condition,' ' to be well advanced,' 
 &c. E.g. Herod, vi. 116, of 'A^rjvaioe 8k, &c nodtov tlfpv, 
 tditata i^iyfj&tov iz r^ daro, ' the Athenians, on the instant, 
 marched to the succor of the city,' that is, literally, 'just as 
 they were . . . with respect to their feet,' 'just as they 
 stood,' statim, said of any thing done without so much delay 
 as a man would require to change his position. Id. vi. 02, 
 •j^pijlidriov eo ^xoure^, 'prosperous in wealth,' that is, 'well 
 advanced . . . with respect to, in the matter of, wealth ;' 
 Thuc. i. 30, xak(u<: napf'iTzXou xuadui, ' to be favorably situ- 
 ated for the passage,' that is, * with respect to the passage.' 
 (For the list of adverbs, and for the examples, sec Kiihn. 
 Ausf. Gr.§ 537.) 
 
 The adverbs themselves that have the genitive forqi, as 
 the relatives ou, orcou, 'where,' the interrogative t:ou; 
 'where?' the indefinite ttoiJ, 'somewhere,' and the com- 
 pounds ouSa/iou, 'nowhere,' noUaj^ou, 'in many places,' &c,, 
 belong to this class, marking position by referring the 
 things to be defined to a place denoted in the peculiar man- 
 ner of the pronouns to which these adverbs severally belong. 
 Thus, 7:ou oixoiiat ; ' where do they dwell ?' means, properly, 
 ' with respect to what place do they have their home V 
 
 h. The genitive has the same sense in a very large pro- 
 portion, to say the least, of the cases in which it is used 
 with prepositions, whether these be considered as imme- 
 diately connected with verbs or as standing separately from 
 them ; namely, it marks with respect to what object speci- 
 fically the relative position or direction expressed by the 
 
 8 
 
84 
 
 BIONIFIOATION OF TUB CASES. 
 
 preposition ia to be understood ; e.g. Thuc. i. 46, lau dk h/jo^v, 
 xat ithXtz Imkp aurciu utrat, 'there is a harbor, and a city lies 
 above it,' that is, 'above . . . with respect to it.' But so 
 many occasions of illustrating this use of the genitive case 
 will occur in the special treatment of the prepositions that 
 it is not necessary to adduce other examples in this place. 
 
 I. The genitive has the same meaning when used, both 
 with and without interjections, in exclamations of pain, 
 surprise, &c., to show with respect to what special object 
 the feeling thus indicated is to be understood as expe- 
 rienced. E.g. Eurip. Or. 412, oTfiot 8iarf/iiov, ' alas ! for my 
 persecutions,' that is, 'ah me, alas! . . . said with respect 
 to my persecutions.' When the inteijeciion is present, it 
 is an index merely to the feelings of pain, &c. which the 
 genitive defines. When it is omitted, the use of the 
 genitive is precisely the same, only the mind has to supply 
 from the context what the feeling is of which the genitive 
 brings in the qualification. E.g. Eurip. Med. 1051, d^a 
 T^C ^/4c idbajc, ' but, shame on my weakness.' Aristoph. 
 Av. 61, 'ATtoJdov djTorpdncue, too j^aa/DJftaro;, 'Apollo, averter 
 of evil, what a yawn !' (See, for other examples, Matth. 
 Gr. Gr. §371.) In such cases, and equally whore an 
 adjective precedes, as, rdXaz, &c., the genitive restricts the 
 feeling expressed by the adjective and interjection, or 
 suggested by the inteijection, or inferred from the con- 
 text, to a definite object; that is, shows in what particular 
 respect it is to be understood that it is uttered. 
 
 4. The genitive is employed, furthermore, with a largo 
 number of verbs, chiefly intransitive, and middle or passive, 
 in the same sense as in the preceding cases, that of mark- 
 ing the specific object with respect to which exclusively 
 the action or other substantive idea of the verb is affirmed. 
 
 a. Thus, with the verb ii:ovo(tdl^ea9at, having the pcnse of 
 ' being named after or for a person.' (See Kdhn. Ausf. Gr. 
 § 516, i. b.) The proper meaning of iTr'ovofid^ea&at is ' to 
 . have given to one a name that is a superaddition to {int) 
 the name of another,' 'to have a superadded name,' or, 'to 
 bo named in addition to or after;' and the genitive adds 
 the object with reference to which the name is an added or 
 
 i 
 
 ■ 
 
 ^. 
 
 GENITIVE CASE. 
 
 S5 
 
 after-name. The same explanation belongs to the genitive 
 used with iniim/wi;, 'having a name from,' 'called from;* 
 e.g. Eurip. Phcn. 650, vuxitav iTtwvufwz. (See Mattli. Gr. 
 Gr. § 375, Obs. 8.) 
 
 b. With verbs such as /isrij^uv, itireari not, ' to share,' ' to 
 have in common,' &c. ; e.g. Eurip. Med. 302, r^crJe xotvotvti 
 Tiixrjz, ' I share, take part in, this misfortune ;' properly, ' I 
 am a partaker . . . with respect to this misfortune ;' Id. Or. 
 439, fjierdSoz <piXoiat auiat rffi eimpaSlaz, 'give your friends a part 
 in your prosperity ;' that is, ' give your friends a share with 
 you . . . with respect to, in the matter of, your prosperity.' 
 It may be observed with regard to the compounds of /lerd, 
 that the use of the genitive depends chiefly on the sense of 
 community expressed by the preposition. (See, for the list 
 of verbs, and for examples, Kiihn. Ausf. Gr. § 519, 1.) 
 
 c. With verbs signifying ' to obtain,' as Xaj-^dvetv, • to obtain 
 by lot,' properly, ' to have an allotment,' zuj-j[dveeu, ' to ob- 
 tain,' * to meet with,' properly, ' to have a piece of fortune,' 
 xkijpovo/tecv, 'to inherit,' 'to be an heir,' xupeiv, 'to obtain,' 
 pi'operly, ' to be the master,' npotrjxei fioi, ' there belongs to 
 me,' properly, ' there has come to, or reached, me,' ' there 
 appertains to mc.' E.g. II. xxiv, 76, JJc xev 'AxMeh; 8utpmv 
 ix llptd/ioco kd'j^f/, ' that Achilles may get presents from Priam,' 
 properly, 'that Achilles may have an allotment of gifts,' 
 that is, ' may have an allotment . . . with respect to gifts.' 
 If the proper sense of such verbs bo regarded, it is not 
 diflicult to see the force of the genitive, how it defines the 
 substantive idea of the verb by naming the object to which 
 it is to be specifically referred in its application. (For the 
 list of verbs, and for examples, see Kiihn. § 521, c.) 
 
 d. With verbs which signify ' to touch,' &c. ; as dtjydveiv, 
 'to touch,' ipauuv, ' to touch lightly,' ' to graze,' dnrea^ai, 'to 
 touch,' properly, ' to be fastened to,' Xap^dveadae, and, in 
 poetry, XapL^dvuv, Xdl^uadat, ' to lay hold of,' ' to take to one's 
 self,' i^eaScu, ' to cling to,' 'to be next to,' 'to be like.' E.g. 
 Herod, vi. 13, icpoipdmoz imXa^bfievoi, ' laying hold of a pre- 
 text;' II. iv. 4G3, -cbv 8k neaovra noSdiv IXafiev, 'he took hold 
 of him by the feet ;' Herod, i. 93, A//iwy ff Ij^srat rou a^/taroi 
 litjfd^, ' next to the monument is a large lake ;' U. xxiv. 357, 
 
36 SIGNIFICATION OF TUB CASES. 
 
 yoiivotv S.</id/ievot, * touching the knees.' (See Klihn. Ausf. Gr. 
 § 520, h.) 
 
 The difficulty of interpreting the genitive, in such ex- 
 amples, lies in rightly apprehending the precise sonflo of the 
 verba Xafi^dvtadai, &o., as here used. 'Ej[ea9at signifies, pro- 
 perly, ' to hold fast,' or ' to hold one's self fast,' and hence ' to 
 cling to,' ' to be next,' ' to be like.' Thus understood, it may 
 properly enough be followed by the genitive case to show with 
 reference to what object a person or thing holds this relation. 
 
 Aafjt^dvecu signifies 'to lay hold of,' 'to catch,' 'to get,' 
 and iafifidveadat ' to lay hold of for one's self;' and while, in 
 poetrj', the former also is used with the genitive of the part 
 laid hold of, in Attic prose the latter alone lias the genitive of 
 the part laid hold of, the active voice being followed by the 
 accusative of what is laid hold of, and hence gotten. The 
 probability is, that, while the accusative represents the 
 object laid hold of, the genitive, whenever introduced, is 
 added rather as the qualification of the object itself laid hold 
 of, than directly of the action of the verb; so that the 
 meaning will always be ' to lay hold of an object,' not in an 
 unqualified sense, but specifically ' with reference to this or 
 that part.' Thus, Xen. Anab. i. 6, 10, iia/iov ttjZ C<«»'7f ri»' 
 'Oi>6vTrjv, 'they laid hold of Orontcs by the girdle;' that is, 
 
 * they laid hold of Orontcs,' not absolutely, but ' with respect 
 to his girdle.' (For a difierent opinion, see Eiihn. Ausf. Gr. 
 § 520, Anm. 2.) 
 
 "AmMdiu is properly passive or middle, and signifies ' to 
 bo fastened,' ' to be attached to,' or ' to attach one's self to,' 
 'to touch;' and, taken in this sense, may properly be fol- 
 lowed by the genitive to show to what definite object this 
 relative condition is to be referred. 
 
 c. With verbs which signify ' to aim for,' as the poetical 
 word im/iaiea9ac ; e.g. Od. xii. 220, axoniXou im/iaUo, 'aim 
 for a rock,' that is, ' aim, make efforts, . . . with reference 
 to a rock;' 'to desire,' as dpiytadai, properly a middle verb, 
 'to reach forward,' 'to stretch one's self forward,' and hence 
 
 * to he eager,' ' to have a desire.' Compare the Latin radical 
 reg in reg-o, and the English ' reach.' E.g. II. vi. 466, nmSbi: 
 dpi^aro faidi/ioi 'Exuop, 'reached, stretched himself forward 
 
 GENITIVS CASE. 
 
 37 
 
 . . . with reference to his child.' And, of course, after 
 this verb, in the derivative sense of ' to be eager,' ' to be 
 desirous,' the genitive will have the same sense. (For other 
 examples, sue Kiilin. Ausf. Or. § 522, a.) 
 
 To the same class may be referred the genitive with 
 verbs signifying ' to hasten on,' ' to be urgent,' ' to be eager 
 for;' e.g. II. xix. 142, ''Apr^oi; intcf6psvoz, 'eager for battle,' 
 that is, ' with respect to the battle ;' bpfuLv, used intransi- 
 tively, and bppaadat, 'to rush on,' 'to be eager;' e.g. II. xxii. 
 194, oaadxi o" op/i^aete nuXdwv, ' whenever he rushed for the 
 gates,' that is, ' urged himself forward . . . with reference 
 to the gates;' iipUa&at, 'to desire,' properly, 'to let one's 
 self loose,' 'to give one's self up,' 'to send one's self upon 
 a thing,' hence 'to be eager,' and, the genitive following, 
 'to be eager or desirous . . . with respect to a thing.' 
 E.g. Xen. Cyrop. i. 2, 3, (ua-jf^pdu ipyou ifUa^ae, ' to desire a 
 base deed,' properly, ' to let one's self loose,' ' to give one's 
 self the rein . . . with respect to a base deed.' (For other 
 verbs of like sense, see Kiihn. Ausf. Gr. 522, b.) 
 
 /. With the verbs roSsueev, ' to shoot the arrow,' dxovril^eev, 
 ' to throw the dart,' aroxdrea&eu, ' to aim at,' ^dUeiv, • to throw,' 
 Uvai, ' to send,' &c. E.g. II. xvii. 804, "Exriup ff air' Atavro; 
 dxovTiat Soupi tfauvtp, 'Hector, again, threw at Aias with 
 his glittering spear.' (See, for other examples, Kiilui. Ausf. 
 Gr. § 622, c.) These verbs express the act of shooting an 
 arrow, or the being an archer, throwing a dart, &c., absolutely; 
 and the genitive qualifies it by adding the particular object 
 to which it is to be referred. Thus, in the example above 
 given. Hector is represented as throwing his spear, dxovuae, 
 and the genitive Aiavroz shows that the throwing has exclu- 
 sively reference to Aias : ' he threw with his spear . . . 
 with reference to Aias,' which is expressed in English by 'he 
 threw his spear at Aias.' So, II. iv. 100, dtareuaov MsveXdou 
 xodaXlpoto, 'shoot at noble Menelaus,' that is, 'be an archer, 
 shoot the arrow, . . . with reference to noble Menelaus.' 
 
 g. With verbs signifying ' to meet,' as dvrdv, properly, ' to 
 be over against,' and its compounds ; and with those mean- 
 ing ' to approach,' ' come near,' as 7tekd{^eiv, nXr^aedf^etv, iyj-iZeiv, 
 &c. E.g. II. xvi. 433, Avv^aw yap iyw Tons' dvipo;, ' for I will 
 
38 
 
 SiaNIFIOATION OF THB CASES. 
 
 meet this man,' that is, ' I will be over against . . . with 
 respect to this man.' (See, for other examples, Kiihn. Ausf. 
 Gr. § 522, d.) Taking these verbs in their proper sense, 
 the nse of the genitive with them appears to be, as in the 
 preceding cases, to mark the specific object to which the 
 substantive idea of the verb is to be restricted. When the 
 dative case is used with these verbs, as it very commonly is in 
 the Attic writers, it is easy to see that it is introduced alto- 
 gether consistently with the proper meaning of this case, 
 and that there is nothing heroin opposed to the use of the 
 genitive as well, each case having its appropriate sense in 
 connection with these verbs, and neither standing in contra- 
 diction to the other. 
 
 h. With verbs such as nk^&etv, nXi^pouv, m/mXdvai, ftearduv, 
 ' to fill,' *to make full,' fiftetv, 'to bo full,' adrruv, 'to laden,' 
 &c. E.g. H. ix. 224, Tikijadfjisvoz ^ dtvoio diira^, ' having filled 
 a cup with wine,' that is, 'having made ft cup full . . . said 
 with reference to wine ;' Plat. Apol. p. 26, », ra Wuazayopou 
 fiefiXia . . . fi/iee TOUTwvTwvXoyatVf^ihehooksot AnaxagoTSin 
 are full of these discourses,' that is, ' are full . . . with 
 respect to, said with reference to, these discourses ;' the 
 genitive qualifying the notion of fulness contained in the 
 verb, and showing with reference to what specific object it 
 is to be taken. (For other examples, see Kiihn. Ausf Qr. 
 § 625.) 
 
 In the same way the genitive stands after the adjectives 
 nXioz, >r%:jc, ' full,* &c. (See Kuhn. Ausf. Gr. § 525, 1, bb.) 
 
 I. With verbs such as ia^ietu, ' to eat,' tpaysiv, ' to devour,' 
 itiviiv, ' to drink,' the accusative and genitive cases arc both 
 employed ; the latter to express that of which one eats ; 
 e.g. Od. ix. 102, /e^io t<c XotoIo ipayotv vStnoto Xddono, ' lest 
 any one should eat of the lotus, and forget the return home.' 
 The genitive is said to denote that of which only a part is 
 eaten, drunk, &c., while the accusative marks the object 
 entirely eaten, &c. And this statement may be accepted as 
 practically true, in part at least; yet without admitting that 
 it furnishes a satisfactory explanation of the ground of dif- 
 ference in the use of the genitive and accusative cases with 
 such verbs as those above named. The accusative marks 
 
 GENITIVE CASE. 
 
 89 
 
 the extent of the act of eating or drinking, either without 
 the article, by showing to what object among many it reaches, 
 as, for example, Od. ix. 347, KuxXmip, r^, nU ohov, insi ^dye; 
 dv8f)6ftsa xfiia, * come, Cyclops, drink wine, since you have 
 eaten human flesh ;' or with the article, by showing how far 
 the object eaten or drunk is involved, namely, to its entire 
 amount, the accusative of the object, already separated from 
 the other objects of its class by the article, being the 
 measure of the action ; e.g. Xen. Cyrop. i. 3, 9, oiix ixmoiuu 
 aurbz xbv olvov, ' I do not myself drink up the wine.' In the 
 former case, the accusative olvop does not express the amount 
 of the wine drunk, whether the whole or the part, but that 
 the drinking reaches to or embraces wine, and not other 
 proper objects of drinking, and so distinguishes it from these ; 
 just as dvdpofua xpia after ^dyez shows that the eating 
 embraces only human flesh, and not other proper objects of 
 eating, and so distinguislies it from these. In the latter case, 
 the accusative rbv ohou docs mark the extent to which the 
 drinking goes with regard to a particular supply of wine, 
 already separated from other supplies of wine by the article; 
 and as the measure of the drinking is the object drunk, as 
 marked by the accusative, it results that the whole of the 
 wine is embraced in the drinking. The genitive merely 
 refers the eating or drinking to a special object, distinguish- 
 ing it thereby from all other cases of eating or drinking ; so 
 that, when it is said, ft^nw r<c Xwroio ipufdtv, the object of 
 introducing the genitive is to give a more exact specification 
 of the eating, referring it to a particular object, the lotus, 
 and causing it to be understood exclusively of this. In 
 such case, the genitive docs not directly express that only 
 a part of the lotus is eaten : it does no more than show with 
 respect to what the eating is alleged ; and this is equivalent 
 to the English expression 'to eat of a thing;' but this sense 
 of a part of the thing being eaten is inferred from the nature 
 of the reference expressed by the genitive. When a man's 
 eating is qualified by referring it to a particular kind of • 
 food, say the lotus, no one would think of it as including all 
 the lotus in the world. 
 The genitive, as used with these verbs, and the accusa- 
 
40 
 
 SiaNIFIOATION OF THE CASES. 
 
 tive, ia the former of the two ways in which it is employed 
 with, them, although capable of being clearly distinguished 
 by regarding attentively the proper sense of each case, are 
 confounded more or less in the English rendering, and 
 really express very nearly the same meaning, only reached 
 in a different way. 
 
 Here may be mentioned the verbs o^«v, ' to smell,' or ' to 
 have an odor,' nvieev, * to reek,' • to give forth an odor,' fol- 
 lowed by the genitive of that of which a thing smells ; e.g. 
 Aristoph. Ran. 341, <Lc ijdu fwt npoainveuae ^oipeiaiv xpeaiv, 
 'how sweetly to me it smelt of swine's flesh !' Id. Acliarn. 
 190, o^ouai ncTTTjz ««« jzapaurxeurfi, 'they smell of pitch and 
 naval stores.' Here, again, observing that the verbs are 
 neuter, the genitive qualifies the substantive idea of the 
 verb, the notion of a scent or odor which it expresses, and 
 refers it for its exact character to a specific object having 
 properties suited to the general sense of the verb, so that 
 this shall be described, not as any odor indifibrcntiy, but as 
 a peculiar odor, for example, of pitch, of swine's flesh, &c. 
 (For other examples, see Kithn. Ausf. Gr. § 527, d.) 
 
 k. With the verbs anivduv, ' to make libations,' nponivuv, 
 'to drink to one's health,' intxiia&ac, 'to cause wine to be 
 poured out,' and, hence, 'to drink to,' followed by the geni- 
 tive to mark the person to whom, in whose honor, one 
 pours out wine, drinks, &c. E.g. Aristoph. Eq. 106, anovSijv 
 Xa^k 8^, xat anitaov dya&ou Jaipot/oz, ' make a libation to the 
 good dDeraon.' Here the genitive ijadolj daipovoz qualifies 
 the substantive idea of libation contained in aniiaov, and 
 shows the object to which it is to be specifically referred, to 
 which it exclusively pertains ; so that it shall not be a liba- 
 tion taken absolutely, but one relating to, made with re- 
 spect to, 'the good dsemon.' It would bo expressed in 
 English, though not without ambiguity, by 'a libation of 
 the good dffimon,' and is precisely the same genitive that is 
 used objectively, as the grammars say ; as in euypara Ilai- 
 , JidSoz, 'vows to Pallas,' that is, 'vows that have reference to 
 Pallas,' of which Pallas is the object. It is the same geni- 
 tive, essentially, that occurs after many adverbs and prepo- 
 sitions; as Xcn. Anab. iv. 3, 29, pij Trpoaca rou Ttorapm 
 
 GENITIVE CASE. 
 
 41 
 
 npo^aivtiv, 'not to advance forwards in the river,' that is, 
 < with respect to the river.' (For other examples, sec Kiihn. 
 Ausf. Qr. § 537, a.) 
 
 I. With verbs expressing the internal and external -per- 
 ceptions, acts of attention, &c. ; as ixouetv, 'to hear,' dxpoua- 
 &<u, 'to hear,' xXuuv, ' to hear,' 'to hearken to,' diroSixsa&cu, 
 'to heed,' properly, 'to receive from a person what he 
 enjoins,' nuv&dv&adat, 'to learn,' alo9'dveo&ae, 'to perceive,' 
 ftTfvotitxuv, 'to perceive,' commonly used with the accusative, 
 da^paifea&uu, ' to smell,' pav9dvuv, ' to learn,' auvcivai, ' to 
 understand,' 'to bo conscious.' These are generally fol- 
 lowed by the genitive case to mark the object with refer- 
 ence to which the action of the verb is performed, and 
 which in English is considered as the direct object. E.g. 
 II. i. 27, xXu9i peu, ' hear me;' Soph. Aj. 1161, cuoj^earov xXueiv 
 dvSpbz puToiou ipXaxip' Sm] /lu&oopSvou, 'it is most shameful to 
 hearken to a man that speaks what is foolish ;' Herod, i. 47, 
 xat xtofou auMtr^iu xai ou ifiovtwroz dxoow, ' I both understand 
 the deaf and hear the dumb.' (See Xiihn. Ausf. Gr. § 
 528, e.) 
 
 It should be remarked that some of these verbs have the 
 accusative also, some, as those of ' seeing,' bpilv, kc, almost 
 exclusively ; and that the accusative and genitive are both 
 capable of being employed to express either persons or 
 things. (See Kuhn. Ausf. Qr. § 528, Aum. 3.) 
 
 In such examples as Od. xii. 389, rauTa d' iytav ijxoutTa 
 KaXu^'oiJz ifixopoto, ' I heard this from Calypso,' there is no 
 difliculty in seeing that the accusative raiJra is used, not 
 simply because it refers to things and not to persons, but 
 either because it is the direct object of rjxuuaa used 
 transitivel}', or, whi»;h is more probably true, because it 
 bears to the act of hearing the relation expressed by 'as to,' 
 'as regards,' and shows in what extent the term ^xuuaa is to 
 be taken ; ' I heard ... as regards these things.' And as 
 to the genitive, in this and similar examples, it is introduced 
 to qualify raura ^xouaa by showing the person to whom the 
 matter stated is to be referred, so as that it shall be a hear- 
 ing that respects Calypso, and not another; in the samo 
 w^y that in tiixpuxa tlaXXdSoz, 'the vows of Pallas,' that is, 
 
42 
 
 SIQNIFIOATION OF TUB CASES. 
 
 • the VOWS made to Pallas,' IIaXkddo(: indicates the object to 
 which iitxnara is to be referred. That the genitive Kaiu^ouc 
 means the person from whom a thing is heard, is no more 
 shown by the genitive alone than it is distinctly expressed 
 by the genitive UaXMdo; that the goddess is the object to 
 whom vows are made ; in both cases alike, the exact con- 
 nection in which the object introduced by the genitive 
 stands to that which it qualifies is to be gathered from the 
 circumstances, andAot from any thing contained in the 
 genitive itself. So in Xen. Cyrop. iii. 1, 1, i; ^xouae zou 
 djTihu Tu napd tou Kupou, i^enXdj^, 'when he heard from 
 the mesaenger the message from Cyrus, he was alarmed,' 
 the accusative rd napi tou Kupou denotes the things heard, 
 that is, properly speaking, the objects with regard to which 
 he was a hearer ; and tou djjikou expresses that by which 
 the hearing, as it here stands, is distinguislied from any 
 other hearing, namely, marks it as referring to the messen- 
 ger, and-, having regard to the character and office of such a 
 person, as being derived from him. According to this 
 view, the genitive with verbs of this class is used in the 
 same sense that it has hitherto presented, and obtains the 
 peculiarity that makes it seem to differ from the circum- 
 stances in which it stands, that is, from the obvious relations 
 existing between the noun introduced by the genitive and 
 the term which it qualifies. 
 
 m. The genitive is used also with such verbs as xpivetu, 
 'to judge,' 'to decide,' icerrffe/v, 'to investigate,' eiTteiv, 
 fpdl^eiu, <fduai, 'to say,' 'to tell," drjXouv, 'to make manifest,' 
 and serves to denote the object about, or concerning which, 
 the 'judging,' &c. is performed. E.g. Od. xi. 174, eeni Si 
 not nazpoz Te xai ulioz, 8v xaTiXtmov, 'tell me of, that is, 
 about, concerning, with respect to, my father, and my son, 
 whom I left behind;' Soph. Trach. 1122, r^f /i^r/«)c ijxw tJ^z 
 i/afi ifpdatov, iv o[<:\vw iariv, ' I am come to tell you of, that 
 is, with respect to, my mother, in what circumstances she 
 now iH.' The entire similarity of the Greek and English 
 construction, in some of the cases embraced in tiiis para- 
 graph, makes it easy to admit that the genitive case, as here 
 employed, conforms to what has hitherto been seen to bo 
 
 OENITIVB CASE. 
 
 43 
 
 its proper office, namely^ to qualify the expression upon 
 which it attends by referring it to a particular object or set 
 of objects, so that it shall be understood as used with respect 
 to it exclusively. 
 
 The preposition 7re/>/ is frequently added to verbs of this 
 class ; but it does not alter the proper sense of the genitive, 
 which is then transferred as a definition from the substan- 
 tive idea of the verb to the preposition, or, at least, to the 
 substantive idea of the verb as qualifiei^ by the preposition. 
 (For the list of verbs, and for examples, see Eiihn. Ausf. 
 Gr. S 458, f.) 
 
 n. In the same way the genitive is used with such verbs 
 as Tlaaa&ai, Te/twpeca3ai, and, in the tragic writers, Te/i(opstv, 
 ' to requite,' ' to take vengeance,' to mark the object for, on 
 account of which, vengeance is taken. E.g. Od. iii. 206, 
 Tiaua^at iivijOT^paz Onsp^aairiz dHj-eti^^, ' to punish or requite 
 the suitors for their grievous insolence ;' Herod, iii. 145, 
 Tobz imxoupouc . . . Ti/iwp'^ao/uu r^c iv&d8e dmtioz, 'I will 
 requite their helpers for (that is, with respect to) their 
 coming Hither.' (See Kiihn. Ausf. Gr. § 536.) 
 
 0. In like manner the genitive is used with a number of 
 verbs employed as law terras, such as ahtaadai, ' to bring a 
 charge against,' duoxsiv, 'to prosecute,' ine^iivai, 'to charge 
 against,' eladytev, CTrdyetu, ' to prosecute,' ' to impeach,' ypd- 
 (fta&at, ' to enter a charge or accusation,' ^suxuv, 'to be a 
 defendant,' dtxdl^etv, 'to decide as judge,' rarely with the 
 genitive, xpivetv, 'to judge,' 'decide between,' alpsiv, 'to 
 gain a suit,' SJ-wvai, 'to be cast in a suit.' With such verbs 
 the genitive is used to mark the crime of which one is 
 accused, that for which he is condemned, &c. E.g. Herod, 
 vi. 104, (MthedSea) of i^3poe iSuoiav Tupuwido^ r^c i^ Xep- 
 aov^mp, 'his enemies pro.secuted Miltiadcs for his tyranny 
 in the Chersonesus ;' Xen. Cyrop. i. 2, 7, dtxd^^ouat dk xai 
 iyxXi^liazoe: . . . dj^aptaria^, 'they pronounce judgment also 
 on the charge of ingratitude.' That is, ' his enemies pro- 
 secuted Miltiadcs . . . with respect to, in the matter of, hia 
 tyranny;' 'they pronounce judgment . . . with respect to, 
 in the matter of, the charge of ingratitude.' When nepi or 
 ivexa is employed after these verbs, and dvu after verbs sig- 
 
44 
 
 SIQNIFIOATIOir OF THE CASES. 
 
 nifying ' to requite,' they do not alter the sense of the geni- 
 tive, properly speaking, bat its office of definition is trans- 
 ferred, as was remarked above, from the substantive idea 
 of the verb to the preposition, or to the substantive idea of 
 the verb as qualified by the preposition. 
 
 Further, the genitive is used with these verbs of accusing 
 &c., to denote the penalty to which a person is condemned; 
 e.g. Plat. Rep. vii. p. 658, A, AvdpwTcwv xmaipritput&ivTwv 
 ^avdrou ^ tpapfi, ' men condemned to death or exile ;' that 
 is, 'condemned . . . with respect to, with reference to, 
 death or exile,' the genitive confining the condemnation to 
 a specific thing, which is the penalty. The Latin employs 
 the ablative instead, as, eapite, fortunis damnatus, ' condemned 
 to the loss of life and fortune,' this case showing wherein 
 the condemnation consists. The genitive as here used dif- 
 fers from the same case denoting the subject-matter of the 
 accusation, &c., only in the notion conveyed by the noun 
 which it introduces in either instance, and in the natural 
 relations which this holds to the verb of accusing, &c. To 
 condemn . . . with respect to death, that is, to make a 
 condemnation which is characterized as having reference 
 to death, or which is to be understood as affirmed in this 
 respect exclusively, is the same thing as to condemn to 
 death ; just as to accuse . . . with respect to tyranny, that 
 is, to make an accusation which is to be taken as having 
 specific reference to tyranny, is the same thing as to accuse 
 of tyranny. 
 
 2y. The genitive is used with verbs which signify the 
 having dominion, and the exercising various offices; as, 
 xupceueiu, 'to be master,' xotpauslv, 'to be lord or master,' 
 deaTTo^eev, 'to be master,' xopavvuv, rupavveueiv, 'to bo a 
 tyraiinus,' OTpanfjrelu, ' to be a commander,' aTparrjXaTetv, 
 ' to be the leader of an army,' imrpomdeiv, ' to be an over- 
 seer or guardian,' dvdoaetu, 'to be a king,' aiaufivav, < to be 
 an ossymnus,' de/uoTtuecv, 'to be a ruler,' fiaaikeOscv, ' to be a 
 king,' dpx^tv, dp][eueiv, ' to be a ruler,' imaraTuv, ' to be a 
 master,' &c., ^ye/jLoveijeeVf ^yeia9at, ' to be a guide or leader,' 
 ](oprjeiv, ' to be a choragus,' xpartiv, ' to have the mastery 
 over,' properly, 'to be strong;' also with the adjectives 
 
 GENITIVE CASE. 
 
 45 
 
 iyxpavjc, 'having the mastery or control,' and dxpanjt;, 
 'without the mastery or control.' 
 
 With such words the genitive is employed to mark the 
 precise object with respect to which one is master, tyran- 
 nus, &c. E.g. II. i. 38, Tevidoio lipt dvdaauz, 'who dost with 
 might rule over Tencdos,' that is, ' who art ruler . . . with 
 respect to Tencdos;' Herod, vii. 97, too 8k vauzixoo iarpar^- 
 yeov oeSe, ' of the naval armament the following were the 
 commanders.' (For the list of verbs, and for the examples, 
 see Kuhn. Ausf. Qr. § 538.) 
 
 The dative also, consistently with its proper sense, is 
 sometimes employed with these verbs. (See Kiihn. Ausf. 
 Gr. § 538, Anm. 2, who incorrectly interprets it as the loca- 
 tivus, on the insufficient ground that the prepositions iu 
 and /lerd arc sometimes found conjoined with this dative.) 
 
 q. Obviously requiring the same interpretation is the 
 genitive used Avith such verbs as npoi^eiv, bjtipipipeiv, Onep- 
 ^dXXeiv, Imspiy^uv, ' to excel ;' nepq^iYveadou, nepisivat, ' to have 
 the advantage,' 'to prevail,' 'to survive;' nptoTeuseu, dpiareu- 
 uv, xpaTiareueiv, ' to have the pre-eminence,' properly, ' to be 
 first,' &c. ; xaUiariustv, 'to surpass in beauty;' and with 
 verbs expressing the opposite states to these, as, ^zrdal^m, 
 peiouo&at, vixaa^ai, barepiiv, barepii^etv, uarepou dvai, xparsta- 
 &at, iXazToua^at, peiovsxreiv, &c., 'to bo inferior,' &c. E.g. 
 Od. xviii. 248, iTzei nepUaat yuvcuxfov | el86z re niyedoz re, 
 'since you surpass women both in beauty and stature;' Xen. 
 Cyrop. iii. 1, 19, r«Cjre« . .• . nepteyivou auTorJ, ' you excelled 
 him in speed,' that is, 'you came ofi" superior in speed . . . 
 with respect to him, in the case of him.' (For the list of 
 verbs, and for other examples, see Kuhn. Ausf. Gr. § 539.) 
 
 In such cases as the above, as in so many preceding, the 
 genitive is introduced to give a more exact definition of 
 the substantive idea contained in the verb, by marking the 
 object with respect to which exclusively it is affinncd. 
 When it is said, repUaat, ' you are superior,' the expression 
 is absolute ; when it is added, yuvatxiov, ' with respect to wo- 
 men,' the sense is qualified by having introduced after it 
 by the genitiv6 case a specific object, or class of objects, 
 witli reference to which it is to bo taken. 
 
46 
 
 BIONIFIOAnON OF THB CASES. 
 
 r. In connection with the foregoing instances of the use 
 of the genitive may be mentioned its employment with 
 verbs and adjectives expressing various acts, states, and 
 feelings of the mind, as fu/ti/ijaxeiv, fitfivrjaKtadat, fivtjfiovtituv, 
 fiuoff&au, * to remember,' &c. ; Xavddvea&m, ' to forget;' Im- 
 Ou/ieiv, ' to desire ;' ipuv, ipaa&at, ifieipetv, {fieipea&at,^ to long 
 for;' nodeiv, 'to regret;' olxreipeiv, dXyeiv, d86pea&at, dko- 
 tpupea&at, 'to pity,* 'to grieve,' 'to be sorry,' 'to bewail;' 
 ^oXoiMjOat, y(toead<u, prjvUiv, &t}poua9ai, xoretv, S.yr9iadat, Jfo^e- 
 Tzaivetv, 'to be augrj-,' 'to be enraged,' 'to be vexed,' &c.; 
 ip9oveiv, psyaipetv, ' to envy;' rdXaz, ax^rho;, piho^, ' wretched ;' 
 also with verbs signifying ' to care for,' • to disregard,' &c., 
 that is, such as imply an earnest direction of one's thoughts 
 to a tiling, and their opposites ; as, impeXeca&u, and im/xiXea- 
 deu, ifpovnl^Etv, xi^deadae, ' to care for,' &c. ; ftiXee poe, ' it con- 
 cerns me,' ' I am concerned,' perapiXee pot, ' I repent,' dpiXeiv, 
 'to neglect,' iXqiopilv, 'to count of little value,' 'to con- 
 temn ;' ifuXdzTEodae, ' to be on one's guard,' <peilisa9ai, * to 
 spare,' &c. ; also verbs giving expression to various senti- 
 ments, as, daupd^tev, iyaadat, ' to admire,' inatvecv, ' to 
 praise,' pi/ufeadeu, 'to blame,' aia^uvea&at, ^ to be ashamed,' 
 ivttdil^uv, 'to reproach,' which, in prose, has the accusative. 
 (See KUhn. Ausf. Gr. §§529, 532, 534, 535.) 
 
 With all these verbs and adjectives the genitive is em- 
 ployed to qualify the feelings &c. which they express, by 
 referring them to a specific object with respect to which 
 they are entertained ; e.g. II. xvi. 357, of 8e <fii,%to \ ihaxd- 
 ddou puijaat/To, XadovTO re 9o6pc8oz d^c> 'but they remem- 
 bered fearful flight, and forgot impetuous bravery,' that is, 
 ' they were mindful . . . with respect to fearful flight, and 
 wore forgetful , . . with respect to impetuous bravery;' 
 Thucyd. i. 84, rd ppaSb xat piXXov, 8 fUpifovrat pdXtara ^pwv, 
 pi] aiaj(6ueade, 'which most of all they blame in us,' that is, 
 ' wLicli they blame, or find fault with, . . . with respect to 
 us,' or 'in our case;' Xen. Ages. ii. 7, rdd' aurou dyapai, *I 
 admire these following things in him,' that is, 'with respect 
 to him ;' Plat. Rep. iv. p. 438, a, olidsii; norou iniOupsc, dXXd 
 j^pijaTuu noTou, ' no one desires drink, but good drink,' that 
 
 aENITIVE CASE. 
 
 47 
 
 is, ' no one is desirous . . . with respect to drink, but . . . 
 with respect to good drink.' 
 
 It may be observed that the accusative also is used with 
 some of these verbs; but in a different sense from the geni- 
 tive; namely, to mark how far the feeling goes; as in the 
 example above cited from Thucydides, t6 ftpaSb xat piXXov 
 pij aiaj[uveaOe, ' be not ashamed of our slowness and delay,' 
 that is, 'as regards, as far as is concerned, our slowness and 
 delay ;' while the genitive i^pwv used with piptpovrai merely 
 shows the object with respect to which, as distinguished 
 from other objects, the sentiment of blame is expressed, 
 and is equivalent to 'with respect to us,' 'in our case." 
 And so, in the example from Xenophon, rdd' dyapae, 'I 
 admire these following things,' that is, 'I admire ... as 
 regards these following things,' ' as far as go these follow- 
 ing things ;' but ourou, ' with reference to him,' ' in his case.' 
 
 s. To this same class may be referred the genitive used 
 with certain adjectives expressing the having capacities or 
 endowments, and their opposites ; as, Ipneipo^, ' practised,' 
 'having experience,' dnetpoz, 'inexperienced,' ia-furj^/iwv, 
 iniardpevoz, ' knowing,' ' having acquintance with,' divszcaTi^- 
 pmv, 'without acquaintance with,' &c. ; also tlie genitive 
 used with the verb nupdadat, 'to make trial of.' E.g. 
 Herod, ii. 49, x7fi Ooaii^z tulit/jz obx . . . dSaifi, dXX' ipTssipo;, 
 ' not unacquainted witli this sacrifice, but familiar with it,' 
 that is, ' with respect to it.' (For the list of adjectives, and 
 for examples, see KUhn. Ausf. Gr. § 530.) 
 
 t. Here may be mentioned also the genitive used with 
 verbs and adjectives expressing difference, as Siafipuv, Std- 
 fopoz, dX?MZ, dXXoTpcoz, ertpoz, and what is opposed, as, Ivav- 
 zioz; also ipnaXtv, 'back,' 'contrariwise.' To such verbs 
 and adjectives the genitive is added to show with respect 
 to what specific object the difference exists; e.g. Thucyd. 
 i. 28, <p'tXoi)z Ttotua&ac . . . hipoui; ztov vw ovzwv, ' to acquire 
 as friends other parties than those who are now so,' that is, 
 ' other or different parties . . . said with respect to those 
 who arc now so ;' Plat. Menon. p. 87, o, 7c6zep6v itjztu inta- 
 TTfjpij ^ dptTTj, ^ dXXdcov zTj; imaz^/aji;; ' is virtue knowledge, or 
 is it a different thing from, that is, with respect to, know- 
 
48 
 
 SIGNIFIOATION OF THK CASES. 
 
 ledge?' That Siafipeiv admits also other constructions, as 
 £?c n, and n, (see Etihn. Ausf. Gr. § 557, Anm. 1,) docs not af- 
 fect the explanation of the genitive case when it occurs with 
 it; and these other constructions may be easily explained. 
 
 u. To this place may be referred, as being of the same 
 nature, the genitive case used with the comparative form 
 of the adjective, which may Ue considered as forming with 
 elvat an intransitive verb similar to many of the preceding. 
 K.g. Eurip. Med. 965, •j^puahz Sk xpeiaaiov pupiiov Xoytov fipo- 
 Toiz, 'hut witli men gold is more potent than ten thousand 
 arguments;' that is, 'more potent . . . considered with 
 respect to ten thousand arguments.' It is plain that the 
 genitive is added to xpdaamv to qualify the sense in which 
 it is to be taken, by marking an objcct^or group of objects 
 with reference to which specifically it is affirmed, so that it 
 shall mean ' more potent,' not in any conceivable sense, 
 but definitely in this one, pajpuov Xoycov, ' with respect to ten 
 thousand arguments.' To mark this limitation of the sense 
 of the comparative adjective, the English employs than, 
 which, like the Latin quaniy is an accusative of measure, 
 showing, as in the example above given, the extent up to 
 which the proposition 'gold is more potent' is to Lc under- 
 stood as true. That is, it effects the object of confining 
 the preceding statement within definite limits by a dif- 
 ferent method; just as the Greek language also attains 
 somewhat the same end in another way, by employing ^, 
 ' than,' which is probably the same particle that is elsewhere 
 translated by ' or.' 
 
 The same explanation applies to the genitive case em- 
 ployed with certain adjectives, such as dmldaioz, 'twice- 
 told,' rpaiMatoz, 'three times as many,' 8mX6iJ(;, 'twofold,' 
 Tpmlouz, ' threefold,' nepiaoSc, ' over and above,' ' more than 
 enough,' St; riaoi;, ' twice as much,' &c. E.g. llerod. vii. 
 48, TO 'EXXTjvtxov arpdreu/ta ^aiverae icoXXanXijaeov iasadeu ro5 
 fj/jteripou, ' it seems that the Greek army will be many times 
 greater than our army,' that is, 'greater . . . considered 
 with respect to our army,' ' in the case of our army.' So 
 the genitive with ij/ao^of ; e.g. Xen. Anab. i. 3, 21, dmaj^vsi- 
 Toe ^luiXtov TzHat duaav oh Trpirepov ifepov, 'half as much 
 
 QENITIVE CASE. 
 
 49 
 
 again as they received before,' that is, < half as mucli again 
 . . . considered with respect to what they received before.' 
 (For the list of adjectives, and for examples, see Kiihu. 
 Ausf. Gr. § 540, b.) 
 
 V. In Homer and Ilesiod, even the verbs iXduv, ' to come,' 
 otxveiv, ' to go,' itwXeia9ai, ' to frequent,' are attended by the 
 genitive case to denote the object to which the act of 
 coming, &c. is to bo referred as pertaining to it, and which 
 thus becomes its object ; e.g. II. xiii. 252, iji reu djyeXtij^ /tsr' 
 ip' ^Xu&ez ; ' or have you come for me to bring some mes- 
 sage ?' that is, ' with a view to, with the purpose of, some 
 message?' The genitive shows that the coming is to be 
 referred to a specific object, that it is a coming that has 
 respect to a message; and that this is the object bad in 
 view in the coming is readily inferred from the circum- 
 stances. (For the examples, see EUhu. Ausf. Gr. § 537, b.) 
 
 10. Of the same nature with the genitive just mentioned 
 is that which occurs in the construction of roD and the 
 infinitive to express the object or purpose of the action 
 which it qualifies. E.g. Thuc. i. 4, Mtva)^ t6 Xr^auxbu xadrjpet 
 ixT^Z daXaaarfi roij to; npoaidouz paXXov iivai aitT<p, 'to the 
 end that his revenues might the better come in to him ;' 
 Xen. Cyrop. i. (5, 4, tou prj dta^euyuv rbv Xdymv ix uov dcxrumv 
 axojtovz . . . xadiarrji;, 'you station look-outs in order that 
 the hare may not escape through the toils.' In the latter 
 example, the genitive zou //^ StaipeiiYscv qualifies the state- 
 ment axoitouz xa&ioTrjc, so that the stationing look-outs shall 
 be understood to be made, not absolutely, but with a s]:)e- 
 cific reference, namely, 'with reference to the hare's not 
 escaping through the toils.' And the circumstances of the 
 statement show that this is equivalent to the object had in 
 view. For it should be continually borne in mind, that 
 when once the genitive is added to show in what precise 
 view, or with what exact reference, a term or statement is 
 to be taken, the qualification will include whatever is sug- 
 gested by the natural relations of the object qualifying and 
 the thing qualified. Thus, when a huntsman spreads nets 
 and drives hares into them, and sets watchers with a refer- 
 ence to the hare's not escaping from the nets, it is obvious, 
 
 4 
 
50 
 
 EIONIFICATION OF THE CASES. 
 
 from the proper office of watchers or look-outs, and from 
 the nature of the action- with reference to or with a 
 view to which they are stationed, that this latter is the 
 object or purpose of their being stationed ; that is, that 
 they are stationed in order that the hare may not escape. 
 So that it may bo said that when the genitive, as above 
 used, serves to denote the object or purpose of an action, it 
 effects this end by introducing merely an object to which 
 specifically the action is to be considered as having refer- 
 ence, and not by virtue of any notion of purpose contained in 
 the genitive itself; and that, consequently, the idea of pur- 
 pose is left to be suggested by the natural relations existing 
 between the action qualified and the term by which it is 
 qualified ; and, lastly, that the genitive performs here no 
 more than its common office. 
 
 X. The genitive with the participle, called the genitive 
 absolute, affords another instance of the signification of 
 this case so frequently mentioned, the object of the geni- 
 tive, in this construction, being' to define an action by 
 introducing another action or state to mark the circum- 
 stances of time, the occasion, ground, reason, or condition, 
 under which it occurs. E.g. Xen. Anab. iv. 3, 17, jro/^eoo- 
 liiviov d' auT&v AvTmapigeaav al rd^eii; twv Imziwv, ' while they 
 were proceeding on their march, the companies of horse- 
 men moved along abreast of them on the other side.' The 
 chief proposition, that which is to be qualified, is dvrmaftjje- 
 aav u\ xa^uz rwv iJtTcfwv, ' the companies of horsemen moved 
 along abreast on the other side,' and the genitive nofteuo- 
 fiivotv S' auTwv marks the circumstances of time, or, perhaps, 
 the occasion, under or upon which this was done; 'the 
 companies of horsemen moved along, abreast on the other 
 side . . . while they were proceeding on their march.' 
 The genitive does not of itself express the notions of time, 
 occasion, ground or reason, and condition, these being duo 
 to the attributive sense of the participle ; but is confined 
 to the simple office of pointing out the participle and its 
 noun as the object to which the action is referred for its 
 qualification. In the above example, the genitive shows 
 that the statement that * the companies of horsemen moved 
 
 GENITIVE CASE. 
 
 61 
 
 along abreast on the other side' is to bo taken with the 
 qualification expressed by the forms nopeuoftiuatv S' aurwv, 
 ' as they were proceeding on their march ;' just as in the 
 example ci oyidai rou Ttorafioti, ' the banks of the river,' the 
 genitive ruD itora/jiou is added to show that the term al o^9at 
 is to be restricted to a particular case, so as to mean, not 
 the banks generally, but specifically the banks of the river. 
 Now, what this specification shall be depends upon the 
 nature of the qualifying term. As the participle comprises 
 in its meaning, first, the action or other substantive idea 
 of the verb, and, secondly, an attributive sense, equivalent 
 to ' when,' ' while,' ' in,' ' as,' 'since,' ' because,' ' if,' ' though,' 
 that is, to time, occasion, ground, reason, and condition, 
 the specific case to which a previous statement is restricted, 
 when the participle is introduced by the genitive as its 
 qualification, will be that of time, occasion, ground, reason, 
 or condition of the action expressed by the participle. And, 
 as a result, it may be said that the genitive, in this con- 
 struction of the genitive absolute, does not differ at all 
 from the genitive as elsewhere used, the seeming diflcrcnce 
 between this and other cases of the use of the genitive lying 
 wholly in the nature of the participle or qualifying term. 
 
 The construction of the genitive with the participle, as 
 above explained, furnishes a very striking proof of the fact, 
 that the variety of meanings which this case seemingly 
 bears is wholly due to the nature of the qualifying terra 
 and to its obvious relations to the term qualified, and not to 
 any thing in the genitive itself. For here, fortunately, the 
 very peculiarity which distinguishes this from other qualifi- 
 cations made by the genitive, namely, the indication of the 
 circumstances generally, of the time, occasion, ground, 
 reason, or condition of the action qualified, can be shown 
 to belong to the participle itself, being equally present when 
 the participle is used in other cases besides the genitive, and 
 absent from the genitive when the participle is not used, 
 saving only the instances in which the genitive expresses 
 time by introducing a denomination of time, and those in 
 which like attributive notions are conveyed by other adjec- 
 tive forms, or by a noun used attributively. 
 
52 
 
 SIGNIFICATION OF THE CASES. 
 
 5. General View. — Thus it has been seen from on ex- 
 amination in detail of the Actual uses of the genitive case, 
 no variety having been designedly omitted, that it lias one 
 uniform office, namely, that of defining a preceding term 
 or statement by introducing an object or class of objects 
 to which specifically it is to be referred for a more exact 
 qualification of its sense ; that the precise character of the 
 specification introduced by the genitive case depends upon 
 the nature of the term used as a qualification, considered 
 relatively to the term which it defines; that, hence, this 
 specification will present many varieties, while the geni- 
 tive itself has one and the same meaning. Thus, to re- 
 cite some of the chief of these varieties, due to the nature 
 of the object introduced by the genitive and to its obvious 
 relations to the thing qualified, and not to the genitive 
 itself: 
 
 a. The mpre exact definition made by the genitive may 
 amount to no more than a mere indication of the object 
 with respect to which exclusively an action, a state of mind, 
 a position in space, &c. is to bo understood as affirmed ; as 
 where the genitive stands after many intransitive and middle 
 verbs, adjectives, prepositions, adverbs, the comparative form 
 of the adjective, &c. 
 
 6. The more exact definition introduced by the genitive 
 serves to mark the class or category to which the term 
 qualified is to be referred ; as where it attends the superla- 
 tive degree, where it denotes the nation to which a person 
 or custom belongs, the material of which a thing is made, 
 the price at which it is valued, &c. 
 
 c. The more exact definition made by the genitive gives 
 the characterization of an object with respect to birth, capa- 
 city, faculty, office, &c. ; as where, after the verbs ecvat and 
 ylyvMOut, such genitives as AvSphz dyadou, fiaadiio^, Sen/oH 
 fnjropo^, are used to show that an action or state is the 
 property, duty, &c. of a certain character, office, and the 
 like. 
 
 d. The more exact .definition made by the genitive case 
 serves to designate what particular kind or vaj-iety is in- 
 tended of a thing capable of having many kinds or varieties; 
 
 DATIVE CASE. 
 
 53 
 
 as where the genitive is used as the qualification of many 
 nouns; e.g. rd rou divSpou tpuXXa, 'the leaves of the tree,' 
 af o'jidat rot> noTa/jiou, 'the banks of the river.' 
 
 e. The more exact definition, or specific reference, made by 
 the genitive case serves to denote the time, space, or relative 
 position of an action or object; as where the objects intro- 
 duced by this case are denominations of time, names of 
 places, or cxprcsuions of relative position, such as dpiarefid;, 
 Se^ea^, oh, nou ; 
 
 /. The more exact definition made by the genitive marks 
 cither the circumstances generally, or the time, occasion, 
 ground, reason, or condition, of the action qualified ; as 
 where the genitive case of a noun, with a participle agreeing, 
 or the genitive absolute, as it is called, is employed as the 
 qualifying term. 
 
 g. The more exact definition made by the genitive de- 
 notes the object had in view in any action ; as where rou with 
 the infinitive is used after an action to state its purpose. 
 
 Lastly, it may be added, that it has been seen that the 
 genitive differs from the accusative, in the cases where they 
 are likely to be confounded, in this, that while the latter 
 limits a term by marking the extent to which it reaches, 
 whether it thereby shows the point up to which an object is 
 aflccted, or that an action reaches one object and not others 
 of a number, the former does no more than name that 
 object out of many with reference to which the qualified 
 term or statement is to be understood. 
 
 II. OF THE DATIVE CASE. 
 
 The dative case, being more simple in its meaning, and 
 ordinarily, at least, of obvious interpretation, will require 
 rather briefer notice. It will be necessary, however, for the 
 present purpose, to examine its principal uses in the language, 
 and, by ascertaining its meaning in each, to determine as 
 accurately as may be its proper sense. 
 
 It may be observed, beforehand, that it has been con- 
 sidered right to separate the dative proper and its uses from 
 the ablative ; that is, from the case which, having the same 
 form with the dative, contains the sense of the iustrumentalis 
 
64 
 
 SiaNIFIOATION OF THE CASES. 
 
 aud locativus. This, indeed, is requisite, in order to avoid 
 the confusion and error which almost inevitably result from 
 blending them under one head. 
 
 1. The dative is commonly used of a personal object, a 
 few cases comparatively occurring in which it is used of 
 things. It is added to verbs, adjectives, nouns, adverbs, 
 prepositions, interjections, and to whole phrases, and may 
 commonly be rendered in English by 'to' or «for,' but 
 often requires other forms of expression. Thus, the dative 
 occurs : 
 
 a. With verbs signifying <to give,' «to take away," as, 
 dtdSvai u Tivi, «to give something to a person," 8w(>ua9ai u / • 
 uvi, 'to present something to a person,' A,paipua»m u rcvi, '.*■ 
 'to take away something from a person,' Sipndreiv «' rwi, 'to * 
 rob a person of something.' E.g. Od. i. 9, ubriLp 6 xdiaiv 
 dtpeikero t^oart/iov fjfiap, 'but he took away from them the 
 day of return;' Xcn. Cyrop. iv. 6, 10, inl Tuirot^, i<pyj, ij-tb 
 . . . dlSvfti ri aot xijv ifojv xai Xa/ilidum tjjv otjv 8s?iav, ' upon 
 these conditions, said he, I both give you my right hand and 
 take yours.' (See Kiihn. Ausf. Gr. § 577.) Here the dative 
 marks the person to whom the giving or taking away a 
 thing is referred as its final object, the person who is directly 
 benefited or injured by it, and to whom the action may bo 
 said to accrue. When it is said, 6 xoiatv dfeiXero poan/tov 
 Jiltap, 'he took away from them the day of return,' the 
 sense obviously is, « he took away the day of return . . . 
 for them,' that is, the -taking away the day of return is repre- 
 sented as having the person marked by the dative tocow for 
 its ultimate aim or final object. And so, in the phrase 
 ildwiii aot xr,u ifi^v dt^iav, 'I give you my right hand,' the 
 giving the right hand, or a pledge of good faith, is rcpre- 
 sentcd by the added dative «to« as having the personal object 
 'you' as that ultimately affected by it, that 'to' or 'for' 
 which it is done, and which is to be considered, therefore, as 
 its final object. The fact that the dative is in one case 
 rendered by 'to,' and in the other apparently by 'from,' is 
 owing to the nature of the action which it qualifies. In 
 both cases alike the dative is the sign of a person standing 
 in precisely the same relations. 
 
 DATIVE CASE. 
 
 65 
 
 ; 
 
 h. With verbs signifying ' to contend,' ' to fight;' as, ipi(^eiv, 
 fuLxsadat, ' to be at law with,' itxdZeo&at, &c. E.g. II. i. 277, 
 ipiZifievai fiaaiXf/, 'to contend with the king;' Herod, vii. 
 104, ij-ii) de OUTS 8ixa dvdpdat lntta][ofiai oU; re etvcu /idj[ea&(u, 
 OUTS 8uo7ai, ' I neither undertake to be able to fight with ten 
 men, nor with two.' Here the dative has the same sense as 
 in the case just noticed, it being added to mark the personal 
 object ultimately aftected by the act of fighting or contend- 
 ing ; that is, constituting its final aim. (For the listof verbs, 
 and for examples, see Kiihn. Ausf Qr. § 574.) 
 
 c. With vcrbH signifying ' to moot,' ' to withstand,' &c. ; as, 
 '^ dvTuv, dvTiuv, dvTcd^ttv, dnavrav, ItnavTuv, OzanTed^eiu, 'to meet,' 
 .< arrival poetically used, bnoarrjvtu, Ofiaraadae, ' to withstand,' 
 nXr^aid^etv, Tce?.d!^eii>, ifiTceXd^tadaif i-fyil^uv, *to approacli,' 'to 
 come near ;' and with tlie verbs of the opposite sense, 'to 
 give way,' ' to yield,' Jnc. ; as, iixuv, inuxstv, j[wpeiv, napaj^iapeTu. 
 E.g. Herod, vii. 18, oix laiv as r« ndvta ttj ^Xtxiig sixeiv, ' did 
 not sufler you to give way in every thing to your youth,' 
 that ia, ' to indulge your youtliful desires.' In this example, 
 the dative rj i}A<x/jj denotes the object to which the yielding 
 is referred as its final aim, that for the behoof of which it 
 occurs. yEsch. Agam. 1150, ifioi 8e fti/ivse ayiiapiK: d/jt^ijxse 
 dope, ' me there awaits the being clct't with a two-edged 
 sword,' that is, ' there remains for me, by which I am the 
 object to be aftected, the being cleft with a two-edged sword.' 
 The dative here, as in the former case, marks the person to 
 whom the action represented by ftiftvst aj^ia/Jtb; dftipjjxse dope is 
 referred as its final object, or in which it is to end. (For 
 the list of verbs, aud for examples, see Kiihn. Ausf. Gr. 
 S 574.) 
 
 The dative is used in the same sense with the adjectives 
 and adverbs corresponding to the above-recited verbs, as, 
 TtXi^aioz, ivavTto;, ^TT^ii niXa;, dyj[6u, although they have also 
 the genitive case in its proper signification. E.g. Herod, 
 vi. 77, t(^ovTO dvTioe roTat AaxsSat/tovioeot, ' they sat opposite 
 to the Lacedtemoniuns ;' Dem. Phil. ii. 72, fiaaiXsuz yap xai 
 TUpawoi S.Tta<; ii&pbz iXeodspitjf. xai v6/ioti iuavrio^, ' for every 
 king and despot is an enemy to liberty, and opposed to 
 laws.' (See Kiihn. Ausf. Qr. § 574, bb.) 
 
56 
 
 BiaNIFICATION OF TOE CASES. 
 
 d. Tho dative is used in the same way with verbs signify- 
 iDg ' to aid,' ' to defend,' ' to profit,' &c. ; as, dpijyetv, d/wuuv, 
 dXi^eiv, dXaJtxetVf fioii&ttv, imxoupeTv; also with dmoJioYua&at, 
 iuacreXeTu, ixapxecv, jifiataimv, and with a number of verbs 
 compounded with auv, as au/ifipetv, &c. E.g. Eur. Or. 512, 
 dpuvai f Saoimep duvarSz elfu rip fifup, ' I will aid the law as 
 far as I can ;' Id. ib. 912, ijdihjae upatpeTv Ttarpi, ' he wished 
 to assist his father;' Plat. Apol. p. 28, c, el Tipaip^jaeez JlaT- 
 poxXtp Tip kraiptp rhv fouov, ' if you will avenge the death of 
 your comrade Patroclus.' (See Kiihn. Ausf. Qr. § 579.) It 
 should be observed, however, that some verbs of like mean- 
 ing are followed by the accusative case ; as, aupeXeiv, ' to profit,' 
 fiXdnreiv, *to injure,' Xupaiveadai^^^aadat, *to injure.' (See 
 Kiihn. Ausf. Gr. § 579, Anm. 1.) But the cm{)loymcnt of 
 the accusative admits of explanation in accordance with the 
 proper sense of this case, while to the dative as used with 
 other verbs of this class is to be attributed its own appro- 
 priate signification : the latter denotes the object ' for' whom, 
 or to aflcct whom ultimately, the action is performed, the 
 former that ' as regards' whom it is affirmed. 
 
 e. The same meaning is attributable to the dative as 
 employed with verbs signifying * to follow,' * to obey,' ' to 
 disobey,' &c. ; as, ineff&cu, dxoXou&etv, dinjduv, and bpapruv, 
 StaSixea^fu, nei&eirdae, Onaxoueiv, dnei&eTv, &c. E.g. Ilcrod. iii. 
 88, 'Apd^tot 8k oudapS. xarqxouaav ini douXoauiqj Ilipajjai, ' the 
 Arabians never obeyed the Persians so as to bo in bondage ;' 
 that is, 'were never obedient ... to or for the Persians.' 
 (See K'lihn. Ausf. Qr. § 575.) 
 
 So, likewise, with adjectives and adverbs, and sometimes 
 with nouns, of the like sense ; as, dxoXoudo:;, Inopivux;, diddo^oi;, 
 diadox>j, If^f, ifief^c; e-g- Eurip. Androm. 803, xaxbv xaxtp 
 dtdSo^ov, ' misfortune succeeding upon misfortune ;' that is, 
 'succeeding, being a successor, ... to or for misfortune,' 
 the dative xaxip marking the object to which the succession 
 is refciTcd as its final object, as that concerned or interested 
 in it, or which is ultimately affected by it. So Plat. Cratyl. 
 p. 399, », Soxst toutok: k^rjz elvcu, ' it seems to be suitably 
 arranged for these.' (For the list of words, and for examples, 
 sec Kiihn. Ausf. Gr. § 575, dd.) 
 
 j 
 
 DATIVE CASE. 
 
 67 
 
 i* 
 
 /• Tho dative, in the same way, is employed with verbs 
 of 'commanding,' 'advising,' &c. ; as, xeXeuetv, npoazdaattv, 
 imriXXea&atf used in poetry, ivriXXea&at, ImariXXeev, napatvetv, 
 napejyuav, &c. E.g. II. i. 295, dXXotatv dij raur' imriXXeo, 
 •enjoin this upon others,' the dative dXXocaiv denoting the 
 objects upon which the injunction is laid, who are affected 
 by it, and who are its ultimate object. (For the list of verbs, 
 and for examples, see Kiihn. Ausf. Qr. § 577, d.) 
 
 g. Hero may be mentioned the dative which sometimes 
 occurs with the impersonal verbs dec and ][pij, ' it behooves,' 
 *it is requisite,' 'it is necessary,' which more commonly have 
 the accusative ; e.g. Xen. Anab. iii. 4, 35, dee imad^cu riv 
 Jmtou IJiparj dv8pi, ' it is requisite for a Persian to saddle his 
 horse,' that is, ' to saddle his horse is requisite ... for a 
 Persian ;' Soph. Antig. 736, d>l>l^ yap ^ 'pot xp^ r^ ZTjade dp^eiv 
 X^bvoz ; ' is it then necessary for another rather than myself 
 to rule this land ?' (See Kuhn. Ausf. Qr. § 579, 2, and § 551, 
 Anm. 5.) When used with these verbs, the dative follows 
 upon the notions of obligation and necessity contained in 
 ^erand il>'Q', to show upon whom they are laid, in the same 
 way that it follows upon verbs of commanding, &c. in Qreek, 
 and upon the verbal in ndus in Latin, called the future pas- 
 sive participle. 
 
 A. Of the same nature precisely is the dative of the person 
 used with tho verbal adjective in re'of, ria, xiov. E.g. Dem. 
 01. p. 14, 17, ^p^/ir oij . . . ^ot^&ifkov elvae roii; npdypaai d/uv, 
 « I say, then, that you must come to the aid of our aftUirs.' 
 (See Kiihn. Ausf. Qr. § 587.) The verbal in rioi; contain- 
 ing, as does the Latin verbal in ndus, the idea of obligation 
 or necessity, the dative follows it, as above, to denote the 
 object upon which tho obligation is laid, and which is its 
 final aim. 
 
 I. In tho same sense tho dative is employed with the 
 verbs signifying ' it is becoming,' 'it suits,' 'it belongs or 
 appertains to ;' as, npiicetv, ipporreiv, npoatjxeiv ; and with 
 the adverbs itpsirovuo;, dTcpertwz, ecxSTwc, and the phrase 
 elx6i iarc. E.g. Plat. Gorg. p. 479, E, T0UT<p 7:poaijxei ddXitp 
 that, ' it belongs to this man to bo wretched ;' Xen. Cyrop. 
 vii. 5, 17, fiadtXei ■^ftiTo jipiituv, ' he supposed that it was 
 
58 
 
 BIQNIFICAnON OF THE CASES. 
 
 becoming for the king,' that is, PaaiXet expresses the per- 
 sonal object to which the quality of ' being becoming' con-- 
 tained in npinuv is referred as being concerned in it, ns that 
 for which it exists, and which may, accordingly, bo regarded 
 as its final object Here, as in other instances, the sense in 
 which the dative is the ultimate aim of the action or state 
 which it qualifies becomes comparatively obscure, and is 
 difficult to express without seeming exaggeration. There 
 is a wide interval between the dative as used with liAfsadm 
 and with npenuv ; and yet we cannot but feel that, in both 
 cases alike, the dative introduces the object to which the 
 action of 'fighting' and the quality of 'being becoming,' 
 contained in the verbs ftd^ea&at and npinetv, are referred as 
 being their ultimate aim, or that which is to be aiicctcd by 
 them. 
 
 k. In the same way the dative is used with verbs which 
 signify ' to agree with,' ' to commend,' ' to find fault with,' 
 'to blame,' 'to censure," 'to bo angry with,' 'to envy,' &c. 
 Some of these verbs are 6/toXoyeTv, irwaiueiv, inacviiv, /ti/i- 
 tpeadau, iniuftuu, ij-xoLXeTv, (rive rt,) dustdil^uv, ftaaxaiueiv. Very 
 commonly these verbs have the accusative of the thing that 
 is the subject of commendation, blame, &c., and the dative 
 of the person upon whom it is bestowed. E.g. Herod, v. 
 33, imzip'^ero rip 'J/ieffraj-ipjl, 'ho was angry with Arista- 
 goras ;' Id. iii. 142, iytit 3i ta rip nkXaz inenX^aato dordf xara 
 duvaptv ou Ttotijaat, 'what I blame in my neighbor I will 
 not myself do, if i can help it ;' Dem. 01. p. 30, 5, ^jvwj^iee 
 ^fuu 6 0i?.i7t7ioz, 'Philip was causing us disquiet.' (See 
 Kiihn. Ausf. Or. § 578.) Here, again, the dative marks 
 the personal object to whom the action or state expressed 
 by the verb is referred as being concerned in it, as that to 
 affect whom it is or is done, or, in other words, as its final 
 object. 
 
 It may be remarked that /xip<popai, in the sense of ' to 
 blame,' regularly has the accusative after it, wliile in that 
 of 'to lay to one's charge,' 'to cast in one's teeth,' it has 
 the dative. (See Kiihn. Ausf. Gr. § 578, Anm. 1, and Pa»- 
 sow's Lex. 5. V.) It would not bo practicable to see before- 
 hand that such a distinction should exist. It could be 
 
 DATIVE CASE. 
 
 59 
 
 » '. 
 
 !r 
 
 ascertained only by observation of the use of the language. 
 But the accusative being used, or the dative being used, it 
 is not difficult to see how either case is employed consist- 
 ently witli its own proper sense. 
 
 /. The dative has the same sense when used with verbs 
 signifying ' to please ;' as, ivSdpetv, Apiaxuv, Apiaxsadat, &c. 
 E.g. Herod, ix. 79, pij dHoept roTae Twka dpiaxerou, 'may I not 
 please those to whom this is agreeable.' (See Kiihn. Ausf. 
 Qr. § 577.) The dative rotm, in this example, denotes the 
 persons to whom the ' giving pleasure,' contained in dpia- 
 xnat, is referred as the objects affected by it, who are con- 
 cerned in it, to whom it enures; and these may be con- 
 sidered as its final object or aim. 
 
 m. The same meaning must be attributed to the dative 
 when used with verbs expressing ' community" of action, 
 and 'intercourse' whether friendly or hostile, as, 6/uXecJ, 
 pirvua&at, xoivow, &c., to name the object with which there 
 is communion, intercourse, &c. E.g. Herod, iii. 131, 6 3s 
 Jjjpoxijdri: . . . IMuxpdrei ujpiXjjae, 'Dcmoccdos was ou 
 terms of familiarity with Polycrates;' Id. vi. 21, TioXie; ydp 
 auxat pihaxa . . . dXXijij^m iUmodrjoav, 'for these cities 
 most of all had friendly relations with each other.' (See 
 KUhn. Ausf. Gr. § 673, a.) Here, again, the dative expresses 
 the personal objects to whom the action of the verb is re- 
 ferred as being concerned in it, to whose interest it apper- 
 tains, who are its final object or aim. 
 
 So, likewise, with adjectives, adverbs, and even with 
 nouns of similar signification with the above verbs, the 
 dative is used in the same sense; as with xoivoz, awTpo^oz, 
 mpifwvQz, auryei^c, peraiuoz, &c. ; with pij-da, au/ipt^a ; with 
 xotuwi^ia, &c. E.g. Herod, vi. 58, aipptya rfjai youcu^i xott- 
 rbvrai re rti phiona, ' in common with the women.' (See 
 Kuhn. Ausf. Gr. § 573, aa.) 
 
 n. Here may be added the interrogative phrase u i<m poi 
 xtvi; ' what have I to do with a person Y E.g. Herod, v. 33, 
 aoidh xui TouTotat rotai irpdypaae u l<m; 'what have you to 
 do with these matters ?" properly, ' what is there to you and 
 to these matters?" 'what have you in common with these 
 matters?" Both datives, om and roirow, appear to depend 
 
60 
 
 BIGNIFICATION OF TUB CASES. 
 
 upon n iari', 'what is there?' and to show the object inte- 
 rested or that is concerned in what this phrase expresses. 
 
 0. Tlie dative is used with verbs, adjectives, nouns, and 
 adverbs expressing similarity or dissimilarity, equality or 
 inequality, identity or diversity; as, ioixiucu, bfiocow, bfiot- 
 mjadaif Sftoioi, d/ioiai^, lao;, iawz, iS laou, iu ta<f), napuTrkijatoz, 
 6 uuToz, ixiaurtoz, iid<popoz, dtdnpovoz, ddeX^o^, and words com- 
 pounded with bfuoiu, auv, fterd, as bfiofXoHiaoz, &c. E.g. Soph. 
 Antig. 644, rov ip'tkov rtfuiaev iS laou itarpi, ' they honor their 
 friend equally with a father;' Herod, vi. 69, J^ldi jioc fda/ia 
 elSofievov 'Aplarwi't, 'there came to me an apparition like 
 Ariston;' Xen. Cyr. vii. 1, 2, imhafiivot di itdvrez ^flo-v . . . 
 ■coiz ahzdiz f^ Kuptp htXoi<;, ' they were all armed with the 
 same arms with Cyrus.' (See KUlm. Ausf. Qr. 576, b.) 
 
 In such use the dative marks the object with whicli the 
 likeness, identity, &c. is represented as existing, and has 
 really the same office as where it denotes more obviously 
 the person to whose benefit an action or state enures, or 
 for whom, as its ultimate aim, it is or is done. The only 
 difference, probably, is to be found in the greater clearness 
 with whicli Ave can trace, in the latter case, the connection 
 between the action or state and the object afi'ectcd by it for 
 good or for evil. When if&pbz is followed by the dative 
 nw, the sense being ' inimical to a person,' it is euRy to see 
 that r(f( is used in the dative case as expressing the person 
 injuriously ali'uctcd by the state of enmity contained in 
 iX^pbz, and as denoting, therefore, its aim or final object. 
 It is more difficult, perhaps, to say that when opocoz, * like,' 
 or taoz, ' equal,' is followed by rtui, giving the sense of ' like 
 a person,' ' equal to a person,' rw is used in the dative case 
 as marking the person affi^cted by the state of likeness and 
 equality contained in ifioioz and taoz, or to whose interest 
 it belongs ; for, in fact, such expressions are too strong for 
 the very laint sense in which the object introduced by the 
 dative is afl'ected by the notions of likeness and equality 
 referred to it. And yet the relation which the dative nvt 
 holds to onotoz, taoz, &c., is hardly to be considered as at 
 all diflcrent iu nature from that in which it stands to 
 i][Sp6z; for if it marks the object to which the state of 
 
 DATIVE CASE. 
 
 61 
 
 enmity expressed by ixifpS; is referred as affecting or con- 
 corning it, so does it also mark the object to which the 
 state of likeness and equality expressed by S/ioax; and lao; is 
 referred as affijcting or concerning it, if only to the extent 
 to which an object is affected by standing in the relation of 
 likeness or equality to another. In both cases equally, 
 though in the one more obviously than in the other, the 
 dative denotes the final object of the state of enmity, like- 
 ness, and equality expressed by the adjective. 
 
 The pronoun aurdz, without the article, conjoined with a 
 noun in the dative, and agreeing with it as an adjective in 
 gender, number, and case, obtains a peculiar sense, being 
 rendered in English by ' together with,' &c. E.g. II. ix. 541, 
 TtoUu d' oye npo&Uufiva y[a{ui\ ftdXe divdpea (laxpa \ aur^ae 
 pt^igatxat autdiz dv&eae fxjXwv, 'he cast upon the ground tall 
 uprooted trees, together with their roots and the blossoms 
 of the fruit-trees,' or ' roots and all,' ' blossoms of fruit- 
 trees and all;' Eurip. Med. 164, Sv nor' ij-tu vupupav r' ialdoifi' 
 aliTotz ftsXMpotz diaxvauo/jtivouz, 'whom (Jason), and his bride 
 too, may I some day behold ruined together with their house 
 (family),' or 'house and all;' Herod, iii. 126, dnoxrehaz Si 
 ptv ijifdvioE duTip tnntp, ' after killing him, he hid him away 
 out of sight together with his horse,' or 'horse and all.' 
 (See Kuhn. Ausf. Gr. § 568, 2 b.) 
 
 In such examples, aurbz, containing the notion of same- 
 ness or identity, which it does notwithstanding the ab- 
 sence of the article, is properly followed by the dative 
 case, just as 6 abzbz, 8/ioioz, iaoz, and the like, are. And, 
 accordingly, in the last example above given, Imcip is in the 
 , dative depending upon abrip, 'the same,' the construction 
 being i^fdviae {ptv) aurbv {rtp) lnn<p, 'ho hid him . . . the 
 same with his horse,' that is, 'just as he hid his horse.' 
 And then aur<5v, or possibly it might be better to represent 
 it by the neuter avxb, is attracted into the case of "itnip, or 
 into the gender, number, and case of the noun which fol- 
 lows it, if they be different from its own; so that the 
 phrase reads ijtpdvtae {[uv) abrtp Ttctc^, instead of aurbu {rip) 
 limip. That axtroz may have the sense of ' the same,' even 
 without the article prefixed, is to be admitted, not only from 
 
62 
 
 SIGNIFIOATION OF THE CASES. 
 
 this case of its nae, but also from the nominative auric, 
 ipse, 'himself,' which is really equivalent to 'the same,' 
 and from its composition. For auric is plainly compounded 
 of al>=df, a demonstrative radical seen also in au, audtc, 
 uLze, 'again,' and a second demonstrative r-ic, in which oc, 
 5, 0, being a mere adjective-ending, the essential part is r, 
 the same that occurs in the simple demonstrative or article 
 r-o, gen. rou, r^c, rou, &c., in the Latin Uum, t-am, t-a-lis, t-an- 
 i-us, &c., and in the English th-e, ih-a-t, &c. But the de- 
 monstrative, by virtue of its proper power of pointing out 
 a thing, obtains not only the sense of distinguishing an 
 object from the rest of its class, and so, again, of contrast- 
 ing it with them, as in the case of the article, but also that 
 of repetition, as in o5, a5(?«c, aSre, ' again," and hence of 
 identity, an object by pointing to it being identified with 
 an object already named, as in a&roc, 'himself,' that is, a per- 
 son the same with the subject just named. The Latin idem, 
 « the same,' composed of the demonstrative i and a second 
 demonstrative dem, essentially the same with t in t-am, and 
 with T in T-ic, may also be adduced in proof that the notion 
 of identity is* conveyed by the demonstrative, and that 
 ooric may itself contain this idea. In fact the article com- 
 monly added to auric, when it is intended to mean 'the 
 same,' is but the addition of a third demonstrative, the 
 meaning of sameness requiring for its expression a very 
 strong demonstrative, as is shown by this use, and by that 
 of auroc, if admitted to have the sense here claimed for 
 it, as well as by that of the Latin idem. "With regard to the 
 attraction here alleged to have taken place between airic 
 and the noun depending on it, compare the attraction of . 
 the Greek relative, of the Latin relative pronoun, of the 
 gerund with its object, and that seen in the phrase ante 
 diem tirtium Kalendaa Janmrias. (See Exposition, p. 172.) 
 
 p. The dative is used also with a variety of expressions 
 formed of adjectives and nouns with eTvac and yiyvsodat, 
 such as xpr/ainoc, 'useful,' d^-aWc, 'good,' /S^atoc,. 'easy,' 
 lalzTzhi:, ' difficult,' ivavrioz, ' opposed,' taloz, ' fair,' ' honor- 
 able,' uiaxck, 'base,' ipiXoi;, 'friendly.' E.g. Eurip. Or. 782, 
 oxvot; yap role f t'Aotc xaxbv /liya, ' for cowardice is a great evil 
 
 k 
 
 If*- 
 
 ' 
 
 , 
 
 DATIVE CASE. 
 
 63 
 
 to friends.' (See KUhn. Ausf, Gr. § 579.) This is called 
 specially in the grammars the dativus eommodi. The dative, 
 as hero used, marks the object aficcted by the quality ex- 
 pressed by the adjective, that to which it is referred as its 
 final object. 
 
 To this place may be referred the case in which tho 
 dative^ occurring with eiuae or yiyvea^at and a noun, is used 
 to denote the personal object to whom whatever is ex- 
 pressed by eluai or fifvta&ai and the noun belongs or apper- 
 tains. In rendering such phrases into English, the verbs 
 that and ytYvsadat are commonly expressed by 'tO have,' 
 and tho subject of this verb answers to the dative case 
 of tho Greek. E.g. Od. ix. 112, rolatv {KuxXaupt) 8' our' dyopai 
 fiouhjfSpoi, oure Si/itarez (sc. eiaiv,) ' they have neither assem- 
 blies for deliberation, nor judges;' Id. ib. 366, 05nc i/ioq-' 
 ovofta, 'my name is Outis,' that is, 'to or for me the 
 nTlme is Outis;' Herod, i. 31, of 8i aift /3iec, ' their oxen,' that 
 is, ' the oxen (that are) to or for them.' (See Klihn. Ausf. 
 Gr. § 580.) This dative, which the grammars call the dalivus 
 possessivus, depends upon the noun and ecvat or ftYvsadat, 
 and not upon ilvat or ftyvsodat alone. Thus, in the first 
 example given, tho proposition is our* dyopai j^ouXrjfdpoi 
 {iiaiv), 'there are not assemblies for counsel,' and the dative 
 tdiaiv, ' to them' or * for them,' is added to show tho object 
 to whom the fact stated is referred as being concerned in 
 or aifected by it, and which may bo regarded as its final 
 aim or object. 
 
 2. Among tho uses of tho dative case above considered, 
 some have already been mentioned in which the object 
 named by this case is only in a remote and more obscure 
 way to be regarded as the end or aim of the action, state, 
 or quality referred to it, or that for the behoof of which 
 it is or is done. Other numerous examples exist in which 
 this more indistinct relation between the dative and the 
 term which it qualifies is to be seen. And it may be re- 
 marked, before noticing some of these, that in them all a 
 sufficient ground for the use of the dative is found in tho 
 necessity there is felt to exist for some sign by which to 
 indicate the object, mostly , personal, that is concerned or 
 
64 SIONIFICATIOK OF THE CASES. 
 
 interested in an action or statement, whatever be the ex- 
 tent to which this interest reaches. It is enough, in order 
 to the introduction of this case, that there be a person 
 whose interest or feelings are involved in the action or . 
 statement, so that it shall be for him a subject of care or 
 attention. The dative hero had in view is capable of being 
 variously rendered, not only by 'to' and 'for,' but by 
 'among,' 'with,' &c., according to the circumstances in 
 which the person stands with regard to the action or state- 
 ment in which he is interested. It does not follow, of 
 course, that in such cases the dative has a different nature 
 from that above attributed to it. It is, in fact, only a more 
 refined application of the same sense, in which, from dis- 
 tinctly setting forth the proper end of the action or state 
 which is referred to it, it becomes the' sign of the object 
 whom it only peculiarly concerns or interests. It is, there- 
 fore, for convenience, and not from any necessity arising 
 from the different office of the case, that the examples of , 
 such more delicate use of the dative case are referred to a 
 separate head. "* 
 
 a. To this riass of the uses of the dative case may be 
 referred that in which it marks, as frequently in Homer, the 
 persons before whom, or in whose presence, an action is 
 performed in which they are interested as parties con- 
 cerned. E.g. II. i. 247, TOtat 8k Niarwp ^duen^; duipouae, 
 * among, before, them arose Nestor of charming speech ;' 
 properly, ' for them arose Nestor.' The dative Totat marks • 
 the persons tp whom as its end the rising up of Nestor to 
 speak is referred ; so that although, under the circumstances, 
 wo may render this dative by * among' or ' before,' it really 
 means ' for them.' II. ii. 433, to7c <'!/'« /^uifaiu ^/»jre Fepi^vio^ 
 iTtnira Niarmp, 'among,' properly, 'for, them began his 
 speech Gcranian Nestor.' Od. xv. 227, d^vubt; TluXiotat jiif 
 l^oi[a iho/iuTa vatwv, ' dwelling in very great houses among 
 the Pylians;' that is, 'for the Pylians,' the dwelling in 
 vast houses by a powerful and rich chief being referred 
 to the Pylians. as a matter in which they are concerned ; 
 and this reference being expressed in English, although 
 with an imperfect rendering of the force of the dative, by 
 
 .»; 
 
 *. 
 
 1 
 
 s 
 
 ■'! 
 
 f 
 
 »| 
 
 ^ 
 
 !J 
 
 ^ 
 
 •3 
 
 ?. 
 
 DATIVE CASE. 
 
 
 »: . 
 
 
 If 
 
 G5 
 
 I,'-- • 
 
 among the Pylians.' Eurip. Heo. 595-7, di-i^/j^^Taf .J'dsi I bakv 
 .no^pbi ob8hv mo ;r;f;v *ax«5c, | i S" ii,»Xbz iadXk, 'among, in 
 the eyes of men, the bad man is naught but bad, the good 
 man only good;' that is, 'for men,' 'in the view of men.' 
 ld.Pha)n.l7, cS dij^a^m ediimo,: duaS, 'O king of, or in 
 Thebes of noble steeds,' the dative e^/9<«« denoting the 
 object for which exists this office of king described by duaS 
 or which is interested in it. So also in prose ; e.g. Herod, vi. 
 70, AaMe8ai,touiom auyivA. i(^ott,i re xai rvti/njae AnoXapTtpwM^, 
 frequently distinguished among the Lacediemonians both 
 by his deeds and counsels,' that is, 'for theLacedremonians.' 
 Plat. Repub. iii. p. 389, b, da ml ^Of^^p^, J,o,i^S„^ Xiru, 'as 
 in Homer also Diomedes says,' that is, 'in the poems of 
 , Homer, Ofs^ptp naming the poet to whom Diomedes with 
 bis saying is referred as appertaining to him, the sense 
 being wellnigh eijuivalent to saying 'the Diomedes of 
 Homer.' Id. ib. iv. p. 421, b, ir,pa . . . rdl^ ^OXa^,^ ,6„„'. 
 M/iev, 'we have found another or different set of thin-rs in 
 the watchmen,' properly, 'for th6 watchmen,' they being 
 the persons concerned in the statement hspa tbp^xaatv, 'we 
 have found another set of things.' (For the examples, see 
 Kuhu. Ausf. Gr. § 568, 2.) 
 
 h. In the same way the dative stands with various actions 
 and motions to mark the object designed to be reached or 
 Bllected, and which may properly be regarded as their end 
 or aim. E.g. II. xv. 369, nam ^tdiat xupaz dw;^o»-r«c, ' lift^ 
 •ing up their hands to all the gods;' that is, 'for all the 
 gods,' the dative naat dtola, being the objects to whom the 
 lifting lip the Itands is referred as its final aim, or to affect 
 whom It IB done. Od. iv. 608, a7»' &Xl x^xXiaroi, 'and which 
 are sloping or inclined towards the sea,' that is, which are 
 sloping 'for the sea,' the dative iXi marking the sea as that 
 which IS aimed at, and is, in some sort, to be affected by 
 the sloping of the ground towards it. Eurip, Or. 1415 
 i^ara &' Uto niStp, ' and let fall upon the floor the" threads 
 she spun,' properly, 'let fall the threads for the floor ' the 
 dative niSip denoting that which received the'thrcads as 
 they were spun, and which may be considered as the ulti- 
 mate object, in this connection, of the action expressed by 
 
GG 
 
 BIQNIFICATIOK OF THE CASES. 
 
 vrjfiara 6' Uto. It must be admitted that the notion of the 
 end aimed at, as here conveyed by the dative, is very far 
 from being so distinctly marked aa in many other cases, 
 and that the reference indicated by this case is so delicate 
 that any terms by which it may be attempted to represent 
 it in English will be almost necessarily exaggerations of it. 
 And yet, to a Greek familiar with the employment of the 
 dative to denote the ultimate object of any action, it would 
 hardly be more obscure, in such instances as the above, 
 than where it occurs with verbs of giving and the like. 
 The following example from Enrip. Or. 88, may be of the 
 same kind; noaov ^pdvov di Seftnioiz ninrw-j^' Bde; ' how long 
 time has this your brother fallen on the couch 7' Here 8efi- 
 viot^, if regarded as the dative case, is to be explained in 
 the same way with i:id<ft above. But it is, seemingly, nearly 
 as probable that it is an ablative of place, or locativus ; and 
 then, instead of denoting the object that constitutes, in this 
 connection, the ultimate aim of thte action, or which may 
 be conceived as in some sort affected by it, it will be 
 merely the sign of the place at or on which the falling 
 occurs. That the former construction is to be preferred, 
 may be argued from the use of the dative with the com- 
 pounds of nlnretv, as, ifjarixTeiv xeuduvt//, ' to fall into danger,' 
 where the dative is certainly the case employed, and where 
 it requires the same explanation that would justify the use 
 of de/mot(: as a dative in the above example. (For the 
 examples, sec Kuhn'. Ausf. Gr. § 571.) 
 
 Ilcrc belong also such examples as Thuc. i. 13, 'A/hi- 
 voxX^Z I'a/Jtloti ijAiJsv, 'Ameinocles came to the Samians,' 
 properly, * for the Samians ;' it was for them that he came 
 as ship-builder. (See, for the examples cited, Kiihn. 1. c.) 
 
 For practical purposes it should be remarked, that, in such 
 cases as the above, prose writers commonly prefer to use 
 e/c, 7cp6;, iiri, with the accusative. (See KUhn. 1. c. Autn. 1, 
 who refers to the fact that the Latins also sometimes em- 
 ploy the dative in such connections ; as ccclo tollere maims, 'to 
 raise the hand toward heaven.') 
 
 c. In conjunction with the participle also, or involved in 
 it, the dative of the person is used, in the same sense, to 
 
 i , 
 
 V .» 
 
 DATIVE CASE. 
 
 67 
 
 denote the person in whose view or judgment, for whom in 
 ills position, a statement is to be admitted under the condi- 
 tions or Imutations expressed by the participle; or else to 
 mark the person affected by the event described. In the 
 atter case, the dative, obviously enough, is used to indicate 
 the ultimate object of the action contained in the proposi- 
 tion upon which it follows; in the former, its office is more 
 obscurely to point out the person in whose interest the 
 statement is made, this interest, however, if so strong a term 
 can be allowed, being limited to the fact that his view 
 judgment, or acts, expressed by the participle with which 
 the personal object is associated, furnish the conditions 
 under winch the statement is admitted. E.g. Ilerod. i. 14, 
 dXTjdii- de X6r(,, x/'wjuei'y, ob Kopivd'mv xox, dijixoaiou iativ b 
 »r,amp6z, 'but if one speak truly,' that is, 'for a person that 
 speaks truly, the treasury does not belong to the community 
 ot the Corinthians.' The statement is, that the treasury 
 does not belong to the people of Corinth in common, and 
 ^7j9ii Xdytp xptofiivui is added to show, by virtue of the 
 attributive souse of the participle, under what condition or 
 limitation this is so ; namely, ' if a person uses a true state- 
 ment,' ' when a person speaks truly,' or, 'for a person that 
 speaks truly.' And the dative form is given to the parti- 
 ciple conveying this condition or limitation because it is the 
 attributive of the person, whether expressed or to be sup- 
 plied, to whom the statement qualified by the participle is 
 iclorrcd as to the object concerned in it, for whom it is true 
 under the conditions named by y^<ofdv(p. So Ilerod. i. 51 
 bphv . . . ixhro i7ti3eh>^ iatot^u, 'it lay on the right hand 
 as you entered,' that is, 'for one who entered,' or, 'to one 
 entering, it lay on tlie right hand;' Id. vi. 27, Ttatai 
 rpd/ipara 8i!iaaxoidvotm kuiTceae -Ij aripj, 'on the children in 
 the act of having their letters taught them the roof fell in •' 
 that IS, 'the roof fell in . . . for the children,' the dative 
 natat St8aaxopevotat indicating the object affected by the fall- 
 ing in of the roof; and Id. ix. 10, &uopiu^ 8i ol ini rai ndpayj 
 b />c dpaopwdrj, 'as he was sacrificing ... the sun was 
 obscured;' that is, 'for him, as he was sacrificing, the sun 
 was obscured.' 
 
68 
 
 SIGNIFIOATION OF THE CASES. 
 
 The participles of certain verbs especially are used in 
 this constroction of the dative, snch as ^oukoftiucji, ^dojihtf}, 
 dafiivtff, iiitopivifi, ftc, and chiefly with e7i;« and prv^a^at', 
 e.g. Soph. Od. Col. 1505, ito&oum npobtpdvrjz, ' you appeared 
 -when I was longing for you;' that is, 'for me, when I was 
 longing for you, you appeared.' (See Kuhn. Ausf. Gr. § 
 
 681, b, c.) 
 
 d. Of the same character is the dative of the person 
 which is employed, mostly with &c, to show the personal 
 object to whom, as properly concerned in it, an action or 
 Btatemcnt is referred, where the English uses 'for,' 'in the 
 case of.' E.g. Soph. Od. Col. 20, fiaxpAv r«P> ^ r^povT'^ 
 npoba-cdXrjf: bdov, ' for you have come a long way, for an old 
 man.' The dative, in this signification, is used also without 
 &C ; e.g. Eur. Med. 580, Ifwl jap ^anz Mtxoz &v aoipbz Xipev \ 
 nifUKe nhiaTyjV ^^ftiav dfhaxdvtt, ' for me,' that is, ' in my 
 judgment.' (See Kuhn. Ausf. Gr. § 581, d.) The dative has 
 the same sense in both the above instances; and the only 
 difference is that Ac, involving, as elsewhere, the correlative 
 r<uc, which is seen in oBraJc and other compounds, supplies 
 the comparison or correlation between the action as stated 
 and tiie same action as found in the case of the noun marked 
 by the dative ; thus, ftaxpiv 6k r^povri npoliardXr^i: i>86v means 
 properly, 'you have come a long way, so counting the 
 coming as is the coming in the case of an old man.' 
 
 e. To the same, class may be referred the dative case 
 occurring with a number of adjectives, as, dew;, a?Koc, &c. 
 E.g. II. i. 153, iitu olnt ftoe amoi ecai, ' since they are not to 
 be blamed by me;' that is, 'since, for me, they are not 
 chargeable with wrong.' Of not uncommon occurrence is 
 the phrase dSek tlpi rtviz wr, e.g. Eurip. Hec. 309, fmtv 3j 
 'Axinth<: d$i(K Ti/j^i:, ' Achilleus deserves honor at our hands ;' 
 that is, 'for us, as the persons interested therein, Achilleus 
 is deserving of honor.' The dative, as here used, serving to 
 mark the object concerned in the statement contained m 
 iScoz, axx,bz i<rTt, namely, the person ' for whom' or ' in whose 
 case' it is affirmed as true, may be rightly regarded as its 
 final object. (For other examples, see Klihn. Ausf. Gr. 
 § 681, e.) 
 
 DATIVE OABE. 
 
 69 
 
 ' 
 
 I 
 
 f. Here belongs the dative of the first and second persona, 
 fux, aoi, introduced to mark the person whose feelings or 
 interests are involved in an action, and to whom, accord- 
 ingly, it is referred as its final object. E.g. Xen. Cyrop. i. 
 3, 2,(bf^Ttp, &z xaX6z iiotbndmtoz, ' O mother, how handsome 
 my grandfather is 1' Id. ib. § 15, ivav iv Hipaatz d), otfial aoi 
 ixtivouz robf dyadohz ra nel^txa ^ffdiw^ vtx^aeiv, ' I suppose that 
 those brave men of yours I will easily beat in skill on foot;' 
 that is, ' that those brave men I will for you easily beat in 
 skill on foot,' the dative aoi showing the person to whose 
 interest or gratilicatiou belongs the statement robe dyaSobc 
 rd ne(^ixd pf/tdttu; Mxijaeiv; just as, in the former example, 
 pot introduces the boy that finds delight in his grandfather's 
 haudsomo person. This dative may sometimes be rendered 
 in English by the possessive adjectives *my,' 'your,' and 
 hence is called, improperly, the possessive dative. Often it 
 hardly admits of being directly expressed in English, and 
 can only be conveyed by some such phrase as ' I pray you.' 
 (For examples, see Kiihn. Ausf. Gr. § 581, f.) 
 
 g. The lust of the uses of the dative case to be mentioned as 
 belonging to this class, is that in which it frequently attends 
 the third person of the perfect passive especially, and often 
 admits in English the translation of 'by.' E.g. Herod, vi. 
 123, &i pot nporepov deorjUioTcu, ' as has been before set forth 
 by me,' or ' as I have before shown ;' Dem. c. Aphob. p. 
 844, 12, 6ei , . . oirjpjffaadcu r« TOiirip icmpafpiva nept ^paiv, ' I 
 must relate what has been done by him touching us.' (See 
 Kiihn. Ausf. Gr. § 582.) The dative, as here used, is not 
 inaterially difiurcut from this case as above explained ; for 
 it marks tlie personal object to whom, as being concerned 
 or having an interest in it, the action with which it is con- 
 nected is referred. Thus, wz pot npoxipov d($^ko>Tat properly 
 means, ' as has been before set forth ... on my part,' fj.o( 
 showing that the act of setting forth expressed by dedijXotTon 
 concerns me, or appertains to me. 
 
 8. As the result of the preceding investigation of the 
 meaning of the dative case in its various uses, it may be 
 etated that it is employed chiefly, but not wholly, of per- 
 sona, to mark the ultimate object of any action or state of 
 
70 
 
 BIGNIFICATION OF THE CASES. 
 
 tLings, that for which it is done or is, or to whoso account it 
 may be referred ; that, in other terms, it denotes the final 
 aim of the action or state with which it is connected ; and 
 that this sense of the dative is involved, not only wlicre it 
 names the object for whose benefit or injury a thing exists, 
 but also in those instances of more remote and less obvious 
 reference, where the dative is introduced merely to show 
 the person whose feelings, opinions, character, or acts are 
 involved in any action or statement, and who, to that 
 extent at least, may be considered its final object. Of the 
 former or more obvious sense, examples are found in such 
 phrases as Idwxi ftot dpyupeov, ' he gave me silver,' the dative 
 fioi showing that I am the final object of the giving; of the 
 latter, or more obscure sense, in such sentences as /iaxf>au, 
 6jz yipovTi, TCfiouirrdXrjz b36v, 'you have come a long way for 
 an old man,' yifiovre denoting the object who is interested in 
 the fact stated, ftaxpav Trpouard^rjz bdov, *you have come a 
 long way,' so far as this, at least, that its truth and propriety 
 depend upon his character and condition, namely, his period 
 of life, so that he is made a party to it, and is in some sort 
 affected by it. And, lastly, if these views be correct, that 
 the use of the dative is one and uniform, namely, to mark 
 the ultimate aim or object of an action or state, correspond- 
 ing herein very nearly to the English 'for,' but capable of 
 being rendered by other terms, such as ' to," ' in case of,' 
 * among,' &c. 
 
 III. or TnE ABLATIVE CASE. 
 
 The same form of the noun, to which in the various uses 
 above considered the name of the dative is given, has other 
 significations different from that which belongs to the dative 
 case, and incapable of being reconciled with it. Those it is 
 both more accurate and more convenient to consider sepa- 
 rately from the proper sense of the dative ; and as they are 
 materially the same with those which in the Latin grammars 
 are comprehended under the name of the ablative case, and 
 as this name is already familiar to students of Greek, it is 
 considered proper to retain it here, admitting, at the same 
 time, that it has nothing in itself to recommend it. 
 
 ABLATIVE CASE: LOOATIVUS. 
 
 71 
 
 The significations which it is proposed to separate from 
 the dative are those which are expressed in English by 'in,' 
 'at,' 'on,' 'by,' 'with,' and which correspond generally to 
 the cases bearing in the grammars of some languages, as 
 Polish, Sanskrit, &c,, the names of Locativus and Instru- 
 mentalis. These names, as being already in use among 
 scholars, may with propriety be assigned respectively to the 
 two classes of meanings comprehended under the name of 
 the ablative. 
 
 a. Locativus. 
 Of the meanings of the ablative case a large proportion 
 has its origin in the power which this case has of denoting 
 position in space ; and when used in any sense having this 
 origin, the ablative may be distingulBhcd by the name of 
 Locativus, which is generally received. 
 
 1. a. This case is employed, almost exclusively in poetry, 
 if certain names of places be excepted, to mark position in 
 space, answering to the question 'where ?' and expressed in 
 English by ' at,' ' in,' ' on.' E.g. II. ix. C63, alirdp 'AxMeb( 
 eude /Mx<p x^atTjc eun^xrou, 'but Achilleus slept in the recess 
 of his well-fashioned tent;' II. xvi. 150-1, rob: izsxe Zs<f,6p<p 
 Avifi<p''Apmta noddppj, \ Poaxopivtjhcfuovczapa[,6ov'iixmvoio, 
 'whom the Harpy Podarge bore to the Zephyr wind as she 
 fed in a meadow by the stream of Ocean ;' lb. 231, ey;^sr' 
 inuza araz {tiatp epxti, ' after that he prayed, standing in the 
 midst of the enclosure;' lb. 756-7, ... XioviF coc, . . . I 
 (Sr' opeoz xopuip^ai nepi xranivtjz iXdtpoco | . . . jidxea^ov, 'like 
 two lions, when, in the heights of a mountain, they fight 
 about a hind that has been slain;' II. xvii. 473, reu;fea 8' 
 'ExTtop abrbz Ix'ov (Lftotaiv dydUeTot Aeouetdao, 'having on his 
 shoulders the arms of yEacides;' Soph. Trach. 171, riju 
 vakmav ifr^yhv uh(ir,aai nure Jiodtovi . . . Ifi^, ' once spoke at 
 Dodona ;' Id. Od. Tyr. 817, ^ /tij Hviov l?eari p^ff dariou rtvi \ 
 ddpoic dix^doi, 'to receive in his house.' 
 
 Hero belong a number of names of places used in the 
 ablative in prose as well as in poetry ; as, 'Ehuo'vi, ' at Elcusis,' 
 Ta/zvown, 'atllhiimnus,' //tx^or or /7o*^,' at Pytho,' Jpyrrot, 
 'atSphettus,' 'ladpo7, 'at the Isthmus," 'Ad^ujjat, 'at Athens,* 
 ft?/9s«, 'at Thebes,' maTcucuae, «at Platajas,* 'Ok'Jimlaae, 'at 
 
72 
 
 SIOHinCATION OF THB OABEB. 
 
 Oly mpia,' Mapad&vt, < at Marathon ;! also some other ablatives, 
 called adverbs; as, Kxot, 'at home,' xafxai, 'on the ground,' 
 Latin humi, xedoT, 'on the ground,' ivtaudot, 'tViero,' ixti, 
 •there,' xtiift, 'there.' With regard to the ablatives ^, 
 •where,' jrjl ; 'where?' T^8c,TauTjg, 'in this place,' it may be 
 questioned whether they originally marked position in 
 space, and whether, in fact, they should not rather be 
 understood in the sense of ' in what way,' &c. (See Kuhn. 
 Ausf. Or. § 568, 1, and Anm. 1 ; also § 571, Anm. 3.) 
 
 b. Of the same nature exactly is the use of this case to 
 mark the point of time at which an event occurs, answering 
 to the question ' when ?' and rendered in English by ' at,' 
 'on,' &c. In this sense, the ablative or locativus introduces 
 the various terms which express denominations of time, and 
 considers them, however extended the space comprised, as 
 merely points of time at which an action occurs. E.g. II. 
 xi. 707, T/x'ry fj/tau Tcdvrez \ ij^tfop, ' the third day they all 
 came ;' Ilcrod. iii. 181, r^ 7rpwT<f> Irec Imep^dXevo robz nf>ioTou( 
 Ijftpouz, 'the first year he surpassed the first physicians.' 
 And so in the common phrases r^^e t^ vuxri, ' this night,' 
 roiJrj Tj ^pipf, 'this day,' &c. E.g. Xen, Anab. iv. 8, 1, rj 
 izpwzTj ^nipf dfixovro iiti rhv nora/idv, 'the first day they 
 reached the river.' In the same way the more general term 
 XP^vip, 'at last;' e.g. Demosth. 01. p. 14, IG, neptiazat T<p 
 XP^i"p ^o>>' noXcopxou/tivtov, ' will in time have the better of 
 the besieged.' (See Kiihn. Ausf. Or. § 569.) 
 
 Commonly in prose,~and very frequently in poetry, the 
 preposition h is added to such ablatives ; the sense, however, 
 hardly being the same. ^Eni with the dative is also used, 
 the rendering in English being the same with that of the 
 ablative (locativus) ; as, in' ^pan ripde, ' on this day ;' but 
 neither in this case is the sense the same as where the 
 ablative alone is used. (Cf. Kiihn. Ausf. Or. § 569, Anm. 1.) 
 
 It is so perfectly obvious that the office of the case is the 
 same in the designation of the point in space and of the 
 point of time at which an event occurs, that it has been 
 deemed unnecessary to do more than merely advert to the 
 fact. 
 
 2. a. The locativus is employed also to mark the circum- 
 
 ABLATIVE case: LOCATIVUS. 
 
 73 
 
 stances or conditions under which an action is performed, 
 or a state of things exists ; as when azoitp, arparip, niij^a, 
 and other such terms, are employed with verbs of going, 
 marching, sailing, &c. E.g. Herod, v. 99, of \t9rjvaiot dm- 
 xiaTo eixoai vr^uaiy 'the Athenians arrived with twenty ships,' 
 that is, the arrival of the Athenians was under certain 
 circumstances or conditions, namely, 'with twenty ships;' 
 Id. vi. 95, InXiov iSaxoaifjat rpajpeot iz t^v 'Imviijv, 'they 
 sailed to Ionia with sixty triremes ;' Thuc. i. 102, 'Adijvaiot 
 ^Xdou nX^&ti oux okiytp, 'the Athenians came with a largo 
 force;' Id. ii. 21, ia^aXwv , . . avpaxtp IJeXonowrjaimv, 'hav> 
 ing made an invasion with an army of Pelopouncsiaus.' (Cf. 
 Kuhn. Ausf. Or. § 5C8, 2, b.) 
 
 In a variety of other expressions, also, the ablative or 
 locativus is employed to show under what circumstances au 
 action is pcrfoimed or an event occurs. E.g. Od. xiv. 253, 
 knUopev fiopijj dviptp uxpaie xaiip, ' we sailed with a strong 
 north wind and favorable ;' II. i. 418, r^ ae xaxfj atajj rixov iv 
 ptydpotat, 'therefore with evil destiny did I bear thee in my 
 house;' Thuc. i. 84, pouoi . . . einipaj-iouc re oux i^u^pil^opev, 
 xai ^uptpopuiz fjaaov kripmv etxopev, 'we alone arc not inso- 
 lent in prosperity, and in adversity yield to it less than 
 others." (See Kulin. Ausf. Or. § 570.) 
 
 That the ablative or locativus, in these examples, is to be 
 understood as above explained, and not in the scuso of the 
 ablative of the instrument, might be inferred from the fact 
 that dpa and auv with the dative are frequently used in a 
 very similar meaning, and so as to make it probable tliat 
 the ablative merely introduces attending circumstances; 
 e.g. Herod, vi. 118, June Se nopso6psv(K dpa T<p azparip dz 
 xijv 'Aair^v . . . el8e Siptv iu Tip unvtp. But still more decidedly 
 is the interpretation here given confirmed by the greater 
 appropriateness of the meaning it afi:brds. In fact, to make 
 aroXtp, &c. ablatives of the instrument can hardly, in very 
 many instances of their use with such verbs as those above 
 mentioned, atlurd a tulerable sense. Thus, in the example 
 frota Thucydides i. 102, ^Adr^vuloi ^i&ov ni^&u oux dUjtp^ 
 ' the Atbcuiuns came with a large force,' it is very plain 
 that the ablative ::)jjdtt oux AXijip cannot be considered as 
 
74 
 
 BIONIFIOATION OF THB CABES. 
 
 tbc means or instrument of tho coming of tlio Athenians ; 
 while, on the other hand, it is entirely satisfactory to re- 
 gard it as showing the attendant circumstances or condition 
 of the action described by ^X&ov. 
 
 b. Of the same nature essentially is the ablative or locati- 
 vus employed to denote the way or manner iu which an 
 action is performed. E.g. II. iii. 2, Tpaiez fikv xiayjfj r' ivort^ 
 t' taav, 'the Trojans advanced with a shout and a cry;' 
 Uesiod. Op. et D. 102-4, voiiaot 3' dvdptlntotae i^' jj/ie/^jj //5' inl 
 wxTt I auTo/iaroi foerwai *axa -dv/jTotoc ipipouaui \ atffii ^^^^ 
 ftui^jv i^elhro /njuera Zeitz, 'day and night, uiibiddeu, 
 bringing evils to mortals, diseases come upon men, in 
 silence, since Jupiter has deprived them of voice ;' Xen. 
 Auab. iii. 4, 49, xaTukinmv rbv tjznov laneuSe ite^fj, ' leaving 
 his horse behind, he would hurry forward on foot ;' Id. ib. 
 § 22, ofio^ 8' auTo nepd^u d'jfupbv xai Otf'ijkbu ndprrj ix &uXdrrriz 
 £(C ddXazzav, 'a rough and steep mountain encloses it on 
 every side (properly, 'in everyway,) from sea to sea;' Id.ib. 
 i. 4, 8, oUa yap 5mg oc][ourai, ' for I know in what wuy they 
 have gone oil'.' 
 
 In such examples, the ablative marks the circumstances 
 in which an action occurs, and may properly be classed 
 with the preceding use of this case. It may be observed, 
 further, although too obvious to need explanation, that tho 
 sense of tho ablative or locativus in which it expresses the 
 circumstances or condition, and the way or manner iu 
 which an action occurs, is derived immediately from that 
 in which it denotes position in space. 
 
 c. To this class of the uses of the locativus may be pro- 
 pcrly referred several expressions, such as T<p ovu, ' in fact,' 
 'in reality,' ry AXr^&eia, 'in truth,' r^S X&ftp, *i" pretence,' 
 Tip ipY<p, 'in deed,' 'in reality.' See Herod, vi. 38, referred to 
 by Kiihn. Ausf. Gr. § 686, e, nhffivza tjjv xt(pa}.ijv nuXixti . . . 
 i:pb- dvdpb; auTO/wXou fiiv T<p Xiytp, 7toX$/uou Sk Tip ipytp, ' in 
 pretence a deserter, but in reality an enemy.' The locati- 
 vus here marks the circumstances or conditions under 
 which an action is represented as affirmed, and thus serves 
 to give it a distinctive character. In tho example given, 
 the person who dealt the blow is said to be a deserter; but 
 
 ABLATIVE CASE: LOCATIVUS. 
 
 75 
 
 I 
 
 
 with certain conditions, or in a certain case only, is this 
 affirmed, namely, if it be understood to be 'in word,' and 
 not in deed. KUhner, § 586, e, from whom the example is 
 borrowed, considers T<p X&ftp and like expressions to be 
 examples of tho instrumentalis. 
 
 8. To this sense of the ablative (locativus) belong tho 
 examples in which it is used to show, with regard to any 
 quality or state affirmed to exist, in what case it is to be 
 admitted. Thus : 
 
 a. With tho comparative form of the adjective, and with 
 like expressions, the ablative or locativus is used to point 
 out wherein tho excess in a quality, as represented by the 
 comparative degree, lies; or, more accurately, the precise 
 case or condition in which it is to be held as being affirmed. • 
 E.g. Herod, vi. 89, ioTiptaav ^pip^ /aj r^c auyxeepivjjc, ' they 
 came too late by one day for the time appointed ;' that is, 
 their coming too late, or that they came too late, is to bo 
 understood as affirmed in the precise case or condition 
 expressed by pi^ ^pip])- And as, most naturally, the exact 
 Betting forth of the conditions of an excess in a quality will 
 be made by some corresponding note of measure, such as 
 
 * much,' ' little,' ' how much,' and the like, the frequent use 
 of such ablatives as 7roXX<p, dXiytp, dpidpip, 5a<p, with the com- 
 parative, is just what might be looked for. Again, the 
 peculiar rendering of these terms in English, namely, by 
 the expressions 'by much,' 'by a little,' 'by a number,' 
 'by huw much,' does not stand in opposition to tho ex- 
 planation above given, any more than the fact that the 
 Greeks used tho .accusative also after the comparative, as, 
 roXu, 'much,' dXiyov, 'a little.' But, if the interpretation 
 here given of the ablative of difference, as it is called in 
 the Latin grammars, occurring with the comparative de- 
 gree, be true, it follows that this use of the ablative or 
 locativus case is really the same with that in which it 
 denotes the circumstances or condition wherein an action 
 occurs, and has its origin in the notion of position in space. 
 
 b. The ablative or locativus is similarly used in other 
 expressions : e.g. Herod, vi. 136, (^ijptwaauTez xaTu rjjv dStxtyju 
 nevvjxovra zaXduTotm, 'having fined him fifty talents," that is, 
 
76 
 
 BiaHinOATXON OF TBI OASBS. 
 
 ABLATIVE CASE: LOOATIVUS. 
 
 77 
 
 'in (tbe buio of) fifty talents;' where, plainly, nevnjxovra 
 ToidvToiae is the ablative expressing the condition of the 
 fining, or the case in which it is to be understood as being 
 afiirmcd, ' in the sum of fiifty talents,' or, simply, as may be 
 said in English, using the same mode of representation, 
 • they fined him in fifty talents.' Thuc. iv. 73, rip fieXuazti} 
 roo baitTaou ^XanpdrfVat, 'to be injured in (in the case of) the 
 best part of the heavy armed force.' (For the examples, 
 see £uhn. Ausf. Gr. § 586, d.) 
 
 4. Here, possibly, may belong the case which follows 
 I^Jfldui, ' to use :' e.g. Eur. Med. 347, xelvou^ dk xXmat auft- 
 fOf)^ xtxpr^a/jiivouz, * but I weep for them for that they have 
 experienced misfortune ;' Herod, iii. 117, ourot <Lv, olzep ift- 
 
 .ispoa9iv itoSeaav ■j[pua9at rip udari, oiix iyrovziz a.vT<p ipiiadat^ 
 aupipopy pejd).-^ dtaipiwi>zat, 'those, then, who were before 
 accustomed to use water, not having it to use, experienced 
 a great affliction.' The difficulty in saying with certainty 
 what is the. meaning of the case used with XP^j"^"' ^'*^^ *" 
 ascertaining exactly the original sense of the verb itself. 
 Supposing it to be properly a passive or middle verb, and 
 that it means ' to serve one's need,' as may be inferred from 
 its connection with xp^t necesse est, and with xf^jfiara, ' things 
 for use,' opes, the case attending it will either be the lucati- 
 vus, showing the particular case or thing in which the 
 serving one's need is alleged, just as in some preceding in- 
 stances ; or else it will be the ablative of the means or 
 iustruniunt with whieh a person serves his need. 
 
 The case which is used with voitiZetv, ' to be accustomed,' 
 is attended by less difficulty : e.g. Herod, ii. 50, wful^ouat 
 8' <Lv Aiyunztoi olid' ^pmat obdiv, ' now the Egyptians arc .be- 
 sides not at all accustomed to heroes ;' properly, • the Egyp- 
 tians have no vdftoc or custom at all in the case of heroes,' 
 the ablative or locativuB ^pwat showing wherein, or in what 
 case precisely, it ia asserted that the Egyptians have no 
 vdpoi or custom. 
 
 5. The ablative or locativus is employed, furthermore, 
 with a number of verbs expressing various emotions, to 
 mark tbe occasion of these, or, to speak more conformably 
 to the proper meaning of the case, the circumstances in 
 
 ( 
 
 : 
 
 which the emotions exist, the condition of things in which 
 they occur. Thus, with verbs expressing the feelings of 
 joy, pleasure, and the like, and their oppositcs, as, ;^a//>en', 
 ^ea9ai, 6.ydXXeo9at, Xtmtia9m, dXyetv, kc, ; with those de- 
 noting wonder and admiration, as, ^aupd^etv, and, more 
 rarely, AyaaSai, 'to admire;' with verbs signifying 'to 
 hope,' as, iXnil^ttv; with those expressing satisfaction and 
 dissatisfaction, as, aripyetv, aTipfto9(u, rarely, Ayazav, Apxsta- 
 ■9ai, dj-avaxrelv, Suaxspaivew, ^o^ETrdic fipstv, djri?e«Ti?<K ; and. 
 with ataxuveadat, 'to bo ashamed.' E.g. Herod, vi. 67, 
 dXy^aa^ xw inetpwr^/taTi sine, ' grieved at his question, he 
 said ;' Thuc. iv. 85, 9aupd^o) rj dnoxXeiau pou rwv nuXwv, * I 
 wonder at tbe shutting of my gates;' Xen. Anab. i. 3, 8, 
 XaXv:wz tpipeiv rdlz Jtapouat npdjpaae, 'that he is pained at ' 
 the present condition of afiairs.' (See £uhn. Ausf. 6r. 
 §584, a.) 
 
 If these and such examples be examined, it will be found 
 that the ablative or locativus indicates, as above stated, that 
 particular case or condition of things in which the emotion 
 expressed by the verb is experienced. Thus, in the last 
 example cited, it is said of Cyrus that he was pained, and 
 ro7c napouai npdy/taffi is added to show in what circum- 
 stances ho fult pained. Accordingly, and because the 
 ablative docs not seem to admit of being suitably inter- 
 preted as denoting the means or instrument by which the 
 feeling is procured, which is the only other sense that is at 
 all probable, this use of the ablative has been placed under 
 the locativus, as having its origin in the notion of position 
 in space, from which springs, as was seen before, that of 
 the circumstances or condition in which an action or state 
 occurs. 
 
 It may be remarked that im with the dative is more com- 
 monly added to ;^a^.£»ra»; ipipeiv, and that this rather con- 
 firms the interpretation above given; for the notion of 
 condition, contained in the preposition as here used with 
 the dative, is pretty nearly equivalent to that of the circum- 
 stances or condition in which an action or state occurs, as 
 conveyed by the ablative or locativus. (Cf. Kiihu. Ausf. 
 Gr. §584,Anm.l.) 
 
78 
 
 SIGNIFIOAIION OF THE OASES. 
 
 6. Here belong the particles r^, ' then,' ' therefore,' and 
 Toe, 'then,' 'accordingly,' 'indeed,' with its various com- 
 pounds. And as the latter especially' is not quite obvious 
 in its interpretation, while separately and in composition it 
 is of very frequent occurrence, it may bo pardonable to give 
 to its explanation a larger space than may bo strictly con- 
 sistent with the plan of this work. To avoid, however, 
 embarrassing the reader with the introduction here of a 
 discussion necessarily extended, and that might seem irrele- 
 vant, it has been added as an appendix at the end of what 
 is said of the ablative case. Such as may desire to examine 
 the origin of the significations borne by rot, partly to be 
 found in the locativus case, will, perhaps, readily excuse 
 the introduction here of a discussion which they would 
 rather expect to find in a treatise on the particles of the 
 language ; especially if they should be satisfied of the truth 
 of the conclusions reached, and of the correctness of the 
 process by which they are obtained. Others, who may feel 
 less interest in such an inquiry, may readily pass it by as 
 a digression. 
 
 b. Inslrumentalis. 
 
 In the second class of examples in which the ablative is 
 employed in Qrcek, it may be called the instrumcntalis, as 
 niai'kiiig the iustrumeut, means, or agent by which an 
 action is performed. 
 
 1. The ablative or instrumcntalis is used to denote the 
 means or instrument by which an action ia performed, 
 where it is rendered in English by the prepositions 'by,' 
 ' with.' E.g. II. 199, rbu ffiajrcTpiff iidaeaxs, ' drove him away 
 with his sceptre ;' Xen. Cyrop. iv. 3, 21, 6 (ten {iicTzoxivTaupoz) 
 j-up Suoiiv dip&aXiioiv npoewpdro, xal Suaitv diroiv -fjxouev, ij-w 3& 
 rir-apae fikv ^(pdaXfiioiz zexpaipoupat, rirrapat dk wal npocua- 
 dr^aopat, ' I will see with two eyes, and hear with two ears,' 
 &c. So likewise with adjectives, and even with nouns; as, 
 TToai T«pc, 'swift of foot,' properly, 'swift with the feet;' 
 e.g. Plat. Polit. p. 280, D, rdf ^/^ TrpdSet^, 'violent deeds,' 
 properly, 'deeds done by violence.' 
 
 Of the same nature is the ablative or instrumcntalis used 
 to mark the means by which a judgment is formed, as with 
 
 APPENDIX TO THE LOCATIVUS: TCI. 
 
 79 
 
 
 YiYvdaxsiv, 'to decide,' ard^puadae, 'to judge,' ehdl^uv, 'to 
 conjecture,' xpivetv, 'to judge,' Texpalpea&eu, 'to form an 
 opinion,' &c ; e.g. II. v. 182, dimedi Ytj-vmaxecv, ' to decide by 
 battle ;' Herod, ii. 2, rotourip arafipj^adpevoi jtp^j-paTif 'judg- 
 ing by such a fact.' (See KUhn. Ausf. Gr. § 580, c.) 
 
 2. In the uame way, the ablative or instrumcntalis is used 
 to denote the material with which, as a means, any thing is 
 made: e.g. Herod, iii. 57, Ayopijxal rb TcpuTav^cov Ilapiip Xi&(p 
 Ijoxijpiva, ' made with Parian marble.' 
 
 APPENDIX TO THE LOCATIVUS. 
 
 OF T<p AND Tol. 
 
 I. Tip. 
 
 Tip, 'then,' 'therefore,' is the locativus form of the simple 
 demonstrative r6, employed to connect a proposition with 
 that which precedes it in such manner that it shall follow 
 upon its admission as a natural consequence, or as a rational 
 efi'ect, only less formal than that expressed by vuv. E.g. II. 
 ii. 371, eeqq., «? fiip • ■ • | toioutoi Sixa pot aupippdiipovtz ^'^v 
 'Aj^aeiou, | r^ xs r6.-£ ijpiaue i:6hz ITptdpoio dvaxToi; | j[epaiv u<p' 
 fjpeTepjjaiv, ' if I had ten such counsellors of the Achseans, 
 then (in that case) the city of king Priam would full under 
 our hands.' Here up admits or assumes the preceding pro- 
 position, and introduces the after-proposition as following 
 upon it as a natural consequence. II. ii. 252-4, uuSi ri mo 
 ad<pa idpev Sjia; iauu rdlie ipya, \ ij ei5 9jk xaatiaz voaTTJaopsv uFec 
 'A^aciov. I T<p vvp 'Azptioy ^ Ayapipvovt, notpivt, Xaiov, | ijaai duei- 
 diC^iov, 5ti ol pdXa 7iu?J.d dcdooatv \ ^pioez Auvaoi, ' wo do not yet 
 know certainly how this shall be, whether the sons of the 
 Achivi shall return well or ill. You sit then (this being so) 
 and reproach Agamemnon, son of Atreus, because the hero 
 Danai bestow very much upon him.' Odysseus sets forth 
 t^e circumstances in which Thersites utters reproaches 
 against Agamemnon, and, to show how shamefully he acts, 
 adds that in these circumstances, and because Agamcnmou 
 is honored, Thersites sits and reproaches him. T<p points 
 
80 
 
 SIONIFIOATION OF THB .^ASES. 
 
 to and affirms th^ condition of things already set forth, and 
 introduces the conduct of Thersitea as following upon it. 
 lb. 250, T<j> oux dv ^aai^a^ dva ardfji i-^iov djrafisiioi^, ' therefore 
 (seeing that of all that came to Ilium no one is inferior to 
 you,) do not you harangue with the kings upon your lips.' Id. 
 iv. 410, r^J /aj [toe irazipaz no^ ^f^oij^ Ivdeo ri/t^, ' do not then 
 (therefore) ever place our fathers in like honor with me.' 
 In the previous part of his speech the son of Capancus had 
 assorted the RMpcriority of the heroes of his day over their 
 fathers, and, after alleging facts to sustain his assertion, says 
 in conclusion, T<f/ fi^ ftoe x.rJ., 'do not then (seeing this ia 
 bo) place our fathers in like honor with me.' (Cf. II. v. 894, 
 vi. 224.) 
 
 This signification of ' then,' ' therefore,' with which T<p 
 occurs ill the Attic poets also, and even in prose writers, 
 (see Passow's Lex. s. v. o, ^, to,) is to be explained by reference 
 both to its demonstrative form and to its case. For if the 
 leading significations of the demonstrative be considered, 
 they will be found to contain the notion of recalling, and 
 thus of admitting or affirming a preceding proposition, 
 which is involved in the sense of r^. The demonstrative, 
 as seen in the article and elsewhere, conveys (a) the 
 sense of pointing to a thing; (b) that of distinguishing an 
 object, by pointing to it, from others of the same class or 
 category, and so of separating it and giving it emphasis 
 and cntinencc ; as is seen in the use of the article, in the 
 ordinal numerals and the superlative, in the Greek com- 
 pound 8<h, and in the Latin iste and quidam; (c) that of 
 repeating an object and affirming its identity, an object 
 already named or had in view being called up again by 
 being pointed to instead of being named a second time ; as 
 seen in 6 auriif, 'the same,' in the Latin idem, 'the same,' 
 in ai, audci;, alirti;, ' again,' in the Latin aulem, ' again,' ' more- 
 over,' and in aurd;, 'himself;' and (d) that of admitting or 
 affirming a thing; for, by being pointed to, a matter already 
 named is recalled, repeated, and thus virtually admitted^or 
 affirmed; thus raura, in answer to a question, signifies 
 •that,' 'just 80," 'yes.' E.g. in Aristoph. Pax. 274-5, a 
 person asks, ouxouv trtp6v yi uv' ix AaxtSaifiovoi ftiret \ dvuaa^ 
 
 i 
 
 ■ ;- 
 
 APPENDIX TO THE LOCATIVnS: tOI. 
 
 81 
 
 n; 'will you not quickly go for a second person from 
 Lacedtemon ?' and the answer is, roor' «Z Siaitodf, 'yes, sir.' 
 This same thing is efiected in Latin by repeating the term 
 that forms the subject of the question ; e.g. fecistine f feci, ' did 
 you do it ? yes.' Thus it would seem that r^, by virtue of its 
 demonstrative sense alone, is capable of pointing to, recalling, 
 and thus admitting or affirming, a preceding proposition. 
 
 Further, assuming T<j> to be a locativus case, it would 
 express, by its secondary meaning, the circumstances, con- 
 dition, or case in which an action or state occurs. So that 
 this particle, considered as a demonstrative, and as having 
 the case of the locativus, would be equivalent to ' in that 
 case,' ' admitting that,' ' that being so ;' and, being employed 
 to introduce a second proposition as following upon that 
 admitted or affirmed by it, it would be represented in 
 English by 'therefore' or by 'then,' according as this 
 added proposition is more or less distinctly marked as a 
 rational consequence. 
 
 II. Toi. 
 
 The enclitic conjunction rot, ' then,' ' accordingly then,' 
 'indeed,' is, in form, cither a dative or locativus of the 
 demonstrative rb, but from its meaning is to be referred to 
 the locativus. It is, in fact, the same with Ttft, ' then,' 
 'therefore,' rot being only the more ancient mode of writing 
 the dative, locativus, and instrumentalis rifi, just as otxot, 
 'at home,' is the old form of the locativus of o7xoc, and 
 ol, ' whither,' not ; ' whither V are dative forms of 5c and wic > 
 
 Toi corresponds in sense to the English ' then,' ' accord- 
 ingly then,' 'indeed,' and in the compounds ftivroi and 
 xtttToi obtains that of 'however' and 'although,' the meaning 
 varying with the relations which the member introduced by 
 to/ bears to the preceding member. Properly speaking, 
 rot, in virtue of its demonstrative and locative sense, points 
 to, recalls, admits, or affirms an immediately preceding 
 terq^, proposition, or condition of things, upon the admis- 
 sion or allegation of which the proposition introduced by 
 rot follows. But, while rol is thus made the sign that the 
 statement which it introduces follows upon the admission 
 
 s 
 
82 
 
 BlQHIZiaATION OF TUB X!A8ES. 
 
 or allegation of something previous to which it points, it is 
 true, as just suggested, that there is some variety in the 
 relations between the added proposition and that upon 
 which it follows. Thus, (a) the antecedent term or propo- 
 sition is recalled, admitted, or affirmed, and the added 
 proposition follows as simply in accordance with it; as 
 where rot is rendered by 'then,' 'accordingly then,' and 
 sometimes, properly enough, by ' indeed,' this latter term, 
 however, only indicating, as the former does, but with per- 
 haps something more of emphasis, the recalling and affirma- 
 tion of the preceding term or statement, (b.) With the like 
 recalling and admission of what precedes, the added pro- 
 position is regarded as a rational consequence; as where, in 
 the compound roiwv, and elsewhere, rot has the sense of 
 ' therefore.' (c.) In another set of examples, rot marks the 
 admission of what goes before, but the proposition that 
 follows is, in some degree, in contrariety with it, so that the 
 admission is made with the limitation and partial contradic- 
 tion introduced by the added statement; as where, in the 
 compounds ^ewof and xcuroe, and occasionally when standing 
 alone, it is rendered by 'however' and 'although,' 'yet not- 
 withstanding.' (d.) In some examples, again, roc seems to 
 be a more emphatic repetition of a preceding term in its 
 own member of sentence, being equivalent to the English 
 ' I say,' ' that I say,' or to ' indeed.' E.g. Aristoph. Av. 406, 
 lui iitoip, ae Toi xakai, «ho there, hoopoe! you, I say, I am 
 calling;' Id. ib. 274, ooroc, <L as toi, 'you there,. ho you, I 
 say, (I am calling you);' Id. ib. 945, fiivef S toi Urot, 'you 
 understand, then, what I say ;' Xen. Memorab. ii. 1, 11, d^' 
 iytb TOI, iipij 6 'JpiareTmoz, ou8e etc t^v SouXuav ai i/taurdv rdrrw, 
 dXX' elvat X.T.L, ' well, neither indeed do I, said Aristippus, 
 commit myself, on the other hand, to slavery.' But here, also, 
 Toi has essentially the same office of recalling, and of repeat- 
 ing, or admitting a preceding term, or the substance of what 
 goes before. In the two last examples cited, ro/, although 
 apparently merely repeating 5 and ir<i, does really refer 
 to the preceding discourse. In the two former of these 
 examples, roj does repeat with emphasis the term ai ; but 
 it should be observed that ai is itself a substitution, aa it 
 
 APPENDIX TO THE LOCITIVUS: TOI. 
 
 83 
 
 were, for a preceding terra, and that this accounts for the 
 only peculiarity that distinguishes this use of ro/, apart 
 from its referring to a single term, and not to a proposition. 
 This peculiarity is, that the term which it repeats, by point- 
 ing to it, stands in the proposition introduced by toI instead 
 of in a preceding sentence ; and this comes from the fact 
 that the term which it repeats with emphasis is, as has just 
 been stated, a substitution for a preceding term. Thus, in the 
 first example cited, la> inoip, ai toi xaXai, 'ho there, hoopoe! 
 you, I say, I am calling,' the term ino^ being called out, 
 and the bird called not answering, the name of the second 
 person is substituted, and in repeating this with emphasis 
 Tol does virtually recall the foregoing term. The same is 
 seen in the second example. Granting, however, that, in 
 such examples, toI is marked by the peculiarity of use above 
 mentioned, it will not be different in its nature : as it else- 
 where points to and recalls a proposition, so here it points 
 to and recalls an individual term. 
 
 Assuming the above examples to be sufficient to illustrate 
 the use of roe as recalling and repeating with emphasis 
 individual terms, it may be proper to add some instances of 
 . its more common occurrence as the means of indicating 
 that the proposition which it introduces follows upon the 
 recalling, admitting, or affirming a preceding proposition. 
 Thus, II. i. 423-25, Zeb; yiip lii ^ Qxeavbv fisT^ d/Jtu/jtova(; Aldion^ai; 
 I Jf<^'C°f ^?V "'^" Satra, ^soi S" IL/ia ndvTtz enovro. | SwSsxdTjj 
 Si Tvt auzez iXeuaerou OuXu/ja:6u8e, ' for Zeus went yesterday to 
 a feast; but on the twelfth day, then, (that being so,) he 
 will return to Olympus." Here there are two propositions 
 connected by rot. The former, that Zeus has gone to a feast, 
 which is alleged by Thetis as a reason why she cannot im- 
 mediately visit Olympus to represent the wrongs of Achilleus 
 to her father Zeus, is pointed to and admitted by roe; and 
 the second, that, on the , other hand {Si), he will return on 
 the twelfth day, when she will go to Olympus, follows upon 
 this admission ; and considering that, with reference to the 
 proposed visit of Thetis, the two propositions stand in some 
 contrariety to each other, rot might properly be rendered by 
 .'yet,' 'notwithstanding.' 'Admitting that he has gone to 
 
84 
 
 BIGNIFIOATION OF THE OASES. 
 
 a feast, yet, on the other hand, he will return the twelfth 
 day to Olympus/ 
 
 II. V. 263, seqq., Alvetao if inat^at fUftvt]fiipo(: imtwv, | ix If 
 Hdaat Tpatov /utr' ii)xuj/u8<K 'A^cuoic, \ rijz ydp toi yeve^Ct 
 ^C 7/0(01 mp tipudna ZtiK \ Sm^, 'mindful rush upon the 
 horses of ^neas, and drive them away from the Trojans 
 into the midst of the Achseans ; for they are, then, of the 
 breed that wide-voiced Zeus gave to Tros.' Here are two 
 propositions: the former, an injunction of Diomedes to seize 
 and drive away the horses of ^neas ; the latter, the declara- 
 tion of a reason for so doing, namely, that they are of the 
 noblest breed. Toi, consistently with its demonstrative 
 nature and with its locative sense, points to the former pro- 
 position, and, recalling or assuming it, that is, with the sense 
 of ' in that case,' admitting or assuming the injunction given, 
 introduces, as according with it, the reason contained in the 
 latter proposition, that the horses are of the noblest breed. 
 Toi is properly rendered, in this example, by ' then' or by 
 'indeed:' if by the latter, it will be only slightly different, 
 as indicating that the former proposition is, in some sort, 
 more positively and earnestly assumed as that for which 
 the latter assigns a reason. 
 
 II. iv. 404-5, ^ArpeiSij, fti] ij>eude\ imardfievoz adfa dniiv. \ 
 ^ptiz rot naripwv pif dpeipove^ eu^6pe&' cTvcu, ' Atreides, do 
 not speak falsely, when you know how to speak truly. We, 
 then, boast that we are greatly better men than our fathers.' 
 The son of Capaneus is replying to a speech of Agamemnon, 
 in which it is alleged that he is inferior as a warrior to his 
 father. He first charges Agamemnon indirectly with speak- 
 ing falsely when he knew the truth, and then declares that 
 he and the heroes of his day boast of being far better warriors 
 than their fathers. The latter proposition, or boast of 
 superiority, assumes the former, or the charge of speaking 
 falsely, to be true, and follows as a natural consequence. 
 This is indicated by rot, which points to, recalls, and affirms 
 the preceding proposition, and is equivalent to 'then,' 
 'accordingly then,' 'indeed,' that is, to ' in that case,' 'that 
 assumed or affirmed.' 
 
 II. V. 800-1, )} dXiyov of naida ioixdra yilvaro Tudsu(. \ Tudtu^ 
 
 APPENDIX TO THE LOOATIVUS: TOI. 
 
 85 
 
 TOI fuxpbz phu Sijv iUpa:, dUa pajpiziji, 'surely Tydeus begat 
 a son little like himself. Tydeus, then (indeed), was small 
 m person, but a warrior.' Toi points to the former proposi- 
 tion, namely, that Tydeus begat a son little like himself, 
 and assumes it to be true, the added proposition being in just 
 accordance with it, and following as a natural consequence. 
 It is equivalent to 'in that case,' 'that being so,' and may 
 be rendered by 'then,' 'accordingly then," 'indeed.' 
 
 Plat. Rep. i. p. 330, b, iy^ 8h drcarw, iuv p^ iMrrw xarakinm 
 TOUTotai, dUa fipaxet yi rtvi nXeito § napiXa^ov. Oh rot evtxa 
 ijpopyjv, jjv d' tyw, ozi pot IdoSai; ou Oipidpa dj-catav ri XP^l^ra, 
 ' but, on my part, if I leave my property to these not less 
 than I inherited it, but some little greater, I am content. 
 For this reason then (indeed), said I, I asked you the ques- 
 tion, because you seemed to me to be not very fond of your 
 money.' Toi here shows that the former proposition, that 
 the speaker was content if he left his property to his heirs 
 a« great as he inherited it, or only a little greater, is admitted 
 or assumed to be true ; and the added statement, that the 
 question asked has this for its ground, is introduced aa con- 
 sequent upon and in accordance with this assumption. It 
 has the meaning of ' in that case,' ' that being so,' and may 
 be rendered by ' then,' or ' indeed.' 
 
 Id. Gorg. p. 447, b, ^;r' abro j-i rot toOto ndpeapev, 'for this 
 very thing, then (indeed), are we here.' Callicles asks 
 Chperephon if Socrates, with whom he has just come up, 
 desires to hear Qorgias. ChiBrephon, referring by roi to 
 tie substance of the question, and repeating and affirming 
 it, adds, as being in accordance with the admitted fact, that 
 he and Socrates were come for this very object. Toi, then, 
 is equivalent to ' that being so,' « in that case,' and is pro^ 
 periy rendered by 'then,' or 'indeed.' 
 
 Aristoph. Equit. 683, ndura toi niTrpaj-a; 61a xpij rbv turo- 
 XowTo, 'you have done, then, all that is required of a man 
 of success.' The sausage-seller has made a long recital of 
 his bold deeds, and the chorus, admitting or assuming this 
 to he true, declares that, this being so, he has done all that 
 is required of a successful man. Here, also, Toi has the 
 sense of 'in that case,' ' that being bo,' and may be properly 
 
d6 
 
 BioNinoAnoN or tub oabbs. 
 
 tranelated by * then,' 'indeed.' Id. ib. 1354-5, ^Ayop.) outoz, 
 n xuKTUz; ouj[i xari j^dpav fuvetz; \ {•d^fi-) a/<r;fovo//a/ rot rdiz 
 nplntpm ifiapriaec, Agorakr. * You, eir, why do you hang 
 your head ? will you not keep in your place V Ucra. ' I 
 am, then, ashamed of my former sins.' By means of rot the 
 Demus points to, recalls, and admits the statement that he 
 hangs his head, and adds, in accordance vrith this admission, 
 and as famishing the reason of the fact, that he ia ashamed 
 of his former sins. (Cf. Id. ib. 178-180.) 
 
 Eurip. Ilecub. 747, et rot fie ^ouhi roivde fiijdku eidhat \ 
 iz Tourbv ^xEcc, 'if, then, (as I assume from your conduct to 
 he true) you wish me to know nothing of this, you have 
 reached the same end,' 'have attained your object quite as 
 much.' Agamemnon, referring by roi to the previously 
 described condition of things, in which Hecuba, while she 
 wishes to make a petition to him, yet hesitates to speak, 
 and thus calling up this strange silence on her part, says, 
 what is in accordance with it, and follows as a natural con- 
 sequence, 'you accomplish, then, in being thus mute, just 
 the same thing as if you wish me to know nothing at all of 
 this matter of yours.' 
 
 Id. Orest. 544, cJ jipov, iyto roe npoz ah Ssifioivto Xiyeiv, ' I am, 
 then (indeed, in the condition of things before exhibited), 
 afraid, old man, to speak to you.' Tyndareus has. been 
 uttering just reproaches against the conduct of Orestes; 
 and Orestes, referring to the state of Tyndareus' feelings 
 thus manifested, pointing to and alleging it by means of 
 roe, says that, in accordance with this, and in consequence 
 of it, he ia afraid to speak to him. 
 
 Herod, i. 41, «/)ic ^^ roortp xai ai rot j[petiv itrri livat Iv&a 
 ixolaftnpuvtat rolat ipj-oifft, 'besides, it is proper, then, for 
 you also to go where you will be distinguished by your 
 deeds.' Croesus had asked Adrastus to take charge of his 
 son in the hunt and guard him from robbers; and then, 
 pointing to and repeating by ro/ what he had already alleged, 
 says, ' and besides, it is proper, then, for you also, this being 
 true, my reasons for the request made being such, to go 
 where you will be distinguished by your deeds.' That ia, 
 ' admitting what has been said, and in accordance with it, it 
 
 APPBNDIX TO THE lOCATIVUS: TOI. 
 
 87 
 
 is besides proper for you also to go where you will be dis* 
 tinguishcd.' 
 
 Soph. Philoct. 81, m'—^dh ydp rot xt^/m Tiyc wx^f iafieTv, | 
 —rSi/ta, « nay, since, then (indeed), it is sweet to gain the 
 victory, venture to do it." Odyaseusurges Neoptolemus to 
 undertake the enterprise of getting posseaaion of the arrows 
 of Philoctetes, and adds, that in that case, assuming the 
 undertaking the task, it ia, then, sweet to gain the victory. 
 Tot points to, repeats, and assumes the fact of the action 
 contained in roXpa, and which is urged upon Neoptolemus, 
 and in accordance with the assumed fact is the proposition 
 added, namely, that the victory gained by venturing upon a 
 difficult undertaking is sweet. The use of roi in this place 
 ia remarkable only for this, that the action to which it 
 points {roi/ia) comes after instead of going before ; so that 
 it can only be referred to by anticipation. (Cf. Id. Phil. 
 686, 823 ; Xen. Cyrop. i. 6, 9 ; Plat. Qorg. p. 458, b and e, 
 and p. 484, c ; Eurip. Ilccub, 743 ; II. xxi. 69-70.) 
 
 Aristoph. Av. 1437, mv toi liymv nrepti ae, ' now, then 
 (indeed), will I by speaking give you wings.' In such 
 examples roe is to be interpreted just as in the preceding 
 instances, it being unafl'octed by the immediately preceding 
 word uiju. 
 
 In the same way, again, roe when following upon xai j-dp, 
 80 as to form the expression xai j-dp roe, is unaffected by the 
 terms xai and j-dp, these also retaining each its peculiar 
 sense. That is, rot has the sense of « then,' ' indeed,' admit- 
 ting or affirming the preceding proposition, and introducing 
 a statement that is consequent upon, and in accordance 
 with this admission or affirmation ; xai is the sign of addi- 
 tion, and, according to the conditions of the addition, ia 
 to be rendered by 'and,' 'moreover,' 'besides,' 'even,' the 
 Latin el and autcm; and ydp (= yi + dp or dpa) shows that 
 the proposition which it introduces contains the rational 
 ground of what precedes, answering to the English ' for ;' or, 
 having regard to its elements, gives the assent of the speaker 
 to the antecedent statement (^-i), and expresses the conformity 
 thereto of what follows {dpa), so that the whole expreb- 
 aion ia capable of being rendered in Engliah by • for more- 
 
88 
 
 SIONIVIOAIION OF THE CASE6. 
 
 over then,' or 'for boBidea then.' E.g. Xen. Cyrop, i. 1, 4, 
 xat ydp rot Toaourov ii^vej-xe rmv dXXwv ^aatXkatv . . . wart 6 
 fihv Sxu&Tjz, X.T.I., ' for besides, iihen, he so far surpassed all 
 other kings, that the Scythian,' &c. The writer says that 
 he came to the conclusion, from facts mentioned, that men 
 were more difficult to govern than all other animals ; but 
 that, by the instance of Gyrus the Persian, who had very 
 many nations willingly subject to him, he was forced to 
 change his view, and to admit that to govern men was 
 neither impossible nor difficult, provided it was done with 
 competent skill. What follows, zoaourov dajveyxe rtov dkXwv 
 fiaatUtav, x.r.X,, is shown by xai and ydp to be both an addition 
 to what goes before, and a ground or reason for it, while roi 
 at the same time points to and affirms the preceding proposi- 
 tion, and introduces what follows as in accordance with it. 
 
 Looking, then, to the form, and to the signification and 
 use of Toc, it may safely be affirmed to be the locativus case 
 singular of the demonstrative t6, seen in the article and 
 elsewhere. The way in which the demonstrative idea in 
 roe and that of the case conspire to give its usual sense 
 of ' then,' ' accordingly then,' ' indeed,' * therefore,' has been 
 set forth under r^, and in the course of explaining the 
 various examples bad under consideration. Here it may be 
 proper to add a summary of what has been said. 1. It has 
 been shown that rot as a demonstrative points to, recalls, or 
 repeats, and thus assumes, admits, or affirms, a preceding 
 term or proposition. That the precise sense in which the 
 recalling or repeating a term or proposition by pointing to 
 it is to be taken, is not always the same. At one time it 
 will amount to a mere emphatic repetition of a term already 
 used, at another to the assumption or admission, and still 
 at another to the affirmation, of what goes before. That 
 the demonstrative merely recalling or repeating a term or 
 proposition by pointing to it, and thus involving its admis- 
 sion or affirmation, the precise one of its meanings that is 
 to be attached to it in any particular case must be gathered 
 from the context. That the proposition introduced by rot 
 presupposes the admission, assumption, or affirmation of 
 the preceding proposition or term, and follows it as a 
 
 APPENDIX TO THE LOCATIVUS: TOI. 
 
 89 
 
 natural consequence, a matter of course, or as a rational 
 inference, the relation between the two propositions being 
 ■^ expressed in English by * then,' ' accordingly then,' « indeed,' 
 
 orby' therefore." That the case in which to/ obtains the sense 
 of 'although,' 'yet,' 'however,' is one in which there is a 
 degree of real or apparent contrariety between the added and 
 the former propositions ; the peculiarity of meaning resulting, 
 not from any thing in roi itself, but from the natural relations 
 of the matters affirmed in the two propositions, and from the 
 necessary limitation which is put upon an admitted state- 
 ment by connecting with it, as a sequence, another that 
 stands in some degree of real or apparent contrariety. 
 
 That the casus locativus, to which vol belongs, being 
 used in a secondary sense, expresses the circumstances, 
 condition, or case in which an action occurs or a statement 
 is made ; and that, considered in its conjunction with the 
 demonstrative, it is equivalent to * in the case stated," ' that 
 admitted," « that being so ;' and, as having reference to a 
 proposition that follows as a matter of course, or as a 
 rational inference, is equivalent, again, to 'then,' 'accord- 
 ingly then,' ' indeed,' ' therefore.' 
 ' This summary may be set forth as follows : 
 
 Tl, loe*. 
 
 ft. poiDtIng to;' 
 If. rvciilling, or 
 1. Demon- ._ rupf^nrlng ; 
 atntira— ) c. adinilting, 
 aiiHuiiiing, 
 aftiruilng u 
 truti. 
 
 .2. LocatlTiu= tlio clrcum- 
 
 ■tllllvuB, cnii- 
 dltidii, caHO, 
 
 iU Wllicll AU 
 ftCtloD UC- 
 
 curH, or a 
 
 ■tntuniont 
 
 bolda goud. 
 
 'Inthatciu6.\ 
 _' that admit- 1 , 
 "tod,"lhatl»-fT 
 
 log lo:' 
 
 i propoai- 
 tlon that 
 fuUowa : 
 
 ' a. aa a natural aeqnenos 
 
 =' then/ 'accofdiDg- 
 ly then/ ■ Indeed.* 
 
 b. B8 a rational Infer- 
 ence=* thitrefore/ 
 
 e. with a di!t;reoorcon- 
 trarletyz:' yet/ •al- 
 though/ * however/ 
 
 The same sense properly belongs to roe when it occurs in 
 oompounds, and when it is conjoined with other particles, 
 both where it comes after, as, ourot, fiivrot, xmoi, fjroi, ^rot, vw 
 tot, xat xdp zoi, and where it stands first, as, rdpa (joidpa) and 
 ripa, {roi ipa), rotydp, roq^dproi, roij-apow, rohun; and this, 
 although it obtains in some of these a peculiar sense, arising 
 from the contrariety in which the action affirmed in the after- 
 proposition stands to that which goes before, as in xairoi, 
 'although,' 'and yet,' and ftivvoi, 'however.' This has 
 
90 
 
 BIGNIflOATIOH OF THE CASES. 
 
 been shown in the case of puu rot and of xal ydp rot, above 
 considered ; and, to make the account of rot in some measure 
 complete, it is of course necessary to examine the remaining 
 instances of its conjunction with other particles; for, other- 
 wise, we cannot be sure of the correctness of its interpretation 
 in the cases where it stands alone. 
 
 OuTOt. • 
 
 In ouTot the sense of rot is retained unchanged. E.g. II. i. 
 298, XH'"' f-^^ ourot (yarfe /iaj[^<rofiat tivsxa xoupiji;, 'for my 
 part, I will not then (indeed) fight with my hands for the 
 virgin.' Achillcus, being incensed against Agamemnon on 
 account of the virgin Cryse'is, declares that he will not yield 
 to him in every thing, nor any longer obey him ; and then adds 
 that, while this is so, affirming the truth of what he has just 
 said, he will not fight with his hands on account of the virgin, 
 since she has been taken away from him by the Greeks after 
 having been given to him ; but that Agamemnon shall not 
 take away from him any thing else of all that he has at his 
 ship. The former proposition of the two, that declaring that 
 he will not }'ield in eveiy thing nor any longer obey, is 
 pointed to by roi, and thus recalled and afiirmcd, and the 
 second or added proposition is introduced with the admission 
 or allegation of the former, or, as it may here bo understood, 
 notwithstanding this admission ; for the second proposition, 
 that Agamemnon shjill not take away any thing else that he 
 has at his ship, is in some sort opposed to the preceding one 
 upon which it follows, that he will not fight for the virgin 
 who has been taken from him. Tot, as indicating the con- 
 nection existing between the two propositions, may be 
 rendered by 'then,' 'indeed,' and, having regard to the 
 apparent contrariety in which the second stands to the former, 
 by ' yet,' ' notwithstanding.' Ou, the former part of ourot, 
 has its proper signification of the direct negative ' not,' and 
 is connected with fia][^troftat, having no effect upon the 
 meaning of rot. 
 
 Eurip. Ilecub. 743, wrot nitpuxa fidvrt(; &are inj xXuatv \ 
 iSearopf^trau aStv bSbv fiouXeufidrtov, ' I am not, then (indeed), a 
 diviner so as to find out the tenor of your designs without 
 
 APPENDIX TO THE LOCATIVUS: OTTOI. 
 
 91 
 
 { 
 
 hearing them.' Hecuba stands in the presence of Agamem- 
 non, hesitating whether she will invoke his compassion. 
 Agamemnon, pointing to and recalling this conduct of 
 hers by means of roi, adds, as following upon this condition 
 of things, that he is not a diviner so as to find out her pur- 
 poses while she keeps silent about them. Toi has here the 
 sense of 'then,' 'indeed,' and is unaffected by oi, which has 
 its ^oper meaning, and is connected in sense with 7tia>uxa 
 fidpra;. 
 
 Eur. Orcst. 262, ourot ftsthjaio, 'I will not then (indeed) lot 
 you go.' Orestes, in a fit of frenzy, struggles to release 
 himself from his sister's hands. She, referring to his strug- 
 gles and to his cries of horror, and recalling them by means 
 of rot, adds that, in this condition of things, this being so, 
 she will not let him go. But, inasmuch as the action in 
 the second proposition is not such as accords with what is 
 referred to and recalled by roi, but something to be done 
 notwithstanding it, rot is better rendered by 'yet,' ' notwith- 
 standing.' The sense is, that Electra will not let her brother 
 go, notwithstanding his cries and struggles. Ou does not 
 affect the meaning of roi. 
 
 Eur. Vhron. 452, irtiaxei;- ourot rb rajiy rijv Sixtjvixu, 'hold; 
 in haste, indeed, there is not justice.' locasta checks Eteocles 
 in his impetuous haste, and bids him stay, adding, as conso- 
 nant with this demand, to which roi points, and which it 
 repeats, that haste is not wont to be jnst. The command to 
 hold and stay his haste, contained in the former proposition, 
 being recalled and repeated by roi, the added statement, 
 that haste is not wont to be just, is rationally consistent with, 
 and follows upon it. 
 
 Eurip. PhoBn. 552, seqq,, § 7:oXXu iio^Mv noXk' l^iov iv 
 iwiiaat I ^ouXu; ri ^ lart rb TtXiov; ovofi' i^et pbvov \ inei r& 
 fdpxouvff" Ixaud role ys amippoatv. \ ourot rA xpytpae idta xixrTjvrat 
 Pporoi, I rd rwv diwv ff i^ovrez impeXoufte&a. locasta, having 
 affirmed that excess of power and wealth are a mere name, 
 and thatmen of moderation are content with what is sufficient 
 for them, adds, pointing to and reaffirming this doctrine of 
 moderation by means of roi, that, consistently with the 
 truth affirmed, mortals do not hold their possessions as t..eir 
 
92 
 
 BIGNinCATION OF THE CASES. 
 
 own, but as stewards of the gods: * mortals, then, or indeed,' 
 (this doctrine of moderation being admitted, in that case,' 
 and consistently with it,) do not hold their possessions as 
 their own, but as stewards of the gods.' Here, again, as in 
 the preceding examples, rot is uninfluenced iu its meaning 
 by oi). (Gf. Aristoph. Equit. 235, 409, 698.) 
 
 MivToi. • 
 
 In fiivTot, 'then,' 'indeed,' 'however,' rot retains the 
 significatiou which it had when not conjoined with fiiv, 
 and fiiu has its usual force of giving emphasis to, and hence 
 of sometimes setting in contrast, the word to which it is 
 immediately attached. The power of /tivj which when 
 rendered into English is equivalent to 'indeed,' is often 
 incapable of being expressed otherwise than by the em- 
 phasis given to the term to which it belongs ; and hence 
 it occurs that fiivroi is so commonly to be translated pre- 
 cisely as roc is when standing alone. The two significations 
 of fiivToe, namely, that of 'then,' 'indeed,' and that of 
 'however,' 'yet however,' differ only in this, that, in the 
 former, rot points or refers to, recalls, and so admits, 
 assumes, or asserts, the preceding proposition, the following 
 statement being added as in accordance with it, or as 
 rationally' consistent with its admission or assertion ; while, 
 in the latter, the reference to and admission of tlic preced- 
 ing proposition being the same, the added statement is made 
 DotwitLstunding the 'adraisnion or assertion of what goes 
 before. Some examples will illustrate what has boon here 
 said. 
 
 Xen. Cyrop. i. 6, 6, Nai fia Jia, i^ij h Kupoc, fiiftvrjfiai /liv- 
 rot Taiira djtouaaz trou, • yes, of a truth, said Cyrus, I remem- 
 ber, then (indeed), that I heard this from you.' Ilis father 
 asks Cyrus whether he remembers certain precepts given 
 him before. Cyrus, referring by vol to the statement 
 involved in his father's question, and so admitting it, 'that 
 being so,' 'admitting the fact of the precepts having been 
 given,' connects with this admission the declaration that he 
 remembers having heard them from his father : ' I remem- 
 ber, indeed, then, having heard this from you.' llere it is 
 
 APPENDIX TO THE LOCATIVUS: MENTOI. 
 
 93 
 
 plain that to! performs its common office, being equivalent 
 to 'then,' 'that being so,' 'indeed,' and thatyu^i; is attached 
 to and gives emphasis to ftifiini/icu, having no influence 
 upon Tol. 
 
 Xen. Cyrop. i. 4, 20, AI>t6c {6 KZpoz) icpmoz ijyetTo raxiwi;, 
 *ai 6 Kua^dpi^z fiivrot iipdntro, 'Cyrus himself foremost 
 rapidly led the waj', and Cyaxares, on his part (jxiv) then 
 {rot), followed after.' Here rot refers to, recalls, and alleges 
 the previously stated fact of Cyrus leading the way, and 
 then is connected with this, as according with and naturally 
 attending it, the statement that Cyaxares on his part fol- 
 lowed after. Consequently, rol performs iU usual part, 
 while idv is attached to the term KuaUpriz, and gives to it 
 a certain emphasis, whereby Cyaxares is set in contrast 
 with Cyrus. Cf. Id. ib. § 22, xai 6 KuaSdpijz fiivrot ifekero, 
 'and Cyaxares, on his part (jtiv), this being so (rot\ fol- 
 lowed after.' 
 
 Aristoph. Av. 1651, (ffpa.)ir<i» v6doz; riXiyur, {nst.)<,h ftSv- 
 rot UTj Jia, I d,u ye Hvrjt; yuvatxbz: Era. 'I illegitimate? What 
 do you say?' Peisth, 'You are, indeed (then), born as 
 you are of a foreign woman.' Here, again, {tiv in {liwot is 
 immediately attached to ai, 'you indeed,' 'you, on your 
 part,' and roi is equivalent to 'then,' 'indeed,' recalling and 
 asserting the statement involved in the previous question, 
 while, in accordance with this assertion, is added the doclal 
 ration 'you are, verily, being born of a foreign woman.' 
 Cf. Aristoph. Equit. 167-8, {%!.) . . . (arpar^rooc) . . . %«c, 
 fuX^etz, iv Ttpuraueitp huxdae«:. | (M.dvr.) iyti; {Jfj,t.) ah fiiv- 
 rot. Dem. 'You will put commanders in clmins, watch 
 them, play the wanton iu the prytaneum.' Sausage-seller. 
 'I?' Dcm. ' You, I say,' 'you, indeed.' Tot does not refer 
 to au, to which idv gives emphasis, but to the preceding 
 assertion Jj^Veic, *. r. ;., the sense being, 'you, I say, will 
 put the commanders iu chains,' &c. 
 
 But more commonly fiivroi has the sense of ' however,' 
 'yet however,' /dv and roi having each really the same 
 sense, iu themselves considered, as in the preceding ex- 
 amples, and that of ' however' arising in the way already 
 explained. 
 
94 
 
 SIQNIFIOATION OF THE OASES. 
 
 E.g. Plat. Hep. i. p. 827, a, xo^j; /jkv oiv fxoe xai ^ rotv im- 
 jiwfiiwv xo/jor^ IdoSev elvat, olt fiivroi ^rrov kfoivtro npenetv 9jv of 
 dpqLxez Ine/jocov, ' to me the procession of the natives seemed 
 to be handsome: not, however, less becoming appeared to be 
 that conducted by the Thrakes.' Mention has been made of 
 a handsome procession of the natives at the Firieus, and in 
 the member of the sentence introduced by fiivtoi an ad- 
 ditional fact is affirmed, that the procession of the Thrakes 
 appeared to the speaker not loss handsome. Hero fiiv has 
 its usual emphatic sense, and being attached to ob, and by 
 consequence to f^rrov ifahero npiituv, serves to put these 
 words in contrast, ' the procession of the Thrakes, on its 
 part, appeared not less handsome.' Tot refers to the pre- 
 ceding statement of the procession of the natives being 
 handsome, and by recalling admits it ; so that it is equiva- 
 lent to ' that being so,' ' admitting or affirming that,' and 
 might be rendered by 'then,' 'indeed.' The sentence so 
 understood would mean, ' the procession of the natives too 
 appeared to me to be handsome : not less handsome, then 
 (indeed), seemed to be that of the Thrakes.' But, in fact, 
 the added assertion, that the procession of the Thrakes was 
 not less handsome, while it is made with the admission of 
 the preceding representation, as shown by rot, is at the 
 same time obviously in some measure at variance with it, 
 and to be regarded as true notwithstanding such admis- 
 sion. So that from tlie natural relation of the added to the 
 preceding and admitted statement arises the sense of 'how- 
 ever,' 'yet,' the Latin iamen, by which /livrot may bo ren- 
 dered. Then the meaning of the sentence will be, ' to me 
 the procession of the natives also seemed to be handsome : 
 not less handsome, however, appeared to be that conducted 
 by the Thrakes.' 
 , Plat. Gorg. i. p. 447, A, rouTwv ftivrot . . . uizioz XatpsfSv odt, 
 iv dyopff dua]fxdaa^ 'j/^i dearpt^at, ' of this, however, Chicre- 
 phou here is the cause, in that he compelled mc to tarry in 
 the market-place.' Callicles had mentioned that Socrates 
 was come too late for a beautiful display made by Gorgias, 
 and Socrates, admitting his statement, adds as a reason for 
 his being too late, that it was caused by Chierephon com- 
 
 APPENDIX TO THE LOCATIVUS: KAITOI. 
 
 95 
 
 pelling him to tarry in the market-place. Here roe refers to 
 and admits as true what was alleged ; but there is added, by 
 way of explanation, a fact that is affirmed to be true, not 
 simply in accordance with the admission, but notwithstand- 
 ing it. So that Toi may properly be rendered by ' however,' 
 'yet notwithstanding.' JUiv is attached to roorfuv with its 
 usual emphatic sense. Cf. Eurip. Med. 790, ivraMa [livToc 
 .t6u8' dnaUdaaio Xoyov, 'hero, however, I leave this argu- 
 ment.' Id. Ilccub. 761. 
 
 Xen. Cyrop. i. 4, 23, ivTau9a ptivroi ieioavrti ft^ xai ividpa 
 nc [leil^wv bmii^, iniaj^ou, ' thereupon, however, feai^ng lest 
 some greater ambush might lie in the way, they halted.' 
 Here /livrot is equivalent to • however,' obtaining this sense 
 in the way above explained. Miv is attached to Ivrau&a 
 with its usual sense, and roc refers to and admits as true the 
 preceding fact of the pursuit and slaughter of the enemy, 
 the added statement being, in some sort, contrary to such 
 admission, and made notwithstanding it. See Id. ib. i. 4, 26, 
 i. 6, 8, and §§ 24, 25, ii. 2, 5. Plat. Gorg. p. 453, b, Id. 
 Qorg. p. 458, B, eato^ ftivroe xpr^v ivvoetu xai rb rmv napdvrcov. 
 Tzdlat ydp Tot xpeu xai 6fiaz iXdslv, iy<u mf napouai no^JA ine- 
 det^foju, ' may-be, however, we should consider the wishes 
 of those present. For, some while since, indeed (then), be- 
 fore, in fact, you came, I gave many explanations to those 
 who were present.' 
 
 KcuToe. 
 
 In the compound xairot, also, the particle rot retains its 
 proper signification, namely, that of ' then,' ' indeed,' show- 
 ing that a previous fact is admitted or affirmed, the state- 
 ment introduced being consequent upon and in conformity 
 with this admission or affirmation; or that of 'althoua;h,' 
 *yet,' the admission or nflirmation being the same, but wliat 
 is added in the proposition introduced by roe being true, not 
 as consequent upoti and in accordance with that which goes 
 before, but notwithstanding it. Kai in this compound has 
 its proper meaning of addition, and has no influence upon 
 that of ToL 
 
 E.g. Plat. Gorg. p. 452, b, xcurot iv raurg rj dwd/iu SouXov 
 pjkv Kuz xbv iarpbv, x.t.X., 'and moreover, then (indeed). 
 
96 
 
 BIONIPICATIOV Ot. THE CASES. 
 
 with tins faculty of pewnasion (r^ neideiv) you will have the 
 physician as your slave,' &c. Gorgias had declared the art 
 of persuasion to be the greatest good, namely, one by which 
 a man la able to persuade by arguments the dicastse in the 
 halls of justice, &c., and then adds, that by this faculty one, 
 furthermore, has the physician as bis slave, and so of the 
 teacher. Kai, 'and,' 'moreover,' shows that there is intro- 
 duced something additional or superadded, and rot that the 
 additional statement is made upon the admission of what 
 precedes, and in accordance with it. Cf. Id. ib. p. 486, A, 
 
 482, B. 
 
 Eurip. Med. 184, seqq., Spdao) rdS'- drap «f6^oz d nsiam \ 
 Mmotvav iftdv. \ fiSx^^ou Si x6.ptv vjvd' irudwaw. \ xairoi roxddoz 
 dipYfta haivrfi \ dmoToupourai dfuaaiv, Srav wc | /^u(?ov npofiptuu 
 nklaz bppudrt, ' I will do so ; (namely, bring forth my mistress 
 Medea from the house, as the chorus has urged me to do ;) 
 but I fear if I shall induce her to come forth ; yet I will be- 
 stow upon you the favor of this effort ; and, indeed, she 
 casts at her servants, when any one comes near her and 
 utters a word, the fierce glances of a lioness that has 
 whelps.' The attendant of the children of Medea, after 
 promising to bring forth their mother from the house at the 
 instance of the chorus, and expressing the fear that he may 
 not succeed, points to and affirms this fear by toi, and 
 at the same time adds, as in conformity with the fear ex- 
 pressed, that she gives signs of the most angry mood. It 
 is plain that, in this'fexample also, toi has the sense of ' then' 
 or ' indeed,' and that *ai has its common sense of * and.' . 
 Aristoph. Nub. 1071, seqq., axifai ydp, S luiptbuov, iv T<p 
 moifpovuv S.navxa \ dv£auv,'^dovwv»' Samv /iiU.sii:dT[oazepe7adae,^ 
 I TTaidtov, rwaexav^xoTTAfiotv, S^wv, nduov, x<r;f^«T/if3v. | xaiTOc u 
 am ^ifv d^tov Toiiziw idv ffre/))j^c, 'consider, young man, 
 all the blessings there are in being wise, and how many 
 pleasures you are going to be deprived of, children, wives, 
 the xorr«,9oc, meat, drink, xia^ap-bz. And what, then, is it 
 worth your while to live, if you be deprived of these thmgs?' 
 After a recital of the things that will be lost with the depri- 
 vation of the blessings of wisdom, there is the addition of 
 the assorlion, implied in the question, that without these 
 
 APPENDIX TO THE L0CATIVU8: KAITOI. 
 
 97 
 
 things life is of no worth, this assertion being introduced as 
 consequent upon the admission of what goes before, and in 
 conformity with it. The addition is marked by *«/, and the 
 introduction of a proposition as following upon the admis- 
 sion or allegation of what goes before is indicated by ro/ ; 
 so that xairot is equivalent to ' and then,' or ' and indeed,' 
 each member of the compound, if so it may be called, re- 
 taining separately its proper signification. 
 
 Aristoph. Nub. 1079, seqq., fioij^h^ ydp rjv tu^ tUouc, rdd' 
 dvrepeli irpbz aurdv, \ i); ouSiv IjSixqxaz' elt' tlz rbv St' inavevef- 
 xeiv, I xdxetvoz iuz i^zrtov epwriz ^<"'' '"^ pivoixwv \ xairot oh 
 ^vajTO^ Siv &eou nw^ fiii^ov dv duvaio ; ' for if you chance to be 
 caught in adultery, you will say, in answer, that you have 
 done no wrong ; and then lay it to the account of Jove, say- 
 ing that he also is too weak for love and women ; and, then 
 (admitting that, that being so, rot), how could you, mortal as 
 you are, have more power than he ?' Both xai and roi have 
 here, very obviously, the meaning hitherto attributed to 
 them. Toi refers to and recalls the statement just made, that 
 Jupiter was too weak for love and women, and then is 
 added, as consequent upon such admission, and in that case 
 true, the proposition, conveyed in the shape of a question, 
 that a mortal could not have more power against such 
 seducers than he, xai being the sign of this addition. 
 
 But, in a majority of the examples in which xairot occurs, 
 it has the sense of 'and yet,' 'although,' the difference be- 
 tween this meaning and that which xairot has above been 
 seen to have, being due, not to any thing in xairot itself, but 
 to the different relation held by the added statement to that 
 which precedes, and which roi points to and admits. Kairot 
 Las the force of ' and yet, ' although,' where the proposition 
 added is not simply adduced as true upon the admission of 
 what goes before, but as affirmed notwithstanding this ad- 
 mission. And, to give this sense, it is necessary that there 
 should be something in the nature of the added proposition 
 apparently at least opposed to what precedes. It was seen 
 above that iiivrot obtains the sense of 'however' in the 
 same way, and that roi itself sometimes has the same varia- 
 tion of meaning from the like cause. 
 
 7 
 
SIGNIFICATION OP THE CASES. 
 
 E.g. Soph. Aj. 550, eeqq., H noH, yiuoto ittnphz thruxitnepoi:, \ 
 ra 8' dXX' ijioioi:, xal j-ivoe' dv ob xaxo;. | xaiToi as xat vw tout6 
 re rnliouv Ix*", | ^^' o"**"' ""^^^ ^"'*'^' ^''''uaddvei xaxaiv, ' O my 
 SOD, may you be more fortunate than your father, but in 
 other respccta like him, and (then) you will be noble; 
 although (and yet) even now I have to envy you this, that 
 you are not aware at all of these misfortunes.' Here, as in 
 former examples, xai marks that a fact is added, his having 
 occasion, even then, to envy his child ; and rot introduces 
 this fact with a previous admission of what goes before, 
 namely, the substance of his prayer that he may be more 
 fortunate than his father. Thus far the sense of rot is that 
 of « then,' ' admitting this,' ' this being so.' But the added 
 declaration, that even now, child as ho is, the subject of 
 prayer for his future well-being, and the son of an unfortu- 
 nate father, he is to be envied on any account, is seemingly 
 inconsistent with the condition of things referred to by roe. 
 Hence, what goes before and is admitted has a qualification 
 or limitation in the contrariety of the added fact, which is 
 stated as true notwithstanding the admission. This rela- 
 ■ tion being expressed in English by ' although,' ' and yet,' 
 xairoi is rendered by these terms. 
 
 Aristoph. Acharn. 369-70, M$<o d' Imhp AaxeSatfiovUov d fiot 
 Soxu- I xaizot Sedoixa noUd/l will say on behalf of the Lace- 
 dremonians what I think ; although (and yet) I am greatly 
 afraid to do so.' Here xaeroi, having in itself the same 
 sense as where it fs"" rendered by ' and then,' ' and indeed,' 
 'and this being so,' obtains the meaning of 'and yet,' 
 * although,' ' notwithstanding,' from the fact that the state- 
 ment added, that the person speaking is greatly afraid to 
 say what he thinks, is apparently at variance with the 
 l)rcvious assurance, repeated by rot, that he is going to say 
 what he thinks fit. Cf. Id. ib. 465-6, (J«.) Anipxoii'u, xakot 
 
 ti Sfidaio ; 
 
 Eurip. Orcst. 75, Beqq.,7rpoa^&eY/iaurcu yap oh /uaivo/iat aidev, 
 
 I ic <Po7j%v dvaupipouaa Tijv d/iapriav. | xahoi arivio j-e zw KXu- 
 
 zaifivrjffTpttc popou, 'for I am not polluted by speaking to you, 
 
 since I lay your sin to the account of rhocbus. And yet I 
 
 do lament the fate of Clytemnestra.' The sorrow ex- 
 
 APPENDIX TO THE LOCATIVUS: KAITOI. 
 
 99 
 
 pressed for the fate of Clytemnestra by her sister Helen is 
 seemingly inconsistent with her acquitting of sin Orestes, 
 who had murdered her, which rot in xairoe refers to and 
 repeats. Consequently, the declaration of acquittal is made 
 with the addition of an apparently opposing affirmation ; or, 
 the added feeling of sorrow for the murdered person is 
 affirmed notwithstanding the admission of the innocence 
 of the murderer. And thus xairoe, here again, instead of 
 the sense of 'and then,' 'and indeed,' has that of 'and yet,' 
 'although,' 'notwithstanding.' 
 
 Eurip. Alccst. 288, scqq., . . . ou8' ifetadfoju, | ^^^ l^ouaa 
 dap', iv off irepzo/ajv. | xairoi a' 6 tpuaaz "jfyj rexouaa iipoitSoaav, 
 ' hut I did not spare myself, when I had the blessings of 
 youth. And yet your father and your mother abandoned 
 you.' The same thing is seen here, xairot obtaining the 
 sense of 'although,' 'and yet,' from the apparent incon- 
 gruity, in the view of Alcestis, of her self-devotion, to 
 which roi refers, and the abandonment of Admctus by his 
 father and mother. She affirms the fact of her own self- 
 devotion under circumstances that made life dear to her, 
 and in the face of, or notwithstanding, the fact that his 
 father and mother abandoned Admetus under circum- 
 stances that should have made life less dear to them. 
 
 Isocr. Panath. c. 17, rexpi^ptov ok piYtarov d^eXo/uvoi yap 
 AaxeSaupopiou; rijv ^ye/wpcai' ol auyxiuSuueiiaanrez, rdtz ^/isripoiz 
 itapioooav. Kuiroc rivaj; dv rtz xptruz Ixapmripou; noijjaaero raiv 
 r<5re npax^it^iov yj ruhi; iv aiiroec roif xtvduvoic napaysvopivouz ; 
 ' although (and yet), whom would one consider more capa- 
 ble judges of what was then done than those who witnessed 
 the peril?' Kairot, in this example, recalls the preceding 
 statement of the transfer of the hegemony to the Athenians, 
 asserts it to be true under circumstances seemingly calcu- 
 lated to prevent it, and hence is equivalent to 'and yet,' 
 'although,' 'notwithstanding.' Cf. Isocr. Panegyr. c. 19. 
 After saying that the Spartans had the conduct of afiUirs 
 for scarcely ten years, while the Athenians retained their 
 dominion sixty-five years uninterruptedly, the orator adds, 
 xaizuc zuure^ laaai roc "oAsfC o<p' krepotz ycfvopivaz 5re nhlaron 
 Xfioi^uv roiiroi^ napapivouinu, b<f' iLv dv iXd^iara xaxd Tidaxouaiu 
 
100 
 
 BIONIFIOATION OF THB CASES. 
 
 ruj^ffvoKrw, 'although (and yet) all know that the states 
 which were subject to the one and to the other, adhere the 
 longest time to the party under whom they chance to suf- 
 fer the least evils.' Kairot recalls and asserts the previous 
 statement of the greatly longer duration of the Athenian 
 power, with the addition of a fact that stood in opposition 
 to such longer duration, and is thus equivalent to ' and yet,' 
 'although,' 'notwithstanding.' Cf. Plat. Gorg. p. 512, 
 B and 0. 
 
 "Hzoe. 
 
 'Hroe, compounded of i}, * or,' and ro/, ' then,' ' indeed,' has 
 preserved distinctly the meaning of both elements of the 
 compound. Thus, Plat. Qorg. p. 460, a, idvnep fnrjroptxdi/ au 
 ztva noi^ffjjz, dvdjioj abrbv eidivtu r<i Sixata xae zd ddixa ^roc nfi6- 
 ztphv ye iy utrrepov iiadbvza irapd aaiu, * if you make a person a 
 rhetorician, he must needs know riglit and wrong, having 
 then (in that case, rot), learned this from you, cither before 
 or afterwards.' 'H, ' or,' in ijrot, being followed, as it hero 
 occurs, by another ^, is translated by 'either;' and roe 
 points to, and thus recalls, and admits or afBrms, the state- 
 ment in the preceding sentence, being equivalent to 'in 
 that case,' ' that being so ;' and, having regard to the intro- 
 duction of a proposition that follows as true upon the 
 admission or allegation of what goes before, to 'then,' 
 ' indeed.' In this example, the proposition that goes before 
 is, that ' if you make a person a rhetorician he must needs 
 know right and wrong ;' the statement introduced by zoi is, 
 that ' he must have learned it from you either before or 
 afterwards.' Toi, pointing to and admitting the former, 
 and at the same time bringing in the latter as following 
 upon this admission, corresponds to the English 'then,' 'in- 
 deed.' Cf. Id. ib. p. 474, D, oJov Ttpwzou zd awfrnza zd xaXd 
 oojr« ^zot xazd zijv j^pelav liyuz xald elvat, ■Kpbz 8 dv ixaazov j^p^- 
 aipov ^, npbc zouzo, ij xazd ^dovijv ztva ; ' for instance, with 
 regard to bodies (objects) that are handsome, do you not 
 say, then (it being so that your doctrine is true, admitting 
 that), that they are beautiful, either according to their use- 
 fulness for the thing whereto they are severally adapted for 
 use, or according to some pleasure they afford V Plat. Kep. 
 
 APPENDIX TO THB LOCATIVUS: UTAP, UTOI. 
 
 101 
 
 p. 830, B, xai abzbz, ^zoi Imb r^c zou pjpoK: da&eveiac^xaiwa- 
 nep i^St) iyyuzipo) &u zwu ixec, ^aJMv zt xa&opqt attzd. 
 
 'Hzdp. 
 'Hzdp, composed of ^, zoi, and dp, differs from f/zot only 
 in having the addition of dp with its proper meaning of 
 adaptedncss or conformity of the matter which it intro- 
 duces to what precedes, answering to the English ' accord- 
 ingly,'^ ' so,' « as is fitting.' E.g. Eurip. Hippol. 1025, seqq., 
 vw 3' opxtbv aoi Zf^vu xai nidov j^&ovbi: | dftvu/jt zwv adtv pc^Tcod' 
 dipaa»M ydiiutv, \ peqd' dv i^eirjaae, fjojd' dv Svvotav iafistv \ ijzdp 
 dloip^v dxXeij:, dvwvupax:, ' and now I swear to you by Zeus, 
 and by the soil of the land, that I never touched your 
 spouse, nor would have even wished, nor had the disposi- 
 tion, to do it. Or (else, ^,) then (ro/, in case I did,) so {dp, 
 as is fitting,) may I perish inglorious, without a name." 
 
 "Hzot. 
 
 ''I/zoe, sometimes also written ^zoi, is made up of the 
 affirmative particle ^, 'surely,' 'indeed,' and zol, the latter 
 retaining its usual meaning; so that the compound is 
 equivalent in English to ' surely then,' 'surely indeed ;' that 
 is, to a subjective aflirmatiou of the proposition introduced 
 by the compound, due to fj, and an objective (demonstrative) 
 pointing to, and admission or affirmation, made by zoi, of 
 an antecedent statement, upon the admission or affirmation 
 of which follows what is brought in by ^zoi. E.g. II. i. ?8, 
 fjzot Sf Sk ecnwv xaz' dp' e>;£ro, 'he then (upon that) sat down.' 
 U. ix. C97, dU' 7jzoi xiivov fteu idaopev. II. i. 140, dXX' ^zoc pteu 
 zadzu pszaippaaopea^a xai abzti;, ' but,' says Agamemnon, after 
 he has made certain threats against Achilleus of what he 
 will do, ' surely {J^) then {zoi, what I have said being so), we 
 will speak of this again.' 
 
 In the compounds in which zoi is conjoined with another 
 particle, itself occupying the first place, zoi retains its proper 
 meaning quite as distinctly as in the compounds already 
 examined. Such compounds may be hero mentioned, aa 
 they aftbrd additional instances in illustration of the use 
 and signification of zoi. 
 
102 
 
 6IONIFI0ATI0N OF THE OASES. 
 
 Tolwv. 
 Toiwv occurs frequently with the sense of ' then,' ' accord- 
 ingly then.' Thus, Xen. Cyrop. i. 1, 2, ndaai; roivw rauraz 
 Tdc dyiiac ISoxoufieu bpuv fiSiXov i9eXouaaz nei9ea&at xdiz vo/itu- 
 atv -^ rot»c dv^ptuTrou; roiz dp^ouae, * accordingly, then, we 
 thought that we saw all these flocks more willing to ohcy 
 their shepherds than men their rulers.' The writer, having 
 reference to the difficulty of governing men, has stated that 
 he considers those who have the care of oxen or horses, and 
 shepherds generally, to belong to the class of rulers ; and then 
 adds, that he thinks he has seen that flocks are more obedient 
 to their shepherds than men to their rulers. This second 
 , statement, introduced by roivw, is made upon the admission 
 of the previous proposition, is in accordance with it, and 
 depends upon it, rationally at least. It is asserted that 
 shepherds and herdsmen are of the class of rulers ; and, 
 assuming this to he true, it affords a ground for the additional 
 and accordant statement, that the writer thinks ho has seen 
 flocks more obedient to their shepherds than men to their 
 rulers. This relation between the two propositions is 
 expressed by roivuv, and may be rendered in English by ' then,' 
 ' accordingly then.' That roivuv is suited to denote this rela- 
 tion may be seen from the signification of its elements, 
 assuming rot to have the sense which has been above 
 attributed to it. For rot points to, recalls, and admits or 
 realfirms the preceding proposition, and introduces a state- 
 ment that is rationally dependent upon, or, at least, is in 
 conformity with, such admission or afllrmation, being equi- 
 valent to ' then,' ' accordingly then.' And the enclitic vuv, 
 the same, of course, with the adverb of time vuv, but with a 
 peculiar application, just as quum, 'when,' 'since,' is a 
 varied application of quum, 'when,' referring to time, has 
 its ordinary force, although not always capable of being 
 separately rendered in English. It answers to the English 
 enclitic ' now,' which is in fact the same word, as is also the 
 Latin nunc, and to 'then,' 'accordingly then,' and is a sign 
 by which a opeaker or writer, before passing to a new pro- 
 position, or in concluding a narrative or statement, gives 
 
 APPENDIX TO THE LOCATIVUS: TOINTN. 
 
 103 
 
 notice that what is now stated is in accordance with the 
 facts recited, and a conclusion from them. Thus, Herod, vi. 
 1, 'Jpiaraj^ipjji: ptiv vuv 'Iwvirjv ditoav^ooQ, oZtw reXeurf, ' Arista- 
 goras now, after having caused Ionia to revolt, thus came to 
 his end.' Herodotus, having narrated the events belonging 
 to the revolt of Ionia caused by Aristagoras, and his death, 
 ends the story, before entering upon other events, by the 
 words above cited, 'Aristagoras, now (then, accordingly), 
 thus died,' a statement which is in accordance with, and 
 a conclusion from, all that went before. Herod, vi. 22, 
 Mil-^zoz piu vuv MeXrjataiv ipijpmzo, * Miletus, now (then), was 
 emptied of Milesians.' The fact here stated is in just con- 
 formity with the previously narrated occurrences, and a 
 conclusion from them. Cf. Id. vi. 84, init. The enclitic 
 vuv may be said, then, to express a rational conclusion from 
 previous facts or statements, including the idea of the con- 
 formity of what is immediately affirmed with what goes 
 before. It marks a bringing up to the present moment of 
 the speaker's narration the sum of what has boon said, by 
 employing an expression that is in conformity with the pre- 
 ceding statements, and, as it were, includes them. Allowing 
 to vuv, in its connection with rot in roivuv, the force here 
 assigned to it, it would show that the statement which it 
 introduces is fairly in accordance with what was before 
 aflirmed, and rationally following upon it. Thus, in the 
 example under consideration, this particle, taken by itself, 
 would show that the observation concerning the readier 
 obedience of flocks to their shepherds than of men to their 
 rulers, was in just accordance with, and rationally concluded 
 from, the previous doctrine that shepherds and flocks had 
 the same relation as rulers and men. The discourse being, 
 at this point, about the difficulty of governing men, the 
 writer proposes to illustrate this by contrasting the obedi- 
 ence of flocks with the want of obedience on the part of 
 men. But first he assumes that herdsmen and shepherds 
 belong to the category of rulers, else there would be no 
 analogy; and then says that, accordingly, in conformity 
 with this view, and following upon it, he sees flocks more 
 obedient to their shepherds than men to their rulers. Toivuv, 
 
104 
 
 BIGMIV^XION OB THB CASES. ». 
 
 taken together, woald therefore show that the previous 
 statement is assumed to be true, and that the proposition 
 introduced by it is in accordance with this assumption, and 
 a rational conclusion from it. This relation would be exp> 
 pressed in English by 'accordingly then,' which is the 
 meaning of roivou, although it may sometimes be sufficiently 
 expressed, perhaps, by ' then,' or ' therefore.' 
 
 Xen. Cyrop. i. 1, 2, xal roTc xapnoiz roivuv, rdiz yq^^ofiivoif 
 IS auzaiv, iwat roue vo/iia^ j(p^a&at ourcuc ^«C ^>^ auToe ^aulwvzai, 
 'accordingly, then, they suffer their shepherds to use the 
 profits also that arise from them in whatever way they 
 choose.' The writer, having alleged the willing subjection 
 of herds and flocks to their herdsmen and shepherds, adds, 
 pointing to and assuming this to bo true (rot), that accord- 
 ingly then {roivm), they sufier their keepers to use the profits 
 that arise from them in whatever way they choose. 
 
 Id. ib., " Eu Toiwv ouScfuav namoTe dqfihjv ■gadbfin&a auaruaav 
 int rbv voftea, ' accordingly, then, we have never yet at any 
 time seen a flock in rebellion against its shepherd.' Here, 
 again, the previous statement of the willing subjection of 
 flocks to their shepherds, and of their cousequently allowing 
 them to use the profits arising from them as they choose, 
 is assumed to be true, and then is added, as consequent 
 upon this admission, and in accordance with it, the fact that 
 flocks are never seen in rebellion against their shepherds. 
 Cf. Xen. Cyrop. i. 1, 5, i. 3, 16, i. 6, 35, v. 3, 28 ; Isocr. Nicocles, 
 p. 34, Id. Paneg. p. 77, ed. Tauchn. 
 
 Tipa =M (rot + Apa). 
 Tdpa is made up of rot and dpa, its component elements 
 retaining each its proper sense, and the whole being like the 
 English ' BO then. ' Tot refers to, and admits or assumes a fore- 
 going statement, npon which follows another in accordance 
 with and consequent upon it, being equivalent to the English 
 ' then,' ' accordingly then.' 'Apa marks that which it intro- 
 duces as fitted or adapted to what goes before, in exact con- 
 formity with it, and is equivalent to 'as is fitting,' 'just so,' 
 ' accordingly.' E.g. Aristoph. Av. 1446, Icjotai rdpa *at nr&- 
 pmjyrat ; ' Bo, then, are they, in fact, winged with words V 
 
 t*' 
 
 - » 
 
 
 APPENDIX TO THB lOCATIVUS: TOirAP. 
 
 105 
 
 Here toI refers to the promise that PeisthetOBrus had made to 
 excite (lend wings to) Bykophantes with words, and to his 
 allegation that the young men in the lounging-places, as 
 the barber-shops, are excited by words, and admits what 
 goes before. "Apa shows that the question asked is in just 
 accordance with this admission. 
 
 Aristoph. Ran. 252, Seivd rdpa ttteaSfuir&a, ' we shall then 
 accordingly sufier terribly.' Tol here refers to the im- 
 mediately preceding recital, and by pointing to it recalls 
 and admits it, and introduces a statement that is conse- 
 quent upon this; dpa shows that this added statement is 
 in just accordance with what goes before. Some prefer 
 to write ripa in this place. 
 
 Tdp, which occurs II. i. 8, rt'c rdp a<pws &ediv Sptde fwAyw 
 pd^eodae, may belong here ; but some prefer to wiite t' dp 
 for r^ and dp. 
 
 Toq-dp. 
 
 Toqdp, ' accordingly then,' retains the proper sense of its 
 elements to'i and fdp, this latter, however, presenting rather 
 the simpler notion of just accordance or conformity belong- 
 ing to dpa, 'just so,' 'us is fitting,' than that of ground or 
 reason, ' for,' which T-d// usually has. E.g. II. i. 74, scqq., 
 <b ^A'j^chli, xehai ps, Ait tpiXe, pudrjaaadat \ pijviv ''AicoU.mvoz 
 haTTjPeXeTao dvunzoz' \ zuqup ij-wv Ipiat, ' you bid me speak 
 of the wrath of Apollo. Accordingly then I will speak.' Toi 
 here refers to and udsunics the previous command of Aga- 
 memnon, and iutroduuca as a sequence the conipliancc of 
 Nestor; ydp shows that the act of compliance follows in 
 accordance with the antecedent order, and, allowing for 
 the force ofyi in j-dp, with the assent of the speaker. Od. i. 
 174-9, xai pot tout' dyopvjaov injTupov, wpp' e5 eidw._ | • . . TOt- 
 ydp 'ifti Toi [aoi) tuutu puX dTpeximz dfopiiiato, Telemachua 
 makes inquiries of Mentes (Athene) how he came, and 
 about other points suggested by the circumstances, and 
 Mentes answers, ' accordingly then I will tell you of these 
 things very accurately.' Add Od. i. 214, and II, x. 413, 
 Toq^ap iytlt toi {aot) TWJTa paX dTpexiw( xaraii^at, the latter 
 referred to in Crusius' Lex. Horn. 
 
106 
 
 BIONIWOATION OP THH CABB8. 
 
 Toq'dpTOl. 
 Toqdproi haa the Benae of 'accordingly then, indeed,' 
 ♦therefore then, indeed;' e.g. Ariatoph. Ach. 641-3 (cited 
 by Ilartung ii. p. 354), raSra noc^aaz noXXwv dya&tov muoz 
 Ofuv rtr^vr/TOt, I xai roue %ooc iv toTc niXiatv Set^az, uk di/jftox- 
 paxouvrae. \ xoqdproi vov ix rtbv iciXtwv zbv ifbpov bpiv ditdyov- 
 KC I rfiouai, 'by eo doing be has been the cause to you of 
 many blessings, and by showing how the commonalties in 
 the states are governed by the demos. Accordingly then, 
 indeed, they will now come and bring the tribute to you." 
 The former part of the compound Tov(dp has precisely the 
 same force as in the preceding examples ; and m at the 
 end seems to be added by way of repeating merely what is 
 expressed by xocfdp : so that the whole word is equivalent 
 to ' accordingly then— then, or indeed,' that is, roe super- 
 added is to xoqdp what xoqdp is to the preceding sentence. 
 Otherwise, the second xoi may be considered as lending an 
 additional emphasis to the admission or affirmation already 
 made by the first xoi, just as the second quia in quisquis, the 
 second quam in qmmqmm, the second ut in uiut. Thus re- 
 garded, it would be very suitably rendered by 'indeed.' 
 Herod, iii. 3, xotydpxoi, d firjxep, inedv iyoi r^vm/iai dvijp, Alrim- 
 xou xa jttv dvw xdx<o d^aai. Cassandane has complained that, 
 though she 1ms borne to him such beautiful children, she 
 is neglected by her husband Cyrus, who honors his Egyp- 
 tian wife instead ; aifd, upon hearing this complaint, Cam- 
 byses says, 'therefore then,' or 'for this reason then, when- 
 ever I become a man, I will turn Egypt upside down.' The 
 sense of xoqdpxot is the same here as in the preceding 
 example, except that while xoi admits the foregoing state- 
 ment, and introduces what is consequent upon it, ydp con- 
 tains rather its usual sense of 'for;' so that, in conjunction 
 with xoi, it may be properly rendered by 'therefore then.' 
 Plat. Gorg. p. 494, d, 6k irmoz el, d> Swxpaxiz, xai dxe^vwi 
 ' ^^ro/uoc- -'"*• rotrdpxoi, <L KaiUxXui;, IIwXov jikv xai Fop- 
 •fiaw xoi iSinHr^^a xai axaiwtadat inoiyjaa, ou 8k ou /irj ixTtXaj^^ 
 ouSk pij aiaxuvdfjc 'How unreasonable you are, Socrates, 
 and an outright demagogue ! Socr. Accordingly then, Cal- 
 
 TOirAPOTN. ACCUSATIVE CASE. 
 
 107 
 
 '■: 
 
 licles, I confounded Polus and Gorgias, and made them 
 ashamed; but you will not be confounded, nor even 
 ashamed.' 
 
 ToTfapouv. 
 
 Totj-apouv may be rendered by ' wherefore,' or by ' accord- 
 ingly then,' or 'therefore:' e.g. Xon. Memor. iii. 6, 11-12, 
 o? 8^ xai Xij-ovxat noXb deeveyxuv xwu xa&' iaxnohz dv9pibitatv. 
 . . . xotj-apouv noXXwu pkv fuxavaaxdaewv iv 'EXXddi fej-owiaiv, 
 diifteniau iv rj kaoxwu, 'accordingly therefore,' or 'where- 
 fore then, though there were many changes of abode in 
 Hellas, they remained in their own country.' Here roc and 
 ydp have each the same sense as in xoiydp, above considered, 
 and might properly be rendered by ' accordingly then ;' and 
 oiv shows more distinctly that the proposition introduced 
 by xoq-apow is to be regarded as a rational conclusion from 
 what precedes. Xen. Anab. i. 9, 18, dUi pijv ee «c )'i xt 
 abx<p npoaxaSdvxc xaXm^ &7n^pex^aetev, ol>8evi tcwtcoxs d'^dptaxov 
 tiaae xijv npo^u/uau. Toqfapow xpdxtaxoi Stj {m^pixae Ttavxbi 
 ipfou Kiipip klk-fpTiaav yivta&at, 'and, indeed, if any one 
 served him well, when he gave a commission to do any 
 thiug, he never allowed any man's zeal in his service to go 
 unrequited. Accordingly then, for this reason, Cyrus is 
 said to have had the best agents in every work.' 
 
 IV.— OF TnS ACCDSATIVE CASE. 
 
 1. a. The accusative case is frequently employed in Homer, 
 much more rarely in the later poets, and seldom in prose, 
 to mark the object reached by motion, and, accordingly, 
 attends verbs having this for their substantive idea. E.g. 
 Hom. Od. iii. 162, of filv djtoaxpe^<avxez iftav viae dfupieXiaaa^, 
 'they went to the ships;' II. i. Zn,xviaai^ 8' olipavbv fxev, 
 'the odor went to heaven ;' Soph.CEd.Tyr. 85, daxu KaS/iBiov 
 poXwu, 'having come to the city of Cadmus;' ./Eseh. Prom. 
 703, jiyw npb pjz iXaiivopat, ' I am driven from land to land ;' 
 Eur. Med. 7, M^8eea nupyouz y^z inhua' 'ItoXxia^, ' Medea sailed 
 to the towers of the land of lolcos;' Herod, ix. 26, ^piai; 
 hviexai, ' it reaches to us.' (See KUhner § 545.) 
 
 Although the above statement of the meaning of the accu- 
 sative case, when thus used, may be accepted as practically 
 
108 
 
 BIQMIFICATION OF THB CASES. 
 
 convenienf, and in a general way true, yet it may be quea- 
 tioned whether it be strictly accurate ; whether this accusa^ 
 tive be simply the object reached by motion, or may not 
 here also, as in so many other examples in which it occurs 
 after actions and motions, especially where prepositions 
 intervene, be more properly regarded as the measure of the 
 extent to which the motion reaches, or the sign of the object 
 to which it is to be limited. Thus, it may be doubted 
 whether the pliraso imu Kadfiuov fioXtov means 'having 
 come to the city of the Cadmeians,' or ' having come . . . 
 as far as the city of the Cadmeians,' or, lastly, ' having coma 
 ... as regards the city of the Cadmeians.' The first-named 
 view, that the accusative denotes the object reached by mo- 
 tion, has the advantage, for practice at least, of being more 
 simple; and, admitting it, the idea of the measure of the 
 extent to which motion reaches, and that of the object to 
 which the motion is to be limited, so immediately spring 
 from it, or are so obviously equivalent to it, that it is diffi- 
 cult to set it aside. For, supposing the accusative to mark 
 the object reached by motion, it follows of course that it 
 will give the measure of the motion ; and the denoting the 
 object to which the motion is to be limited is but another 
 way of measuring its extent. Yet, if it should be found 
 that the prevalent sense of the accusative case is to mark 
 the limit up to which an action or state is to be taken as 
 reaching, it may seem not unreasonable to assign to it this 
 force in those instances also in which it seems to express 
 directly the object reached. On this supposition, the office 
 of the accusative, when an action or motion is named, will 
 bo to connect an object with the action or motion by mark- 
 ing it as that with regard to which it is affirmed ; so that 
 the action or motion shall be understood as limited to this 
 one among all possible objects. 
 
 In prose, and commonly in poetry also, the accusative 
 which occurs with verbs of motion is attended by preposi- 
 tions, which mark the relative direction of the motion, as 
 by e^c, 1^1, napd, tcpiz, xard, &c. And then the accusative ia 
 plainly used in the sense of * as to,' ' as regards,' that is, 
 
 ACCUSATIVE CASE. 
 
 109 
 
 points out the object to which the motion into, upon, &c. is 
 to be limited. 
 
 b. The accusative is employed with verbs expressing ac- 
 tion, that is, with what are called transitive verbs, such as 
 Ttreivm, ' I kill,' naito, * I strike,' to mark the direct object, or 
 that actually reached or immediately affected by the action ; 
 as, icaito rbv nau8a, ' I strike the boy.' 
 
 In such instances, as in the use of the accusative with 
 verbs of motion, it is convenient for practice to consider the 
 accusative ns denoting the object actually reached, and so 
 immediately affected, by the action. And yet it may be 
 observed that, even here, the proper office of the accusative 
 is so very closely related to that in which it gives the extent 
 of the verb's action, or the limit to which it is to be under- 
 stood as confined, that it can hardly be distinguished from 
 it. When it is said, naiw rhv nuida, * I strike the boy,' the 
 action of striking contained in nalm has naiSa for its imme- 
 diate object ; but the true sense may be, ' I strike ... as 
 far as the boy is concerned,' that is, my striking is to be 
 understood as having only this extent, or as being limited 
 to this object, embracing no other; and, if so, the accusa- 
 tive is introduced to give the measure or extent of the verb's 
 action, by marking the object to which it is confined, or as 
 to which it is affirmed. Should this view be admitted, it 
 will be much easier to explain the use of the accusative with 
 many verbs, mostly intransitive, which, from their received 
 meaning, would seem to require a dative case, or the aid of 
 a preposition. 
 
 To this use of the accusative with active or transitive 
 verbs belong a number of cases in which the verb is at- 
 tended by two accusatives ; but, as it will be convenient to 
 notice these separately, they may be passed over for the 
 present. 
 
 2. a. The accusative of nouns representing various de- 
 nominations of weight and measure, and of general expres- 
 sions of weight and measure, is used to mark the extent or 
 amount of an action or motion. E.g. Herod, i. 81, araSiou^ 
 dh nivTS x«( reaaapdxovra dtaxofitaavrez Arixovro i^ rb Ipov, 
 * having gone forty-fivo stadia (that is, as far as, up to the 
 
no 
 
 SIONIflOATION OF TUB CASKS. 
 
 amount of, forty-five stadia), they arrived at the temple;' 
 Id. vi. 119, ditix^v dixa xal dojxoaiooz aradiooz, ' to be distant two 
 hundred and ten stadia,' that is, • to the amount of two 
 hundred and ten stadia ;' Id. iii. 89, to 8h Ba^uUvtov rdXavrov 
 dwartu Eu^otda: i^SofO^xovra fiviac, 'the Babylonian talent is 
 worth seventy Euboeic minse,' that is, • has worth or value 
 to the amount of seventy Eubceic minse.' (For examples, 
 see Klihn. § 556.) 
 
 Here belong a number of general expressions of quantity, 
 very commonly called adverbial; as, iroku, 'much,' nokXd, 
 ' much,' ' often,' to. itoiXd, ' for the most part,' iiir^, ' greatly,' 
 iUyov, 'a little,' iitxp6v, 'a little,' hov, 'equally,' roaoDro, 'so 
 much,' Stfov, 'as,' &c. (See KUhn. A. Qr. § 556, Anm. 2.) 
 'And to this list may properly be added such expressions as 
 rixoz, 'quickly,' that is, 'as far as quickness goes,' xpdzoc 
 ' powerfully,' that is, ' as far as strength goes.' (See KUhn. 
 A. Gr. § 549, Anm. 2, 3.) 
 
 h. The accusative of the various denominations of time, 
 and of general expressions of time, as, wxra, ^idpav, poet. 
 Iffiap, xpot'ov, &c., used in the same way to denote the amount 
 of time occupied by an action or event, and rendered in 
 English by 'during,' 'for,' or by the term itself without a 
 preposition, is to be explained as the accusative of measure. 
 E.g. Od. X. 142, lv9a rdr' h^dvrez Suo r' ^ftara xai duo vuxrac | 
 xei/Kda, ' then, having there disembarked, we lay two days 
 and two nights,' or, ' for, during, two days and two nights;' 
 Herod, vi. 127, ^ 8k 16^apez iixp^t toutov tov xpo^^ov, ' Sybaris 
 flourished during this time,' or, 'for this space of time;' 
 Xen. Anab. iv. 5, 24, xaraXan^dv^e ttju duyaripa too xtopdpxou 
 ivvdTT^v ^pepav jefapojpivfjv, ' married nine days,' properly, 
 'up to, as much as, the ninth day.' (For examples see 
 KUhn. A. Gr. § 555.) Here belong, probably, several ex- 
 pressions called adverbial, as, ivt^fxap, 'for nine days,' 
 icavrt/pap, ' for every day,' &c. 
 
 c. Most ncariy akin to this sense of the accusative, although 
 less obviously expressing measure or amount, is the case in 
 Avhieh it attends upon verbs of motion to mark the object 
 which the motion embraces, to which alone it is to be 
 understood as applying, where it is sometimes said to denote 
 
 ACCUSATIVE CASE. 
 
 Ill 
 
 the way over which the motion passes. Thus with nepav, 
 ^to pass,' epiretu, *to creep,' 'to go,' Paiveev, 'to go,' i:opei)sa9<u, 
 ' to go on a journey,' ' to march,' &c. E.g. Od. iii. 71, nb&sv 
 zX$W l)jpa xeXeo&a ; ' whence sail ye on the watery paths ?' 
 (that is, 'on the sea?') properly, 'whence sail ye ... as 
 regards, as far as concerns, the watery paths ?' It is indi- 
 cated, by the introduction of the noun in the accusative case, 
 that the sailing is to be understood, not as embracing any 
 object indifferently, but as being restricted to the sea ; for, 
 as the action of sailing may have regard to other objects, as 
 the air, rivers, &c., it is required that it shall be expressed 
 distinctly to which one of such possible objects it is to be 
 couiincd. And to express this restriction to some one ob- 
 ject the accusative is fitted by virtue of its office of marking 
 the measure or proper limits of an action. When the geni- 
 tive was under consideration, it was shown how, in the 
 phrase niveiv udiop, ' to drink water,' the accusative is used 
 to denote the particular object to which the act of drinking 
 is to be understood as referred, as distinguished from other 
 proper objects of drinking, by showing that it is to this ob- 
 ject tliat it is limited, that it extends to this and to no other. 
 It is precisely so with the accusative t)Ypa xiXeui9a, in the 
 above example, standing after 7tXe73' ; for it shows that the 
 act of sailing is not to bo taken as affirmed absolutely, but 
 only in a limited sense, namely, as having regard to the sea. 
 So Od. i. 330, xXipaxa 8' biptjXijv xuTsftijaaTo, * he descended by 
 the lofty stairway ;' that is, his descending is to be taken in 
 a limited sense, and as having regard only to ' the lofty 
 stairway,' or as being affirmed in this extent only, and not 
 generally. In like manner, Eurip. Med. 1007, dXX el/u yap 
 8^ TkijiioveazdTTjv b86v, 'but — for I will go then the most 
 wretched road ;' that is, the going of which Medea speaks 
 is to be regarded an affirmed in the preciKe extent denoted 
 by the noun in the accusative case, and not absolutely. 
 And, again, Herod, vi. 119, TpineTot Tpc<paaia^ 68ouz, 'it 
 directs its course three difierent ways,' that is, the directing 
 its course is to be understood as having a definite limit as 
 to the objects which it embraces, as being affirmed only in 
 regard to three different ways. Add Xen. Cyrop. i. 6, 43, 
 
112 
 
 SIGNIFICATION or TH]P CASES. 
 
 Aj%tv {arpaztav) ^ arevaz ^ nXajetm: bio-ji;, ' to lead an army 
 either by narrow or by wide roads ;'\hat is, the leading an 
 army is restricted in its application to the definite objects 
 introduced by the accusative, ' as far as concerns narrow or 
 wide roads.' And Demosth. Phil. i. p. 49, 54, df^wv nai 
 aipiov rohz JiUovraz rr^v ^dkarrav, 'plundering and carrying 
 captive those who sail upon the sea.' (For examples, see 
 Kuhn. A. Gr. § 554.) 
 
 In such cases, therefore, the accusative introduced to 
 mark the extent in which the action or motion is affirmed, 
 differs from the common accusative of measure in the fact 
 of its expressing the extent of the action or motion, not in 
 any denomination of measure, noting how far it goes, but 
 by showing what object among many possible ones it 
 reaches or embraces. Thus, when it is said, no^ev rcXsTd' 
 bjpu *iXvj9a, 'whence sail ye on the watery ways?' the 
 accusative Irfpa xiXeuda does not show how far the sailing 
 goes, as measured by days or leagues, but that it is limited 
 in its application to a definite object named by the ac- 
 cusative, that it embraces, or is to be understood of, only 
 a particular one among several appropriate objects, namely, 
 ' the watery paths,' or * the sea.' On the other hand, when 
 it is said, inhuas itewjuovra ffradiouz, ' he sailed fifty stadia,' 
 the accusative nevr^xovra aradiouz shows the extent of the 
 sailing, how far it reaches, as expressed in a denomination 
 of measure. In both cases equally, however, the accusa- 
 tive is one of measure^ or extent, the only essential differ- 
 ence being found in the way in which the action or motion 
 is measured or limited as to its extent. In the one case, 
 regard is had to its extent as determined by some denomi- 
 nation of measure; in the other, to its extent as determined 
 by its reaching to or embracing only one or more of several 
 suitable objects. 
 
 Here belong a number of expressions, commonly called 
 adverbial, as, rr,v raxianjv (sc. 686v), ' as quickly as possible,' 
 properly, 'by the quickest way,' ttjv npdtrrjv, 'first,' 'as 
 early as possible,' properly, 'by the first way,' ttjv eit^stav, 
 •straightway," properly, 'by the direct road,' paxpdv, 'a long 
 way,' d)Jir^v xat d?Ji7jv, 'first one way and then another,' 
 
 ACCUSATIVE CASE. 
 
 118 
 
 'this way and that,* ivnjv**^gv&r against,' 'right opposite;' 
 and BO, dvTtf}li^v, 'again'st,' diniou, 'against,' nX-^aiov, 'near,' 
 aliTodtov, 'straightway,'. properly, 'by the selfsame way.' 
 (See Kiihn. Ausf. Gr. §554, Anm.-2.) 
 
 d. In the same way is to be explained the accusative 
 which, in poetry, occurs even with verbs that do not express 
 motion, as, »ua9ai, ott/Vm, f^a&at, ^daauv, xadi^uv. E.g. 
 Eurip. Or. 1243, <Tr^«?' al ft&vltftitiv rivd' &/ia^:jprj rpifiov, alS' 
 dUov oTftov, ' stand some of you in this chariot-way, others 
 of you in another pathway.' (See Kiihn. Ausf. Gr. § 554, 
 Anm. 3.) The accusative here shows that the substantive 
 idea contained in the verb is to be understood as set forth 
 with a regard to a certain way, and as confined to this ; so 
 that the ' standing' is described as limited in its character 
 or condition by the term ' chariot- way,' or is a 'standing' 
 that regards or is confined to a 'chariot-way.' 
 
 e. Of the same nature with the accusative of measure or 
 extent, above considered, is this case as seen in the exam- 
 ples, occurring chiefly in poetic language, in which, with 
 certain verbs, among which is darpdmuv, ♦ to flash,' a noun 
 of corresponding sense is added to show the character of 
 the action by marking the object to which it is to be 
 restricted. E.g. Mach. Prom. 364, i^ d/ifidrwu d' fjaTparcre 
 YOftyiondv aika^, 'and from his eyes sent forth flashes of 
 terrible light,' the accusative yopYumbv ailaz marking that 
 the flashes sent forth {fjarpanTs) are to be taken as hav- 
 ing for their measure, that is, for the object with regard 
 to which they are to bo considered, and hence for the 
 expression of their fearful character, the terrible light of 
 the gorgon's face. Eurip. Phccn. 233, cZi Xdpatouaa nirpa 
 itupoz Stxopuipov aeXuz, '0 rock that ahinest with forked 
 blaze of fire !' Here the accusative dtx6pu<pov aiXaz shows 
 in what extent the term Xdpnouaa is to be taken, and thereby 
 describes its character, bo that it sliall be understood to bo 
 a shining that is limited to the peculiar appearance of a 
 double-pointed or forked flame. (For these and other 
 examples, see Kiihn. Ausf. Gr. § 548, 1 and 2.) 
 
 Here belongs also the case in which, after verbs signify- 
 ing 'to look' or 'have an aspect,' as dipxeiv, the accusa- 
 
 8 
 
114 
 
 SIQNiriCATION OF THE CASES. 
 
 live is added to define the manner or character of the 
 verb's action by restricting it to a particular object, and 
 thus denoting with what compass of meaning it is to be 
 taken. E.g. Od. xix. 446, au; nop dfdaii/wiac Sedo/ixw;, * a 
 boar looking fire with his eyes,' that is, looking fiercely, as 
 if his eyes were on fire. Here the accusative might seem, 
 at first view, to be the direct object of the verb's substantive 
 idea of looking, just as in English wo say *to look fire.' 
 But, upon examining it more narrowly, it will be seen that 
 the sense of dipxeev is ' to have a look,' ' to have a certain 
 aspect,' and that the accusative is added to describe in 
 what extent this is to be taken; so that, when it is said 
 of the boar that he has a certain look or aspect with his 
 eyes, this sense is confined by the addition of the accusa- 
 tive mp to the precise extent of this term. And by thus 
 limiting an expression to the compass of a particular term, 
 not allowing it to be taken absolutely, but within the 
 boundary marked by it, the accusative docs in fact give the 
 characteristic property of such expression. By indicating 
 that its meaning is to be accepted only in terms of a par- 
 ticular object, it excludes every other possible acceptation, 
 and assigns to it a special and definite character. To have 
 a look, for example, that is limited in the extent of its 
 meaning by the term fire, so that it shall embrace this idea 
 to the exclusion of all others, is to have a look distinguished 
 from other looks by the character of fire. Just as in the 
 phrase nivuv uSoip, ' to- drink water,' the act of drinking is 
 distinguished from other acts of drinking by being confined 
 to udwp, 'water.' So in the expression ^Xinuv ' Api^v, 'to 
 look Ares,' 'to have the aspect of Ares,' the accusative 
 'jipr^v, by confining the look or aspect to the precise com- 
 pass marked by the term 'Ares,' does in effect give to it a 
 peculiar character; and this may be expressed in English 
 by saying ' to liavo the look or aspect of Ares.' (For other 
 examplcH, including adjectives also, and for the accusative 
 used in the same way with verbs of * weeping,' see Kiihn. 
 Au8f.Gr.§548, 3and4.) 
 
 3. o. The accusative case is used, although comparatively 
 seldom, to mark the period of time to which an action or 
 
 ACCUSATIVE CASE. 
 
 115 
 
 event is referred. E.g. Herod, ii. 2, tt^v &pjjv dTrappieev atpiae 
 ulyat;, ' that at the fit time they should bring goats to them.' 
 Here the accusative has, properly speaking, the sense of ' as 
 regards' in English, that is, denotes the object with regard 
 to which exclusively a proposition is to be taken. Thus, in 
 the example cited, the proposition, when stated absolutely, 
 is that king Psammetichus gave orders 'that they should 
 bring goats to (for) them,' dnoj-tviecv aflat alj-ac, the accusa- 
 tive T^v &prjv is added to show that this proposition is to be 
 understood as being restricted to, as having exclusive re- 
 gard to, ' the fit time ;' so that the order to bring goats to 
 the infants was not given absolutely, but with exclusive 
 regard to a specified time. And this is, in fact, the same 
 thing as to restrict the proposition within definite limits, or 
 to mark its extent ; and the accusative case, so employed, 
 appears in its common office as heretofore exhibited. Aris- 
 toph. Acharn. 23, dnopiav\f)*ovrsz, 'having arrived too late;' 
 that is, the arrival is spoken of ' with a regard to a time 
 inopportune,' or is to be understood as having this limi- 
 tation. 
 
 In the same way may bo e\|ilained some expressions of 
 time called adverbial, as, rb tsmk, 'at length,' 'finally,' ' in 
 the end,' that is, 'as regarila the end;' rb rehuTotov, 'at 
 last,' properly, 'as regards what is last;' xaipiv, 'oppor- 
 tunely,' that is, ' as regards a fitting occasion.' 
 
 In such expressions of the time to which an event is re- 
 ferred, it is more usual to add a preposition, as itpbz i^ptipav, 
 ad lucem, 'towards day,' e/f ktmipav, 'against evening.' But 
 the accusative, even then, has the sense of ' as regards.' And 
 it may be repeated, with respect to this sense of 'as re- 
 gards,' so commonly borne by the accusative case, that it is 
 but a more general way of expressing within what limits a 
 statement is to be understood, or of assigning its measure 
 or extent. 
 
 6. To this class of the significations of the accusative 
 case, namely, that in which it has the meaning of 'as 
 regards,' and marks in a more general way the limitation 
 with which a statement is made or an action is set forth, 
 belong the examples iu which verbs, mostly intransitive, 
 
116 
 
 BIOMIFIOATIOir OF THE CASES. 
 
 are attended by the accusative of nouns of the same or of a 
 like signification. E.g. II. ix. 74, 5c xtu Apiarqv \ pouXrjv ^oo- 
 Xtuajg, ' whoever shall give (counsel) the best counsel ;' Eurip. 
 Med. 607, dpac xopdwouz dvoaiout; dpiofiiinj, 'imprecating im- 
 pious curses upon the king;' Id. ib. 1041, rl npoffyekuTe rbu 
 nopuararov jriiwv; 'why do you laugh your last laugh of 
 all ?' And so, occasionally, after adjectives : e.g. Plat. Kep. 
 vi. p. 490, B, xaxohi ndaav xaociav, ' wicked with every wicked- 
 ness.' (See Kiihn. Ausf. Gr. § 547, a, and Anm. 1.) 
 
 Here, as above suggested, the accusative has the sense 
 of 'as regards,' and limits the substantive idea of the verb 
 by marking the extent in which it is to be taken. Thus, 
 in the first example cited, the action of ' counselling' con- 
 tained in ^ouXiuoTj is restricted by the accusative Apia-njv 
 fiouki^ti to a particular case, ' whoever shall give counsel . . . 
 as regards, as far as goes, the beat counsel.' This is more 
 manifest if the verb fioukeuetv be taken in its proper intransi- 
 tive sense of 'to be an adviser or counsellor.' In the 
 second example likewise, dpwfiivrj signifying 'making 
 prayers or imprecations,' the accusative dpi; dvoaiouz shows 
 in what restricted sense this is to be hero understood, 
 'making prayers,' not in any possible sense or extent, but 
 'as regards,' 'as far as go, impious prayers or imprecations;' 
 and the accusative ropdtivouc, again, adds another limitation, 
 namely, by indicating the person with respect to whom the 
 whole statement is m.ade, that is, to whom it is to bo limited ; 
 'making impious imprecations ... as regards the king.' 
 The other examples require the same interpretation. And 
 it may be observed that this interpretation receives confir- 
 mation from the examples in which such accusative coses 
 as obdiu, 'not at all,' Tooro, 'so,' 'thus,' zi, 'somewhat,' u; 
 'what?' &c. accompany verbs which otherwise have the 
 accusative of nouns of the same or of a like sense. E.g. 
 Herod, iii. 33, rauTa fikv iz roof olxijtouz b Ka/x^uajj^ itepdve, 
 'Cambyses committed these acts of madness against the 
 members of his own family;' properly, 'as regards these 
 things, thus far, Cambyses acted the madman towards (as 
 regards) the members of his own family.' (For the exam- 
 ples, see Kiihn. Ausf. Gr. § 547, Anm. 3.) 
 
 ACCUSATIVE CASE. 
 
 117 
 
 The explanation is the same where the idea contained io 
 the noun in the accusative case, and that expressed by the 
 verb upon which it follows, are not the same, but only 
 kindred, or generally corresponding in sense. E.g. Thuc. i. 
 126, 'Olupaziu vevtxijxdu, ' as he had been victor in the Olympic 
 games ;' that is, ' as he had been victor ... as regards, as 
 far as concerns, the Olympic games;' Id. vii. 66, rac ftiv 
 pevix^xare vaufzax'^'^y ' y°" '^'^^^ conquered in some sea-fights.' 
 (For the examples, see Kiihn. Ausf. Gr. § 547, 2.) 
 
 To this place, more appropriately perhaps, belong examples 
 such as those already considered under the accusative de- 
 noting the extent of meaning to be attributed to an action. 
 (See above, 2, e.) 
 
 e. The accusative is used also with verbs of action or 
 motion to express the object for which, or with a view to 
 which, it is performed : e.g. II. x. 195, Saot xexXijaro fiouiijv, 
 ' as many as were called to the council,' or, ' with a view 
 to the council,' that is, 'for consultation;' Herod, vi. 85, 
 Aaxe8atp6vcoi dixar^peov auvafaydiire!;, 'the Lacedaemonians 
 having brought them together before the tribunal of justice.' 
 (See KUhn. § 549.) In fact, however, the accusative, in such 
 examples, has the sense of ' as regards,' ' so far as is con- 
 cerned,' or limits the action of the verb to the object marked 
 by the noun in the accusative case. Thus, in the first 
 example cited above, the phrase Soot xexXijaro, • as many as 
 were summoned,' is restricted in its sense, by the addition 
 of fiouXr^v, to a defined extent or specific application, so that 
 the summoning shall be understood to have regard only to 
 a council. The notion of the object had in view, so far as 
 involved in the use of the accusative case; is derived from 
 the circumstances in which it is employed, just as where the 
 prepositions fterd, ei;, &c. are introduced, (see Kiihn. Ausf. 
 Gr. ib. Anm. 1,) and just as the manner or character of an 
 action, when expressed by the accusative, as above explained, 
 is due to the proper relations between the noun introduced 
 by it and the action of the verb. When it is said, Stxaanjptov 
 cumrayovTez, 'having brought them together ... as regards, 
 or with regard to, a tribunal of justice,' the idea that the 
 bringing persons together is with a view to trial before a 
 
118 
 
 SIQNIFICAnON OF THE CASES. 
 
 tribunal, is to be gathered only from the obvious relations 
 of the parties brought together, and the proper ofiSce of a 
 tribunal of justice. They being persons deemed guilty of 
 offence against the laws, and the office of a tribunal of 
 justice being to judge criminals, the bringing them together 
 . . . with a regard to a tribunal of justice at once conveys 
 the idea that they are brought together for trial before a 
 tribunal of justice. 
 
 d. Besides the instances already mentioned, the accusative 
 occurs in a number of cases without a verb or adjective 
 upon which it might be said to depend, and where it is said 
 to be used adverbially. Thus, X'^P'*' ^H^^y "^^t ' for roy sake,' 
 • for your sake,' that is, * as regards,' or ' with a regard to,' 
 and hence, as just seen, ' with a view to my, to your, grati- 
 fication;' Swfiedv, 'as a gratuity,' 'for nothing,' that is, 
 ' regarded as a gratuity ;' dtorivrjv, ' for nothing,' ' regarded 
 as a gift ;' npotxa, ' for nothing ;' /tdTr)u, * in vain ;' touto, 
 TcaJra, 'therefore,' that is, ' as regards this ;' n; 'why?' that 
 is, 'as regards what?' 8, 'wherefore,' that is, 'as regards 
 which.' 
 
 In the same way the accusative is employed in other 
 phrases, such as toutov rbv rpinou, ' in this manner,' that is, 
 •as regards this manner,' dlxtjv, 'like,' 'in the way or 
 manner of,' that is, 'as regards the way or manner of.' (See 
 Passow's Lex. s. v. 8ix7i, and Xiihn. Ausf. Gr. § 549, Anm. 2 
 and 3.) 
 
 Of the same nature 'essentially is the accusative in such 
 expressions as ebfioz, ' in width,' that is, * as regards width," 
 'as far as width goes ;' CjJoc, ' in height,' fdfedoz, ' in size,' 
 fid^oi, 'in depth,' fajxoz, 'in length,' nX^&o^, 'in number,' 
 dptdpSv, 'in number,' ySvoz, 'in family,' Svo/ia, 'in name,' 
 ftepoc, 'in turn,' TtpS^aoiv, 'for a pretext,' rd d' dXyjSdi:, 'and 
 in truth,' xvdtfjajv ifcjv, 'in my opinion,' that is, 'as regards 
 my opinion.' Add robvauriov, rdvavna, 'on the contrary,' 
 rSMa, ' for the rest,' dfifdrepov and dfupirepa, ' both ways,' 
 TOUTO ftlv . . . Touro^e, 'in the first place . . . in the second 
 place.' (See Kuhn. Ausf. Gr. § 557, Anm. 3 and 4.) 
 
 e. The accusative is used in the same sense with a number 
 of verbs, mostly intransitive, whore, at the first view, and 
 
 ACCUSATIVE CASE. 
 
 119 
 
 from the mode of rendering these verbs in English, this case 
 seems to mark the direct object, or else to occupy the place of 
 the dative case. Thus, with verbs signifying 'to help,' 'to 
 profit,' oMpeXetv, ivtvdvut, 6v'tvaa9at; 'to harm,' ^MnTsiv; 'to 
 wrong,' d8ixe7u; 'to insult,' 'to act insolently,' l>[ipi!^eev, (fol- 
 lowed also by etc and the accusative ;) ' to hurt,' hfiaivea^at, 
 ho^aadat ; 'to reverence,' 'to be reverential,' eltaeftetu; 'to be 
 irreverent,' daefietv; 'to lie in wait for,' Xd^uu; 'to punish,' 
 'to take revenge,' 'to avenge one's self,' Tip<i>pua9au, seldom 
 Tiptopstp ; ' to attend or wait upon,' ^epoaieuetv; ' to attend as a 
 body-guard,' dopufopstu ; ' to be a guardian,' intrpoitcueiv ; 
 'to flatter,' xoXaxeouv, 'to wheedle,' ^umeueiv, and ^tlmetv; 'to 
 do obeisance,' npoaxweiv, 'to persuade,' ffejiyetv; 'to answer,' 
 d/jieifieoi^ae. E.g. II. i. 394-5, enrore d^ rtij | Inu Siuijaaz xpad'ttjv 
 Atoz ijh xai ipj-w, ' if at any time now you have profited the 
 heart of Jove either by word or deed ;' that is, ' if you have 
 been of profit ... as regards the heart of Jove ;' -^sch. 
 Prom. 945, dmnre rbv xparowr del, 'flatter whoever is in 
 power,' that is, ' be a flatterer ... as regards him that is 
 successively in power;' Thuc. i. 132, /IXelorapxov . . . 
 insTpdneueu (o Jlauaetptai;), ' Pausanias was guardian of Pleis- 
 tarchus ;' Plat. Rep. i. p. 334, d, mipeXuv plv rouf ip'douz {doxit) 
 ij SixatoauvTj, ^Xdnreiv Sk robe ix^pou;;, 'justice seems to benefit 
 one's friends, but to injure one's foes,' that is, 'to be of 
 service ... as regards one's friends, but to do hurt . . . 
 as regards one's foes.' (For the list of verbs, and for the 
 examples, sec Kiihn. Ausf. Gr. § 550.) 
 
 Although, in such cases, it is not possible, looking at the 
 signification of most of these verbs from our point of view, 
 and using our mode of expressing their meaning, to say 
 beforehand that they should be followed by the accusative 
 rather than the dative, so that much must be left to practice, 
 and to an attentive observation of the actual use of the 
 Greek authors, yet it is not difficult, if we carefully consider 
 the proper meaning of the verbs, to see how the accusative, 
 when employed, is to be interpreted. With regard to a 
 number of these verbs, it is plain that they express a mere 
 state or character, as, unpeXsiv, ' to be of service,' dSixztv, ' to 
 be a wrong-doer ;' and the same is probably true of them 
 
120 
 
 EiaNinOlTKOf OF THE CASES. 
 
 all. Taldng the ver|}8 in this sense, the accusative naturally 
 attends them to mark the object with regard to which the 
 state or character expressed by the substantive idea of the 
 verb is affirmed, that is, to which it is to be understood as 
 limited ; aud so is widely different from the dative, which, 
 however, might possibly have attended these verbs consis- 
 tently with its own proper sense. 
 
 Some of these verbs actually have the dative case : thus, 
 wiftXuv, which in Attic prose has regularly the accusative, in 
 the older Attic prose is occasionally used with the datiy;. 
 But even in poetry the dative occurs with it but rarely : e.g. 
 .^sch. Pers. 839, mc i?avoD« w^ouroc ohdiv u^eM; Eur. Orest. 
 655, roue fiXouz Iv rotz xaxdiz XP^ ^"'C fii-otaev dt^ehcv. And so 
 pXdnTBtv Rw, in ^sch. Enm. 658 ; also Xufudviadat, kat^aadat, 
 Sopixpopuv, and, in later writers, rcpoaxuveiv. 'Aaefiuu and 
 ddcxelv have also el<:, itp6z, and izepl with the accusative ; and 
 b^pi^uv has etc and i:p6<: with the accusative : e.g. Plat. 
 8ymp. p. 174, "Opajpoz fiJkv yap xivduveuee oii phvov Sta<p9etpcu, 
 dUi xat b^piaat £ec Tour^v rijv izapotpdav. (See Kiihu. § 550, 
 Anm. 1.) 
 
 It may be added that the dative case, when used with 
 these verbs, has its proper sense of the final object of the 
 state or character expressed by them, whereas the accusative 
 defines the limits within which it is affirmed. Aud, again, 
 that the accusative with the prepositions eeV, &c. occurring 
 . with these verbs, is to be interpreted according to the sense 
 above attributed to it, and which it has elsewhere with these 
 same prepositions, and with so many other verbs. 
 
 /. The same interpretation is to be given to the accusa- 
 tive case occurring with verbs which signify ' to say or do 
 good or evil,' as, tiepj-ereiv, xaxoupyetv, xaxoTtoieiv, tuXoystv, xaxo- 
 ioj-eTv, th, xaXaiz, xaxat^ dpSv, iiyetv, eijtetu, and (Lnayopiuecv, ' to 
 forbid.' E.g. Soph. Aj. 1154, dn&pwne, /ai Spa roue Ttduj^xitrcu; 
 xaxwi;, ' do not maltreat the dead,' that is, ' do not treat ill 
 ... as regards the dead,' *as far as concerns the dead;' 
 Xen. Cyr. i. 6, 29, ?va . , . //^ xaxoupj-otrjTe roof ^ Wouc, ' that 
 you might not do evil to your friends,' that is, ' that you 
 might not be evil-doers ... as regards your friends.' (For 
 the list of verbs, and for the examples, see Kiihn. § 561.) 
 
 ACCUSATIVE CASE. 
 
 121 
 
 ir 
 
 
 g. The accusative ca^e has the same office of marking the 
 object 'as regards,' 'as to,' which an action or state is 
 affirmed, that is, the limits within which it is to bo undeft- 
 stood, when it is employed with verbs signifying ' to stay,' 
 fiiveiv, 'to await,' 'to abide,' Ttept/Uvetv, 'to be stout-hearted,' 
 'to bo of good courage,' ' to be confident,' dajifiuv, 'to flee,' 
 'to be an exile,' jpeo^-e^v, • to run away,' ' to escape,' dffo^eu^e<j/, 
 dnoScdpdaxeiv, ' to be a runaway,' Spanereuuv. E.g. Demosth. 
 Phil. i. p. 50, extr., of dh zwv npdfftartov xatpoi ob fiivouat ttjv 
 ^tf^rlpav PpaSuzr^Td, 'the fit junctures in aftUirs do not wait 
 for our tardiness ;' Id. 01. ii. (al. iii.) p. 30, 7, oi3re ^tXmnoz 
 iddp^ee roorooci oM' ourot ^ikjTotov, ' neither was Philip confi- 
 dent of these, nor were these confident of Philip,' that is, ' as 
 regards these,' 'as regards Philip;' Eurip. Med. 561, jtivrjva 
 ipatyei tcw; uz ixnodtbu fiXoz, ' every friend flies a poor man,' 
 that is, ' flics out of the way ... as regards a poor man.' 
 (For the list of verbs, and for the examples, see Kiihn. A. 
 Gr. § 551, 3, and Anm. 3.) 
 
 h. In the same sense the accusative is used with verbs 
 signifying ' to escape notice,' Xavddvuv, ' to conceal,' ' to be 
 concealed,' xpunzuv, xpunreff&ae, xeudetv : e.g. Plat. Rep. ii. p. 
 365, D, diohz oore lavddvuv dure ^idaaa9at duvarov, ' it is not 
 possible cither to escape the notice of the gods, or to force 
 them,' that is, ' to cscupo notice ... as regards the gods.' 
 And BO when xpunretv has two accusatives ; xpmzetv ztvd ti, 
 'to hide a thing from a person,' that is, 'to hide a thing 
 ... as regards a person ;' where w' also may probably be 
 used in the sense of ' as to,' ' as regards,' and the meaning 
 be, 'to make concealment ... as regards a thing ... so 
 far as a person is concerned.' The construction of the accu- 
 sative with Xav&dveiv is still more evident, taking it in its 
 proper sense of ' to bo in a state of kjl^^,' understood objec- 
 tively, 'to be forgotten,' and so 'to escape observation.' 
 (For the list of verbs, and for the examples, see KUhn. A. 
 Qr. § 551, 4.) 
 
 i. So also the accusative is used with the verbs fddvetv, 
 ' to anticipate,' ' to be beforehand ;' Xsinuv, ' to leave,' 
 imXtinetv, ' to fail :' e.g. Herod, vi. 115, rtsptinXwov loOviov 
 BoMpsvue {fdi^vtu rooc ' Wiyvotoof dstixdfitvot Iz zh dazu, ' wishing 
 
122 
 
 EIONIFIOATION OF THE OASES. 
 
 to be beforehand with the Athenians in reaching the city,' 
 that is, ' to be beforehand ... as regards the Athenians.' 
 (Bee Kuhn. § 551, 5.) 
 
 k. The accusative has the same meaning wheii used with 
 verbs signifying ' to take away,' * to deprive,' as, dfoupeta&at, 
 ortpiiv, &c. ; ' to put on or oft^' iv8uztv, dfttpawwai ; ' to teach,' 
 diddaxuv. (See Kiihn. § 551, 6, and below, under the double 
 accusative.) 
 
 I. So likewise with 8si, oportd, 'it behooves,' and ^p^, 
 neccssc est, ' it is required,' the accusative, when used, has the 
 sense of ' as regards.' Jet, in prose, is used with the dative 
 also ; but in connection with the infinitive this construction 
 is rare. Xpij with the dative is rather poetical : e.g. Soph. 
 Autig. 736, dU.(p yap ^'ftoi "j^p^ ye rr^aS" dp'^ecv ■j^dovo^; * is it 
 requisite for another than me to rule this land?' (See Kiihn. 
 A. Gr. § 551, C, Anm. 5.) 
 
 m. In poetry, verbs of motion, as, Paiveiv, ' to go,' dlaaeiv, 
 ' to rush,' Tiepav, ' to go beyond,' uXeTu, * to sail,' (tinziv, ' to 
 creep,' a:tEu8stv, ' to hasten,' and others, are sometimes at- 
 tended by the accusative to mark the object with regard to 
 which definitely the motion is affirmed, or, which is mate- 
 rially the same thing, the limit within which a statement is 
 to be taken. E.g. Soph. Antig. 1198, tuxi xara/t^inei rbv 
 euw^owra, 'fortune weighs down him that is fortunate,' 
 that is, ' fortune weighs down (inclines the scale against) 
 ... as regards him tliat is fortunate ;' Eurip. Phoen. 1427, 
 npo^uz 81 xwlov 8s^i6u, ' advancing the right limb,' that is, 
 'advancing ... so far as regards the right limb;' Eurip. 
 Iph. Taur. 398, iitXeuaa^ vdiov Sjpj/ia, 'you sailed with a ship's 
 conveyance,' that is, 'you sailed ... as far as goes a ship's 
 conveyance ;' the accusative vdi'ov oj[i^/ia showing that the act 
 of sailing is to be limited in its sense, that it extends only 
 to a particular means of conveyance, or embraces no other 
 kind of conveyance, but is confined to this ; Thuc. vi. 39, 
 xaxtt oTceuSuv, ' to hasten on evils,' that is, ' to hasten on 
 ... as regards evils;' the accusative xaxd showing that the 
 hastening on, which might be otherwise understood of other 
 things, or taken absolutely, is to be restricted to this par- 
 
 ACOUSATIVB CASE. 
 
 123 
 
 ^ 
 
 ticular. Herod, i. 206, Ttmcm cnt{,8a,v zd aneodee^. (See 
 Kuhn. A. Gr. § 552, 7, and above, 2, c. p. 110.) 
 
 n. In the same way, verbs which signify 'to make a noise- 
 as xporuv, xporaXiZuv, &c., have in poetiy, and more rarely 
 in prose, an accusative added to denote the object to which 
 the noise is to bo referred, and with regard to which exclu- 
 eively it^ is affirmed. E.g. II. xi. 160, 7m:o, «/v' S^ea xpord- 
 Kou dva TTToXi/wio re<p6pa^, 'the horses rattled with empty 
 chariots throughout the lines of battle;' properly, ' the horses 
 made a rattling noise ... as regards the empty chariots,' 
 or '80 far as were concerned the empty chariots.' The 
 phrase Ithtoi xpordhCov, 'the horses made a rattling noise ' is 
 restricted in its application by the addition of the accusative 
 mu oxea, ' empty chariots,' to definite objects, so that it is no 
 longer declared absolutely that the horses made a rattling 
 noise, but that they made a rattling noise only so far as 
 empty chariots were concerned. And by thus referring the 
 noise to a definite set of objects, and by restricting the affir- 
 mation of it to these, the accusative case does in fact qualify 
 or describe it as having a specific character or origin as 
 being a rattling noise that belongs to or is made by empty 
 chariots. In effect, the accusative here performs an office 
 similar to that of the genitive, but without usurpino- its 
 place, since it does it in a different way. With the above 
 example compare II. xv. 453, and Herod, vi. 58, ;i/3«ra xpo- 
 Tioum, 'they beat, make a noise with, a kettle,' that is, they 
 make a rattling noise, to be understood, not absolutely, but 
 as having regard exclusively to a kettle, and as being deter- 
 mined m its character by being limited to it; ' they make a 
 rattling noise ... as far as a kettle goes.' (For the exam- 
 ples, see Kuhn. § 552, 7.) 
 
 0. The accusative has the same sense of 'as regards' when 
 used with such verbs as xopeiav, 'to dance,' ii/aaew, 'to 
 whirl in the dance,' to mark the person in whose honor the 
 dance is performed, as in solemn religious services E g 
 Pind. Isthm. i. 8, tf>o?^<,v xopedau, 'to perform choric dances 
 m honor of Phoebus;' properly, 'to dance or perform a 
 chonc dance . . . with regard to Phoebus,' Phoebus being 
 the object with regard to whom the action is affirmed, that 
 
124 
 
 SIONIFiaillON OF THK CASES. 
 
 IB the accusative ^dl^ having the efiect of limiting the 
 term yoptuuv to this precise extent But to dance in a reli- 
 gious service with an exclusive regard to the divinity Phoebus 
 can mean nothing else than to dance in honor of Phoebus. 
 Eurip. Iph. in Aul. 1480, ii/aoer' d/iipl t/abu, dfi^l ^u>(ibv 
 "Aprtfuv, 'dance around the temple, around the altar, in 
 honor of Artemis,' that is, ' with a view to Artemis,' the 
 accusative 'Apre/juv, * with regard to Artemis,' denoting that 
 the action of kUaaer' is to be taken as having regard to her 
 alone. (For the examples, see Kiihn. A. Gr. § 552, 8.) 
 
 p. Again, the accusative is used in the sense of ' as regards,' 
 or ' with regard to," with the verbs which signify ' to swear,' 
 as, Siivufu, marking the object by which a person swears. 
 E.g. 11. xiv. 271, ofioaov ddazov I'Tuybi udtap, 'swear by the 
 inviolable water of Styx,' properly, 'swear . . . with a regard 
 to, in view of, the inviolable water of Styx.' The accusative 
 shows that the act of swearing is to be restricted in its 
 application to the definite object Iruybz uScop, so as to have 
 this alone in view. And so the accusative after pd, ob pd, 
 pat pd, v^. E.g. U. L 234, vat pa roSe oit^rpov, 'yes, by this 
 sceptre,' that is, 'with regard to, in view of, this sceptre;* 
 II. i. 86, oil pd jap 'AnbUwva, ' no, by Apollo,' that is, 'with 
 regard to Apollo,' 'in view of Apollo.' Cf. Xcn. Cyr. i. 3, 
 6. (For the examples, see Kiihn. Ausf. Gr. § 552, 9.) 
 
 q. The accusative has the same sense of ' as to,' ' as regards,' 
 when used with xerbs expressing various emotions, to mark 
 the objects with regard to which these emotions arc felt ; as, 
 fofidaifai, Maut, 'to fear,' uiafjivM&iu, 'to be ashamed,' 
 aldetadai, 'to reverence,' 'to stand in awe,' di^etu, 'to grieve,' 
 &XSeadai, d-j[wa9at, ' to be vexed,' dua^epaivuv, ' to be pain- 
 fully affected,' ;^a«/>£«v, ' to rejoice,' rjdsadai, ' to be pleased,' 
 rrjifetu, 'to be glad,' 'to be delighted,' Mpfieiv, rapjietu, 'to 
 be alarmed,' ixTri^rrea&ai, xaTonXrJTrea&at, 'to be astounded,' 
 'to be terrified,' olxrttpetv, iXeetu, 'to pity,' 6Xo<pupea9at, 'to 
 bewail.' E.g. Od. ix. 130, dsiaavTBz SXedpou, ' fearing destruc- 
 tion,' that is, ' having fear . . . as regards destruction ;' Od. 
 ix. 269, d/U' aldeeo, fipiare, «?€ouf, ' reverence the gods,' that 
 is, 'be reverential, stand in awe ... as regards the gods;' 
 Eurip. Ilippol. 1355, tooc r"/* eo«M «?£<>« ^vrjaxovTw; ob 
 
 ACCUSATIVE CASE. 
 
 125 
 
 t 
 
 Yplpouot, 'for the gods rejoice not at the death of the pious,' 
 that is, 'the gods rejoice not ... as regards the pious, 
 when they die ;' Xen. Rep. Lao. ii. 11, alieca&at rbuz dpj^oprac, 
 'to respect their rulers,' that is, 'to be respectful ... as 
 regards their rulers.' Here, manifestly, the accusative case 
 sets a limit to the extent of the feeling expressed by the 
 verb, by marking a particular object with regard to which 
 exclusively it is to be understood as entertained. (For the 
 list of verbs, and for the examples, see Eiihn. § 553, 10.) 
 
 And so with respect to the accusative case employed 
 with verbs that express actions by which grief is mani- 
 fested ; as, »6nTea9at, 'to cut one's self,' riUeff&at, 'to pluck 
 the beard,' runrea^tu, 'to beat one's self.' E.g. Eurip. Troad. 
 628, xonrtadat vexp6v, 'to lament tlie dead,' properly, 'to cut 
 one's self . . . with regard to a dead body;' Ilerod. ii. 132, 
 Tunrtadou rbp dedv, ' to bewail the god ;' properly, ' to beat 
 one's self . . . viath regard to the god.' (See Kiihn.- 
 § 553, 10.) 
 
 The genitive case also occurs with verbs that express the 
 emotions, as has been seen under that case ; but, although 
 rendered in English in the same way with the accusative, it 
 is not to be confounded in sense with that case. The 
 accusative marks the limit within which the emotion is to 
 be considered as felt, by naming the object to which it 
 extends, and to which it is to be confined; the genitive 
 denotes the object with respect to which specifically it is 
 affirmed, and by which it is characterized. Tlie result is 
 materially the same, the way by which it is reached is 
 difierent. 
 
 r. Again, the accusative occurs with many neuter and 
 passive verbs, besides those mentioned, and with a number 
 of adjectives, to denote the object to which the action, state, 
 or quality contained in these is to be considered as limited 
 in its extent, being, here also, equivalent to the English 'as 
 to,' *aa regards,' 'so far as is concerned,' and therefore, 
 properly speaking, an accusative of measure. Thus : 
 
 a. With verbs: e.g. Od. i. 208-9, alvwi; yip xefal^v re *a\ 
 ippara xaXd lotxaz \ xeivip, 'for in your head and handsome 
 eyes you arc exceedingly like hiiri,' that is, 'you are exceed- 
 
126 
 
 SIGNIFICATION OF THE CISES. 
 
 ACCUSATIVE CASE. 
 
 127 
 
 ingly like him ... as regards, so far as are concerned, 
 your head and handsome eyes,' the resemhiancc being 
 asserted with the limitation indicated by the accusative 
 xsfcdtjv and o/i/tara. Soph. Aj. 934, xehuvdtnav d^ufibv i<pii- 
 Bpi^et noXurkaz dv^p, ' the much-enduriug man insults me with 
 his dark wrath,' that is, 'is insolent ... as regards, so far as 
 goes, hid dark wrath ;' Ilerod. ii. Ill, rbv 8k ^aadia Uyouat 
 , . . xafiovra twz d<p&aXfiimJZ mtpXmdrjvae, 'they say that the 
 king, being afflicted in his eyes, became blind,' that is, 'being 
 afflicted ... as regards, so £ir as are concerned, his eyes ;' 
 Xen. Memor. i. 6, 6, Sea to dXyeTv roue nodaz, ' on account of my 
 having pain in my feet,' that is, ' on account of my having pain 
 ... as regards my feet,' ' so far as my feet arc concerned.' 
 
 p. With adjectives, such as xaXo;, xaxoz, dya&oz, aoip6z, 
 &c. E.g. II. v. 801, TuS&uz Toi /uxpoz irjv ue/taz, dMu fmjpjT^Zi 
 ' TydcuB, indeed, was small in person,' that is, ' was small 
 ... as regards his person, so far as his person was con- 
 cerned ;' ^sch. Pers. 27, decvoi pdjfrjv, ' terrible in battle,' 
 that is, ' terrible ... as regards battle ;' Ilerod. iii. 4, 
 <P<£mjc xai jviiprjv Ixavoz xai ra noXi/ua dXxifxoz, ' Phanes was 
 both capable in mind and brave in matters of war,' that is, 
 'capable ... as regards his mind, and brave ... as re- 
 gards matters of war.' (See Kiihn. § 657.) 
 
 Sometimes, besides the accusative introduced to limit the 
 extent in which their meaning is to be taken, as just 
 explained, such verbs and adjectives have a preposition 
 also, as £if, T/*6c, xard. E.g. II. iii. 158, ulvdiz ddaudrr^ai i?ejif 
 eiz diTza iotxaz, ' thou art wonderfully like the immortal god- 
 desses in countenance ;' Plat. Apol. p. 35, a, of Staipipovrez 
 'Adr^ufiimv e<c dpenju, ' those of the Athenians who excel in vir- 
 tue ;' Ell rip. Orest. 539-40, /laxdptoz nk^uil di^p | ti^.tjv etc duya- 
 ripaz, '1 am a happy man, except as regards my daughters;' 
 Plat. Gorg. p. 474, d, to. ampaza zd xaXd ol)-/1 ^zot xard r^w 
 ^psiav Xiyeiz x(Om etpcu, npbz o dv ixaarou yprjacpov rj, npbz rooro, 
 Tj xard //iioi/r^v Tcua ; ' or do you not, indeed, say of beautiful 
 bodies, that they are beautiful with regard to their useful- 
 ness, with reference to whatever each is useful for, or with 
 regard to some pleasure?' Ilerod. i. 124, xazd pkv yap 
 Tip/ ToiiTou Ttpodu/tir^v ridUr^xaz, to dk xazd deo6z re xai Iph 
 
 t » 
 
 i 
 
 nepisiz, 'ao far as regards this man's devotion, you are dead; 
 but so far as the gods and I are concerned, yon survive.' 
 So dffu/ierv rcapd Tim, 'to be disheartened with regard to a 
 person.' (See Kuhn. Ausf. Gr. § 557, Anm. 1.) In such 
 examples, however, the accusative retains its sense of 'as 
 regards,' 'as to,' and the office of the preposition alone 
 demands explanation. 
 
 s. To this variety of the significations of the accusative 
 case belong, further, a number of adverbial expressions, aa 
 they are called, besides some already mentioned ; as, dx/^u, 
 'presently,' 'on the instant,' properly, 'as regards the very 
 point of time;' dpyrju, 'at first,' 'at all,' 'at the beginning,' 
 that is, 'as regards the beginning;' ziXoz, rb TiXoz, 'finally,' 
 'at last,' properly, 'as regards the end;' rb TeXeuratov, 'at 
 last,' that is, 'as regards what is final;' jzpozepov, 'before,' 
 that is, 'aa regards a preceding thing;' zb npwzov, 'at first,'' 
 that is, 'as regards that which is first;' zbitpiv, 'formerly'" 
 that is, ' as regards what is before ;' zb auzlxa, ' immediately'' 
 'on the instant,' illico, that is, 'as regards what is referred 
 to the selfsame point,' auzixa being a neuter accusative 
 plural of auzlxoz, composed of adz, 'same,' and the adjective 
 ending «6f, and hence meaning * what has the property 
 of selfsamcness;' zauuv, 'at the present time,' that is, 'as 
 regards what is now;' Tdpxa7ov, 'originally,' properly, 'as 
 regards what belongs to the beginning;' xatpdu, 'oppor- 
 tunely,' that is, 'as regards a fit moment;' Tb naXaiov, 
 'anciently,' that is, 'as regards what was long ago;' zb 
 Xomov, 'for the rest,' 'for the future,' that is, 'as regards 
 what is left or remaining,' quod reliquum est; Zazepov, 'after- 
 wards,' that is, 'as regards what is subsequent or later,' 
 being formed from bnb in the sense of what is ' too late,' 
 viz. : u{i:)-a-Tspov. (See Kuhn. Ausf. Gr. 555, Anm. 2,) 
 
 tit may be here added, that in the example cited from 
 Od. i. 274, seqq., pvr^azijpaz psv ini a<pizepa axidvaa9ai dvtoxdr 
 I pr^zipu S\ eioi Ou/tbz iipoppuzat j-apieadai, \ d^ tzto iz lUyapov 
 nazppz pij-u dwapivoto, 'bid the suitors disperse to their 
 homes; and, for your mother, if. her mind inclines her to 
 wed, let her go back to the house of her mighty father,' tlio 
 accusative prfipu may, with greater probability, be con- 
 
128 
 
 SIGNIFICATION OF THE CASES. 
 
 sidered as used in the sense of 'as regards,' 'as to,' so that 
 the meaning shall be, 'as regards your mother,' 'as for 
 your mother.' Yet there is some plausibility, at least, in 
 the explanation which makes //^re/^a to follow the construc- 
 tion of /tvrj(fTfjf>a(: by a sort of attraction. (See Kiihn. Ausf, 
 Or. §506.) 
 
 DOVDLE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 4. With a number of verbs there occur two accusatives, 
 the one of the person, and the other of the thing or iu- . 
 animate object ; e.g. ^iXlau lujdh/V tfdilv xtva, ' to love a 
 person with a great love.' In very many instances of this 
 construction, the verb, cither transitive or intransitive, is 
 attended by a personal object with regard to whom the 
 action or quality coutained in the verb is affirmed, and by 
 a noun representing the same or a like substantive idea 
 with that of the verb ; as in the example just cited. • And 
 it will be found, upon examination, that the accusative cases 
 which attend upon these verbs require the same explana- 
 tion that has been given above of accusatives occurring 
 singly with verbs. They might, therefore, be left to the 
 careful attention of the student, as being capable of ex- 
 planation by the application of the doctrine of the accusative 
 case already cstabli.shed. But, both for practical purposes, 
 and because, the double use of the accusative with verbs 
 always occupying a separate place in the grammars, the in- 
 vestigation of this case might seem to be incomplete if it 
 were omitted, it may be proper to speak of it, even at the 
 hazard of repetition. 
 
 a. A number of verbs, besides the accusative case of the 
 personal object, are attended by the accusative case of a 
 noun having the same substantive idea with the verbs 
 themselves. E.g. Od. xv. 245-6, Sw nifu xr^pt ifdu Zsu^ r' aireo- < 
 'loz xai 'A;:6Ua)v | navroi^v (fdonjza, ' whom both Zeus lEgis- 
 bearer and Apollo love in their hearts with all manner of 
 love;' that is, 'as regards whom Zeus tegisbearer and 
 Apollo are friendly or loving with all manner of love;' 
 properly, ' as regards, as far as goes, all manner of love.' 
 Soph. Electr. 1034, roaourov ix^o^ ix^alpto as, 'with such 
 a hatred do I hate thee;' that is, 'as regards thee I have 
 
 DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 129 
 
 *T 
 
 hatred ... as far aa goes so great a hatred.' Ilerod. 
 iii. 88, Ydfiouc re roue npwrouz iydfiu ... 6 Japetoz Kupou piv 
 Suo duyaripa;, 'jhoaadv re xai ' ApTuaranniv, 'Darius contracted 
 (married) the tirst (noblest) marriages, namely, with two 
 daughters of Cyrus, Atossa and Artustone.' Here, if j-a/ie7u 
 be regarded as followed by the accusative of the direct 
 object, so that the construction shall be ifdfies rou; npiltrouz 
 jdpooz, ' he married the first marriages,' then the accusative 
 duo duj-aripai; will have the same construction. It may be 
 doubted, however, if yafislv have this active sense. It may 
 rather mean 'to be in the state of a yd/xoz or husband,' and 
 then the accusative yd/xoui; which is added will have the 
 Bense of ' as regards,' and the accusative of the person will 
 be interpreted in the same way. So that the true meaning 
 will be ' Darius was or became a husband ... as regards 
 the noblest marriages (wives) . . . namely, as regards Atossa 
 and Artustone.' Ilerod. iii. 154, Iwuzw Aiofiurcu Xw^r^v du^- 
 narov, 'he inflicted upon himself the most incurable hurt.' 
 Here the accusative of the person has the sense of ' as 
 regards,' that is, names the object to which the statement 
 XiD^uToi },(i)^rjv is to be confined ; and the accusative i.<b^rjv 
 Las essentially the same construction, showing iu what 
 extent the action of ktoflarae is to be taken, ' as far as goes 
 the most incurable hurt or outrage.' Thuc. viii. 75, wpxuaav 
 roue ar/iauwTui; rou; fupatouz o/ixuu;, ' they bound the soldiers 
 with the most solemn oaths;' properly, 'as regards the 
 soldiers . . . they bound with oaths ... as fur as go the 
 most solenm oaths.' Here, of both accusatives the proper 
 meaning is to mark the exact extent iu which the sense of 
 wfixoauv is to bo taken ; and, consequently, they are to be 
 considered as being really accusatives of measure, the one 
 showing that the oaths amounted to the most solemn oaths, 
 aud the other that they reached to or embraced the sol- 
 diers, not any persons indifiercntly. 
 
 The consfruetiou is the same where the verb is attended 
 .by the accusative case of a noun having a kindred substan- 
 tive idea, and by another accusative showing the person to 
 whom the statement made by the verb and kindred uoun is 
 to be confined. E.g. Soph. Aj. 1107, ra aiftu' Imj xoXa]^' 
 
 9 
 
130 
 
 BiaNIIIOAIION OF THK OABBS, 
 
 
 ixdvooc, 'punish them with your proud words,' that is, 'as 
 regards them . . . inflict punishment ... so far as go 
 your prt>ud words;' Id. Trach. 51-8, W«rava Jyjdi^etpa noM , 
 ukv if iri> I Mniidov ^8jj nauidxpor' dSup/iaTa ] t^p 'HpdxXeiov 
 KoSov rowftii^v, »0 my mistreBS Deaneira, oftentimes al- . 
 ready have I beheld you bewailing the absence of Herakles 
 with lamentations full of tears;' properly, 'oftentimes have 
 I beheld you . . . as regards the absence of Herakles . . . 
 bewailing . . . as far as go lamentations full of tears.' (See 
 Kuhn. Ausf. Gr. §658, a, and b.) 
 
 The explanation is the same where, instead of an ac^sa- 
 tivc of the thing, a pronoun attends the verb: e.g. Xen. 
 Cyrop. i. 3, 10, rSUa /ufioiftevoc rbu Idxav, 'in all other par- 
 ticulars imitating Sacas;' that is, 'imitating Sa^as . . . 
 as far as all other particulars were concerned." The verb 
 uipeiadcu signifying properly « to be a /upoz or mimic,' the 
 accusative Jdxav is added to show that, in this instance, the 
 being a/«/ioc is to be understood only with regard to Sacas; 
 and the other accusative riiXa, again, marks that the cha- 
 racter expressed by the verb extends as far as this term 
 goes, 'as far as to every other particular.' Xen. Anab. v. 
 7 6 Toiko OfiSc iSeatarijoat, 'to deceive you in this,' properly, 
 Ho deceive,' that is, 'to be a deceiver ... as regards you,:^ 
 ... BO far as this goes.' (See. Kuhn. Ausf. Gr. § 558, 
 
 Aum. 1.) . , ^, ... 
 
 In the passive construction, the accusative of the thing 
 is retained, the personal object becoming the subject: e.g. 
 Herod, iii. 34, d, dimora, ri pku dXXa ndura peydXioz iitatvBot, 
 'in every other respect you are greatly praised,' that is, 
 'you are greatly praised ... as regards, so far as is con- 
 cerned, every thing else.' (See Kiihn. ib. Anm. 2.) 
 
 ( In such expressions as jr«e?v nva dyaM or xaxd, ' to do 
 a person good or harm,' Xirn" «»-« dyadd or xaxd, ' to speak 
 good or evil of a person,' the verbs rtoiuu and Ur^v are 
 accompanied by the accusative both of the terA expressing 
 good or evil, namely, dyaifd and xwcd, and of the persour 
 with regard to whom the good or evil doing or speaking is 
 affirmed. E.g. Herod, viii. 61, rire dk di] 6 et,uaroxXiyi<: xtivov 
 re xa\ robe Kop^vdiow: noUd re tax xaxd lAe^e, 'and at that time, 
 
 '\ I 
 
 : 
 
 i 
 
 DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 131 
 
 then, Themistocles said many evil things of both him and 
 the Corinthians.' Here, assuming xaxd to be the direct object 
 of tXej-t, the phrase xoUd re xai xaxd lUej-e is followed by the 
 accusative case of the person in the sense of ' as regards ;' 
 'Themistocles said many evil things ... as regards him.' 
 Xen. Cyrop. iii. 2, 15, ohdendtnoTe inauovro noUd xaxd ^fiac 
 ftoiouvTe^, ' they never yet at any time ceased from doing us 
 many evils,' that is, 'from doing many evils ... as re- 
 gards us.' ' Epjrdi^ea&ai, einetv, and some others, are used in 
 the same way with two accusatives. (See Kiihn. Ausf. Gr. 
 §569.) 
 
 c. Two accusatives occur also with verbs signifying 'to 
 make,' to constitute,' noietv, u&ivai; 'to choose,' alpeta^at] 
 'to consider,' 'to esteem,' vofu^em, i^yeta^at; 'to name,' 'to 
 call,' 'to say of,' dvopd^eiv, xakiiv, Xij-av; 'to receive,' 'to 
 accept,' napaXa^eiv, di^ea&cu, &c. E.g. L. xvi. 90, dreftdrspov 
 di pe djjaei^, 'you will make me more dishonored;' Eurip. 
 Med. 374, {iv raurj rj ^pipqi) rpuz foiv ipaiv ij[ifpwvvExpouz\ 
 S^aa), jtarijifif re xai xbprjv Ti6atv r' ipov, ' I will make three 
 of my enemies dead bodies;' Xen. Cyrop. v. 2, 14, zbv 
 Fm^puav auvdemvov itapiXa^ev, 'he received Gobryas as his 
 companion at table'; Plat. Gorg. p. 489, d, u note Xiysti: 
 Touc fisXTtaTouz ; ' what do you say of the best ?' Demosth. do 
 Chers. p. 106, 66, ndX&otz yap lywj-e nXouzov ■jj-oupat auppdj^oui;, 
 mauv, ewotav, ' for my part, at least, I regard as the wealth 
 of a state her allies, confidence in her, and good-will for 
 her.' (See Kuhn. A. Gr. § 560.) In such examples the two 
 accusatives may be considered as having the same con- 
 struction, the second being a repetition of the first under 
 another name or aspect, and being, therefore, of the nature 
 of an apposition. Thus, in the example Fw^puav awSemvov 
 napiXa^ev, the term auvdemvov, ' a companion at table,' is but 
 another name for Gobryas under a peculiar aspect. So that 
 if the first or chief accusative be considered as the immediate 
 object of the verb's action, the second will have the same 
 construction. (See Kuhn. A. Gr. § 660, Anm. 5.) 
 
 Here belong also such expressions as d<u>pa 7toista9at, 
 rideadai ri, &c., ' to account a thing a marvel,' &c. : e.g. 
 Eurip. Orest 1030, u,3piapa dipevo^ rbv 'Afapipvovo^ yovov, 
 
132 
 
 8I0NIFICATI0ir OF THE CASES. 
 
 * insulting the offipring of Agamemnon.' (See Kiihn. ib. 
 Anm. 1.) 
 
 d. Two accusatives are used with verbs signifying 'to 
 ask,' *to demand,' 'to inquire,' &c., as, aliiiv, aheta^tUy 
 dnaereiv, xpttrrav, j:pdrTt<t9at, clanpirretv, ipiorav, ipia&eu, 
 iSerd^etv, Itnopuv, dvurropeiv. E.g. Od. ix. 364, KuxXat^, 
 ipaiTfc fi' ovofux xiurdv; 'Cyclops, do you ask me for a 
 fiunous name ?' that is, ' do you ask a question of me (pro> 
 perly, ' as regards me, aa far as I am concerned') ... as to a 
 famous name ?' Here both accusatives are probably used 
 in the sense of ' as to,' ' as regards,' although, for practical 
 purposes, that of the person is conveniently accounted the 
 direct object. Herod, iii. 1, Tcift^a^ Ka/tpuaijc ^C Atftmrov 
 xjpuxa atree "Apaatv ^uj-aripa, ' Cambyses asked Amasis for 
 his daughter;' that is, 'made a demand of (properly, 'as 
 regards') Amasis ... as far as his daughter was concerned,' 
 both accusatives being employed to mark the precise extent 
 in which the term aTru is to be taken. Herod, iii. 58, auroh^ 
 btarbv rdXavra ixprj^av, 'they exacted of them a hundred 
 talents ;' that is, ' they exacted ... as regards them ... as 
 much as, to the amount of, a hundred talents.' In this 
 example the accusative adrouc has the sense of ' as regards,' 
 and ixardv rdXavra is an accusative of measure, showing the 
 amount of the exaction. In other words, the former of the 
 two accusatives marks to what persons definitely the action 
 in Inpuj^av extended, jhe latter to what amount it reached.- 
 (See Kuhn. Ausf. Qr?! 561.) 
 
 e. Two accusatives are used also with verbs signifying 
 'to teach,' 'to put in mind,' Jcc, as, deddaxav, natdeuav, 
 iva/uftu^tnetv, Imofitfonjaxeev, the two latter, however, more 
 commonly having the genitive of the thing of which a 
 person is put in mind. E.g. Eurip. Hippol. 254, noUA 
 iiddaxu fap fi' 6 jtoiu^ fieoroc, ' for a long life teaches me many 
 things ;' that is, • teaches many things (properly, to the extent 
 of many things) ... as regards me, as far as I am con- 
 cerned.' Herod, vi. 140, dva/ufa/^axwv aflaz rb ^pijov^ptw, 
 'reminding them of the oracle;' that is, 'aa regards them, 
 as far as they are concerned, . . . putting in mind . . . with 
 regard to the oracle;' both accusatives, in this example, 
 
 DOUBLR AOCnSATIVB. 
 
 133 
 
 having the sense of ' as regards.' It may be said, in fact, 
 of both accusative cases, as well after dtSdaxuv as after 
 ivafufiu^axeiv, that they are introduced to mark the limits 
 within which the action of the verb is to be taken. The 
 accusative of the thing taught, or of which one is put in 
 mind, is added to the verb to point out with regard to what 
 particular object its action is affirmed; rtoUa dtSdaxse, 
 'teaches, or gives instruction, is an instructor, "... as 
 regards, to the extent of, many things;' dvafttfivjffxtou rd 
 Xptjovjptov, 'putting in mind ... as regards the oracle, 
 to the extent of the oracle.' The accusative of the person 
 is added to the verb, thus qualified as to the extent of its 
 action, to show that it is to be understood as reaching only 
 to a definite personal object ; noXXa dtddaxu fis, ' teaches many 
 things ... as regards me, as fiir as I am concerned;' dva- 
 ptftuijaxwv aipiaz rb ^pijor^peov, 'putting in mind of the oracle 
 ... as regards thcni, as far as they were concerned ;' that 
 is, the putting in mind of the oracle is to be understood as 
 embracingUiem, and not others. (For the example, see 
 Kuhn. A.Tfr. § 561, e.) 
 
 /. Again : two accusatives are used with verbs signifying 
 'to divide,' 'to distribute,' the one denoting the object 
 divided or distributed, and the other the parts into which 
 it is distributed. E.g. Herod, vii. 121, rpeci; ftolpac 6 Eipzrjz 
 doffd/ievoi; ndvra top ne^bu azparbv, 'Xerxes having divided 
 the whole army of infantry into three parts.' For practical 
 convenience alone, the accusative that marks the thing 
 divided, ndvra rbv ne^bv orparbv, 'the whole army of 
 infantry,' may be regarded as the accusative of the direct 
 object. It is really the accusative used in the sense of ' as 
 regards;' that is, it points out the object as to which alone 
 the division is affirmed; 'having made a division ... as 
 regards the whole army of infantry.' The accusative 
 denoting the number of parts into which an object is 
 divided is of the same nature essentially, differing in so far 
 only as it expresses, not so much the object with regard to 
 which an action is affirmed as the measure of the extent to 
 which it goes, giving thus the limit up to which the dividing 
 reaches; 'he made a division of (as regards) the whole army 
 
134 
 
 BIQNIFICATION Or THE OASES. 
 
 of infantry . . . into three parte ;' that is, ' up to, as far as, 
 three parts.' Xen. Cyr. vii. 6, 13, A Kupof rb arpdreufia 
 xariveiftt dtoiaca /tiprj, 'Cyrus distributed his army into 
 twelve parts;' that is, « Cyrus made a distribution . . . 
 as regards his army . . . (that reached) up to, as far as, 
 twelve parts.' (For the examples, see Kiihn. Ausf. Gr. 
 § 661, f.) 
 
 The preposition ei( is sometimes introduced before the 
 accusative that denotes the number of parts into which an 
 object is divided : e.g. Herod, iv. 148, a<pia(: airouf ^c 8f 
 poipai; SieUov, ' they divided themselves into six parts.' In 
 such cases, however, the accusative retains its proper sig- 
 nification, as above set forth, and the only question is as 
 to the office of the preposition. (See Klihn. A. Qr. ib, 
 Anm. 2.) 
 
 g. Two accusatives are used with verbs signifying ' to take 
 away," 'to deprive,' 'to plunder;' as, dipaipuadat, orepetv, 
 dnooTepeiv, auHuv, &c. E.g. II. i. 182, &f ip.' Aipaipuru Xpuaijida 
 0di^o(: 'AkoXXiov, ' since Phoebus Apollo takes away from me 
 the daughter of Chryses.' (See Kiihn. A. Gr. § 561, g.) 
 The one of these accusatives denotes the object taken away, 
 the other the person from whom it is taken. The former, 
 for convenience merely in practical use, may be regarded 
 as the direct object of the verb's action ; properly speaking, 
 it marks the limits within which its action is to be under- 
 stood as confined ; ' Phoebus Apollo takes away ... as far 
 as goes the daughter of Chryses.' The latter accusative, or 
 that introducing the name of the object from which a thing 
 is taken away, is essentially of the same nature, being used 
 to show the person with regard to whom alone the action 
 of taking away is affirmed; that is, to mark how far it 
 reaches, or within what limits it is to be considered as 
 restricted; 'Phoebus Apollo takes away the daughter of 
 Chryses from me;' properly, 'as regards me," I being the 
 object as to whom alone the taking away is affirmed. 
 Xen. Cyr. iv. 6, 4, rbv povov pot xai tpihv naida Aipe'dero rijv 
 ^uffiv, ' he took away his life from ray only and beloved 
 child.' 
 With axtptiv and dnomepeiv, that of which a person is 
 
 OODBLE ACOUSATIVE. 
 
 135 
 
 deprived is also expressed by the genitive case. But this 
 use of the genitive case admits of easy explanation accord- 
 ing to the doctrine of that case, and does not affiact the 
 above view of the meaning of the accusative, when the 
 latter is used. It rather confirms it, in so far, at least, 
 as it goes to show that the above verbs are not followed 
 by the accusative of the direct object. (See Kiihn. ib. 
 Anm. 8.) 
 
 h. Two accusatives are used with verbs signifying 'to 
 hide,' ' to conceal,' as, xpinTeiv, xeu&etv, the one to denote the 
 thing concealed, the other the person from whom it is 
 hidden or concealed. E.g. Eurip. Hippol. 912-13, ou ft^v 
 ipiXooz ye, xdu paUov 5 fiXouc, \ xpimav dixatov adc, icdrep, 
 duaitpaSiiK, 'indeed, it is not right, father, that you should 
 conceal your misfortunes from friends at least, and more 
 than friends.' (See Kiihn. Ausf. Qr. § 561, h.) The accusar 
 tive of the thing hidden may be regarded, practically at 
 least, as the direct object, and the accusative of the person 
 from whom it is hidden is employed in the sense of ' as to,' 
 'as regaads*;' that is, marks the personal object with regard 
 to whom alone the act of hiding is affirmed. Thus, in the 
 above example, the sense is, ' it is not right to conceal your 
 misfortunes ... as regards your friends,' whatever may be 
 true of the propriety of concealing them from others. 
 
 i. Two accusatives are used, also, with verbs signifying 
 'to persuade,' • to incite,' 'to challenge,' 'to compel,' &c., as, 
 j:et3etu, inorpuvetv, inalpeiv, npoxaXeiaSat, dvapidf^etv, &c., the 
 one marking that which is the subject of persuasion, &c. 
 or that to which one is persuaded, &c., the other the person 
 who is persuaded, &c. E.g. Soph. CEd. Col. 797, dXX' dtSa 
 ydp as TWJra pyj neidaiv, idt, ' but go, for I know that I do not 
 persuade you of this.' (See Kiihn. Ausf. Gr. § 561, i.) Here, 
 properly speaking, both accusatives are employed to denote 
 the precise objects with regard to which the action of the 
 verb is affirmed, or to show how far it reaches. Thus, in 
 the example just cited, dlX olda ydp at raura pyj j:et&iov, i9t, 
 the sense is, ' but go, for I know that ... as regards you. 
 so far as concerns you, ... I do not persuade (do not have 
 credence) ... as regards, touching, these things.' Eurip. Or. 
 
136 
 
 SIONinOAIION OF TBB OASES. 
 
 279, AoSitji Si /jtififOfiae, | Sarti; /i iTrdpac Ipyov dvoaiowrarov, \ 
 ro<c fiAv iJtjoez ijVfpavt, rotc S Ipj-otatv ou, ' bnt I blame Loxias, 
 who, having urged me on to the most impious deed, gave me 
 delight in word and not in deed,' that is, 'who having 
 urged me on ... as regards the most impious deed.' 
 Here, taking inaipetv in its most obvious sense, the accusa- 
 tive of the person may be regarded as the direct object, and 
 the accusative, denoting that to which he is incited, is used 
 in the sense of 'as to,' 'as regards,' 'touching,' or marks 
 the object to which the action of the verb is represented as 
 being limited. Plat. Rep. v. p. 473, a, touto /ikv dij //^ dv&f- 
 xa(^i lis, ' as regards this, then, do not compel me,' Here, 
 practically speaking, the accusative of the person may be 
 considered as the direct object of the verb's action ; but, in 
 fact, AvaptAZiiv may possibly have the proper sense of causing 
 dvdj-xij, or making a necessity, and then the accusative of 
 the person would mean ' as regards,' ' as far as concerns.' 
 Either way, the accusative touto will have the sense of ' aa 
 to,' ' as regards.' 
 
 The prepositions tic and ini are sometimes added to the 
 accusative denoting that to which one is persuaded, incited, 
 &C. : e.g. Thuc. iv. 19, Aaxidatfjobveot di bfiai; TrpoxaXouvTOi elc 
 mtovSdc, 'the Lacedaemonians invite you to a truce.' (See 
 EUhn. Ausf. Gr. ib. Anm. 4.) In such cases, the accusative 
 has the oflSce of confining the verb's action, as qualified by 
 the prepositions, to a definite object, or has the sense of 'as 
 to,' ' as regards ;' ' the Lacedicmonians invite you in . . . 
 as regards a truce, as far as a truce goes.' 
 
 So likewise, when the passive or middle, verb is employed, 
 and the person becomes its subject, the accusative of that to 
 which one is persuaded, &c. is plainly used in the sense of 
 'as to:' e.g. SiSdmofuu /louatxijv, 'I have myself taught,' or 
 'I am taught music,' that is, 'I am taught ... as regards 
 music, as far as music goes.' (See Eiihn. Ausf. Qr. Anm. 5.) 
 
 k. Again, two accusatives are used with verbs signifying 
 ' to put on,' ' to put off,' as, ivduetv, ixdustu, dfifeeuwvae, mpi^dX- 
 ieiu, one to mark the thing put on or off, the other the 
 person on or off whom a thing is put. E.g. Xen. Cyrop. i. 
 8, 17, 7ia7i: piyaz fuxpbv i^av j[nwva, hepov naTda ptxpbv piyav 
 
 DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 137 
 
 ' 
 
 I 
 
 t^ouTa ^iTiova, ixSuoaz aMv, riv piv kaUTOu ixeivov ijn^itae t6v 
 Si ixeivou abrbz iviSu, -' a large boy with a small coat, stripping 
 off the coat from a small boy that had a large one, put on 
 him his own coat, and himself put on the small boy's coat.' 
 The word iuSutiv properly means 'to go into,' and 'to cause 
 to go into,' and ixduetv, ' to go out of,' and ' to cause to go out 
 of,' being employed, just as xaTaSwat is, both transitively 
 and intransitively. (See Kiihn. Ausf. Qr. § 562, and Passow's 
 Lex. s. V.) The accusative of the thing attends these verbs 
 to show the object with regard to which their action is 
 affirmed, so that ixduaac aurbv rbu j(iT&va properly means 
 'having caused him to go out ... as regards his coat, as 
 far as his coat was concerned.' The accusative of the person 
 is introduced to show in regard to whom the action of the 
 verb thus qualified is set forth as occurring, or to whom it is 
 to be understood as confined ; so that ixSoaac uutSv t6v j^rrwva 
 properly means 'having ... as regards him . . . caused 
 the going out of or putting off ... as far as his coat was 
 concerned.' 
 
 I. Among the instances of the use of two accusatives 
 with verbs, although scarcely deserving to be thus classed, is 
 cited the employment of two accusatives with acTeitr^ou, ' to 
 feed upon,' where one accusative marks that on which any 
 thing feeds, and the other the time or season during which 
 it so feeds. E.g. Herod, i. 202, aniovTot piv ji/faf rb ^epoc 
 ipuaaovzBZ navToiaz' xapnohz di aerieadou tijv ■j^eipapiuiju, 'in the 
 summer they feed on roots, digging up all kinds of them ; 
 in the winter they feed on fruits.' (See Kuhn. Ausf. Qr. § 
 562,' c.) The accusatives Tb dipoz, riyv ^etpapiv^v, are used in 
 the sense of 'as to,' 'as regards,' marking the times or 
 seasons to which the act of feeding is to bo understood as 
 restricted; 'they feed ... as regards the summer, as re- 
 gards the winter,' that is, ' in or during the summer, in or 
 during the winter season.' The accusative cases />eZac and 
 xapnouc follow on atTiouToe in nearly the same sense. In 
 the expression jSt'^oc oniovTat, ' they feed on roots,' aaiovTou 
 really means 'they are fed,' or 'they feed themselves,' and 
 jS/^oc shows in what extent this act of being fed or of feed- 
 ing themselves is to he taken, to what object among many 
 
138 
 
 BIONaiaATION' OF THE OASES. 
 
 it reaches; that is, the heing fed or feeding themselves is to 
 be understood as affirmed only ' so far as roots are concerned.' 
 Jast as the accosative is used with xiveeu, ' to drink,' to 
 show that the drinking is to be considered as reaching to or 
 embracing only the object named by a noun in that case ; 
 BO that nivetv 5dwp, Ho drink water,' means that the drinking 
 extends only to water, or embraces this alone. 
 
 m. Two accusatives, both the names of things, are found 
 employed with a number of verba, mostly compounds. E.g. 
 Herod, i. 163, iSiiou aipi ■j[fnjftaTa reTj^oc nepe^aXiaSat ttjv itdXtVf 
 < he gave them money to surround their city with a wall.' 
 (See Xiihn. § 563.) Here the accusative reFj^oc might seem, 
 at the first view, to be the immediate object of TceptfiaXio&at, 
 the sciiBe being, apparently, ' to cast a wall round about.' 
 More accurately examined, however, nept^aXiadux has the 
 sense of 'casting about one's self, or 'causing to be cast 
 about,' or ' surrounding one's self;' and the accusative Tei-j(pz 
 is added to show the extent in which the action of rcept^a- 
 Xiadat is to be taken, or, which is the same thing in sub- 
 stance, with regard to what object definitely it is to be 
 understood; so that the meaning of Tstj^oi; itepi^aXia&at is 
 'to cast about themselves,' or 'to cause to be cast about . . . 
 as far as a wall goes ;' that is, ' the surrounding themselves,' 
 or ' causing to be cast round about,' is to be understood as 
 extending only to ru-j[iK, ' a wall,' and not to any other ob- 
 ject. The accusative reTjioz, if this explanation be true, is 
 used with Tcepi^aXiadai in the same way that /Se'C"? and 
 xapjtouz are employed with oniovrat, as seen in the imme- 
 diately preceding paragraph, and that u8atp is added to 
 nivuv. The accusative i:6hv is introduced with nept^aXiadat 
 ru-jioz to mark, in the same way, the extent in which this 
 proposition is to be taken ; 'to cast a wall round about . . . 
 as regards their city, as far as their city was concerned.' 
 Both accusatives, therefore, present only varieties of the 
 same sense, marking the limit up to which an action or 
 statement reaches. So Herod, iv. 75, rb xaTa(Ki)j[6psvov roiko 
 Tza^h ibv naraacXdaaovrat Tidti t6 ffio/ia, 'this that is rubbed 
 to pieces, or pounded, being thick, they daub over the 
 whole body ;' that is, ' they daub themselves ... as far as 
 
 AconsATivs: suhhart. 
 
 189 
 
 goes the whole body,' and their daubing themselves em- 
 braces or extends to this material alone that is pounded. 
 Thuc. iii. 81, bizepeveYxivrez rhv Aeuxadiatu ta^/xov r<lf vaui 
 . . . Anoxo/Ml^ovrat, 'having transported their ships over 
 the Lcucadian isthmus, they returned home;' that is, 
 'having carried their ships over ... as regards the Leu- 
 cadian isthmus, as far as the Leucadian isthmus is con- 
 cerned.' 
 
 n. The two accusatives which occur in the construction 
 called technically the oyi^pa xa9' 5Xov xai pipoz, met with 
 chiefly in epic, but also in dramatic poetry, seldom in prose, 
 admit of easy explanation. E.g. II. xi. 240, rbv d' dope jrA^f ' 
 uhikva, Xuae 8i yuia, ' him he struck with his sword on the 
 neck, and unstrung his limbs,' that is, ' he struck him with 
 his sword ... as regards his neck, as far as his neck went.' 
 The accusative t6v is the direct object of nX^^e, or the object 
 actually reached by its action of striking ; and, so far, the 
 statement is, that ' he struck him with his sword ;' but the 
 accusative aiifiva being added limits the declaration that 
 he struck him to the particular part of the body which it 
 names. So that the sense is, ' he struck him ... as far as 
 the neck went.' Of course ahfiva is, properly speaking, an 
 accusative of measure, showing how far an action or state- 
 ment is to be uduiitlcJ as true. Soph. (Ed. Col. 113, xai ai> 
 p' i^ bdaiu xbda xpitipov, ' and do you hide my steps out of the 
 road ;' that is, ' hide mo ... as regards my steps.' (See, 
 for the examples, Kuhn. A. Q. § 564.) 
 
 Summary, 
 6. In the preceding examination of the uses of the accu- 
 tive case,it has been seen to have three meanings: namely, 
 first, that in which it marks the object actually reached by 
 an action or motion ; secondly, that in which it gives the 
 , actual measure or extent of an action or motion, either as 
 to time or space; and, thirdly, that in which it denotes 
 the extent in which an action, state, or proposition is 
 to be taken, or its compass, the limits within which it 
 is to be understood as confined, answering to the English 
 
140 
 
 SIQNIFICATION OF THE CASES. 
 
 phrases 'as to,' 'as regards,' 'as fiir as is concerned,' 
 ' touching.' 
 
 But these meanings are nearly related, and have one 
 common origin. If the first of them he admitted, the second 
 is an immediate offspring of it, the measure or extent of an 
 action or motion being marked by the object or point which 
 it reaches. And the third is but a variety of the second, 
 the difference being, that the former gives the measure or 
 extent of an action or motion in denominations of measure 
 applicable to time and space ; while the latter denotes the 
 measure or extent of an action, state, or proposition, by 
 naming a definite object to which it is to be restricted, or 
 bisyond \yliieh it is not affirmed. So that the primary sense 
 of the accusative, according to this view, is to mark the 
 object reached by an action or motion ; and its secondary 
 sense to denote (a) the measure or extent of action or mo- 
 tion, and (b) the limits within which any expression is to 
 be understood as confined, and this by naming a pailicular 
 object to which alone among many possible ones it extends, 
 or which it embraces. 
 
 Again, admitting the preceding view, and considering 
 that the object actually reached by an action or motion is 
 only another instance of setting bounds to the extent in 
 which any expressed idea is to be taken ; that when it is 
 said, Xen. Cyrop. i. 3, 17, ifd inauaev & dtSdaxaXoz, 'the 
 master beat me,' the accusative ijU shows that ' the beat- 
 ing' is ailirmcd of thia object alone or to the exclusion of 
 all others that might possibly be embraced ; and that the 
 other meanings of this case, whether that of the specific 
 measure of extent, or that of the more general designation 
 of the limits within which any term or proposition is to be 
 confined, arc essentially the same ; the accusative case may 
 be said to have for its original meaning the marking the 
 object to which exclusively an action, motion, state, term, 
 or proposition, is restricted, of which it is affirmed to the 
 exclusion of all other objects. And hence it marks (a) an 
 object with regard to which exclusively an action or mo- 
 tion is affirmed, which alone it reaches; the accusative 
 
 acoubativk: summary. 
 
 141 
 
 being used, not because the action or motion reaches the 
 object, but because it reaches it and not another; (6) the 
 actual measure of an action or motion ; that is, introduces 
 some expression of measure or extent, to which the action, 
 motion, or state is restricted ; (c) in a more general way, 
 the limits within which any term or proposition is to be 
 taken, or the exact compass of its meaning. 
 
142 
 
 or THB BBVKBAL PBBP0SITI0N8. 
 
 'Afia. 
 
 143 
 
 CHAPTER m. 
 
 07 THE 8BVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 'Afia, ' at the same time with,' * together with,' has the same 
 radical with the English same, the German sammt, zn-sammen, 
 the Gothic sarm, the Sanskrit prefix sa-, sum-, ' together 
 with,' and with the Persian hemSn, idem, • the same,' and ita 
 kindred prefix hem-, all these having not only an obvious 
 agreement in form, but also in sense. This bcubc is the 
 coincidence of one thing with another, either absolutely 
 and so as to give the notion of identity, as expressed by our 
 word 'same,' or in point of time merely, as conveyed by 
 &/ta, ' at the same time with.' If, with Pott, this radical ift 
 be considered the same with scm in semel, ' once,' and with & 
 in Araf, 'once,' and Snaur, 'all at once or together,' which is 
 very probable, then the idea of 'oneness' contained in these 
 forms will be the primary one, and the sense of ' at the same 
 time with,' ' together with,' which dfia has, may be regarded 
 as derivative from this. The notion of 'at the same time 
 with,' that is, of the occurring of one action at the same 
 time with another, really embraces that of ' oneness ;' only 
 it is used relatively, and applied only in a certain point of 
 view, namely, to express oneness with another object in 
 regard to time. So that the primary sense of d/jta, and of 
 the related forms, will be that of ' oneness ;' and from this 
 is obtained that of 'sameness' or identity, that is, of 'one- 
 ness with another;' and the peculiar application of this which 
 dfia presents, namely, 'oneness with another in regard to 
 the point of time,' ' at the same time with.' 
 
 If i/i in 5fto><;, 'yet notwithstanding,' 5ftoio:, 'like,' and 
 Sim in similis, ' like,' be the same or a kindred radical with 
 i, &fi, which would be allowable, so far as the form is con- 
 
 u 
 
 I 
 
 ■'■■■ 
 
 ^ i 
 
 ■"- 
 
 cerned, the notion of ' likeness' belonging to 6/t must be in 
 some way connected with that of oneness and identity con- 
 tained in &/1, sem, &. But this would seem to be difficult, 
 if not impossible. (See Pott Etym. Forsch. i. p. 128.) 
 
 The author just referred to regards the Polish s or z, 
 which is prefixed as the sign of the instrumentalis, and is 
 equivalent to the English 'with,' as being the same with 
 k, &ft, and believes that the same radical is found in the 
 Latin sem-per, * always,' compounded, according to Bopp, of 
 sem, 'conjoined,' what is 'united' (vereinten), and hence 
 ' totality' (gamm), and per, ' through.' So that the meaning 
 shall be 'throughout the whole,' or 'all through.' But, 
 with regard to the former of these etymologies, admitting 
 its possibility, so far as the form is concerned, it is by no 
 means obvious to see bow the notions of ' oneness,' ' same- 
 ness,' ' at the same time with,' have any thing iu common 
 with the notion of the instrument. At the least, it needed 
 explanation, which has not been given. That it is not 
 wholly improbable might be inferred from the use of the 
 English ' with' both to express conjunction and to mark the 
 instrument; as, 'he did it with his hand,' 'he walks with a 
 friend.' And, again, from the use of the German mit in 
 the sense of community, and as the sign of the instrument, 
 as mitgeken, ' to go with,' mit den H&nden arbeiien, ' to work 
 with the hands.' From such facts it would appear that the 
 mind passed from the idea of conjunction, or rather of com- 
 munity, to that of the instrument, this being regarded as 
 conjoined with the agent in any action. And so it might 
 be that it passed from the notion of 'oneness,' or from the 
 secondary or applied sense of ' at the same time with,' to 
 that of the instrument. Yet, both as to the matter of the 
 form, and as to that of the sense, one may be permitted to 
 entertain doubts of the connection of &, &/t, sem, with the 
 Polish a or z, the sign of the inntrumcnt. And, with regard 
 to ierttp-ir, if il b* ':otm^>afA'A m lUti>\> tkixy^Mk*, the iununt 
 pan *Wi carir.01 well fcigiiify ' U>ulity,' which ut hardly a pon- 
 Bible meaning of ' onencbB,' but would ratherhave tlio HenH« of 
 ♦ at the sauio time with,' which, with per, ' quite," ' thoroughly,' 
 might perhaps furnish the meaning of 'always.' Thus, 
 
144 
 
 OF THB 8BTBSAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 temper m deorum anupeetu versamur, ' we are ever in the eight 
 of the gods,' would mean, ' we are in the sight of the gods, 
 not merely and absolately, but so that this condition ia ' 
 altogether (per) coincident with, at the same time with, 
 accompanying (sem) us ;' that is, the state of being in the 
 sight of the gods and our life are coincident, and the one 
 may properly be said to be 'always' present or existing 
 with regard to the other. 
 
 Pott (Etym. Forsch. i. pM28-30) is doubtful whether th« 
 radical in dpa ought to be considered the same with thei'** 
 Sanskrit sa, Gothic sa, Greek 6, :}, (English he, she ;) and it 
 would hardly be appropriate to enter upon the question here, . 
 even if it admitted of a satisfactory solution. It may be 
 worth while to remark merely that the Latin word idem, 
 •the same,' very clearly derives this sense from the demon- 
 strative idea, and that the Greek 6 aMc, ' the same,' and ' 
 ouroc, 'self,' obtain their meaning of sclfsamencss and 
 identity from the same demonstrative idea, the pointing to. 
 a thing being, under certain conditions, an adequate > 
 means of expressing that it is the selfsame or identical with ■ 
 an object already named. So that no serious objection to 
 considering dpa aa having the same radical with the demon* 
 strative could arise from the sense which they respectively 
 bear, but only from the form, and from the absence of' 
 historical proofs. '' 
 
 Significations of dfia. 
 
 1. 'At the same time with.' Looking to its actual use in 
 the language, dim has for its proper office the marking that 
 an action coincides with another in point of time, and is in 
 80 far identical with it. Its meaning is expressed in English 
 by ' at the same time with.' E.g. Xen. Anab. ii. 8, 1, dfia 
 ijii<f> dvariiXovTe xijpuxa^ Inefi^e Kept <n:ov8wv, 'at sunrise ha 
 sent heralds,' the sending heralds concurring, in regard to 
 to the time, with the rising of the sun. 
 
 2. 'With,' ' together with,' ' equally with.' The sense of 
 one thing accompanying another, which also dpa has, 
 expressed in English by ' with,' ' together with,' and that of 
 'equally with,' are only slightly different. Thus, in the ex- 
 pression ipa Tivi ineadat, 'to follow with a person,' the 
 
 4 
 
 ; 
 
 "Apa. 
 
 145 
 
 •V, :^ 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 1. 
 
 then 
 
 proper sense is that of a person following another so as to 
 ^oncur w.th him in his progress, to be coincident in point 
 of time and space. And so in Hom. Od. i. 9ft-8, nidda \ 
 Tdfu. fipou . I df,a nvoqi^dvipoto, 'which bore her like, m 
 swiftly as, the blasts of the wind,' the same sense lies at Ihe 
 bottom. Thp swiftness of the wings of the goddess is made 
 equal with that of the winds by representing them as being 
 topther with,' and therefore as accompanying and keeping 
 pace with them. . • ^ ° 
 
 Summary of the meanings of dpa. 
 'At the same time with.' 
 'Together with,' 'with.' 
 'Equally with.' 
 
 Use of dpa as an adverb, and with its case. 
 'Aim is sometimes employed without a noun, and is 
 called an adverb E.g. II. i, 417, dpa Mpopo, .ai 
 ^ Kopoz, 'at the same time short-lived and sorrowful ' In 
 
 i ' J.^^^^.^^t^ctio" ^t^ " ««', ' as soon as,' ' the moment 
 
 . that, (see Passow's Lex. s. v.,) dpa really retains its usual 
 sense. E.g. Demosth. 50, 18, 5;.a d*,,i„;,i. „ ,«i r/«^W„vo„, 
 . m^tavape., 'so soon as we heard of it, we appointed trier- 
 archs, or, 'we no sooner heard of it than we appointed 
 tnerarchs, or, 'the moment we heard of it, we appointed 
 trierarchs ' Properly, the sense is, ' we both heard of it and 
 appointed tnerarchs at the same time.' and there is conveyed 
 the idea of an action following upon aijother so immediately 
 that It may be represented as occurring simultaneously with 
 it, or be referred to the same time. 
 
 2. But dpa is used also with a noun in the dative case 
 and 19 then called a preposition; as, dp' i^,,kpq. di:m,v, 'he 
 departed at dawn,' that is, 'he departed at the same time 
 with (the coming of) day (light).' "AfUL with the dative case 
 ot a noun has the same signification as when used without 
 a case, or adverbially, and presents the variety of signifi- 
 cations attributed to it above when speaking generally of its 
 meanings. Thus: 
 
 a. 'At the same time with,' ' together with,' 'with.' It 
 has the sense of 'at the same time with," together with-' 
 
 10 
 
146 
 
 OF THB SSyERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 e.g. II. xviii. 136,f^5(^v y^P veujuu iji' ijeiitf} dviovn, 'for I 
 depart in the morning with, at the same time with, the 
 rising sun;' Herod, iii. 86, ift i^/Jtipjj 3h dtatpwaxouaig 61 
 ?? xara mvedijxai'ro itapr^aav ini r<ov tnntov, « with the dawning 
 of the day the six came on their horses ;' Xon. Anab. i. 7, 2, 
 dfM ry imouajj '^jf^ip^ ahr6fioXoe . . . ^xovrez drnj^reXXov nepi riyc 
 PaaiHio; arpauuz, ' with the dawn of the next day deserters 
 arrived and reported,' 
 
 b. * Together with,' 'with.' Slightly differing from the 
 above proper sense of ipa is that of ' together with,' 'with,' 
 where the coincidence in point of time, although really 
 included, is not so distinctly seen : e.g. in such phrases as 
 d/ia uvt enea&ou, iXdsiv, dyetv, nipmav, 'to follow, to come, to 
 lead, to send along with, or together with, a person;' that is,- 
 properly, ' to follow, &c. at the same time with.' It is this, , 
 in fact, that makes the difference between dpa and auu, the -• 
 former meaning ' at the same time with,' the latter ' con- 
 jointly with,' ' in association with.' 
 
 c. 'Equally with,' 'as soon, as rapidly, &c. as.' "Apa has,' 
 really the same sense of ' together with,' ' at the same time 
 with,' although differently rendered in English, in such 
 examples as Od. i. 06-8, 8k einoua' (mb noaaiv idrjaaro xtiXa 
 niStXa, | dp^pdaca, j^puaeta, rd ptv tpipov ^ pev lip' liyp'^v, | ij8' 
 in' dTzeipuua yaTav, dpa itvot^z duipoto, 'which bore her 
 together with,' that is, ' at the same pace with, as rapidly 
 as, the blasts of the wind.' 
 
 3. "Apa is used mth the dative case alone. And this case 
 is dependent for its use upon the signification of the prepo- 
 sition itself; that is, the dative follows upon the notion of 
 coincidence conveyed by dpa, in the same way tliat it does 
 upon the sense of likeness, equality, identity, opposition, 
 iic., expressed by Spoio^, taoz, b abrbz, ivaaiuoz. 
 
 TABLE or TOE SIONinClTIONS AND USE OF <«ia 'VTITU ITS CASE. 
 
 Significationi of S^u. 
 
 1. ■ At tbc Bsmo time with.' 
 
 2. • Together with,' 'with.' 
 8. ' Eiiuall; nitli.' 
 
 Dative: 'to," for.' 
 
 * At the same time with.' 
 
 * At the moment of,' ■ as soon as,' ' no sooner than.' 
 'Together with,' 'with.' 
 ■ Equally with,' ■ as rapidly as,' &o. 
 
 <.'■ 
 
 \t 
 
 ^^r 
 
 SIGNIFICATIONS OP 'Ap<pi. 
 'Apfi. 
 
 147 
 
 'Apfi has the same radical that is found in Ap(pa>, in the 
 Latin ambo, and the inseparable particle amb in anMre, &c., 
 m the old Qeiinan umpi, and the German um, the Sanskrit 
 ubha, (Dual, ublmi,) in the I'olish oba, 'both,' and preposition 
 0, 'about,' and possibly also in the Gothic ba, the German 
 beide, and the English both. (See Liddell and Scott's Lex.) 
 
 Significations of dpupi. 
 
 1. 'On both sides.' The primary signification of dp^i, 
 considering it to have these etymological connections, would 
 be 'on both sides,' a sense which it actually has in some 
 compounds, as, dp^iaXoz, 'having the sea on both sides,' 
 ^ dpipi^ioz, « having a double life,' dfiipi^oiia, ' the state of being 
 attacked on both sides,' dp<ptSs^io<:, 'ambidexter,' 'being 
 right-handed on both sides,' dpfinuXoi;, 'having double 
 gates,' 
 
 2. 'About,' 'around.' 'Ap^l occurs in the local sense of 
 'about,'' around;' and this might easily spring from the 
 primary sense, that which is on both sides of an object 
 being, with a little license, regarded as completely investing 
 it. E.g. II. i, 37, 8c Xpuarju dpipt^ifiijxaz, 'who dost defend 
 Chrysa,' that is, 'who goest about,' and so 'dost defend 
 Chrysa.' So also in the compound dpfUwupt, 'I clothe,' 
 'cover with garments roundabout.' In this sense d/Mpi is 
 scarcely distinguishable from nepi, ' around,' ' round about,' 
 although the primary sense of the two is so different, Ilspi, 
 however, is more commonly employed in this meaning. In 
 the signification of 'about,' 'around,' dptpi is met with not 
 only in compounds, as, dfjupe^atptoz, ' surrounding the altar,' 
 dpftxaXuTtzetv, ' to cover all round,' but also in conjunction 
 with cases ; as, Herod, viii. 104, dpfi raiiriyc r^C i:6XtO(:, ' round 
 about this city,' 
 
 3. 'AH about,' ' quite about,' ' quite.' A merely intensive 
 form of the sense just mentioned is that in which dpyi has 
 the force of ' all about,' ' quite about,' ' quite :' e.g. d/Mfi- 
 Ppoxoc, 'thoroughly wet,' dptpidaaui, 'quite ahaggy,' dp^e- 
 eXcxToi:, ' turned all round,' Thus, Od, xii, 74, vsfiX^ lie /uv 
 
148 
 
 or TBI BIVBRAL PBEPOSITIONS. 
 
 dfuptpip>iuv, 'and a cloud envelops it,' that is, 'goes all 
 around it' 
 
 4. 'Afifi sometimes occurs in the sense of ' about, * near,' 
 denoting, as we often do by the term ' about,' a less exact 
 or merely general and approximate expression of the 
 position of an object, or of its state as to number and time. 
 Thus, (a) in regard to position in space : e.g. II. ii. 4G1-2, 'Aaltft 
 ivhtftmve, Kabarplou dfifi fiie&pa, \ tv&a xal iu9a nouovrat, 'fly 
 here and there about the streams of Cayster;' II. xi. 705-6, 
 d/tfi Sk dart) \ Ipio/tev \pi ^edi^, ' we sacrificed to the gods 
 about the city,' properly, 'round about, as regards the city,' 
 it being indicated that it is not designed to mark with exact- 
 ness the place at which the sacrifice was performed. (6.) In 
 regard to time and number : e.g. Xen. Anab. i. 2, 9, 7re>l- 
 Taarai 8k [iyivovTo) dptpt rooc dtax'^ou^, ' there were about two 
 thousand peltastae ;' Id. Anab. i. 10, 17, xal dtpixvoTivrat dfupi 
 dipmavov ini roc axijvdi, ' and they reached their tents about 
 dusk.' 
 
 5. ' About,' ' of,' * concerning,' the Latin de. ^Afifi is . 
 employed also in the figurative sense of 'about,' 'of,' 'con- 
 cerning,' corresponding to the very common use of the 
 Latin de, and marking the object which an action concerns, 
 or to which it relates. E.g. Od. viii. 266-7, aurap b ipoppil^atv 
 dveftdX^STO xaXbv deidetv, | dfif' 'Apeo; ipekon^ro^ iOare^dvou r' 
 'Aippod'cTTfi, ' began to sing beautifully about the love of Ares 
 and Aphrodite;' Herod, iii. 32, dn<pi 8h rip dai/dnp aor^c 
 Afif . . . Xeyerat Aofof, 'about her death two stories are 
 told.' This meaning is, in fact, only another application 
 of that just above mentioned. When it said of the bard 
 Dcmodocus that he sang about or of the love of Ares and 
 A])hrodite, his song is represented as having a certain 
 relation to the love of Ares and Aphrodite, and it may be 
 said to be connected with it precisely in the same way that 
 the flying of the swans is with the streams of Cayster; only 
 the relation in the former case is a local, in the latter a 
 figurative one. 
 
 6. 'About,' in the sense of 'for,' 'on account of.' 'A/iyi 
 obtains, in some cases, a sense which is very like that otevsxa, 
 * on account of,' ' for,' and which is borne also by the English 
 
 '•1 
 
 'J/jfl. 149 
 
 'about' E.g. II. xvi. 823-5, in d' Sre ow dxditawa iia>» 
 i^tijaaToxdp/aj, | wr' opeoc xopa^oi fifya fpouiovre pdxeatfov, \ 
 niiwtoz dptp' dUpii:, 'fight about a small fountain,' that is, 
 'for a small fountain ;' II. iii. 69-70, aiirap Ift' iu pioatp xal 
 'Aprjiifdov MeviXaov \ ouftfidXer' dpf' 'EXivjj xal xr^paot naal 
 idXiodat, ' to fight about,' that is, ' for, Helen.' It is obvious, 
 upon a hasty examination even, that d/t^i has here the same 
 meaning, properly speaking, as in the preceding case, 
 namely, that of ' about,' ' concerning,' and that the sense of 
 'for,' or the denoting the object of an action, is suggested 
 by the circumstances in which the preposition is used ; just 
 as, in certain relations, the English word ' about' obtains the 
 sense of ' for.' 
 
 Summary of the meanings ofdpupL 
 
 1. ' On both sides." 
 
 2. a. Locally; 'about,' 'around.' 
 
 h. Intensively; 'all about,' 'quite about,' 'quite.' 
 
 c. Approximate statement; 'about,' 'near.' 
 
 d. Figuratively; 'about,' 'of,' 'concerning.' 
 
 e- " 'about,' 'for,' 'on account of.' 
 
 ^Apifi with cases of nouns. 
 'Afupi, having the significations above set forth, is used in 
 conjunction with the genitive, dative, ablative (locativus), 
 and accusative cases. 
 
 I. WITn THK aiNITITE. 
 
 "Apipi with the genitive occurs rarely in prose, but fre- 
 quently in poetry. 
 
 1. ' About' "Aiupi is used with the genitive in the local 
 sense of ' about :' e.g. Herod, viii. 104, imdv rdiot dpftxuoat 
 Kuat rdtat dpipi radrijc oixiouat rffi itbltoi; piUjj rt itrrbz xpovou 
 tataSai xaXenou, x.t.L, ' to the dwellers about' this city ;' pro- 
 perly, » to those who are dwellers about . . , with respect 
 to this city.' 
 
 2. ' About,' ' conttriiiiig,' • of,' the Latin dt. With the 
 genitive A/t^i is more commonly met with in the scnHC of 
 'about,' 'concerning,' 'of:' e.g. Od. viii. 266-7, aurap 6 
 ifoppij^atv dve^dXXiro xaXbv dsiSetv, \ dpup' 'Aptoz fMrrjToz iuart- 
 
150 
 
 OF THB SEVERAL PROPOSITIONS. 
 
 fdvou r' ^Afpoiki}:, ' he began to sing beautifully of (about) 
 the love of Ares and Aphrodite ;' Herod, vi. 131, dfift fiiv 
 tpiouK ■roiu pv^oT^patv rooaSka ifivero, ' concerning the de- 
 cision between the suitors, thus much occurred ;' ^sch. 
 Agam. 1044, «' tout' dvwrirof ac d/upi Ao^iou ; ' why did you 
 utter these exclamations about Loxias ?* Xcn. Cyrop. iii. 1^ 
 8, «V ««/»*«' i5»«C. ^f?. ^""^ "" ^ ^"^'^ dxouaiij^ TTfi d-jixpt ro~j 
 zarpdz, ' to hear the judgment concerning your father.' 
 
 3. 'About,' 'for:' e.g. II. xvi. 824-5, &t' Speoz xopoffjn 
 Ittfa tfpoviovre fidxeo&ov \ nlSaxoi: d/tf' dXiyrjc, < fight about, 
 for, a small fountain ;' ^sch. Agam. 62-6, nokudvofwz d/i<pl 
 juvatxoz I noXXd naXcuafiara . . | . . d^amv Aavaolat, ' going to 
 cause the Danai many struggles about, for, a woman of 
 many husbands.' 
 
 In all the above uses of diup't with the genitive, this case has 
 the sense of 'with respect to,' 'in the case of.' Thus, in 
 the example dddttv d/Mp' ' Apeoz (pd6TijT<K, ' to sing about the 
 love of Ares,' the genitive ^ eAinjroc shows that the expres- 
 sion dsideiv d/Jifi, 'to sing about or concerning,' is to be 
 understood of this object and no other; and in the example 
 Itiftedov niiaxoz dfup' dXlfijc, ' they fight about, for, a small 
 fountain,'the sense is, properly, 'they fight about . . . with 
 respect to a small fountain ;' that is, the genitive mVJoxoc 
 dKip}<: sets forth that the statement ftdxsa9ou d/ifi,' the fighting 
 about,' is to be considered as affirmed only with respect to 
 ' a small fountain.' 
 
 II. WITH THE DATITB. 
 
 1. 'About' 'Afifl is used with the dative in the local 
 sense of 'about:' e.g. II. xviii. Si3-4, Sk ein^u hdpom ixi- 
 Mkezo Sioz \4xMek \ d/ifi mpi ar^ou rpinoSa fiirav, * to place 
 a large kettle about the fire;' properly, 'to place a large 
 kettle about ... for the fire,' the dative mpi marking the 
 object to which as its final aim the 'placing the kettle 
 about' is referred. II. ii. 388-9, W/»««< /«v no r^Xufuov 
 d/ifl ar^decccu \ danido^ diupi^phv^Z, ' the band of thy pro- 
 tecting shield shall sweat about thy breast ;' ^sch. Again. 
 817-18, of pkv r«/> diupi ad>iiamv nmuoxoxtz \ dvUpiov xaatyuij- 
 Titiv, 'having fallen about the bodies of brothers.' 
 
 'A/ifi. 
 
 151 
 
 i 
 
 2. ' About,' ' of,' ' concerning.' ^Aftyl with the dative has 
 also the sense of ' about,' 'of,' ' concerning,' the Latin de: 
 e.g. Ilorod. iii. S2,d/xy>i Se rtp ^avdrtp alir^z di^bi; XiyeTat Xojroc, 
 'about, concerning, her death two stories are told;' Id. v. 
 19, d/tfi dirodif) rjj i/x^ ndaofiai roe, ' about, concerning, my 
 withdrawing I will obey you ;' Id. vi. 62, ou8eu ipo^/j9etz 
 dfitft TTj j-uvaixt, 'having no fear about his wife;' -dEsch. 
 Prom. 182, didta yap d/xtft aatz ri>;f<wc> 'for I am in fear con- 
 cerning your fortunes.' 
 
 3. 'About,' 'for,' 'on account of.' '///if / occurs also with 
 the dative in its sense of 'about,' 'for,' 'on account of:' 
 e.g. II. iii. 69-70, ahrdp Ifi iv jUaatfi xat 'ApTjl<ftXov MeviXaov 
 
 I aofi^dX^T dfup' 'F.XivTj xat xvj/iaat ituai ftdr/iodat, ' to fight for 
 Helen and all her substance ;' Inscr. cited by ^schin. 80, 16, 
 . . . l&tXijau I dpufi Suvoifft npdffMtn /mx^ov ix^iv, 'to have 
 toil for the common weal.' 
 
 In all these uses of dftft with the dative case, while the 
 force of the preposition is plainly discernible, there may be 
 more or less distinctly recognised in the case its common 
 signification of the object to be ultimately afiTected, that to 
 which an action or state is referred as being its final aim, 
 and for which it may bo s.iid to be or to be done. For its 
 use with d/juft, in the above and like examples, it may de- 
 pend either upon the preposition itself, which may be fol- 
 lowed by this case in virtue of its signification of ' about,' 
 'near,' just as tao;, 'equal,' oftoToz, 'like,' &c. are followed 
 by the dative, or upon the meaning of the whole phrase of 
 which d/ifc constitutes a part. It would seem to depend for 
 its use upon the meaning of the proposition itself, in the 
 first set of examples above given, where d/t^i has the local 
 BCiiHC of ' about ;' as in d/i^i nupi aTr^aat rpcmtda piyav ; and 
 BO ill the fcxaiiiplcH where it has the Hcnne of 'about,' * of,' 
 •couctrning;' an, dfUfi dzodi/j t^ i/if/ Tttiaofuii rot; althouKh, 
 from the very fact of the prbiiosiliun being employed in an 
 accommodated and less palpable sense, it is more difficult 
 here to see the just relation between the meaning of tho ■ 
 preposition and the proper office of the case. On the other 
 hand, it may be admitted as more probable that in other 
 examples, as in the third set above, where the preposition 
 
152 
 
 OF THB SBVBBAI. I>REP08ITI0NS. 
 
 baa the eense of 'aboat,' 'for,' 'on account of,' the dative 
 depends, not wholly on the preposition, but in part also on 
 the verb which d/v^t qualifies. Thus, in the example dL/upl 
 (uvdiae vpdyftam /tij^dov ^X""* ' ^ have toil for the common 
 weal,' the dative ^uvotat jipdYftaat depends upon the whole 
 phrase /tdx^ov t^etv dftfl, * to have toil for (about),' but 
 chiefly upon the preposition itself. 
 
 III. WITH THE ABLATiri (iNSTSDHaNTALIs). 
 
 In some examples dftfl occurs with the ablative of the 
 means or instrument (instrumentalis), the preposition re- 
 taining its proper sense of ' about,' and having no influence 
 upon the use of the case. E.g. II. i. 465, d/if' 6[itXdiai» 
 Inupau (bc. xpia), 'and pierced the flesh with spits round 
 about.' Here the efiect of the introduction of dfupi is to 
 show that the flesh, when pierced by the spits, was round 
 about them. Ilesiod. Op. et Di. 205, ij d' iXibv yvafmrdim 
 itenapftivrj djitp' bvhrftaat \ fiuptTO, ' she, pierced on both sides 
 by the crooked talons of Irex, wailed.' The examples of this 
 use of dfupi are by no means common ; and they admit of 
 satisfactory explanation only by considering the ablative as 
 marking the means or instrument, and dfupi as used ad- 
 verbially. 
 
 IV. WITH THE ACCDSATirS. 
 
 1. 'About,' in a local sense. ^Afifi is frequently used 
 ■with the accusative in the local sense of ' about,' the case 
 having the meaning of 'as regards,' 'as far as concerns.' 
 E.g. II. ii. 461-2, ^Aa'tif iu Xtifiwm, KaSiarpiou dfupi (>it9pa, | 
 tv9a xai Ivda itor&vrat dfoiXSfievat itTtpufcoaiv, ' they fly about 
 the streams of Cayster,' that is, ' they fly about ... as regards 
 the streams of Cayster.' II. i. 409, roof 8k xard npufjivai: re *al 
 dfup' dXa iXaat 'Aj[aiouz, ' and to drive the Achoii at the ships 
 and about the sea,' that is, 'about ... as regards the sea.' 11. 
 ii. 305-6, ^(titz 9' dfupl aepl xpijinjv hpouz xard fitoftouz | Ipdo/ieu 
 ddavdxotat reXr/iaaaz ixarSfjifiac, ' we ofiered to the gods per- 
 fect hecatombs at the sacred altars round {Tttpt) about {dfifl) 
 the fountain;' that is, 'about ... as regards the fountain.' 
 .^Bch. Prom. 415-16, . . . ol ya^ \ la^arov rimov d/iipl Mat&- 
 Tivlxouat MpmVf 'who occupy the most remote spot of earth 
 
 'Aftfl. 
 
 153 
 
 about lake Mseotis,' that is, 'about ... as far as lake 
 Maeotis is concerned.' Id. ib. 1030-1, . . . etc dvauj^ov 
 ftoXiiv I "/Udijv, xve<paiia r' dfupt Taprdpou ^d&ij, ' to come into 
 rayless Hades, and about the dark deeps of Tartarus.' .In 
 this last example, it might be allowable to explain the 
 accusative case as the object reached by the motion ex- 
 pressed by poXstVf and to regard d/i^i as being employed 
 adverbially ; * to come to the dark deeps of Tartarus . . . 
 about them.' But it would seem preferable to couple dftfi 
 with fioXuvy and to consider the accusative case as having 
 the sense of 'as regards,' just as in the former cases; 'to 
 come about ... as regards the dark deeps of Tartarus.' 
 Xen. Cyrop. ii. 4, 16, i^'o* noXXdxcc drj re&jjpaxa dfupl rd Spta 
 r^f re ffrj(; ^topac xai xffi r&v 'Ap/umov, ' I have often hunted 
 about tlic borders both of your country and of the country 
 of the Armenians;' that is, 'about ... as regards your 
 country.' 
 
 2. 'Apfi, having properly the same sense, and preceded 
 by the article, is frequently emploj'od with the accusative 
 of a personal noun to express the person and his party or 
 attendants. E.g. Ilorod. viii. 25, ol dk dfupl Sip^ea i; 68bv 
 oppiaro, 'Xerxes and his attendants;' II. iii. 146, ol d' dpupl 
 IJpeapov, ' Priam and his attendants.' In this latter exam- 
 ple, ol 8' dpipt IJpiapov, considering the context, might be 
 rendered by 'Priam us' alone. In Ilerod. ix. 69, ol dpxpi 
 Mefupiaz xai 0Xtaaiouz signifies merely ' the Megarians and 
 Fhliasians,' being expressed afterwards in the same chapter 
 by ol Mej-apiec xai (PXiaaeoi. Compare- Thuc. i. 6, TtoXXd r^c 
 'EXXddoz . . . Jtept re Aoxpohi rou; 'Ol^6Xa^ xai AhwXou^, where 
 ntpi without the article is used in the same way. Xen. 
 Aiiab. iii. 2, 2, of dptpi ^Aptaiov, 'Ariaeus;' Id. Cyrop. vii. 5, 
 25, ol dpipi t6v rwfipuav, ' Gobryas.' It is obvious that ol dpupi 
 xiva meant properly ' those about a person,' and that it was 
 left to the hearer to supi>ly, as being pointed to by the 
 article, objects appropriate to the known character or office 
 of the person of whom dptpi shows that they are attondanta. 
 Thus, of dpufi Tlpiapov would mean ' Priam and bis suite,' o\ 
 dpifi nXdrwi/o, 'Plato and his disciples,' of dpfi ^Apieuov, 
 ' AriaeuB and Lis troops.' The use of of dpipl xwa to deuoto 
 
154 
 
 OF THB 8BVBRAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 the poraon alone, as in some of the examples above cited, 
 would seem to he a mere license of speech ; and yet, perhaps, 
 it may be true that, in all such cases, the person is regarded 
 as having his proper attendants, and that the license con- 
 sists rather in substituting the group that is about the 
 person, and that serves to distinguish him, for the person 
 himself. 01 df2<pe IlidTiova, 'those about Plato,' that is, 'the 
 disciples or school of Plato,' might well enough stand for 
 Plato himself, when he is contemplated in the character of 
 a teacher of philosophy. 
 
 3. 'About,' in a figurative sense. 'Jfift is used figura- 
 tively in the sense of 'about' with words denoting the 
 being employed or occupied about any matter, especially 
 with the verb Ijrsfv : as, d/npl u i'jf"*', ' to be occupied about 
 something.' E.g. Xcn. Cyrop. viii. 1, 13, rb 3' av . . . d/ifi 
 Taura uurm dsi i'j^sev, f/du ou da^oXiav nufiitoi, ' on the other ' 
 hand, he knew that to be always occupied about these 
 matters would cause him to want leisure ;' Id. ib. vii. 1, 1, 
 iu ouaiv diiifi ra Upd, ' while they were still occupied with 
 (about) the sacrifices.' 
 
 4. 'Concerning,' 'relating to.' 'Afupi, in a sense very 
 nearly related to that just noticed, is used with the accusa- 
 tive case to mark what concerns or relates to an object. 
 E.g. Xen. Cyrop. viii. 2, 6, to uurb dh tuuto Triizouds xae d/i^i 
 Tijv diaerav, ' this same thing occurs also in what relates to 
 diet;' Id. CEcou. 19, 1, tu dftfi tw anopov, 'what pertains to 
 sowing seed.' 
 
 6. 'About,' denoting, in regard to time, numbers, and 
 the like, a mere approximation to the actual measure, and 
 that room is left for error in the statement. Thus (a), of 
 time : e.g. Xen. Cyrop. viii. 6, 22, tov ijibv d/i^i rhv j^ei/tioua ip6- 
 vov dtdyuv Iv Da^uXaivi, 'to spend the period about winter- 
 time in Babylon ;' Id. Anab. i. 10, 17, xal dipexuawTot d/ifi 
 ddprnaruv ine rd; axjjfdc, 'and they reached their tents about 
 dusk.' (b.) Of numbers: e.g. Xen. Anab. i. 2, 9, zeXroufTal 
 ik dp<fe rou; dta^iiiouz, 'about two thousand peltastae.' 
 
 In all the above uses oidpupi with the accusative, the case 
 has the sense of ' as to,' ' as regards,' ' as far as concerns ;' 
 unless, indeed, the class of examples above referred to, in 
 
 'Avd. 
 
 155 
 
 which a verb of motion precedes, should be regarded as 
 forming an exception. 
 
 TAULK OV THE SIUNIFICATION AND USE Or <I«10( WITH THE CASES. 
 
 Blguiflcalloniiofd^^f. 
 
 1. ■ On both •liloa.' 
 2.<Abaut,">IUbuut,' 
 ' (around.) 
 3.* About,* *near.' 
 4.'AI>out,' 'coucern. 
 
 tog.' 
 6. 'About," for.' 
 
 aDii:<oi;"wlth 
 reHpoct to.' 
 
 ' about.' 
 
 'about,' 'of,' 'con- 
 
 curning.' 
 'about,' 'tor.' 
 
 Dat:'to,"br.' 
 
 ■aliout,' 'of,' 
 
 'cunconilngj 
 
 'about,' 'for.' 
 
 liutrum: 'by,' 
 'with.' 
 
 'about,' 'round 
 about,'+'witb.' 
 
 Accui : ' as to,' 
 *u8 regardH.* 
 
 'about,' 'near.* 
 
 'about,* 'what 
 
 rolatci to.' 
 
 'Avd. 
 'Avd has probably the same radical with the Slavonic na, 
 nod, ' upon,' and with the Gothic ana, the Qerman an, the 
 English on, the Latin in, 'on'(?). See Grimm Gr. p. 262, 
 cited by Pott ii. pp. 132, 151, and Linde Pol. Lex. e. v. na 
 and nad. 
 
 Significations of dvd. 
 
 1. 'Up.' The primary signification of dvd is 'up' as 
 opposed to xard, ' down.' Thus, in the adverbial phrase dv(o 
 xae xdTto, ' up and down,' and in many compounds, as dva- 
 ^aivstv, 'to go up,' 'to ascend,' dvafidXXetv, 'to throw up,' 
 dva^Xineev, 'to look up.' And so when used with cases; as, 
 II. i. 15, dvu axjurptp, ' upon a sceptre ;' Ilerod. ii. 96, dva 
 nozapov, * up a river.' 
 
 2. 'Back.' In some compounds dvd has the sense of 
 'back,' the idea which it conveys being that of something 
 put into a state or having a direction contrary to its actual 
 one, of a state or action reversed and thus restored to its 
 former state. Thus, yvdpitTUv meaning ' to bend,' dvayvd/mretv 
 signifies ' to bend back' or in an opposite direction to the 
 present one; dtdovai meaning 'to give,' dvaSidovat has the 
 sense of ' to give back,' the action being reversed ; StSdaxuv 
 meaning 'to teach,' dvudtSdaxtiv signifies 'to teach differ- 
 ently' or contrariwise, ' to teach better' or ' to unteach ;' and 
 so pav&dvecv, ' to learn,' dvapavMvuv, ' to learn in an opposite 
 way,' ' to unlearn ;' dxjiXXuv, ' to bear a message,' dMaxyilXttv, 
 ' to carry back a message,' the messenger going and return- 
 ing. The same sense is seen to belong to xard in some 
 compounds, as, xariivat, 'to come back again,' 'to return 
 
156 
 
 ON THB SBTBRAL PRBPOSITIONS. 
 
 from exile.' It would seem to be due originally to tbe 
 natural contrast in which the relations of ' up' and ' down' 
 expressed by dpd and xard stand to each other, and for the 
 suggestion of which either preposition may suffice without 
 the presence of the other ; just as the term white suggests 
 black, and black white, without the opposite term being 
 named. From this obvious suggestion of contrast the mind 
 would pass readily enough to the more obscure one, in which 
 the same terms dvd and xard, when attached to an action or 
 state, indicate that it is made the reverse of what it actually 
 is, or is to be taken in a contrary sense, or is brought back 
 to its original state. The only difference is, that here the 
 prepositions dvd and xard, instead of marking distinctly the 
 notions of 'up' and 'down' as standing opposed to each 
 other, and so retaining their proper sense together with the 
 incidental but obvious suggestion of the contrast ofdvd with 
 xard and of xard with dud, have lost wholly their proper 
 meaning of the local relations of 'up' and 'down,' and 
 retained only the incidental one of contrast or mutual oppo- 
 sition ; and that this idea of contrast or mutual opposition, 
 originally understood only of dw£, 'up,' with regard to xard^ 
 'down,' or of xatdj 'down,' with regard to dvd, ' up,' came 
 to be used with reference to any state or action without 
 regard to its direction or position in space. So that, when 
 dvd or xard was attached to an action or state by way of 
 qualification, it might not add to it, as its proper signification 
 would require, any thing of the sense of ' up' or ' down,' nor 
 yet any suggestion of the contrast of ' up' with ' down,' but 
 only the idea of the relation of contrast or opposition between 
 the action or state contained in the verb and something else. 
 And as the contrast or opposition, to be understood, must 
 be the one most obviously suggested, this being a necessary 
 demand in spoken language, the thing with which the action 
 or state is put in contrast is the same action or state itself, 
 either in its actual mode or in some phase of it most readily 
 admitting of the contrast Thus, while in dvafiiinetu, 'to 
 look up,' the contrast is naturally suggested with xaru^Xinuv, 
 •to look down,' that is, the opposition oidvd, 'up,' with xard, 
 ' down,' in duoffiUuv, ' to bring back a message,' there is, 
 
 'At>d. 
 
 157 
 
 it is true, the same notion of contrast conveyed by the same 
 term, but with the entire absence of any idea of ' up' as 
 opposed to ' down ;' and the eftect of the contrast suggested 
 by dvd is merely to put the action of dyj-i^^tv, ' to bear a 
 message,' or the state of ' being a messenger,' in opposition 
 or contrast with itself in its actual mode, or to reverse it ; 
 so that the compound represents the bearing a message in a 
 direction, or the being a messenger in a way, contrary to 
 the same action or state as it is represented by the simple 
 term. The reverse of ' bearing a message' from Athens to 
 Sparta, for example, is ' to bear a message back' from Sparta 
 to Athens. In the same way, dvarckretv, ' to fall back,' gives 
 the representation of an 'act of falling' taken in a direction 
 opposite to the actual one, and that comes back to the 
 original position from which an object has fallen; and 
 dvwtaXuaDut, 'to call back,' 'to call off,' said, for example, 
 of the huntsman recalling his hounds in the chase, convoys 
 the sense of a calling in a direction opposite to that in which 
 a thing at the time is. 
 
 The explanation of the origin of this signification of dvd 
 hero given receives strong confirmation from the fact, above 
 referred to, that xard, in some few compounds, is used in the 
 sumo sense of ' back ;' as, xardvat, ' to come back,' as from 
 exile, xardyeiv, 'to bring back,' 'to restore from exile,' xara- 
 Six^adat, ' to receive back from exile.' To show this, it 
 might be enough, perhaps, to state generally that it would 
 be wellnigh incredible that the only thing, besides the 
 having the sense of 'back,' in which these prepositions 
 agree, namely, the suggestion of contrast, should furnish 
 a natural explanation of the meaning of 'back,' which they 
 have in common, and yet this notion of contrast not be the 
 true origin of such meaning. Especially would this be 
 incredible, considering that the meaning of ' back' is just as 
 foreign to dvd as to xard, and cannot be directly derived fror:i 
 the proper notion of either. If the sense of contrast sug- 
 gested by dU afford a probable origin for that of 'back' 
 expressed by this preposition, and it be found that xord, 
 differing in every thing else, and yet having the capacity 
 of expressing contrast, just as dvd has, obtains also the 
 
158 
 
 ON TBK SBVBBAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 meaning of 'back,' thongh totally foreign to its proper 
 Bense, it is doubly probable that the common signification 
 of ' back' is owing to the common idea of contrast. But, the 
 principle of interpretation involved being of some import- 
 ance, and yet not perfectly obvious, it may be allowable to 
 go something more fully into the explanation. If the prepo- 
 sitions dvd and xard, having wholly opposite meanings in 
 themselves, come to obtain a common sense, and this a 
 sense not derivable from the meaning of either, as in the 
 case of 'back,' it is plain that this ecnso in which they agree 
 is to be referred to something that is extrinsic to both, but 
 that, from some cause, becomes equally an attendant of both. 
 And if, again, in the history of the use of these prepositions, 
 it be found that they not only obtain the same sense, though 
 foreign to the proper signification of the one as to that of 
 the other, but alike concur in the possession of some inci- 
 dental capacity or force, and this one afibrding a probable 
 origin of the common meaning in question, it may safely be 
 inferred that it is to this capacity or force that the meaning 
 in which they agree is to be referred. 'Avd, ' up,' and xard, 
 'down,' are essentially different and even opposite in sense, 
 and yet they agree in having somehow obtained the meaning 
 of 'back,' which is in no way directly derived from either 
 the sense of 'up' or that of ' down.' I3ut dvd and xard, stand- 
 ing in natural and obvious opposition the one to the other, 
 have in common this incidental capacity of suggesting 
 contrast; and this notion of contrast gives a probable 
 explanation of the origin of the meaning of ' back,' ren- 
 dered all the more probable from its applying to prepo- 
 sitions that agree in nothing else from which their common 
 meaning of ' back' can possibly spring, save this capacity 
 of suggesting contrast. 
 
 If any one should object, as very naturally he might, that 
 it is too much to assume, as is here done, that the preposi- 
 tions dvd and xard may drop their proper sense and retain a 
 meaning in no way derived from this, but gathered up in 
 the course of their use from the relations in which the 
 objects with which they arc connected stand to each other, 
 let him call to mind how unmistakably this has happened 
 
 'Apd. 
 
 159 
 
 in the case of other Greek words, prepositions included, and 
 even in other uses of dud and xard. For example, how 
 fierd, having the signification of 'amid,' 'among,' obtains, 
 from the relation in which the parties in a group stand to 
 each other, that of 'after,' and is used in this sense in a 
 multitude of examples where the proper notion of 'amid' is 
 apparently wholly suppresHcd ; how these very prepositions 
 dvd and xard are joined with the accusative of measure in 
 cases where it would be absurd to insist that the extent of 
 the measure is determined by an actual motion of ' up' or 
 ' down,' although these are the true meanings of the prepo- 
 sitions. 
 
 Of the same nature essentially with the sense of dud 
 above considered, is that which occurs in such compounds 
 as duaxakuTireiu, 'to uncover,' the preposition here having 
 the eflcct of reversing the meaning, and of making the 
 action as represented by duaxaXunTetu just the contrary of 
 that expressed by xaXim-zuv. So in dvantixiauu, ' to unfold,' 
 the opposite of nTuaaetu, ' to fold,' and in a number beside^. 
 
 3. ' Again.' In another set of compounds dud has the sense 
 of again,' not simply, however, with the notion of repetition, 
 although this is implied; but rather with that of reversing 
 an act, or doing it contrariwise; sometimes with that 
 of doing a thing again for the better, of remedying an 
 evil or repairing a loss. Thus, dua^cow, 'to live again,' 
 'to come to life again,' the sense suggested being that 
 of a person coming to the enjoyment of life again after 
 having ceased to live. By means of dud the act of living is 
 placed in opposition to the absence of life, this being what 
 is most naturally set in contrast. So that there is expressed 
 by dua[iiouu, not merely a repetition of the act of living, 
 but, more, a recovery from death, or from a state oi>posite to 
 life. In duaii?.i7:etv, ' to sec again,' ' to recover one's sight,' 
 the state of seeing is not merely considered as existing 
 again, but as a thing regained after having been lost; so in 
 dvufid-ieadat, 'to fight again,' ' to renew the fight,' ' to restore 
 the battle,' there is represented, not simply a second fighting, 
 but a fighting again after the battle has been relinquished 
 or lost; 80 dvauidt^uv, 'to make young again,' that is, from 
 
160 
 
 OJI THB SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 being old to make young again ; duafipi^uu, < to wet again,' 
 that 18, from being drj to make wet again. It need liardly 
 be added, that this meaning of dud is merely a modification 
 of the preceding, being, in fact, due to its power of suggest- 
 nig a contrast between the action or state which it qualiEes 
 and the opposite state naturally occurring to the mind. 
 
 4. 'Out,' 'aloud.' In some compounds dpd has what 
 may, perhaps, bo called an intensive sense, rendered in 
 English by 'out,' 'aloud:' e.g. dva/9o«v, 'to cry out,' 'to 
 shout aloud,' duaPpourau, 'to thunder aloud,' duarskav 'to 
 laugh out,' 'to laugh aloud,' dv«;«£,v, 'to weep aloud' 
 In English wc use 'out' in the same sense, as in the trans- 
 lations just given; also 'up,' as 'to eat up,' that is, 'to eat 
 quite or entirely;' and sometimes 'out and out,' the prepo- 
 sition being doubled for the sake of intensity. In Greek 
 also, some other prepositions are used with like intensive 
 force; as xard in xararipi^eip, 'to cut to pieces,' and ix in 
 ixuexau, 'to conquer completely.' In some of the examples 
 qf such use otd^d, it is not altogether impossible to perceive 
 a consonance,at lea8t,between the proper sense of the pre- 
 position and what it has been here ventured to call its inten- 
 sive sense; as in dt^aiuxviuat, *to show forth,' 'to exhibit,' 
 duaxfuxieiu, 'to wail aloud.' But it may be admitted, that 
 although this meaning is most nearly allied, as far as we 
 can see, with the primary sense of d:^d, yet its precise rela- 
 tions to it are difficult to determine. 
 
 It is only in compoonds that dvd has the three last-men- 
 tioiied meanings: it does not present them in its use with 
 the cases. With these dud has only the sense of ' up,' and, 
 relatively considered, that of 'upon.' 
 
 Summary of the significations of dvd. 
 
 2. From the suggestion of contrast: 'back,' 'again.' 
 8. Intensively: 'out,' « aloud.' 
 
 Signification and use of dvd with eases of nouns. 
 'Aud is used with the genitive, dative, aud accusative cases ; 
 possibly with the ablative (locativus) ; with the genitive and 
 dative only in the epic aud lyric poets. 
 
 'Aud. 
 
 161 
 
 I. ^Avd with the genitive case. 
 With the genitive case dvd is employed only in a few ex- 
 amples ; and even in these it is doubted whether the genitive 
 should be considered as connected with dvd in its construction. 
 (See Passow's Lexicon, s. v.) Thus, Od. ii. 416, du (dvd) S" 
 djia Ti^Xi[ia-j[oz wydf ^aiv\ f/p^e S 'A9ijv7], ' Telemachus went 
 on board the ship, and Athene bad command.' Accord- 
 ing to the mode of interpretation set forth in this treatise, 
 dvd is to be regarded as the qualification of fialve ; ' Tele- 
 machus went up,' that is, ' on board ;' and the genitive v>j6i 
 is added in the sense of ' with respect to the ship,' to specify 
 the object to which the going on board is to be distinctly 
 referred ; ' Telemachus went up on board . . . with respect 
 to the ship,' and not with respect to any other object; that 
 is, he went on board the ship. 
 
 II. 'Avd with the dative, or with the ablative (locativus) (f). 
 
 The form of the dative and of the ablative (locativus) cases 
 being the same in Greek, it is a question of difficulty to 
 decide whether the examples in which dvd occurs witli this 
 form have the dative or the ablative (locativus). E.g. II. i. 
 14-15, aTip/tuT i-<(iov iv ■j^epaev kxrjftoXou 'Anoiiwvoz | -j^puaiu^j 
 dvd. ar^nrpip, ' having in his hands the garlands of Apollo on 
 a golden sceptre.' If j(puaitp ax^nrpip be regarded, as it 
 might be, as the ablative of position or locativus, the sense 
 will be, ' having in his hands the garlands of Apollo up . . . 
 on a golden sceptre,' the locativus marking the place of the 
 garlands, ♦ on asceptre,' and dvd describing further the manner 
 or relative direction of the holding ; ' he had or held the gar- 
 lands up' as opposed to ' down.' Considered as a dative case, 
 jl^imaitp axrj7iTp(p will denote the object ultimately affected, 
 and depend immediately upon dvd and the preceding words 
 aziiipur' Ijfwi/ ixrj,%?.uu '/IffiAAtuvoc, ' he had in his hands tho 
 garlands of Apollo . . . upon a golden sceptre;' that is, 
 the golden sceptre is presented as the object ultimately 
 attocted by the disposition of the garlands, just as though it 
 were a party to whose benefit it enured, and just as the 
 dative is admitted to attend upon Spotoz, ' like,' 6 a6r6f, ' the 
 
 11 
 
162 
 
 OP THE SETBRAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 same,' &c. Although this latter interpretation seems rather 
 difficult to admit, possibly from our being unaccustomed in 
 our language' to such use of the dative case, yet it might, 
 perhaps, be justified by the freer use of the Greek language. 
 If the ablative here appear to afford the simpler and more 
 obvious construction, it may bo urged, on the other hand, 
 that us iiti, 'upon,' and dL,tfi, ' about,' would seem to bo fol- 
 lowed by the dative case in virtue of their own signification, 
 in the same way that a^/oMc, 'like,' laoz, 'equal,' 6 ubroz, 
 ' the same,' have the dative after them, so dvrf, ' up," may 
 have this case depending upon it. Similar are the follow- 
 ing examples cited by Passow: Od. xi. 128, Adr)ur,\otyhv 
 l^uv dj/« ifutbiiup Cbfup, 'on his shining shoulder;' II. xv. 
 152-3, eu(,ov ff eupuona Kftovid^v dva Fapj-dp^ dxptp \ ^/isvov, 
 'sitting on promontory Gargarus.' 
 
 III. *Avd with the accusative. 
 1. \4vd with the accusative is employed to express, in a 
 variety of ways, the measure or extent of an action or 
 motion. Thus (a), in the sense of 'up,' 'up to,' 'to the 
 extent of:' e.g. Od. xxii. 193, «W dv' l^ijJUiu ipuaau, 'they 
 drew him up to the lofty pillar,' that is, 'they drew him up 
 ... to the extent of, as far as went, the lofty pillar.' The 
 measure or amount of the drawing up is expressed by the 
 accusative xiou Cii'ijX^v, and the proper office of dvd is to 
 mark the direction of the drawing, that it was *up' or 
 •upwards.' 
 
 b. ' Throughout,' ' all through.' 'Avd with the accusative 
 18 used in the sense of 'throughout,' 'all through:' e.g. II. 
 1. 63, ivwjfmp (ihv Ava arpaxhv tp^eTo x^Xa Seoto, ' the arrows 
 of the god sped throughout the army.' Here the accusa- 
 tive arpuTov shows up to what limit went the infliction of 
 the god, how far reached the sending of his arrows, dud 
 retaining nothing of its proper sense of ' up,' but merely 
 serving to mark the accusative as a sign of measure, pecu- 
 liar only in its resulting from giving the limit of a motion 
 assumed to have one certain direction rather than another, 
 ^sch. Prom. 590, aiau^ re p^ariv dud xdu napaldau ipdpLpov, 
 'and drives me a famished wanderer all through (over) the 
 
 Wud. 
 
 163 
 
 ^\- 
 
 sandy shore.' Herod, i. 96, lourtov dk abrouS/uou ndvrtov dud t^u 
 ^eepou, ' throughout the mainland ;' Id. ii. 135, doiSipot: dud rijv 
 'EUdda ifiuero, 'was celebrated in song throughout Hellas ;' 
 Xen. Anab. i v. 6, 4, axadpohz herd Inopeii&^aau, dud niure napa- 
 adffUiZ f^C ^/i^f'oz, ' as much as five parasangs a day.' Origin- 
 ally, dud thus used denoted one of the modes of taking u 
 measure, namely, by measuring from below upwards; just 
 as xard expressed the opposite mode of taking a measure, 
 irom above downwards, But, as it was really a matter of 
 no moment, for the result, whether the measure was taken 
 from below upwards or from above downwards, dud was 
 employed, not only in cases where a measure was expressed 
 by the limit of an upward motion, and where dud would 
 have its proper sense, but in others also where it was not 
 required to give any exact indication of the direction of the 
 action or motion by limiting which the accusative came to 
 express measure. In such case, dud became a mere sign 
 that the accusative was used as a note of measure, one that 
 may fairly be assumed to have its origin from being the 
 limit of a motion directed from below upwards, but that 
 would scciM to be used without regard to this origin. In the 
 same way xard is used with the accusative of measure where 
 there is no notion of a downward motion any longer con- 
 veyed; and, accordingly, xazuarpaTou means 'throughout 
 the army,' Just us dud arparou does. 
 
 To this use of dud with the accusative belongs the phrase 
 duu aro/ta ix^iu, ' to have constantly in the mouth,' or ' on 
 the tongue,' 'to bo ever saying,' properly, 'to have all 
 through the mouth,' or 'as far as ever the mouth goes.' 
 And BO dud duphu tppouuu, 'to revolve in one's mind,' pro- 
 perly, ' to consider to the extent of one's mind,' ' as far as 
 one's mind goes :' e.g. II. ii. 35-G, rbv S SXit:' outou \ rd (ppo- 
 uiouT dud dupou d />' ou rekieadai IpeXAe. 
 
 c. ^Aud is used also with the accusative case of nouns 
 expressing the several denominations of time to mark the 
 extent or measure reached. Thus, in Homer, but only in 
 the phrase dvd t^uxra, ' during, all through, the night,' ' to the 
 extent of the night :' e.g. II. xiv. 80, oi ydp rtc vipeat; ifoyiitv 
 xuxuu, ouo dud uOxra. Ilerod. viii. 123, Inlmou o\ 'EUr^ua; I; -'iv 
 
1G4 
 
 OF TUE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 'la^fiov dpurnji'a dwoovre^ rip d^tmrdTtp Yevoftivtf) ^EXi^vwv dvA 
 rdu noiefiov rourov, 'during, throughout, this war,' or, leas 
 accuratclj rendered, 'in this war.' Here belongs the 
 expression dvi naaau r^v ^/lipav, ' throughout the whole 
 day,' that is, ' to the extent of the whole day.' Here may 
 be mentioned, also, the phrase dvdj^povov, ' in time,' ' in course 
 of time :' e.g. Ilcrod. i. 173, xara tou Aoxou t^v imowpir^v Aitxtot 
 dva j[p6vov hXrjdrjaav, 'in course of time wore called Ly- 
 cians ;' properly, ' against a period of time,' the idea being 
 that the Lycians obtained their denomination in a space 
 the measure of which is expressed by saying that it amounted 
 to or reached a period of time. Cf. Herod, ii. 151. 
 
 d. 'Aud is used with the accusative of numbers also, and 
 in the same way as in the preceding cases ; but, owing to 
 our like use of ' up to' with numbers to mark the extent to 
 which any computation goes, we can here more readily see 
 the direction in which the measure is regarded as reached. 
 E.g. Od. ix. 209, dt/a ilxoai pirpa ^eue, 'he poured out to 
 the amount of twenty measures,' properly, * up to the amount 
 of twenty measures.' 
 
 e. The same interpretation, both as to dvd and as to the 
 accusative case, is to be given of a number of what are 
 called adverbial phrases ; as, dvd xpdro;, ' with one's might,' 
 'to the utmost,' the literal sense being, 'up to the measure 
 of one's strength :' e.g. Xen. Anab. 1. 8, 1, iipo<paiueTae (Uarrj- 
 joa^) IXawmv dvd xpdzoz {Spouvri rip iKTKp, ' riding at the top 
 of his speed,' that is," 'up to the measure of his strength.' 
 So dvd pipo^, 'in turn:' e.g. Eur. Phccn. 488, war' abrb^ 
 dpxeiv aMic dvd pepoz Xa()wv, 'on condition that I should get 
 the kingdom in turn and have the dominion.' When it is 
 said of a person that he performs an action dvd (or xard) 
 pipo;:, 'in turn,' the sense really is, that he performs it 'as 
 far as his part or share goes,' or 'according to his part or 
 share.' (See Xen. Cyrop. iv. 2, 30.) Hardly different is the 
 phrase dvd tou; rrptirou^, laav, ' they were among the first ;' 
 properly, ' were up with, as far as, equal with, the first.' 
 
 /. Of the same nature essentially is the use oidvd, as well 
 as of xard, with Xoyov, in the sense of 'in the proportion of,' 
 ' according to the proportion of:' e.g. Xij^sTui rouf ^/iJoof Ij^etv 
 
 'Avd. 
 
 165 
 
 dvd Tbv ahrbv l6ro^ Ti,v ;«6r,r«, ' it is said to have its stones 
 of the same measure of smoothness,' that is, coming up to 
 the same reckoning or estimate in regard to smoothness, the 
 accusative Xirov marking the measure or extent, and denot- 
 iug how far the smoothness of the stones reaches, namely, 
 to xbv ahzbv Xdyou, 'the same reckoning or estimate,' and 
 dvd, in its proper sense, indicating, just as our expression 
 ' up (to)' in the translation does, the direction in which the 
 measure is taken. Compare Herod, ii. 68, xal 6 v^ooobz xard 
 Tbv Xbrovzou ibou r«Vera., 'and the young one is in proportion 
 to the egg,' that is, 'is according to the size (computation) 
 of the egg;' Id. ii. 10, eW Sk xal dXXoi nozapol ob xazu rov 
 NeUov eov«f peyddea, « and there are other streams, also, that 
 in size are not equal to the Nile,' that is, 'not according to 
 the reckouing for, or standard of, the Nile.' 
 
 a 'Every' To be referred to the same class with the 
 above examples is the use of dvd with the accusative caae to 
 express a distributive sense, answering to the English ' every 
 and ' each.' E.g. Xen. Anab. iii. 4, 21, inonjaavro ?? Xoxou^ 
 dva Ixarbv dvdpaz, 'they formed six companies of a hundred 
 men each;' Id. Anab. vi. 3, 11, b 8k rpuz dfdd,v .r«c "/teu- 
 T«ac rd-ec^ dvd d^axoalouz dvSpaz, x.r.X., ' detaching the three 
 last ranks of two hundred men each ;' Herod, n. Al, ix 
 raXxia>v norripicov nivoum, Scaopia,vrez dvd naaav ^pep^j ' n"S- 
 ing them every day ;' Id. vii. 106. nip^.^xe 8e {raUpa)dva 
 ndv iToz, 'he sent the presents every year; Xen. t-yr. 
 i 2 8 Sk xal roue npea^uripoui bpioac dvd naaav fjpepav 
 i,a>^pbU Mrovraz, 'because they see the older men also 
 living temperately every day.' 
 
 With regard to the use oidvd with the accusative in this 
 distributive sense, it should be observed, first, that the accu- 
 sative case with dvd attending it marks, properly speaking, 
 only a measure of extent, as in the preceding instances, the 
 accusative denoting measure, and dvd showing, originally at 
 least, the way or direction in which the measure is reached 
 namely, from below upwards, but being afterwards used 
 with the accusative of measure without any obvious refer- 
 ence to the direction in which the measure is reached, just 
 as is the case with xard. Secondly, that while dvd and the 
 
166 
 
 OF THK SBYBRAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 accusative do merely express a certain measure, e.g. dvi 
 huTov ivipac, 'to the number of a hundred men,' they are 
 capable of being used as a standard of measure by which 
 any number or quantity of the same class or kind shall be 
 measured off or divided into equal parts having the same 
 denomination with the standard of measure. Thus, in the 
 second example above cited, the three ranks of men being 
 mentioned as detached, the measure dva Siaxoaiouc dvdpa^, 
 'to the number of two hundred men,' is introduced and 
 applied as a standard of measure by which they are divided 
 off into equal parts having this denomination, that is, of 
 'two hundred men' each. Thirdly, that the question 
 whether a measure of extent expressed by dud or xard and 
 the accusative, when introduced alongside of any quantity 
 or number, is to be used simply as a measure of extent, or 
 as a standard of measure, can be decided only by the at- 
 tendant circumstances. For there is no proper and separate 
 sign of distribution in either dvd or the accusative, but only 
 the marks by which a measure of amount is distinguished ; 
 and the fact that the measure denoted by the preposition 
 and accusative case has the capacity of being employed as a 
 standard of measure, is suggested by the noun in the accu- 
 sative marking a denomination of measure of the same 
 kind with the parts into which the whole number or quan- 
 tity may be divided. For instance, the measure dvd Utaxo- 
 aiouz dudpaz, ' to the number of two hundred men,' or simply 
 ' two hundred menr- is capable of becoming a standard of 
 measure by which the body of rpeez rd^eit:, ' three ranks of 
 men,' may be divided off, because it is of the same denomi- 
 nation with the parts into which the whole number is divi- 
 sible ; a number of ranks of men may be divided off into 
 companies of the same denomination with dua Siaxoaiouz 
 dvdpaz, that is, 'two hundred men.' But whether, in fact, 
 the Tpu^ r<£cetc, 'three ranks of men,' are divided off into 
 equal parts by the measure of dud dtaxoaiouz duSpaz, ' two 
 hundred men,' that is, whether the latter shall be considered 
 a standard of measure for the time being, can be gathered 
 only from the narrative. To remedy the anibiguity which 
 must more or less attend this use otdvd with the accusative, 
 
 'Aud. 
 
 167 
 
 certain separate signs of distribution are sometimes super- 
 added, as ffJf, ' every,' ixaaroi;, ' each.' Thus, in the exam- 
 ples above cited, dud naaau ^pipau, ' every day,' dud nuu iroc, 
 • every year,' though the terms dud ^pipau, ♦ up to the mea- 
 sure of a day,' dud iroz, ' up to the measure of a year,' or, 
 simply, ' the measure of a day,' * the measure of a year,' 
 might have been understood, from the context, to be applied 
 as a standard of measure by which to distribute into equal 
 parts the period of time during which the older men lived 
 temperately, and that during which Xerxes sent presents ; 
 yet an ambiguity might remain, and it is obviated by the 
 introduction of n-ac, ' every.' In English we employ, to mark 
 distribution, either 'every,' and 'each,' with the standard 
 of measure alone ; as, * he gave him a present every year,' 
 or * each year,' ' he gave them every one a present,' or ' ho 
 gave them each a present;' or the standard of measure 
 attended by 'a' or 'an,' the same as 'one;' as, 'he scut him 
 a letter a month;' ' they received ton dollars a man.' 
 
 2. Besides the above cases, in which dud with the accusa- 
 tive is employed to mark in various circumstances, and with 
 different objects, the extent or measure of some action or 
 state, this [)rcposition is used with the same case to define, 
 in a more general way, the limits within which a proposition 
 is to be understood to be affirmed, the accusative answering 
 to the English ' as to,' ' as regards,' 'as far as goes,' although 
 not converted by these terms, and the preposition being 
 rendered by ' up' or ' on.' E.g. II. xiii. 646-7, . . . dnb 8e 
 ipXi^a naaau Ixspaeu, \ ^r' dud uwra diouaa Stapxephz, ah-jfiu' 
 Ixduet, * cut the entire vein, which runs quite up the back 
 and reaches the neck ;' properly, * which runs quite up . . . 
 as regards the back ;' II. x. 465-6, xai dnb e&eu Ci^oa' dsipaz \ 
 dr^xsu dud puplxrju, 'and, lifting them on high, placed them 
 upon the tamarisk,' that is, ' placed them up ... as regards 
 the tamarisk.' Herod, ii. 96, raura rd jcXaJa dud piv rbv 
 mrapbu ob duuaurat tzUuu, ' these vessels are not capable of 
 sailing up the stream ;' properly, 'are not capable of sailing 
 up ... as regards the stream.' Xen. Ages. ii. 22, xai iv 
 ntSifp xai dud xd oprj pdyiiadat, ^ \jo fight both in the plain, and 
 on the mountains,' that is, ' up . . . as regards the niuun- 
 
1C8 
 
 OV TBS SEVBRAI. PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 tains,' dvd showing that the scene of the fighting is 
 tively ' up,' as opposed to iv xe8ii/t, and the accus 
 
 rela- 
 accusative 
 limiting the descriptive term of dw£, < up,' to ra Sftij, ' the 
 mountains.' 
 
 TIBLB or THE SIQNinOATION AND UBI OF i,i WITU CASKS. 
 
 OiBlloiloa 
 of iwi. 
 
 Geo.: 'ol;" with 
 reipflct to.' 
 
 Oktl'to,' 
 'tor.' 
 
 Locat.l 
 '•t.' 
 
 Ace. 1. ' to,' • u frr M i' 2. ■ u to," u regmrdj.' 
 
 •Up.' 
 
 'Upon.' 
 
 ■Upon.' 
 
 'Upon'l 
 
 ' Up to.' ' Upon.' 
 
 ' Throughout.' 
 
 ■ Ai many u.' 
 
 •Durlog.' 
 
 'BTery,"«Mh," •,"«!.• 
 
 'Aveu. 
 
 'Aveu, of which there is also a poetical form dveode, has 
 probahly the same radical with the negative prefix d- and 
 dw-, the Latin i- and 171-, the English and German un-, the 
 German ohne and ohn-, 'without,' the old Gorman Sno, and 
 the Gothic ihiu. (See Tott Etym. Forsch. ii. p. 131.) 
 
 ^gnifications of dvtu. 
 
 1, 'Aveu is used both adverbially and as a preposition, 
 that is, both with and without a case, and has commonly 
 the sense of 'without' It is frequently met with in contrast 
 with ouv, 'with,' 'together with:' e.g. II, xvii. 40G-7, imi 
 olide TO iXtttTo xdfjmav \ ixTripaeiv nroXie&pov dvtu eSev, ou8e ahv 
 auTift, ' neither without himself, nor even with him ;' II. xxiii, 
 387, dveu xevcpoco jJeowef, ' running without the lash (goad).' 
 Xen. Anab. ii. 6, 18, ahv T<p dcxaitfi xai xaXtp iftsxo diiv rouTtov 
 Tujrxduetv, dveu 8k toutwv /jc^, ' he considered that he ought to 
 get these things with justice and honor, but not without 
 these virtues.' 
 
 2. 'Away from,' 'apart from.' 'i^veu has also the meaning 
 of 'away from,' 'apart from:' e.g. II. xiii. 556, ou fiev yip 
 nor' dueu drjtwv ijv,* aXXd xal auTohz \ arpwipdr', ' for he was 
 never away from foes, but turned himself against them ;' 
 Od. xvi. 238-9, ... a xev vwe duvrjaofjx^' dvctfkpeadai, \ 
 poui/M dv£u9' dU<ov, ^ xai 8t^ija6pt9' dUouz, ' alone, apart from 
 others.' In the latter case, however, dveuife might be ren- 
 dered 'without.' (See Passow's Lex.) This meaning of 
 
 Avtu, 
 
 169 
 
 'away from,' 'apart from,' is only a variation of that of 
 •without,' and is derived from it. ^ 
 
 8. • Except.' 'Aveu has, further, the meaning of ' except,' 
 which is but another variation of the proper sense of 'with- 
 out' E.g. riat. Grit. 112, c, cited in Passow's Lexicon, dveu 
 ^puaou xal dpyupou, 'except gold and silver.' 
 
 Summary of the significations of dveu. 
 
 1. 'Without' 
 
 2. 'Away from,' ' apart from.' 
 8. 'Except' 
 
 Use of dveo with its case. 
 
 "Avtu is used with the genitive alone, the preposition 
 having the meanings above set forth, and the genitive 
 having the signification of 'with respect to,' as in the above- 
 cited examples. To these add^sch. Pers. 609, rocrdp xihu9ou 
 ■njvff dveu t' djpipduov \ X^'% Te t^c ndpot^ev, ix 86po>v itdXtv \ 
 ioTtdu, ' therefore have I come this way again from my 
 home, without a chariot and without my former equipage;' 
 Xen. Anab. ii. 6, 6, Izov pkv elpijvTjv dretv dveu alaf^'ivric xai 
 PU^C, alpenatnoXepeiv, 'without shame and hurt;' Id. Hell, 
 iii. 4 26, oux dv notrjaece raura dveu twv oixot reXwv, ' he would 
 not do this without (the consent of) the magistrates at 
 home,' dveu and the genitive in this, as in many other 
 examples of the use of this preposition, having seemingly a 
 pregnant sense. Xen. Cyrop. i. 6, 14, xal ah yeXdaai: 8ifjk»i<: 
 pot... oTt ou8evo(peXoi eti^ aTpaua toxuxwv dveu r&v Imrrjdeiwv, 
 'you explained to me that tactics were of no benefit to an 
 army without provisions ;' Id. Hell. i. 7, 30, roue vopouz . . . 
 ^uUrzovzez, dveu rouuov prjShv itpdnetv netpua9e, ' observing 
 the laws, attempt to do nothing without them,' that is, 
 ♦apart from, contrary to, them'.' (See Lex. Xenoph.) 
 
 For the augmented and compound forms dveu&e and 
 dxdveude, see Passow's Lexicon. 
 
 TABLE OF TUB gIGNIPICATIONS AND 08E OT hn. 
 
 gignificnlioDi of i"! i>. 
 
 Oen. : ' of,' ' with nipMt to.' 
 
 1. 'WiUiuut.' 
 
 2. ' Awny from,' ' apart from.' 
 
 3. 'Except.' 
 
 • Without.' 
 
 ' Away from,' 'apart from.' 
 
 • Exoept.' 
 
170 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 'AutL 
 
 'Avri corresponds bott in form and in its characteristic 
 sense to the Latin ante, ' before,' to the Gothic and, to the 
 German anl-, as seen in antlilz, 'face,' and cnt-, as in aiUjcgen, 
 'towards,' obelus. It is regarded by Pott (Ktym. F. i. p. 
 17G, ii. 148) us having the same radical with tliu Sanskrit 
 pronoun of tlie third person, ana, ' illo,' from which comes 
 aniara, ' alter,' and by Grimm is compared with tlic Sans- 
 krit all, ' ultra.' In both these latter cases, the sense would 
 be shown to correspond, by referring to the derivative 
 meaning of the demonstrative pronoun in which it signifies 
 ' that' as opposed to ' this,' and hence ' on the other side' as 
 opposed to ' on this side,' which is the proper notion of the 
 comparative form ultra. (See also Passow's Lexicon.) 
 
 Significations of dure. 
 
 1. • Over against,' ' opposite,' ' face to face.' The proper 
 meaning of di/ri is ' over against,' ' opposite,' ' face to face,' 
 in a local sense, as seen in the related form mty^v and in 
 the derivative di/rioi;, 'over against," 'opposite,' and in many 
 other derivative and compound forms in which dvzc appears ; 
 as, duTtdv, ' to go to meet,' ' to face,' dvuxadi^siv, ' to set oppo- 
 site,' duTCTrfKOfiot;, ' face to face,' di/Tinopo;, ' over against,' dvu- 
 dpovoz, 'sitting opposite.' So also in construction with 
 nouns: e.g. II. viii. 233-4, Tpiowv dn>' kxarov re 8c(txoaUov re 
 ixaazuz | OTr^atad' iu ^loiijiti}, ' you will each stand against, that 
 is, before, over against, the Trojans ;' Od. iv. 115-lG, yhitvav 
 t:o(»fui>h^v duT'dip&aX/tottv dvaa'^wu | d/t^OTifij^aiv j[e/iai, 'holding 
 up a purple robe before, over against, the eyes.' This same 
 may possibly be the sense of duri as used with verbs of 
 entreaty, and where it answers to the English 'by:' e.g. 
 Soph. (Ed. Col. 1326, oia' dvzi naidcov riovds xal ^u^'i'^i ^'^'^^P> \ 
 Ixezsuofteti, S6/mavTec, 'who all of us beseech you, father, by 
 these children and by your life;' that is, perhaps, 'over 
 against, in the face of, before.' More probably, however, 
 this sense of dure is a derivative one, to be mentioned after- 
 wards, in which it expresses the idea of an equivalent, of 
 what is weighed against another and counterbalances it, and 
 
 'Auri. 
 
 171 
 
 80, in certain connections, comes to express what is an ade- 
 quate motive. In this view, the sense here would be, ' we 
 all beseech you, father, placing our entreaties in the one 
 scale, and these your children apd your life in the other;' 
 making the latter an equivalent for the former, your children 
 and life a motive for yielding to our entreaties. 
 
 2. ' For,' as an expression of equivalent. From the sense 
 of 'over against,' 'opposite to,' is derived.tiwt of equipoise, 
 counterbalancing, as of one thing answering to another, and, 
 as it were, weighed against it. Thus, in the compounds 
 ivTunjxow, 'to weigh against,' an(J dvr/]i/5offof, 'counter- 
 poising.' This sense is seen in a variety of uses of dure that 
 involve, more or less obviously, the idea of one thing cor- 
 responding to and counterbalancing another. Thus : 
 
 a. 'For,' 'of equivalent value.' 'Jvu has the meaning 
 of ' for,' ' of equivalent value :' e.g. II. ix. 116, dvu w noXkiou 
 
 I Xaaiu iarev dvijii Si/re Zthz xrjpi fdrjay, ' the man whom Zeus 
 loves in liis heart is worth, equal in value to, many people ;' 
 Od. viii. 54C-7, dvrt xaaqfi/^rou ^eci^o^ &' hir^z f s TiruxToc \ dvipc, 
 'a guest and a suppliant is for a man in the room of, counted 
 as, a brother;' Herod, iii. 59, itapd 8e 'Ep/uouiiov vfjitov dvzl 
 ^p^pdraiv napikafiov, 'they got the island, as an equivalent, 
 for money.' The same sense is seen in compounds; as, 
 dvudsoc, 'godlike,' durixevrpoz, 'sharp as a goad.' 
 
 b. ' For,' ' in exchange for,' ' in return for,' ' in turn.' This 
 sense of dirt is essentially the same with the preceding, and 
 occurs in expressions of barter or interchange of values. Thus, 
 in compounds ; as, dvziSoatz, ' a giving in exchange,' dvztpMn- 
 xttv, 'to injure in iwrn,' dvzt^dXXicv, 'to throw in iwvn, ' dvztxlaiuv, 
 ' to weep in turn,' dvzixaUiv, ' to burn in return,' ' to give burn- 
 ing for burning.' So also in construction with the case of a 
 noun : e.g. Xcn. Cyrop. iv. 6, 8, ah ^plv zl dvzi zoiiztov OjTfjpevj- 
 aeiz; 'what service will you render us in return for this?' Id. 
 Hell. i. 7, 18, dvzi rijc rore ffdav&pioniai; vuv . . . imjiouXeudpevot, 
 'in return for their kindness ;' Soph. (Ed. Tyr. 544, dvzi 'riou 
 elptjpivtov la' dvzdxouaov, ' hear, in return for, in answer to, 
 what 3'ou have said.' 
 
 c. ' For,* ' instead of,' one thing taking the place of another. 
 This sense of dvzi is very nearly related to that just men- 
 
f < 
 
 172 
 
 OF THK 8BVEBAL PKBPOSITIONS. 
 
 tioncd, and is of veiy frequent occurrence. Thus, in the 
 compounds dtm&vijffxetv, 'to die instead of,' «in the room of,' 
 iinthifi^dvuv, 'to take in the room of,' And so with nouns': 
 e.g. Xen, Anab. i. 1, 4, ^ouXtUrat Srrati: . . . ^aathuau dtr' 
 ixeivou, ' Jiow he shall be king in his stead ;' Id. Cyrop. iv. 6, 
 5, jAfw fiiv & rdAai; vtxpbv dure vufupiou ixo/uad/aju, « I got a 
 corpse instead of a bridegroom;' Id. ib. viii. 1, 20, xai ounoz 
 ijrqr^iTo ainifupiXoc xf'^atiioc dvrl d;f/>ij«Troi;, ' and thus became 
 to him a useful instead of a useless friend;' Herod, vii. 170 
 dvTt 8k that mjatioTac {Xirerae) yeviadai i^nsipotraz, ' it is said 
 that tliey became dw^lers on the mainland instead of 
 islanders.' 
 
 d. ' For,' ' before,' ' in preference to.' Frequently di/n, in 
 comparisons, obtains this sense of preference, which is 
 nearly akin to the immediately preceding one of 'instead 
 of,' involving, as it does, the idea of one thing counted 
 against another, and thus returning to the primary meaning 
 of ' over against.' E.g. Xen. Anab. i. 7, 4, rijv Ihu&epiav 
 Uolfxijv dv dvci iSv ixat ndwwv, 'I would choose liberty before, 
 in preference to, instead of, all that I have ;' ^sch. Prom. 
 465, dukaaaiKthiyxra S ouuc dUoi dvr' ifioij | Xeu6nT£(P eupe 
 vauriXtov ixjiwxa, 'no one before me, instead of me;' Id. 
 Agam. 1241, dXXrjv w' dXXi]v{o\. dxijv, drac,) di^r' ^//oD nXou- 
 u^ere, ' enrich some other rather than me, instead of me.' 
 
 e. 'For,' 'why,' 'wherefore,' 'on account of.' Derived 
 from the sense of an equivalent, of one thing counter- 
 balancing another, is that of ' why,' ' wherefore,' whicli dm 
 sometimes obtains, expressing the ground or motive of an 
 action or statement. E.g. Soph. Electr. 585-6, diSa^uv dvt? 
 Stou rawu | aXa^tara ndurtov ipya ipmaa ro;-;fdi/sfc, ' tell me 
 wherefore, why, you have now done the most shameful of 
 all deeds,' Here it is plain that dvSP Stou is intended to 
 convey the idea of equivalent for the deed referred to, and 
 this is, at the same time, to constitute ito ground or motive. 
 Xen^ Cyrop. viii, 4, 2, dwi di rourwv xoXXoi^ xai /teydXotc 
 iufiuTo 1)7:6 roij Kupou, 'for, on account of, in return for, this;' 
 Id. ib, viii. 3, 31, didwfu roiwv aot, iipi^, rourovi tov ijmov. 'Oif 
 imjpero dvu rou; 'he asked, wherefore? for what?' Soph. 
 
 'AutI 
 
 173 
 
 Autig. 237, dw?* ou t^v8' l^eiz d9u{uav; 'why are you so 
 despondent ?' 
 
 /. 'By.' ^Avri is used with the genitive case after verbs 
 of entreaty, in the sense of 'by,' and maybe most probably 
 explained us containing the idea of an equivalent or counter- 
 poise, and hence of ground or motive. Thus, in the example 
 above cited, Soi>h. Gild. Col. 1326-7, ol tf dvrl naidiov rtovSt 
 xai 4'^xrfit itdrep, \ Ixereuopev tu/tnavre^, ' wo all entreat you by 
 these your children, and by your life,' dyri introduces olyocts 
 which Bhall constitute a motive with the person addressed, 
 as being an equivalent value or consideration for the thing 
 sought. Polynices entreats his father to relinquish his anger 
 against him, and adduces the afBicted man's children, and bis 
 own life, as an equal consideration, and therefore as motives 
 to induce his consent. Of course, this notion of an equivalent, 
 although properly invoked to account for the origin of this 
 use of dvu, is not to be understood as being present in the 
 literal and prominent way in which it is necessarily set fortb 
 in the explanation. That would be to forget that words are 
 often used, in their derivative significations, without any 
 very distinct reference in the mind to the original ideas 
 which underlie them. Compare Ellendt Lex. Soplioc. i, p. 
 171. Ilcferring to the interpretation of Rcisig, which makes 
 dvu, in the passage above cited, to have the sense of 'before,' 
 ' in the presence of,' this author says, " vcrhis est in hoc eliam 
 fmimnla dvudSaswz supiificationcm inesse, velut si in; ohtestandi 
 sensu dicitnr." The latter part of the quotation leaves it 
 doubtful how far the learned author has a clear conception 
 of this use of dvu. 
 
 'Avu being employed with the genitive case alone, and a 
 sufficient number of examples of the use of the preposition 
 with this case having been already given in setting forth its 
 primary and derivative meanings, it is hardly necessary to 
 go over the same ground again by presenting apart the 
 several significations in which dvrl occurs with the genitive. 
 It may be enough to remark that the genitive, as used with 
 dvTt, has its common meaning of ' with respect to,' although 
 this is not distinctly expressed in the rendering into 
 English. 
 
174 
 
 OF THE SBVEBAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 TABLB 01 THB BIONIIT0ATI0N8 AND UBB OF itrt STTtn ITS CABB. 
 
 \iic6. 
 
 175 
 
 Signlfloationi of int. 
 
 Gen : ' with reipect to.' 
 
 X. 'Ofar*guiitt,"oppo<ita,-' 
 
 1. 'Over against.' 
 
 ■ho* to face," Mora.' 
 
 ' before.' 
 
 
 a. ' For,' ' as equivalent for ;' 
 
 2. a. ' for,' ' in the room of,' 'eqnal to.' 
 
 ft. < For,' ' in excbangs for,' 
 
 6. ' for,' ' in exchange for,' 
 
 ' in return for,' ' in turn ;' 
 
 ' in return for.' 
 
 «.' For," instead of;' 
 
 e. ' for,' ' instead of.' 
 
 A 'For,' 'befora,' 'in prefeianca to;' 
 
 d. ' for,' ' before,' ' in preferenoe to.' 
 
 e. 'For,' • why,' 'wherefore,' ' on 
 
 «. 'for,' 'why,' 'wherefore,' 'on 
 
 account of;' 
 
 aooount of.' 
 
 /. 'Dy,' in entreatlaa. 
 
 /. 'by,' in entreatiei. 
 
 'AtzS. 
 
 ^An6, which has also an epic form Altai, is the same 
 as the Sanskrit ajia, the Latin ah, a, the German ah, as in 
 abgchcn, 'to go away,' the Gothic af, the English off. The 
 Englisii aflcr would seem to be composed of this same radi- 
 cal (af) and the comparative ending tor, its meaning being 
 not inconsistent with this composition so obviously sug- 
 gested by the form. The only difficulty in the way of 
 admitting that after is made up of these elements, would be 
 found in the uniformity with which the English language 
 elsewhere aspirates this comparative ending, as in o-ther, whe- 
 ther, fi-ther. The word better does not furnish a parallel 
 example, the second t being only an iteration of the t of the 
 radical caused by the stress of the voice. Compare the 
 Gothic hatiza, melior, hatista, optimus, &c. mentioned by 
 Bopp, Gloss. Sanskr. p. 243. 
 
 Significations of Ai:6. 
 
 1. 'Off,' 'away,' 'from.' ^At:6 has the primary sense of 
 'oflj' 'away,' 'from,' having properly the notion of being 
 apart, (he being separated by an interval of distance, more 
 exactly conveyed by the English ' off,' ' away,' but nearly 
 expressed by ' from' also ; as, ' to be from home' Thus, in 
 the compound Anonpd, 'away from,' 'at a distance from,' 
 and in the adjective ineoz, ' far off,' ' distant,' diTtodsv, ' from 
 afar,' d-o«of, 'away from home,' 'a colonist,' AmjiXiTcecv, 'to 
 look away,' ixodifistv, ' to take off the hide,' ' to flay,' dno- 
 
 dpiTtetv, ' to strip off,' ditoj-iYvea^ai, ' to bo away,' d:To8ij/jteiv, 
 'to sojourn from home.' 
 
 The sense of proceeding from, and of removal, which dffi 
 very often has when conjoined with verbs of motion and 
 action, and which is expressed by 'away,' '.away from,' as, 
 ixdvat, ' to go away from,' ' to depart,' AjtodtSpdaxeiv, ' to run 
 away,' ' to run off',' Anoj-af-axu^av, ' to take from the milk,' 
 'to wean,' is merely that of ' off,' 'away,' modified by being 
 coupled with the motion or action. 
 In this sense of ' away,' An6 is very commonly met with 
 i in its use with nouns also ; as. An' dipdakfimv ilvat, ' to bo 
 
 * out of sight," properly,-' to be off, away, . . . with respect 
 to the eyes :' e.g. II. ii. 292, fihtov And jjc AXd^oio, ' staying 
 away from his spouse,' that is, 'staying away . . . with 
 respect to his spouse ;' II. xii. 19, Saaoi dit' '/daiwv dpitov Made 
 npopiouatv, ' as many as flow on to the sea from the moun- 
 . tains of Ida ;' II. xvi. 733, Af' tmtwv ikro x«ft<^C^> ' he leapt 
 from his horses (chariot) to the ground ;' II. v. 227, . . . irto 9' 
 inmov ATco^aopat, 'I will descend from the chariot;' lb. 209- 
 10, . . . Atzo naaadXou Aj-xuXu ro^a \ fi/iuri Tip lX6pyjv, ♦ I took the 
 bow from the nail ;' lb. 13, rw phv A<p' tnnotiv, 6 d' Arrb x&oubi; 
 wpwto itet^bz, ' they rushed (to battle) in a chariot, he on the 
 ground, on foot,' properly, 'from a chariot,' 'from the 
 ground,' marking whence, from what point, the warriors 
 directed their efforts. Although, in such examples as Af 
 hmov Aho, 'he leapt from his chariot,' dw might be ren- 
 dered by ' down from,' the notion of ' down' is not rightly 
 attributed to Ano itself, but is suggested by Uie circumstances 
 of the action. 
 
 The cxamplos in whif-h most obviouHly, perhaps, A-i, Vuih 
 The sense- of off," 'away,' 'are those in which it i-* eitn>loyed, 
 a.-i vtn- frt'iuor.tly in Hofji<;r, apart from both noun and 
 verb : e.g. II. i. <>7, f/iuu o drro ).oqbv Airiuai, ' to ward off the 
 plague from us ;' II. ii. 183, prj 8k dieiu, Arzb 3e z^atva.^ pdXe, 
 ' and threw his mantle away.' 
 
 2. ' From,' ' after,' ' since.' When used of time, to mark 
 the date of an event as fixed by counting from a certain 
 point, d;r(i is expressed by 'from,' 'after,' 'since:' e.g. II. 
 viii. 54, d7:b d' uutou {dtinvou) &wpijaaovTo, 'after it (their 
 
176 
 
 OV TOE SEVERAL PBEPOSITIONS. 
 
 meal) they armed themselves ;' that is, the time 'ofi arming 
 themselves is fixed by reckoning from the time of taking 
 their meal, and is thus represented as being after it. That 
 the date is subsequent to, ' after,' and not ' before,' the meal, 
 is owing to t^^act of arming, or second term, occupying, in 
 the order of events as they occur, a point of time nearer to 
 the speaker as compared with the former term or the taking 
 of the meal. In other words, the notion of ' after,' witll re- 
 gard to the act of arming themselves, is suggested by the 
 obvious chronological arrangement of the facts, and not by 
 dxS alone. The mere meaning of ' off,' * apart from,' which 
 is all that d.z6 of itself expresses, would allow it to convey 
 the idea of 'before,' as well as that of ' after.' 
 
 3. ' Back,' (' away.') '.fe<5 often obtains the sense of 
 'back,' but only in compounds, and when used apart or 
 adverbially ; as, dnoStdovat, ' to give back,' ' to repay,' 
 dnoTtiiaceiv, ' to send back :' e.g. Od. xvii. 76, toe roe dwp' 
 drcoKiiti/io d Toi MsviXaoz iSwxev, ' that I may send thee back 
 the presents ;' dnoXd/joteiv, 'to shine back:' e.g. II. xxii. 319, 
 &f ai-j^iafi ditiXafvt' eu^xeoc, 'thus it shone back (was reflected) 
 from the sharp spear;' L. xxi. 594, ndXtv 3' d;rd jro^jroc opouaev, 
 'the brazen spear bounded back.' This sense of dnS is im- 
 mediately derived from that of 'away from,' or rather, to 
 speak more accurately, is the same meaning modified by 
 the circumstances in which it occurs. Thus, d7:o7:ifjaretv 
 means ' to send away,' and in this sense it is commonly 
 used ; but in the "passage from the Odyssey above cited, 
 where Piraius proposes to send away to Telemachus pre- 
 sents which Mcnclaus had given him, it is plain that, as 
 regards Telemachus, the 'sending away' is just the same, 
 under the circumstances, as 'sending back.' When the 
 word drzoxcdecv, ' to call away,' is applied to an exile, as in 
 Herod, iii. 53, xi/t^ou; iz riyv Kipxixpav dmsxdXes rdv A'jxoippova 
 ire TijV Tupapptda, ' he attempted to recall Lycophi'on to the 
 throne,' it is manifest that the 'calling away' from exile 
 is the same thing as 'calling back' to his country. So of 
 dnixuv, ' to hold back,' ' to restrain,' dnouvtiv, * to requite :' 
 e.g. Horn. II. viii. 180, wu poe r^K xoptdrjv dnouverou, ' now 
 requite me fur the care.' 
 
 \4:i6. 
 
 177 
 
 4. ' Different from,' ' at variance with,' * without,' ' beside,' 
 the English prefix ' un-' kc. 'And sometimes obtains, both 
 with a noun and in composition,. a kind of negative sense, 
 answerin'g in English to ' different from,' ' at variance with,' 
 'without,' and to the prefix ' un-.' Thus (a)j!'iii compounds, 
 aa pieev, ' to fill,' ' to cram,' dnopustv, ' to unstop,' dno^wptoz, 
 •away, off, apart from, an altar,' 'without an altar,' 'irre- 
 li^ous ;' dnopvuvat, ' to swear ofl^,' ' to put away or deny by 
 an oath.' The negative sense which dnd here bears springs 
 immediately from that of ' away from,' ' apart from.' Thus, 
 in dnofiw/ieq;, as seen above, the notion of 'away from, apart 
 from, an altar,' suggests that of ' without an altar,' ' irre- 
 ligious;' in drttifiueev, 'to unstop,' the preposition prefixed 
 marks the filling or cramming expressed by ^uuv as being 
 * away,' * off,' and the sign of separation or putting apart 
 is, under the circumstances, equivalent to a negative ; in 
 dnopvwfu, d7c6 prefixed to dpvuvae, * to swear,' gives properly 
 the notion of 'swearing ofi' or away from* a thing, or of 
 'putting off or away by swearing,' the oath being the means 
 of placing a person apart from some act or statement, and 
 80 in contrariety with it. Hence dnopwvat may mean either 
 'to swear that one will not do a thing,' or ' to deny on oath 
 that one has done a thing.' 
 
 b. ' Beside,' ' different from.' In the same way is to be 
 explained the origin of the sense of 'beside,' 'different 
 from :' e.g. Od. xi. 344-5, di epiloe, ou pdv r^pev dnb axonoij oiio' 
 dic6 So^Tjz I ptiiJeerai PaaiXeea Kepiippeov, ' the very prudent 
 queen speaks not beside the mark (indiscreetly), nor at 
 variance with our opinion ;' where dnb axonou, properly 
 meaning ' away from the mark,' is equivalent to ' not hit- 
 ting, missing, beside, the mark,' and dnb Sfi^tji;, 'away from 
 our opinion,' is the same in sense as ' not in accordance 
 with,' and hence ' at variance with, contrary to, our opinion.' 
 Thnc. i. 70, oiJrwc obH' iJ/isJc i^aupcurrbv oMkv nenoe^xa/iev ol>8' 
 dnb Tou dvifptonelou rpoitou, ' thus we have done nothing that 
 is either strange or contrary to, out of accord with, the 
 common course of human conduct;' that is, 'away or apart 
 from,' and so ' different from, and contrary to, the common 
 course of human conduct.' II. i. 562, . . . dXX' dnb ^D/taiij | 
 
 12 
 
178 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 lia)jLov ifioi laeat, 'you will be more distasteful to me;' that 
 is, *3'ou will be more away from, removed from, out of 
 accord with, and hence disagreeable to, me.' In the phrase 
 antuduv dsib ^uzTjpoz, Soph. Oid. Col. 900, ' to hurry at full 
 speed,' properly, 'without bridle,' 'unrestrained,' ino has 
 the sense of ' without,' ' free from,' which comes from that 
 of 'away from,' ' apart from,' ' without the presence of.' 
 
 5. * Quite,' ' entirely.' In some compounds, dao has the 
 meaning of ' qnite,' ' entirely,' that is, obtains an intensive 
 force. Thus, dnofttfipwaxetv, ' to eat up,' ' to devour ;' dno- 
 daxpueiv, 'to cry very much;' dnooe/muvecv, 'to make very 
 august.' With this intensive sense of dso, into which that 
 of ' away' may have passed, just as ix, * out,' does into that 
 of ' out and out,' ' quite,' we may compare the use of our 
 'away' iu such expressions as 'to cry away' for 'to keep 
 crying,' ' to strive away' for ' to keep striving.' 
 
 Summary of the significations of d:c6, 
 
 1. ' Off,' ' away :' (a.) of space ; ' off,' ' away :' with motion, 
 
 ' away from,' ' from.' 
 (6.) of time ; ' from,' ' after,' ' since.' 
 
 2. ' Away,' ' back.' 
 
 3. 'Different from,' 'at variance with,' 'without,' 'beside,' 
 'un-.' 
 
 4. ' Quite,' ' entirely.' 
 
 Uses of d7t6 with its case. 
 
 ^Ano, retaining cluiifly the significations of 'from,' 'away 
 from,' ' after,' • since,' is employed with the genitive alone, 
 this case having, iu this connection, its common sense of 
 defining more exactly the preceding term or statement, by 
 marking a specific object as being that with respect to which 
 it is aflirmcd to the exclusion of all others. 
 
 1. 'From,' 'away from.' In marking relative position 
 dffo is used with the genitive in the sense of 'from,' 'away 
 front,' botli with and without motion, a. Without motion ; 
 e.g. II. ii. 292, /livwu dno jjc dkoj^ow, ' staying away from his 
 spouse,' that is, 'staying away . . . with respect to his 
 spouse ;' Soph. Phil. 183, xstrat fiowoz dn dUtov, ' he lies 
 alone, away (oft^ apart), from others;' that is, 'away, off, 
 
 \47t6. 
 
 179 
 
 apart . . . with respect to others ;' Id. ib. 1128, sFc diio tcoUwu 
 TaxMz, where, according to EUeudt, Lex. Soph., the mean- 
 ing is, " anus prajtcr caleros," 'he was appointed one man iu 
 preference to many;' properly, 'one man, apart from, and 
 80 distinguished from, selected from, preferred to, many;' 
 Ilerod. iv. 194, /j ddXaaaa dniitt <Lf riaaapa arddta dnb rrfi 
 Xi/iU7}c, « the sea is four stadia distant from the lake ;' that is, 
 ' is four stadia oft", away, . . . with respect to the lake ;' Or. 
 Att. 824, 24, TpotfT^v dno rwv kfidofujxovra xai kitrd px>wv Xoyea- 
 riou, 'you must count oft; subtract, the subsistence from the 
 seventy-seven minue.' 
 
 b. With motion: e.g. II. xii. 18-19, . . . noTapwu ftivoz 
 tiaaYarbvze(:,\oaaoi dn' '/Saliop dpiiov 81a8e npopiouai, 'hrhigiag 
 the strength of all the rivers that flow on to the sea from 
 tiic mountains of Ida;' that is, 'that flow on to the sea 
 away . . . with respect to the mountains of Ida;' II. xxiv. 
 491-2, . . . UnsTaefj/MTundvTa \ oipea&at ipiXov ulbv ditb Tpoeyjde 
 poXovra, « he hopes every day that he will see his sou coming 
 from Troy,' that is, 'coming away . . . with respect to Troy;' 
 II. X. rj78-9, . . . ttTO 8k xpanjpo: 'M^urj | nXiiou d^uaad/tsvoc 
 Xupou [ishr^Sea ohoi>, ' and made libations to Athene of wine 
 with honey, pouring it from a full goblet;' Soph. Thii. 1134, 
 «fw;7 // ouxir dn' abXUou TzeXure, 'you will no more by your 
 flight bring me forth from my cavern ;' Ilerod. iii. 115, zoraftb; 
 an oTsu rb fjhxrpov ifonuv Xoroz iari, 'a river from which the 
 report is that amber comes ;' Xen. Anab. i. 8, 10, npb ff 
 ubuov dpiMTa diaXeiTzouTa ao^wv dif dUr^Xiov, « chariots stand- 
 ing at a considerable distance from one another.' 
 
 2. In a variety of uses of ditb there arises a somewhat 
 peculiar sense, due to the nature and relations of the terms 
 with which the preposition is employed, neither this nor the 
 case having undergone any real change in their meaning. 
 Thus : 
 
 a. 'On,' 'ill.' '//ffi with the genitive obtains seemingly, 
 in some phrases, the meaning of 'on,' 'in.' Thus, in 
 phrnsus such as d IxCwoz l^pwtv dm iTmou, Xen. Anab.'i. 2, 
 7, ' which he used to hunt on horse,' properly, « from horse,' 
 throwing his spear from the horse. The term iifijptueu mus't 
 be understood as implying whatever actions are involved iu 
 
180 
 
 OF TUB SEVERAL I'llEPOSITIONS. 
 
 the chaso, so that dnb tmrou idijptuev may be rendered by 
 ' he threw the spear from the horse in hunting,' and dno and 
 the genitive will then have their usual sense. Xen. Cyrop. iii. 
 3, 60, Twv if 'Aaauptwp ol ftlu dizb tUv iftu/Jtdrwv nfionayroovre^, 
 ' those of the Assyrians who fought as defenders in (from) 
 the fortifications;' properly, who being stationed in the 
 fortifications defended them by throwing weapons from 
 these. Ucre npofia^oupre^ may be considered as having a 
 pregnant sense, just as i&ijpeuev had in the preceding ex- 
 ample. 
 
 6. 'From,' 'after,' 'since.' In marking the point from, 
 which the date of an event is reckoned, djc6 with the geni- 
 tive is very commonly used, and is rendered in English by 
 ' from,' ' after,' ' since.' E.g. II. viii. 54, d::6 ff auruu (sc. 
 ieiitvou) diopi^aaovTo, ' after it (their meal) they armed them- 
 selves.' As has been above explained, the peculiar meaning 
 of ' after,' which Ano seems here to bear, is properly due to 
 the relative position in the order of events that the meal and 
 the putting on armor occupy, considered from the speaker's 
 point of view, '/fcri deiituou would properly mean ' from, 
 away from, . . . with respect to the meal,' and might sig- 
 nify ' before' as well as < after' it. It has the sense of ' after 
 the meal,' only because, in the order of events as seen by 
 the speaker, the meal comes before and the putting on 
 armor after. So Herod, i. 126, inel re Sk Anb deist/ou J^aav, 
 'when they came from the table,' 'after the meal;' Id. ii. 
 44, ilvat de Irea itf ou Tupov oixiouat rpojxoaea xae deaj[iita, 
 ' from the time they are dwellers in Tyro ;' -^sch. Prom. 
 855, TtifiTTTig ff dit" aurou j-ivva, 'the fifth generation from 
 (after) him;* Id. Pers. 173, d^' ointep natz iftbc <rreWaf arparbv 
 . . . ocj[eT<u, ' since my sou departed.' 
 
 3. 'From,' 'of.' 'Ano is very commonly employed with 
 the genitive of the object that marks the source or origin 
 from which another comes ; and this noun in the genitive, ac- 
 cording to its nature, and to its obvious relation to the preced- 
 ing term which it qualifies, expresses the idea of parent, nice, 
 cause or motive, means or instrument, material, &c. In all 
 these cases d;rd retains the sense of ' from,' and the genitive 
 that of with respect to,' * in the case of,' and neither in itself 
 
 'And. 
 
 181 
 
 considered, conveys the meaning of parentage, source, cause, 
 means, material, nor even that of proceeding from. 
 
 a. 'From,' 'of.' 'Ajio with the genitive is used in connec- 
 tion with verbs signifying 'to be,' 'to be born,' &c>, as 
 Yiyi/so&ui, 'to be born,' eluat, 'to be,' fuvae, 'to be born,' to 
 mark ])ureutago or race. E.g. Od. xix. 162-3, dMd xal &z 
 fioi eink rebi/ j-it/o;, bjtno&tv iaar | ou fdp datb Spuo; iaat ndkat- 
 fdruu, ouff dnb nirprfi, 'yet even thus, tell me your race, 
 whence you are ; for thou art not descended from the ancient 
 oak, nor from a rock.' The preceding verse shows that Aitb 
 dpuoz, 'from the oak,' dnb Tihprjz, 'from a rock,' mark the 
 parentage disclaimed for a person, and the sense gathered 
 from the context will be, ' thou art not, in thy birth, from 
 the oak, nor from a rock.' But ditb Spubz, ditb nirpyjz, taken 
 by themselves, and apart from the notion of birth contained 
 ill yljrusa&ae, Avhich dno qualifies, mean no more than ' from 
 . . . with respect to the oak,' 'from . . . with respect to 
 a rock,' and suggest no idea of parentage. ySsch. tSept. c. 
 Tlieb. 1023-4, Jwi/w rb xoti/bu imMfj^uov, ou neipuxa/jiev, | fir/vpbz 
 ra}.mvTfZ, xdnb Suar^pou naxpbz, ' terrible is the coniiuon stock 
 from which we are sjirung, a wretched mother and an ill- 
 fated father;' Soph. CEd. Tyr. 415, dp olaff d,p tSv el; ' dost 
 thou know from (of) whom thou art descended?' Id. ib. 
 1184, d<p iLv aurbz iifuv Td}.az, ' of whom, wretched man that 
 I am, I am myself the ollspring." Compare of dnb llXdrmvoz, 
 'those who derive their name from Plato,' and other like 
 expressions given in Passow's Lexicon, s. v. dno. 
 
 b. ' From.' In a more general way, dnb is used with the 
 genitive of the object to which auother is referred as its 
 source, as that from which it is derived : e.g. ^sch. Pers. 
 603, fiooz t' df' Ayi^z Sieuxbv eunorov ydXa, ' white, delicious 
 milk from a pure cow.' Cf. Id. ib. 606. 
 
 ' From,' ' on,' ' by.' Of the same nature is dnb with the 
 genitive case used with Tpiipuv and some other verbs, to 
 mark that from which a thing is derived: e.g. Xen. Anab. 
 i. 5, 12, <L-:t» xoiwj rplificv, ' to feed from (on) the cotiuaoii 
 store ;' Od. v. 40, /.axun^ dxb ).r/tdoz oicaw, ' having obtained a 
 share of (that is, that comes from) the booty;' Herod, iv. 22, 
 (^diuuae dnb ^pr^i, ' they live by hunting,' ' from the chase ;' 
 
182 
 
 OF THB SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Id. iv. 46, ^toovTtz fi^ dx' dpirou dXX' ebri xrijviiov, ' living, not 
 by agriculture, but on their herds;' Id. iv. 103, (^ditn d/td 
 ijjtTjZ xai TtoXi/iou, 'they live by plunder and war.' 
 
 c. Very nearly related to the above are many examples itj 
 which djri with the genitive denotes, with regard to any 
 action or state, the source to which it is to be rot'errod, that 
 from which it is considered to proceed : e.g. Orat. Att. 739, 
 21, Tciouaiot dizb r^c Ttokewz yq-i^o/jiei/oi, ' becoming rich by the 
 state,' the state being the source from which they derive 
 their riches. The phrase might be rendered 'by means of 
 the state,' but the explanation would be the same. Id. 25, 
 ult., dit' aiiTwD Twv npoffidrwv xpiveiv, 'to judge from the facts 
 themselves,' the facts being the source, or furnishing the 
 grounds of the judgment. Soph. (Ed. Tyr. 395-6, r^v oW An' 
 oUovHv ah Tzpohffdmjz l;fo'>', | our' ix &€iov too yviorov, ' with this 
 (divination) you did not appear, having ascertained it either 
 from auspicy or from some one of the gods;' Id. G']d. Col. 
 320, ifoeSpa yoiuv dn' dppdTcov aaivet ps, ' accordingly, with 
 smiling face she makes to me friendly signs of recognition 
 with her eyes,' dji' dppdrwv expressing that the signs of 
 recognition proceed from the countenance. (See Ellendt, 
 Lex. Soph. s. V. dn6.) 
 
 d. To this head, again, may be referred the use of dno in 
 such expressions as dn' tar^z, *on an equality,' *on equal 
 terms,' dnd anouSf^c, 'in earnest,' dno Toyrijz, 'by chance,' 
 which admit mostly of easy explanation, And and the geni- 
 tive giving the character of an action by indicating its 
 source. Thus, ebr' tarfi, ' on equal terms,' being added as 
 the characteristic of an action, the sense is properly that it 
 proceeds from or has its origin in what is equal ; Anb anouS^z, 
 that it has its source in what is earnest ; And riij^rjz, in what 
 is accidental. E.g. II. xii. 233, . . . el 8' irebv 8ij zotkov Anb 
 oRouSfj!; AyopEuui;, 'if, in truth, you say this in earnest,' that 
 is, • if what you say has its origin in earnestness ;' Orat. Att. 
 1^9, 21, oi)x An' iai^i; bpw ^/ilv rs xal Totz dXXotz ttjv PouXjjv ouaav, 
 'I do not see that our measures and those of others stand on 
 the same footing,' that is, 'that they have their source in 
 equality;' Id. 141, 11, dip' kaurSu, 'of his own accord,' sua 
 5ponfe; that i8,his conduct originating with himself. 
 
 'Alto. 
 
 183 
 
 e. 'On the quarter of,' 'on.' *At:6 with the genitive is 
 used to mark the situation of an object relatively to some 
 known point, as the points of the compass, and as con- 
 sidered from the speaker's position, where in English we say 
 'on the quarter of,' 'on.' E.g. Soph. Aj. 864, rr^v A(p' fjXtou 
 Ppkov (xiXtudov), ' the path on the east,' ' on the quarter of 
 the rays of the sun,' 'that looks from the rays of the sun ;' 
 Id. (Ed. Col. 1247, «f pev Aip' AeMou dutrpaiu, ' on the quarter 
 of the west,' that is, 'from, looking from, the setting sun.' 
 The preposition npbz with the genitive is employed in the 
 same way, and may properly be compared with Ak6: e.g. 
 Herod, iii. 102, ocxiuuai npbz fiopiou Avipou, ' they dwell on 
 the north,' ' on the quarter of the north,' properly, ' towards 
 the north wind.' The diflerence is, that dffi with the geni- 
 tive, in giving the position of an object, marks the fixed 
 point, by reference to which it is determined, as that from 
 which it looks toward the speaker; thus, d<p' rjUou Suapiov, ' on 
 the quarter of the setting sun,' is, properly speaking, and 
 retaining for dno its appropriate meaning, ' from the setting 
 sun,' looking from the setting sun towards the speaker. 
 In the same way the Latin language uses a, ab, with the 
 ablative; as, ab oricnte, 'on the cast,' properly, 'from the 
 quarter of the east.' On the contrary, npiii; with the geni- 
 tive gives the position by marking the fixed point, by 
 reference to which it is dotennined, as that towards which 
 it looks from the speaker : e.g. Ilerod. iii. 102, otxiouae npbz 
 fiopiou Avipou, ' they dwell on the north,' properly, looking 
 towards the north from the speaker. 
 
 'Of,' 'concerning.' To this place maybe referred such 
 examples as Herod, iv. 53, raura pkv to. Anb tootImv twv 
 norapaiv, ' this is what I have to say of these rivers ;' that 
 is, ' these are the things that relate to these rivers ;' properly, 
 ' these are the things on the part of, on the quarter of, that 
 are to be referred to, these rivers;' Id. iv. 195, rd dnb t^c 
 i/^ffou . . . oixbra iarc dXr^&r/iJi, 'what relates to the island;' 
 Id. vii. 195, ra ifioukouTO nuDia9ax dnb rijc SipUo> HTpaurj:, 
 'with reference to the expedition of Xerxes.' Comparing 
 these with the examples of the use of dnb with the genitive 
 just above explained, it can hardly be doubted that the 
 
184 
 
 OF TUK SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 proper sense of the prepositioD and of the case is the same 
 in both, and that the explanation involved in the translation 
 given by Schweighaiiser of the example from Ilorod. iv. 
 53, namely, "quce ab his jluviis pervmerunt ad nosiram 
 nolUiam," is more than questionable. (See Schweigh. Lex. 
 Ilerod. 8. v. (Lto, 7.) 
 
 /. ' On the part of,' ' so far as relates to.' In another class 
 of examples, dno with the genitive, although having origi- 
 nally the same meaning as in the preceding cases, does no 
 more than mark the object to which any thing is referred, 
 on the part of which it is affirmed to exist or to be done, 
 and is rendered in English by 'on the part of,' <so far as 
 relates to,' 'so far as depends on.' E.g. Ilerod. ix. 7, to dit' 
 ^fiiwv, 'bo fur as we can,' 'in so far as depends on us;' 
 properly, ' as for what {to) lies on our part,' dz' fj/iiiou being 
 interpreted in the same way with dy' ^Xiuu dua/uov, ' ou the 
 quarter of the setting sun,' above considered. Soph. Phil. 
 556-7, ioz fiddm W fioc \ uewrepou ^ouXeuft dii' \l[iYecaJu I'/S'^^ ' ^^.t 
 I may learn what more strange (cruel) design on the part 
 of the Argives you have ;' Id. ib. 1077, <5 nXrjpiaTUTov aitUov 
 Ximcu: Tcn; dsz' ifwu (= ifj^^, Ellendt, Lex. Soph.), ' O cave, 
 most full of my grief;' that is, 'of grief on my part,' *of 
 grief to be referred to me ;' Id. (Ed. Tyr. 512-13, r^ cbr' ^/i^c 
 ippeudc oukot' I dfX:jaei xaxiav, ' wherefore, in my mind, so far 
 as depends on my opinion, she shall never bo charged with 
 crime;' properly, if the same terms of local reference could 
 be applied to the miud as to the points of the compass, ' on 
 the part of, on the quarter of, my mind.' While such forms 
 of expression are not admissible in English, it is yet true 
 that the effect of dnS and the genitive is to denote here, as 
 in the case of df' ^Uou duafuov above, the object to which a 
 statement is to bo referred as peculiarly appertaining to it, 
 that on the part of which it is affirmed to be true. 
 
 Of the same nature are the cases in wliich dno is said to 
 be redundant. E.g. Ilerod. vii. 19, djco ttjz ^Xaii^z roue xXdSoiK, 
 • the branches of the olive ;' that is, ' the branches referred 
 to the olive,' ♦ that are found on the part of the olive,' ' that 
 belong to the olive;' ^sch. Suppl. 525, yw; dnb TuaS' luoixoe, 
 ' dwellers in this land,' properly, ' from, on the quarter of, 
 
 'Itco. 
 
 185 
 
 this land ;' Or. Att. 580, 1, tjjv d:tb Tffi ipn^pfi mxfiiav *ai xaxb- 
 voiav, < the bitterness and malice of (ou the part of) the 
 heart.' 
 
 g. ' From,' ' in consequence of,' 'by reason of.' 'Jno with 
 the genitive, having the same sense of ' from,' with the idea 
 of source or origin, may sometimes be rendered by * from,' 
 'hftcr,' 'in consequence of,' 'by reason of,' 'in pursuance 
 of,' expressing, as it does, the reason or motive of any thing. 
 E.g. Ilerod. i. 209, ou»u)v iare p^X"^^ ^''^ "^V ^^'"^ tuuttjz 
 oiide/uij, TO fiij xsci/ov inijiouXiueev i/jtoi, 'from this vision, it 
 cannot be that he is not plotting against me;' that is, 'by 
 reason of,' ' in consequence of, this vision.' Perhaps, how- 
 ever, a more satisfactory meaning would be, 'looking to, 
 having reference to, this vision,' which would rather bring 
 this example under the preceding case, e. Xen. Anab. i. 
 5, 32, dntt TOO uutou arjfisiou, ' from, in pursuance of, the same 
 signal;' Id. ib. iv. 6, 3, dab 3e tootou ixeivo^ voxrof dizoSpdiz 
 ipX^^^i ' from this cause, in consequence of this ;' Id. ib. iv. 
 1, 5, dnb napajjiXaetoi, ' by order,' ' in pursuance of orders ;' 
 .^sch. Agam. 1275, dXX' tadi tXij/uov ova' an' vjtoXjiou ippevo^, 
 ' bold by reason of a courageous heart.' 
 
 h. 'From,' 'by,' 'with.' 'Ano with the genitive is used to 
 express the means or instrument, and also the agent of an 
 action, being rendered in English by 'from,' 'with,' 'by.' 
 In this case, the preposition and the genitive of the noun 
 may be most properly explained as expressing the object 
 from which the action proceeds, the preposition having 
 the sense of ' from,' and the genitive its common significa- 
 tion of ' with respect to.' E.g. II. xi. G75, I^Xt^t' iv npwToiatv 
 i(a,Z dnb xupbz dxovTt, ' was struck with a spear from my 
 hand,' or 'by my hand.' In this example is seen how 
 directly the idea of the instrnment or means is derived from 
 that of the object from which any thing proceeds. II. xxiv. 
 G05, rooc /^ev 'AnoXlatv niipvtv dn' dpyupeuto jiiuio, ' them Apollo 
 slew with his silver bow.' ^sch. Eunien. 674-5, Ifiij xtXtuoi 
 Todad' dnb yMwpt,<: tpipuv \ ^fjifov dtxuiav cue ^C XeXej-pivtov, 
 ♦ now I bid these persons give a just decision with their 
 mind,' the decision or vote being represented as coming 
 from the mind. To this place might be referred the pas- 
 
186 
 
 OF THE SEVBBAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 sage from Soph. (Ed. Col. 320, explained above, 3, c, foeSpi 
 jouu An' d/t/idriov traivei jib, ' with smiling face she makes to 
 me friendly signs of recognition with her eyes ;' Xen. 
 Anab. i. 1, 9, arpdreofia awiXe^ev dsro toutiov r&v j^p'^/iartov, 
 ' with this money he collected an army ;' Orat. Att. 33, 24, 
 U(MV rrTjV nohv dnb -ctav laurou jcoviov, ' to honor the state with 
 his own labor ;' Herod, i. 14, obdkv /tiya Ipyou dn' wWou dXXo 
 ijivero, ' no other great work was done by him ;' Id. iii. 78, 
 xd dxo flfir^zdemeat ytvofieva, 'what was done by Prcxaspes.' 
 It may be remarked, however, that this use of dno is com- 
 paratively rare, Lzo being commonly employed to express 
 the agent. The distinction made between these preposi- 
 tions thus used by Ellendt, Lex. Soph. i. p. 194, who refers to - 
 Hermann ad Elcctr. 65, namely, that dno marks the occa- 
 sion, opportunity, or the reason also and cause of an action, 
 while bno refers to its author himself, is mainly true as to 
 the fact, but does not include the ground of it, which is to 
 be found, probably, in the proper sense of the prepositions 
 themselves as distinguished the one from the other. See 
 below under bito. 
 
 i. 'From,' 'of.' 'And with the genitive is used, again, in 
 a kindred sense, to express the material of which any thing 
 is made, just as ix is more commonly used for the same 
 purpose. E.g. ^sch. Prom. 944-5, orav de reuyr) Zsus: obr' o/i- 
 tpaxoz ncxpdz \ oinov, 'whenever Zeus makes wine from the 
 sour (unripe) grape ;' Id. Pers. 606-7, dxijparov re pr^rpb^ 
 djpiaz dno | noibv iwlotd^ d/miXou ydi/oz rods, 'this is pure 
 drink from a wild mother (the vine) ;' Domosth. 256, 24, 
 nifauo; dno raXdvcatv i^^xoura, 'a crown made of sixty 
 talents.' In this use of dno, the preposition has its proper 
 meaning of 'from,' and the noun in the genitive denotes 
 the object from which the thing made may be considered 
 as proceeding. More exactly, the preposition dno shows 
 that the thing made stands in the relation of 'from' to 
 some object, and, accordingly, comes from it, or has its 
 origin in it, and the genitive specifies the object with re- 
 spect to which distinctively this relation is affirmed. 
 
 'Alto. Aid. 
 
 187 
 
 TABLE OF THE BIONIFICATIONS OF inl WITD ITS CASE. 
 
 SigDificationi of int. 
 
 Ganitiva: 'w 
 
 th reapeot to.' 
 
 1. 'Off," away.' 
 
 1. 'Away from.' 
 
 
 
 
 •From,' 'away 
 
 'a. Of space; 'from,' 
 
 
 
 from.' 
 
 ' away from.' 
 
 4. Of time; 'from," af- 
 ter,' 'since.' 
 
 ' a. Parentago,&o.; 'from,' 
 'of;' 'on," by.' 
 
 2. 'From,' 'away from.' 
 
 2. 
 
 
 b. Relative position, &o.; 
 'from,' 'on the quar- 
 ter of,' ' on.' 
 
 e. Oeneraily; ' on tlie part 
 of,' 'so far as de- 
 pends on,' 'in BO fur 
 
 
 
 .Source; 'from:' 
 
 as rt'liitoB to.' 
 
 
 
 d. Cause, motive, reason; 
 
 
 
 'from,' 'in conse- 
 
 
 
 quence of,' ' by rea- 
 
 
 
 son of.' 
 
 
 
 e. Instrument, means. 
 
 
 
 agent; 'with," by.' 
 
 
 
 /. Material; 'from,' 'of.' 
 
 Aid. 
 
 Aid, having also a poetical form, diad, as in ^schylus, 
 may be considered as having probably the same radical 
 with &'c, 'twice,' Sum, 'two,' and with the Latin di-, dis-, as 
 in divido, distinguo. Compare Sia-xoaiot, ' two hundred.' 
 
 Significations of 8id. 
 
 1. 'Between.' The primary signification of 8id is 'be- 
 tween,' that is, having a regard to two objects, 'with an 
 interval between.' This is seen in many compounds; as, 
 diatpelv, 'to divide,' 'to part,' 'to take apart,' 'leaving an 
 interval between ;' StaPmveiv, ' to stand with the legs ajiart,' 
 as in II. xii. 458, Aristoph. Eq. 77, cited by Passow ; Sta^- 
 Ti]i:, 'a compass,' so named from having the legs apart; 
 didyyeXoc, ' a messenger going between two parties ;' dtaftdX- 
 Xeiv, 'to cast over, across,' that is, over an intervening 
 space ; SeaXetnav, ' to leave an interval ;' Staxadil^w, ' to seat 
 apart,' with a space between. Nor is this sense uncommon 
 in the use of did with nouns ; as, did noXXdi, ' at a wide in- 
 terval,' did xpovou,- ' at an interval of time.' 
 
188 
 
 OF TOE SEVERAL FBErOSITIONS. 
 
 2. From this notion of ' between,' ' with an interval be- 
 tween,' are derived a number of other meanings, viz. : 
 
 a. That of succession, and of transmission ; that is, with 
 the notion of an object following another at an interval, as 
 in the compounds StaSij^soSai, 'to receive one from an- 
 other,' 'to succeed,' as one king does another, StaSeSovae, 
 ' to give from hand to hand,' as the torch-bearers handed 
 the torch from one to another {Xa/jotdSa dXXijkuK:). See Plat. 
 Sep. p. 328, A, cited by Passow. The same sense is seen 
 io such expressions as Siu nivrt ■^fiep&v, ' every five days,' 
 that is, ' at intervals of five days.' 
 
 h. That of 'in turn,' 'one by one,' or of distribution; 
 that is, with the idea that the objects which constitute any 
 number, whether considered individually or iu groups, and 
 so the parts of a whole, are to be taken separately, either 
 simply or iu succession. The ground-idea is that of placing 
 at intervals. Thus, in the compounds Siavifiuv, ' to distri- 
 bute,' that is, ' to assign a lot or share to each one of any 
 number ;' Stafu^ftuv, ' to count up one by one,' as in Eurip. 
 Iph. iu Taur. 966, referred to by Passow, diardaaetp, ' to 
 arrange in ranks,' ' to post the divisions of an army each in 
 its place,' SuOjdoz, 'set with jewels,' 'having (precious) 
 stones at intervals.' 
 
 e. That of distinction, as opposed to confounding to- 
 gether ; that is, with the idea of placing objects apart, with 
 an interval between: e.g. dtayej-vwaxuv, 'to distinguish,' 'to 
 perceive objects apart from each other ;' 8ea<pu>vuv, ' to sound 
 apart,' 'to have a distinct sound;' dia-/eiu, 'to pour diflcrent 
 ways,' 'to pour in distinct streams.' 
 
 To this is very nearly allied that of difference. Thus, 
 StaipwuM signifies ' to have different sounds,' as well as to 
 have a distinct sound, or one that is not confounded with 
 another. 
 
 d. This sense of distinction, and hence of difference, 
 gives origin immediately to that of superiority; as in Horn. 
 U. xii. 104, b 8' titptne xai dia itdfTwv, 'ho was distinguished 
 above all,' properly, 'was comely in such measure as to be 
 distinct from, different from, and thus superior, to all.' The 
 meaning conveyed here by 8td is its proper one of the stand- 
 
 Atd. 
 
 189 
 
 ing apart, the being separated from an object in regard to tho 
 property described by l-pme ; and from this comes readily 
 that of being compared with and distinguished above it. 
 
 e. Almost parallel with this, again, is the sense of con- 
 trast, rivalry, variance, enmity, relations in which objects 
 may be placed towards each other by being regarded as 
 apart or divided by an interval. Compare SXXa, 'other 
 things,' which, in the same way, obtains from the secondary 
 meaning of 'other,' 'different from,' that of 'on the other 
 hand.' This signification of Sid is seen in a number of 
 compounds ; as, 8td<po/>o;, ' difierent,' and also ' disagreeing,' 
 ' at variance with,' as, Eurip. Med. 579, ij noUa ttoUoTc e7/u 
 Stdfofioz Ppormv, 'surely in many things am I different 
 from, or at variance with, many Inen.' So Si^deiv, 'to 
 contend as a rival in singing;' as, Theocr. Id. v. 22, dXid yi 
 tot otauao/tru iare x' dnt'tTnjz, ' I will contend with you in sing- 
 ing ;' dta^diXstv, ' to slander,' ' to traduce,' may have meant, 
 properly, ' to set at variance, ' to put enmity between.' 
 
 3. ' Through.' Thus far the significations of did distinctly 
 involve the notion of interval between objects. A second 
 class of meanings of this word, while they contain tho 
 same idea of interval between, have regard rather to an 
 interspace between the component parts or the substance 
 of an object, or between the members of which a number 
 or group is made up, and presuppose a parting or interval 
 between tlicni such as to allow a passing through it. Au 
 action or motion by which an object is carried through 
 another, is described by 8ed to show that it occupies this 
 interspace, or passes through an interval between its parts 
 or members. This is expressed in English by tlie word 
 ' through,' related to ' door,' and to the Greek Mpa. Thus, 
 in the compounds 8idyetu, ' to lead through,' Suaovretu, ' to 
 pierce through,' Stinizeusiv, 'to ride through,' 8eamupeusa3at, 
 ' to march through,' and very many besides, there is seen 
 to be involved the idea of an object divided by an interval 
 between its parts, through which interval another object 
 passes. And so in the phrase 8i' ipy^z iiuat, ' to be angry 
 with a person,' literally, ' to go through anger with (towards) 
 a person,' the same sense occurs, only used figuratively. 
 
190 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Compare II. xiv. 288, 8i ijipoi; al&ip' Ixavev, ' he came to ether 
 through the air.' Of course, if what haa here Lccn said he 
 true, it is not proper to say that 8id signifies ' through and 
 out again,' this added phrase ' and out again' heing no part 
 of the seuse of oid. 
 
 4. From this sense of ' through' come other meanings of 
 8id of common occurrence. Or, perhaps, it would he more 
 accurate to suy, that this local sense of 8td is variously 
 modified by the circumstances in which it is used. 
 
 a. 'By means of,' 'through the agency of.' Aid very 
 commonly obtains the sense of 'by means of,' 'through the 
 agency of,' with the idea of a thing occupying the interval 
 between the object efl'ected or result and the motive cause. 
 For example, in 8c' djyiXou XiyBiVy 'to speak thiough the 
 agency of a messenger,' the messenger occupies tlic interval 
 or intornicdiutc ground between the speaker and the thing 
 spoken ; that is, 8id denotes that there is an interval between 
 the speaker and what is spoken, and this is occupied by the 
 ijytXoz. Strictly speaking, 8td does not of itself express the 
 notion of means or agency, but only that of interval, being 
 hence capable of showing that the action to which it is 
 attached is perfonned, not immediately, but intermediately ; 
 the idea of agent or means, and its relation to the action, 
 which 8td has already marked as intermediately performed, 
 are expressed by a noun that is suitable, and by the appro- 
 priate case. Thus, in 8e' AjjeXou Xiyuv, 8td shows that the 
 action of speaking "contained in X£yuv is performed inter- 
 mediately ; djji?.ou, being the name of a messenger, intro- 
 duces an object fit to perform the action of speaking inter- 
 mediately, and, by having the form of the genitive case, is 
 shown to be connected with Xij-eiv 3td as the object to which 
 the action is referred. 
 
 Here might seem to belong, at first view, such phrases as 
 8td aizo'jof^z, 8cd Tdj(noz, xoietu, ' to do earnestly or hastily,' ' to 
 do quickly," that is, 'by moans of earnestness,' 'by means 
 «f haste ;' but they ought rather to be considered as being 
 of the same nature with 8e' djtpfi tii/at, 'to be angry,' above 
 mentioned; for they do not so much describe an intervening 
 means or agency as the circumstances of an action. 
 
 Jid. 
 
 191 
 
 b. ' Of,' '(made) of.' When the material of which a thing 
 is made is introduced by 8id, the force of the preposition is 
 really the same as in the preceding case; that is, it marks 
 the action of making as heing intermediately performed; 
 and the material is shown by the genitive case to occupy 
 the intermediate ground between the maker and the thing 
 made : e.g. 8t' iXiipauToz, 8id Xi9mv, neirooj/iivov, ' made of 
 ivory,' 'of stones.' Here the preposition 8id shows that 
 there is an interval between the action with it8«proper agent, 
 and the thing made, and the genitive forms iXiipavroi: and 
 )^&iov show that the interval is occupied by objects fitted to 
 be the material for the object made. 
 
 c. 'For,' 'on account of.' When 8id is used to express 
 the ground or reason of an action, that 'for' or *on account 
 of which it is performed, it has at bottom the same idea of 
 interval, and hence of ' through,' that has been seen in the 
 preceding cases to he contained in this preposition ; that is 
 to say, the object introduced as the ground or reason stands 
 intermediately between an action or state and the personal 
 agent to whom it is referred. E.g. 8iu tuutu dTzf^Xdev, 'he 
 went away on this account;' the departure is stated as 
 occurring, not directly, but with something intermediate 
 between it and the subject of the affirmation ; and this inter- 
 mediate object is expressed by raura. And the mind readily 
 attributes the notion of ground or reason to whatever 
 occupies the intermediate space between the personal agent 
 and its action and is suitable to afford a ground or reason ; 
 just as in the former cases of the means or agent, and of the 
 material. 
 
 5. 'Through and through,' 'quite,' 'utterly.' There is 
 still another meaning of 8td, occurring, however, only in 
 compounds, namely, that of ' through and through,' ' quite,' 
 ' utterly :' e.g. SiUj'ifii^seu, 'to wet through and through,' • to 
 wet utterly ;' okuUihi^, ' quite clear;' 8(axaieiv, 'to burn up ;' 
 Sidxevoz, * quite empty.' This is merely an intensive sense 
 of Std, ' through,' and may be compared with the like use of 
 dud, 7[S(ic, xard, &c. in Greek, with per in Latin, as perdurus, 
 'very hard,' 'thoroughly hard,' and with 'through and 
 through,' ' out and out,' in English. 
 
192 
 
 OF ini BBVEBAL PBEF06ITI0NS. 
 
 Summary of Ike significatwna of 8id. 
 
 Jtd. 1. Interval between ; ' between ;' hence : 
 
 a. Succession; 'from hand to hand,' ' every.' 
 
 b. Distribution ; 'each in turn,' ' one by one,' • eveiy.' 
 
 c. Distinction, difference ; ' apart,' ' from,' &c. 
 
 d. Superiority in comparison ; * above,' 'before,' &c. 
 
 e. Contrast, rivalry, enmity. 
 
 2. In the space between ; ' through ;' hence : 
 
 a. Of space, and of time ; ' through.' 
 
 b. Of the intervening means or agent ; ' through,' 
 
 ' by means of.' 
 
 c. Of the material ; * of,' '(made) of.' 
 
 d. Ground or reason ; ' for,' ' on account of.' 
 
 e. Intensively ; ' through and through,' ' quite,' 
 
 ' utterly.' 
 
 6I0NIFICATI0N AND USB OP dcd AVITII CASES. 
 
 I. Jid with the genitive. 
 
 1. Interval between, and hence distribution, at equal 
 intervals ; ' every.' Jtd is usfed with the genitive to express 
 the notion of interval between, and derivatively that of dis- 
 tribution, the occurring at equal intervals, rendered in 
 English by ' every.' Jed may be thus used (a) of any object: 
 e.g. Thuc. iii. 21, diu Sixa dk iizdX^eatv Ttupyoc fjoav fisydHot, 
 ' there were large tow^s every tenth battlement,' properly, 
 ' at the interval of ten battlements.' The number of towers 
 being more than one, and the intervals being multiplied 
 accordingly, there arises the notion of a succession of towers 
 at the interval of ten battlements each, expressed in English 
 by 'every ten battlements.' The same notion of interval 
 between, and of equal successive intervals, suggested by 
 its connection with a plural noun, is seen in the phrase dt' 
 iaou: e.g. Xen. (Econ. iv. 21, imi dk Idwjfia^sv . . . Si' taou 
 ri ntfureuftiva, ' when he admired the plants set at equal 
 intervals.' 
 
 b. Of time; in regard either to general expressions, or to 
 specific denominations of time. Thus (1), Std with the goui- 
 
 M. 
 
 193 
 
 tivc is used to mark the interval of time at which any thing 
 occurs, rendered in English by 'at the interval of,' 'after:' 
 e.g. Xen. Cyrop. v. 5, 41, xaXiaou; b KuaSdp^^ -tf^iou rbv Kupov, 
 ,• dt(t ^(j6uou idovza aiirbv, auudemuetu, 'as having seen him after 
 a period of time,' that is, 'with an interval of time;' Herod, 
 vi. 118, dUd fuv 8c' irimv sixoat Otj^cuoc aurol ix dsonponlou 
 ixofjuaavro ini Jij^ov, ' the Thcbans themselves, after twenty 
 years, at an interval of twenty years, carried it (the statue) 
 to Delium :' Id. viii. 27, iv rip dia piaoo xpbvtp, ' in the inter- 
 vening time,' literally, ' in the time that was between,' or, 
 'at the interval of the space in the midst.' The genitive 
 case here, as also in the other examples, signifies 'with 
 respect to;' bo that 8m /xiaoo is equivalent to 'between ... 
 said with respect to what lies in the midst' Soph. Phil. 
 748, ^xei yap wirij 8id j^pbvou, ' for she is come after a (long) 
 period of time.' 
 
 (2.) To be distinguished from these, although having the 
 same meaning both of the preposition and of the case, are 
 the examples in which 8cd is used with the genitive to mark 
 successive intervals of time. The difference lies merely in 
 the repetition of the intervals suggested by the context, as 
 above explained of expressions relating to space generally, 
 and conveyed in English by the term 'every.' E.g. Ilcrod. 
 iii. 97, ooToe auvapifOTspot 8id Tphoo izeo^ dj-ivsov . . . 8uo 
 •jfoivixaz dmpou ■j^pualou, 'both of these used to pay every 
 third year two choonices of gold unrefined by fire.' Here the 
 verb in the imperfect tense, and the other circumstances of 
 the narrative, the subject being tribute-paying, show that 
 the interval of the third year is to be repeated for the re- 
 peated acts of bringing in tribute. Herod, ii. 4, 8id rphr^z 
 ■^pipr^Z, ' every third day :' Xen. Eep. Ath. i. 16, 8i' iviaurou, 
 ' every year.' In all such examples, it is plain that 8id ex- 
 presses no more than merely interval between, the notion 
 of a succession of intervals being indicated by the circum- 
 stances in which the preposition is used ; and that the part 
 of the noun in the genitive case is to set forth in what re- 
 spect precisely the ailirmation of interval is made. Thus, 
 in the example from Thucydides above cited, the affirnm- 
 tiou is that there were large towers ; 8ed shows that they 
 
 13 
 
194 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Btood at intorvala ; and the genitive (dixa indiSeiov) states 
 that the declaration of there being large towers at intervals 
 is made, not absolutely, but spccilifally ' with respect to ten 
 battlements,' and is to be understood as referring to these 
 exclusively. 
 
 2. 'In comparison of,' 'above.' Jed is also employed 
 with the genitive case in the sense of differing from, and 
 hence of relative superiority, expressed in English by ' in 
 comparison of,' ' above.' E.g. II. xii. 104, b d' inptns xai Sii 
 jKivToiv, ' he was comely, even above all ;' that is, he stood 
 at an interval from, differed from, and so was superior to, 
 all in comeliness. Ilerod. viii. 37, 8ta irdvrwv azM daufidaai 
 fidXima, ' especially worthy to be admired above all :' Id. 
 viii. 09, iv K/iwTotae Terift^ftiuij dta ndwiou raiv aufi/tdvwv, 
 'honored among the first above all the allies.' The sense 
 of the preposition and of the genitive case may be easily 
 understood, in such examples, by recurring to the proper 
 notion belonging to each. Thus, in the first example, the 
 simple proposition that 'he was comely' (iriftene), is qualified 
 by lidding that herein he was ' diflcrent from,' properly, was 
 'at an interval' {dtd), considered 'with respect to ull.' Jid 
 conveys the idea of ' being at an interval, different from, 
 and hence of being superior to,' and the genitive denotes 
 the object with respect to which specifically this relation of 
 interval, difterence, and superiority, is to be considered as 
 affirmed. 
 
 To this construction might seem to belong the phrase Se' 
 oudefo: zote.7a9ai, Soph. CEd. Col. 584, ' to account as nothing,' 
 'as of no value,' 8c' ohSevoz being regarded as expressing 
 that with which comparison is made, and the sense being 
 'to account, to consider, as to be compared with nothing.' 
 But the meaning then should rather be, ' to account, to con- 
 sider, as diftcriug from, and so, superior to, nothing,' which 
 is not the sense really conveyed. It is rather to be referred 
 to the same class of constructions with dca aizoud^i;, ' earnestly,' 
 8m xdytouz, ' speedily,' &c. to be considered under 8cd in the 
 sense of ' through.' 
 
 3. ' Through.' dcd is used with the genitive in the sense 
 of 'through:' c.g. Ilerod. ii. 33, jSewv 8ta ndatj; Euftwjnji:, 
 
 M. 
 
 195 
 
 ' flowing through all Europe.' The notion of interval be- 
 tween, properly belonging to 8td, is found hero also, only 
 differently applied, as above explained, and marking, not 
 the interval between different objects, but between the parts 
 of the same object. A river flowing through a country does 
 really, consistently with the meaning of 8td, divide it into 
 two, and occupy the interval between its parts. The use 
 of the genitive case here, as in other examples of the use of 
 8cd with this case, is to limit the declaration of the ' flowing 
 through' {piiov 8id) to a specific object, so that it shall be 
 understood of this and of no other ; • the river flows 
 through (between) . . . said with respect to Europe' ex- 
 clusively. 
 
 Of this use of 8id with the genitive, in the sense of 
 ' through,' there are several varieties, in which the meaning 
 is more or less modified by the circumstances in which the 
 preposition is used. Thus : 
 
 a. With regard to space, with verbs of action and motion, 
 8id with the genitive case has the sense of 'through:' e.g. 
 Od. xii. 315, 8ta uijauu iiov, ' going through the island ;' yEsch. 
 lium. 75, kXciat yd/i at xac 8c' -ijUupoo fiax/iil;, 'for they will also 
 drive thee through a distant laud;' Id. Suppl. 490, 8c' dareoz 
 areixouac, ' they go through the city :' Ilerod. ii. 33, reXturif. 8k 6 
 " lariiuz iz tfdkuaauv l)ewu . . . 8candarjz fMf'a>7:rjz, ' the later ends 
 by flowing through all Europe into the sea;' Id. ii. 34, ^iec yap 
 8c' ocxeu/tivjjz, 'for it flows through an inhabited country;' 
 Xen. Anab. iv. 4, 7, iureu^tv inopeu&ijaav aTU&ftohz rpel; Scd 
 zu~j itviiou, ' thence they marched three days through the 
 plain ;' Eurip. Med. 144-5, 8cd pou xtipaXaz fkbi oupaviu \ ^aiTj, 
 ' may the lightning of heaven go through my head ;' Id. ib. 
 827-8, dec 8cd XapKpoTdzoi) | pucvovzez i-fip^Z acMpoz, 'ever 
 walking delicately through a most brilliant atmosphere.' 
 
 b. With regard to time, 8id with the genitive case is used, 
 in the same sense of 'through,' to mark the period of time 
 through which an action or event extends : e.g. Ilerod. ix. 
 13, i}.n't!^(ov 8ta mu/Toz zviu j^pmou bpoXirf/jauv aipiaz, ' expecting 
 through the whole time that they would come to his terras;' 
 Id. vi. 12, napiiyre zs. zuXai ' hoac kSvov 8c' i^piprjz, 'he gave the 
 lonians labour during (through) the day ;' Xen. Cyrop. viii. 
 
196 
 
 OF TUB SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 2, 1, dii ffowic Tou j[p6inO ipdav&pomiav r^c J^^^f^C • • • ivtifdv- 
 i^eu, ' through the whole period of his life.' 
 
 c. With a variety of nouns in tho genitive caso 8td is used, 
 chiefly with the verbs of motion ipj^tadat and Uucu, but also 
 with a noun even, to express the peculiar manner and cir- 
 cumstances of the motion or other substantive idea, by 
 marking that through or by the way of which it occurs. 
 Thus, in tho phrase did /tdjpji; lpj[etTSae, ' to fight,' litcrully, 
 *to come through, by the way of, fighting,' tho action of 
 coming {ipj^etrdiu) is distinguished by dtd and the noun in 
 the genitive case as having a peculiar character, as occurring 
 under certain circumstances, namely, as a coming that is 
 through, by the way of, fighting. In this way, did and the 
 noun in the genitive, together with tho verb of motion, or 
 with a noun, when that is qualified in this manner, form a 
 kind of periphrastic expression for the verb whicli would 
 contain the same substantive idea that tho noun in tho 
 genitive does. Thus, did fidju^z i/i^ea&at may be said to 
 occupy the place of /idj[ea&at, ' to fight,' did noXi/tou ifi^ea&at 
 that o(7:oXe/utv, 'to war,' di' dpj^c ii^ou that oi dpfi^eadai, 'to 
 be angry,' dtd iptXiaz ipfur&ot that of ipiMv, ' to be friendly,' 
 4c. (For these, and other instances, see Passow's Lex. s. v. 
 Ipyi%a9at.) E.g. Herod, vi. 9, u dk raura /tiv ou noi^auuat, o{ 
 di ndvTioz did pd^c iXeuaovTcu, ' if they shall not do so, but 
 shall by all means fight,' that is, literally, 'shall come 
 through, by tlic way of, fighting.' Xen. Mem. ii. 1, 20, al 
 did xapTspiaz iTtipiMiot, 'the attentions which are given 
 strenuously ;' Soph. (Ed. Tyr. 773, did z6xyi<: zoiilad' ttov, 
 ' having experienced such a fortune,' properly, ' having 
 gone through such a fortune ;' Id. Antig. 738, did dixfji: ttov 
 rcarpi, ' in contending with your father,' that is, ' in going 
 through a contest about right with your father;' -^sch. 
 Prom. 121-2, rdi/ naai dsdiz | dt' dnex&etac iXSdur', ' that has 
 been at enmity with all the gods ;' Orat. Att. p. 185, 10, r« wv 
 dia Twv XoYiMi fo^epd, ' what is now frightful in words,' pro- 
 perly, 'through, by the way of, words,' tho property of 
 frightfulness being distinguished by producing its effect 
 through the medium of words. This example might, how- 
 ever, be more appropriately referred to a subsequent variety 
 
 Jid. 
 
 197 
 
 of the significations of did, in which it expresses tho means 
 or instrument. 
 
 il. To this use of dtd with the genitive, to denote the 
 manner and circumstances of an action, may bo referred 
 such phrases as did aroudrfi notiiv, ' to do earnestly,' or ' in 
 haste,' did ra^foof, and rifj^etov, dniivtu, ' to depart quickly,' 
 and so did ri^oof, ' completely,' di" dxpifiein^, ' accurately,' &c. 
 (See, for a number of such phrases, Passow's Lex. s. v. did.) 
 And of the same interpretation is the phrase dt' oiideuo^ not- 
 Cia&m, 'to count as nothing,' 'to consider of no value;' for 
 just us did pdfjfi added to Ip-^ta&at shows the peculiar man- 
 ner or character of the coming, so dt oodeud; added to noi- 
 uaOui explains what is the peculiar condition of the valuing 
 contained in this verb. And this it does in the same way; 
 as did pd^^rfi gives the peculiar manner or character of ipx^"- 
 dot, ' the coming,' by describing it as a coming that is 
 'through, by the way of, fighting,' so dt' oudevoz gives the 
 character of the valuing expressed by Tcoiita&tu, by describ- 
 ing it as a valuing in which tho worth is nothing, the term 
 ouo£i/(ic, ' nothing,' being employed in the latter phrase pre- 
 cisely as juiyrffZ is in the former, and did having the same 
 sense in both. Thus explained, dt obd^voz notua&tu, 'to 
 count as nothing,' 'as having no value,' means, properly, to 
 value a thing in the way or manner of valuing at no- 
 thing, or in the way or manner in which a thing is valued 
 when considered as nothing. 
 
 c. Of the same nature, in the main, is did with the geni- 
 tive used with elvoi and Ytjviadai, ' to be,' and ' to become,' 
 in such phrases as did tpofiou tlviu, ' to be afraid,' ' to be in a 
 state of fear,' dt i-^dpaz YtYV^adcu rtvi, 'to be at enmity, in a 
 state of enmity, with a person,' dt Ipido;, di' dpy^z, dt da- 
 ipaXuuz, elucu, 'to be in rivalry,' 'to be angry,' 'to be in a 
 condition of safety.' (Sec Kiihn.- Ausf. Gr. §605.) In all 
 these expressions did with the genitive of a noun marks tho 
 state or condition of an object, in tho same way that did 
 pd^TjZ with a verb of motion denotes its manner or circum- 
 stances. Thus, in did ipo^ou 1)v, 'he was in a state of fear,' 
 dtd ipo^ou expresses the state of fear in which a person was, 
 or furnishes a description of the state or condition of the 
 
198 
 
 or TUB 8BVK&AL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 subject of ^v. Just as did with the genitive of a noun 
 coupled with a verb of motion, as iivatf ' to go,' Ipj^etr&at, 
 'to come,' marks the peculiar manner or circumstances 
 of the motion, so the same form of expression used with 
 the verbs of existence, eluat and j-tYveadat, denotes the state 
 or condition in which the subject of the verb is ; and this 
 it docs iu the same way in both cases. With tlic verbs 
 of motion, it is easier to see how 8td and the genitive of a 
 noun may serve to describe the peculiar manner or circum- 
 stances of the motion, by exhibiting ' through' what, or by 
 the way of what, it passes, that is to say, the circumstances 
 which attend it. The manner or circumstances of an act 
 of coming, for example, may be set forth by adding to it 
 the representation that it is a coming ' through,' or by the 
 way of, 'fighting {Sta fid'jpjz).' But in the case of verbs of 
 existence, as elvae and ytYvea&cu, it is naturally more difficult 
 to see how 8td with the genitive, assuming it to have the 
 same office here as with verbs of motion, is suited to 
 express the state or condition of the subject of the verb. 
 This difficulty, however, may bo owing, not to any thing 
 in the construction itself, but to the fact that the nouns 
 used with Std in the qualification of eJvat and j-ij-veadau arc the 
 names of abstract qualities, and that did foftou, for example, 
 io setting forth the state or condition of an object, can bo so 
 used only in a figurative sense. Yet it is not impossible to 
 perceive how did with the genitive, figuratively employed 
 as it is, and hardly-admitting of being represented iu 
 English by corresponding modes of expression, at least 
 with any accuracy, may have obtained its power of describ- 
 ing, when joined with a verb of existence, the condition or 
 state of the personal subject of eJvae or yiywa^at. It may 
 be observed, in the first place, that if, for example, Sea 
 H^mz, ' tlirough, by the way of, fighting,' serves to mark 
 the manner or circumstances of an action, it is to be ad- 
 mitted equally that did fdfiou attached to a verb of exist- 
 ence, as elvat, j-ep/saSai, may serve to mark the state or con- 
 dition of the being of a person, namely, bj' expressing that 
 ' through' which, or by the way of which, being or exist- 
 ence obtains a peculiar state or condition. The office of 
 
 M. 
 
 199 
 
 itd with the genitive, in the one case and in the other, 
 would seem to be exactly the same, any apparent difference 
 being attributable to the different character of the nouns 
 and verbs employed in the two cases. This admitted, it is 
 to be observed, in the next place, that in the case of did 
 and the genitive used with eJvai and ^«j-w<Ttf<w, just as in that 
 of its use with verbs of motion, the power of denoting the 
 manner or circumstances of a motion, and the state or con- 
 dition of being in which a person is, is due to the preposi- 
 tion and noun in virtue of their office of marking the 
 relation of ' through' or ' by the way of some object. Be- 
 sides the fact that the sense of Sid with the genitive affords 
 a plausible solution of the phrases under consideration, 
 even without further explanation, it may be alleged that 
 the only other meaning of the preposition that suggests 
 itself as possibly involved, that of 'by means of,' is utterly 
 inappropriate. The last thing to be noticed is, that Sed, 
 properly speaking, obtains the sense of ' through,' as has 
 been above explained, by referring to the interval between 
 the parts of an object; and that it has the capacity of 
 describing the circumstances of an action or motion by 
 placing it in the interval between the parts of the object 
 that is named by the noun in the genitive case, and that 
 furnishes the means of characterizing the manner or cir- 
 cumstances of an action, and by thus making it proceed, as 
 it were, with the parted object on cither hand. Of course, 
 the idea of interval between the parts of an object, of an 
 object divided by an interval between its parts, although 
 easily applicable in the case of sensible objects, as in St' 
 Eu(tio7n}(:, 'through Europe,' that is, Europe having an 
 interval between its parts, cannot be admitted, in this 
 material sense, for abstract nouns such as /Jidjpj, ip6^o<:; but 
 yet may be readily allowed in a figurative sense. In this 
 accommodated acceptation, Sid ftdj^ij^, qualifying iiveu, will 
 mean that the going is 'through fighting,' that is, has 
 fighting on either hand, and hence has this for its descrip- 
 tive circumstance. So likewise, figuratively speaking, a 
 person may be represented as being Std ipo^ou, ' in a state 
 of fear,' that is, as being embraced or encompassed by fear, 
 
200 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PBEPOSITIONS. 
 
 juet as well as, in a more obvious sense, the act of coming, 
 Ipxea&at, may be regarded as being M fidx^c, ' through, by 
 the way of, fighting,' that is, encompassed by fighting, 
 having fighting ou either hand. The English phrase 'in 
 the midst of,' although it does not convey the same mean- 
 ing with did and the genitive as here explained, may yet 
 serve as an illustration, being employed in the same way to 
 describe the circumstances and manner of an action, or the 
 condition or state in which any thing is. 
 
 Thus it has been shown how did with the genitive case, 
 both as used with verbs of motion or action and with those 
 of existence, may describe the circumstances or manner of 
 the former, and the state or condition of the personal sub- 
 ject connected with the latter. And it may be added, that 
 this explanation, while it justifies the interpretation given, 
 to did and the genitive in the two classes of examples re- 
 ferred to, is the more probably true from its admitting, in 
 both, the presence and influence of the primary significa- 
 tion of the preposition. 
 
 /. 'By means of,' 'by the agency of,' 'through,' 'by.' 
 M, having still the sense of ' through,' is used with the geni- 
 tive case to express the means or instrument, and the agent 
 by whom any thing is eflfected, being rendered in English 
 by such forms as 'through,' 'by,' 'with,' 'by means of,' 'by 
 the agency of.' E.g. Soph. (Ed. Col. 471, Si' ba'uov x^ifoiv 
 Stj-wv, ' touching (handling) them (p<fc) with pure hands,' 
 the hands being the" intermediate agent, as above explained, 
 when treating of the significations of the preposition apart. 
 Id. ib. 1252, di' onfiaroz doraxri Xu^wv ddxpuou, ' pouring out 
 tears with (through the agency of)- the eye,' where the use 
 of 3t' o/ifiaro; to ^press the intermediate agency, is very 
 analogous to that of the same preposition and case to denote 
 the material. Id. Gld. Tyr. 822, St' tSmep (x^tpwv) ilXero, ' by 
 which (hands) he perished ;' .^Esch. Buppl. 531, St' iz rot yipoi; 
 thi(biu&' eTueu, 'through whom we pretend that you have 
 your parentage ;' Xen. Cyrop. i. 1, 4, rdJv St' kaurwv (dpxac) 
 xnjaapiviov, 'who acquired dominion by their own means,' 
 literally, 'through themselves;' Orat. Att. 67, 14, dy«M7r« 
 
 M. 
 
 201 
 
 jr/)oc <^/iuc ouxiu St' dffiXwv, A}X abroz, ' not by (through the 
 agency of) messengers, but in person.' 
 
 To this place may bo referred a great number of examples 
 in which otd, having really the same sense as in the examples 
 above cited, requires to bo variously rendered according to 
 the circumstances. E.g. Orat. Att 132, 22, ol St ixdvou ric 
 noXtrsiac ::oto6pei/oi, 'who cause the administration of the 
 afi'airu of state to be in his hands,' ' who efi'oct this through 
 him, by his agency;' Id. 194, 4, St' abrciv elxov tiju n6Xtv, 
 'they had the state in their own hands,' properly, 'through 
 their own agency ;' Id. G05, 10, St iaurtau il-p^ rb fiouXtuvjptov, 
 ' they had the senate-house in their own hands,' properly, 
 'through their own means;' yEschin. 31, 29, netpdaofjuu SiA. 
 xiipaXiutov b/iiiz Ojro/ufa^axsiv, ' I will endeavor to pat you in 
 mind summarily,' that is, 'by means of summary state- 
 ments ;' or, less probably, it might be interpreted, ' through, 
 by the way of, brief statements,' showing the manner of the 
 action rather than its means ; Soph. Antig. 1258, pvrj/Jt' im- 
 oTjfiov Sia xupbz ixwv, ' having in his hand a marked token,' 
 his hand being the means or instrument used in bearing the 
 token, namely, Iliemon's dead body. In this, and other 
 examples that seoiu to be properly referred to this use of 
 Std with the genitive, there is so very distinctly involved 
 the proper sense of the preposition, that of 'between' or 
 ' interval between,' that it would be admissible to allege 
 this as the true meaning. In this view, Std x^tpwv l^ttv 
 would mean ' to have or hold between the hands,' and the 
 idea of the hands being used in such circumstances as the 
 means of bearing a thing would be readily inferred. 
 
 Here, possibly, may belong, also, Soph. Antig. 639, oBrw 
 yap, <L TcaT, xp^ Sia aripviov ix^tv, ' for so, my son, you must 
 needs be disposed in your mind;' that is, iiSid aripvcuv here 
 express the means or instrument, ' by means of, through the 
 influence of, the mind.' But, in fact, Sm azipviov may more 
 probably be regarded as denoting, in conformity with what 
 was above said of Std with the genitive, the peculiar cha- 
 racter and condition of the disposition attributed to Usemon ; 
 and, thus viewed, Std aripvmv f;f«v will be interpreted after 
 the same manner with St' Sppfi ytviadat; namely, it will 
 
202 
 
 OF TOE SBVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 mean, ' to be disposed {ix^tv, se habere) in the mind or men- 
 tally.' So, again, may more probably be explained the 
 phrase 8t' dpy^t; fjrew rw<f, *to be angry with a person,' that 
 is, ♦ to be angrily disposed with regard to a person ;' also dt' 
 otxTou Xa^Hv, ' to pity,' that is, ' to comprehend in one's pity,' 
 (See Passow's Lex. s. v. did.) 
 
 'In consequence of,' 'by reason of.' Jtcf with the geni- 
 tive is also used, occasionally, to express the ground or reason 
 of a thing, and maybe rendered in English by 'in conse- 
 quence of,' ' by reason of.' K.g. Xen. Anab. iii. 2, 8, ul 8id 
 mmem^ uuroZc laoroof ivexeepttrat/, 'who put themselves in 
 .their power in consequence of, by reason of, a pledge given 
 them.' But tlie sense is, properly, 'by means of, through, 
 a pledge given to them ;' and, in such exami)leH, M with 
 the genitive may be explained as setting forth the means by 
 which a thing is effected, and needs not to bo referred to a 
 separate head. 
 
 g. 'Of,' '(made) of.' Jid with the genitive is now and 
 then employed to mark the material of which a thing is 
 made, where more commonly ix, and sometimes dno, with 
 the same case, are employed : e.g. de' iXi^avroi, 8ca Mdtov, 
 naroai/iivov, 'made of ivory,' 'made of stone.' (See Passow's 
 Lex.) Here dtd, as above explained, when speaking of the 
 significations of the preposition separately, is to be under- 
 stood as denoting, together with the noun in the genitive, 
 the intermediate means through which an effect is reached; 
 and the genitive, as Ts true of this case in all the above 
 instances of its use, is the sign of the object with respect to 
 which specifically the declaration is made. So uniform 
 indeed is the meaning of the genitive case as it occurs in 
 conjunction with did, that it has been deemed unnecessary 
 to occupy space in pointing it out in the several examples 
 as they presented themselves. 
 
 II. Jtd with the accusative case. 
 
 1. 'Through.' Jtd is employed with the accusative in 
 
 the sense of 'through ;' and this, (a) in regard to space : e.g. 
 
 Eur. llippol. 75.3, seqq., d dca nSurtou | xtjft' AXexronov dX/ioi: \ 
 
 ind/nuoa^ ifiav hiaaaau \ il^imv dit' oXtiov^ » who conveyed my 
 
 Aid. 
 
 203 
 
 rojal mistress from her rich home through the roaring 
 waves of the sea;' that is, 'through ... as regards the 
 waves of the sea;' II. xii. 308, xCtfpz inatSae, Sid re /)ij?aa3ae 
 irtdHset;, 'to rush upon the wall and break through the 
 battlements ;' that is, ' to break through ... as regards, as 
 far as go, the battlements ;' ^sch. Pers. 493, nep^ xpuaraX- 
 ^.onrja Std nopov, ' passes through the ice-bound strait ;' Id. 
 Suppl. 15, fevj-etv Avidr^v 8ia xup' dkov, ' to fly through the 
 sea-waves.' 
 
 This use of 8id with the accusative is frequently met with 
 in the poets, rarely, if at all, in prose, where 8id with the 
 genitive is used in the sense of ' through.' Yet the meaning 
 of this preposition with the genitive and with the accu- 
 sative, altliough in both cases rendered in English by 
 ' through,' is not, strictly speaking, the same. The differ- 
 ence is to be found in the force of the cases alone, the 
 preposition having the same sense when used with the one 
 case as when used with the other, namely, that of 'through,' 
 derived, as already explained, from the notion of the inter- 
 mediate space or ' interval between,' by which an object is 
 divided when another passes through it. The genitive, 
 when used with 8id, limits or qualifies an action or motion 
 by indicating the object to which the idea of ' through,' or 
 ' the going between the parts of,' is to be referred specifically, 
 and as being distinct from all others ; the accusative defines 
 the extent of the action or motion by denoting the object 
 that gives the measure up to which the idea of 'through' is 
 to be understood as affirmed. The former distinguishes 
 the particular one of all possible objects with respect to 
 which the going through is declared ; the latter, the measure 
 up to which, as regards the object named by the accusative, 
 it is to be regarded as extending. Thus, 8td Apou J^Xdev 
 (jXoz, ' the spear went through the shoulder,' means, pro- 
 perly, ' the spear went through . . . said with respect to the 
 shoulder,' the genitive showing that the particular object 
 introduced by it, and no other, is intended to be referred 
 to ; but in the phrase wz t8ov "Hipanrcov 8ia Stopara Ttoaruuovra, 
 II. i. 600, 'when they saw Ilephaistus busily serving through 
 the house,' the meaning is, 'when they saw Ilepheestus 
 
204 
 
 OF THK SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 busily serving through ... as regards the house,' < so far as 
 the house was concerned;' that is, the serving of Hepheestua 
 is measured in its extent by the term Swimza. Hence 8id 
 with the accusative may have the sense of 'throughout,' 
 ' all through ;' and it is with regard to this meaning that 
 the above distinction between the genitive and accusative 
 cases, as used with this preposition, is most obvious. 
 
 But did with the accusative case is not confined to the office 
 of marking the extent of the action or motion in this way, 
 namely, by making the measure of the object to which ' the 
 going through,' for example, reaches. The action of ' going 
 through* is measured in extent by the accusative in another 
 way ; to wit, by showing that it extends to and embraces the 
 object introduced by the accusative as one among a number, 
 reaching this one and no other. Thus, ipsuxetv 3ia xufi dUiov, 
 'to fly through the sea-waves,' may mean, not ' to fly through 
 ... up to the measure or extent of the sea-waves,' 'as for 
 as sea-waves reach,' but ' to fly through the sca-wavcs,' as 
 distinguished from flying through other objects, as the air, 
 . the land, the flying through being limited to this one among 
 a number of objects, reaching to this and not to others. 
 Here the sense of Sid with the accusative is, in eft'ect, the 
 same with that of itd and the genitive, only it is obtained in 
 a difl'ercnt way. The genitive refers the notion of 'going 
 through' to a particular object among a number, and so 
 limits it to this one as distinguished from all others; the 
 accusative shows tHat it is measured in its extent by a par- 
 ticular object among a number, that it reaches to and em- 
 braces a particular object and not others, and so confines it 
 to this alone. 
 
 6. ' Through,' ' throughout,' ' during." In regard to time, 
 did with the accusative case is used in the sense of ' through,' 
 'throughout,' 'during:' e.g. Od. xv. 7-8, T}jXi/Mj(oi> ff oux 
 tmvuz i^e Y^Mxiz, dW iui &ufi<p \ wxza Si" dfift/iotrir^u fuhoij/iaTa 
 natfibz Irst/iev, 'sweet sleep did not hold Telemachus, but, 
 throughout ambrosial night, stirred in his mind anxious 
 care about his father.' Here did ohtama the secondary sense 
 of ' through,' and the accusative gives the measure of the 
 preceding action qualified by 3td; so that the meaning is, 
 
 M. 
 
 205 
 
 'stirred anxious care . . . through ... as far as the night 
 went, to the extent of all the night,' or 'throughout the 
 night.' So Od. xix. 66-7, dm vuxra \ dmtinov xar oexov, 'going 
 to and fro during the night.' (See Naegelsb. z. II. ii. 57.) 
 
 Other examples, however, of this use of did with the 
 accusative present greater dlfliculty in the interpretation ; 
 e.g. II. ii. 56-7, jJej^c (^ot ivunvtov I^X&ev 'Ovsipo^ \ d/tfifwairjv 
 did uuxra, ' Onciros came to me in my sleep in the ambrosial 
 night.' Here dia vjxra doubtless means 'by night,' or 'in 
 the time of night,' marking, not the space of time during or 
 throughout which an action occurs, and which is the 
 measure of its duration, for that would not here be consist- 
 ent with the obvious sense; but rather the period to which, 
 in a general way, the coming of Oneiros is referred as 
 belonging to it, and which would commonly be expressed 
 by wxToi, and be rendered in English by the phrase 'by 
 night.' This use of did and the accusative may be explained 
 by observing that the accusative has here the sense of 'as 
 to,' 'as regards,' and not that of measure, and that did vuxza 
 J^Xdtv means, not 'he came throughout or during the night,' 
 but that his coming, considered with regard to its time, em- 
 braced only the night, and was wholly confined to it, or looked 
 to the night alone, and extended itself to no other time. 
 That is to say, did with the accusative, in expressions of 
 time, as in those of space, marks the limit to which an 
 action extends in one of two ways; either by naming an 
 object which gives its measure absolutely, as did vuxza oivsumv, 
 'going to and fro during the night,' or 'throughout the 
 night;' or by naming an object that gives its extent rela- 
 tively, by showing that it is confined to this, reaches to this 
 and not to others ; as, did wxza ^X9ev 'OvEipot;, » Oneiros came, 
 his coming being confined to the night, and not extending 
 to any other time.' It is in this second way that did vuxza 
 obtains the sense here attributed to it, and that may be 
 tolerably expressed by the English phrase 'by night," or ' in 
 the night.' The Latin language has a similar use of the 
 accusative case, with and without a preposition ; as in the 
 case of qmim, 'when,' and of ad extremum, 'in fine,' where 
 the accusative has the sense of 'as to,' 'as regards,' and 
 
206 
 
 OF THE SSVKRAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 merel}' denotes the period of time to which an event is 
 referred. Jid, in the explanation of dia vuxra here given, is 
 assumed to have the sense of ' through.' This is preferred 
 as being more probable, and as well according with the 
 meaning of the case with which it is associated in the phrase 
 under consideration ; and yet it is not impossible that it 
 may have its proper notion of 'interval between,* and be 
 thus fitted to show that the action which it defines occurs 
 iu any interspace of the night, whence might spring the 
 sense of ' in the night.' 
 
 Naegelsbach, however, the author above referred to, and 
 from whom the examples of did in the sense under consi- 
 deration have been borrowed, considers that vuxra, II. ii. 56-7, 
 has rather a local sense, and is to be conceived as a region 
 of space through which Onciros comes. He cites, besides, 
 the following examples: Od. ix. 142-3, xal r<c deo^ ^r^/^o- 
 i/euEv I t/uxru 8c' ipifvair^v, ' and a god conducted us through 
 the dark night ;' Od. xii. 284, auro>c <^'<< vitxra dorjv dXAXr^adae 
 AvotYaz, 'you bid us wander about through the fleeting 
 night;' 11. x. 297, fidv (t e/iev . . . dia vuxra ftiiaevav, 'pro- 
 ceeded to go through the dark night ;' II. x. 275-6, rot 3" oux 
 tdov itfduXfUHaoi | wxxa St' ipfvab^v, ' they saw not with their 
 eyes tlirough the dark night.' Doubtless, in such examples, 
 the term wJc, 'night,' may be properly enough considered 
 figuratively as a region of space, and Sea mxra be employed 
 in the sense of ' through the night,' precisely as ota rd xu/ia 
 has the meaning of~*^through the wave;' but it docs not 
 follow that the same is true of 8ia mxra in II. ii. 56-7, and 
 that in that passage f^Xdsv "Opetpoz d/iiipoacjjv did vuxra is to 
 be understood as representing Oneiros as ' coming through 
 the region of the night.' On the contrary, while, in the 
 other examples cited by Kaegclsbach, the most natural and 
 obvious interpretation may require the term vu; to be under- 
 stood figuratively as a region of space, in the passage cited 
 from n. ii. 56-7 it would be more satisfactory to regard dtd 
 vjx-a ns meaning 'by night.' And it has been above 
 attciiipted to show that it may have this meaning, consist- 
 ently with the proper sense of both the preposition and the 
 case. 
 
 M. 
 
 207 
 
 2. 'Through,' 'by means of.' Jed with the accusative 
 expresses also the means or agent by which an action is per- 
 formed, and is rendered in English by the terms 'by,' 'by 
 means of,' 'through:' II. i. 71-2, xa< injeaa i^pjaar' '.l^tjuaiu 
 " Ikcov etaw, I ^v did [luvzoa'jWjU, rrjv ol nope 0oi^oz ' An6)Ji.a)v, 
 ' and conducted the ships of the Achseans within Ilium by 
 means of his prophetic art, which Apollo gave him;' .dSsch. 
 Pers. 553, scqq., «/uej 3' dTztoXttiau Toraii, | v«ec izavtoXi&potatv 
 ipfioXiuz, 1 8ed o 'lain-wv ;f£/>ac, 'but the ships destroyed them 
 by all-ruining assaults, by (by means of) the hands of the 
 lonians ;' Orat. Att. An. 18, 40, ou 8e' ifie, dXkd 8td rdc r^C 
 Tiohmz auiupopdz e<c mviau jto)J.riV xariaTJjv, ' not through my 
 own fault (by means of myself), but through the misfor- 
 tunes of the btate, I fell into great penury;' Xen. Cyrop. iii. 
 2, 18, re ow, ifTj, St xai dUu bfuv dyadd TzpoayivoiTO 8id ttjv 
 eipiji/r^v ; 'what then, said he, if you should obtain other 
 benefits by (by the means of) the peace?' Id. vii. 7, 7, inei 
 8e . . . Ol' fjpdz ahv dtdiz s^sre ri^vJe ttjv ^lopav, ' since, by 
 the favor of the gods, you possess this country by means 
 of us.' 
 
 It has been shown above, when treating of the preposition 
 apart from the cases, that this sense of did springs from that 
 of ' through,' considered as referring to space ; and the accu- 
 sative with which did in the signification of • by moans of 
 is sometimes used, but not so commonly as the genitive 
 case, has the meaning of 'as to,' 'as regards,' 'as far as 
 concerns.' The diftercnce between the accusative when 
 accompanying Std in this meaning, and the genitive, which 
 may be considered the regular construction, is to be found 
 in the usual dilferencc between these cases. Thus, in Xen. 
 Anab. iv. 5, 34, dvrjpatriov rbv xwpdp'jpji/ 8td roD nspail^ovTOZ 
 kppr^i/itoz, ' they inquired through (by means of) the inter- 
 preter who spoke Persian,' the meaning of 8td with the 
 genitive is, properly, ' through, by means of . . . said spe- 
 cifically with respect to the interpreter who spoke Persian,' 
 and the agent is thus distinguished from every other; just 
 as where a river is described as ^iwv 8t' Eup<i:njz, ' flowing 
 through Europe,' the 'flowing through' is aflirmod spe- 
 cifically ' with respect to Europe,' to the exclusion of every 
 
208 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL ttREPOSITIONS. 
 
 ! 
 
 uijtry^ When it is said, vEscb. Ters. 553, scqq., 
 . .. . de' 'labvwv xipw:, ' they destroyed thom by 
 
 other cout 
 
 dTtwXeoav 
 
 (by means of) the hands of the lonians,' the n»eaning is, 
 « they destroyed them through (by means of ) . . . as regards, 
 as far as went, the hands of the lonians,' and no further. 
 Just as did rr,v i^aov iivat, « to go tlirougb the island,' means 
 'to go tlirougb ... as far as the island goes," and jio fur- 
 ther. That is, the genitive distinguishes an object, con- 
 sidered as the means or agent, from otlier objects by mark- 
 ing it as that to which the action as qualified by did is spe- 
 cifically referred ; the accusative, by showing that the action 
 thus qualified by dcd is to be taken as extending to the 
 object i>ut in this case, and to no other. The sense result- 
 ing is materially the same ; only it is reached in a different 
 way. 
 
 3. 'On account of,' 'by reason of,' 'for.' M with the 
 accusative is used to mark the ground or reason of an 
 action, expressed in English by ' on account of,' ' by reason 
 of,' ' for.' E.g. ^sch. Prom. 120, seqq., . . . ritv naai deoiz \ 
 8i Azexi^tlaz iXdovr' . . . \ 8ia ttjv Uav tfd6tijra fipouuu, ' having 
 incurred the enmity of all the gods on account of his exces- 
 sive friendsliip for men;' Id. Agam. 683, dt' ipiu af/mTosaaav, 
 'on account of bloody strife :' Orat. Att. Lys. 125, 30, dnoXiaae 
 Tcapeaxeudaai'To ttjv nokv, el pi) dt' dudpai; dyadouc, ' they pre- 
 pared to destroy the state, if it had not been for some brave 
 men ;' Soph. (Ed. Tyr. 768, 8i' d uiv eiatdeiu ^iXto, ' by reason 
 of wliicli I desire to. see him ;' Xen. Cyrop. i. 4, 5, ra^u 3k 
 ra/njsi did to ipuv too Spjou, ' by reason of his being fond of 
 his employment ;' Id. Anab. i, 9, 22, diopa de nXuoTa . . . 
 iMpi^aue did.noUd, 'he received the most presents for many 
 reasons.' 
 
 In the example from ^sch. Prom. 120, seqq., did shows 
 that the enmity referred to was incurred not directly but 
 intermediately ; and the accusative ttjv Xiav ipdorr^Ta points 
 out an object as that with regard to which alone or to the 
 extent of which the fact stated occurred intermediately; 
 and this is the same as to make the excessive friendship 
 for men the thing intermediate between the person incur- 
 ring enmity and the enmity incurred. 
 
 Ad. Eh 
 
 209 
 
 TABL8 or TIIR SiaNirlOATIONB AND USB OF l,S WITH CASES. 
 
 BlKnlHcatlani or 
 lii. 
 
 aeoltin : ' with rerpMt to.' 
 
 AccuuUt*: 'u fcr h goes,' 'aa to.' 
 
 1 . Interval be- 
 
 1. a. Of apnce ; ■ at the interval 
 
 
 tween. 
 
 of,' 'every.' 
 b. or time; 'at the interval 
 
 of,' 'after,' 'every.' 
 e. Difference, and comparison ; 
 
 in compariston of, 'above.' 
 
 
 2. 'Through.' 
 
 2. a. Ofxpnce; 'through.' 
 
 2. a. Of space; 'through.' 
 
 
 b. Of manner or oircumutance; 
 
 i. Of time; 'through,' 
 
 
 'by the way of,' 'in,' &o. 
 
 'throughout,' 'during;': 
 
 
 e. Of Htate or condition ; ad- 
 
 'in,"by.' 
 
 
 verbially. 
 
 
 
 d. Mennst, agent; 'through,' 
 
 e. Means, agent ; ' through,' 
 
 
 •by means of,' 'by.' 
 
 'by means of.' 
 
 
 e. Oround or reason ; ' in con- 
 
 d. Ground or reason ; ' on 
 
 
 sequence of, 'by reason of.' 
 
 account of,' ' by reason 
 of," for.' 
 
 
 /. Of material ; ' of,' ' (made) 
 of.' 
 
 
 El(. 
 
 Elz, Ionic and poetic Ic, has for its radical cither Ivt, seen 
 in ii/r<if, 'within,' slightly varied in the Latin intus, and 
 endo^ found in endopcrator an ancient form of impcralor, or 
 iv the same with the preposition of this form, with the 
 Latin and English in, and the German ein. If the former, it 
 is formed from iur-<:, that is, from the radical augmented by 
 f, in the same way that Ti9sii; is from Ti&ifT-z, save only that 
 it would be too much to assert that the added c ia the case- 
 sign ; if the latter, it is made up of iv and f (i>'+c), the e 
 being lengthened into a in the same way that it is in eU, 
 'one,' from £i/-c. The former view assumes that the Greek 
 iv, the Latin and English in, and the German ein, which 
 may safely be affirmed to have the . same radical with e?c, 
 have entirely lost the final r. But, although this might veiy 
 well happen when these words stand apart and are subject to 
 the accidents of final syllables, it would not occur when they 
 are prefixed to words commencing with a vowel, and where 
 no reason for dropping the final r can be alleged. Adopting 
 the latter view, which seems preferable, for this and for 
 otlior reasons, among thom the fact that ivc occurs as a 
 dialectic variety of e/c, it remains doubtful what is the value 
 
 14 
 
210 
 
 OF TBK SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 and the origin of the final c; and yet this would seem to 
 be all that distinguishes e/c from Iv. (See Passow's Lexi- 
 con, and Kiihu. Ausf. Gr. §§ 600, 603.) 
 
 Significations of tl^. 
 The proper signification of etc is 'within,' ' in,' with the 
 idea pf the being within a space having boundaries. It is 
 opposed to ix, it, 'out,' 'without,' with which it stands in 
 contrast in such examples as II. xiv. 86, ix wir^roc ic npac 
 'from youth to old age;' II. xxii. 397, ^c ofopbu ix Trrioi^J, 
 'from heel to too;' 11. xxiii. 169, i^ Ttoda^ ix xe^air^c, 'from 
 head to foot." (See Passow's Lex. s. v.) This proper mean- 
 mg of etc is seen also in the derivative eiaw, 'within,' 
 opposed to itw, ' without,' and everywhere in compound^. 
 Thus, elaef^wuai, ' to confine within,' 'to hedge in,' eitr^xew, 
 'to be arrived within,' slacdpUtv, 'to build or found in or 
 within,' e.g. Herod, iv. 62, cited by Passow; daideodac, 'to 
 seat one's self within,' II. xiii. 285, cited by Passow ; uaxua»at, 
 ' to he within,' ttaotxuv, ' to dwell in or within.' Comparing 
 tiiese and such like compounds with those in which ek is 
 joined with words expressing action or motion, as, eiaip^sa. 
 ^ai, 'to come into,' eiaauv, «to run into,' eiaayeipuv, 'to 
 collect into,' eia^dXXeiu, ' to cast into,' it is plain that ' into' is 
 not the simple sense of etc, but arises from combining it 
 with the notion of reaching some object. And it may be 
 remarked, that the other seemingly derivative meanings of 
 «V, as 'for,' 'against,-^-' until,' 'up to,' 'as regards,' are 
 really due to the accusative case with which etc is conjoined, 
 or to the character of the action which it qualifies, the only 
 proper sense of e/c being 'in,' ' within.' 
 
 Signification and uses of tlz with its case. 
 The preposition e/c is used with the accusative case alone, 
 and, as employed with this case, has obtained seemingly a 
 coiiBiderable variety of meanings, as, ' into,' ' up to,' ' against,' 
 'until,' ' for,' ' to the amount of.' It will be seen, however, 
 as already suggested, that these different meanings arise, 
 not from any variation of the sense of the preposition itself, 
 properly speaking, but from the different uses of the case as 
 
 FAi. 
 
 211 
 
 it stands connected with the action or motion which the 
 preposition attends. 
 
 1. 'Into,' 'to.' A'(V is used with the accusative case (a), 
 after verbs of action and motion, in the sense of ' into,' and 
 of 'to,' involving the meaning of 'into:' e.g. Xen. Anab. i. 
 2, 11, ijxcv dyj-ekoz Xixiov . . . 5ti rpn^paz i^xous Ttepmkeooaaz dnd 
 'Iwviaz eiz Kthxiuv, 'a messenger arrived and said that he 
 heard that triremes were sailing round from Ionia to (into) 
 Gilicia;' Id. ib. i. 2, 20, ivrvJdcv 6 KupocT^v Kdiaaaveiz KtXixiuv 
 djroni/tTtet, 'from thence Cyrus sent the queen of Ciliciu 
 back into Cilicia ;' Id. ib. i. 2, 22, opoz S' aurb nepiij^ei dj^upbu 
 xat l>t})rjXbvndvrQ ix daldr-njc e«V ddXarrav, ' stretches round from 
 sea to sea,' literally, 'from sea into sea;' Id. i. 2, 24, ravv^v 
 Tfjn TcbXtv iHXmov ol ivotxouvrez . . . elz 3fa»/>/ov d-jfupbv inl r« oprj, 
 'this city the inhabitants abandoned (and fled) into a strong 
 fortress upon the mountains.' In this example the word 
 iHXntov has a pregnant sense, involving, besides the idea of 
 ' forsaking' the town, that also of ' fleeing' to the mountains ; 
 just as in Xen. Anab. i. 2, 1, xat Xa^bvrez tu SirXa napr^aav 
 eiz IdpSuz, 'they took. up their arms and came to (into) 
 Sardis,' the word nnpr^aav, ' were present,' implies also the 
 idea of coming, and may be rendered by ' came.' So Xen. 
 Anab. i. 2, 18, Kupoz St rja^rj zbv ix twv 'EXXjjvmv etc roof 
 ^apfidpouz ifbpov cdrov, and Id. ib. i. 2, 25, iv rj [mepfloX^ rmv 
 dpuiu zwv £«V '^o TTsSi'ov. 
 
 In such examples as those above cited, in which etc is 
 rendered by ' into,' or by ' to' standing in the room of 'into,' 
 the preposition etc, retaining its proper signification of 'in,' 
 'within,' is attached to the verb as the qualification of its 
 action or motion, and shows that this action or motion 
 occupies the relative position of ' in,' or * within.' Thus, in 
 the first example above cited, zptijpuz ^xoue irepmXeouaaz, 'he 
 heard that triremes were sailing round,' is qualified by 
 adding «c, 'in,' 'within ;' and the statement is, that 'he 
 heard that triremes were sailing round ... in or within,' 
 that is, the ' sailing round' is to be regarded as having, with 
 regard to some object, the relative position of ' in' or 
 ' within.' The accusative is added to mark in what regard 
 this relative position is occupied ; ' as to,' ' as regards,' what 
 
212 
 
 or TUB SBVEBAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 object the action or motion holds the relative position 
 expressed bj «'f, ' in,' or ' within.' Thus, in the same ex- 
 ample, to the proposition rpcjpeti ^xoue nepathoitaaz etc, ' he 
 beard that triremes were sailing round ... in or within,' 
 the accusative Kthxiav ia added to show that the preceding 
 statemcut is to be understood ' as to, as regards, Ciliuia,' or 
 that the sailing round stands in the position of 'in' or 
 'within' 'as regards Cilicia.' So that the whole sentence 
 means, ' be heard that triremes were sailing round,' and that 
 the sailing round was 'in or within ... as regards Cilicia.' 
 
 An apparently simpler view would be to regard the 
 accusative case, in such examples, where it stands after 
 verbs of motion, as the object reached by motion, the pre- 
 position being used adverbially, as above, to describe the 
 relative position of the motion; 'ho heard of triremes 
 sailing round to Cilicia . . . within it.' But this view, 
 although seemingly simpler, is hardly more satisfactory, 
 and docs not embrace a very large proportion of cases in 
 which «c occurs with the accusative after verbs of motion. 
 Indeed, it may be questioned whether it furnishes the final 
 solution of even the simplest cases of the use of the accusa- 
 tive with etc after such verbs. 
 
 In some instances, the accusative of persons, standing as 
 the objects of verbs of motion with e<c, is used in a some- 
 what peculiar sense : e.g. II. vii. 311-12, Aiavr uM^ hipio&eu 
 iOxv^fuSec ^Afotot I «V ' Ayafiifivova Scou dj-ou, xej^a/ir^dra w'xjj, 
 'again, on the other hahd, the wcll-grcaved Acliivi brought 
 to noble Agamemnon Aias rejoicing in victory.' Litorully 
 taken, the sense is, ' they brought Aias in or within ... as 
 regards noble Agamemnon,' and, to make the moaning 
 complete, we may supply oTxov or xXtaii^v, 'the house,' or 
 'tent,' Agamemnon being put for the tent of Agamemnon. 
 Such pregnant constructions as e/f "Aidou, ' into the abode of 
 Iladcs,' may be cited in illustration. Compare Od. iii. 317, 
 iU.' i^ ftkv Mevikaov iytb xiXofuu xai dvtoya \ iXdetv, ' to come 
 into the dwelling of Mcnelaus;' properly, 'to come in or 
 within ... as regards Menelaus.' 
 
 ' Among.' The preposition etc, having, properly speaking, 
 the same meaning of 'into' as in the above examples, 
 
 AVc. 
 
 218 
 
 obtains the sense of ' among,' the Latin inter, namely, where 
 the noun in the accusative case after the action or motion 
 qualilied by uz expresses a number of objects : e.g. Xen. 
 Apol. ii. 1, 7, etc roue Apxcxohz rdrro/iev, * we appoint among 
 (into the number of) the ruling class.' 
 
 'Against.' It may be noticed here that etc sometimes 
 obtains the signification of ' against,' this sense, however, 
 being due to the hostile relations of the parties to the action 
 or motion, and not to any thing peculiar to etc itself. E.g. 
 Xen. Anab. iv. 2, 7, xai dlaXd^uvxez ol 'EiXijvtz hvro dz roi/c 
 dudpwnouz, 'the IlelleneB, having raised the battle-cry, 
 rubhcd upon (against) the men ;' the meaning is, properly, 
 ' they rushed among (into) the men,' obviously for hostile 
 purposes, that is, ' against,' ' upon,' them. It is needless to 
 multiply examples of this familiar and easily explained use 
 
 of et'c. 
 
 b. The accusative with ek, when used with verbs not 
 containing the idea of motion, has more obviously the 
 sense of ' as to,' ' as regards,' and marks within what limits 
 the preceding statement of which it is the qualification is 
 to be taken. E.g. II. ix. 372-3, . . . olfS' dv ipoij-e \ rerAot^, 
 xiiwoc nep iwv, etc «i'Ta ideadat, ' nor would he dare, though 
 impudent, to look mc at least in the face.' Properly 
 speaking, the construction is, 'nor would he, for me at 
 least, venture to look in . . . as regards my face.' By the 
 addition of the accusative case Una the extent of the look- 
 ing in is limited to the face. Similarly, Od. xx. 96, k pifa- 
 pov xari&r^xsv ini dpovuu (^Xalvav xai xtuea), 'he deposited 
 them in the house upon a seat;' properly, 'he deposited 
 them within ... as regards the house.' Otherwise, xor^- 
 &f/Xiv might be considered as used in a pregnant sense, and 
 the construction be, ' he came into the house and deposited 
 them ;' but this would not materially aflfect the meaning of 
 either the accusative or the preposition. 
 
 To this place probably belong such examples as II. iii. 
 158, alvwz d&a>/dTr,at «?ejc etc dma ioixeu, 'she is wonderfully 
 like the immortal goddesses in the face.' Here, elz, qualify- 
 ing loixev, ' she is like,' shows that the likeness is relatively 
 ' in' or ' within,' that it is to be found within a certain 
 
214 
 
 OF THB SBVBIUL PRBP0BITI0N6. 
 
 compass; and the accusative case dma marks the object 
 within which as a limit this likeness is circumscribed, or 
 with regard to which it is said to be < within ;' so that the 
 use of e/c and the accusative Jma is to show that the like- 
 ness expressed by lotxev is * in' or ' within ... as regards 
 the face.' Rightl}' considered, there is, in fact, no more 
 difScultj in understanding how ioexev is qualified by etc, 
 and lotxev «c by the accusative dma, so that the likeness is 
 exactly defined in its extent by having marked out the very 
 boundary within which it is affirmed to exist, than there is 
 in seeing how, in the English rendering ' she is like the 
 immortal goddesses in the face,' the declaration of absolute 
 likeness made by the proposition ' she is like the immortal 
 goddesses' is presently qualified by the limitation ' in the 
 face.' Od. i. 411, ou jiiv ydp u xaxtji elz dma ii^xei, ' for he 
 was not at all like a bud man in his looks.' Another view, 
 however, of this construction might be taken, and that not 
 without plausibility ; namely, e«c dma might be regarded as 
 used, iu a way that is by no means uncommon, to mark 
 the extent to which a thing reaches, in the sense of ' up to,' 
 'as far as.' And then etc dma loexeu would mean, 'she is 
 like ... to the extent of the face.' But the interpretation 
 above given, although perhaps less obvious, is more satis- 
 factory as accounting for the preposition as well as the 
 case, and as being, therefore, more complete. In fact, the 
 former interpretation is not inconsistent with the latter, 
 but includes and goes b«yond it. 
 
 Hardly different from the use of e/c with the accusative 
 just explained, is that found in such passages as II. xv. 
 275-6, ifdpTj Xtz ijOyiuetoc \ ec'c i)36v, ' a lion appeared in the 
 path.' Here etc odov may be interpreted in the same way 
 with etc dma above ; or i^dinj may be considered as having 
 a pregnant sense, 'the lion came into the path, and bo 
 appeared.' (See Passow's Lex.) Compare ^sch. Prom. 
 84C, rd komd d' u/uv rfjSi r' i^xotvbv fpdaw, 'the rest I will 
 tell to you and to her in common,' where the phrase ^c 
 xon/bit, ' in common,' may be interpreted in the same way 
 with etc dma. The passage in Herod, v. 38, aoro; i<: Jaxe- 
 dai/iova xpc^fiei dnoaroloz ipvtro, is better explained by re- 
 
 Eli. 
 
 216 
 
 garding d^daroXoz ipvero as being equivalent to dTziajaXri, 
 •he went,' so that it shall be rendered, 'he went to Lace- 
 dasmon as an ambassador in person in a trireme.' Yet, 
 admitting this, the explanation of k and of the accusative 
 Aaxedaiuova will bo materially the same. 
 
 The same interpretation maybe satisfactorily applied to 
 some other peculiar forms of expression: e.g. Herod, iii. 
 42, noHoxpdrei i,p7] mhw iXduv ic oVw, 'he said that he 
 wished to come into the presence of Polycrates,' that is to 
 come in or within ... as regards the presence (face) of 
 Polycrates.' Here, even more plainly than in the phrases 
 above considered, elz shows that the action, that of coming, 
 has a relative position of 'within' with regard to some 
 circumscribed Bpuce or situation, and the accusative 5,^iu 
 marks what this space or situation is, 'as regards the pre- 
 Bcnee of Polycrates.' So Herod, i. 86, rbu dv iyw rtaat wpdv- 
 ,<um npoeupr,<,a peyd^wu XPW'^^'^^ ^f ^^°"^ f *t' [^ ^'""^^ 
 have valued it above great riches that he should have dis- 
 coursed with all tyrants;' and Id. vii. 9, el . . . motev ^pcu 
 k I'dyrju, ' if they should come to blows with us, ' should 
 fitlht with us.' Add Xcn. Anab. i. 2, 26, oodevi nm xpelrzovc 
 laoToo ek Z"/'«C iX&s7ui,f7i, 'he said that he had, as yet, 
 come into conflict with no one that was his superior. 
 
 2 'Up to,' 'as far as,' 'to the amount of,' 'to the number 
 of • ' for,' ' against,' ' until.' Ek with the accusative case is 
 used to'ma^k the measure up to which any thing reaches, 
 rendered iu English by the various forms of expression 
 
 just given. , 
 
 a. Of number, and of amount generally ; ' up to, to the 
 number of,' 'to the amount of:' e.g. Xen. Anab. i. 1, 10, '0 
 Se Kupoz SiSiMtv abxip eiz retpaxtax'Uouz, 'Cyrus gave him 
 to the number of four thousand;' Id. ib. vi. 2, 16, &oop,va>v 
 8k Ttdkiv ek rpk, ' a"«l when they again sacrificed as many as 
 (to the number of) three times;' Id. ib. vii. 1, 33, «'c dy^o- 
 liav i:api^eiu Ifyj xai cTva xai nozd, 'he said that he would 
 sui)uly food and drink in abundance,' 'to the measure of 
 abundance;' Id. ib. ii. 2, 23, xai roirou eU r* ^^"""t^'" ""X 
 ATTr^c6pe9a eJ> izomvrez, 'so far at least as our ability goe8;j 
 Id. ib. iv. 7, 3, tk xaXbv ^kc, *you are come opportunely,' 
 
216 
 
 OF lUE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 literally, '^tgainst the fitting moment;' so etc xdvra, 'in 
 every respect,' 'reaching to every thing;' e<c r«£;foc, ' quickly/ 
 > amonnting to quickness.' 
 
 b. Of time, both generally, and in its several denomintk 
 tions, expressed in English by ' up to the time of,' ' againBt,f 
 'until,' 'for.' E.g. Xen. Anab. iii. 1, 3, dXi^ot fdv aurwv elc 
 rif kmtipav airou iyeuoavzo, 'few of them had tasted food 
 until (up to the time of, against) evening,' improperly ren> 
 dered by Schneider, in his index, by sub vesperam; Id. ib. 
 i. 7, 1, idSxet yap ttz r^v imouaav lot ^etv fiaadia, ' for ha 
 thought that the king would arrive against the ensuing 
 morning;' Id. Cyrop. i. 4, 16, ine&ufojae xai auzbz ^Tjpaam 
 tli TouTov rbv y^povov, 'he desired himself also to hunt at 
 (properly, against) this time;' Id. ib. v. 3, 6, ^«re es'c ript 
 TpeaxooTi^u ^pipav, ' come against {in) the thirtieth day ;' Id. 
 Memorub. i. 2, 8, imareue dk e«f rbu Tcdi/ra fiiov . . . ^Ikouz 
 Ayadohz latadat, 'he believed that they would bo good 
 friends (to himself and others) for their whole life;' Id. 
 Anab. v. 3, 10, ^^pav inoiouvro dz ttjv lopv^v, ' they hunted 
 for, against the occasion of, the festival.' 
 
 In this use of e/c with the accusative, it is plain that the 
 notion of amount, or the reaching to a sum or number, is 
 duo wholly to the accusative case, and that this, being a 
 precise measure, excludes the idea of 'about,' 'near to,' the 
 Latin sub, circiter, by which etc with the accusative of mea- 
 sure is too commonly rendered in grammars, lexicons, and 
 other books of interpretation ; unless, indeed, this sense 
 of ' about' be contained in ecc itself, which, it is presumed, 
 no one will pretend. As for el^ in this use, it retains no- 
 thing of its proper meaning beyond the indication which it 
 serves to give that the object to be measured, considered 
 in the matter of its extent, falls within a certain denomina- 
 tion of values, namely, that expressed by the accusative. 
 Thus, when it is said, Xen. Anab. iv. 7, 8, dnrjXdov bnb id 
 8Mpa dv&ptonot «/c "oc i^SopijxovTa, ' there retired under (the 
 shelter of, behind) the trees to the number of seventy men,' 
 the preposition expresses that in number the men were 'in' 
 or 'within' a certain value, which the accusative i^do/nj- 
 xoura presently adds, 'a number amounting to seventy.' 
 
 Ek. 
 
 217 
 
 r 
 
 -■■? 
 
 Properly speaking, the meaning is 'there retired under 
 ^nd) the trees men iu or within .. as jega "e 
 number seventy.' It may assist to make th.s plam .f it be 
 recalled to mind that «- performs the same olhce in ts 
 common use after a verb of motion: e.g. Xen Anab v 
 7 1, inop.u&r,aav a, 7«"X«"C, Hhey marched mto (the 
 country o ) the Taoebi,' where the sense is, 'they marched 
 n or within ... as regards the Taochi,' the accusative 
 ;«;;; ling the people as regards whom 'the marching 
 in' is affirmed The only difference between he two ases 
 :, that in the one, the circumscribed limit w^ '"J -^^^^^ 
 thing falls is that of a people or territory in the other, that 
 of a number, or of a denomination of value. 
 
 c "bv -.' Besides the simple notion of amoun reached 
 «V with the accusative, both of number generally and of 
 time t employed to convey the idea of distribution, for 
 which the English language uses the expression of by-. 
 Eg. Xon. Cymp. ii. 1, 26, bnbn «c iua nopeuono ^ rdS^ 
 'wLnever tl e division marched by files,' 'by ones; Id ib. 
 ii 3 2 .«,,rr->- «V S6o dru. rb. ino. 'he gave hem 
 
 d rs o lead the company by twos,' 'in double h c ; Id 
 
 1 vii. 1, 23, or re orfm i. «5Aw tl-^V "V --7'7« ^''^rZ; 
 'thlhoilit; were in a little while arranged by hft.es, that 
 
 ^S;f fst;;;ltimos omitted when a division into parts 
 
 merely is intended: e.g. "-"'i- 7"-.121. f''.^ JXwhot 
 a,vocndvTa zbv ^z^^bv arparbu, 'having divided the ^^ hole 
 xn anfTinto three parts ' Id. iv. 148, a^ia, abrou, .. po^pac 
 I" 'they distributed themselves into six ^^rTT'Jt 
 
 divided the whole of Egypt into twelve parts.' But ^s 
 must not be confounded with the above-mentioned distri- 
 but on o a thing by equal measures. Here the word po.pa, 
 ^pa^' divisions,' is substituted for the standard of measure 
 expled by the" accusative and e/c, and by which a whole 
 number is distributed into parts "-'^^"'f^^";;;;^^^,,^ ^y 
 This sense of distribution into equal parts expressea Dy 
 e,V d the accusative is due to the accusative case which 
 Lis. by virtue of its power of denoting the extent to 
 
218 
 
 OP THB SBVBRAL PRBPOSITIONS. 
 
 which a thing reaches, a standard of measure by which any 
 number is divided off into successive equal parte; th mean' 
 while, having the same office as in any other case' of the 
 expression of amount, to indicate, namely, that an object is 
 •within' a certain denomination of values marked by the 
 accusative. Thus, for example, e/c S6o, ' up to two ' 'two ' 
 constituting a standard of measure, is applied to an'y body 
 say of soldiers, so as to divide it into equal parts by counting 
 successively up to the number of two, that is, as expressed 
 m English, «two by two.' It should be observed, however 
 that the idea of distribution is conveyed, properly speaking 
 neither by the accusative, nor by the preposition, nor by the 
 accusative and preposition conjoined. It is inferred from 
 the juxtaposition of a standard of measure with a whole 
 number or mass for the subdivision of which it is suited 
 The measure of 'one,' of 'two,' of 'three,' for example, is 
 placed alongside of a body of soldiers, and, knowing before- 
 hand that soldiers are wont to bo marched in single illes in 
 double files, three abreast, that is, 'by ones,' ' by twos,' ' by 
 threes,' it is inferred that the measure is to be applied to 
 the subdivision of the whole number into 'ones,' 'twos,', 
 •threes,' and that, when marching is spoken of, it is by 
 single files, by double files, or three abreast. 'Ai^d and mrd 
 are employed with the accusative in the same way, differing 
 from «f and the accusative only in the mode of determining 
 the measure which is used as a standard. '/;«' with the 
 genitive case also is used to denote distribution, but after a 
 different method to be hereafter explained, and more nearly 
 corresponding to the mode in which the English 'by' is 
 made to serve the same purpose. 
 
 8. 'Of,' 'in regard to,' 'regarding,' 'touching,' 'in the 
 case of,' 'against.' El^ with the accusative is used also to 
 denote the object with regard to which any thing is done, 
 expressed in English by 'of,' 'in regard to,' 'regarding,' 
 touching,' 'in the case of,' 'against.' Kg. Herod, i. 86, 
 oOdiv fxufjou iz ian,T6v Xij-atu ^ i^ Sbrai> rb Audpwnivov, 'saying 
 It no more of<in regard to) himself than in regard to the 
 whole human race;' Id. iv. 98, ^ r^dpj AnoSexduaa iz riju 
 rifopau, 'the opinion expressed regarding, touching, the 
 
 Ek. 
 
 219 
 
 bridge;' Id. i. 114, nfnfffut i( abrbv ytvi/uvov, 'an occurrence 
 relating to him ;' Orat. Att. 143, 1, e/c riv kauTwv ()lov da^aXmi; 
 l%uv, ' to be secure of (in regard to) their own living ;' Id. 
 616, penult., e^c XPW"^^" dvaeS^i;, 'shameless in regard to, in 
 the matter of, money;' Id. 1393, 1, e^c XPW^^"*^ Samdvr^v, ^ 
 uva diXijv dewfrniv, ' touching the expenditure of money ;' Id. 
 60, 13, xuxoi TTjv ipofJi" *'f '■^•' bJiiiov yiviovxat, ' of base spirit 
 towards the demos;' Xen. Anab. ii. 6, 30, our' kz iptXiav 
 aurouc i/ii/ifero, ' nor did he blame them in the matter of 
 friendship ;' Herod, i. 118, rtji Jienoetjftiv^ iz rbv ncuda toutov 
 Ixa/jtvov, 'I was sorry for what was done in the ease of, 
 against, this child.' 
 
 'On.' To this sense of elz with the accusative may pro- 
 bably be correctly referred some examples in which eec with 
 this case is differently rendered in English, as by 'on.' E.g. 
 Orat. Att. 822, 3, oitx ^v Ttfi irarpi touto rb aup^bXaiov elz rdv- 
 dpdnoda ij)j9ia>z aup^efiXjj/tiuov, 'my father had not unad- 
 visedly lent his money on these slaves,' that is, 'with a 
 rofcrcuue to, having a regard to, these slaves ;' Id. 822, 14, 
 Tip 3' eiz ra ^pizepa Saveiaavrt, 'who lent money on our 
 property,' that is, 'in view of, having a regard to, our 
 property;' Id. 12, 20, jppjffbv rbv piXXovra ttjv oualau ttjv 
 iauTou az Opaz dvaXcaxetv, 'who is going to expend his own 
 substance on you,' that is, 'with a regard to you.' (For the 
 examples, see Index Or. Att. ed. Bekk.) 
 
 • Against.' In the example above cited from Herod, i. 118, 
 T<p nenotrjpivip iz rbv neuda toutou Ixapvov, ' I was sorry for what 
 was done in the case of, against, this child,' and in very 
 many others in which eiz is capable of being translated by 
 ' against,' this meaning attributed to the preposition does 
 not reside in elz, but arises from the idea of enmity and the 
 like suggested by the nature of the attending action and by 
 the obvious relations of the subject of the affirmation to the 
 noun standing in the accusative case with tlz. Thus, Ilcrod. 
 vi. 65, )J ^X^I'V ^ ^f ™'' ^'^/^p^Tov, • the enmity against Dema- 
 ratus ;' Id. i. 123, uptopiijv iaopivijv iz^Aarudjea, ♦ th.it punish- 
 ment was likely to come upon Astyages ;' Xen, Cyrop. ii. 
 2, 2, oTtoiot fUv Tiviz ioovTM eiz roue 7:oXeplouz oumo IfoT^ 
 imatupat, 'what kind of men they will be against the enemy, 
 
220 
 
 OF THE SETBBAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 for my part I do not yet know,' or, 'as regards the enemy ;* 
 Id. Anab. iv. 5, 18, idpa/iov tlz rooc TroXefuou^,' they ran against 
 the enemy;' Id. IIolI. vii. 4, 34, oodi {^P^) naraknuv «c rbv 
 dt't xpovov roiz natait^ iyxX^na zouzo tic zobz ifeouc, ' this crime 
 sgaihat the gods.' 
 
 'For.' Very nearly related to the sense of as regards' is 
 that which e«V with the accusative has when it is used to 
 express the object aimed at, the end had in view, conveyed 
 in Englisli by 'for.' E.g. Herod, i. 34, itdi^a, zoTffe xP^ovzat 
 Iz 7:6Xsnov du&fiionot, 'every thing that men use for war,' that 
 is, ' witli regard to war;' Id. ii. 98, ^ /iku "AvduUa . . . i^ 
 Imodrj/iaza iiaifjtzoc didozat, 'Antliylla is given specially for 
 Bhoea.' Ill Herod, i. 6, zobc fikv xaztazp^azo 'IMrjvwu i^ 
 fopuu dmi-wpju, the sense is somewhat different, namely, 
 'so as to pay tribute.' The whole sentence means, «he 
 subjected some of the Greeks to the payment of tribute,' iz 
 with the accusative expressing result or eftect rather than 
 object or end had in view. See Schweig. Lex. Herod, s. v. 
 k, who, however, translates this phrase by "ut tribulum ipsi 
 pendcrent." In fact, the one signification as well as the 
 other is in just accordance with the meaning of «V attending 
 upon a verb of action or motion and followed by an accu- 
 sative case. 
 
 In explanation of the use of el; and the accusative case 
 to express purpose, it is necessary to notice several particu- 
 lars. Assuming that the office and proper meaning of etc 
 are materially the same that they have been uniformly found 
 to be in the uses of this preposition which have been hitherto 
 examined, it is to be considered as qualifying the action, 
 motion, or other substantive idea of the verb which it 
 accompanies, and as showing that it has the relative position 
 or direction of « in,' • within.' And attributing to the accu- 
 sative case which is added to the verb and etc its common 
 sense of 'as to,' 'as regards,' that is, its power of marking 
 the limits within which an action or statement is confined, 
 it denotes the object with regard to which exclusively the 
 action of the verb is to be understood as having the relative 
 position or direction of 'in,' 'within;' and thus marks, in 
 &ct, a limited space, or, it may be, according to the nature 
 
 Etc. 
 
 221 
 
 of the object named by the noun, a class or category, or a 
 state or condition, to which the notion of position or 
 direction 'in,' 'within,' is to be confined, and by which 
 it is circumscribed. Again, when elc is added to the action 
 or motion of the verb, or to any substantive idea that may 
 imply these, and regard is had to the accusative case follow- 
 ing, there arises from the conjunction of the preposition 
 with its sense of 'in' or 'within,' of the action or motion 
 of the verb with its now defined direction, and of the accu- 
 sative case with its power of marking the limits within 
 which the action or motion is confined, the sense of ' into ;' 
 and the cflcct is to represent the subject of the action or 
 motion as brought within the circumscribed space, class or 
 category, state or circumstances, named by the noun in the 
 accusative. Thus, in the sentence ^XSev etc rij/v nokev, 'he 
 came into the city,' the 'coming' expressed by ^iSev is 
 described by elc as having a relative position, or rather 
 direction, of ' in' or ' within ;' the accusative case f:6hv 
 denotes the object with regard to which it has this relative 
 position or direction ; and the effect is to represent the 
 person who is the subject of the coming as brought ' into,' 
 or within the compass of, ' the city.' Again, in the propo- 
 sition idpa/tuu etc robe nok/ttouc, 'they ran into (among, 
 against) the enemy,' the action of ' running' contained in 
 iS/ta/tov is represented as having the relative position or 
 direction of ' in' or ' within' ' as regards the enemy,' and the 
 persons who ran as being brought by the action of running 
 'into,' or within the compass of, 'the enemy.' Now, 
 assuming the proposition ij ^Av&oXXa ic lmo8^/iaza didozat, 
 'Anthylla is given for sandals,' to have the same con- 
 struction, as we have a right to do, and, indeed, are bound 
 to do, if the doctrine of etc thus far set forth be true, and 
 until the preposition or case, or both united, be found to 
 have some different or additional power, ic shows that the 
 action of 'giving' contained in didozat has the relative 
 direction of ' in' or ' within ;' the accusative case tmodijfiaza 
 denotes the object with regard to which it has this direction ; 
 and the clFcct is to represent the town of Anthylla as brought 
 by the action of giving ' into' or within the class of objects, 
 
222 
 
 OF THB SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 or within tlie peculiar condition or character, expressed by 
 Imo^itara, 'sandals;' Anthylla, by the action of giving, is 
 placed in the class, condition, or state of sandals, or ' in or 
 among sandals.' Thus far considered, and without further 
 elucidation, there is no distinct meaning conveyed by the 
 proposition as here interpreted : certainly there is no expres- 
 sion of purpose or of the object had in view. But, as in the 
 sonteneo iii/ia/tov e/c fouc TcoXeftiout;, above explained, the sense 
 of ' against' arises from the mutual relations of the parties 
 to the action, the running of foes into or among foes being 
 the same thing as running 'against' foes, so here the notion 
 of purpose or of an object had in view is suggested by the 
 circumstances of the case, namely, by the nature of the 
 action and of the noun, and by the known relations in 
 which the parties to the action stand to each other. And 
 the same is true of all the instances in which eiz with the 
 accusative has the sense of purpose or expresses the object 
 had in view. When the town of Anthylla, in the example 
 here employed, is mentioned as being assigned (8i3uTai) to 
 the wives of the successive kings of Egypt if ImoS^/iara, 
 although the terms, properly taken, mean no more than that 
 it is brought by gift 'into the class or condition of sandals,' 
 yet knowing beforehand the practice of Persian monarchs, 
 hero transfened to Egypt, of assigning to their wives and 
 other liivoritcs towns for the supply of their table and ward- 
 robe, one town to furnish bread, another wine, a third 
 sandals, and so on, (cf-^on. Anab. i. 4, 9,) it is at once seen 
 that the placing the town given as a present in the class or 
 condition of sandals, and that for the wives of successive 
 kings, can mean nothing else than the putting it into the 
 service of the queen for the time being for the supply of 
 sandals ; that is, it is manifest from the circumstances that 
 ic ImodrjftaTa Sidozat, said of Anthylla, is equivalent to 'is 
 given for sandals.' When it is said, Ilerod. i. 34, -that 
 Croesus, in his apprehension for his son's life which had been 
 excited by a vision, removed from his son's apartments the 
 dxovTca xai do/idria xai rd Totaura ndvra rolat ^fiioirfu i; rcoh/wv 
 df&liuKot, if x(>sovT(u be allowed to have a pregnant sense, 
 that is, to imply action or motion, and this is suggested by 
 
 Ek. 
 
 223 
 
 the presence of eiz and the accusative ; and if it be admitted 
 that e<V, from its common connection with verbs of action 
 and motion, may have come to represent, in some sort, the 
 sense of ' into' or the direction of motion to within, even 
 when action or motion is not distinctly expressed, so that 
 the sense shall be, ' all such weapons as men bring into and 
 use in war,' it can hardly fail to be seen that, in the circum- 
 stances, •j(j)iovTat iz jtWe/hov means, ' they use for war.' Com- 
 pare Thuc. i. 1, Tex/iat(>6fisvoz 6u djcftdf^ovri^ re ijaav ic abzbv 
 d/ifdrefioe nafteaxeofj rj j:dajj, 'forming my conjecture from 
 tlie fact that they were both, in every way, in the highest 
 state of preparation for it.' 
 
 Ill a word, e/f with the accusative case is used to express 
 purpose or the object had in view only where it attends 
 upon some action or motion, or some term that may suggest 
 action or motion, and where the object named by the accu- 
 sative as that into which the preposition indicates that the 
 action or motion is directed, is of such a nature as to be 
 obviously suited to express the end or object aimed at in 
 the preceding action or motion. 
 
 According to this view, etV does not itself contain the 
 notion of ' for' or purpose, any more than it does that of 
 'among,' or of 'against;' nor does the accusative, of its own 
 force, express this sense ; nor, }'et again, is it distinctly sot 
 forth by the combination of the preposition £<c with the 
 action or motion attended by the accusative ; although, in 
 so far as the notion of purpose can at all be said to reside in 
 the terms employed, themselves considered, it is to be found, 
 more than anywhere else, in the direction of the action or 
 motion exi)ressed b}' etc taken in its conjunction with a verb 
 of action or motion, and in the restriction of the action thus 
 qualified to a particular view, which is made by the noun in 
 the accusative. In fact, it is only from the circumstances 
 in which etc is used with the accusative after a verb of action 
 or motion that it can be detormined to have this sense of 
 purpose. 
 
 If it be asked why e«c, out of the prepositions, and in con- 
 junction with the accusative alone, is chosen for the expres- 
 sion of this idea of purpose, or the object had in view, the 
 
224 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 answer would seem to be, that e«V, in conjunction with the 
 action or motion of the verb, and with the accusative case 
 is peculiarly adapted to the expression of purpose from the 
 fact that it not only denotes the direction or tendency of 
 the action or motion, which might be done equally well by 
 other prepositions, but serves, furtlicrmore, to show that 
 the direction of the action or motion, or its tendency is 
 into or within a state or set of circumstances, and so' to 
 restrut it n).)rc definitely within certain limits. From the 
 use of lU with the subjunctive in Latin to express both pur- 
 pose and result, where ul is certainly an accusative case, 
 httlc that is positive can be inferred as to the cai)aeity of 
 the accusative for the expression of purjjose; it being 
 demonstrable, that, however suitable the accusative may be 
 to the notion of purpose conveyed by ut and the subjunc- 
 tive, the presence of the subjunctive mood is here indispen- 
 sable. All that could be concluded from such use of the 
 accusative would be that there is a certain congruity between 
 tins case and the notion of purpose or object had in view 
 But from the use of ad and the verbal in the accusative 
 case, as ad hac covjicienda, 'for the accomplishment of these 
 things,* and of the accusative of the verbal in lus after a 
 verb of motion, and without a preposition, to denote pur- 
 pose or the object had in view, it would seem that one 
 mode of indicating purpose is simply to mark the object ' as 
 regards,' or 'with a regard to,' «with a view to' which an 
 action is performed ; that is, by restricting tlie action to a 
 particular and defined view. This is materially the sense 
 of our phrase ' witli a view to,' by wliich we express pur- 
 pose ; for here also the purpose of an action is set forth by 
 indicating that it is confined in its view to a special object, 
 that it looks to this object and not to any otlicr. And if 
 the accusative alone may thus go to the expression of pur- 
 pose by merely restricting the action to a definite object, 
 much more may it be consistent with a just way of thinking 
 to aim at conveying this idea by naming a definite object, 
 not only as that to which the action is to be confined, but 
 as that witliin the limits of which its direction is to be 
 restricted, or into which it has its direction and tendency, ' 
 
 i.: 
 
 K- 
 
 Ek. 
 
 225 
 
 and into the class or condition of which it is brought. 
 Some confirmation of this view may be derived from the 
 fact -that the genitive of the infinitive mood also is capable 
 of expressing purpose: e.g. Thuc. i. 4, t6 re Xjjmtxbv, tb; 
 t/xdc, xad^pu ix r^c &aXdaarj<: . . . too r<lf npoaoSouz fnaXXov 
 livat a>JT(fi, 'in order that his revenues might the better come 
 in to him.' This it does by distinguishing in what respect 
 exactly an action is to be taken, and so confining it to a 
 specific view, and to a definite class or category. This 
 sense, which the genitive is everywhere seen to possess, is 
 more nearly expressed by tl(; with the accusative, as above 
 explained, than by the accusative alone, the notion of being 
 referred to a specific object as to a class or category, and the 
 being brought within the limits of an object and restricted 
 to it being nearly related, and both being distinguished 
 from the sense in which the accusative by itself marks 
 within what limits an action is to be considered as confined. 
 And thus it would seem to be probably true, that the Greek 
 mind connected the idea of the object had in view or pur- 
 pose, not simply with the restricting an action or motion to 
 a definite object, but rather with the referring it to a specific 
 object as being tliat to tlic case or category of which it 
 belongs ; as where the genitive of the infinitive is employed ; 
 or with the confining it within a definite object, into which 
 it has its direction or tendency, and within whose con- 
 dition it is brought; as where e/c with the accusative is 
 used. 
 
 Where £<c with the accusative has the sense of result or 
 effect, as in xarMTpiipato iz <p6po\i dvoYtaj^v, 'he subjected 
 them to the payment of tribute,' that is, ' so that they should 
 pay tribute,' tlie interpretation is materially the same as in 
 the case just considered, and may be regarded as involved 
 in what has been said above. For if si^ and the accusative 
 may suggest the idea of purpose or object had in view by 
 marking the limits within which the direction or tendency 
 of an action or motion is to be restricted, they may equally 
 suggest that of result or effect, this being quite as obviously 
 consistent with the notion of confining an action within 
 
 defined limits. 
 
 16 
 
226 
 
 OF THE 8BTBRAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 TADLB or THE BIONinCATIONS AND USB OV itt WITH ITS CASE. 
 
 SigDilMtion of 
 
 'In/ 'within.' 
 
 Acouiak ! a. ' up to,' ' aa far a».' J. • as to,' ' aa regards.' 
 
 c. ' Jlf —' (diitributioo). 
 
 «. 'Up to,"a« far aa.' a. ' into,' ' to' (within). 
 
 b. ' Until,' 'againat,' (of time, Ao.) i. ' to' (pregnant conatruction), 
 
 c. ' By — ' fdiatribution). e. ' among.' 
 
 d. 'against' (hoatility). 
 ^ ' aa regards,' ' in the case of,' 
 
 ' touching,' ' on.' 
 /. • for' (object, purpose). 
 g. ' to,' ■ BO as to,' (result). 
 
 'Ex. 
 
 'Ex, before a vowel written i$, is the same with the Latin 
 e, ex. 'Ei {ix;) differs from ix hardly so much as e<V from 
 iv, and c is not further in form from ix than ou is from oux. 
 The form ix is constantly met with in the compounds, as 
 ixriz, ixfipeiv, and may be considered to be that which is 
 proper to this preposition. The origin of the c, wliich is 
 added to ix to make the fuller form i$ {ixz), whether it be 
 merely formative, or a significant ending, as of a case, is 
 nnknown. The same may be said of the c in the formation 
 of tic, and of rrpd; compared with xpS. 
 
 1. 'Out,' 'without.' 'Ex properly signifies 'out,' 'with- 
 out,' with the idea of being on the outside with reference 
 to a space limited by bounds, whether real or imaginary. 
 It is, therefore, just the opposite of iv, •within.' This 
 simple and proper meaning of ix is seen in the derivative 
 lfo>, ' without,' the opposite of eiaai, * within,' and in many 
 compounds, as ixxa^eudeev, 'to sleep out-of-doors,' excuhare; 
 nai^ ixxeinsvoz, «a child lying out,' 'exposed;' ixxXeiacu r^c 
 TtoXeioz, 'to shut out from the city;' ixxo/jti^^uv, 'to carry 
 out;' ixhmeiv, 'to leave out;' also in such phrases as ix 
 ^eUttiv ecpoe, ' to be out of the reach of darts.' 
 
 2. ' Oiit of,' ' from out' But the common signification 
 borne by ix, as it appears apart, and as a preposition not in 
 composition, is that of 'out of,'«'from out,' with the idea 
 of proceeding, either literally or figuratively, from out of a 
 eircumscribcd space. E.g. II. i. 439, ix dk Xputnjti wyif ^^ 
 3tovTo:i6iioto, « the daughter of Chryses went out of, from out, 
 
 'Ex. 
 
 227 
 
 the sea-going ship;' Orat. Att. 1150, 9, ixiieuaa . . . xaXiaae 
 . . . ix rffi odou, ' I bade him call them from out the high- 
 way.' It should be remarked, that this meaning o{ ix, being 
 due partly to the action or motion of which it is the qualifi- 
 cation, is not to be considered as simple and proper to ix; 
 and that, here also, the sense contained in the preposition 
 itself is no more than that of 'out,' 'without,' above 
 attributed to it. 
 
 The sense of ' out of,' ' from out,' which, for the sake of 
 convenience, may be said to belong to ix, is found occur- 
 ring in quite a number of the uses of this preposition. 
 Thus: 
 
 a. 'Ex is used in the sense of 'out of,' 'from out,' in re- 
 gard to space, literally taken : e.g. Xen. Anab. i. 1, 8, 6 
 Kufioz d::i7!efja:e robf Yqfi/o/xivou; douTftobz ^aatXsi ix raiv n6Xea>v, 
 ' Cyrus remitted the tribute that accrued to the king from 
 the cities ;' Id. ib. i. 1, 9, inoXi/iei ix Xefi^oi^aou bpfuo/ievo^ 
 Tu7z dpff^i, ' setting out from the Chersonesus, he waged war 
 upon the Thracians ;' Id. ib. iii. 1, 14, iyat ouv rbv ix noiaz 
 Tcohioz oTparrifbv npoaSoxiu raura itpdSecv, ' the officer, there- 
 fore, of (from) what state do I expect will do this?' Id. 
 ib. i. 2, 7, and 18. 
 
 b. In regard to a number or class of objects from which 
 one is taken out or selected : e.g. II. xv. 680, ix noXitov 
 kiaupaz auvueiptxae tnnouz, ' he yokes together four horses 
 out of nianj' ;' Ilcrod. ii. 47, d)l' ixSedoarai re ol aufiioTae xac 
 dyiaTut i^ dXXi^Xu)v, ' the swineherds give their daughters in 
 marriage to one another, and take wives from one another;' 
 that is, ' marry and give in marriage out of their own num- 
 ber.' The meaning of ix is the same where it stands with 
 the genitive case after the superlative form of the adjective 
 to mark a number of objects from which one of the same 
 class is distinguished, and with which this one, by being 
 taken out from them, is placed in comparison ; where, in 
 English, the reference to a class, and the comparison with 
 it, is expressed by ' of,' ' above.' Eg. II. iv. 96, ix nduriov 3i 
 /idXtara 'Ah^dvdptp ^aatXr/, ' and most of all to prince Alex- 
 ander.' 
 
 c. 'Of,' 'from.' This meaning of 'out of,' 'from out,' 
 
{g OF THE SBVEBAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 bUins in quite a variety of the uses of ix, where, if we 
 >okto the rendering in English, which is mostly made by 
 of,' ' from,' the proper idea of tlie preposition is less readily 
 iscernible. Thus, in the expression of origin, source, 
 ause, agent, material, of any state or condition, in fact, 
 rom which a thing may be considered as preceding ; aa in 
 wh9ac huwc, 'to be bom of a person:' e.g. II. ix. 486, 
 X dofioh ipACiv, ' to love from the licart;' II. vii. iii., if iindoz 
 uirea&al, 'to fight from jealousy,' that is, 'out of, moved 
 /jealousy;' Od. xix. 93, inei iS i/ieU ixloez abrtfi, 'smce 
 rou hoard it from myself,' i^ ifieo marking the pcrnon from 
 vhom the voice proceeds; II. ii. 668-9, . . . yW)}<?ev 1 ix 
 dtoc, 'beloved of Jove,' Jove being the object from whom 
 the affection of love proceeds; itH/ta ix SuXou rcenoirifiivov, 'a 
 irinking-cup made of wood,' or ' out of wood.' Although, 
 in some of these cases, the preposition may not, at the 
 first view, appear to have the meaning of ' out of," as above 
 attributed to it, yet it will be seen, upon a closer examina- 
 nation, to be really present, if not literally, at least in an 
 accommodated sense. Thus, in ;rai/i« ix fWoo Ttenon/fiiwv, 
 the cup is regarded as having its origin in the wood of 
 which it is made, in some sort to proceed from it ; and, 
 although this is not to be taken literally, it can easily be 
 understood in a figurative sense; and this the more readily 
 as the terms 'out of and 'from' are employed in English 
 in the same way. So again, for if IpcSo: fidxerf»cu, we say 
 in English, ' to fight from jealousy,' or ' out of jealousy. 
 
 d. 'From,' 'on,' 'in.' In the same sense nearly, but 
 rather more obscurely involving the notion of "out of,' the 
 preposition ix is found employed with the genitive case 
 to mark the object or space to which an action, motion, or 
 event is referred for its date or position ; that is, the object 
 or space from which, as proceeding from it, its beginning 
 is counted or dated. Thus : . , tu 
 
 a.) With regard to space, and generally, to denote the 
 object from which an action is marked as having its com- 
 mencement, and which makes the starting-point in taking 
 its measure: e.g. II. xviii. 35*^, iv iexiea<" ^^ »ivrez, lavip 
 ht\ xdi.o,l>av I ic nddai ix xev^a^^C '^W cohered him with 
 
 'Ex. 
 
 22 
 
 linen vestments from head to foot;' that is, 'from out, pre 
 cecding from, commencing with, the head.' 
 
 fi.) With regard to time, to mark the period from whic! 
 an event is reckoned; as, ix toutou, 'from this time,' ic oi 
 ex quo, * from the time that,' if dpx^z, ' from the beginning 
 Hero also the prcpoaitiou ix has properly the sense of ' ou 
 of,' and, if taken literally, describes the action or event a 
 isHuing from, and so as having its commencement from, o 
 dating from, the period of time represented by the noui 
 in the genitive case. 
 
 ;-.) To luarlc the point of attachment of an object, that 
 from which it is suspended, and the like ; as, ^ipuv ix twv 
 ^(oaTJJpmv, • to wear at (literally, from) the girdle.' In this 
 case ix would seem to have the sense of ebrti, 'from,' rather 
 than that of 'out of;' but, in the same way that the Qrceks 
 considered the period from which an action was counted as 
 beginning to be that from which it proceeded, they would 
 seem also to have regarded the object from which another 
 was suspended as being that from which it came forth. But, 
 of course, neither in the one case, nor in the other, would 
 the preposition and genitive, thus used, be taken in a literal 
 sense. Otherwise, but less probably, ix may be here under- 
 stood in its proper souse of 'without,' 'on the outside;' so 
 that ifipttv ix T(ov (^(oazrj/uop shall mean, ' to wear without, 
 ou the outside of, the girdle.' 
 
 d.) With regard to the space to which the position of an 
 object is referred, where ix is rendered in English by ' on,' 
 'in:' e.g. Od. xxi. 420, auro&ev ix difpoeo xa&ijfievo^, 'sitting 
 there on or in the seat ;' II. xiv. 154, oTua' if OuXupmoio djtb 
 (lio'j, ' standing on Olympus, on its summit.' In this con- 
 struction ix would seem to define the position of a thing 
 by representing it us looking out from the space expressed 
 by the noun which follows it in the genitive case, the point 
 of view being transferred from the beholder to the object 
 or space to which the position is referred. Thus, the Greeks 
 said if dptarepd;, properly, 'from out the left hand,' and 
 the Latins, ab oricnte, literally, 'from the east,' and still 
 more nearly conforming to the Greek use of ix, una ex parte, 
 'from out of one side,' where the English has 'on the left 
 
230 
 
 OF THB SETERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 band,' • on the east,' ' on one side.' Looking to such ex- 
 amples, and admitting the explanation suggested, ix Siippoeo 
 may be said to define xadijfjxvoc by denoting the place to 
 which it is referred, and by marking this as a space or 
 position from out of which the sitting, so to speak, looks, 
 or has its aspect, rather than as ono at or in which it is 
 seen. In the second example above cited, Homer employs 
 diT6 in the same way materially with ix. By iz OuXufototo 
 the position of Hero is described as ono that is ' from out 
 of Olympus,' or that 'looks from out of Olympus,' namely, 
 with regard to the beholder; and by dnb {tiou as one that is 
 'from the summit,' or 'looks from the summit,' said with 
 regard to the same beholder. The mode of defining the 
 position of an object is the same in both cases ; the only 
 diftcrence is, that Ix makes the object look, as it were, 
 ' from out' the space to which its position is referred, while 
 d.Ti6 makes it look or have its aspect ' from' the like space. 
 
 e.) 'After,' ' from,' ' in consequence of,' 'by reason of,' ' in 
 accordance with' or ' according to,' ' in pursuance of.' From 
 the sense of 'out of,' belonging to h in the way above 
 explained, spring other meanings of this preposition, as, 
 'after,' 'from,' 'in consequence of,' 'by reason of,' 'in 
 accordance with,' 'in pursuance of,' in which it points out 
 that upon which any thing follows as a result or eflect, as a 
 natural sequence, as what is in just accord with it, &c. E.g. 
 Xen. Anab. ii. 6, 4, ix toutou xai i9avarwdT^, ' hereupon, con- 
 sequent upon this7 he was, in fact, condemned to death ;' 
 Id. ib. vi. 4, 11, if oh xai Stijiahv aiirbv 6 M^ennoi;, ' for which 
 cause, wherefore, in fact, Dexippus accused liim ;' Id. ib. i. 
 9, 19, er di zeva i>p<{Hj deevbv ovra ocxov6/iov ix tou dixalou, ' if ho 
 saw a person to be a good manager from motives of right,' 
 'in pursuance of right;' Id. ib. iv. 2, 23, xai ndira inoiijaav 
 rdtz Aiio9avouacv ix twu duvarwv, 'they did every thing for 
 those who fell, according to their ability;' Id. ib. vi. 2, 7, 
 dXXa idoxet xai to iXMv ivraMa i^ im^ouXrfi eimt, 'but even 
 the having come there seemed to be of design,' ex consuUo. 
 
 The immediate derivation of this class of meanings from 
 that of out of hardly needs illustration, especially if the 
 natural order of these significations of ix be regarded. What 
 
 'Ex. 31 
 
 comes forth or proceeds from another is natural! 
 viewed as subsequent in point of time or of order, i 
 gives the sense of ' after' as following upon that of ' 
 and, again, what comes after or follows upon anoti 
 stand to it in the relation of a result or effect to a c 
 of an action to a motive that determines it ; and this 
 is expressed by such phi'uscs as 'in consequeuce 
 reason of,' ' in pursuance of;' finally, what proceeds : 
 cuiiies after anuthur may bo considered as being sii 
 accordance with it ; and this sense is conveyed in a^iu^u 
 by the expressions ' in accordance with,' ' according to.' 
 
 3. » Out and out,' * utterly,' ' quite.' In some compoun 
 ix has the intensive sense of ' out and out,' ' utterly,' 'quit< 
 as, ixX&uxoZf 'quite white,' ^»r«/>(»c, 'altogether bitter,' ixdi^i 
 'to be quite thirsty,' ixftavddvuv, 'to learn thoroughly,' ' 
 learn by heart,' in Latin, ediscere. 
 
 Summary of the significations of ix. 
 'Ex. 1. 'Out,' 'without;' that is, 'on the outside.' 
 
 2. 'Out of," 'from out;' = 'out' + motion from, 
 
 a. Of space ; ' out of,' ' from out' 
 
 b. Of a number of objects ; ' out of,' * from (out)' : 
 Hence, in comparison, 'of,' 'above.' 
 
 e. Of origin, p.arcntage, source, cause, agent, materii 
 'of,' 'from.' 
 
 d. Of that from which an action, motion, event, t 
 
 begins ; ' from :' 
 a.) Of space, and generally; 'from.' 
 /9.) Of time ; ' from.' 
 ;-.) Of the point of attachment ; ' from.' 
 d.) Of the space to which au object is referred i 
 its position ; ' on,' ' in.' 
 
 e. 'After,' 'in consequence of,' 'by reason of,' ' 
 
 pursuance of,' 'in accordance with,' viz.: 
 a.) Sequence of time and order; 'after.' 
 p.) Rational sequence ; result or effect; just acooi 
 
 ance ; ' by reason of,' ' in consequence of,' ' 
 
 accordance with.' 
 
 3. Intensively; 'out and out,' 'utterly,' 'quite.' 
 
;2 OF THB 8XVSBAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Siffnificatians and use of ix with its case. 
 
 'Ex is UBod with the genitive case alone. And this case, 
 I it occurs in conjunction with ix, has uniformly the mean- 
 ig of ' with respect to ;' that is, according to its proper 
 See, limits the sense of the preceding term hy marking 
 le object or set of objects of which specifically, and as dis- 
 Dguished from all other objects, it is to be understood as 
 leged. 
 
 1. 'Out,' 'without' 'Ex with the genitive case occurs in 
 •mo instances with the primary and simple moaiiing of 
 )ut,' 'without:' e.g. Od. xix. 7, ix xaxvou xari&tjx', 'I 
 eposited them (the weapons) out of, without, the smoke,' 
 rat of the reach of the smoke ;' that is, ' on the outside . . . 
 ith respect to the smoke;' Id. xi. 130 . . . tw 8' air' ix 
 ifpou youva^ia9i^v, ' they two, on the other hand, without 
 le chariot-seat implored him ;' that is, ' without, on the 
 atside, . . . with respect to the chariot-seat ;' Xcn. Anab. 
 i. S, 15, iv&a, oi)^ ei ra^^ etrj nel^bz, xre^^df du dtwxotv xaraid^ot 
 t r6(ou ^ufiaroZf ' where a foot-soldier, even if he were swift, 
 rould not by pursuing overtake a foot-soldier who was out 
 f bow-shot ;' that is, ' without, on the outside, . . . with 
 ispect to a bow-shot ;' Herod, iii. 83, ix zoo /liaou xarfjaro, 
 lat down out from their midst,' ' out, on the outside, . . . 
 ith respect to the midst of them.' The compound ixnoddni, 
 )ut of the way,' ' out of the way of the feet,' that is, ' out, 
 • without, . . . with respect to the feet,' may properly be 
 msidercd to belong here, together with a number besides 
 1 which ix retains its proper sense, upon which the genitive 
 spends. Thus, Uerod. i. 144, dJUd xai aipittv mtreiou roue 
 ft xb Ifibv dvo/ejaavraz i^exkijiaav r^c /'SfZ^C, * nay, of their 
 vn people even, they excluded from an interest (in the 
 raple) those who disregarded the law with respect to the 
 mple ;' ' they shut out . . . with respect to, touching, the 
 iving a part (in the temple) ;' Id. ib. xai toutouc {rpinoda^ 
 rhiouz) xn^ ^"''C Xafi^dvovraz ix tou Ipou foj ixipipetv, ' and it 
 as required that those who got these brazen tripods (as 
 rizcs) should not carry them out of the temple ;' that is, 
 )ut, without, . . . with respect to the temple.' 
 
 'Ex. 
 
 233 
 
 2. 'Out of,' 'from out' '£* with the genitive case occurs 
 very commonly in connection with verbs of action or motion, 
 and with others of like force, in the sense of 'out of,' 'out 
 from.' Thus (a), with any object, local or other, from out 
 of which an action or motion may proceed: e.g. II. i. 439, 
 ix Sk Xpuar/t<: viydc ^ T:ovto7:6poto, 'the daughter of Cryses 
 went out of (from out) the sea-going ship ;' ^sch. Prom. 
 59, Sitvbz yap elipeiv xdf d/irjj(^dv<ov nbpooz, ' for he is of won- 
 derful power in discovering a way of escape even from out 
 of ills that have no remedy ;' Id. Sept. o. Thcb. 40, ^xo» aatp^ 
 Tdxee&ev ix arpaToo (pipiov, ' I am come as the bearer from the 
 army of true intelligence of affairs there ;' Id. Pers. 693-4, 
 TioXXa nkv yap ix daXdaai^z, ^okkd d' ix j^ipaou xoxh. \ j-luerat 
 &v^Totz, 'for many ills befall men from (out of) the sea, and 
 many from (out of) the land ;' Xen. Anab. i. 2, 18, ^ Kihoaa 
 i^uytv ix zffi ipfiapd^T^z, ' the queen of Cilicia fled from out 
 of her chariot;' Soph. Antig. 437-8, rb phv yap aurbv ix xaxaiv 
 ntiptuyevat | r/diarov, 'for the having myself escaped from out 
 of evils is very delightful ;' ./Each. Pers. 845-G, dXX' el/u, xai 
 Xa^ouaa xbafiov ix dofttov \ unavrtd^^eiv naid' iftw netpdaoftat, ' but 
 I will go, and, taking vesture from out the house (palace), 
 will endeavor to meet my son.' Xen. Cyrop. vi. 3, 15, b fiku 
 oiu Kupoz, &)z elSev, dvanrjdijaa^ ix r^c ei5/<af Iw^vra aurtp, 
 ' Cyrus, then, when he saw him, sprang up from out of his 
 seat, and met him ;' Id. Anab. i. 2, 7, af Sk w/jyai aurou elaiu 
 ' ix ziov ^aaiXeliov, ' its sources are from out of the palace ;' that 
 is, the stream flows out from fountains in the palace ; Plat. 
 Apol. p. 37, D, xaXbz dv poi 6 /Sj'of ehi . . . dXXijv if d^Aiyc noXewc 
 dfiet^oftii'tp, ' I would have a reputable life if I should change 
 my abode from one city to another ;' that is, ' out of one city 
 into another;' Orut Att 1150, 9, ixiXeuaa rbv nalSa xaXiaae, 
 tt xivaz tdot Twv itoXtT&v naptouzaz, ix zffi bdou, 'I bade the 
 servant call them (in) from out of the highway, if ho saw 
 any of the citizens passing by;' Id. 90, 10, liui^dvztov 
 i^diadat ix ziov ^itpiov (PiXinnou, 'to rescue Byzantium out 
 of the hands of I'liilip ;' Soph. Phil. 1271, dixou Se x«P^<: ^f 
 iftr^z ^iXij zdSs, ' receive these arrows from (out of) my hands.' 
 
 In all these, and like examples, the preposition derives 
 from the action or motion with which it is conjoined, and 
 
234 
 
 OF THE BBTBRAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 of which it is the qualification, an addition to its proper 
 sense, so that instead of tho simple sense of ' out,' ' without,' 
 it has that of ' out of,' ' from out ;' or, at least, if this he too 
 much to say, this additional idea of ' from' is suggested by 
 the conjunction of the preposition ix with an action or 
 motion ; and the genitive follows tho action or motion, as 
 qualified by the preposition, in the sense of ' with respect 
 to.' Thufl, in the first example cited, ix di XputnjU ^);^C 1^^, 
 'Cryseis went out, or from out, the ship,' the sense is, 
 • Cryse'is went out, or from out, . . . with respect to the 
 ship,' the genitive being added to show that the ' going out 
 from' is to be understood specifically of the ship, and of 
 nothing else. 
 
 6. 'Hx with the genitive case is used, in the same way, 
 with a noun that denotes a number or class of objects from 
 which one or more are described as separated or selected : 
 e.g. Soph Q5d. Col. 70, ifi' dv u; ahzif) TcoftTtbz iS bfuov fioXot ; 
 'will, then, any one of you (that is, out of your number) 
 go and bring him ?' Id. Electr. 1343, ov nor' ix TtoiXtou iyat 
 fidvov vpoatupov mar/iv, 'whom alone, out of mnny, I found 
 faithful ;' Id. Aj. 736-7, ix yap ouvidpou xae rupavvixou xuxXou | 
 KdJix"^ USTaavdc, 'Calchas having removed him from the 
 royal council,' of which he was one ; Id. Antig. 164, nS/mot- 
 mv ix ndvuov 3i](a iareiX' Ixiadeu, ' by a messenger for you to 
 come apart from ail,' that is, 'from out of all;' Id. (Ed. Col. 
 746, ix 3s rail' /juUtar' iyd>, 'and of them, of their number, I* 
 above all ;' Orat. Att. 24, 12, 8exa dvdpec ix itdvrwv [Idrjvalwv 
 npiojiu; rjpidr^aav, ' ten men, out of all the Athenians, were 
 chosen ambassadors ;' that is, ' ten men were chosen out . . . 
 with respect to the Athenians.' Compare the genitive as 
 used with the superlative degree. And so with regard to 
 numbers : e.g. Plat. Qorg. p. 500, A, aifiii'tjipot: ^/iiv el xai oh ix 
 Tpiaiv; 'arc you voting with us as a third one?' properly, 
 'of, out of, the class of those called three'/' 'If you vote 
 with UB, the number of us voting together will be three: 
 do you too vote with us, and are you thus to be referred 
 to the number or denomination of three?' 'Do you, by 
 voting with us, make a third party to the vote ?' 
 
 Of the same nature is the use of ^x with the genitive case 
 
 'Ex. 
 
 235 
 
 to mark a number or class of objects from which one is 
 taken or selected, and so distinguished above the rest, 
 where in English we use 'of,' 'above.' E.g. II. iv. 96, 
 above cited, ix Tcdvuov 8e (idkara 'AXs^dvSpip ^aaeX^i, 'and 
 especially of all, or above all, to prince Alexander;' Soph. 
 Antig. 1137-8, t&v ix naaav \ rt/i^c ^J'sprdrav n6Xeiov, ' (Thebes) 
 which you honor most highly above all cities;' that is, 
 ' which one, out of all cities, you honor most highly.' 
 
 c. Besides the above instances, ix, in the sense of ' out of,' 
 'from out,' is used with the genitive case in a variety of 
 applications that involve, some more, some less obscurely, 
 this meaning of the preposition, and that have uniformly 
 the genitive employed in its common signification of 'with 
 respect to.' Thus: 
 
 a.) To express the origin, source, cause, or means of any 
 action or state. In this way ix and the genitive are used 
 with elvai, pyvsa^ae, fuvai, to denote the stock or parentage 
 from which a person is sprung : e.g. II. xv-. 187, r/je7f ydp r' 
 ix Kpovou eiftkv dSsX^eot, oSc rixero 'Pia, 'for we are three 
 brothers, sprung from Kronos, whom Rhea bore ;' Herod, i. 
 66, ou8' dtv aurd;, ou8k of i? aiirou, ■simtata&ai nore r^c ^fX^/^t 
 'that, therefore, neither himself, nor those descended from 
 him, would ever cease to reign ;' Id. vii. 11, pyj yap enjv ix 
 Japelou . . . pij ripwp'i^ad/uvuz \l3^vatoij^, ' for, may I not be 
 ^the son of Darius, if I take not vengeance on the Atlienians ;' 
 ./Esch. S. c. Theb. 128, ai&ev yap i^ acparoz Yeyovapev, 'for 
 we are descended from your race.' And, more generally, ix 
 is used with a noun in the genitive case to express the 
 source, cause, or motive to which any thing is attributed. 
 E.g. II. xvii. 101, intl ix dsotptv noXepi^et, 'since he fights 
 moved by a god;' that is, 'his fighting proceeds from, or 
 has its source or motive in, a god ;' Ilerod. ii. 64, tt^v 8k 
 naviJYuptv. raurrju ix ruuSe vo/iiaat faat ol int^dtptot, ' the 
 natives say that this celebration is customary from the fol- 
 lowing cause ;' .^sch. Suppl. 889, ix notou ippovi^paToz | . • ■ 
 Ti^v8' dri/td^etz x^ova ; ' from what purpose do you put dis- 
 honor upon this land ?' Xen. Anab. ii. 6, 4, ix toutou xat 
 idavartodi^ Imb twv iv r^ Sndprig re^tuv, ' for this cause, in fact, 
 ho was condemned to death;' Id. ib. vi. 4, 11, i? oh xai 
 
286 
 
 OF THE SBVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 M^aXtv ahthv i Jisantot, ' for wbich rooson, in fact, Doxip> 
 pus accused him.' 
 
 p.) Bo, likewise, is ix with the genitive case employed to 
 express the agent from whom an action proceeds : e.g. 
 ^sch. Prom. 761, ix dioz ndaj^at xax&z, ' I am ill treated by 
 Zeus ;' Ilcrod. iii. 14, zb noteofuvov itSv iS Ixslvou, ' every 
 thing that was done by him.' And, by an easy transition, 
 the same preposition and case express also the means or 
 instrument by which an action is performed, it being re- 
 garded as the source whence this springs. E.g. ^sch. 
 Agam. 1472-3, ioXitp ijAp<f» daftu; | ix xtph^ d/iftTOfttp fie- 
 Xipxfi, ' destroyed by a treacherous fate with the hand by 
 a two-edged dart.' Here, ix x^P^C, though it may be ren- 
 dcrcd ' with the hand,' properly qualifies d/jifiTOftuj ^eXi/ivt/t, 
 the meaning being, 'by a two-edged dart from out the 
 hand.' Bintilar is the example in ^sch. Agam. 529, (be 
 TtoU.' dfiaupac ix fpevi^ pi' duaariveiv, 'so that I greatly 
 lament with a troubled heart,' where ix fptvoz denotes the 
 source from which the distress expressed by dvuttriveiv pro- 
 ceeds. 
 
 ;*.) And, lastly, ix with the genitive is used, in the same 
 way, to denote the material out of which any thing is 
 formed. E.g. Herod, i. 194, oux ix SuXatv jtoctwrat rd ziaita, 
 ' they do not make their boats of (out of) wood ;' Id. ii. 71, 
 it is said that the hide (dippa) of the hippopotamus is so 
 thick that, when dried, they make spear-points of it, wart 
 . . . SuoTu notitadoT'dxdvTta iS aiirou. ./Esch. Suppl. 931, 
 mvovraz ix xpi9iov pi&u, 'drinking wine made of barley 
 (ale).' 
 
 d. 'Ex with the genitive is employed, in a kindred sense, 
 to mark, in a variety of relations, the object or space from 
 which any action or event, or any measure of extent, takes 
 its commencement, the preposition having the force of 'out 
 of,' and the genitive its common meaning of ' with respect 
 to.' Thus : 
 
 a.) In giving the extent to which an action reaches, the 
 preposition ix with the genitive case is used to mark the 
 place •iroin which it begins: e.g. II. xxiii. 168-9, . . . 
 ixdiu^e vixuv [uj-dduftoi 'AxMeh^ | iz n63a(; ix xe^uXfjZ, ' Achilles 
 
 'Ex. 
 
 237 
 
 covered the dead body from the head to the feet." The 
 idea conveyed by ix with the genitive, in such an example, 
 is seemingly nothing more than that of the point from 
 which the action or motion proceeds, and is sufficiently ex- 
 pressed in English by ' from ;' but the proper notion was, 
 no doubt, that of the object or space from out of which, as 
 from its source, the action or motion was conceived as taking 
 its rise. In some cases this proper sense of ix with the geni- 
 tive is more readily admitted, although, perhaps, not more 
 certainly present than in the example above cited, namely, 
 where the object from out of which an action or motion 
 proceeds, or from which it is considered as beginning, is 
 such as manifestly to include the notion of space, whether 
 local or relating to time. Thus, Herod, ix. 8, if ^piprfi ii 
 ^(tipijv dvaftaXXopevot, ' putting it off from day to day,' lite- 
 rally, 'out of a day into a day,' or 'out of one day into 
 another;' Plat. Apol. p. 37, d, xaXb^ dv pot b pioz eti] . . . 
 dUrjV it dXkijz iibhv Ttbhtoz dpetfiopii/tp, ' if I changed from 
 one city to another,' literally, ' if I passed from out of one 
 city to another." 
 
 p.) In regard to the period of time from which an event 
 is reckoned or dated, the preposition ix with the genitive 
 case is used to denote the space in time from which the 
 event described is considered as taking its commencement. 
 E.g. ylCscli. Pers. 748, i^ oiure Ttprjv Zeuf dva^ zijvd' wnaatv, 
 'from the time that Zeus bestowed this honor,' ex quo 
 Jupiter hune honorem contulil; Id. Eumenid. 274, noXbi; 3i pot 
 •ftvotz' dv ii dpx^c Xbyoi:, 'long would be my story (if I 
 shonlil tell it) from the beginning;' Id. Pers. 774-5, ttwc &v ix 
 Toi)T(ov ire | npdaaotpev i; dpiara ; ' how, from this time, hence- 
 forth, shall we best prosper?' Xen. Cyrop. i. 6, 7, ix naidaiv 
 bp&v bpuZi 'because I saw you from boyhood.' To this 
 place ought, probably, to be referred the passage in Xen. 
 Anab. i. 8, 14, where, after stating that the barbarian army 
 was advancing in an even line, the writer adds, zbd' 'EXXij- 
 vixbv, ire Iv T(p aitrip pivov, <Tover«Crrero ix twv lu Trpoaibvriov, 
 'the Greek army, remaining in the same position, drew up 
 in order of battle while they (the enemy) were still ad- 
 vancing,' properly, 'from the time that they were still ad- 
 
238 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 vancing,' or 'counting from the time that they were still 
 advancing.' But the interpretation, with the present read- 
 ing, is attended by almost insuperable difficulty. The use 
 of i* and the genitive in thi« and the immediately pre- 
 ceding set of examples having the same interpretation, it 
 is needless to repeat here what has been already said with 
 regard to it. 
 
 A construction very similar to that of ix with the geni- 
 tive just considered, and probably identical with it, is that 
 of ix vuxzbt:, ' by night,' or ' in the night,' ix twu vuxt€ov, ' by 
 night,' or ' in the night :' e.g. Xen. Cyrop. i. 4, 2, xai yap ix vox- 
 roc it uvoz dioiTo \iaTudpjz, ' for, besides, if Astyages wanted 
 any thing in the night;' Id. viii. 5, 12, iniaz xai ix uov wx- 
 rwv, ei diot «, dLxovri^ouu, ' in order that, in the night-time 
 also, should there be any need, they might throw darts.' 
 The sense expressed by ix vuxzot;, ix nov puxuou, is not very 
 widely difl'erent from that conveyed by the simple genitive 
 wxToi;, ' by night ;' but it arises differently. It may be pro- 
 perly compared with the expression iz dpiareitrj^, or i^ dpca- 
 repfjz x^P^'^t (Uerod. vii. 115,) ' on the left hand,' fi-equcntly 
 used in marking position in space. In the case of iS dpia- 
 repS^, and so of other such examples, it is hardly to be 
 doubted that the position of an object is defined, not simply 
 by nuniiiig the place at or in which it stands, that is, by 
 the ablative of place or by iu and the ablative of place, nor 
 yet by referring it to a denomination of space to which it 
 belongs, which would, be done by the genitive alone, as is 
 seen ill the adverbs oiu, 'where,' woD; 'where?' and, for ex- 
 pressions of time, in vuxrS;, ' by night ;' but by marking a 
 space as that from out of which it looks, as it were, or from 
 out of which it has a direction or aspect towards the person or 
 thing with regard to which its position is to be determined. 
 It differs from the ordinary mode of denoting the relative 
 position of an object by taking as the point of view the 
 space to which the position is referred, instead of the per- 
 son or thing with regard to which the position is to be 
 marked. When it is said of the army of Xerxes. Ilerod. 
 vii. llo, iufsursv Ss »6?^ov . , . i; dpurrep^; X-P^^ e-/tov ^c's 
 ied. luXeoz neSiou xaXeo/idfou, ' thence it went through a plain 
 
 'Ex. 
 
 289 
 
 called Syleus, having the gulf on the left hand,' the posi- 
 tion of the gulf relatively to the Persian army is defined by 
 stating it to bo iS dptatep^z X^P*^' 'from out the left hand,' 
 that is, ' looking from out, having its direction or aspect 
 from out, the left hand;' and this direction or aspect is 
 towards the object with reference to which the position is to 
 be defined, namely, the Persian army. The gulf, instead 
 of being represented as ' on the left hand,' the Persian army 
 being the point of view, is described as looking or having 
 its direction ' from out the left hand,' the space or note of 
 direction called 'the left hand' being the point of view. 
 Compare dnd with the genitive, and the Latin ab with the 
 ablative, used in nearly the same sense, both having the 
 same point of view in marking position that ix with the 
 genitive has, and difl'ering from it only in the manner of 
 noting the direction from the point of view towards the 
 object of reference ; dnS and ab marking a direction 'from,' 
 ix a direction 'from out,' 'out of.' Now, admitting this 
 explanation of the mode in which ix with the genitive case 
 defines local position, it is easy to see how the same prepo- 
 sition with the same case is employed to mark the time 
 of an action by referring it to a denomination of time. As 
 i$ dpcarspuz, or iz dptazEprfi 3fs/'<Jf, Ilerod. vii. 115, marks 
 the position of xbXnoz, so ix voxr<5f, or ix rtov wxzwv, describes 
 the period of time to which an action, as dxovui^etv, 'to 
 throw with the dart,' is referred : as the former represents 
 the gulf as being ' on the left hand,' so the latter represents 
 the tlirowing of darts as being 'in the night;' and the way 
 in which the definition of position is made is plainly the 
 same in both- cases. It may be added, that ix riov wxriov 
 difters from ix vuxroc, both being rendered by 'in the night,' 
 or 'by night,' by its implying, through the plural form, the 
 repetition of the action of which the time is defined by the 
 preposition ix and the genitive, and its occurrence in or on 
 more nights than one. Compare with the use of ix vuxtS^ 
 and ix Twv wxtwv, in the examples above cited, Herod, v. 
 106, Spa /ijj I? iazipr^t: auourbv iv airir/ ffXS»» * beware lest 
 you afterwards blame yourself;' and Id. i. 108, . . . t"jSh 
 
240 
 
 OF THB 6KTEBAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 «h 
 
 'Ex. 
 
 241 
 
 ilii re ize^a^ig, *ai dUoui il6fuvoi, iS bariptjz cot iwurtp nep^ 
 nitrgz, 'do not afterwards fall into your own snare.' 
 
 f.) In like manner, ix with the genitive is used to mark 
 the point of attachment of an object, as, dudmrea^au Ix ni/oc, 
 ' to suspend from,' or < to fiisten to a thing ;' e.g. Od. xii. 
 51, ix if auTou iteiftar' dvijfSto, ' and to it lot ropes be fast- 
 ened ;' literally, ' let ropes be suspended from, from out of, 
 it;' lb. viii. G7, xaS' 8' ix naaaaXoipt xpi/iaaev fop/irfj-a Uyetav, 
 'and down from the nail hung his loud-sounding lyre;' 
 Herod, ix. 74, ix rou {^aurnjpo^ rou ^mprjxoz ifopee Jfoitxij} &Xuae 
 didepi^r^v dfxupav aiSi^phjv, *he wore (suspended) from the 
 belt of his breastplate an iron anchor made fast with a 
 chain of brass.' Compare also the phrase ix ^uphz Xap^du- 
 eo9at, ' to take hold of by the hand.' (See Passow's Lex. 
 8. V.) Here, as already explained, the sense of ix is suf- 
 ficiently expressed in practice by the English ' from ;' but 
 the Qrccks seem to have regarded the object suspended as 
 in some sort proceeding from, or having its direction from, 
 the thing to which it is attached, the genitive having its 
 ordinary sense of 'with respect to;' or, which is nearly the 
 .same thing, they may have regarded the preposition with 
 the genitive aa being used here, as in the case of iS 
 dpunepaz, ' on the left hand,' to mark the object to which 
 the thing suspended is referred for its position. 
 
 i.) 'On,' 'in.' 'Ex with the genitive is employed in 
 other cases also to mark the object to which, as to a point 
 of the compass, any thing is referred for its position ; as 
 where it is rendered in English by ' on,' ' in.' E.g. Od. xxi. 
 420, oiiTodev ix diippoeo xadijpevo^, ' sitting there on, or in, 
 the seat of the chariot ;' II. xiv. 154, araa' i? OuXupiroto «bri 
 /S/ou, .' standing on Olympus, on its summit;' Soph. Antig. 
 411, xadTJfu9' dxpatv ix ndjotv Invjvipoc, 'we sat on the top 
 of the hill, yet sheltered from the wind ;' Xen. Cyrop. viii. 
 5, 15, e? ttc fdiajja duvatro, ^ ix ieita^ 5 iS dpumpa^ ^ oiaadeu 
 imftwii'Tatv rHv noie/tiaiv, dpdwz iSelliot, ' if a person should 
 be able to deploj' a phalanx properly, if the enemy appeared 
 cither on the right hand, or on the left hand, or on the 
 rear ;' Id. Anab. i. 8, 23, insl 8e oudeiz auTip ipd-jitzo ix rmi 
 ^Mtvr/ou, ' and when no one fought against him,' properly. 
 
 ' when no one fought with him over against, on the opposite 
 side, face to face;' Id. ib. i. 10, 11, of 8' ai fidpfiapot oux 
 idij^ovTo, «UU' ix nXeiovoz ^ to npia&ev ifetrfov, ' the barbarians 
 did not await them, but fled even at a greater distance than 
 before.' It has been already sufficiently explained above, 
 that ix with the genitive, in such examples, marks the 
 position of an object by referring to some space or object 
 from which it has a direction or looks out, as it were, to- 
 wards the person or thing with regard to which its position 
 is defined ; and that the peculiarity in this mode of de- 
 scribing the position of an object relatively to another is, 
 that the space or object to which the position is referred, 
 instead of the person or thing with regard to which the 
 position is to be defined, is made the point of view. Befer- 
 ence was also made to the like use of dno with the genitive 
 in Greek, and of ab and ex or e with the ablative in Latin ; 
 and to the fact that npdz with the genitive is used contrari- 
 ' wise, namely, when the object with regard to which the 
 position of an object is defined is made the point of view. 
 
 e. 'After,' 'from,' 'in consequence of,' 'in accordance 
 with.' 'Ex with the genitive case is used in the sense of . 
 •after,' 'from,' 'in consequence of,' 'in accordance with,' 
 these significations being referred properly to the preposition 
 itself, and being derived from that of ' out of,' as already 
 cxpliiined when the meanings of the preposition itself were 
 under consideration, and the genitive having its common 
 signification of ' with respect to.' Thus : 
 
 a.) ' After.' With regard to time, ix with the genitive is 
 used to denote a period after which the event defined is rep- 
 resented as occurring, and ia translated in English by ' afl«r.' 
 E.g. II. xvi. 364-5, «< 8" 8r' dit' OuXupxou vi<poz ipx^rat oupaubv 
 eiaw, I aiMpoz ix 8ijjz, ' after a clear sky ;' Xen. Anab. i. 3, 
 13, ix 8k TouTot) dv'urravTO, 'after this they arose;' JE&ch. 
 Enm. 2, ix 8k rrfi 0i/itv, 'and after her, Themis;' Xen. 
 Cyrop. i. 3, 1, ix 8e roitrou rou ■j[p6uou psrenip^aTo 'Aarudp/z 
 n^v laurou ^ujaripa, 'after this time Astyages sent for his 
 daughter;' Id. ib. i. 2, 8, ix toutou 81 elz robe itpijPooz iSip- 
 lovrat, * after this they pass into the class of the ephebi.' 
 
 j9.) ' After,' ' upon.' With regard to any occasion after 
 
 16 
 
242 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 which an event is mentioned as occurring, ix with the geni- 
 tive is used, and is expressed in English by ' after,' ' upon.' 
 E.g. Herod, i. 86, dvaaTevdSavra i» noXX^z ^""X''!^' ^^ ^P'^ ^^^ 
 fidaat loXiava, 'that after a long silence he groaned aloud 
 and thrice pronounced the name of Solon ;' Id. i. 50, (L; 8h 
 ix r^f duair^z ij-ivero, ' and when he came from sacrificing,' 
 'after sacrificing;' Xen. Cyrop. i. 4, 28, ivraMa dij rbv 
 Ku/wv yiXdniu ix rtav rrpoa^iv daxpuwv, ' that hcreujioii, now, 
 Cyrus laughpd after his previous tears;' Id. ib. iii. 1, 40, 
 ipiXoipfiovr^dinTez Siomp eixhz ix auvaXXapfi, 'showing mutual 
 kindness, as was likely to happen, after their reconciliation;' 
 Id. (Econ. 9, 1, i^ d/iij;fawac thnopiav zivd sbpr/xdia, ' as she 
 had found out some way of escape after inextricable diffi- 
 culties ;' Id. de. ro Equ. vii. 17, ineiddv ye pijv ix rrfi arpoip^z 
 ek TO eudb fiXiiz-Q 6 Ir.itoz, - whenever the horse, after turning, 
 looks right forward ;' Id. ib. § 18, (dj-oiJiw) xat ix too Ta^ioz 
 ai d»; iyyuTdTio i/ptpi^etv, xai ix too loTdvat 8s azpifavra 
 Set ndhv bppav, ' it is well, also, to bring the horse to a halt 
 again, after being at speed, in the nearest (shortest) possible 
 distance, and, after he stands, to turn him, and urge him 
 . forward again.' 
 
 p) ' From,' ' after.' Of the same character precisely is the 
 case in which ix with the genitive is employed to denote that 
 from which a change has been made to something else, 
 expressed in English by 'from,' 'after.' E.g. Soph. (Ed. 
 Tyr. 454, Tu<pXbz j-ap ix Sedopxbroz, 'for lie is blind after 
 having his sight,' or.' from seeing ho is blind;' Id. Trach. 
 283, if dXflitov dl^TjXov ibpouaat filov, * after prosperity having 
 found a life of misery;' .^sch. Pers. 293, xat Xeuxbv fjpap 
 wxToz ix peXaYj^ipou, 'a joyous day after a night of gloom.' 
 
 S.) 'From,' 'in consequence of,' 'by reason of,' 'in pursu- 
 ance of,' ' in accordance with,' ' according to.' 'A'x with the 
 genitive case is used in the significations just recited, to mark, 
 namely, that upon which any thing follows as its result, as 
 its natural or rational sequence, or as being in just accord- 
 ance with it. E.g. ^sch. Agam. 101, ix duat&v dyaud tpaivoaa' 
 iMz, ' a joyous hope appearing in consequence of sacrifices;' 
 Xen. Anab. ii. 6, 4, ix rooroo, ' hereupon ;' Id. ib. vi. 4, 11, 
 if oh, 'wherefore;' Id. ib. i. 9, 19, ix too dixalou, ' in pursu- 
 
 '£■*. '£v. 
 
 243 
 
 ance of right,' 'from motives of right;' Id. ib. iv. 2, 23, ix 
 Tav Sovazwv, ' according to our means ;' Orat. Att. 152, 17, 
 TUj-jidvuv rijz ix t&v vd/uov Ttfjiwpiaz, 'to meet with punishment 
 in accordance with the laws ;' Xen. Anab. vi. 2, 7, if int- 
 fiouX^z, 'from design,' 'designedly,' ex consulto; Orat. Att. 
 463j 4, Twu noXiuou pjjdiva ix Tpnjpap^iaz Imdp^uv dzsX^, ' that 
 no one of the citizens should bo exempt from contributions 
 by reason of having been a trierarch ;' Id. 50, 20, npodbrrjz ix 
 fuaewZf 'a traitor by nature,' that is, 'from,' 'in accordance 
 with his nature.' 
 
 TADLE OF THE BIONIFICATIONS AND USE OF It WITH ITS OASE. 
 
 BigDiBcatiom of 1*. 
 
 Osnitivs : ' with reipsot to,' 
 
 1. 'Out,' 'without.' 
 
 1. ' Outside of,' ' without,' • out of the reach of.' 
 
 2. 'Out of,' 'from out.' 
 
 2. 'Out of," from out.' 
 
 
 a. Of space; 'out of,' 'from out,' 'from.' 
 
 
 b. Of a class; 'out of,' 'from out;' 
 
 
 " (in comparison ;) 'of,' 'aboT«.' 
 
 
 e. Of origin, source, &c. ; ' of,' 'from.' 
 
 
 d. ' From' (out of) : 
 
 
 a. Of space ; ' from.' 
 
 
 p. Of time ; ' from,' ' in.' 
 
 
 y. Of the point of attachment ; ' from,' ■ by.' 
 
 
 i. Of an object to which position is referred ; 
 
 
 'on,' 'in;'Lat. e, ex. 
 
 
 t. ' After,' ■ in consequence of,' &c. 
 
 
 a. Of time ; ' after.' 
 
 
 p. Of ony occasion ; ' after,' ' upon.' 
 
 
 y. Of cause, reason, &o. ; ' from,' ' in conse- 
 
 
 quence of,' ' by reason of,' ' in pursuance 
 
 
 of,' ' in accordance with,' 'according to.' 
 
 'Ev. 
 ^Evy having a poetic form ivi, the epic and poetic form eiv, 
 and that of eiv't, which is epic, has the same radical with eiz. 
 The difi'erenco of form caused by the addition of the final c 
 in ttz (iv + z) has not been satisfactorily accounted for, so far 
 as the writer is aware. Assuming iv, which is the same 
 with the Latin and English in, and with the German ein, to 
 be the original as it is the simpler form, the difficulty is to 
 give the true origin and value of the z in tiz- Etv is only 
 another form of iv in which the t has been lengthened in 
 the same way with o in eudmptov. In elvl the final i may be 
 the same that occurs in oinoai, rouzout, and which is under- 
 
244 
 
 OF THK SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Btood to be a demonstrative ; or it may be the sign of the 
 locativus. Although the former seems more probable, it 
 is a matter of doubt. (See Liddell and Scott's Lexicon.) 
 
 Siffnifications of iv. 
 
 1. a. 'In,' 'within.' The proper signification of ^v is ' in,' 
 'within,' opposed to h, 'out,' 'without,' with the idea of 
 relative position within a space having boundaries. Thus, 
 IvotKtv, 'to dwell in or within,' i/ijjdHhw, 'to cast in,' 
 i/i^aiveiu, 'to step in;' and so with many examples with 
 nouns, as, iv otxtp eTvai, 'to be in a house.' In the same 
 way, not only with regard to a circumscribed space, but of 
 any object, state, or circumstance admitting the notion of 
 a thing being within it or invested by it, as, iv ia&r^rt, ' in a 
 garment,' h ZitXocz, 'in or under arms,' iv jroAi/xip, 'in war,' 
 iti ipyrj, ' in anger.' 
 
 h. 'Among.' Hence, when kv is joined with a noun 
 expressing a number of objects admitting the idea of 
 another being involved in them or encompassed by them, 
 it obtains the sense of * among,' as, iv npo/idj^oK;, ' among the 
 foremost oombatants,' Iv re ^otat xal dv&pionoiai, 'among 
 both gods and men.' 
 
 c. 'With.' In a number of examples iv appears to have 
 the sense of 'with,' or to mark the instrument; ua, iv xtpal 
 la^eiv, ' to take with the hands :' e.g. II. xv. 229, dUd aiiy' iv 
 feipeaat W/3' aix'tSa duaaav6eaoav. But, in such examples, the 
 idea of 'in,' 'within,' is certainly to be attached to iv, not- 
 withstanding the rendering in English may properly enough 
 be made by ' with.' (See Passow's Lex.) 
 
 d. ' On,' ' at,' ' near.' In some cases iv seems to he used 
 without having the notion of 'in,' 'within,' but so as to 
 denote position in a more general way, in the sense of ' at,' 
 'on,' 'near;' as, iv oupeai, 'on the mountains,' iv xopuf^ae, 
 ' on the summits,' iv cmrotZf ' on horses,' iv norafup, ' at the 
 river.' E.g. II. xviii, 520-1, of 9 8re 8ij fi' 7xavov 89t a<piaiv 
 dire hj^oat, | iv noTa/i^ ; Herod, i. 76, xard I'lvdtmjv no^v r^v 
 iv Ei^ilv<p 7c6vTtp fMiard xfj xet/iivjj, ' sitnated on the Euxhie 
 sea,' said of the position of Pterie ; Id. ix. 81, 5aa fiiv vuv . '^ . 
 iv nXaToa^ai i369i], ' the presents made at Platicsc ;' and so 
 
 'Ev. 
 
 246 
 
 Id. ib. 100 and 101, the latter chapter having iv rf IliaTattdi, 
 ' in the district of Plateese,' instead of iv IliaTou^at, ' at or 
 near Platasae;' II. v. 370, ivYouvaaininre, 'fell on her knees.' 
 (See Passow's Lex., and Schweigh. Lex. Hero,d. s. v.) 
 
 In some of these and such examples it is more than pos- 
 sible to admit for iv its proper signification of 'in,' 'within,' 
 us in iv oupem, ' on the mountains,' where the sense may just 
 as well be 'in the mountains,' and so in iv topoif^at the 
 meaning is cipher 'in' or ' on the summits.' But in others 
 this can hardly bo admitted, at least without some explant^ 
 tion. 'Ev ixnot; iivat cannot mean ' to go in horses ;' and so, 
 in the example cited from the Iliad, iv norafttp does not bear 
 the sense of ' in the river' consistently with the description 
 of which it forms a part, that, namely, of an ambush by a 
 river. Two explanations of this difficulty seem to present 
 themselves. First, the preposition iv may be considered to 
 have entirely lout its proper force, the locative sense of the 
 ablative case prevailing so far as to make the preposition of 
 no appreciable value; just as xard, in xar' ohov, 'at home,' 
 and other phrases, seems to have been absorbed in the 
 meatiing of the accusative case. But this, even allowing it 
 to be true, so far as it goes, is hardly complete and Batis-> 
 factory, since it in no way accounts for the presence of iv, 
 as may be done for xard in the case mentioned, and in all 
 similar ones ; for if it be said that iv is employed ordinarily 
 to mark the more exact relation of position ' within,' but ia 
 occasionally used in a more general way to denote position 
 without the notion of ' within' being involved, it is only 
 repeating the statement of the apparent fact without any 
 explanation. Secondly, it may be that iv has a second and 
 distinct sense, that of ' on,' corresponding both in signifi- 
 cation and in form to the English ' on' and the Qerman an. 
 And this would seem to be confirmed by the use of the Latin 
 hi, in the same way with the Greek iv, in the sense of ' on ;' 
 as in the compound instare, ' to press on,' properly, ' to stand 
 upon,' and in such phrases as m equo sedere, 'to sit on a 
 horse.' But here, again, the explanation is attended with 
 serious difficulUes. if iv, Latin in, seem to correspond to 
 the English ■ on' in such instances as have been mentioned, 
 
246 
 
 OF THB 6EVBRAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 it noverthelesB difiera essentially in its general sense ; and 
 this makes it more probable that this occasional coincidence 
 of meaning between ip and * on' is owing to something else 
 than a common origin. And as to the confirmation derived 
 from the like use of the Latin in, it amounts to this,. and no 
 more, that with regard to both the Greek iv and the Latin 
 in alike there is required an explanation of the fact that the 
 preposition regularly used to mark a more specific relative 
 position, namely, that of being •within' a defined limit, is 
 here employed where apparently no such reference is had 
 to a circumscribed space. Pott, (Etym. Porsch. i. p. 151,) 
 rejecting this explanation, assumes that, in Latin, in equo 
 may be used in an accommodated sense, and understood to 
 mean 'within the space of the horse's back.' And his 
 intei-pretation, although manifestly incomplete, may, in a 
 very partial sense, be admitted to be true. For the Latin 
 in and the Greek iv are not confined to marking the relative 
 position of ' within' with regard to space and time merely, 
 but have this ofiSce with reference also to any condition or 
 set of circumstances that may invest a person or action. If 
 we say in Greek iv dpj-g eTvtu, ' to be in a state of anger,' the 
 proper force of the preposition is no more difficult to see 
 than in the proposition iv r^ v^in/t ireXeuvjakv, ' he died- in 
 the island.' Even the phrase iv aoi j-dp iapev, Soph. CEA. Tyr. 
 814, ' for we depend on you,' that is, for our salvation, * we 
 are in your hands,' although more difficult, may readily be 
 seen to employ the- preposition in the same way; only the 
 expression is to be taken figuratively. It is not intended tp 
 be said literally that we, that is, as regards our salvation, 
 are ' in' or ' within you,' but that, as regards our salvation, 
 we are in certain circumstances or in a certain condition, 
 namely, in the circumstances or condition expressed by 
 whatever is embraced in the terra aoi, and that is your 
 ability and willingness to save, the person being employed 
 for the properties belonging to him and that may be the 
 ground of confidence for those seeking safety. So that, as 
 a man's dying is defined in a material point, its plttce,*by 
 saying that it occurred iv -qj v^tup, ' in, within, the island*' 
 80 the term io/tiv, ' we are,' meaning in regard to our sal- 
 
 'Ev. 
 
 247 
 
 vation, is defined in a material point, namely, the circum- 
 stances or condition in which the persons speaking stand, 
 by the addition of iv am, ' in you,' that is, wo are in the 
 circumstances or condition afiTorded by your personal quali- 
 ties, your ability and willingness to save. This is expressed 
 ill English by the phrase ' we are in your hands.' In a word, 
 iv with a noun marks, as above said, any condition or set 
 of circumstances that may surround an object, and the prepo- 
 sition indicates merely that an object is ' within' the circum- 
 stances or condition suggested by the noun. This being 
 so, it is easily to be admitted that iv rift Eb^eivip novrtp, ' on 
 (in) the Euxine sea,' Herod, i. 76, marks merely the circum- 
 stances, as to its position, in which the town of Sinope 
 stands ; that iv iTmoe^ Uvat, ' to go on horse,' describes the 
 condition, as to position and mode of conveyance, in which 
 the act of going is performed ; that iv IlkaTatfjat, ' at Plateese,' 
 employed by Herodotus, ix. 100, to describe the site of the 
 battle fought at or near the town of Platiese, sets forth the 
 circumstances of the battle, as regards its place, not by con- 
 fining it literally 'within' Plataese, but by referring it to 
 whatever may be understood, in such a connection, when 
 the description of a battle is concerned, as comprised in this 
 term; just as iv aoi means, as above shown, not literally 
 • within you,' but * in your ability and willingness to save.' 
 Herodotus, by employing in the same narrative, ix. 101, and 
 with reference to the same transaction, the terms iv FlXa- 
 Toif^at, ' at (in) PlatsDse,' and iv rj IlXaratidt, ' in the district 
 of PlatuBse,' as equivalent, has shown clearly that the former 
 expression is to be interpreted in the way here suggested. 
 In the Latin phrase in equo sedere, ' to sit on horse,' in equo 
 does not describe literally the space within which one sits, 
 that formed by the horse's back, any more than it does the 
 limit formed by the horse's body, but shows that the sitting 
 is to be considered as having certain circumstances or con- 
 ditions, namely, those furnished by a horse used for riding. 
 The conclusion is that, while in a variety of examples iv is 
 properly rendered by 'on,' 'at,' 'near,' it should not bo 
 understood as having assumed to itself the ideas of super- 
 position and proximity which these words express, but as 
 
248 
 
 OF THB 8BTBBAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 retaining ita own proper sense of in' or 'within,' and, by 
 virtue of it, marking with its noun the. circumstances or 
 condition in which an action occurs or a person is placed. 
 
 Summon/ of the s^n^icationa of iv. 
 
 '£v. 1. a.'In,''within.' 
 6. 'Among.' 
 
 c. « With:' (not proper to the preposition.) 
 d.' On," at,' 'near.' 
 
 Siffiafieaticn and use of iv with its case. 
 
 1. * In,' ' within.' 'Ev is used with the ablative (locativus) 
 alone, and with it marks the space ' within' which an action 
 occurs or an object stands. This sense is expressed in 
 Englisli by ' in,' ' within.' Thus : 
 
 a. 'In,' 'within.' 'Ev, in the sense of 'in,' 'within,' is 
 
 used with the name of any space or object within the 
 
 compass of which a thing may be placed : e.g. II. xviii. 
 
 26-7, aurd^ o' Iv xovh^t fiifai: ftej-aiwori Tavuadtiz \ xstro, ' he 
 
 lay outstretched in the dust ;' H. ii. 461-2, 'Aaiia iv Xet/tSvi 
 
 Kauarpiouifjupl pitdpa \ IvdaxailvdanoTwvrat, 'thoyfly toand 
 
 fro in the Asian meadow;' H. i. 592-3, nSv 3' ^/lap tpepofojv, 
 
 ipa i' ^eiiip xaraiuvrt | xdimeaov iv AijfaHp, ' with the setting 
 
 sun I fell in Lemnos ;' where, it may be observed, the later 
 
 language would employ «'c with the accusative, • I fell into 
 
 Lemnos;' II. iii. 33-34, <i< If Srt n'c re dpdxovra idatv 
 
 xaiivofMriK ditiani \ trnpeo^ iv fi^aajjz, 'in the valleys of the 
 
 mounUin ;' Xen. Anab. i. 1, 7, iv Mthjz^ 9 b TtoaaipipvijQ 
 
 TMz pivdnixrave rooc 9 i^i^aXtv, 'in Miletus Tissaphemes 
 
 slew some and banished others.' 
 
 b. ' In," ' within.' ^Ev is used also with the ablative case 
 to mark the period of time 'in' or 'within' which an event 
 happens : e.g. H. ii. 469-71, ^t putdwv dAvdwv tdvea tcoXXa, | 
 acre xord aradftbv noepv^ibv ^Mtnouaiv \ &pjj iv elapivj, ' that fly 
 about in the spring-time;' Orat. Att 72, 1, xmavidivat 
 jfujpara iv pijrtp jp6v^, 'to make a deposit of money in 
 (within) the time appointed ;' ,^ch. Pers. 487, vjxri 3' iv 
 rouTj dtb^ I ](apMv dwpov wpct, ' in this night god raised an 
 nutimcly storm ;' Id. Agam. 943, ffdJbzoc/Uv ivj^seuwvi or^paiveif 
 
 'Ev. 
 
 249 
 
 poitiv, ' by coming you give notice of heat in winter ;' Soph. 
 Phil. 234-5, . . . ftu to xai iafistv | npoafdeypa totouS 
 Avdpbz iv x/'"*"/* PTVy ' <^h me 1 even to have the opportu- 
 nity of speaking with such a man in a long space of time ;' 
 Id. (Ed. Tyr. 615, xaxov dk xiv iv ^pipa yvoiijz pi^, ' one might 
 perchance discover a bad man in a single day;' Id. ib. 613, 
 «£U' iv jU'ovip jvioati rdff daipaXwz, ' but in time you will know 
 tliis certainly ;' Xen. Auab. iv. 2, 19, iv <p dk t6 pkv dXXb 
 arpdreupa napjgu, ' while the rest of the army was passing 
 by ;' Id. ib. i. 10, 6, iv rourip fiaadehz ndXiv d^Xoc Ijv Jipoottiv, 
 ' racuutime it was plain that the king was approaching ;' Id. 
 ib. iii. 1, 1, oaa . . . iyivero . . . iv rote anovSati, ' all that 
 occurred in the period of the truce.' 
 
 c. 'In,' 'with.' 'Ev is further used with a noun in the 
 ablative (louativus) case to mark any object, circumstance, 
 state, or condition in which any thing is represented as 
 placed : e.g. II. i. 333, aurap b l-p/w ^atv ivt fptai, ipwvtjaiv re, 
 'but he knew it in his mind, and said;' Ib. 373, arippar' 
 i'fiov iv x^potv hoj^oXou 'ATtoXXmvoz, 'having in his hands,' or 
 ' holding with his hands the garlands of fur-shooting Apollo ;' 
 Xen. Anab. i. 3, 21, ire de iitt fiaadia dj-oe ou3e ivrauda 
 ^xouasv ouSii; tv ^e zip favepip, ' but that he was leading them 
 against the king no one heard, even then, publicly at least;' 
 Id. Memorab. ii. 1, 32, iym 8e {dpsTT]) dj-a&ij plv auXJujicrpta 
 tmv iv f-iprjv^ rtoviov, f)ei9aea dh twv iv xoXiptp auppa^o; ipymv, 
 ' I (virtue) am a good helper in the labors of (in) peace, and 
 a steady ally in the deeds of (in) war ;' Id. ib. iii. 11, 4, 
 bpwv prjripa itapouoav iv iad^t xai Oepa^telf oit r^ rujroutTj}, 
 ' seeing a mother in (with) no common dress and retinue ;' 
 Id. Cyrop. i. 2, 2, iicatSsu&ij iv Ilepaaiv vbpotz, 'he was 
 educated in the customs of the Persians ;' Soph. Trach. 585, 
 ti nz iari mmcz iv rdiz dpwpivotz, ' if there is any reliance ^ 
 be placed in what is done by you ;' Id. CBd. Col. 799, iv 8k 
 Tip Xifeiv I xdx' dv Xdfiotz ra nXeiov ij awvjpia, ' in (by) speaking 
 you will perchance get more evil than means of safety ;' Id. 
 (Ed. Col. 1360, Bt iv nbvip raur^ ^efiigxw; Tuj-xdvetz, 'when 
 you chance to be in the same trouble.' 
 
 d. 'In the hands of,' 'depending on.' To the class of 
 examples just mentioned might properly be referred those in 
 
250 
 
 OC THE SBVERAL PREBOSITIONS. 
 
 which iv with the ablative (locatiTus) case expresses that on 
 which a thing depends, or in the power of which it lies, 
 where in English we use such phrases as ' in the hands of,' 
 'in the power of.' E.g. CEd. Tyr. 314, iv aot ydp ia/iev, 'for 
 on you we depend,' 'we are in your hands;' properlj', 'we, 
 as regards our salvation, are in you,' that is, in the condition 
 afforded by your personal qualities, your ability and willing- 
 ness to save. (See above, p. 240.) Id. (Ed. Col. 247, iv 
 l>/uv (Ibf deif) I xtifie&a vM/iove^, ' wretched men, we depend 
 on you, as on a god ;' Id. ib. 423, iv d' i/wi riXoz auroev yivoiro 
 Tf^aSe T^f /irfjrifc, ' would that for them the issue of this battle 
 were in my hands,' ' depended on me ;' Orat. Att. 113, 42, 
 iv v/itv iott tout' dfidai; diayvcavat, * it depends on you, is in 
 your hands, lies with you, rightly to decide this matter.' 
 Compare Ilerod. vi. 109, iii. 85. In such examples, iv with 
 its case marks the object in which any thing Ilea or is 
 involved, as regards its interests, destiny, &c., that is, as 
 above explained, describes the condition or circumstances 
 in which it is to be considered as standing. 
 
 e. 'With,' 'by.' The preposition iv is occasionally employed 
 with the same case to express, seemingly, the instrument, 
 where in English it is rendered by 'with,' 'by.' In such 
 examples, however, it is most probable that iv has its proper 
 sense of 'in,' •within,' and the notion of the instrument is 
 wholly to be referred to the obvious application and nso of 
 the object in the circumstances in which iv with the ablative 
 (locativus) describes it as placed ; or else to the condition 
 and circumstances of an action. E.g. II. xviii. 545, rolai 8' 
 Ineir' iv X^/'"' ^i^a^ fjtefjfjdio^ oivou | Soaxev dui}(i imwv, ' gave 
 to them a cup of sweet wine with his hands,' 'in his hands;' 
 or iv x^P"' niight hero be referred to Totaiv, ' gave to them, 
 in. their hands, a cup of sweet wine.' II. i. 587, /^^ ae, 
 fiiijv nep iouaav, iv iipdctXpotatv tdiofiat | J^eivo/iivrjv, ' lest I see 
 you with my eyes,' properly, 'in my sight;' ^sch. Pers. 
 162, /jBJTS xp^ftdrtov dvdvdpwv ni^dot iv rtfi^ aiflsiv, ' to reve- 
 rence with honor,' that is, ' in honor,' ' honorably,' just as iv 
 Tdxu, 'swiftly;' Id. ib. 247, «i< iv fuqL itXr/j^ xari^daprai noXb^ 
 iX^oz, 'how with (at) one blow much wealth is ruined,' that 
 is, 'in one blow,' marking rather the condition under which 
 
 'Ev. 
 
 251 
 
 the ruin occurs, than the instrument by which it is effected ; 
 Soph. Phil. 102, « i' iv 86Xift dec ftSiXov ^ neiaavz' iyuv, 
 • why should you take me away by craft rather than with 
 my consent,' that is, ' in craft,' ' craftily,' showing the cir- 
 cumstances and manner in which the carrying away is 
 made, rather than the instrument or means of its accom- 
 plishment. Id. Antig. 948, nrepmSsi xmdfpaxroz iv deaptp, 
 'walled in by (in) a rocky enclosure,' where the preposition 
 plainly retains its proper sense ; Id. (Ed. Tyr. 912, rdd' iv 
 X^pdlv I ariipi^ XafiouoTj, 'taking these garlands in my hands ;' 
 Id. Elcctr. 1128, xoor' iv fiXryit xsptfiv ^ rdXaev' iyat \ Xourpoii; 
 ixita/oja', ' I neither washed him (for the burial) with my 
 loving hands.' Here, again, iv with its case does not express, 
 properly speaking, the instrument with which the bathing 
 of the dead body is performed, but the manner and condi- 
 tions of the service. But, while it is contended that, in such 
 examples, the proper force of iv is almost always discernible, 
 if not in every case, it is not inconsistent with this view to 
 admit that, in cases where the obvious application and use 
 of the object with which iv is joined suggests the idea of 
 the instrument, as, for instance, in the last example cited, iv 
 and the ablative (locativus) may have come to be wcllnigh 
 equivalent to the expression of the instrument Although 
 iv fiXjjat j^£/«T{v louTpotz ixSa/v^aa means no more, strictly 
 speaking, than that the washing was done with the water, 
 or, it may be, with the body ' in the hands,' that is, that, in 
 a general way, the washing was conducted in the hands ; yet, 
 as it is obvious that the employment of the hands in such case 
 is instrumental, it is possible that to the Greek mind iv x^paiv 
 may have come to convey directly the notion of the instru- 
 ment. In Soph. Electr. 1141, dlX' iv ^ivTjot x^P"' xr/8sudet<: 
 rdXaz, ' cared for by the hands of strangers,' the proper force of 
 the preposition is clearly seen ; and yet iv ^ivrjat jfe/)*/ might, 
 perhaps, express at once the notion of the instrument. 
 
 /. With the ablative (locativus) of a number of nouns iv is 
 used adverbially, as it is expressed. Thus, iv rdxet, ' swiftly,' 
 properly, 'in swiftness,' 'in the manner or under the con- 
 dition of swiftness :' e.g. Soph. (Ed. Tyr. 765, jtwc i*' fMoe 
 8rj9' ^ptv iv rdxet ndXtv; 'would that he might quickly come 
 
152 
 
 OF THB 6KVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 )ack to ub;' iv fipax*!, 'briefly:' e.g. Soph. Electr. 673, iu 
 )paju Suv^ic Hfu, 'I speak ia brief terras,' 'briefly;' iv 
 lipu, ' iu turn :' e.g. Herod, i. 26, iv /*ipa dMoitn dXXa^ aixiaz 
 Ixtfipwv, 'bringing iu turn one charge against one and 
 mother against another.' Here there is no need of cxplana- 
 ion to show that iv has its common meaning of ' in,' and 
 hat the only peculiarity of its use is to be found in the 
 lature of the noun with which it is used. 
 
 g. 'Among.' When used with the ablative (locativus) 
 )Iaral of names of persons, and also of other objects, iv 
 )btains frequently the sense of ' among,' Latin inter. This 
 sonicB from the mere fact of the noun with which it is used 
 ixpressing a number of objects, so that the prcpoBition and 
 ts case mark a group or assemblage ' in' or ' within' which 
 i thing is placed. E.g. II. iii. 80-31, rbv d' d>c ohv iuor^asv 
 AXizaud/ioz &eoetS'^Z \ iv itpofMtj^otai favivra, ' appeanng among 
 ihe foreniost combatants;' ^scb. Prom. 310, vio^ yap xat 
 rupoDvof iv tfeotc, 'for there is also a new sovereign among 
 the gods ;' Id. ib. 200, ndaez r' iv dXXijXotoiv atpodiivsro, ' for 
 & rebellion was excited among them one with another ;' Id. 
 Eumenid. 691-2, dU' tv re roTz viotae xai naXauzipotz \ ^eotc 
 irtfUK ti iri, ' but yon are without honor among both the 
 new and the more ancient gods;' Xen. Cyrop. i. 8, 2, & dij 
 Aptfia ^v iv Mijdoez, 'which now were customary among the 
 tfedes;' Id. ib. i. 5, 6, iXe^iv 6 Kupoz iv mndiz rdde, 'Cyrua 
 ipoke among them as follows,' that is, ' to them,' * in their 
 )re8encc ;' Id. ib. viii. T-,-6, rd iv itatae vofit^^opeva xaXd, ' what 
 s accounted creditable among boys ;' Orat. Att. 20, 4, r<£rro- 
 uv etvat "Ofajpov iv rdiz npsafiuTdrotz xai aoipaycdxotz Twv noeijTWV, 
 we rank Homer among the oldest and wisest of the poets.' 
 
 h. 'At,' 'near,' 'on.' 'Kv with the ablative (locativus) 
 las sometimes, apparently at least, the sense of 'at,' 'on,' 
 near:' e.g. Xen. Anab. iv. 8, 22, ivreu&ev , . . ^iifov ini 
 fdXaTTaveii Tpane^^ouvra, iroJttv'EUrjvida ivT<p Eu^eivip Uovzip, 
 a city on the Pontus Euxinus;' Id. Ages. ii. 23, r^c iv 
 Uuxrpotz aupfopSa: yeysvijpivtjc, ' when the disaster at Louctra 
 lad occurred ;' Id. ib. vii. 5, iv rfj iv Kopiv9tp /tdxn, ' in the 
 )attle at Corinth ;' II. xviii. 520-1, of 3' Sre 3^ {f ixavov 89t 
 tfcaiv the jlo^croc, | iv itnafiip b9t r' dpSfA^ iijv nivnam 
 
 'Ev. 
 
 258 
 
 ^Tolmv, 'at the river.' In such examples, iv has really the 
 meaning of ' in,' but in the accommodated sense in which it 
 marks with its case the circumstances or conditions in which 
 an action occurs or an object stands. Except as a mere con- 
 cession to the Englieli rendering, it is improper to say that 
 iv has the sense of 'at,' 'in,' 'near.' As above explained, 
 pp. 245, 247, the phrases ivc<p Eu^ivtp irSvrtp, iv toIz Aeuxvpov;, 
 and the like, are not to be understood literally as meaning 
 •in, within, the Euxine sea,' 'in, within, Leuctra,' but as 
 descriptive generally of the circumstances of an action or 
 object as regards its place, and so as to embrace also the 
 adjoining region as well as the place itself. 
 
 Other similar expressions are iv oupeot, 'on (in) the moun- 
 tains,' iv Innotz, ' on horses,' *on horseback,' iv ^pdvoez, 'on 
 seats' or « in seats,' (See Passow's Lex.) : e.g. Plat Legg. i. 
 p. 625, B, dvdnauXat iv toc<: b^Xdiz 3iv3peoiv ehi axtapai, ' there 
 are shady resting-places on (in, among) the high trees;' II. 
 iv. 422-3, d>f 3' 5t' iv aij-iai^ noiu^x^im/jia 9a),daa^^ Spvur' 
 ijtaaadrefiov, Zeipupou 6itoxtv^aavToz, ' as when a wave on the 
 resounding shore of the sea;' II. iv. 455, votv 3i re rr^Xdas 
 8ounov iv oupeotv IxXue tioi/x^v, ' and the sound of them the shep- 
 herd hears on (in) the mountains afar off.' In some of these 
 and like examples, iv may bo fairiy interpreted as having its 
 common signification of ' in,' as in iv oupeot, ' in the moun- 
 tains,' iv Toiz b^ijXdiz Sivdpeaiv, ' in the high trees.' In others, 
 as in ivinitotc, 'on horses,' 'on horseback,' iv aij-eaX^, "on 
 the shore,' the preposition and noun must be understood as 
 marking, not literally the space or object • within' which a 
 thing is placed, but rather the condition or circumstances 
 in which it stands. 
 
 In the instances of tho use of iv thus far noticed, it is 
 hardly to bo doubted that the case with which it is joined is 
 the ablative of place, (locativus,) or of circumstance, con- 
 dition, or state, derived from this. Tho preposition is to be 
 considered as attached to the action or state expressed by 
 the verb, showing that it has the relative direction or position 
 of 'in,' 'within,' and the ablative (locativus) case is added 
 to note the position of the action thus qualified. The 
 locativus indicates tho position of the action or state of the 
 
254 
 
 OF THB SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 verb or its subject, the preposition Iv that this position is 
 one that is relatively • in' or ' within.' Thus, iv xovlj^at wrro, 
 'he lay in the dust,' means, properlj', «he lay in or within 
 . . . namely, in the dust;' eSre ijXdaxouaiu | &ff^ iu eiapa/n, 
 •that fly about in or within . . . namely, in the spring 
 season ;' and, again, iv bfuv <S< tfe^ xeZ/ie^o, ' we depend on 
 you as on a god,' would literally mean, ' we lie, or are placed, 
 in . . . namely, in you,' that is, * in your power.' 
 
 i. 'In,' rendered by 'into.' In quite a number of 
 examples iv with its case is used with verbs of action or 
 motion, where e/c with the accusative and having the sense 
 of ' into' might have been expected. E.g. Xen. Cyrop. iv. 
 5, 49, Tore xara^eb/rec iv fiiatft . . . O/uv napeao/te&a, 'then 
 having descended (from our horses, that is, liaving dis- 
 mounted) into the midst.' Here, however, the sense may 
 fairly be expressed in English by ' having dismounted in the 
 midst,' and iv ftiaift may be employed adverbially, as it is 
 called, 'just as iv tdxu, 'swiftly,' iv ^(taxei, 'briefly;' that is, 
 iv ftio<ft may be used to describe the circumstances as to 
 place in which the act of dismounting is performed. Xen. 
 Ilell. iv. 5, 5, ol d' iv nfi^Hpaiift xaTaxefeuydrez i$jjeaav, 'those 
 who had found refuge in the Herseum went forth.' In this 
 example also the preposition and its case may be understood 
 to be together employed as a qualification of the action iu 
 xaroTtefeu^oTe^, and as serving to mark its local condition or 
 circumstances ; just as, iu the example above cited, iv fipaj^ee 
 is the qualification of the action in Xej-w. This would make 
 the phrase of iv ry 'Hpcui/t xavaneipeuydzez to mean, not ' those 
 who had fled for refuge into the Herseum,' but ' those who 
 had fled for refuge, and, as such, were in the Ilerieuiu.' A 
 little before, iu the same paragraph, the expression used 
 with reference to the same persons and the same occur- 
 rence is, iz de TO 'I/ftatov xarifuj-ov xut dvdpez xul jruvacxe^. In 
 this place the writer speaks of persons who fled for refuge 
 into the IIera:uni, in the former of the same persons who 
 were ill the temple having fled thither for refuge. Xen. de 
 Vcnat. v. 8, ore 3s xai iv rj daXdzTrj StaftfttTzrwv im to duvarbv, 
 «a« iv 55arf, 'sometimes also it (the hare) throws itself 
 into the sea, as far as it can, and into water.' In this 
 
 'Ev. 
 
 255 
 
 example, likewise, the preposition iv and the noun with 
 which it is joined would seem to mark the condition or 
 circumstances of the action in deapfttTcraiv, in what the gram- 
 mars would call an adverbial way, just as a different cha- 
 racter of the action might have been expressed by iv Tdj^et, 
 •quickly.' Soj»h. Antig. 499, tov auTdSeXipov iv rdftp reduaa, 
 'placing my brother in the tomb.' Here the English phrase 
 exactly corresponds, and iv Tdipip added to Tt9uaa docs not, 
 strictly speaking, convey the notion of 'putting into the 
 tomb,' but describes the action of placing by this as a 
 circumstance or condition of it, that it was ' in the tomb.' 
 II. i. 584-5, Seitaz dpipauTiMov \ pi^Tpt fiXjj iv x^pal u9a, 
 'placed the cup in his mother's hands.' In this example, 
 aguin, the English mode of expression agrees with the 
 Greek, and iv x^f"' describes the manner or circumstances 
 by which the act of placing the cup is characterized. If it 
 i^ intelligible to say, iv Ppo-X^t Xi^to, 'I speak in brief,' that 
 is, ' briefly,' so may it be to say, iv X^P"' ri&ij/u, ' I place in 
 the hands,' iv and the locativus in the former case showing 
 the manner of the speaking, and in the latter the circum- 
 stances of the placing. II. xviii. 474, x''^ov ff iv no/ii pdXXsv 
 dTBipia, ' and cast the unwasting brass into the fire.' In this 
 example, the object of iv nupl is hardly to describe directly 
 the place into which the brass was cast, although this is the 
 sense involved ; but to describe the action in fidXXev after the 
 same manner that it might have been qualified by iv Tdxee, 
 ' quickly,' the only dift'ercnce being, that in the latter cage 
 the descriptive circumstance is the abstract notion of 'quick- 
 ness,' in the former that of a material substance, 'fire.' 
 Among this class of examples is placed also Eurip. Med. 
 424, seqq., uii fup iv ipsTipa yvionf Xiipaz \ dtnaae diantv dotSdv 
 I 0oi^oz djiJTwp peXitov, ' for PhcDbus, leader of song, gave 
 not in our soul the divine strain of the lyre,' iv ijiSTipf 
 yvibptf being the qualification of dmaas, in the same way 
 that, above, iv nupi is of fidXXev, and showing the peculiar 
 condition and circumstances of the giving the divine strain 
 of the lyre. 
 
 In these, and like cases, the signification of iv is plainly 
 that of 'in,' 'within,' and, as elsewhere, should be con- 
 
266 
 
 OF THE BEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Bidorcd as immodiatcly attached to the action or motion of 
 the verb. The difficulty ia to determine the force of the 
 case, and how with iv it comes to occupy seemingly the 
 place of elz with the accusative. Some (see Passow's Lex. 
 s. V. i. 10) explain this use of iv with the locativus as a 
 pregnant construction, both the motion to and the conse- 
 quent position in the place being implied in the verb : e.g. 
 ^dJAuu iv *ovij/at, * to cast into the dust,' that is, < to cast so 
 that it shall be in the dust' But this is not satisfactory, 
 beyond a mure practical statement of what is expressed in 
 the end by this employment of iv and the ablative. The 
 explanation above given may claim the advantage of ac- 
 counting for the employment of iv and the case consistently 
 with the common use of iv and the ablative (locativus) of 
 manner or circumstance and condition. It regards iv jtupi, 
 iv xtpai, iv &aXdTTji, as being added to verbs of action and 
 motion to describe their local condition and circumstances, 
 in the same way that ^i* rdj^u, iv fipaxsT, are added to de- 
 scribe their manner. 
 
 k. Sometimes iv is followed by the genitive case, but 
 always with an obvious ellipsis of the proper case of a 
 noun with which iv would be connected, and' upon which 
 the genitive depends. E.g. II. xxii. 889, el 8k davdvrwv xsp 
 xaraX^dovT' eiv'Aidao, 'if, in the (abode) of Hades, they do 
 forget the dead;' Od. vii. 182, toT dp iv 'Aixtvioio ^uov laav 
 dfiaa dwpa, ' in (the palace) of Alcinous.' The words HSfiotz, 
 otx«i>, iJttrdpip, are to be-eupplied. (See Passow's Lexicon.) 
 
 Tlicrc is a single compound of iv with the genitive, 
 namely, i/atodtiv, ' in the way of the feet,' ' in the way,' used 
 to express a hinderance. E.g. Xen. Anab. iii. 1, 13, e^ dk 
 Xiv^optda im ^aaiXet, re i/ja:o8d>v fti] oux' . . • t^ptl^ofiivouz 
 dxodaveiv; 'what is to hinder us from dying (being put to 
 death) with insults?' This word may be thus formed merely 
 to answer to the opposite term ix7io8(iv, ' out of the way of 
 the feet,' ' out of the way,' and without any regard to the 
 grammatical construction. (See Passow's Lexicon.) This is 
 probably the true explanation, and renders it unnecessary 
 to inquire further how iv is here employed with the geni- 
 tive, where no word can be supplied upon which the geni- 
 
 'Hv. "Evexa. 
 
 257 
 
 tive may depend, and with which iv may be joined in the 
 proper case. 
 
 TABLE or Tint BIONinCATTON AND USB OF <r WITH TtS OASB. 
 
 tl(nlAc*tloii of 
 
 ■In,' 'within.' 
 
 AbUiln (l/Ksllfui): 
 I. or pMitluD: 
 
 t. Of dremniUnM, onndlUon, te. 
 
 a. Id apace : ■ in,' ■ within.' 
 
 b. In a group : ' nmong.* 
 
 e. By accomiuodiition : 'at,' 
 
 'near,' 'on.' 
 d. In time: 'in,' 'within.' 
 
 'In;' 'into.' 
 
 •With' (= inatniment.) 
 
 "Evexa. 
 
 'Evexa has also an Ionic and Epic form evexev, and a poetic 
 form etvexa, and more rarely eJvexev. All these forms are 
 used by Homer. (See Passow's Lex.) Etvexa, however, 
 occurs also iu Attic prose. 
 
 According to Donaldson, (New Gratylus, § 272, seqq.,) evexa 
 and exau or extjTi are related forms, and evexa is compounded 
 of the preposition iv, ' in,' and exa, a mutilated locative form 
 of IxeCc, 'at a distance,' the aspirate being carried back. 
 "Evexev he considers to be a full locative form. 'Evexa, in 
 his view, is related also to kxwv, ' willing,' Ixdtepoz, ' each of 
 two,' exaaroz, ' each of many,' &c., and has the same radical 
 with the Sanscrit ika, ' one,' and, granting this, he miglit have 
 added, with the English each. The primary sense of these 
 words he assumes to be distance or separation, will, and 
 unity ; and that of evexa to be ' only,' ' especially,' this word 
 expressing " that the action has taken place according to the 
 will of a certain person, or with particular or exclusive refer- 
 ence to some person, thing, or action." For the exhibition 
 of tlie grounds of this explanation of evexa, which is here 
 mentioned because of its general plausibility, at the least, 
 however some parts of it may admit of doubt, see Donald- 
 son's New Gratylus, I. cit. 
 
 1. If the comniuu view be followed, evexa with the genitive* 
 signifies 'on account of:' a, as giving the reason or motive 
 of an action : e.g. II. i. 04, dW evex' dpijrfjpo^, {imfiiftferatf) 
 ' but (finds fault with you) on account of the priest ;' or, as 
 Mr. Donaldson would interpret it, the genitive by itself, as is 
 
 soon in euxoi^z and kxazift^T^z in the preceding verse, signi- 
 
 17 
 
268 
 
 OF IHB SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 ficB * on account of;' or, rather, one ehould say, 'with respect 
 to;' and ivena means •especially;' so that the Bcnso would 
 be, 'especially on account of (rather, with respect to) the 
 priest' II. xiv. 89, j|c elvex' oll^uoftev xaxA noUd, ' on account 
 of which we suffer many ills,' that is, ' because of which we 
 suffer many ills.' (See Passow's Lexicon, s. v.) 
 
 b. 'Evexu signifies ' on account of,' as indicating the cause 
 of an action, that of which this is the effect or consequence : 
 e.g. n. i. 214, B/3pof ttvsxa rrjade, ' on account of,' that is, ' in 
 consequence of, this insult ;' and conjoined with dnS ; Thuc. 
 viii. 92, dnb [ioffi evtxa, ' from an outcry merely," as Passow 
 interprets kdyou ivtxa, 'as a pretence merely.' (Sec also 
 Donaldson, 1. c.) Admitting the sense of ivsxa to be 'only,' 
 'merely,' 'especially,' the genitive, in the former example, 
 will signify 'with respect to,' and hence 'on account of,' 
 and iuexa will be used adverbially with the meaning of 
 •especially;' and, in the latter, «Lt6 /3o^f having the meaning 
 of ' from an outcry,' ivexa will be used in the same way, 
 adverbially, and have the sense of ' merely,' * only.' 
 
 c. "Evexa with the genitive has the meaning of 'for the 
 sake of,' that is, of ' on account of," with the idea that the 
 object joined with ivexa is the thing had in view: e.g. Xen. 
 Cyrop. i. 2, 1, ndvra 3k xlvdovov {mo/uTvat tou iitaivila&ai ivexa, 
 'for the sake of being praised,' or, 'merely with a view to 
 being praised;' Id. Memorab. ii. 4, 7, ivm /ikv dhSpa 
 netpioVTut &e(Mmeuetv zoo xapnou ivexev, 'for the sake of the 
 fruit;' or, 'only with a view to the fruit.' It was seen 
 above, under the genitive case, that the genitive of the 
 infinitive bad the capacity of expressing 'with a view to,' 
 which is equivalent to « for the sake of;' so that, here also, 
 the meaning attributed to ivexa would seem to belong to tou 
 and the infinitive, and ivexa is left to express the idea of 
 'only,' 'merely,' as in the foregoing paragraph. 
 • d. "Evexa with the genitive is used also, in the common 
 view, in the sense of 'as far as concerns,' 'as regards," 'with 
 respect to:' e.g. Xen. Cyrop. iii. 2, 30, dW' iiearm ^fuv 
 ixeivoi} ivexa r.pbz rd ^pixepov aupipipov ndvra rideadat, 'as far 
 as he is concerned,' ' as regards him ;' or, according to Mr. 
 Donaldson's view, ' if we regard him alone ;' Id. Vectig. iii. 
 
 "Euxa. 
 
 269 
 
 1, ^diw^ ivexa j^eipwvoi Avrmaueadai, ' to rest pleasantly as far 
 as a storm is concerned,' or, 'with respect to a storm merely, 
 to rest pleasantly ;' Ilerod. i. 44, itauSa re abv . . . d^njpova tou 
 ipuiXdaaovToz eivexev npoadoxa Tot dnovoorrjaeiv, ' so far as belongs 
 to his guardian ;' or, giving to the genitive its proper sense 
 of 'with respect to,' and to e?vexcv that of 'only,' 'merely,' 
 the meaning may be expressed by 'with respect to, looking 
 to his guardian merely.' 
 
 e, "Evexa with the genitive is occasionally used in the 
 meaning of ' by means of,' ' by dint of;' as, Tk-fyijz e7vexa, ' by 
 dint of art or skill.' (See Passow's Lex. s. v.) But here, 
 again, the meaning attributed to evexa may belong to the 
 genitive itself, and the preposition have the sense of ' only,' 
 'merely.' 
 
 It may be observed, in conclusion, that, whether Mr. 
 Donaldson's or the common mode of interpreting ivexa be 
 adopted, the genitive attending it has its ordinary signifi- 
 cation of ' with respect to ;' and that the genitive, considered 
 in its relations to the terms which it qualifies, contains the 
 meanings which the common interpretation assigns to ivexa. 
 And, further, that adding to this fact the actual occurrence 
 of ivexa in the sense of ' merely,' ' only,' and whatever con- 
 firmation may be derived from the etymological explanation 
 of this word given by Mr. Donaldson, great probability is 
 given to this author's theory of this preposition ; sufficient 
 to induce its adoption, at least in its general results, namely, 
 that ivexa means ' only,' ' merely,' and, perhaps, ' especially.' 
 
 TABLB OF TUB BIONIFICATIONS AND VSB 01 (nun WITU rrS CASK. 
 
 Signification of Uua. 
 
 Oenitire : < with respect to.' 
 
 'Only,' 'merely.' (As 
 oommonly represented ; 
 < on account of.') 
 
 ' On account of— merely ;' prop. ' with respect to^ 
 
 merely.' 
 a. As n reason or motive ; * on account of,' ' because 
 
 of— merely ;' prop, 'with respect to — merely.' 
 t. As the cause; 'in consequence of— only;' prop. 
 
 ' with respect to— only.' 
 e. As the object had in view; 'for the sake of— 
 
 merely,' 'with a view to — merely, only;' prop. 
 
 ' with respect to — merely, only.' 
 
 d. ' As far as concerns,' ' as regards — merely;' prop. 
 ' with respect to— merely, only.' 
 
 e. ' Ily means of,' ' by dint of;' prop. ' with respect 
 to, looking to— merely.' 
 
260 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PSEPOSITIOKS. 
 
 'Eni. 
 
 'Em corresponds to the Sanscrit prefix api, < snper,' (see 
 Bopp, GIoBsar. 8. a. v.,) and is probably the same with the 
 English up, and the German auf, 'upon.' 
 
 Significations of int. 
 
 1, * On,' ' upon.' The primary signification of ini is ' on,' 
 ' upon,' with the idea of superposition : e.g. inl rmv dpiwv, 
 •on, upon, the mountains ;' and so in many compounds; as, 
 Int^ainiiv, 'to go up on,' veoif imjiaii/etv, 'to go on board a 
 ship,' im^dXXecv, 'to cast upon,' iTtiyetoi, 'on the earth,' 'ter- 
 restrial,' inej-paf^, 'a writing upon,' 'an inscription,' imu- 
 &dvat, ' to place upon,' imponere. 
 
 This proper sense of ine presents itself, moreover, in 
 significations more or less accommodated. Thus : 
 
 a. In that of ' on,' ' depending on ;' as, if' fj/uv, ' in our 
 hands,' ' in our power,' ' depending on us.' That this is 
 merely an aceommodated use of the local meaning of ' upon'» 
 is altogether plain, the notion of being upon a thing easily 
 suggesting that of resting upon or being supported by it, 
 and this being equivalent to depending upon it, or being in 
 its power. 
 
 b. 'At,' 'near,' 'by,' 'in,' 'in the time of.' To the sense 
 of ' on,' ' upon," belong also the meanings of ini in the class 
 of examples in which it expresses the relative position of 
 ' upon' in a more general way, and so as not to convey a 
 strictly local sense of superposition, where it is variously 
 rendered in English by ' at,' ' near,' ' in,' and, when a period 
 of time is concerned, by 'in the time of.' E.g. ixi rati 
 Pupate, 'at the gates ;' II. viii. 639, dM.' ^roe im wxti fuMio/ieu 
 ^fiiac (MTouz, 'at night we will guard ourselves;' im Kupou, 
 'in the time of Cyrus.' 
 
 Although, in such cases, ini has not the local sense of 
 'upon,' the meaning which it conveys is by no means incon- 
 sistent with this, and really involves it ; only the notion of 
 ' upon' is to be taken as marking relative position in a more 
 general and figurative way. In the same accommodated 
 sense precisely the English language employs the terms 'on' 
 
 'Eni. 
 
 261 
 
 and ' upon' in such expressions as ' on the right,' ' on the 
 third day,' 'situated on the sea,' 'upon his coming.' The 
 phrase ^;r( tuiz ditpatz docs not mean ' on or upon the gates' 
 in the sense in which we would understand the literal ren- 
 dering, namely, as denoting actual superposition, but what 
 we would express by ' at, or near, the gates ;' so neither 
 does the English sentence 'they dwelt on the sea' mean, 
 literally, 'on the sea' in the same sense as when we say 'they 
 sailed on the sea ;' nor does the phrase ' he swore upon the 
 altar' employ the word ' upon' in the same literal sense as 
 when we say ' he placed it upon the altar.' The same may 
 be said of ini in the expression ini Kupou, ' in the time of 
 Cyrus,' for here it means ' on,' ' upon,' only in the same way 
 that we say * they dwelt on the sea,' ' it falls on the fourth 
 day ;' that is, not in the literal sense of superposition, but 
 in that of a relative position, in which the object is referred 
 for its designation as to time or space to another object, and 
 is figuratively represented as being upon it. 
 
 c. ' On condition of.' Derived from the sense of ' upon,' 
 or superposition, is that of condition, expressed in English 
 by 'on condition of,' the condition of an action or obligation 
 being conceived as that upon which it rests, and thus bring- 
 ing back the sense of condition to the proper idea of ' upon' 
 belonging to int. E.g. Xen. Cyrop. iii. 2, 23, xai ini rourwf 
 idoauv xai i?Mflov ndfciz rd neard, ' and upon these conditions 
 or terms they all gave and received pledges ;' that is, resting 
 upon this, and as a sequence upon this. 
 
 (/. 'For,' 'on account of.' Closely related to the notion 
 of condition, and like it derived from that of superposition, 
 and hence of superaddition or 'upon,' is the sense of 
 occasion, ground, reason, and motive, expressed by the 
 English ' for,' ' on account of.' E.g. Xen. Cyrop. i. 3, 16, 
 ini pi^ 3^ nore Sixtj nXrjdz iXa^ov, ' once, now, was I beaten 
 for one decision.' In fact, however, the same sense might, 
 in some instances, be conveyed by ' upon ;' as in the example 
 cited, 'upon one decision, now, was I once beaten;' and it 
 is plain that ini juij. Sixjj marks a fact upon the occurrence 
 of which the inlliction of blows depended. Here the 
 relation of the chief proposition and of the fact upon which 
 
262 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 it is a Buperaddition is that of occasion, ground, reason, 
 motive ; in another case it might be that of condition or of 
 mere sequence. 
 
 e. 'For,' object had in view. Among the significations 
 of ini may bo mentioned that in which it denotes the 
 object or cud had in view, expressed in English by 'for:' 
 e.g. Ilerod. i. 68, im xaouji dv&pdiTrou oidrjpo^ dveupjjTou, 'for 
 the hurt of men has iron been discovcrc(l ;' Id. i. 59, oux ini 
 TouTffi izXiovreZy ' as they did not sail with a view to this.' 
 This sense of im is akin to that of condition, and to that 
 of ground or reason, and would seem to arise from the 
 notion of 'upon,' or superposition, the object bad in view 
 in an action being considered, according to this use of i-l, 
 as something on the condition of which, as it were, it is 
 performed, or upon the admission of which, and as a super- 
 addition to it, the action occurs. In other terms, and 
 recurring immediately to the proper sense of the preposi- 
 tion, irti with the dative expresses the object upon which 
 the action rests, and hence that upon which it depends for 
 its condition, for its reason or occasion, and for its end or 
 motive, the last meaning not only having the same founda- 
 tion with the "preceding ones, but in some sort implying 
 them. 
 
 Scarcely to be distinguished from this sense of inl, except 
 in the fact of its relating to persons rather than to things, 
 is the case in which ini with the dative introduces the 
 object for whom as its final aim an action is performed, or 
 to whoso benefit or injury it enures. E.g. II. xxiii. 776, oBc 
 ini flarphxXtj} nifvev n68az oixuz ^i^'^Xsuz, ' (oxen) which swift- 
 footed Achilles slew for Patroclus;' Herod, i. 61, fiadibv rii 
 Koteuftsva in' iiour^, ' upon learning what was doing against 
 him.' So ^eiav ini rait, 'to laugh at a person;' and the 
 compound intScupuav rift, ' to shed tears for a person ;' in 
 which case, however, the preposition may be admitted to 
 have a senpe very little removed from the proper one of 
 'upon,' as where we say 'to look upon,' 'to speak upon;' 
 or from that of ' over' or ' upon,' as where we say, ' to mourn 
 over,' 'to shed tears upon.' In the examples in which ini 
 with the dative clearly expresses the object had in view, 
 
 'Eni. 
 
 263 
 
 the preposition with its case, in marking the end or aim of 
 the action, denotes at the same time that upon which it 
 rests or depends for its being done, or what may, in one 
 sense, be regarded as its condition as well as its motive. 
 
 /. 'Looking upon,' 'with a direction upon,' 'having on 
 aspect towards.' In a great variety of relations, and where, 
 in conjunction with cases, it is rendered into English by 
 such terms as 'towards,' 'for,' 'against,' 'to,' 'with a view 
 to,' &c., ini, with and without motion preceding, conveys 
 merely the notion of direction 'upon,' looking upon, or 
 having an aspect towards, so as to place the action which 
 it qualifies in a certain relation to some object. This rela- 
 tive direction or aspect is the same that we express in 
 English also by ' upon,' ' on,' in such phrases as ' to march 
 upon a point.' E.g. Ilerod. i. 164, inXeov ine Xiou, 'they 
 sailed for Chios,' in' otxou ff^v, ' to sail homewards.' Uere 
 the sense is, properly, 'they sailed upon Chios,' 'to sail 
 upon home,' the preposition marking the relative direction 
 in which the action of sailing stands to the objects Chios 
 and home. And although the English language would not 
 in these instances admit the use of ' upon' in this figurative 
 sense, yet it has just been seen that in some cases it em- 
 ploys it in the same way, and so as to make it perfectly 
 easy for one using this language to understand the sense 
 above given to inXeov ini Xiou. 
 
 This meaning of direction upon, of having an aspect to- 
 wards, belongs to ini in the examples where, in connection 
 with the genitive case, it is rendered into English by ' with 
 respect to,' 'in the case of,' that is, where the preposition 
 and genitive case describe the circumstances or conditions 
 in which it is to be understood that the action or statement 
 qualified by ^;r/ is represented as being. E.g. Orat. Att. 18, 
 1, ini no^wv dv tic iSelu 86xu ftot ttju napi. twv dtHv wvotav 
 ipavepdv fevopivj^v, ' it seems to me that a person would see 
 that, in many respects, wo have manifestly been favored by 
 the gods;' ini tcov xatp&v noXaeueodat, 'to adminster the 
 state with a regard to the exigency of the times;' Xen. 
 Cyrop. i. 6, 25, xai ini rmv npdSewv di, i^v pkv iv ^ipei <Lat, z6u 
 ipfovra dii rou f/Uo>j TtXtouexToot/ra fca/epbv cJftu, 'with respect 
 
2G4 
 
 OF THE 6BVBBAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 to,' ' in the case of, actiouB also.' la such examples, while 
 the pffice of the genitive case is to denote the object with 
 respect to which the statement qualified by im and the 
 genitive is made, tzoXXHv, for example, in the first instance 
 cited, showing that it is ' with respect to many things' that 
 the good-will of the gods had been experienced, that of the 
 preposition is to point out the relation which the action or 
 statement upon which it attends holds to the object named 
 by the genitive. This relation is that of direction upon, 
 of looking upon, or of having its aspect towards ; and al- 
 though it cannot, in such a case, be expressed in English 
 by the term * upon,' even figuratively employed, the sense 
 of ' upon' is as really present as in the phrase in' ocxou nhiv, 
 where, notwithstanding we render the meaning by 'to sail 
 homewards,' or ' for home,' altogether omitting the notion 
 of ' upon' contained in ine, wo can yet sec that the effect 
 of the preposition is to describe the action of sailing as 
 having the direction of ' upon' with reference to home, and 
 that it is to be understood precisely as our word ' upon' is 
 in the phrase ' to march upon the enemy.' 
 
 The sense of ' upon,' with the idea of relative direction 
 upon, is the proper one to be attributed to ixi where it is 
 used with the accusative case and seems to have the mean- 
 ings of 'to,' 'against,' "tfor,' 'with a view -to,' 'as regards.' 
 E.g. Xcn. Anab. vii. 1, 20, & dk 'Ava^i^toi; xaradpafiwv inc rijv 
 ddXarrav, 'Auaxibius having run down to the sea;' whore 
 the sense is, properly, ' Anaxibius having run down upon 
 ... as regards the sea,' im indicating merely the direction 
 or aspect of the running down with reference to the sea. 
 Ilerod. i. 71, aTpareusadtu im llipaac, ' to march against the 
 Persians,' properly, 'to march upon ... as regards the 
 Persians.' Ilere iTii, still more obviously, has the meaning 
 of ' upon,' or direction upon ; and that of ' against' arises 
 from the hostile relations of the party marching towards 
 the party upon whom they are marching. Ilerod. v. 12, 
 axtudaavTt^ ttjv ddeXipsjijv «S< tlj[ov dpiffra in' ZStap intftnov, 
 'they would send her for water.' In this case, again, ini 
 marks only the relative direction of the action, and the 
 meaning is, ' they would send her (M'ith a direction) upon 
 
 'Eni. 
 
 265 
 
 ... as regards water,' or, as the English requires it to be 
 rendered, 'would send her for water.' The use of ini is the 
 same in this example as in oTparsueadat ini IJipaa^, only 
 the English language allows the expression 'to march upon 
 the Persians,' but docs not admit that of 'sending a person 
 upon water.' It will be seen afterwards, that the notion 
 of an object had in view, expressed by ' for' in the render- 
 ing of in' uHtop ine/joiov, is to be derived from the circum- 
 stances of the narrative, and is no more directly conveyed 
 by ini than is ' against' by the same preposition. 
 
 2. ' Over.' Immediately derived from the signification 
 of 'on,' 'upon,' is that of 'over;' or, perhaps, this should 
 rather be considered a mere variety of the sense of 'upon;' 
 for that which is placed ' npon' a thing may, under some 
 circumstances, and in a certain point of view, bo said to be 
 ' over' it. This sense of ini is seen in such examples as of 
 ini Tmu npaypduov, ' those set over, having charge of, the busi- 
 ness,' and in many compounds, as int^torwp, (Od. xiii. 222,) 
 ' a shepherd,' ' one set over a flock as its feeder,' inaeparelv, 
 'to be a master over,' inixptpawovai, 'to hang over,' ini- 
 xmxueiv, ' to make wailings over,' (Soph. Elcctr. 283, cited in 
 Passow's Lex.,) inixunretv, ' to stoop upon or over,' intviipuv, 
 ' to snow upon or over,' (Xen. Cyneg. viii. 1, cited in Pas- 
 sow's Lex.) 
 
 8. 'In addition to,' 'besides;' 'after.' From the significa- 
 tion of ' upon,' or superposition, are derived other mean- 
 ings also of ini ; thus : 
 
 a. That of addition, expressed in English by ' in addition 
 to,' 'besides,' it being very natural to pass from the notion 
 of one thing placed upon another to that of one thing 
 added to another. E.g. Xen. Cyrop. i. 2, 11, orav xdpdapou 
 poi/ov ij^mat ine Tip aivip, ' whenever they have cresses only 
 in addition to their bread ;' Id. Anab. iii. 2, 4, ini rourotc 
 ubxtiz dpoaaz fjpiv, ' having in addition to this, besides, him- 
 self given us his oath ;' Id. Cyrop. iv. 5, 38, xai vTiv iari piu 
 ^p7v nokXa j(pijpaTa, xai ivSpst; in' auToiz, ' aud now we have 
 much means, and men besides.' The same meaning is 
 seen in many compounds; as, inqapiiv, 'to marry a second 
 wife,' that is, 'a wife in addition to a former wife,' imdtd6vai. 
 
266 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 «to give besidea,' or 'in addition,' inlxXijoiz, *a surname,' or 
 an additional name.' See II. xxii. 506. 
 
 b. ' After.' Very nearly akin to the notion of addition, 
 and like it derived from that of ' upon' or Buperposition, is 
 the meaning of * after,' which it frequently lias. E.g. Xen. 
 Anab. iii. 2, 4, im Tourtp Khdveap Avearrj, ' after him Clcanor 
 arose.' Cleanor's rising to speak was in superaddition to 
 the preceding speaker, and so might be said to come after 
 him. The same sense of inc is met with in some compounds 
 also; as, Inirovoz, «born after,' or 'born in addition,' the 
 two meanings being almost the same; imXaYxii^etv, 'to ob- 
 tain by lot afterwards,' or ' in addition ;' im/irj&euz, ' after- 
 wise,' as opposed to npo/jB^ihix;, 'fore-wise,' 'knowing before- 
 hand;' InixXx/poz, ' succeeding to an inheritance,' 'an heir;' 
 imfiavddvievy ' to learn besides or after.' 
 
 Summary of the significations of im. 
 'Eni 1. Superposition ; 'on,' 'upon.' 
 o. Locally ; ' on,' ' upon.' 
 
 b. Figuratively ; * upon,' ' at,' ' near.' 
 
 c. Figuratively; 'on,' 'depending on,' 'in the power 
 
 of.' 
 rf. Figuratively: condition; 'on condition otj' 'on 
 
 the terms of.' 
 c. Figuratively: occasion, ground, reason; 'for,' 
 
 ' on account of,' ' upon.' 
 /. Figuratively: object had in view ; ' for.' 
 g. Figuratively: relative direction upon; 'towards,' 
 
 •for,' 'against,' 'to,' 'with a view to.' 
 
 2. ' Over.' 
 
 3. Addition; 'in addition to,' 'besides.' 
 
 USE OF ini WITH cases; NAMBLT, with THE GENITIVE, DATIVE, 
 AND ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 I. Wilh the genitive. 
 
 1. 'On,' 'upon.' a. 'Eni, in its proper meaning of 'on,* 
 
 'upon,' is employed with the genitive case to mark the 
 
 relative position of an object in space : e.g. Herod, vii. Ill, 
 
 TO is fiavr^iov zouto iau filv int uou obpiiov r&v tipfjXozdvwv, 
 
 'Em. 
 
 267 
 
 'this oracle is upon the highest mountains;' Id. vi. 129, in' 
 ahrrfi {rr^z Tfiazil^rji;) dp^j^^aaro, ' he danced upon the table ;' 
 /l<]sch. S(!pt. c. Thcb. 3(59, i^u inipippov af/fi in AaniSoz ro<Je, 
 ' he has upon his shield this proud device ;' Id. Pers. 18, 
 ipdv ol fteu iip' inniov ot S' ini vaiov, 'they went, some on 
 horses, some on ships;' Soph. (Ed. Col. 184, feZvoc ini ^eivr^c, 
 ' a stranger in (upon) a strange land ;' II. x. 178, vDv yap drj 
 ndvTsaacu int ^opdb lazaTut dxft^i, 'for now the decision is 
 at hand for all ;' literally, ' the contest stands on the edge 
 of a knife,' that is, must be presently decided this way 
 or that. ' 
 
 In such examples, while the preposition retains its proper 
 sense of 'on,' ' upon,' the genitive has its common meaning 
 of * with respect to,' and shows that a preceding action or 
 statement is to be understood only of the specific object 
 which this case introduces. Thus, in the first example above 
 given, the proposition is, to 3k pavr^iov touto iart ini, ' this 
 oracle is upon,' and the genitive twv oupiwv rww bijiriXoTdTwv 
 is added to denote the object to which specifically this state- 
 ment is to be understood as referred ; ' with respect to the 
 mountains that are highest.' 
 
 b. ' At,' ' near,' (' upon.') 'Eni with the genitive is em- 
 ployed in the designation of place in cases also whore it is 
 not intended to convey the idea of literal superposition, but 
 only to give a more general indication of relative position, 
 expressed in English more commonly by 'at,' but also by 
 ' near.' E.g. Xen. Anab. iv. 3, 28, xsXeuei auroD peivat ini rou 
 norapoo prj diafldvraz, ' he bade them remain there at (on) the 
 river, and not to cross over;' Demosth. 300, 16, rrjii ini too 
 norapoo {pdj[ijii,) 'the battle at (on) the river;' add also, ini 
 TWV fitopatu afdrrouaiv dXX'^Xou^, ' they slay each other at (on) 
 the altars.' This last example, however, might, perhaps, be 
 referred to a class to be subsequently mentioned, in which 
 ini indicates merely the relative direction or aspect of an 
 action towards an object ; the sense may be, ' they slay each 
 other in the presence of the altars,' that is, with a position 
 or direction that looks upon, has its aspect towards, the 
 altars. The former interpretation would seem to bo pre- 
 ferable. 
 
268 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 In the examples just given, ini has the sense of ' upon/ 
 but in an accoraniodated way, just as in English ' on' and 
 'upon' are cropluycd in such expressions as 'a city situated 
 on tlie Bca,' tliat is, 'at,' 'near, the sea.' Tlic genitive, in 
 this coiistructiun, has tlio same meaning as in izi nuv d/iiwv, 
 'upon llic iiiountainH,' above explained. Thus, xs?.e'Jei aiizou 
 fiuvat ini ruD TtoTUjwu means, 'he ordered tliciu to remain 
 there at (upon) . . . with respect to the river.' 
 
 c. 'In.' In a number of other examples also, ini with 
 the genitive case is used to express the relative position, 
 and hence the circumstances of an action or state, where 
 the meaning is conveyed in English by ' in.' E.g. Ucniosth. 
 Pliil. i. p. 42, oojf oiuz ri iauv ij(<ou d xuTiaT/iuKzat /Uuetv iTzi 
 TouTiov, 'he cannot, retaining what places he has subjected, 
 abide in these;' Id. Phil. ii. p. 66, w; ok xwXuaatz' dv ixeJvov 
 Ttfidtretv TOUTU i^' iZv iau vov TtaureXaiz d/iyciz ^;f£r£, ' \n\i you 
 are altogether listless about hindering him from what he is 
 now occupied in,' that is, ' the things upon which he is now 
 bent,' quibus nunc sludei; Demosth. Moid. 510, 21, obx ini 
 TOUTOU fwuov dXX ini ndvrmv <paivnat npoftj(trjiievo<; jis C),3/it(^eiv, 
 ' not in this matter alone, but in every thing, docs he appear 
 to have chosen to insult me;' ^schin. 64, 32, "ua S' ini rffl 
 hrodiauo^ /isiuto, 'to stand to, abide by (continue in), my 
 proposition ;' Id. 88, 1, ini rrfi riXvnffi it/i^rfiu^eu iv rfj iniaToXyj, 
 'in, or at, the end of his letter.' 
 
 In tlicse and like examples, it is plain that ini and the 
 noun in the genitive- case mark the circumstances or 
 conditions of an action or stiite, whether of situation or 
 generally, as expressed by the various objects which may 
 approi)riately denote the circumstances or conditions of any 
 action or state. And, further, that the nature of the quali- 
 fication here made by ini and the noun in the genitive case 
 differs from that made by the same preposition and. case, 
 when a mere local relation and superposition arc denoted 
 by them, in this alone, that, in the present case, the i)repo- 
 Bition has the signiiication of ' upon,' or marks this relative 
 position only figuratively ; and that the noun in the geni- 
 tive, instead of a material object upon which a thing actually 
 stands, names uu abstract notion even, or, at the most, 
 
 'A'm. 
 
 269 
 
 some object or class of objects, which, as here employed, 
 may fitly denote the conditions or circumstances of an 
 action or state generally, but not a literal resting-place. 
 For the rest, the relative position expressed by the preposi- 
 tion, and tbe sense of tlic genitive case, are the same 
 as where local superposition is represented. Tbns, in tbe 
 last example, ini t7^^ tsXeut/jC iviypaipev iv rj intaroX^, 'he 
 wrote in his letter at, or in, the end,' ini r^c rs^sur^c niarks 
 the place in the letter to which the particular writing here 
 mentioned is referred, just as truly as does ini ziov dpiwu, in 
 a previously cited cvamjile, show the situation of to /uiv- 
 Tjjiuu, anil jireciscly in the same way. The only difference 
 is that TsXs'JTr^^, ' the end,' is an abstract noun used to mark 
 the place upon which, figuratively speaking, is placed the 
 act of writing. Although the English *on,' 'upon,' do not 
 serve to translate ini, as here used, they are found employed 
 in a similar way ; as in such expressions aa ' upon the whole, it 
 is better to retreat,' ' upon his trial, he made a skilful defence.' 
 'On,' 'upon.' To this place may be referred such ex- 
 amples also as Herod, ix. 11, ol iipopoi slnav in' Spxou, 'the 
 Ephors said upon oath,' or, as it may also be rendered in 
 English, ' the Ephors said under oath.' Here in' opxou de- 
 scribes the circumstances or condition in which the action 
 of speaking is perlbrmed, and the ofiicc of both ini and the 
 noun in tbe genitive is the same as in the examples just 
 considered. 'ICni shows that the action which it qualilics 
 baa, in a figurative sense, the relative position of ' upon' 
 with reference to the object introduced by the genitive 
 case; and, as in the preceding examples, this marking an 
 action as occupying such a relative position is equivalent 
 to giving its situation, and the circumstances or condition 
 in which it is performed. According to this view, and 
 allowijig for the difference of the objects introduced by the 
 genitive, tbe expression in' 5pxou einav, 'they said upon 
 oath,' is to be interpreted, so far as ini with tbe genitive is 
 concerned, in tbe same way with ttjv ini rou nozapou pd^l'''} 
 'the battle at (on) tbe river.' Here belong such examples 
 also as Herod, vli. 150, fUTairisiv {XiysTat) Iva ini npo^dmo; 
 ^t'j-j^ir^v dyioat, ' it is said that they demanded a share that 
 
270 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREFOSITIONB. 
 
 they might have a pretext for remaining inactive ;' literally, 
 'that they might remain inactive on a pretext.' Besides 
 the fact that wo can render the phrase ini npoifdaioz by ' on 
 a pretext,' using ' on' in the same figurative way with ini, 
 it may be proper to observe that the English language has 
 quite a number of like uses of ' on ;' as, ' to be on duty,' ' to 
 be on sale,' 'to buy on credit.' 
 
 d. 'In the time of.' Of the same nature with the pre- 
 ceding uses of ini is the case in which it is employed with 
 the genitive to express the relative position of an event 
 with regard to time, where in English we render it by ' in 
 the time of.' E.g. Ilcrod, vi. 98, int yap Japeiou . . . iyiveTO 
 nUto xaxa r^'IMdde, 'for in the time (reign) of Darius a 
 greater number of ills befell Hellas ;' Id. ii. 4G, iyiveTo in' 
 iptH TuiiTo TO -cipaz, ' this prodigy occurred in my day ;' Xen. 
 Anab. i. 9, 12, kvi ys dv8pi twu i<p' fjptov, ' for one man, at 
 least, of those of our day ;' Orat. Att. 28, in ipod yap, 
 m-fi ndX(u, rauru yiyove, ' for this happened in my day, and 
 not a long time ago.' Here ini may be said to be employed 
 in exact accordance with its use in marking local relations ; 
 for as ini z&v dpiwv describes the position of the oracle 
 relatively to the mountains, so ini Japeiou shows the posi- 
 tion of an event relatively to a period of time. And 
 although it would not be allowed in English to use such 
 a phrase as ' this event happened on the time of Darius,' so 
 that it is necessary to substitute the form ' in the time of 
 Darius,' yet the English language furnishes such expressions 
 as it 'happened on the fourth day,' 'he gave it to her on 
 her wedding-day,' in which ' on' has the same figurative 
 uf>e that ini presents in ini Japeiuu, 'in (on) the time of 
 Darius.' It scarcely rccpiircs to be mentioned, that the 
 terms Japeiou, i/tou, and others occurring in this construc- 
 tion of ini with the genitive, stand as the representatives, 
 not of persons merely, but of periods of time, Japeiou mean- 
 ; ing 'the reign of Darius,' ipou, 'my time,' &c. 
 ! «. 'Towards,' 'for,' ('upon.') Another variety of the 
 i uses of ini with the genitive case is that in which it occurs 
 I with verbs of motion, denoting the object towards which 
 I the action or motion defined by ini is directed. E.g. Time. 
 
 'Eni. 
 
 271 
 
 i. IIG, nXeuaavrez vauaiv i^ijxouTa ini Hd/tou, 'having sailed 
 with sixty vessels for, towards, Samos;' and again, in the 
 same chapter, ini h'apiaz, ' towards, for, Caria,' ini Xiou xai 
 Aia^ou, ' towards Chios and Lesbos ;' Herod, vii. 31, b8ou 
 . . . ini Kapijjz fepoixnji;, 'a road leading towards Caria;' 
 Time. i. 55, of dk Kopiudtot dnonXiovrez in' oixou 'Avaxriipiov 
 . . . eUov dndrjj, 'the Corinthians in sailing away home- 
 wards took Anactorium by an act of fraud.' Hero ini, 
 consistently with its proper notion of ' upon,' marks the 
 direction of the motion as being ' upon' an object, just as in 
 English we say ' to march upon a point.' The notion of 
 direction ' upon,' which is no doubt, properly speaking, 
 always involved when ini is thus used, and which dis- 
 tinguishes ini with the genitive from every other mode 
 of expressing relative direction, is not accurately conveyed 
 by the terms 'for' and 'towards,' which alone we can 
 ordinarily use in rendering this construction into English. 
 Tiie genitive, it may be added, is here employed to point 
 out the specific object with respect to which the motion 
 lias the relative direction of ' upon.' Thus, ini Idpou nMv 
 means, properly, ' to sail upon . . . with respect to Samos,' 
 that is, 'to sail towards Samos,' or 'for Samos.' 
 
 /. This meaning of direction upon, so readily discerned 
 in the preposition ini as used with the genitive case, when 
 attending upon verbs of motion, is not confined to this 
 class of examples, but is seen, more or less obviously, to 
 belong to ini in (piito a variety of its other uses with the 
 genitive ; in all those, namely, in which it denotes that the 
 action or state (pialificd by it has a direction upon, or looks, 
 has its aspect, towards some object; that object, to wit, 
 which is introduced by the genitive case. In the case of 
 this signification of ini already considered, the preposition 
 and noun in the genitive introduce some denomination of 
 space as the object towards (upon) which the verb's motion 
 is directed. Of the other instances of the use of ini in this 
 signification, some have the preposition and a noun in the 
 genitive case qualifying a term that does not express mo- 
 tion, the noun, however, being a designation of space; 
 others, again, and much the larger proportion, qualify the 
 
272 
 
 OF TUB SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 action or state of tbe verb by im and the genitive of various 
 nouns the names of objects otber than those of space. So 
 that im, with the idea of direction upon and of looking 
 towards, is used in conjunction with the genitive case in 
 three difleront ways, according to the nature of the verbal 
 idea whicli it qualifies, and to the character of the object 
 I introduced by the genitive case. First, it adds a local 
 [ qualilioiitioii of a verb of motion : secondly, a like ({uulifi- 
 ' cation of an action or state; and, thirdly, a qualilication 
 that embraces the circumstances and conditions, generally, 
 that may attend an action or state. It may be remarked 
 that i-t, in the sense under consideration, and as employed 
 wth the genitive case, will be variously rendered in Eng- 
 lish according to the nature of the action or state qualified, 
 and to that of the object to which it stands in the relation 
 indicated by ixl, that is, of the noun in the genitive. Thus, 
 it may be rendered by the following terms : ' at,' ' near,' 
 ('towards'); 'at,' 'before,' 'in the presence of,' in Latin, 
 ad, apuil; 'by;' 'of,' 'concerning,' 'about;' 'at,' 'with;' 
 I 'for,' 'to meet,' * according to ;' 'with respect to,' 'in,' 'in 
 I the case or matter of,' 'upon,' 'about,' 'with a view to.' 
 I It may be useful to notice more particularly these various 
 , uses of irri witli the genitive. 
 
 ' a.) 'At,' 'near,' ('towards.') Most nearly related to the 
 
 use of i-l with the genitive to qualify verbs of motion, 
 above considered, is the case in which it is employed with 
 the genitive of some local designation to mark the object 
 towards, in the direction of, and, by inference, near which, 
 any thing lies or is placed; where it is rendered in English 
 by 'at,' ' near.' E.g. Herod, vii. 115, xnXnov tbv irri lloat(\too 
 ii Ajiiartiir^i; ix'ov, ' having, on the left hand, the gnlf at, or 
 near, the temple of Poseidon ;' Id. vii. 6, ul ini A^/wou im- 
 xei/tev(u uf^aot, ' the -islands lying near (properly, towards) 
 Lcnuios.' Here it can hardly be questioned that the pro- 
 per ofKcc of irri is to show that the objects which it qualifies 
 have the direetion of 'upon,' or look towards the designa- 
 tions of place introduced by the genitives Ilomur^im and 
 Aijitvo'j; no that im, as here used, shall corrcsiiond to the 
 Latiu phrase versus in. A gulf described as having its 
 
 'EkL 
 
 273 
 
 aspect upon or towards the temple of -Poseidon may be 
 readily understood to be 'at' or 'near' this object. But 
 the idea of 'at,' 'near,' is inferential, the -proper relation 
 being that of a direction or looking upon or towards. 
 
 fi.) ' At,' ' before,' ' in the presence of,' in Latin, apud, 
 coram. Among the cases in which inl with the genitive 
 ease marks relative direction, and hence position, is that in 
 whiuh it denotes the circumstances in which an action is 
 performed or an object stands, and where it is nearly equi- 
 valent to the English ' at,' 'before,' ' in the presence of,' and 
 to the Latin apud and coram. E.g. I)em. 13G7, 17, im Sk ro5 
 Stxuanjjiiou iivtu iYX^t/ndiou xn<f^<u "rt dv ^ouX^i^y, i); /m'X'P 
 uvTi, 'before the court,' 'in the presence of the court;' 
 Isocr. 130, a, iiti uov fitn/xwu aipdrrouatv dA^^uuc* * thej' alay 
 each other at, before, the altars ;' but here the sense may, 
 perhaps, more obviously be, 'on the altars;' Demosth. 273, 
 8, imofioaavTo ini riiv aTfiarr^yMv, ' they took the oath in the 
 presence of the generals ;' so im ftajnuptov, im dtxaoroiv Xiyuv, 
 'to speak before witnesses,' 'before judges.' (See Kuhn. 
 Ausf. Gr. ii. p. 295.) E.g. Xen. Hell. vi. 5, 41, oux ijC 
 dliywv fuu doxuuat /Mfiruptuv wv (if e5 Tiadiiv bif 6/iwv, ' for it 
 seems to me that they will now receive a favor at your 
 hands before many witnesses.' 
 
 Ill such examples, im has the same meaning, properly 
 speaking, with that more obviously seen in former instances, 
 where there was a mere local relation to describe. As in 
 the example from Herodotus vii. 115, xbhzov rbv im floacdi^iou 
 
 ii diiiaTSfirj^ Z*/'"C s^""^' ' ^'^^ S"^^ '^^ ^^ "®*^ *^*^ temple of 
 I'oseidon,' that is, 'having its direction upon, looking 
 towards, the temple of Poseidon;' and Id. vii. G, a! im 
 AtjUvuu imxetfisvfu uy^aui, 'the islands lying near Lemnos,' 
 tliat is, ' having their direction upon, or their aspect towards, 
 Lemnos;' with which compare the phrase in' oexou nMv, 'to 
 sail homewards,' that is, ' to sail upon home,' ' to sail with 
 a direction upon home.' In the expression inw/ibaauro im 
 Ttuv azf/uTr^Ydiv, 'they took the oath in the presence of 
 the generals,' ini shows that the act of taking the oath is to 
 bo understood as having its direction upon, as looking or 
 having its aspect towards, the objects represented by twv 
 
 18 
 
274 
 
 OF TUE SEVERAL rRErOSIIIONS. 
 
 aT(iuTrjiov ; and this, if the action and the parties to it bo 
 considered, is equivalent to saying tliut it was done with a 
 reference to, or 'before,' 'in the presence of,' the generals. 
 With this use of ini with the genitive may be compared 
 that of apud with the accusative in Latin, in such expres- 
 sions as ajnul snialum dixit, ' he spoke before, in the presence 
 of, the senate,' properly, ' at ... as regards the senate.' 
 The office of the preposition in the case of apud, as in the 
 case of iiii, is to place the action in a certain relation to the 
 object before, and with reference to which, it is performed; 
 and nothing more is required to suggest the sense which 
 we express in English by 'before,' 'in the presence of.' 
 That the whole business of the preposition is to place the 
 action of the verb and the object which it concerns in some 
 such relative position as that they shall be understood to be 
 connected the one with the other; that the character of the 
 connection is to be inferred chiefly from the nature of the 
 action, of its subject, and of the object with which it stands 
 connected ; and that it is only further required of the pro- 
 position that its sense shall be appropriate to the relations 
 between the action and the parties to it, would a])])car from 
 the fact that prepositions so widely diflcrent in their proper 
 signilication as ini, ' upon,' apud, ' at,' and the English ' before,' 
 are equally employed to mark the same relation between the 
 like action of a verb and a noun. 
 
 The other examples admit of the same explanation. And 
 not essentially different is the example found in Soph. 
 (Ed. Col. 740-7, oftwv as rbv duaTrjuuv . . | . . . xdni nfioaKoXou 
 /tfuf I fleoare/ifj ■j^iojiuuuTa, ' seeing you, in your wretchedness, 
 wan<lering in penury with a single attendant.' Here im 
 with the genitive ;:(toan6i.ou fuii^ is added to /9w<7re/>i5i j^w/iuduTu 
 to show tliat the state which it represents, the wandering of 
 QSdipus in penury, is to be regarded as having an immediate 
 reference to a certain object, namely, 7iftoa7:6Xuu /itii;, ' a single 
 attendant.' To this object ir:e points by virtue of its sense 
 of direction upon or aspect towards, indicating the par- 
 ticular regard or aspect in which the miserable condition 
 of Q-Idipus is intended to be presented; and the genitive 
 npoazo)sM ludz denotes the specific object thus had in view. 
 
 If*' 
 
 275 
 
 The effect is, that TTftoanoiou /uaz shows the condition or cir- 
 cumstances by which the expression ^toaTspr^ x^ojiowTa is to be 
 qualified. The nature of the action or state described, and 
 the character of the parties to it, do not allow ini to be 
 here expressed in English by 'at,' nor by 'towards,' nor by 
 ' before,' ' in the presence of,' as in other examples it is, but 
 require that it shall be rendered by 'with.' But it is yet 
 true, that as im raiv aT/mTir/j-aiu, in the instance above exa- 
 mined, describes in what relative circumstances or condi- 
 tion the oath was taken (imo/Maauru), so i:ii npoandXoo fuaz 
 shows in what relative circumstances or condition the wan- 
 dering of CEdipuH in penury (JSioarefi^ ;fw/<ouvrM) occurred. 
 The use of the term 'before' or 'in the presence of,' in the 
 one case, and of 'with' in the other, in rendering im into 
 English, does not prove the construction to be different. 
 With this example from Sophocles may be compared 
 Demosth. 1000, 21, i]-(b ftkv ^v ini to~j duo/iuroi: toutou zduTa rov 
 jr/fwov, 'I was all the time with this name,' or 'having this 
 name ;' and Id. 230, 19, out in' Ah^Muz fajSziuai: etiir^ftiva, 
 'spoken with no truth,' 'with no regard to truth.' For a 
 diflerent interpretation of irri ^iioanoXou /uu;, see Ellendt, 
 Lex. Soph. 8. V. ini, iv. 2, who translates it by "fuUus 
 comiU;" ' resting upon, supported by, a (single) attendant.' 
 
 r-) 'By.' Of the same nature essentially is is-/ with the 
 genitive when used in such examples as that found in Ilcrod. 
 ii. 2, iv aTSj-Tj <U i/>^/trj ijz kwuTtuu xisa&at aura {iversiXaro), 
 ' he gave orders for them to lie by themselves ;' to which add 
 LI. v. 98, oixiovTu^ rijc (Pfiu^itj:; fApiv re xat XMiir^v in' kwortov, 
 'inhabiting both a place and village in Phrygia by them- 
 selves,' that is, apart from all others: Id. ix. 17, ixshuas 
 (tipiaz in' houTtou i^^sadtu, 'bo bade them sit by themselves;' 
 .iKschin. 33, 4, i,TS«Jiy H' iip' fj/ww uutwu of au/tn()iaj3st(: iyim- 
 /uifa, 'and when, now, we that were associated in the 
 embassy were by ourselves,' that is, apart from all others ; 
 Demosth. 056, 7, ee yuy . . . /tr^d' i(p' (,/twv auriov dlol re ijre 
 Tu'jTu awitufu, ' for, even if you were not able to understand 
 this of yourselves;' Id. 088, 20, 3« tr^v ndrpiov ftsTsxivyjas. noh- 
 Tslav iip' kwjToTj, ' because lie changed of himself the govern- 
 ment of his country,' that is, of his own suggestion, at his 
 
276 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 own prompting, apart from others ; Xcn. Anal), ii. 4, 10, 
 of ^e 'EUrjus; a'jToe itp ka'jTtov i^wftouv, ' tlie Greeks went 
 apart by thcnisclvea ;' Id. Ilell. v. 1, 34, iKst Sk . . . avr^ i<p' 
 inurifC ij 7:6)jz iyevcro, ' when the state became independent,' 
 that is, when it was separate from the Argives, and stood 
 by itself in its government. 
 
 In the first example here cited, ini added to xhadat shows 
 tbat the infant children were to lie or be placed so as to 
 have a position that looked towards, or had its direction or 
 aspect npon, some object ; and the genitive houriov denotes 
 the object to which this position or aspect is to be referred. 
 They were to be placed or lie in a position that had its direc- 
 tion or aspect of ' upon' or * towards' with respect, not to others, 
 but to themselves. The sentence means, accordingly, that 
 the infants were to be placed in a position that had no rela- 
 tion to any other beings, but only to themselves ; and this is 
 equivalent to saying that they were to lie 'by themselves.' 
 The difficulty of interpreting the expression Irt' ktouT<ou lies 
 quite as much in the genitive ktouuov as in the preposition im. 
 This difficulty, arising from the peculiar nature of the term 
 iwuTiov, may be overcome by comparing other like uses of im 
 with the genitive already considered. Tlius, it has been scon 
 that, in the phrase a! irti A^/ivou iTtneiftevat vr^aot, Ilerod. vii. 
 6, hi A^/ivou added to imxsl/ievat shows that the islands had 
 the relative direction of 'upon' or 'towards' with respect to 
 Lemnos, so that the islands are described as ' lying towards 
 Lcmnos.' And, in the same way, irt' kwuTtov, as the qualifi- 
 cation of xUadat, sets forth the situation of the infants as 
 having its direction 'upon' or its aspect 'towards' them- 
 selves and no others; and this reference of the direction or 
 aspect of their position to themselves, to the exclusion of 
 ever}' other object, gives the idea convej'ed by the English 
 phrase ' by themselves ;' for to be placed in a position that 
 looks or has its direction towards one's self, and towards no 
 one else, is the same as being placed by one's self 
 
 S.) 'Of,' 'concerning,' 'about.' 'A-'fff with the genitive, 
 having the sense of 'of,' 'concerning,' 'about,' is used in 
 Buch expressions as ini tcvoi; Xiyetv, ' to speak of, or about, a 
 person:' e.g. Plat. Charm, p. 155, d, Sc etntv ini xaXoti Xij-wv 
 
 'Eni. 
 
 277 
 
 muuu:;, 'who said, speaking of a handsome la«l ;' Dcmosth. 
 li{'J2, 23, xocvtyjz Ini jidvTtov inaivooz notrjao/tat, 'I will speak 
 praises concerning all in common;' Isocr. 124, a, ini fisu ouv 
 r^C fj/tezi/ia^ noXeio; uudtu /jfw tocuutov ilneti/, *of, or con- 
 cerning, our state, then, I have nothing of the sort to say.' 
 Hero ini properly signifies 'upon,' with the idea of a 
 direction upon, what is said of an object being conceived us 
 having a relative direction with regard to it, or as being 
 directed upon it. In English also we say, with probably 
 the same idea involved, ' to speak on or upon a subject.' In 
 this construction, therefore, ini is employed, as above sug- 
 gested, in the same way as in such expressions as in' ouou 
 nX.etu, 'to sail homewards.' As in' otxou, regarded as the 
 qualification o{nXelv, means, properly, that the sailing has a 
 relative direction of ' upon' with respect to home, and hence 
 signifies ' towards honie,' ' homewards,' so ini naidoz, as the 
 qualification oi Xiytm, shows that the speaking has a relative 
 direction of ' upon' with respect to a lad, and so conveys the 
 idea of its having a reference to, and of being directed upon 
 him, and the phrase may properly be rendered by ' to speak 
 of, or about, him.' 
 
 'Against,' 'at.' 'Eni, having the same sense, is some- 
 times employed with the genitive, wliere, from the peculiar 
 nature of the action which it qualifies, it is rendered by ' at' 
 or 'against.' E.g. Dcmosth. 574, 2, ini ndvriou o/toiw^ dpp- 
 (^o/ist/oc ifaiuea&e, 'you seem to be angry at, or with, all alike.' 
 It rc(iuires no explanation to see that ini with the genitive 
 has here the same meaning in fact that was attributed to it 
 just above. 
 
 e.) ' For,' ' to meet,' ' according to.' Even more obviously, 
 perhaps, docs ini with the genitive involve the notion of 
 direction upon, looking towards, where it is employed in 
 the sense of ' for,' 'to meet,' 'according to.' E.g. Dcmosth. 
 484, 20, 01) yuft tpsro detv 6 I'oXmv . . . roof vofjtou; . . . ini xaii>oi> 
 TtdinTuz . . . xufiiouz thatf ' for Solon did not consider that 
 the laws should be of force when made for the occasion,' or 
 ' to meet the occasion,' ' according to the exigency,' The 
 meaning is plainly 'looking to,' 'having a view to,' 'with 
 the action directed towards or upon.' 
 
278 
 
 OF TUB SEVERAL PKBPOSITIONS. 
 
 ^.) 'With respect to,' *in,' 'in the case of,' 'upon,' 
 'about,' 'with a view to.' Nearly related to the preceding 
 cases is another use of ini with the genitive, that, namely, 
 in which it occurs with such verbs as ^t^tuv, xfilueev, oxozslv, 
 Xixtev, imdetxuuvfie, to show in what case, under what circum- 
 stances, an action is performed, and where it is rendered in 
 English by 'in the case of,' 'in the matter of,' 'in,' 'with 
 respect to,' 'upon,' 'about,' 'with a view to.' E.g. Xen. 
 Cyrop. i. 6, 25, xai iizi twu Tzpd^ewu Sk,-ijii [ikv iv diftet <Lac, zbv 
 Apfot^a 8et ■zo'j i^ilou Tchovexrouirra (pauepbv elvat, ' in the inutter 
 of, with respect to, deeds also, it behooves an ofKccr to take 
 advantage of the sun, if it be summer ;' Demosth. 18, 1, i~e 
 noUwv fikv &v Ttz tSuv . . . doxii jiot rijv tiapii xdtv &uov ewocau 
 (faveftitv jti'OiiivrjV rj nolei, 'it seems to me that a person 
 would see that in, with respect to, many things wo have been 
 manifestly favored by the gods.' Here, it may be observed 
 that l>:t t:o)1u)v, 'with respect to many things,' *in many 
 things,' has corresponding to it, at the end of the same sen- 
 tence, the expression ovi ijxurTa dt iv roTc Tra/iouae rriiuY/mui, 
 'and, above all, in the present affairs.' .^schin. Sft, 2U, xai 
 TO [iJtv Stu j^pouou Xej-eev OTj/uidv iffu im rww xoufxov xai tou 
 auftfifiovTo; dvdftb; nohreuo/iivou, 'and the speaking after an 
 interval of time is the sign of a man that orders his conduct 
 in public affairs according to, with a view to, the exigency 
 of the times and to what is convenient ;' Id. 55, 41, of dk 
 Sxeiaiv ini raiu iSiwv i/iytov, ' others are absent upon, about, 
 with a view to, their private affairs.' 
 
 In such cases, im signifies 'having a direction upon or 
 towards,' 'looking to,' as in preceding instances, and the 
 genitive marks the object with respect to whicli specifically 
 the action has this direction or aspect. But the translation 
 of ini is varied, as above explained, to suit the nature of the 
 action and the character of the parties to it. Thus, in the 
 last example, &netaev ini twv idiwv ipyiov, while the sense is, 
 properly, that 'their absence looks to, has its direction upon 
 or towards, their private affairs,' the rendering in English 
 maybe either, 'they are absent upon their private affairs,' 
 where the term ' upon' exactly answers to the Oreek ini, or, 
 'they arc absent about their private affairs.' But, in the 
 
 'Eni. 
 
 270 
 
 first example, ini twv npd^eaiv . . . Set . . . tou ^Xlou nXeousx- 
 Towza fuvs/ibv eiutu, ini, having the same sense, namely, 
 pointing to ziov nfid^eiov, and showing 'upon,' in view of 
 what, the sentiment is expressed that it becomes an ofiicer 
 to take advantage of the sun in summer, must be rendered 
 by 'in the case of,' 'in,' or 'with respect to.* 
 
 5;.) 'On the ground,' 'for the reason,' 'in view of.' In 
 such examples as Herod, iv. 45, oud' Ij^to au/ifiaiia&ae in' 
 oreu /ju^ iouarj fi^ ul/i/b/iaTa rpifdaea xierai, 'nor can I even 
 conjecture why (wherefore) three different names are given 
 to one land,' ini with the genitive has the sense of ' on the 
 ground,' 'for the reason,' and the meaning of the prepo- 
 sition is the same as in the preceding cases. For its proper 
 ollice here is to show in what view, looking to what, an 
 action is performed; that is, to indicate, according to the 
 power whicli so many examples have proved it to have, 
 direction upon, and the having an aspect towards. When, 
 in the example cited, Jlorodotua says, 'nor can I even con- 
 jecture on what grounds three different names are given to 
 one land,' the giving three different names is shown, by the 
 addition of ini, to be done 'in view of,' that is, properly, 
 with a direction upon, or an aspect towards, some object ; 
 and this object is designated by the genitive case, according 
 to the common meaning of this case. So that the sense is, 
 'nor can I even conjecture in view of what, or on what 
 grounds, three different names are given to one land.' 
 
 2. 'Over.' 'AW with the genitive case is occasionally 
 employed in the sense of ' over,' a meaning plainly derived 
 from that of 'on,' ' upon.' E.g. Ilerod. v. 109, i^ftse; piu wv 
 in" ou ird'j^&rj/iev, ra'jTjj neipijadfte&a elvat j^pujOToi, 'we will 
 endeavor to be useful in the business over which we were 
 appointed;' Demosth. 309, 10, Ttp Staipdeipetv roue ^-ri twv 
 npaypdzwv, 'by corrupting those over, that is, having the 
 charge of, affairs;' Xen. Anab. iii. 2, 36, el oiv dnodst^&eirj 
 Tivaz XCV ^^'' I ^'''*' '^^•s'-'/"*''' ^xo-Tiptov elvat, ' if, therefpre, an 
 appointment were made of persons whoso duty it should be 
 to be over, that is, to command, have charge of, either flank.' 
 The genitive, in this construction, has its common sense of 
 'with respect to.' Thus, in the last example, tivuz ^prj elvat 
 
280 
 
 OF TUB SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 is qualified by im, ehowing that the persona spoken of would 
 bo ill tlio rolution of 'over,' uud the genitive uuv TrXeufmu 
 ixuTif/iov is added to mark tlio object to wliich Hpecilicully 
 this relative position is referred. The whole plirusc nieuns, 
 'whose duty it should be to be over . . . with respect to cither 
 flauk.' 
 
 3. Suporaddition. 'Enl is further used with the geiiitivo 
 case in the sense of supcradditiou ; and this meaning, us lias 
 been already seen, is derived immediately from the proper 
 notion of 'on,' 'upon,' belonging to ini, the addition 
 expressed by this preposition being made by placing one 
 thing upon another. Thus : 
 
 a. 'At a time,' &c. 'Ezi is used with the genitive of 
 numerals, in such expressions as if ku6^, ' one at a time,' 
 'by ones,' in Latin, singulatim, ini tihmv, 'by threes,' 'three 
 deep,' ini TtrTdptoM, 'four at a time,' 'by fours,' 'four deep.' 
 In all these and such examples, liti with the genitive is used 
 to express the arrangement or distribution of a number of 
 objects into cc^ual parts or groups, by making successive 
 additions of the same number, ' one upon one,' ' two upon 
 two,' and so forth, until the whole number is exhausted. 
 Thus, Xen. Cyrop. ii. 3, 21, iSmv ra^ia/ij^ov dyouTu r^v Tdziv 
 ixi TO df/iarsfjov iip' kvoz, ' upon seeing a taxiarch leading his 
 battalion to the left in single file,' that is, 'by ones,' 'one 
 upon one ;' Id. Anab. i. 2, 15, irdj^dr^aau izi Tszrdpmv, ' they 
 were drawn up four deep,' that is, ' by fours,' ' four upon 
 four;' Id. Hull. iii. 4, 13, izi rerTdi>wv Tza/tuTeTa^/tifoi, 'drawn 
 up alongside four deep;' Id: ib., to ^ddoz iTzc xoUwv, ' many 
 deep,' 'each rank many deep,' 'by many at a time;' Id. 
 Cyrop. ii. 4, 2, iv d]dy(f> dk XP^^f ^T^'^^'^o to fikv /leTMTzov iizi 
 Tfjtaxoaiwv, . . . to dk ^d&oz if huTov, ' in a little time the 
 front (of the column) was of three hundred men, but the 
 depth reached a hundred ;' that is, counting the men com- 
 posing the column by the front, the ranks were of three 
 hundred each, or they were drawn up 'by three hundreds,' 
 while the depth reached a hundred, that is, counting from 
 front to rear, the column was arranged by hundreds ; Id. 
 Anab. v. 2, G, iji/ yaft iip' Ivof ^ xaTdftaat; ix tou jrw///ou, ' the 
 descent from the stronghold was made in single iile,' or 
 
 '£;:;. 
 
 281 
 
 ' one by one.' Here ini, having the sense of supcradditiou, 
 derived from the notion of putting one thing upon another, 
 iip' hoi;, 'one at a time,' ' by ones,' 'in single Iile,' means, 
 properly, 'one upon one,' and im T/Jidiv, 'by threes,' 'three 
 at a time,' ' three deep,' is equivalent to ' three upon three,' 
 and so on. More precisely, and to account for the use of 
 both the preposition and the case, im is the sign of the 
 addition, oi- of the placing number upon number, and the 
 noun in the genitive case denotes the specific class or 
 denomination of numbers to which the superposition is to 
 be referred, that is, in which the addition is made. Thus, 
 in iizi T[>ta)v Ta^dJ^vm, ' to be drawn up by threes,' iizi shows 
 that the arrangement is made by superadditions, a number 
 upon a number, as one upon one, two upon two, or any 
 other number upon the same number; and the genitive 
 Tiitwv shows that the number taken for suporaddition 
 belongs to the threes, or that the specific number by which 
 addition is made is denoted by three. In English, also, a 
 like mode of distributing a number into C(puil divisions is 
 employed, the teriu ' by' being used as a sign of addition, 
 as in the expression ' one by one ;' only the English counts 
 ofi' the divisions, or makes the successive additions, by 
 placing them alongside the one of the other, 'by,' the 
 Geiinan Id, meaning 'by the side of,' 'at.' 
 
 h. 'After,' 'for,' 'from.' A second set of examples in 
 which iru has the sense of addition is that in which it is 
 used with such words as xaXuai^ui, 'to bo called,' 'to be 
 ininicd,' and corresponds to the English ' after,' ' for,' ' from :' 
 e.g. Ilerod. vii. 40, Ntauioc 3k xaXiuvToe limot inl Too8e, ' they 
 are called Nisnean horses from this circumstance ;' Id. vii. 74, 
 int uk AuSui) Tou 'Atuoz la^ov (of Audoi) ttjv iTtiouu/icjjii, ' the 
 Lydians had their appellation from Lydus.' lu the former 
 of these examples, the fact that the horses are called Nisscan 
 (Ncaaiot xaUovTux innot) is qualified by the addition of ini TOuSe, 
 'from this circumstance ;' and, in this qualification, ini shows 
 that the calling the horses Nissean is a matter of super- 
 addition, the meaning being, properly, 'they are called 
 Nisican horses by way of addition ;' and the genitive touSs 
 marks the object with respect to which this supcradditiou is 
 
282 
 
 OF HIE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 afllrmcd, that to which it is made, and, by being made to it, 
 docs in fact repeat it. When it is eaid of horses that they 
 arc called Nisajan from this circumstance, {Ntamoe xaXiovrat 
 mnot ini Toude, Bcil. Ntaaiou nediou,) the meaning is, properly, 
 acuording to the Greek construction, that the name of 
 Nimeun borne by the horses is a superaddition to the Nisiuan 
 plain ; or (but by giving to the horses the name oF Nisaian 
 belonging to a plain so called, there is made a Kupcraddition 
 of the name of Nisican (horses) to the ni^me (NiHa!an)of the 
 plain. In the same way, when it is said that the Lydians 
 were named after Lydus, the senile is, according to the 
 Greek way of representing it by means of ini and the geni- 
 tive, tliat the name of Lydians {Au(iol) which they bore was 
 a 8ui>enidtliti(>n to the name of Lydus, the repetition of the 
 name of Jjydus (Audo^) made by giving it to another being 
 a superaddition to the name of Lydus. In this latter 
 exajiiple, as well as in the former, the genitive introduces 
 the object with respect to which tlie superaddition and repe- 
 tition is ailirmed, or to which it is restricted ; that is, the 
 genitive AuSoiJ shows that the name Audoi is an addition 
 upon {ixc) and repetition of the name of Lydus exclusively. 
 
 II. 'Am with the dative case. 
 
 1. a. ' On,' ' upon.' 'Am is used with the dative also in 
 its proper sense of superposition, being rendered in English 
 by 'on,' 'upon.' E.g. Herod, v. 77, xitjf/ouj^oui izc ry X'^l'Ji 
 Xifitouac, ' they left cleruchi in, properly on, the district ;' 
 Id. vii. 217, iYit/ovzo ini T<f>dxji(oTr^[ii([t tou ou^oeoc, 'they were 
 on the spur of the mountain ;' ^iscli. fragm. 302, iau xd/toi 
 xXeii ini yhbaayj <fuXa^, ' I too have a guardian key upon my 
 tongue ;' Ilerod. vii. 41, ini TuXat Sopaac poiaz tl^ou ■j^fujaiaz, 
 *on their spears they had golden pomegranates.' The use 
 of the dative case, in such examples, depends, probably, 
 upon the notion of superposition, 'on,' 'upon,' contained 
 in the preposition itself, which would seem to be appro- 
 priately followed by the dative of the final object, that is, 
 of tlie object beneficially or injuriously affected, just as 
 Spxo;, 'like,' cffof, 'equal,' and the like, arc followed by 
 that case. 
 
 'Enl. 
 
 283 
 
 It may be remarked that inl is thus nscd after verbs of 
 motion also : e.g. Soph. Antig. 246, xdni xi""^' Stijiiav xovtv 
 nuX'Jvaz, 'and upon his body having sprinkled dry dust;' Id, 
 Aj. 338, xdn' i/toi fiXiipaz, 'having looked upon me.' In 
 such examples, the use of the dative is to bo explained in 
 the way that has just been mentioned, namely, as depending 
 on the notion of superposition contained in ini. 
 
 b. ' On,' ' at,' ' near.' ^Kni with the dative case is some- 
 times equivalent, not only to the English 'on,' 'upon,' but 
 also to 'at,' 'near.' E.g. Herod, iii. l(i, <ino9av6vza Sdaijiav 
 ini rfjae dufirjai, 'they buried him at, near, the gate;' Id. vii. 
 75, oixiovciz i~i ^'Tpu/mvi, ' dwelling on the Strymon ;' Id. 
 vii. 89, uoToi ol (Poivcxsz ro naXrubv otxsov ini ttj' f'()u{fi)fj SaXdaajj, 
 ■ ' these I'hcunicians anciently dwelt on the Ked sea ;' Xen. 
 Anab. vi. 2, 4, fWa 8e noXXd xui xalu vaiKDjpjai/m in' aiirfj r^ 
 ^aXdrrji, 'much fine ship-timber on, at, the very sea;' Id. ib. 
 i. 2, 8, paaiXeta . . . ini rai^ nrjffaiz zoX) Mapauou nora/MU, 'a 
 palace at, or on, the sources of the river Marsyas;' vEsch. 
 Sept. c. Thcb. 405, Kanavsh; in' ^ HkexTpatatv ecXij^sf n'jhu^, 
 'Capancus hath obtained his post at the g.ate of Elcctra.' 
 
 In such examples, ini is employed, as has been already 
 explained, in an acconmiodatcd sense, just as 'on' is used 
 in JOngli.-^h in such ex^tressions as 'the town is situated on 
 the river;' that is, it marks the relative situation of 'on,' 
 ' upon,' yet without the idea of literal superposition. When 
 Herodotus says of the rhccnicians that they dwelt on the 
 Ked sea, ini ry 'Kpui^/ifj daXdaarj, he does not mean that 
 they dwelt upon the very waters of the sea, but only what 
 we sulRciently indicate by saying that they dwelt 'on,' 'at,' 
 'near,' the sea. And yet neither 'at' nor 'near' can be 
 said to represent exactly the sense of ini. They can bo 
 substituted for the proper sense of ' on,* .only because of tlio 
 more general and figurative way in which ini here expresses 
 the relation of ' upon.' In this construction ini should be 
 immediately conjoined in sense with the verb, as, otxtov ini, 
 ' they dwelt upon,' i&uij<av ini, ' they buried upon ;' and tho 
 dative case, which depends in some sort upon the sub- 
 stantive idea of the verb as qualified by ini, but more imme- 
 diately upon the idea of superposition contained in the 
 
284 
 
 OF TUE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 prcpoBitiou itficlf, should be understood as marking tho 
 object ultimately aficcted, that is, as being used in tlie same 
 sense precisely as after tao;, 'equal,' Oftuioz, 'like,' 6 aorof, 
 •the same,' &c. The idea of the dative so employed is, in 
 fact, hardly more difficult to apprehend, allowing for tho 
 difference between a personal and any other object standing 
 as the final aim of an action or state, than in such expres- 
 sions OS iziTidsadai Tivt, ' to set upon, to attack, a person.' 
 And, if tliis be admitted, the dative, as was above said, is 
 more immediately dependent fur its use upon the sense of 
 'upon' cuhtained in tlie preposition. 
 
 c. 'On,' 'at,' 'in.' In the same way, im with the dative 
 case is employed to mark the time or occasion to which an 
 action is referred, where it is rendered in Engliah by * on,' 
 'at,' 'in ;' the only ditfcrence between this and the preceding 
 case being found in the nature of the object to which the 
 relative position expressed by irti is referred. E.g. II. viii. 
 529, d//' JjTot i^ri wxzt (foXd^ofisv ^fiia; auro-j;, ' but, indeed, 
 at night we will guard ourselves;' Xen. Cyrop. i. 3, 12, 
 TuiauTu; fiku ahrdiz eudu/ua^ nafiecj^ev iTii rip uei-t/w, 'such 
 entertainment did he afford them at supper;' Id. ib. i. 4, 24, 
 ore kfofia to nftoaatTtov rou Tcdznou /jptai/Aiuov ini tj/ dia rfj auToiu, 
 'because he saw his grandfather's countenance angry at tho 
 sight of him ;' Id. Memorab. i. 5, 2, ei 3' ini reie'jTfj rou fliou 
 j-ei/ofuuoi, 'and if, when we are at the end of life ;' Id. ib. ii. 
 2, 8, A uitx tiv Tt; ini Ttft flcifj navTt fiouXono dxouaac, ' which a 
 person would not wish to hear in his. whole life;' Id. Anab. 
 vii. 3, 34, ui; u jjp r^Xjoc iizi (h/r/tatz, 'when the sun was at his 
 setting,' 'at sunset.' In such examples, iri means 'on' in 
 the same sense that this word is used in English in designa- 
 tions of time; as, 'on the fourth day;' and this notwith- 
 standing that 'in' and 'at' may sometimes be substituted 
 for ' on' as the rendering of ini. The dative, in this con- 
 struction, is to be explained as depending immediately on 
 the sense of • upon' contained in im, just as in tho designa- 
 tions of place above considered. 
 
 The examples cited by Passow (Lex. s. v. inl) as having 
 ini with the dative in tlie sense of distribution, to wit, Od. 
 ii. 284, oc 5iy o<fi a^sdov iauv in' ij/tuTi rAvruz iXiadat, ' who 
 
 'Eni. 
 
 285 
 
 (death) is daily near them to destroy them all,' ami Od. 
 xiv. 105, Tiov ahi a^iv exaaroz in' fj/tan /ir^Xou dytust, 'each of 
 whom ever brings for them a sheep daily,' are properly 
 to be referred to this place. In the former example, the 
 proper interpretation is probably different from that given 
 in Passow's Lexicon, the sense being rather, 'who is near 
 them, so as for them all to perish in a day.' See Loewe, ad 
 loc., who translates by "ut omnes iino die pereant." In the 
 latter example, the sense of distribution can hardly with 
 fairness be attributed to inl, but is to be inferred from tho 
 other terms employed, as aiee, exairro^, and tho imperfect 
 tense dynast, and from tlio circumstances of the narrative. 
 In both examples, in' rj/uiu means no more than ' on, or in, 
 a day.' In t)ie former, death is said to be near the suitors, 
 to destroy them all in (on) a day ; ifi the latter each one 
 brings a sheep (on, in) a day. Compare II. x. 48-9, cited by 
 Loewe, ou ydfi mo iHoftrjv, otto ixXuov audijtTavTOZ, | dv8fi' iva 
 ToiradSe /ii[>/ief>' in fj/iau /i^uaaadat, 'I have not yet seen, 
 nor from one that told of him have I heard of, a man that 
 devised so many mischiefs in (on) a day.' 
 
 d. 'Depending on,' 'in tho power of.' 'Eni with the 
 dative is used also in the sense of 'depending on,' 'in the 
 power or hands of.' E.g. Herod, viii. 29, in' ^/uv iau . . . 
 ■ijvUptKmiliti'hu u/tia^, 'it is in our hands, or power, to 
 enslave you ;' Koph. Phil. 991, /trj 'ni rtpd' iaua tdds, * let not 
 this be permitted to this man ;' that is, 'let it not lie in this 
 man's power to do so.' Philoctetes has threatened to cast 
 himself down from the rock, and so destroy himself; and 
 Odysseus bids his attendants seize him, and not allow him 
 the opportunity to do it ; Id. (Ed. Col. 66, dfiyf^sc uz auTioVf 
 ^ 'nt Tift nX-^ftu Xoyoc ; ' does some one rule over them, or is 
 tho authority in the hands of the multitude ?' Isocr. 376, e, 
 ini ToTz noXs/uoiz yevo/jievoe, ' having come to be in the power 
 of the enemy.' 
 
 Here, from the signification of ' upon' inl obtains that of 
 ' resting upon,' and so of ' depending on,' and of being • in 
 the power of,' 'in the hands of.' The dative, as marking 
 the object upon which a thing lies or rests, upon which 
 there is superposition, naturally follows ini for tho same 
 
286 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL mEPOSITIONS. 
 
 reason that this case is used after fx«w>c, 'suitable,' tao^, 
 'equal,' ojioeoz, 'like,' 6 auroc, 'the same,' and the like. 
 
 e. * On condition.' 'Etii is frequently used with the dative 
 case in the sense of 'on condition:' e.g. Herod, iii. 83, ini 
 Touzif/ Sk [)ze;taTa/iat r^f ^PX¥> ^'^' V " ^'^' o^osud; u/iiwv 
 dpiOfteu, 'I Burrcudcr my claims to the government on this 
 condition, that I shall not be ruled over by any one of you ;' 
 Id. vii. 158, iTzi }.oj-tft toujjSs rdde Imiaj^o/ieu, in' w i^jye/uuv Tttiu 
 'DJjjviov iao/ifu, 'I promise this on a condition of this sort, 
 that I sliull bo commander-in-chief of the Greeks ;* Xcn. 
 Cyrop. i. C, 11, caaae yuft if' ol; aurouf Kua^dfir^i; dj-srac auft- 
 fid^ouc, ' for they know on what terms Cyaxarcs leads them 
 as allies.' 
 
 It was shown, in treating of the significations of im, 
 that the notion of condition which this preposition here 
 obtains is to be referred to the sense of 'resting upon' 
 or 'depending upon,' itself derived immediately from the 
 priinury siguilication of 'upon' or superposition. Thus, 
 in the first example cited, when Otaiics says, irri touti/j 
 6,Ts;/(Tra/i<tt r^c ^P'jP/s, ' I surrender my claims to the govern- 
 ment on this condition,' he makes the act of surrenderiuo- 
 his claims to rest or depend upon the fact or state of 
 things represented by rourto, namely, his not being ruled 
 over by any one of bis fellow-conspirators, in' Jj 671' uudeud; 
 O/Utov d/)$o/tat; or, what is the same thing in rcalitj-, he 
 makes this fact the condition of withdrawing his claims 
 to the government. If this explanation of the proper 
 meaning of izi be admitted, the dative case, as hero used, 
 must be regarded as depending on the sense of resting or 
 depending upon contained in ine, in the way that was above 
 cxjtlaincd. 
 
 /. Occasion, ground ; 'for,' ' on account of,' ' upon.' 'Eni 
 is sometimes used with the dative case to mark the ground 
 or reason of an action or state, that 'for* or 'on account of 
 which it is or is done, being rendered in English by ' for,' 
 'on account of," 'upon,' and occasionally by 'at.' IJcsidcs 
 other instances, i-i is very frequently met with in this sense 
 in connection with verbs which express states of the mind ; 
 as, dwjiid(^uvy dau/id^ea&ai ini uue, 'to admire,' 'to be ad- 
 
 If* t 
 
 287 
 
 mired for a thing,' <ppovstv ini uvi, 'to pride one' self upon 
 a thing,' dnidadai irti ztvi, ' to be vexed on account of a thing ;' 
 and so with verbs expressing sentiments of approbation, of 
 blame, and the like ; as inutvsiv ini uve, ' to commend for a 
 thing,' yeXdv ini uvi, ' to laugh at a thing.' E.g. Plat. Mcnon, 
 init., TTfio Toufiku devTaXue . . . idau/xdl^ovTO i<p' Inttcxy zexai nXoitzty, 
 pw ok, <Lc i/ioi ouxbT, xui i-'t aoipiff, ' formerly the Thessalians 
 were admired for their horsemanship and wealth, but now, as 
 it seems to me, for wisdom (philosophy) also ;' Herod, iv. 4, 
 ixn?.ayivzaz i~i zi]t yeuu/Up<u, ' alarmed at what had occurred ;' 
 Id. iii. 40, ir:' tp ah dnolofdvif) /idkaza zijv jJo^fiji' dkpjast^, ' for 
 the loss of which you will be most pained;' Plat. Synip. 
 217, A, iip/iovouv ydf) OTj inl zfj wfiif 9au[tdatov oauv, ' I was 
 marvellously proud of my beauty;' Xen. Hell. iv. 4, 15, 
 ifo^odfiiwt lit) roue <fdaxovzaz iizt Aaxa)vtaft^ (peuysiv xardfoav, 
 'fearing they would restore those who said they were in 
 exile for favoring the Lacediumonians ;' Herod, i. 137, inl 
 /ufj uiztTj (jir^uiua) durjxsazov nddoz sfiiisev, ' that no one should 
 inilict a capital injury for a single cause of blame ;' Xen. 
 Cyrop. i. 3, 10, inl fuij. drj noze oixjj nlf/yw: ihi^ov, ' once upon 
 a time, now, I was beaten for one decision.' 
 
 As already explained, inl, in such examples, has properly 
 the notion of resting or depending upon, itself derived 
 from that of 'upon' or superposition. Thus, in the last 
 example, the fact of receiving blows contained in nXrjyd- 
 iXu^ou rests or depends upon the having made a single 
 decision, as is shown by the added phrase inl fu^ Slxtj ; and, 
 by making the receiving blows to rest or depend upon the 
 giving a single decision, it is at once suggested that the 
 latter is the occasion, ground, or reason of the former. 
 Just as, in the preceding set of examples, the idea of con- 
 dition is suggested by the same relation of resting or 
 depending upon. As in former examples, so here, the 
 dative is appropriately used to mark the object upon which 
 another is placed, and upon which by consequence it de- 
 pends for its ground or reason. 
 
 y. Object or end had in view, motive; 'for,' 'with a 
 view to.' Nearly related to the above use of ini is that 
 iu which it is used with the dative to denote the object 
 
288 
 
 OV THE SEVERAL PUErOSITIONS. 
 
 or end liad in view in an action, that for which it is per- 
 formed, the motive that prompts it, commonly expressed in 
 English by 'for,' 'with a view to.* E.g. Herod, i. 68, ini 
 xaxij) Av&pdmou aidr^poi; dveupr^rac, * iron has been discovered 
 for the hurt of men ;' Id. iii. 59, oux im rourtf) nXiourei;, ' as 
 they did not sail with a view to this ;' Plat. Apol. 20, b, 
 dU.' 3; r/f ifr^tre ^'euderai re xat iiri Sia,%?.^ ry i/ifj ?.iysc, ' and 
 says it with the view of calumniating me ;' Ariatoph. Ach. 
 13-14, ijw'x' iz'c /Jtoa^ij) nork | Je^ideo; dar^Xiy ^an/ievoz /iotioTtou, 
 'to sing for a calf;' Ilcrod. iii. 38, i::i x6(T<fj dv XP^t'"^' /'<"'- 
 loiuTO roue narifiaz dno^v^axovzaz xaraaaitadui, ' for what sum 
 of money ;' Xen. Symp. i. 5, ah /tkv UinoTaj-opif rs koXj dpfu- 
 ptov oi5a)xiiz i~i aufia, ' you have given Protagoras a large 
 sum of money for (teaching you) philosophy.' 
 
 Horc ini ohtuins its sense of 'for,' 'with a view to,' or of 
 the object aimed at, in the same way substantially that it 
 gets the notion of condition, and of ground, reason, motive; 
 namely, it marks the object upon which an action rests or 
 depends; and as this may be the condition, ground, or 
 reason, ho may it be also the end, the object Imd in view, 
 or the motive of it. When it is said, in the second example 
 cited, *as they did not sail with this view,' it is plain that 
 the phrase i-i To'jxip, which is added to the chief statement 
 oh nXkovxtz, shows, if kic't have its most obvious signification, 
 that the act of sailing is to be understood as in some way 
 resting or depending upon the fact represented by Tourtp ; 
 and that as the circumstances of the case may elsewhere 
 suggest that the thing upop which an action rests or de- 
 pends is its condition or ground, so they may here suggest 
 that it is its motive or end had in view. With regard to 
 the employment of the dative case with ini in the sense of 
 the motive or end had in view, it should be referred, just 
 as in the preceding cases, to the notion of superposition, 
 and hence of resting or depending on, properly belonging 
 to the preposition, and which is here also involved. 
 
 h. Personal object had in view; 'for,' 'against.' To 
 this place may properly bo referred the use of ini with the 
 dative case to indicate the personal object 'for' whom, that 
 is, with a view to whose benefit or injury, a thing is done, 
 
 •Em. 
 
 289 
 
 or its final aim. E.g. II. xxiii. 776, ouc ^^'t HarpoxXtp Tzifvev 
 itoSdz inxhz '/Ij^Meuz, ' the oxen which Achilleus slew for 
 Patroclus;' II. i. 382, fjxe d' in' 'Apj-eioiat xaxov fieXoz, 'sent a 
 deadly arrow against the Argives ;' Herod, vi, 88, ndv jxij- 
 im/i^aaa&at in' ylij^eujJTjjat, ' to devise every thing against the 
 ^ginetae ;' Herod, i. 61, fiadtov rd Ttoieu/ieva ix' Iwurip, 'upon 
 learning what was doing against him;' Xen. Cyrop. i. 6, 
 39, TtfC nX"^"'^ ^'' ^^' ^"''* ^'^^'i /itxpotz ^i^piotz ipajxavai, 
 'which you contrived against (for) animals that were very 
 small.' 
 
 Here both ini and the dative obviously have the same 
 explanation with that given in the preceding cases. Whe- 
 ther ini shall be rendered by ' for,' or by ' ogainst,' will 
 dcjiend, of course, upon the nature of the action which it 
 qualities, and upon the obvious relations of the parties to 
 it. While, in the iirst example, it is plain that the oiicring 
 of victims by Achilleus was made to do honor to his friend 
 Patroclus, it is equally so, in the last example, that the 
 nets contrived by the fowler were intended to harm the 
 birds. In the former case, accordingly, ini is translated by 
 ' for,' in the latter by 'against.' 
 
 To this case of the use of ini may be referred also the 
 examples in which it is employed with the dative of the 
 person, in such phrases as yeXdv ini zm, 'to laugh at a per- 
 son ;' thus admitting a natural distinction between ini with 
 the dative of the {>erson, and ini with the dative of the 
 thing, after xsXdv and such verbs. The latter was above 
 considered to express the occasion or ground of the verb's 
 action, and the former may properly be regarded as de- 
 noting the object for which it is performed. E.g. Xen. 
 Symp. ii. 17, yeXure, iipyj, in' iftoi ; ndrepov ini T0UT(p, ei ^ouXo- 
 pai fupval^biituoz fidXXov Irj'eaiuiiv ; ' do you laugh at me, said 
 he 'i is it for this, if I choose by exercising myself to have 
 better health ?' Here the use of the dative iftoi after ^eXuu 
 ini is the same precisely in its character with the dative of 
 the person attending many verbs compounded with ini; 
 e.g. Xen. de Venat. xil. 16, noXXd intuimat rotf nenatSeupiivoiz, 
 ' they find much fault with those that are educated ;' Id. 
 Apol. i. 2, 31, ipiati rdv Smxpdv^v . . . imjptd^wv ixeiutp, xae 
 
 10 
 
290 
 
 OF TUB SEVERAL PUEP0SITI0N8. 
 
 TO xoiu^ Toiz tfdoaotpotz Onb uov no^iov ijiert/uo/tevou im^ipwu 
 auTw. It may possibly be worth remarking, also, that the 
 English ' at,' in the phrase ' to laugh at,' answering to yekuv 
 ini, has undergone the same change in sense as compared 
 with 'at' iu such expressions as 'to strike at,' ' to throw at,' 
 that 'on,' in the phrase 'to look on,' has undergone as 
 compared with the meaning which it has iu the forms 'to 
 stand on,' 'to cast on.' 
 
 J. Result or eftcct ; 'for,' 'so as to cause,' &c. In some 
 examples, ini with the dative case would seem to mark the 
 end reached or result attained, and to be, therefore, equiva- 
 lent in English to the phrase ' so as to result in,' or ' having 
 for its ofl'cct,' although sometimes capable of being ren- 
 dered by ' for.' E.g. Soph. Antig. 787-8, cited, together with 
 the following examples, by EUendt, Lex. Soph., ah xai dtxuuov 
 dSlxou^ I iffiivai; mi(taanffz Ini hofltjt, 'you pervert minds so as 
 to injure others,' ware kiopHadiu dUoui; ; Id. Aj. 143-4, iitydXoe 
 dbfiu^oi xariyiiiDa' fj/iiii: \ ini Suaxklu, ' to our discredit,' that is, 
 • BO as to discredit us ;' Id. Antig. 758-!), . . . dU.' oi/, t6v3' 
 'OXun^ov, ia&' ou I j(cupwv ini ^oyotat devvdaeii; i/ii, ' nay, by 
 Olympus here, thou shalt not with impunity revile mo with 
 reproaches,' that is, 'and so bestow reproaches on me;' Id. 
 Elcctr. 108-11, ... 00 ^y'fo; ... \ f^^ou rexuoiirst/)' w^ ti; dr^dotv, 
 I ini xwxuTtji, rcovds naTptpatv j n(m &ufmv, y^^w ndat n[>oif(oi/eiv, 
 'like some nightingale robbed of her young, I will not 
 cease from uttering a cry with wailings before this my pater- 
 nal threshold in the hearing of all.' 'Eni xwxurip added to 
 fjX'o nfiofwuuv shows that the cry will be very lamentable, 
 so as to be a wailing, or shriek of woe : this, assuming ini 
 to have, here also, the sense of the end reached, attributed 
 to it in 2>receding examples. And not only does this seem 
 to be the most probable meaning of ini in this and the 
 other passages cited, but it is one perfectly consistent with 
 those meanings which it has been seen to have in the im- 
 mediately foregoing examples, and is not therefore im- 
 probable in itself. For, more nearly considered, that 
 which is here expressed by ini and the dative, that is, the 
 eiid reached or the result attained, has its origiu in the 
 same meaning of ini that enables it to couvey the ideas of 
 
 'i:nL 
 
 291 
 
 condition, of ground or reason, and of motive or end l»ad 
 in view. In all these the fundamental idea contained in 
 ini is that of being or resting upon; and when ini with 
 this meaning is conjoined to a noun in the dative ease, the 
 notion given is that of an object upon which an action 
 rests or depends, either as its condition, or as its ground or 
 reason, or as its motive or end had in view. The proper idea 
 conveyed by ini in these meanings is that of being or resting 
 upon, or depending upon ; and this is common to all ; the 
 other significations are all alike derivative. In the present 
 case likewise, ini and the dative mark the object upon which 
 an action is figuratively represented as being or having its 
 position ; and from this notion of an object upon which an 
 action is conceived as standing or having its position is 
 derived, again, that of the circumstances and character of 
 an action. When it is said, i&aipav ini r^ai Mpyae, ' they 
 buried him at (iiguratively 'on') the gates,' ini zfjot dup^jat 
 describes, not merely the place, but also the circunistanccB 
 and peculiar character of the burial; and so, when it is 
 said, <f/jeua; naftaanq.^ ini Xio^qt, ' you pervert minds to the 
 injury of others,' ini ho^if, marking primarily the relative 
 position of the action, comes secondarily to describe the 
 circumstances and character of the act of perverting minds, 
 ifpivaz nafiuanuv, as being one attended by injury to others; 
 and when it is said, Herod, i. 68, ini xaxtp dv&pi!ntou aidtjfioz 
 duso[/r/Tuc, 'iron has been discovered to the hurt of man,' 
 the ellect of adding to the proposition aidjjfwi; dpeuftj^rae the 
 <lualification of ini xaxtp dvdpwnou is to mark some charac- 
 teristic circumstance or condition belonging to or attending 
 upon the discovery of iron ; and, again, when iip' Inmxfj is 
 added to i^uopdrovTo, in the sentence dsTTcdoi idaupd^ovro 
 iip' inmxfj, riat. Mcnon, init, it shows the state or condition 
 of things in which the Thessalians were admired, in tlio 
 niatler of horsemanship. This, then, is common to all 
 these notions of condition, ground or reason, motive or 
 end had in view, and result or answering effect, as ex- 
 pressed by ini and the dative, that they mark the condition 
 or circumstances of an action, and that this is derived, 
 either primarily from the notion of having a position upon. 
 
292 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL FREPOSItlOKS. 
 
 or Bocondarily from that of resting or depending npon. 
 Tlio expression of condition, and of gronnd or reiison, as 
 well as that of motive or end had in view, arc more nearly 
 allied to the secondary notion of resting or depending 
 upon, and that of result or cud attained to the primary 
 souse of position on, of which that of circumstances and 
 condition is a mere variety ; but they are not essentially 
 diii'crent. The diversity of meanings that may bo repre- 
 sented by this common idea of the circumstances or con- 
 dition of an action, namely, condition, ground or reason, 
 motive or end had in view, and result or answering effect, 
 depends, not upon int, not upon the dative, but on the 
 character of the action and of the noun which with ini 
 marks its circumstances or condition. From these alone 
 can be divined the peculiar object to be answered by the 
 descriptive circumstances introduced by ini and the dative, 
 whether they are to denote a mere local relation of super- 
 position, or the circumstances more generally, or a con- 
 dition, or a ground or reason, or a motive or end had in 
 view, or an eflbct or end attained. If this view be correct, 
 and if iiri ifihyotai and im xa>xuT<p, while they describe attend- 
 ing circumstances of the actions which they qualify, do also 
 represent the effects answering to these actions, they may 
 bo jtroperly expressed in English by 'with reproaches,' 
 'with wailings,' or by 'so as to give reproaches,' 'so as to 
 make a wailing.' 
 
 It is proper to mention that a different interpretation has 
 been given of the above-mentioned use of kzi with the dative. 
 Thus, with regard to im iiioyotai. Soph. Antig. 758-9, Ellendt, 
 Lex. Soph. i. p. 648, considers it as expressing object or end, 
 translating it by "mei reprehcndmdi causa;" and so of im 
 xuxuTip, Soph. Electr. 108, which he renders by "alios ad 
 lugcudum provocantem." Schneidewin, on the contrary, in 
 his note on Soph. Antig. 1. cit., renders ini (f'oyotai by "iitil 
 Voririlrf m," ^w'xih reproaches,' referring to ini xioxurtp, Soph. 
 Electr. 108, and to xXinretv i<p' &(>naj^, xaraarivecv rtva ini 
 Sdxfiutii xui j-ioii;, as like examples, and may be considered as 
 sustuining the interpretation here given, although ho fur- 
 nishes no explanation. 
 
 'Eni. 
 
 293 
 
 2. 'Over.' 'Eni is used with the dative in the sense of 
 'over,' 'having cliurgo of," 'having authority over,' in such 
 examples as Xen. Anab. iv. 1, 13, xai noXXoi oij auuou, oi ini 
 TouTotz ovrec, dn6/jaj[ue l^aav, * now many of them, who had 
 charge of these, or were over these, were withdrawn from 
 the ranks ;' Id. lb. iv. 4, 19, xaTahnivrez . . . aTfiarrjYbv ini 
 role fiiuuuat I'oifalueTuu ^TUfiipdiXiov, 'having left Sophuiuctus 
 of Styniphulus as connuandcr over those who remained 
 behind;' Doni. 928, 11, aurof fap l^tj . . . rw aiiradsX^bv rdv 
 uOtou . . . nhuauadiu ini tuiz ^i^fiaai, ' for he himself said 
 that his own brother would sail as supercargo,' 'in charge 
 of the goods;' Xen. Cyrop. vi. 3, 28, 8; dpxee(: roiv ini ratz 
 iaj-)[^fivutz, 'who are chief of the engineers,' 'who have com- 
 mand of those who are in charge of, or are over, the 
 engines.' 
 
 In this use of ini it has properly, as before mentioned, 
 the sense of ' on,' ' upon,' the idea of ' over,' whether con- 
 sidered as expressing a merely local relation, or taken figu- 
 ratively, as here, to denote authority or supervision, being 
 imniudiutoiy derived from this. And in this class of 
 examples, even more obviously than in some of those that 
 have been previously considered, the dative case depends 
 fur its use upon the sense of the preposition itself. 
 
 Here belong, as having ini employed in a like figurative 
 sense, though one more nearly approaching the idea of local 
 superposition, sucli examples us I'lat. Sympos. 214, a, oSrcuc 
 cure xt XeYOfteu ini rfj xuXaxe out' in^Softev; ' do we thus neither 
 narrate nor sing any thing over our cups?' 
 
 3. a. 'In addition to,' 'besides,' 'with.' In many exam- 
 ples ini is used with the dative in the sense of ' in addition 
 to,' 'besides,' 'with.' E.g. Xen. Cyrop. i. 2, 11, Srav xd/t- 
 Safiov iyiuiat ini Tip aiz<ft, 'whenever they have cresses in 
 addition to their bread,' or 'with their bread ;' Id. Anab. 
 iii- 2, 4, ini rourcwf dftdaaz ^ftiu, 'having, in addition to this, 
 given us his oath ;' Soph. Trach. 1242, xdni rotads rrjv X'^f'*' 
 rujrsruy npoaite;, 'and, besides this, bestow your service 
 promptly;' Id. (Ed. Col. 550, deurifitai Inauaac ini viatft poaou, 
 'you inllicted a second calamity in addition to the one I 
 
294 
 
 OF TUE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 bad;' Id. Antig. 590, mj/iara iiti ir^j/taai mnzovra, 'disasters 
 happening upon disasters.' 
 
 The notion of addition wbicli ini expresses in such exam- 
 ples OS these is obviously derived immediately from thut of 
 superposition, one of the ways in whicli addition is made 
 being the placing one thing upon another. The dative has 
 the same sense as in the preceding examples, and depends 
 upon the moaning of the preposition itself. 
 
 b. 'After.' Very nearly akin to the above use of ini is 
 that in which it has the sense of ' after,' or marks the follow- 
 ing of one thing upon anotlier: e.g. Od. vii. 120, oj-ji^vyj in' 
 ofivy pj(idirxei, /i^Xov d' ini /t^X(ff, 'pear ripens after poar, and 
 apple after apple,' that is, 'pear upon pear, and apple upon 
 apple ;' II. vii. 163, T(p 5" ini TuSsidr^z difro x(>arsii6(: Jio/i^djjZ, 
 'after him rushed mighty Diomcdes, Tydcus' son;' Xen. 
 Cyrop. ii. 3, 7, iviavrj in' aurip ^epauXaz, 'after him rose up 
 Pheraulas ;' Id. ib. v. 1, 27, ini rourif) SXt^ev b Tiyfidur^i; aids, 
 'after him Tigranes spoke as follows;' Id. ib. vi. 3, 24, 
 dxovTioTaz l^v ini toIz dtopaxoipopotz rd^m, ini de mf rlxoirwrraJf 
 rocdrac, ' I will station darters after the men with breast- 
 plates, and bowmen after the darters;' .^scli. Pcrs. .'519, 
 li/iSz 8i ■^ftyj 'ni roiade roiz nenpayfjiivoi; | . . . ?u/t^i/ieiv ftouXsu- 
 para, ' it is necessary for you, after wliat has occurred, to 
 consult togetlier.' In the same way, ini in the sense of 
 ' after' is used with the dative with regard to time also : e.g. 
 Xcn. Anab. v. 9, 12, ini tout</j dpwv 6 Muadz ixnenXi^Y/iivouz 
 wjTouz, 'after this, when he saw that they were terrified;' 
 Id. IIcU. iv. 4, 9, T^u ftkv ouu ini r^ wxri ^ eca^Xdou fjiiipau 
 d/ta'j^oc St^yuyov, 'during the "day, therefore, that followed 
 the night on which they entered, they continued without 
 fighting.' 
 
 Witli regard to the meaning of ini in this class of exam- 
 ples, it is plain that as the notion of superposition gives the 
 secondary sense of addition, so also it gives that of sequence, 
 expressed by ' after.' This, indeed, in certain connections, 
 is but a variety of the meaning of addition. The dative 
 case, in this copstruction, has tlie same meaning as in the 
 preceding sot of examples, and depends for its use upon the 
 sense contained in the preposition itself. 
 
 'Eni. 
 
 295 
 
 III. 'Eni with the accusative case. 
 
 1. 'On,' ' upon.' 'Eni in the sense of 'on,' ' upon,' is used 
 with the accusative case, both with and without motion 
 preceding, a. With motion preceding : e.g. Xen. Anab. iii. 
 4, 25, inei de nopeuo/KUDi ix tou nedioo dvi^r^aav ini rov npwrov 
 j^Xoipov, 'when from the plain they went up upon the first 
 iiill ;' Id. ib. § 27, ax°^fl /^^ ^^'' ^" &'/'"»' dftxvowTou, ' they 
 arrived upon the summit at an easy pace;' Soph. Phil. 022, 
 iyw fikv tip ini vaw, ' I will go upon the ship ;' ^sch. Suppl. 
 810, ^lopohz in dXXouz Saipdveov iyia>piu)v \ i}iz, 'place them 
 (xXdiivu;) upon other altars of the divinities of the place ;' 
 Ilerod. i. 171, ini r« xpdvsa Xbipouz ini8iea9at Kapiz eiai of 
 xazadi^avTsz, ' it is the Carians that showed how to fasten 
 crests upon their helmets.' 
 
 In sucli examples, ini has obviously its proper sense of 
 'on,' 'upon,' denoting the relative position or direction of 
 the motion of the verb. Thus, in the first example, dvi- 
 firjaav ini means ' they went up . . . upon ;' and the accu- 
 sative case is used after the action or motion of the verb, 
 thus qualified by ini, to mark the limits within which the 
 statement made by the verb and preposition is to be admit- 
 ted, or the object as to which it is affirmed ; ' they went up 
 . . . upon (dviftr^aav ini) ... as regards the first hill,' ' as far 
 as the first hill was concerned,' (rbv npwrov pjXo^ov.) 
 
 b. Without motion preceding: e.g. Xen. Anab. vi. 3, 25, 
 napr^yyiXXeTO Sk ra pku dopara ini rov ds^cbv Jipov ix^'"' ' orders 
 were given them to keep their spears upon the right 
 shoulder;' Soph. CEd. Col. 100, xAni atpvbv k!^dpi]v pd9pov rods, 
 'and sat uj)on this revered seat;' Isocr. 13, b, Surnep yap rrjv 
 /liXtTTav bpaipsv i^' dnavra phv ra fiXaavj/juira xa^t^dvouaav, ' as 
 we see the bee lighting on every plant.' Here, again, it is 
 plain that the sense of ini is that of ' on,' ' upon,' and that 
 the accusative is added to show in what regard, as to what, 
 the preceding statement is to be considered as made. Thus, 
 in the first example, napijyyiXXeTO ra Sdpara i-jfecv ini . . . rbv 
 de^ibv (Lpov, ' orders were given them to keep their spears 
 upon ... as regards the right shoulder,' ' as far as the right 
 shoulder was concerned.' 
 
296 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PBEPOSITIONS. 
 
 In tlie same way, in such examples as Horn. Od. i. 183, 
 ff^irov ine otvonu novrov, 'sailing upon the dark sea,' the 
 proper eensc is, 'sailing upon ... as regards the dark sea,' 
 ini qualifying the action of sailing as being relatively 
 •upon,' and the accusative marking the object as to which 
 this action thus qualified is affirmed. So Od. iv. 417-18 
 rrfvr« 3k prvifut^o: mipi^atrai, 8aa' ini yaiav \ ifmsra yij-uovTcu, 
 xai Mto/i, xai dttmoukz ntjp, • all the creeping things that are 
 upon the earth,' that is, ' that are upon ... as far as the 
 earth goes.' 
 
 c. 'At,' 'on,' 'to.' The phrase ini r^v TpdnsZav, 'at, on, 
 or to, the bank or money changer's and lender's table,' 
 may here deserve notice, although hardly requiring much 
 explanation. E.g. Demosth. 896, 7, Ano8odii,T(ov ini rijv 
 rpdneluv, 'having been paid back to (at) the bank;' Id. 900, 
 14, dnuoTefJsladai to ini riju rpdjtt^av xi'ioz, ' to be deprived 
 of the money due at the bank,' that is, 'on the money- 
 changer's tabic ;■ Id. 945, 23, npoaiotpuU rd tvSvta xAXavxa ini 
 tr,v xpAnt^m, ' he owed, besides, the eleven talents to (at) 
 the bank,' that is, 'on the money-lender's table ;' Id. 895, 15, 
 dno?.u&jjaofi£u rr^; ijjinji: rrjc ini ttjv rpdneQav, ' we will release 
 him from the engagement made at (to) the bank,' that is, ' on 
 the money-lender's table or board.' In these examples ini 
 has the sense of 'on,' ' upon,' that is, of simple superposition ; 
 but is translated by various terms, 'on,' 'at,' 'to,' 'in' 
 according to the nature of the action which it qualifies, and 
 to tlic derivative sense in which the word rpdne^a is used. 
 Thus, in the las^ example, ini qualifies i^juTj, 'a pledge,' 
 showing that the pledge or obligation was made 'on the 
 money-lender's table,' just as in English we use 'on' iji the 
 phrase 'on 'Change;' but it would commonly be expressed 
 by 'at' or 'in,' and the pledge represented as one 'at bank" 
 or ' in bank.' The accusative is here used in the sense of 
 •as to,' 'as regards;' thus, irj-ini ini ttjv rpdnerav means 
 properly 'a pledge made on ... as regards the money- 
 lender's table.' 
 
 2. a. 'To.' 'Eni, having originally the same sense of 
 superposition, is used with the accusative case to qualify 
 various actions, motions, and states, by marking them as 
 
 ' £zi. 
 
 257 
 
 having, with regard to some object, the relative direction 
 or position of *ou,' 'upon,' to be understood, not literally, 
 but figuratively; just as in English 'on' and 'upon' are 
 employed in such phrases as 'to march on a point,' 'to go 
 on an expedition,' ' it lies on the south,' and as ini was seen 
 above to be iipcd with the genitive and dative. In this 
 signification, and when employed with the accusative case, 
 ini is very commonly equivalent, seemingly, to the English 
 'to,' and sometimes to 'at.' In fact, however, neither 'to' 
 nor ' at' represents the sense of ini, but rather that of the 
 accusative as denoting the limit of an action or motion ; 
 and the relative direction or position indicated is not ex- 
 pressed. E.g. Xen. Anab. vii. 1, 20, 6 dk 'Ava^i^toz xara- 
 dfiaficjv ini ttjv ddXarrav, ' Anaxibius having run down to the 
 sea.' Here the prcpositiou ini qualifies the action contained 
 in xaradpapcov by showing that its direction was 'upon' 
 relatively to the sea, or that it looked upon, or had its 
 aspect towards, the sea ; and the accusative ddXaTvav points 
 out the object with regard to which the action of xazadpaftmu 
 has its relative direction or position, 'as regards the sea.' 
 Thus, the whole sentence would mean, ' Anaxibius having 
 run down upon ... as regards the sea;' that is, his run- 
 ning down had its direction upon or towards as regards, 
 not all objects, but definitely the sea. It might be sufficient 
 to say that ddhizrav is the accusative of the object reached 
 by the motion represented hy xaruiipa/uov, and that ini quali- 
 fies the motion by n\arking its relative position ; so that the 
 construction would be, ' Anaxibius ran down to the sea . . . 
 upon it.' I3ut this is hardly satisfactory as regards the use 
 of the case, which more probably gives the limit of the 
 verb's action or motion by designating the object as to 
 which it is affirmed. Add, as examples of this use of ini, 
 Xen. Anab. v. 1, 1, iv rfj nopeif pixf"^ ^^'' ^li^o^rTav, 'm the 
 march quite to the sea ;' Id. ib. xai it; ini Tpane!^ouvra . . . 
 difixopTo, * and how they arrived at Trapezus ;' Id. ib. i. 2, 5, 
 iSe?MW£i . . . ini zov MaiavSpou noraphv, ' he proceeded to the 
 river Micander ;' Id. ib. ii. 4, 23, ini pinrot rr^v yifupav ijimz 
 tpoXaxijv lnefi(/<av, ' however, they sent a guard to the bridge,' 
 literally, 'upon the bridge.' 
 
298 
 
 OF THB 8BVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 b. * To the extent of,' ' for.' Sometimea im is used with 
 the accusative case, whether denoting space generally or 
 time, to mark more distinctly the measure or extent of the 
 preceding action, where in English the form of expression 
 is 'for,' 'to the extent of.' E.g. Od. xi. 576-7, xai Taubv 
 eldov ralijc i(>txo3ioi uUv, | xel/isuov iv SaniS<ff 6 S" in' ivvia 
 xttTo ffihSfiu, ' he lay (extended) for, to the extent of, nine 
 jilolliiii;' Xcn. C'yrop. vii. 5, 8, nuTa/io; jrWroc i^aw nXdov 
 ^ ijti !iw> tTTiliiia, ' having a width that reaches to more than 
 two Htadia ;' LI. Anub. i. 7, 15, nafisriraTo ok ij rdf/io:; . . . 
 ini dioiiexu najinadyyaz, * the canal had been made for twelve 
 parasiings;' Ilorod. i. 193, inl ScTiXoaia . . . dmnlnht, 'the 
 land yields a return to the extent of two hundred fold.' 
 Add such phrases as im noXu, ' to a great extent,' ini nXiov, 
 'to a greater extent,' ini /liya, ' to a great amount.' 
 
 In such examples, the idea of extent, or of the point up 
 to which a measure reaches, is wholly due to the accusative 
 case, this being one of its common meanings. Conseqncntlj', 
 the terms 'for,' 'to the extent of,' used to render iiri and the 
 accusative in such instances as those above cited, bclonff to 
 the accusative, and in no sense to the preposition, which, in 
 fact, is not expressed in the English translation. Yet iiti, 
 hero also, has its proper meaning of 'upon,' to be under- 
 stood, not of local superposition, but, as in the case of xara- 
 dpa/uhv ine ddJ.aTTuv, of Ttketv ini Xiou, and of other examples 
 above considered, of the direction or aspect of an action or 
 motion, and as being in some sort equivalent to ' towards,' 
 'looking upon.' Used as the qualification of an action or 
 motion, and coupled with an accusative of measure, it 
 merely serves to show that the action or motion has a cer- 
 tain relation to the object that measures its extent, a rela- 
 tion that may be expressed by saj'ing that it has its direction 
 upon it, looks upon, or has its aspect towards, it. Thus, in 
 the first exam])le above given, 6 S' in' ivvia xsiro niXsif/ia, 
 .'he lay (extended) for nine plethra,' the lying of Titj'oa 
 outstretched is measured in its extent by the accusative 
 it'via nihftfia, 'for nine plethra ;' and ini shows merely the 
 relative direction which it has with regard to the object 
 that furuislics its measure, that it has this aspect, or looks 
 
 '£«'. 
 
 299 
 
 this way, and, hence, is to be considered with reference to 
 it. In other oases of measure, dU or xard is used with the 
 accusative, showing that the direction of the a<:tiori or 
 motion measured by the accusative is to be conceived as 
 being 'up' or 'down.' In the case under consideration, 
 Ini differs iu its use in this alone, that it exprcHscH in a 
 more general way that the action or motion has a direc- 
 tion upon, or aspect towards, an object by which its extent 
 is measured. 
 
 ' On,' ' upon,' ' by.' To this place may be referred the 
 phrases in' cau, ' equally,' and ini arddfo^v, 'by rule,' or 'by, 
 upon, the line,' ad amussim. E.g. II. xii. 436, Sb^ /tkv Ttov in' 
 7<T«//dyy T^raro nriXe/Mz re, ' thus the fight and battle between 
 them was waged on equal terms,' that is, ' up to the measure 
 of equality,' ' to the extent of what was equal,' ' equally,' 
 neither gaining the advantage. Od. v. 243-5, abrup b 
 rdftvero Sou/iw «?oaic ^i oi fjvuro Spjov | elxoai d' Ix^aXs ndvra, 
 neXixx:^aeu o" dpa ;(aP.x^, | Siaae S' ineara/jtivw^, xat ini azd9fi^v 
 tduuev, ' and straightened them by the line,' or, as might also 
 be said iu English, ' to the line.' In both examples equally 
 the accusative case has the sense of measure or extent, ' as 
 far as to;' 7au, in the former case, marking how far the 
 battle was pushed, namelj', to the point where there was 
 equality, ajid azddiiijv, in the latter, showing np to what 
 measure the straightening the beams was carried, namely, 
 ' up to the line,' until it accorded with the line. And the pre- 
 position, as in the examples already considered under this 
 head, is present to indicate the direction or aspect of the 
 action, which way it looks, so to speak, to find its measure 
 or extent. 
 
 When ini is employed with the accusative case to ex- 
 press the amount of time, where ' for' is commonly used 
 in English, both the preposition and the case are to bo 
 explained in tlic same way as when they are used to denote 
 the measure of space. E.g. Xen. Vectig. i. 4, ob /ibuov Sk 
 xparei toT; in' ivtauzbv ddUouat, ' not only excels in those 
 which nourish for a year;' Ilerod. iii. 59, thSatiutvrjaav in' 
 Irsa nhre, ' they were prosperous for five years ;' Id. i. 32, 
 ob ydft Toi ftiya nkobatoc [idXXov rob in' ^/tipi^v l^ovro^ 6l(iu!i- 
 
300 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 repbz iau, 'for, indeed, he that is very rich is not happier 
 than he that has suhsistence for a day.' 
 
 c. 'Among.' The same meaning belongs to im in those 
 phrases in which it is used with the accusative in the sense 
 of 'among.' E.g. II. x. 212-13, fiiya xiv ol [mouf>dvtov xWoc 
 thj I ndvTuc i^' dvdpfonouc ' he will have great fame among 
 all men ;' II. xxiv. 201-2, Jt fioi, nj dij roi ipfdvtz oi^^k?" ^c t6 
 vdpoz TTtp I ixXe in' dudpdmooc Ulvoui;, 'for which thou wast 
 formerly famed among strangers ;' Plat. Tim. 23, b, Irt Sk 
 TO xdJJiarov ml dptoTOV yivoi; in' dv^pionouz, iv rj jfw/oy rj itap'^ 
 bfttv ohx lart reroi'OC, ' the noblest and best race among men.' 
 In such examples, im with the accusative, although pro- 
 perly enough rendered by ' among,' really means the reach- 
 ing to, and embracing or including, the objects named by 
 the noun in the accusative case. Thus, in the first example 
 cited, xXioz ndvraz in' dv&ptl>nou<:, « fame among all men,' is, 
 properly speaking, according to the Greek mode of repre- 
 senting it, 'fame that reaches to and embraces all men.' 
 The terra 'among' does not express this sense of extent, but 
 vaguely suggests it by the obvious reference it has to a 
 plurality of objects, such as 'men' (dv^pihnouz), and by its 
 thus connecting the word fame with a number that may be 
 very great. The office of the accusative here, as in the 
 preceding cases of ini with this case, is to mark the extent 
 to which the xXioz, 'fame,' referred to reaches, namely, 
 itdvraz dv»pd>nouu 'to all men,' 'so as to embrace all men,' 
 properly, ' as far as~to the measure of all men ;' and that 
 of the preposition ini is to show, precisely as before, that 
 the fame spoken of has a certain relative position or direc- 
 tion with regard to some object, or has its aspect towards 
 or looks upon it. The whole phrase thus means, 'ho will 
 have a fame that, taken in the direction of and considered 
 relatively to all men, reaches to and embraces them.' It 
 may be proper to add, that although the sense here and 
 elsewhere attributed to ini could not be conveyed by 'on' 
 'upon,' in this class of expressions, yet such a meaning of 
 'on," upon,' is by no means foreign to the English Ian- 
 guagc, but is familiar in such instances as 'he sees danger 
 on every side.' 
 
 'Eni. 
 
 301 
 
 d. 'As far as concerns,' 'as regards.' Of the same nature 
 is ini with the accusative case in a great variety of phrases 
 which admit of ready explanation from what has been 
 already said. Thus, in the expression zb in' ifxi, ' for me,' 
 ' for what concerns me,' ' so far as I am concerned,' properly, 
 < as to what has regard to me,' ' as to what has tlie relative 
 direction or aspect of upon as regards mo ;' Plat. Euthyd. 
 279, E, Hk ini ndv eintiv, 'to speak generally;' that is, to 
 speak so that the discourse shall have its direction upon, or 
 aspect towards, every thing, and, hence, shall have reference 
 to every thing, and embrace every thing. And here, again, 
 it is to be observed that the English language has ' upon' 
 used in the same way with ini as here employed ; as in the 
 phrase ' to speak upon a subject.' The phrase &z ini nSv 
 tinetv is not, it is true, capable of being rendered by 'to 
 speak upon every thing ;' but not because ' upon' fails to 
 convey the meaning of ini. In the same way, cbc ini rd 
 noX6, ' for the most part,' ini here showing that the action 
 or state referred to by the speaker has a direction upon, is 
 to be regarded as looking upon or having its aspect to- 
 wards, some object ; and this object being set forth by the 
 accusative t6 noXu, meaning ' as regards, as far as goes, the 
 most part.' The construction may, perhaps, be made more 
 obvious by considering the like form of expression in Xen. 
 Laced, iv. 2, ivdpt^eu . . . o&rwc dv xai toutouc ini nXtiorov 
 diptxveiadat d^Spayaifiaz, 'he accounted that so these would 
 arrive at the highest pitch of bravery,' where the motion 
 contained in djfixvsiadiu is qualified by ini, just as in the 
 case of di/ifirjaav, Xen. Anab. iii. 4, 25, above cited, giving 
 the sense of ' to arrive . . . upon ;' and tb nXiiatov dt/dpaja- 
 &iaz is added in the signification of ' as regards the largest 
 measure of bravery.' The only difi'erence between the 
 construction of ini rb nXeimov, in this example, and ini rb 
 noXu, is, that, in the latter, the connection with the action 
 qualified is less obvious. 
 
 e. ' On,' ' upon,' Again, in the phrases in' dpunepd, * on 
 the left hand,' and ini de^td, * on the right hand,' both ini 
 and the accusative have the same explanation. E.g. Herod, 
 vi. 33, 6 vauTtxbz atparbz rd in' dpiarepa ianXiovrt toD '/i>U;j. 
 
302 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PBEPOSITIONS. 
 
 trtouTO'j atpee ndvra, ri x^P ^^'' ^ef '« aurotat rdiai /lipoijffi Imo- 
 Xeil'ta rjv ye^rot^ra xar' ^netfiov, 'the fleet took all the parts 
 of the Ilcllespoiit that are on the left hand as you sail into 
 it ; for the parts on the right hand had become subject to 
 the Persians themselves on the mainland ;' Id. ii. 93, o" 8' 
 iu auTCiou (twv xiyj^pwv) hXwat ixjiXwovrez iz ^dXaaaav, ipaivovTat 
 Terptfi/iivui za In' Aptazepa ztov xefoXewv o? d' dv dniaio dvoTiXw- 
 ouzez, zii ini ihiia zezpt<pazat, ' any of them that may be caught 
 while Hwimming down to the sea appear to be rubbed on the 
 left side of the head ; but any of them that may be caught 
 while swimming back up the stream are rubbed on the 
 right side of the licad.' Here the preposition ini shows 
 that the object of which the situation is to be marked 
 looks upon, has its direction upon, or its aspect towards, 
 Bomu point; and the accusative denotes this point, or 
 indicates the particular thing with regard to which this 
 direction or aspect is affirmed. Thus, in the former of the 
 examples cited from Herodotus, it is said that the parts 
 of the Hellespont which were taken by the fleet have, to a 
 person sailing into it, the direction or aspect of upon (^;r/) 
 as regards the left hand (rd dptazspd) ; that is, they have a 
 position defined as looking upon or towards the left hand ; 
 and this is expressed in English by the very similar phrase 
 'on the left hand,' in which 'on' is used in the same figura- 
 rativc sense that the Greek ini has. The preposition, as 
 here explained, may be compared with the use of ini with 
 the genitive in the expression in' otxou nXstv. It might seem 
 simpler and more satisfactory to give to ini the sense of 
 relative position, pnstead of relative direction; so that the 
 meaning of in' dpiazepd would be 'upon ... as regards 
 the left hand ;' but, although the diflerencc is slight, ap- 
 parently-, the explanation above given is preferred as upon 
 the whole better according with the flignifieation of the 
 preposition as used with the genitive, and with the meaning 
 of the accusative case. On the other hand, the sense of 
 relative position seems better to agree with the signilica- 
 tion of the dative, as in ini zfj 'Epuifpy dtddatrrj, *on the Red 
 sea.' 
 When, in such descriptions of relative position, an action 
 
 'Eni. 
 
 303 
 
 or motion is introduced and qualified by ini with the 
 accusative, as Herod, ii. 36, "EUr^vsi; fiev {jpdipoum) and zdiv 
 dpiazepwv ini za ue^eu (fipovzez r^v xiipa, AeyOnzioe ok dnb ziov 
 oEuwit ini za dpiazepd, ' the Greeks write carrying the hand 
 from the left to the right, the Egyptians carrying it from 
 the right to the left," the same sense of the preposition ini 
 is involved, and the same explanation is required. That 
 ini stands after fcpovzez to show the direction in which 
 the carrying of tlie hand is made, or its position with re- 
 gard to the right or left, may be more easily admitted, but 
 is not more certainly true, than the same thing is of iit' 
 dpiazepd as the (jualificatiou of zd zoo 'FM^anovzou in the 
 former case. And that this interpretation of ini and of the 
 accusative case is the true one, might bo still further con- 
 firmed by a reference to the use of ini and the accusative 
 in such examples as Xen. Memorab. iii. 5, 13, daupd^w ye ij 
 noHii: onioz nuz' ini zb x^U'"^ ixXivev, 'I wonder how the state 
 did ever incline to the worse,' that is, ' in a direction that 
 looked upon, or had its aspect towards, . . . tlie worse.' 
 Compare also Id. Anab. iv. 3, 29, zo7c Sh nap' lauzip napjjy- 
 j-etJiev . . . ini Sopu fijeiadM zoui; obpaxouz, ' to lead the rear 
 files to the right' 
 
 /. ' Against.' 'Eni with the accusative has also the sense 
 of ' against.' E.g. Herod, i. 71, napaaxeua^o/iivou Sk Kpoiaou 
 azpazeuea&at ini Ilipaai;, 'and when Croesus was making 
 ready to march against the Persians ;' Id. i. 157, nudbpewi; 
 dyvou etvai azpazbv in iwuzbv iovza, ' when he learned that an 
 army coming against him was near at hand ;' Xen. Anab. i. 
 4, 14, i/ov Setzat Kupoz eneadat zohz "EUijvai: ini ftaadia, ' to 
 follow him against the king ;' Demosth. 22, 8, ini zr;v zupav- 
 vixiju oixiav i(iorjdr,ae, 'he gave help against the tyrants' 
 family;' Id. 637, 5, Ixei dpjijv ini Madiav, 'he is incensed 
 against Mcidias.' 
 
 Here, again, ini has the secondary and figurative sense of 
 ' upon,' marking the direction or aspect of the action which 
 it qualifies relatively to an object standing in the accusative 
 case, which itself has the signification of ' as to,' ' as regards.' 
 Thus, azpazsisai^ai ini Hipaaz means, properly, ' to march 
 upon ... as regards the rcraiauB.' The sense of ' against,' 
 
304 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PnEPOSITIONS. 
 
 which iff/ 80 frequently bears, arises from the obvious 
 relations existing between the parties to the action qualified 
 by ini. In the first example cited, aTpareuea&txt ini properly 
 means, as lias just been seen, 'to march upon,' and the 
 accusative Illpaaz shows that the action thus qualified is to 
 be understood as having regard to the Persian^; ' to march 
 upon . . . aa regards the Persians.' But in the relations of 
 hostility in which the parties to the action stand to each 
 other, namely, Croesus and the Persians, the marching of 
 CrccHUS 'upon' the Persians is the same thing as marching 
 'against' the Persians. ^livat i<p' udtop means 'to go for 
 water ;' but Uuai im roue nohfitooz, ' to go against the enemy ;' 
 and the diflcrenoe lies, not in the preposi,tion, which has the 
 same sense of ' upon' in both cases, nor yet in the accusative, 
 which has the same meaning of ' as to,' ' as regards,' in both 
 examples, but in the dificrcnt relation which the party going, 
 in the one case and in the other, holds to the object expressed 
 by the accusative case. 
 
 g, 'For,' 'with a view to,' 'after.' ^Ejzc with the accusa- 
 tive case is used to mark the object had in view in un action 
 or motion, that for which as its end it is performed, expressed 
 in English by 'for,' 'with a view to,' 'after.' E.g. Od. iii. 
 421, Mi' Ay' " l"^^ JtedtovS' ini j3ouv «■«*, o^fia rdj^cara | iX/^rjoiv, 
 'let one go to the plain for an ox;' llerod. v. 12, axsudtravre^ 
 Tijv d3e).iperjv d>c ecj^ov dptara in' udtop Inefinov, ' they would 
 send her for, after, water ;' Xen. Cyrop. i. 2, 6, Uyouatv Su 
 i-l TouTo ipYovzat, ' they say that the boys come for this,' 
 'with this view:' Id. ib. i. 6, 12, ore iyio fdv npoz as J^Xdov iif 
 Af^vptov, 'when' I came to you for money;' Id. ib. iv. 5, 31, 
 nifiniov ini arpdrsupa dz IJepaaz, 'on sending to (among) the 
 Persians for an army;' Id. ib. i. 2, 9, Sravde izifj jiaadehz ini 
 S^pav, 'whenever the king goes forth to hunt;' Id. ib. iii. 
 1, (J, iiSfTt ydp aot ini dimjv xaTuftaiueiv, 'you have leave to come 
 down for a trial ;' Demosth. 677, 17, Xafipiav ini tov ndXepav 
 ro'jTov xaTstiT^aare 'you appointed Chabrias for (the con- 
 duct of) this war.' 
 
 In such examples, as in so many preceding ones, ini is 
 added to the verb to mark the direction or aspect of its 
 action aa being relatively ' upon,' in the same sense in which 
 
 'Kni. 
 
 305 
 
 * upon' is used in the English phrase ' to march upon,' ' to 
 rush upon ;' and the accusative is used to introduce the 
 object lis regards wliich the action has the direction of 
 'upon.' Thus, in 6 ftkv hio ini ^ouv, the action of going 
 contained in irw is represented by ini as Iiaving the relative 
 direction or aspect of ' upon,' and the accusative fiow shows 
 that it has tins ' as regards an ox ;' and, thus far, the meaning 
 of ini and the accusative is essentially the same that in other 
 connections is expressed by ' to,' as in xaradpapdiv ini ttjv 
 ^dXuTtav, 'having run down to (upon) the sea.' But it is 
 plain, from other examples, that this relation of 'upon' 
 expressed by ini, that is, the having a direction upon or au 
 aspect towards an object, is capable of being regarded in a 
 variety of ways according to the nature of the action and to 
 the relations of the objects that are parties to it. Thus, in 
 arpuTeUadm ini Ilipauz, ' to marcli against the Persians,' ij^i, 
 as seen above, obtains the sense of 'against,' due to tjie 
 hostile relations of the parties to the action ; while in xura- 
 dpapwu ini ri^v OdXuTTW it conveys merely the notion of 
 'upon,' for which, under the circumstances, 'to' may be 
 substituted. And, in the examples above given, the mean- 
 ing seemingly borne by ini is that expressed by the English 
 'for,' 'with a view to,' 'after,' this peculiar sense being 
 referable to the circumstances in which the preposition is 
 used rather than to any thing contained in itself. If the 
 context of the phrase 6 phv neSiovu' ini fiutJv irw be examined, 
 it will be seen that Nestor is giving orders for a sacrifice to 
 Athene, and that among them is one that a man go to the 
 plain to bring an ox, which the herdsman {int^ouxoXoz duijp) 
 is to drive up quickly, and for the due preparation of which 
 as a victim to be slain provision is made. So that, under 
 the circumstances of the case as described, it cannot bo 
 doubted that 'the going to the plain to an ox,' or, more 
 exactly, ' the going to the plain with the action of going 
 directed upon an ox,' is the same thing as going 'for' an 
 ox. So, likewise, in Herod, v. 12, although in' uSwp Ins/mou 
 means, literally, no more than that ' they would send her to 
 water,' it is easily gathered from the context that the sense 
 
 20 
 
300 
 
 OF TUE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 intended to be couvcyed is that * they would send her for 
 or after water.' 
 
 It would appear, from what has been said, that the idea 
 of the object had in view, as conveyed by ini with the 
 accuBiitivc, is mainly due to this case itself, being suggested 
 by its marking out an object 'as to' or 'with regard to' 
 which alone an action or motion is performed; and that 
 the office of the preposition im is merely to show that the 
 action or motion has a certain direction relatively to the 
 object that constitutes its aim. This view being adopted, 
 it is easy to see how other prepositions also, as e/c, xard, 
 and fierd, may bo used with the accusative to denote the 
 object had in view. 
 
 A. ' For,' ' as regards.' Very nearly related to the use of 
 im with the accusative just considered is that in which also 
 it is translated by ' for,' but has the notion, not of the object 
 or end had in view, but of the end to which a preceding 
 condition of things is adapted, and may sometimes be repre- 
 sented by 'as regards.' E.g. II. vi. 70, oiJvex' iI(ii(>tiu | ndaav 
 iz' iOw iare ftd^eadue re ipfmueuv re, ' the best for every pur- 
 pose,' the literal sense being, ' best ... as regards every 
 purpose;' QCd. Tyr. 690, seqq., «t(?< Je | napa^povcfioVjUnoftov | 
 ii:i ippovtiia izitfdvdax fx \ dv, it as uoa^il^o/iat, 'know that I 
 shall seem foolish and incapable of discretion if I deceive 
 you.' 
 
 In such cases, im with the accusative may be considered 
 as describing the extent in which the proposition which it 
 qualifies is to be taken ; dfttarot izi naauv iduv i>roperly 
 means, 'best . .\. as regards, as far as goes, every under- 
 taking.' To speak more exactly, however, the accusative 
 itself expresses the sense of ' as to,' ' as regards,' or marks in 
 what regard precisely the persons addressed arc dptarot ; and 
 of izi very little account seems to be taken. It serves, how- 
 ever, as in numerous preceding instances, to mark the rela- 
 tive direction or aspect had by the term which it qualifies; 
 BO that it shall be regarded as having a direction ' upon,' as 
 looking towards or having a regard to Tzdaav idov, 'every 
 undertaking,' that is to say, as requiring to be admitted with 
 A special aspect. 
 
 'Eni. Kard. 
 
 307 
 
 TABLE or TIIK HiaNIFICATIONB AMD USK OF iirl WITU OASES. 
 
 BlgnUlutloiiiiorKr. 
 
 (Ion. : •iir,"wllli rw|«el ta.' 
 
 DatlT6: 'for.' 
 
 Acciiaat.: 'aa to,"aa ragarda.' 
 
 1. <0d,' upoD.' 
 
 
 
 
 a. Localljr: <aii,' 
 
 1. a. 'On," upon.' 
 
 1. o. 'On,"npon.' 
 
 1. a. ■On,"npon;' 
 
 'at,' 'on,' •tq,'(<irl rV 
 
 'upon.' 
 
 
 
 t. FlguratlTrly : 
 
 b. 'UiKm/ 'nn,' '«t,' 
 
 h. 'On,' 'nt,' 
 
 tpin$liat.) 
 
 'upoD,' '.V 
 
 ■ nor,' ■ In," In tba 
 
 'near,' 'In;* 
 
 
 •noar.' 
 
 Ibno ur.' 
 
 power of; 
 'on condition 
 
 of;' 
 'for,' 'upon,' 
 
 (gronnd, re»- 
 
 ■on;) 
 'for.' (object 
 
 bad In Tlew;) 
 'for,' 'ao aa to 
 
 cauae,' (re- 
 
 •ult.) 
 
 
 c. Diroctlon 'np- 
 
 c. 'Towardi,* 'fcrj* 
 
 e. 'To;' 
 
 OD,' upcct to- 
 
 ;«».','••«•".• <■!>«».• 
 
 
 ■to the extent nf," for:' 
 
 wtnU. 
 
 I.y; ({♦• iai.r<3i;;) 
 
 
 'on,' 'upon,' 'by,' (»1 
 
 
 ' of,' ' conoerning,' 
 
 •ubflut;' 
 ■■KiiinaVat;* 
 
 
 ' amoDg ;* 
 
 *a8 reRarda/ 'u Ikr a« 
 
 
 'for/ *to meet,' 'm- 
 
 
 coiicerus/ 
 
 
 cordlng to[' 
 
 
 'on/ 'upon,' (iff' dpto- 
 
 
 'Willi rcupoct to," In 
 
 
 rtpd ;) 
 
 
 the auw of,' 'with 
 
 
 'against;* 
 
 
 • vli.w In;' 
 
 
 'fur/ *wlth ■ view to/ 
 
 
 'on the Krvnnd of.' 
 
 
 'after;' 
 
 
 Till- Out niaMun,* *lii 
 »l««r of." 
 
 
 ' for/ • M rogttrdH.' 
 
 2. 'Over.' 
 
 
 2. 'Over.' 
 
 
 3. 'luiulJltlanto.' 
 
 3. 'Uy,' (.llntrlluitlvply:) 
 
 3. 'In addition to,' 
 
 
 
 'iifli'r,' • frnMi.' 'for. 
 
 ' with ;' 
 
 
 
 {ivotiAUviat M ri- 
 
 'after.' 
 
 
 
 ►»(•) 
 
 
 
 h'urd. 
 Significations of xard. 
 1. 'Down.' Kard has for its primary signification the 
 idea of ' down' from above, being directly opposed to dvd, 
 ' up.' Thus, Ilom. II. i. 45, /3^ dk xar' OM/moio xapijvtov, ' he 
 came down from the tops of Olympus ;' xard rbv norafidv 
 nkeiv, ' to sail down the river.' So likewise in a multitude 
 of compounds ; as, xarajiaipetv, ' to come down,' ' to descend,' 
 xaTa^oarpu^oi:, ' having locks of hair that hang down.' So 
 obviously prevalent is this sense of xard, and so universally 
 admitted as the primary notion of this preposition, that it 
 docs not require to be established by multiplied examples. 
 The mutual opposition of sense between dvd and xard is 
 strikingly exhibited in the related adverbial forms dvm and 
 xduo, * above' and ' below,' ' up' and ' down,' so frequently 
 conjoined in the phrase uuu> xui xdrai, ' upside down.' 
 
308 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 2. This proper and merely local sense of xard is variously 
 modified in the course of its use, both in compounds and iu 
 its employment with the cases. Thus : 
 
 a. 'Down.' It retains the sense of 'down,' to bo taken 
 rather in a figurative way ; as in xaraxftdipttv, ' to write down,' 
 'to enroll,' xuTadofm^uv, 'to put down (a speaker) by noise,' 
 xaraaaTuv, ' to trample on,' * to treat with contempt,' xara- 
 xauetv, ' to cause to cease,' ' to assuage,' xaranMv, ' to sail down 
 from the high seas into harbor,' xaraKoXe/mv, ' to put down 
 by war,' 'to subdue,' xaianovuv, 'to weary out by toil,' 
 xaraafieiiudt/at, ' to quench,' xarauppoviiv, ' to despise.' 
 
 6. ' Under.' Immediately derived from the sense of 
 'down* is that of 'under;' as in the compound xardysiix:, 
 'underground,' and in such expressions as xara j^uiiuat, 'to 
 go under or beneath the earth,' properly, ' to go down ... as 
 regards the earth.' Compare xaraxpuiiTUv, ' to conceal under,' 
 ' to hide,' xaraduuv, ' to sink,' ' to go down or under.' It is 
 plain from such examples that ' under,' as expressed by xard, 
 is merely a relative acceptation of ' down.' 
 
 c. 'Back,' 'again.' In some compounds xard has the 
 Bcnso of ' back,' ' again ;' as xmdfetv, ' to bring back from 
 exile,' xuTtivat, 'to come back from exile,' xazwUi^eaiJiu, 'to 
 receive back,' as from banishment; xark()itad<u, 'to come 
 back,' 'to come home,' as from exile, xaraxo/jt'eiv, 'to bring 
 into a place of refuge,' properly, ' to bring back,' xaTajnil^etv, 
 'to restore to order,' (Ilerod. v. 106, cited by Passow.) 
 
 In such examples, the notion expressed by xard is that 
 of reversing an action, and so of restoring a thing to its 
 original state, '^hus, in xardjecu the meaning is, ' to bring 
 a person back to his former place of abode,' ' to restore him 
 to his home' from which exile had removed him ; and iu 
 xarapril^etv the reference is properly to a dislocated Joint, and 
 the meaning is, ' to bring back a limb to its original state,' 
 and hence, figuratively, 'to restore to order.' And this 
 sense of reversing an action, or of restoring a thing to its 
 original or ordinary state, would seem to be most naturally 
 derived from the notion of contrast which the mind so 
 readily supplies between Avd and xard, the one suggesting 
 its opposite, even where it is not named, and the notion of 
 
 Kurd. 
 
 309 
 
 contrast or opposition coming to occupy the place of the 
 term which suggested it. Certainly there remains in xurdr- 
 «'^ nothing of the sense of ' down,' but only, so far as xard 
 iH concerned, the idea of reversing an action, or placii^r it 
 m opposition or contrast with its actual state. That i^ to 
 say, *arrf, 'down,' having once suggested the idea of contrast 
 by Its almost necessary reference to its opposite, d^d, • up,' 
 ceases to convey the meaning of 'down,' and retains only 
 that of contrast, and hence of opposition or contrariety. 
 See what has been already said in treating of the preposi- 
 tion dpd in the same signification. 
 
 </. ' Quite,' ' utterly.' In a great number of compounds 
 *«ra has the meaning of ' quite,' « utterly,' as has the Greek 
 ix, the Latin iw, and the English 'up;' as, xazadiXr,c^, 'to 
 soothe completely,' *«r«*«;«v, 'to burn up,' 'to consume by 
 burning,' xardMo^, 'full of stones,' 'all stony,' xaravl^ul 
 to cover up with snow,' *«r«fa/w,v, 'to card to pieces,' 'to 
 destroy,' xuTart^Tpow, ' to stone to death,' (Xen. Anab. i. 2 3 
 cited by Tassow,) xuranpkw, ' to saw up,' (Ilerod. vii Ss' 
 cited by Tassow,) xarid^cv, 'to eat up," to devour quite' 
 xara!),,i^uv, 'to wet thoroughly/ xuTarvii^cu, 'to break ili 
 pieces.' Probably here belong xazai^ifiuu, 'to distribute' 
 namely, 'to assign {uif^uv) all the parts of a whole,' and 
 xazaX^tnEiv, 'to leave behind,' the sense being, 'to leave 
 utterly,' or a merely intensive meaning of Xtinetv. 
 
 This signification of xard is no more than an intensive 
 use of the Idea of ' down,' just as we use 'out,' multiplying 
 Its force by repeating it, 'out and out;' or, again, as we 
 employ the same particle in the derivative form 'utterly' 
 The preposition xuzd, having obtained this intensive sense 
 was employed to express it in many cases wliere there could 
 be no reference to the primary notion of 'down.' Besides 
 the examples above given, this may be seen in xardJioyoz 'a 
 hst, or 'enumeration,' where it would bo futile to attempt 
 to trace in xard any thing of its proper notion of 'down ' 
 Its whole force being to mark the completeness of the 
 counting. 
 
 e. 'Against,' 'at.' In a number of compounds xard has 
 Beemmgly the sense of 'against,' expressed, however, by 
 
810 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 other terms also in English, as *at.' Thus, xarafeXuv, 'to 
 laugh at,'xara&x<f^e<v, 'to condemn,' 'to pronounce judgment 
 against,' xaTuytYutoaxav, ' to decide against,' ' to have an ad- 
 verse opinion,' 'to lay to one's charge,' tarmrtaadnt, 'to 
 accuse,' ' to hlamc,' ' to bring a charge against,' xmaxpivitv, 
 'to decide against,' 'to give judgment against.' So like- 
 wise, in a variety of phrases, with a case, as xarA. rtvoz elnetv, ' 
 ' to speak against a person.* 
 
 Although the sense of 'against' which xard here conveys 
 cannot be said to be immediately derived from itH proper 
 sense of ' down,' it being, in fact, partly at least, due to the 
 known relations of the parties to be qualified by xard ; such, 
 for example, as would exist between a judge and the accused 
 person, the accuser and the accused ; yet it may be safely 
 affirmed that there is in the notion of 'down' contained in 
 xard a fitness at least to qualify the action when it relates 
 to adverse parties. The English language employs the 
 word ' down' itself in a somewhat similar waj', when it says 
 figuratively 'to look down upon,' in the sense of 'to treat 
 with contempt;' and the Greek language uses xaranTuuv, 
 ' to spit upon,' ' to spit at,' properly, ' to spit doAvn upon,' 
 to express disgust. And it may be that the sense of ' against,' 
 BO far as it belongs to xard apart from the relations of the 
 parties concerned in the action which it qualifies, springs 
 from the figurative application of the sense of ' down.' If 
 it be not admitted that, to this extent, xazd is fitted to con- 
 vey the idea of 'against,' it will be difiicult to see why this 
 one of all the prepositions is chosen to express this sense. 
 In otlier cases in which the proper schbc of the preposition 
 seems to be shut out of view through the predominance of 
 the case, or from other causes, there is still left the means 
 of seeing the appropriateness of the use of the projiosition, 
 if for nothing else, j'ct to indicate the original direction 
 or relative position of the action with regard to its object. 
 And so of xard in the sense of 'against,' if we admit that 
 the relative direction of 'down upon' is, in certain circum- 
 stances, and with regard to parties having certain relations, 
 a[)propriatc to the expression, not only of contempt, but 
 also of ' against' or what is adverse. Otherwise xard must 
 
 Kard. 
 
 311 
 
 ' 
 
 be regarded as having here both lost its proper sense of 
 down, and as being employed without liaving any appro- 
 priate oflice to perform, so far as we can see. 
 
 /. 'For,' 'after.' In another class of examples, where 
 xard With the accusative is rendered in English by 'for' 
 'after,' and denotes the object had in view in an action it 
 IS clear that the proper meaning of the preposition is almost 
 entirely lost sight of, and its only traceable force is to mark 
 the action as having a certain direction relatively to its 
 object. Thus, in Od. iii. 106, ;rK<5/^em *ard Xrjtda, 'roving 
 for or after, booty,' it would hardly be possible to assign to 
 xard the distinct idea of -down upon.' It is enough for 
 the sense that it shows the action to have an appropriate 
 relative direction with regard to its object. That the rela- 
 tive direction denoted by xard is an appropriate one, accord- 
 "ig to Greek ways of thinking, is only to be proved by the 
 actual usage of the language; for nothing in the English 
 anguage would suggest it. Of course it cannot be asserted 
 that the notion of 'for,' 'after,' or of the object had in 
 view, 18 expressed by ;f«rrf, any further than as it denotes 
 the relative direction here spoken of, and thus in some sort 
 connects the action with its object. As will be seen below 
 the sense of 'for,' 'after,' or of the object had in view, is 
 more properly referred to the accusative case. This view is 
 confirmed by the fact that the same sense of « for ' ' after ' is 
 expressed by other prepositions and the accusative case! as 
 by im, and /ierd : e.g. i,p' Mtof, Uvcu, and /««?' ZSwn Uvm, « to go 
 for, or after, water.' By this fact it is shown, also, that not 
 one relative direction alone of the action is appropriate to 
 the expression of the object or end had in view, but that as 
 the relative direction of xaxd, -down,' is suitable to it, so is 
 that of l-A, ' upon,' as well as tlie relative position of uerd 
 'in the midst.' ' ' 
 
 The same may be said of xmd in other constructions ; as 
 where it is said to mark distribution, as xaSf tva, ' one at a 
 time,' xar' iwavrov, 'every year,' -year by year,' *ar«i y5;«, 
 'by tribes;' where it is said, with the same incorrectness, to 
 mean 'at,' 'in,' 'throughout,' as, xar' olxov, -at home,' x«/?' 
 oyt?.uv, 'in a crowd,' xara avparhv, 'throughout an army;' 
 
312 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 where it is represented, with like error, as signifying ' ac- 
 cording to,' 'as to," 'as regards,' as, xard &ufi6v, 'according* 
 to one's mind,' xara Suuafuv, 'according to one's power or 
 ability,' xara touto, ' as regards this,' xutu ndvra, ' in every 
 regard,' ' as to every thing ;' and, again, where it is trans- 
 lated by ' by,' as, xara j^v xac ddXarrav, ' by land and by sea.' 
 In all these, and in some other instances as well, the only 
 office o{ xard is to mark the relative direction of some action 
 or motion with regard to the object named by the accusa- 
 tive; and the various notions, improperly referred to the 
 preposition, such as distribution, ' as regards,' * according 
 to,' belong to the accusative, either alone, or aided by the 
 circumstances in which it stands. • 
 
 Summary of the significations of xard. 
 
 Kurd. 'Down.' 
 
 a. Locally ; ' down,' either from or upon. 
 
 b. Figuratively ; ' down,' ' at,' ' against.' 
 
 c. Relatively; 'under,' 'down under,' 'beneath.' 
 
 d. llclatively, and by contrast and opposition ; ' back,' 
 
 ' again.' 
 
 e. Intensively; 'quite,' 'utterly.' 
 
 /. Relative direction, ' down ;' the sense of 'down' 
 being hardly discernible, and not rendered in 
 English, the case predominating. 
 
 SIGNIFICATIONS AND USE OF Xard WITH CASES. 
 
 I. With the genitive. 
 
 1. ' Down from,' ' down upon,' ' down in,' ' down under.' 
 Kazd with the genitive case is very commonly used in its 
 proper and local sense of ' down :' e.g. Horn. II. i. 44, ft^ 8k 
 xuT OitX'j/aroio xafi^vwv jrwi/^evof x^p, 'he came down from the 
 heights of Olympus ;' Herod, viii. 53, ifi/iinTBov k<uuTou; xara 
 Tou Tetj[ioz xduo, ' they threw themselves down from the wall ;' 
 Id. vi. 18, of Si flipaat . . . ri^v MiXijTov noXtopxiovrsz • • • alpiouai 
 xar Sxprfi, 'the Persians captured Miletus utterlj',' properly, 
 ' down from the top' (to the bottom) ; Xen. Anab. iv. 2, 17, 
 iXXojuvot xaza r^c nizpaz, 'leaping down from the rock ;' Id. 
 
 Kazd, 
 
 313 
 
 Anab. iv. 5, 18, of St noU/uoe Seiaavzez, ijxav iauzob; xaza r^f 
 ^fwvoc £<c rijv ud:ir^u, ' cast tliemselve8.dowu upon (or through) 
 the snow into the valley;' Id. Anab. vi. 4, 31, ol noXepuoe 
 fffffsFf ^euj-ouoi xaza zou npavouz, ' the enemy's cavalry fled 
 , down the declivity;' Id. Anab. vii. i. 30, suxo/mc pupia(: i/jii 
 j-e xaza r^j pjc dpyuiaz ytveiT&at, 'I wish, for my part, that I 
 had been ten thousand fathoms beneath (down under) the 
 earth ;' II. xxiii. 100, jAo^ij^ xaza j[9oi/bz <px^'to, ' the spirit 
 '^<,\ 1?.' departed down under the earth;' II. iii. 217, xaza ^^ov^i 
 oppaza JTJy'cttf, 'fixing his eyes down upon the ground;' II. 
 
 m XX. 321, xaz' 6<pdaX/uov ^i^v d^Xuv, ' shed darkness down upon 
 
 'J. his eyes;' Ariatoph. Vesp. 1216, xaza x^U'^Z uSutp, 'pour 
 
 ' water down upon the hands;' II. v. 659, zbv Sk xaz dip&aX- 
 
 pwv iptptwTj j/uf ixdkuipEv, 'him dark night overspread, 
 down upon his eyes.' 
 
 The sense of 'from' which we add to ' down' in translating 
 xazd with the genitive, in many instance's, is not contained 
 in xazd itself, but is wholly relative, or arises from the 
 * obvious relative position of the subject of the action with 
 regard to the object to which the genitive shows that it is to 
 be referred. Kazd merely defines the action or motion which 
 it qualifies as having the direction of 'down,' and the geni- 
 tive case shows that it has this direction • with respect to' a 
 » specific object ; whether it is ' down from' above, or down 
 to something below, that is, ' down upon,' is to be gathered 
 from the known position in which the subject of the action 
 and its object stand relatively to each other. The same is 
 to be said of the accessary ideas of ' upon,' ' in,' ' under,' 
 which aio necessarily connected with 'down' in rendering 
 other examples of the use of xazd with the genitive. And 
 that this is so, is at once shown by the very fact of xard with 
 the genitive at one time signifying 'down from,' and at 
 another 'down upon,' 'down under;' it being manifest, on 
 the one hand, that the same preposition cannot of itself 
 convey ideas so opposite, and easy to see, on the other, 
 that, attributing to xazd the simple expression of direction 
 •down,' the additional sense of 'from,' 'upon,' 'in,* ' under,' 
 will bo suggested by the relative position in which the sub- 
 ject of the action and the object to which it is referred 
 
314 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 stand to eacli other. Thus, iu Xen. Anab. iv. 2, 17, iXko' 
 jxevot xara r^c zir/iuc, xard shows that the Icaiiing expressed 
 by Mofteuut was ' down' iu its direction, and the genitive 
 T^C iieTfiu;: that it was a leaping down ' with respect to the 
 rook;' hut neither xard nor the genitive, in itself considered, 
 gives any answer to the question whether it was ' down 
 from' or *down upon' the rock. But, upon consulting the 
 narnitive, it is found that the persons described as leaping 
 down belonged to a party of soldiers that had been cut oft" 
 from a hill which they had been sent to occupy, and that it 
 was in attempting to escape from the eminence to the body 
 of the army below that they performed the act of Icapidg; 
 and the circumstances at once show that the leaping was 
 'down from the rock,' and not ' down upon the rock.' And 
 so of the other cases. 
 
 2. In a multitude of examples in which xazd is employed 
 witli the genitive, it does not retain with any distinctness, 
 according to the English way of thinking, at least, the 
 primary sense of 'down,' however this may have been 
 originally invulvcd, but only marks the relative direction 
 or position of the action, motion, or state expressed by the 
 verb with re8j)ect to the object introduced by the genitive. 
 All that we can see of the force of xard thus introduced is 
 often no more than this, that the direction of 'down,' which 
 it properly denotes, is appropriate to the relation in which 
 the action or motion qualiticd by it and its object staiid to 
 each other. See what has been said of xard above, 2. /. 
 
 a. ' At.' hard with the genitive is sometimes translated 
 by ' at,' as in such examples as tu^bCsiu xara axonoo, ' to shoot 
 at a mark.' Here it can hardly bo said that xard retains dis- 
 tinctly the sense of 'down,' although it may have originally 
 had it; for the direction of the arrow is not always nor 
 necessarily 'down' with reference to the object aimed at. 
 But the preposition, in its proper sense, having come to be 
 used in such connection, namely, to indicate tlic direction 
 of the action relatively to the object to which it is referred, 
 it may have been afterwards retained in cases where, strictly 
 speaking, the direction of the action was not ' down.' It 
 should be observed, further, that the office of xar<£ being, iu 
 
 Kazd. 
 
 815 
 
 such case, according to the assumption, merely to mark that 
 the action has a certain direction relatively to its object, and 
 not strictly to denote a downward motion, it cannot bo 
 rendered in tlie English translation. The term 'at,' em- 
 ployed in translating xazd with the genitive, docs not answer 
 to any thing contained in xard, but to the notion of 'with 
 respect to' expressed by the genitive. This is clear, not only 
 from the consideration of the office of the genitive itself, 
 ro^euuv xara axonoii meaning, properly, 'to shoot with a bow, 
 or to be an archer . , . with respect to a mark,' that is, ' to 
 shoot ... at a mark,' but also from the fact that the geni- 
 tive alone is used with ro^eoeiv in the sense of ' at :' e.g. II. 
 xxiii. 853, seqq. . . . ix 3e rpijpiova nikuav \ kenr^ /nj/ttv&tfi 
 dr^aev nodo:;, f^j &p^ dudiyei \ To^eusiv, ' at which he bade them 
 shoot.' 
 
 b. 'Of,' 'concerning.' Kurd with the genitive is also 
 rendered by 'of,' 'concerning:' e.g. Demosth. 68, 2, 8 xal 
 /lij-carov laze xu&' bjuov iyxm/ttov, 'which, in fact, is the 
 greatest commendation of you;' Id. 1412, 5, xa&' kvbz jibvov 
 TCftdyiMZoi; ou r« xpdztazu ifvwxev, ' concerning one thing alone 
 has he decided not the most wisely ;' Id. G15, 27, xazd nuvzdz 
 to~j xi'f>t">'J axiil-aade, ' consider of the whole of time,' ' of all 
 time.' Xen. Cyr. i. 3, 1. 
 
 In such examples, the genitive, having the sense of 'with 
 respect to,' expresses the relation which we render by ' of,' 
 'concerning,' and the meaning of xazd is not retained in 
 the translation, the English language having nothing that 
 answers to it when so employed. The preposition retains 
 here only so much of its proper sense as serves to indicate 
 that the action which it qualifies has a certain relative 
 direction with respect to the noun introduced by the 
 genitive. 
 
 Here belong such phrases as xaS' 5kou, 'on the whole,' 
 properly, ' with respect to, concerning, the whole,' and xazd 
 nayz6(:, 'altogether,' that is, 'with respect to every thing,' 
 or 'in respect of every thing.' 
 
 c. 'Upon,' 'by.' The same interpretation may be given 
 of such phrases as eL^ea&at xazd zevoz, 'to vow by, upon, a 
 thing,' diibaae xazd ztvoz, 'to swear by, upon, a thing;' the 
 
816 
 
 OP THE 6BVERAI. PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Bcusc being * to make a vow . . . with respect to a thing,' 
 •having reference to a thing,' 'to swear or take au oath ... 
 with respect to, having reference to, a thing,' the idea of 
 'witli respect to,' 'having a reference to,' being expressed 
 by tiie genitive, and the preposition merely indicating the 
 relative direction of the action towards the object marked 
 by the genitive case. Otherwise, xard must be considered 
 as retaining more of its proper sense, and as indicating that 
 the person that makes a vow or swears stands over the 
 object by which he swears. (See Passow's Lexicon, s. v.) 
 Either way, the sense of ' by,' ' upon,' belongs to the genitive 
 case and not to xard. 
 
 d. 'Against.' Again, in the many examples in which 
 xard with the genitive has seemingly the sense of 'against,' 
 the same interpretation applies. Thus, in the phrase xard 
 zivQZ ecjsetv, ' to speak against a person :' e.g. Plat. Apol. 37, 
 11, TtoV.uu oiio xar iimuum Iftiiv woroj, ' I am far from intending 
 to speak against myself.' The genitive marking the object 
 with reference to or with respect to wViich the act of speak- 
 ing is aflirmcd, xuzd shows that the action has a certain 
 direction relatively to this object. The notion of ' against' 
 is not contained in xard, but is suggested by the relation in 
 which the subject of the verb and the object of its action 
 stiind to each other. That this is so, is shown by the fact 
 that xazd rtuu; is employed equally with words that signify 
 praise and with those that express blame. E.g. Demosth. 
 646, 4, Tr^v o/toiav inoe^aaro marrjn airiav xar' abrou, 'he 
 accounted ;thc like charge against him to be true,' com- 
 pared with Id. 68, 2, above cited, o xai /liparov iare xa&' biiiav 
 ifxmiuuv, 'which, in fact, is the highest commendation of 
 you.' (See lieiske Ind. Grsec. Demosth. s. v. xard.) 
 
 II. With the accusative. 
 
 1. 'Down.' In some examples of its employment with 
 the accusative case xard retains its proper signification of 
 * down :' e.g. Ilcrod. ii. 96, raura za nhiia dvu /tev zbv -ozafihv 
 oil Swavzai zXeuv, . . . xaza poov 3k xo/ul^ezat iu3e, ' these vessels 
 cannot sail up the river, but go down stream as follows.' 
 Uere the proper signification of xazd is 'down,' and the 
 
 Aar<£. 
 
 317 
 
 accusative p6ov means 'as regards the stream;' 'they go 
 down ... as regards the stream.' It is true that xazfi [touv 
 might be interpreted 'with the current,' that is, 'according 
 to the current," (see Schweig. Lex. Herod, s. v. xazd\) but 
 nothing forbi<lrt the attributing to xazd its original sense, tho 
 more as it stands in immediate opposition to dm zhv nozaftov, 
 'up the stream.' II. xvii. 86, ifi^et ff cUfta xaz' ooza/iii^^u 
 wruXi^v, ' the blood flowed down from the inflicted wound.' 
 In this example, xuzd added to diia l/i^u shows that tho 
 flowing is 'down,' and the accusative ouzafUvijv wzeiX^v indi- 
 cates in what regard tliis is aflirmcd, • as regards tho inflicted 
 wound.' So that, strictly taken, tho meaning would be, 
 ' the blood flowed down ... as regards the inflicted wound ;' 
 and the sense of ' from,' which is properly added in the 
 translation 'the blood flowed down from the inflicted 
 wound,' is not contained in xazd, but is suggested by the 
 circumstances of the case. 
 
 2. a. ' Tlironghout,' ' all through.' Kazd with the accusa- 
 tive is employed to measure the extent of an action, where 
 in English arc used the terms ' throughout,' • all through :' 
 e.g. II. iv. 199, /3;y 8' iivat xazi Xahv \1^aiaiu, 'he went to go 
 throughout the host of the Achaji ;' II. i. 229, ^ zoXh Xmibv 
 iaze xazii azfiuzov iit/thv \iy^utwv \ 8iiif)' d;:oai(ieia3iu, ' surely it 
 is far better to take away from us, throughout the wide host 
 of the Achioi, what has been bestowed upon us;' Ilerod. i. 
 30, zou I6)Mva detidnovzezTcsptrjovxazai roue 9r^aaij(iou;, 'attend- 
 ants conducted Solon all through the treasuries.' 
 
 In such examples xazd does not retain distinctly its proper 
 sense of ' down,' although it may be safely assumed as true 
 tliat, even here, this meaning did originally belong to it, but 
 was afterwards lost from the view, chiefly through the pre- 
 dominant force of the accusative case. In the first example 
 cited, the accusative is employed to measure the extent of 
 tho action ji^.S' iivai, and shows that the going was 'to tho 
 extent of, reached as far as, the Greek host;' and xazd was 
 originally added, in the case of such measure, to mark tho 
 relative direction of the action, so as to indicate that the 
 measure of its extent was to be taken from above down- 
 wards. But as this was a wholly subordinate matter, the 
 
318 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 leading idea being, not so much the mode of determining 
 the measure, whether by taking it from above or from below, 
 as the njcaBurc of extent itself, the proper meaning of xard 
 almoat vanished, and little more was expressed, when xard 
 was added, than the mere measure of extent furnished by 
 tlio accusative itself. 
 
 That xard was thus used with the accusative of measure 
 merely to show the direction in which the extent of an 
 action is measured, namely, from above downwards, will be 
 seen afterwards in explaining other constructions, such as 
 xad' fva, ' one at a time,' xu&' ^/jtipav, ' by the day,' ' a day 
 at a time.' And that xard is so employed in such examples 
 as xara ).u6v, ' throughout the people,' may be proved Ijy the 
 fact that dvd, ' up,' is used with the accusative in precisely 
 the same sense. Thus, II. iv. 209, /9«v d' iiuat xatT 5/uXw dva 
 oTfiazbv dtp'jv Wyiuimv, ' they proceeded to go in, among, the 
 crowd, all through the wide army of the Acluui.' Here, if 
 dvd be allowed to have been originally employed in its 
 peculiar sense, it shows that the measure of extent expressed 
 by oTfiarov is to be regarded as taken from below upwards, 
 just as, in the case of xard, it is to be regarded as taken 
 from above downwards ; and it can hardly be explained how 
 the two expressions xara mparov and dvd (TTftaT6v came to be 
 identical in sense, 'throughout the army,' but by observing 
 that the prepositions merely indicated the direction which 
 the action was conceived as having, that is, the manner of 
 taking its measure, from above downwards, and from below 
 upwards; and that while the actual measure of extent, 
 the accusative, remained the same in both cases, it was 
 a matter of no moment whether it was reached in this way 
 or that. 
 
 It may be observed, although not deemed necessary, nor 
 even important, for the confirmation of the above explana- 
 tion, tliat, occasionally, xard with the accusative in the sense 
 of 'throughout,' or of the entire measure of an action, does 
 possibly retain the idea of ' down' with more distinctness 
 than can be affirmed of it in the preceding examples. Thus, 
 II. xvii. 84, s-rf-.Tijtsw J' dp' iiieiTu xazd ari^az, 'he looked 
 throughout the ranks,' where we could also say, 'he looked 
 
 hard. 
 
 319 
 
 down tlie ranks,' and where it maybe more readily admitted 
 that xard retains its proper sense. 
 
 h. 'At,' 'on,' 'by,' 'in.' Kazd occurs with the accusative 
 ease of a variety of words in such phrases as xar' olxou, 'at 
 home,' xud^" o/tdou, ' in a crowd,' xara rrjv dS6v, 'on or by the 
 road,' xara p^v xai xatd ddXazrav, ' by land and by sea,' and 
 in such conjunction admits of being rendered in English by 
 'at,' 'on,' 'by,' 'in,' 'among' even, and perhaps by other 
 terms, according to the nature of the noun and of the action 
 defined by xard and the accusative. E.g. Xen. Anab. iv. 
 6, 11, dvopez 8' o'joapjj fuXdnovcez^iidi: favepot etai, dU' ^ xara 
 TuuTrjV TT/V oSi'w, ' cxccpt ou thls road ;' II. iv. 209, fidv 8' Uvat 
 xa&' opduv dvd azpuvov cupbv 'Aj^aetov, ' they proceeded to go 
 in, among, the crowd;' Xen. IIcll. iv. 6, 1, dnextipouv i^ rb 
 dazu xazd zr;v ini Ktyy^piuz 686v, ' they retreated by, along, 
 over, the road to Kenchrco! ;' Id. Hell. v. 4, 47, zi> [mkp r^c 
 xazd zhv Kcdatpoiva buou ixpov, 'the summit above the road 
 at, near, Kitlia;rou.' 
 
 In such examples, the proper sense of ' down,' however 
 truly it may be involved, is not distinctly retained by xazd ; 
 and yet the presence of this preposition may bo accounted 
 for and its force determined. In fact, this use of xazd is 
 very nearly the same as in the preceding case, the only 
 difierencc being tliat there the accusative measures the 
 extent of the action qualified by xazd, while here it marks, 
 in a less palpable sense of measure, the object to which the 
 preceding statement is to be confined, that 'as to,' 'with 
 regard to' which it is afiirmed. It was seen above, that in 
 the phrase Uv<u xaru azpazt'tv, 'to go throughout the army,' 
 the accusative gives the measure of the action, being equiva- 
 lent to ' as far as the army reaches,' ' to the extent of the 
 army,' while the proper oflice of xazd was to mark the 
 direction of the action, and so to note the way in which the 
 extent or measure of the action is determined, namely, from 
 above downwards, or from below upwards ; and, accordingly, 
 that the peculiar signification of xazd, although unquestion- 
 ably originally present, came to be almost entirely over- 
 looked. 
 
 But if this be so of xard in connection with actual 
 
320 
 
 or THE SEVERAL PREFOSITIONS. 
 
 measures of the extent of actions, it must equally be true 
 of the cases in which xard with the accusative is used, so ■ , 
 very nearly in the same way, to mark the limit of extent in i 
 which a proposition ia to he taken. In this latter case, 
 likewise, xard, originally used to mark the direction and 
 relative position of an action, motion, or object, came to bo 
 of hardly any other force than merely to show that the action , 
 or Bfale (i\ialifii'd by it was to be considered, with relercnco 
 • to some object that dctcrininea the extent of its meaning, an 
 object • as to," ' as regards' which it is affirmed. Just as 
 much here as in the former case is it true, that of the quali- 
 iication added to the action or state of the verb by means 
 of xard and the accusative the most iniportant part is that 
 expressed by the accusative, and that the direction in which 
 the reference is made to this by xard is wholly subordinate, '. 
 it being a matter of indifference which way the pointing to 
 the object is made, whether from above downwards, or from _ 
 below upwards. Only some mode of reference must be used, ^ 
 and that a sign of direction ; and that one was chosen which .. 
 was already familiar as an index of direction in determining 
 the measure of the extent of an action. 
 
 According to this view, as in the phrase iivai xara arparbv, ' 
 «togo throughout the army,' the accusative aTfuTSv means,*- 
 •as far as the army reaches,' 'to the extent of the army,' 
 and so measures the extent of iiucu, 'the going,' or marks 
 it as being ' throughout the army,' xard, which originally 
 served only to indicate the direction in which the action is 
 to be measured, having ceased to have any appreciable • 
 influence on the meaning; so in the phrase xar' ohou /iiveiv, 
 •to stay at home,' the accusative ocxov added to f^ipsiv shows 
 that the act of 'staying' is to be taken, not absolutely and 
 in every regard, but up to the limit marked by the accusa- 
 tive ; that is, it denotes the object as to which, or with regard 
 to which, the staying is affirmed, and thus makes known 
 that the staying is to be understood only ' as regards home,' 
 •as far as home is concerned.' And xard qualiaes /tiveiv, 
 properly npeaking, by showing its direction or relative 
 position ; so that, when an accusative is added and measures 
 the extent in which the idea of 'staying' is to be understood 
 
 ■, 
 
 V 7 
 
 -V 
 
 1»» 
 
 .-^ "I 
 
 'I 
 
 t« 
 
 4' 
 
 %' ?• 
 
 Kurd. 
 
 321 
 
 as being affirmed, the sense conveyed by xard will be that 
 the direction in which the measure of limitation is to h& 
 made is that of xard or 'down.' And as the accusative of 
 measure or extent is no more than a mark to show how far 
 an action or motion goes, or a statement is to be admitted, 
 it must always be conceived as lying in the line of the action 
 or motion, or in the direction in which a statement looks 
 for its limitation. Ilunce, again, when xard marks the 
 direction of an action, or tiie aspect which a statement is to 
 be regarded as having, it does virtually point to the object 
 introduced by the accusative of measure ; and it may, there- 
 fore, be said that xard is the sign that gives the reference 
 of the action or statement to the object that measures or 
 limits it. In the case under consideration, the notion of 
 'down' proper to xard is not perceptibly present, this word 
 having retained no more than the power of pointing the 
 statement contained in /livetv to the object by which its 
 meauinjr is limited. And, obviously, this is all that is 
 required of xard, it being of no moment to mark the precise 
 direction of the pointing or reference, whether it is made 
 upwards or downwards. Accordingly, xard and such accusa- 
 tives as have been mentioned together with olxov will be 
 rendered in English, which has no term by which to repre- 
 sent xard as here employed, in the sense of the accusative 
 alone, that is, of ' as to,' ' as regards,' and by a variety of 
 expressions answering to the nature of the action qualified 
 and of the noun in the accusative case. Thus, /dveiv xar 
 olxov is rendered by ' to stay at home,' the mcauing being 
 ' to Htay - . . as regards, as far as concerns, homo,' that is, 
 the staying being described as having reference to home, 
 and to bo understood as extending to that alone; xa&' 636v 
 zopvjia9ut is translated by ' to march on a road,' or ' by a 
 road,' the sense being, 'to march ... as regards a road,' 
 that is, the marching is to be taken as affirmed, not abso- 
 lutely, but with a limitation, ' as regards a road,' ' as far as 
 a road is concerned ;' Uvat xaff ofuXov is rendered by ' to go 
 in, among, or through, a crowd,' the sense being, • to go . . . 
 as regards a crowd,' that is, the going is to be understood as 
 affirmed in a limited extent, and as having reference to a 
 
 21 
 
322 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 crowd, not to any oLjectB indifferently. When in English 
 ve would speak of a staying that lias to do with home alone, 
 and extends to no other place of staying, wc dcscrihc it as a 
 staying ' at home ;' when of a journeying that has to do with 
 a road alone, or extends to no other Avay of journeying, we 
 describe it as a journeying 'by, on, or over a road ;' and so, 
 when of a going that has to do with a crowd alone, and 
 embraces no other circumstance attending a going, we 
 dcHuribc it as u going 'in, among, through, a crowd.' In 
 other wordH, wc employ in KngliHli, where the Orcek cm- 
 plo}'s xuT<i with the accusative, in such expressions, the terms 
 'at,' 'in,' 'on,' 'among,' 'by,' one in one connection, and 
 another in another, as may suit the action of the verb and 
 the nature of the noun by which its sense is limited. In 
 Uom. II. iii. 151-2, . . . TeTuyeaatv ioixorez, otre xu&' uhjv | 
 Siv8(iitft i<fe!^diJi£vue onu Xupw^aaav Utaiv, 'like grasshoppers, 
 that, sitting on a tree in the forest, send forth a shrill cry,' 
 xad' uh/v, rendered 'in a forest,' properly understood, shows 
 the precise extent in which the terms 8ev8(>i({) i^el^o/ievot are 
 to be taken ; so that the sitting on a tree shall have refer- 
 ence exclusively to the forest, and the meaning be almost 
 the same as ' sitting on a forest tree.' Compare II. iii. 36, 
 &f ttOTi; xa&' 5/tdot^ i8u Tpwtov dj-epio][a)v, ' he went in, among, 
 the crowd ;' and Xen. Anab. v. 2, 16, 6 8e Sew^wv arai; xara 
 rdf mXa^, broaou^ i8uvazo xarexMue, ' standing at the gates.' 
 
 c. 'On,' 'in.' The same explanation is to be given of 
 xuTil with the accusative in such phrases as ftdUeev xar' 
 dmtioa, 'to strike on the shield,' ^d)J.stv xazd axr^do^, 'to 
 strike on the breast,' eidiuou xard ^fiiua, 'to know in the 
 heart,' where it is rendered in English by ' on,' ' in.' E.g. 
 II. iii. 347, xal /9tfAev 'AT/'elSao xar' daniSa itdvzoa' iiu'/jv, ' and 
 struck on the shield of Atreides;' II. iv. 163, eu yuft ij-w z68e 
 ocSa xurd ifpiua xal xara dDjihv, ' for well know I this in my 
 mind and heart.' Here, as in the case just considered, the 
 accusative of itself marks the particular object to which the 
 action or state qualified by xmd is intended to be limited. 
 Thus, in the example /SfiUev \lr(iec8ao xar' daniSa, 'struck 
 (hid spear) on the shield,' the accusative denotes the object 
 to which definitely the act of striking is to be understood 
 
 Kurd. 
 
 323 
 
 as rcstnctcd; 'he struck (his spear),' not absolutely, but 
 only 'so far as the shield goes.' 'to the extent of the 
 
 il in'l °" "'"""V ""'^ '""^ '' "'^•^^'^ *« the verb to 
 niaik, in the way above explained, the reference of its 
 action or state to the object that limits its extent. With 
 regard to the sense of the accusative there can hardly be 
 any question; and with respect to xard, it is plain that it 
 has lost Us proi>er sense of 'down;' for it would not be 
 consistent w,th the fact to say. i„ the above example, that 
 he struck h.s spear down on the shield.' ]{ather. xard 
 paving become familiar in use to denote the direction in 
 whu:h he measure of an action or motion was to be taken, 
 from above downwards, it came to be employed as the 
 mere index of the direction which an action o be mea- 
 
 or ex cut, that is it showed that the action or motion was 
 
 n he direction of he object that measured its extent; and 
 
 h.s even where the direction of 'downwards' was not 
 
 apparent nor even apj.llcable. In fact, as has been above 
 
 oen, the notion of the measure of the action furnished by 
 
 the accusative IS so entirely predominant, that the precise 
 
 du^ction 1.1 wnchitis measured is very unimpor Jt, and 
 
 s lost Bight of. In this view, ^dXeuxar•daJa^.ouU not 
 
 .gn.iy 'he struck downwards ... us regards the shield 
 
 as ar as the shield goes,' but that 'he struck,' and ha't 
 
 the striking was determined in its extent by a limit or 
 
 nicasure, showing that it reached as far L a certain 
 
 •afit::' TTu "'^ ''"'^^' -'^^'y^ "^y '^-"« — g 
 
 as K.gards the slucld,' • .us far as the shield goes;' and as a 
 li".. or measure of an action was determfned very con 
 
 nonly by taking it in a direction from above downward 
 
 JO proposition xazd, which marks this direction, wa m! 
 pl..ycd as a general conventional sign, as it were of the 
 direction of an action in measure^tilking, wUhout any 
 special regard to its proper sense, and, thf efore ^ thZ 
 
 ny reference to the actual direction of the actio "re 
 
 bictioirviTr'" '"■ '"^'"'^' °^ ^"^ °'^- p-^''o 
 
 dnection. An.l, here again, it is to be remarked, that the 
 accusative case supplying the actual measure or limit of 
 
)24 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 the action, and xard denoting merely the presence of such 
 measure, or the reference of th^ action to it, the phrases in 
 which xard stands thus connected with the accusative are to 
 be rendered in the sense of the accusative alone, xard, in 
 Buch constructions, being incapable of translation in the 
 English language ; and that the variety of the rendering in 
 English is due, not to any diifcrence in the meaning either 
 sf the accusative or of xard, but to the different nature of 
 the action and of the noun that gives its measure or limit. 
 Hence, fidXev xar' dmtiia, 'he struck ... as regards the 
 ihield,' is rendered by * he struck on the shield,' but rid' 
 ilda xaxa ippiva, ' I know this ... as regards my heart,' is 
 translated by ' I know this in my heart.' 
 
 If this explanation be true, it is readily applicable to a 
 ^eat variety of expressions which it is needless to enume- 
 rate. One or two may be here mentioned, merely by way 
 of illustration. Thus, the common phrase xard. yrjv xal xard 
 ddlarrav, 'by land and by sea;' e.g. Thucyd. i. 13, r&v 
 'EU^vwv zb ndXat xard ■f^u rd itleia rj xard ^dlaaaav Sea r^f 
 ixeivwv itap' dXX^Xou; imiuayhvrav, ' the Greeks having inter- 
 course with each other in the olden time more by land 
 than by sea, (and, accordingly, passing) through their terri- 
 tory.' Here, the proposition EXXijvtov nap' dXh^Xouz im/jor- 
 x6vTwv, 'the Greeks had intercourse with each other,' is 
 qualified by the terms xard -ffju tu nXeito ^ xard ddlaaaav, 
 showing in what extent it is to be taken, ' as regards the 
 land more than as regards the sea;' that is, their inter- 
 course, considered with reference to the land, was greater 
 than their intercourse considered with reference to the sea; 
 Dr, as it is expressed in English, ' their intercourse by land 
 nras greater than their intercourse by sea.' 
 
 The phrase ixaarot; fow tSv xa9' a&rbv ipgt, Xen. Cyrop. 
 V. 1, 11, 'each loves what suits himself,' furnishes another 
 example of xard employed with the accusative case to mark 
 the extent in which a preceding proposition is to be taken. 
 The meaning is, that each one loves the things that have 
 regard to, that stand related to, himself; that is, that have 
 this reference, are to be taken in this regard, and in no 
 other ; and this is, in effect, the giving, by means of xad' 
 
 Hard. 
 
 325 
 
 ainiv, the measure or extent in which ra»v ipqi ia to be 
 taken. The sense of limitjng the preceding statement 1iy 
 marking with regard to what object it is true, is obviously 
 duo to the accusative case, and not to xard. The presence 
 and meaning of the preposition arc to be explained in the 
 same way as in the preceding examples. 
 
 d. ' By,' 'at u time.' Among the more remarkable uses 
 of xard with the accusative is that in which it is employed 
 with numerals and other terms to mark the standard or 
 unit of measure or division by which any whole number or 
 \ aggregate is divided off into equal parts. Thus, «ai>' iua, 
 'by ones,' 'one at a time,' *ai>' exaarov, 'individually,' that 
 is, 'each and every one of a number taken by himself,' a 
 number counted by, or divided into, individuals; ixaaroz 
 conveying the notion of each individual of some number 
 by means of its radical exa, 'one,' the same as the English 
 each, and the Sanskrit tka, 'one,' and the ending (ff)-rof, 
 the same as roc in «-toc, as th in the English six-th, as ro 
 the common demonstrative or article in Greek, and as th 
 iu the English th-e and th-a-t, serving, by pointing to and 
 thus distinguishing it, to separate the term ixa-, 'one,' from 
 the other objects of an indefinite number, and so conveying 
 the notion of individuality. Of course the idea of some 
 number, of which ixaaroc shows that the component ob- 
 jects ^aro taken individually, is implied in the same way 
 that exroc, naming as it does only one object, but separated 
 or distinguished as the 'sixth,' implies a number of 'six' 
 from which the one is distinguished. So xard ^Ua, 'by 
 tribes,' that ia, a nation parted off into tribes, or taken ' by 
 tribes ;' «ad»' fj/^ipau, ' daily,' 'by the day,' • a day at a time,' 
 that is, Bomc larger period of time, as life or the like, 
 divided off into equal parts by the measure of a day. E.g! 
 Xen. Anab. iv. 7, 8, dnrjX&ov Imb rd dii>8pa dv&pmnot i^dofJ- 
 xovra, oitx d&p6oi, dXXd xa»' im, « there retired under shelter 
 of the trees seventy men, not in a body, but one by one,' 
 'one at a time.' In this example, we have a number of 
 soldiers divided off into equal subdivisions, namely, of one 
 each ; and they retire, not in a body (ddpdoi), but ' by ones,' 
 ' one at a time,' singulatm. The division into parts is made 
 
326 
 
 OF THB 6BTERAL PKEP0SITI0N3. 
 
 by applying succesBively a standard or unit of measure, 
 ntftnely, xa9' iva, * one,' ' a measure that reaches to, or 
 amounts to, one;' just as a husbandman divides a heap of 
 corn into parts of a bushel each by the use of a bushel- 
 measure. 
 
 The notion of a measure to be thus employed to mark 
 off a whole number into equal subdivisions, as xu9' iva, 
 'one,' 'the measure of one,' belongs to the accusative itself 
 meaning, in the instance just mentioned, • as far as one goes,' 
 •as much as one,' 'to the amount of one;' and xard has no 
 other office than that of showing how this^ measure is de- 
 termined, namely, taken in its proper sense, by noting that 
 a limit of measure or extent is reached by a direction 
 from above downwards. But it has been shown above 
 that xard, from being frequently used in its proper sense 
 to determine the way in which an action was measured, 
 and, especially, from the prevalence of the notion of mea- 
 sure itself, whereby was shut out a regard to the direction 
 in which it was determined, came to denote any direction 
 in which an action was measured, and, of course, with- 
 out regard to its being downward, it being indifferent 
 which way any thing is measured, whether from below 
 upwards, or from above downwards. That, in fact, xard 
 became a mere sign of the direction of an action with 
 reference to the determination of its measure or extent. 
 Accordingly, xaS' eva would mean, as it has been seen that 
 it really does, 'as much as one,' ' up to the measure of one,' 
 'one.' And if xa9' iva obtained this sense of measure, 
 'one,' ' to the amount of one," it might be used as a stand- 
 ard, or unit of measure, to be applied to appropriate objects. 
 A number of persons may bo counted off by this measure, 
 and divided into parts of ' one' each, or, which is the same 
 thing, distributed into such parts. Thus, in the example 
 above given, the seventy soldiers are described as having 
 retired under the shelter of the trees, not in a body (d3p6ot) 
 or as an aggregate number, but by 'ones,' 'one at a time' 
 {xad' iva), that is, in subdivisions of 'one each,' made by 
 dividing or distributing the whole number by applying 
 Bucceasively the measure of ' one.' 
 
 Kard. 
 
 327 
 
 It has been shown that xard with the accusative ex- 
 presses a measure, and that such measure is capable of 
 being used with appropriate objects as a unit or standard 
 of measure by which to divide or distribute a whole num- 
 ber or aggregate of objects into equal- parts or divisions 
 having the denomination of the unit of measure. But it 
 may be asked whence the idea of actual distribution comes, 
 it being one thing to have a unit of measure, and another 
 thing to express the fact of its actual application with result- 
 ing ilistribution. Clearly, the notion of distribution, that 
 is, of a number or aggregate of objects divided off into ; 
 equal parts by the application of a unit of measure, does 
 not reside in xard. This appears from all that has been 
 hitherto said of its proper and derivative significations, no 
 one of them containing any such notion. Nor is it to be i 
 found in the accusative case, which does no more than 
 express the measure. Nor yet, again, is it conveyed by ' 
 xard and the accusative conjoined; for, as has been seen 
 already, the sense which they convey is only that of mea- 
 sure, belonging to the accusative, with an index at most, 
 given by xard, of the direction in which this is obtained. 
 The notion of distribution is, in fact, suggested by the 
 juxtappsition of the unit of measure and the number or 
 aggregate to be subdivided or distributed, and is only 
 rendered more obvious by the attending circumstances. 
 Of course, it is always required, in order to its being under- 
 stood that xard and the accusative, when placed alongside 
 of a whole number, are the unit of measure or divisor by 
 which it is to be distributed into equal parts, that the unit 
 of measure formed by xard and the accusative shall be of a 
 nature suited to the division or distribution of the whole num- 
 ber, that is, that it shall be the name of one of the parts of 
 which the whole number is made up, and into which it is capa- 
 ble of being divided. When seventy soldiers are said to retire 
 (dnrjkifov dv&fxonoi ijiSofjBJxovra), and xa&' iva is added with 
 the sense merely of a unit of measure, ' up to one,' ' one,' 
 but naming one of the parts or numbers of which the 
 whole number seventy is composed, and being therefore 
 fitted to become its divisor, the jaind supplies, without 
 
OF THE 6ETBBAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 difficalty, under the circumstances, the application of this 
 unit of measure to the whole number alongside of which 
 it stands as its divisor; so that Aa^X&ov dv&pamot ifido/iijxovTa, 
 oi* d&p6ot <LUd xa&' evo, may readily be understood to mean, 
 that the seventy soldiers were distributed by the applica- 
 tion of the unit of measure xa&' eva into equal parts of 
 *ono each,' and so retired 'by ones,' or *one at a time.' 
 In Horn. II. iii. 326, of (lev inet9' 71^ovto xara ffr/jrac, * they 
 sat in rows or ranks,' the host of men is described as sit- 
 ting ' in rows,' distributed ' by rows ;' and it is obvious that 
 xara arixa^, ' rows or ranks,' is a unit of measure by which 
 the host is distributed, it being a suitable one by which to 
 arrange a host, especially when they were to be spectators 
 of a single combat. Thuc. i. 5, npomiTtTovrez noXeoev dzu- 
 ^larotz xal xara xwftaz olxou/jtivaiz ^fma^ov, ' falling upon cities 
 that were unwallcd and inhabited villagewisc, they plun- 
 dered them.' Here the object to be distributed or divided 
 is niitz, 'a city,' and the unit of measure by which it is 
 divided is xara xaifajv, * a village," ' the measure of a village ;' 
 and this, as we know from other passages showing that the 
 Greek cities {ithXetz) were sometimes composed of a number 
 of villages, as distinguished from a compact arrangement, 
 was suitable to be employed as the divisor of the object 
 or aggregate noXtz, if not ordinarily, yet certainly in the 
 present circumstances, where its peculiar arrangement 
 and its being unwalled are assigned as the occasion of 
 its being plundered. Although the proper unit is xard 
 xijajv, the plural xard x<u/<ac is employed to show the plu- 
 rality of parts or villages into which the iz6lcz was dis- 
 tributed. Thuc. i. 2, r^c re xa9' ^fxi/iav dvayxalou rpof^ 
 navrajpu dv ^youfievot imxparetv, 'counting that they would 
 everywhere obtain their necessary daily subsistence.' In 
 this example, men are spoken of as requiring food for sub- 
 sistcnce, and, although life is not mentioned as the period 
 during which food is required, it is necessarily implied. 
 Ktt9' ^jiipav, 'for a day, the measure of a day,' 'a day,' 
 being one of the subdivisions of which this period is 
 obviously capable, and being, moreover, peculiarly suited 
 to make the subdivision when necessary subsistence is 
 
 Kazd. 
 
 329 
 
 spoken of, upon its addition as a unit of measure divides 
 oft" this period of man's demand for food into equal parts 
 of a day each. The sense which arises is, that they counted 
 upon commanding everywhere their necessary subsistence 
 'for a day at a time,' or their 'daily' subsistence. Thucy- 
 dides, i. 3, describes the Greeks as being called to a greater 
 extent Hellenes xa&' ixdaroo::, 'considered individually,' 
 that is, distributed into individuals, the number to be 
 divided being the ancient inhabitants of Hellas, and the 
 term xa9' kxdazouz, ' each,' ' individual,' being the unit of 
 fiseaeiure by which it is divided off into equal parts. In 
 the same chapter he says that the Hellenes, prior to the 
 Trojan war, accomplished nothing xard noXuz, 'as states,' 
 considered as divided into tzoXui; or 'states,' the whole nation 
 being regarded as divided off into t:6Xuz. The aggregate 
 to be distributed into parts is the Greek people, and the 
 unit of measure by which it is divided off into equal parts 
 is the term xard niXuz, or, using the singular, xarii. iiSXtv, ' a 
 state,' ' the measure of a state ;' and this is suitably em- 
 ployed as a divisor as being the name of a familiar division 
 of the Greek people. 
 
 In some of the examples, the plural number is employed, 
 as, xard noXeti;, xutf kxdarou^, xard xw/jtai;, while in others the 
 singular is used, as xad' et/a, xad' ^/lipav. By the employment 
 of the plural the idea is conveyed that of the parts into 
 which a whole number is distributed there are several com- 
 prised in the speaker's view. Thus, xard noXeii;, in the ex- 
 ample above considered, shows not only that the Greeks were 
 divided by the unit of measure xard TtoXtv, but that there 
 were in the writer's view a number of the parts resulting 
 from the division ; whereas, when the singular is employed, 
 the attention is confined to the distribution according to 
 the unit of measure named, and no regard is had to the 
 multiplication of this. In other examples, however, the 
 plural number with xurd is used because the unit of measure 
 itself is made up of a plurality of objects; as, xord rpetz, 'by 
 threes,' where, the unit of measure being ' three,' the several 
 equal parts resulting from the division or distribution con- 
 sist of ' three.' 
 
1 
 
 830 
 
 OF THE SBVBBAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 To the use of xard with the accusative which has jiist 
 been considered belong, besides others, the expressions 
 xari /iip<K, 'in turn," 'by turns,' xar' dXiyouc, 'a few at a 
 time,' xar' dXlrov, 'by little and little,' 'a little at a time,' 
 xara /jtxpov, 'gradually,' 'a little at a time,' xar IumutSv, 
 'year by year,' 'every year,' xara /^va, 'monthly,' 'by the 
 month,' * every month.' 
 
 e. 'Up to,' 'as far as reaches.' The same explanation, 
 both as to the preposition and as to the case, which has 
 been given in the constructions hitherto examined under this 
 head, applies also to xari and the accusative in such expres- 
 sions as xara xpAroz, 'with one's might,' xara Tdxoi;, 'as fast 
 as one can,' ' with one's utmost speed,' ' at the top of one's 
 speed,' xara duva/uv, 'for, according to, one's powers or 
 ability.' E.g. Ilcrod. i. 124, wo/ee raor« xai noUe xara rrfpfi 
 'do this, and do it as quickly as possible.' Here the accu- 
 sative has the sense of ' as far as goes,' ' to the measure or 
 extent of,' that is, it marks the limit to which the action 
 qualified reaches ; so that noiee xara rdxo; properly means, 
 ' do it up to the measure of your quickness,' which is ex- 
 pressed in English by ' do it as quickly as you can.' And 
 xard, as in former cases, retaining only the power of indi- 
 cating in a general way the mode of determining the 
 measure of extent, that is, not requiring that the direction 
 of the action shall be conceived as being ' downwards," but 
 merely as having a regard to, or pointing to, the object 
 that marks the measure of extent, serves to connect the 
 action of ;ro/ee with the accusative rdpf, which follows to 
 denote the point up to which it reaches. 
 
 Of the same nature, essentially, is the phrase to xar' i/ii, 
 'so far as I am concerned:' e.g. Xen. Hell. i. 6, 5, ou 
 xatiuto Ta xar ifii, 'I do not stand in his way, so far as I am 
 concerned.' So also such expressions as xara touto, « accord- 
 ing to this,' 'in this view,' that is, 'so far as this goes,' xara 
 xahrd, ' in the same way,' ' according to the same things,' 
 'so far as the same things are concerned,' xad" on, 'as far 
 as," 'as far as what . . .,' 'according to what . . .' In these 
 expressions, it is plain that xard with the accusative is 
 introduced to denote the extent to which the proposition of 
 
 ^ 
 
 Kurd. 
 
 331 
 
 which it is the qualification is to be admitted ; and that, 
 accordingly, both the preposition and the accusative are to 
 be explained in the same way precisely as in the case of 
 xara rdjipz. 
 
 f, 'According to,' 'after,' 'conformably to,' 'like.' To 
 the class of cases in which xard with the accusative gives 
 the measure or extent of the preceding proposition, may be 
 referred a considerable variety of examples in which this 
 preposition, with the same case, is used in the sense of 
 ' according to,' * after,' ' conformably to,' ' like.' E.g. II. ix. 
 108, ouTt xaff ^/lire/iov ye viou, ' not at all according to, after, 
 my mind at least.' Nestor, referring to the conduct of 
 Agamemnon in taking away BriseVs from Achilleus, says 
 that it was not at all according to, in conformity with, his 
 own judgment; that is, the conduct of Agamemnon did 
 not answer to the measure or standard of bis judgment, or, 
 as it might be expressed in English, did not square with it. 
 Ilerod. vii. 143, auUa/ifidvovre xaut rb dp96v, ' if one appre- 
 hend it rightly,' ' according to what is right,' that is, ' in 
 conformity with the measure or standard of right;' Ilerod. 
 ii. 10, norafioi ou xara rov Nillov iSvrez /tej-d&ea, ' rivers that 
 arc not like the Nile in size,' that is, not conforming to the 
 measure or standard of the Nile, hence, not 'like the Nile;' 
 Herod, ii. C8, 6 veoaab; xara Aoyou roo thou yivs-rat, ' the young 
 (of the crocodile) is in proportion to the size (ratio) of the 
 egg;' that is, 'conforms to the standard of measure which 
 in reckoning (Aij-ov) is furnished by the egg.' Id. ib. {6xpox6- 
 deiXo^) lj[et . . . 6d6vTaz fisydiou^ . . . xara XSyov tou awparoz, 
 ' the crocodile has large teeth, in accordance with the size 
 (ratio) of his body.' Aristoph. Av. 1001-2, Qurixa yapdijp iori 
 ■njv idiav okoc \ xara nvij-ia [tdha-ca, ' the whole atmosphere is 
 in its appearance most like an oven,' that is, answers to the 
 measure or standard of an oven. 
 
 In such examples, xard with the accusative does not 
 seemingly furnish a direct measure of the preceding propo- 
 sition, but rather gives a measure of extent to which as a 
 standard the proposition is referred. In fact, however, it 
 amounts to the same thing ; and this use of xard with the 
 accusative is to bo compared with xa^' eva, xa9' ^/tipav, and 
 
882 
 
 OF THE SBVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 the like, where, as above explained, it makes a unit of 
 measure. The only difference is, that in xad' iva, and the 
 like expressions, the measure given is applied to some 
 whole number or aggregate of objects a number of times 
 snccessively, and so as to divide it into several parts of the 
 tame denomination with itself, while here it is applied but 
 one time, and merely to determine the accordance of an 
 object with the standard. ' 
 
 Here belong such expressions as xarai fuaiv, ' naturally,' 
 ' in accordance with nature,' ' conforming to the standard 
 of nature;' xara ftoipav, 'fitly,' 'as is right,' that is, conform- 
 ably to an apportionment or assigned share, and therefore 
 to what is right or one's due, not too much nor too little; 
 xar' ataav, 'rightly,' 'as is fit,' that is, conformably to what 
 is destined, and, hence, to what is due; xar oiidiv, 'as well 
 as nothing,' 'amounting to nothing,' 'answering to the 
 standard of notiiing:' e.g. Herod, ii. 101, riov SI uXXiov jiaae- 
 kitav, ou jaft Shyov ohdeftirp/ Ipytov dndde^tv, xar obdsv elvau 
 ia/jarpoTijToz, ' the rest of the kings, for they mentioned no 
 deed of theirs, were of no distinction,' 'as much as nothing 
 in point of splendor;' xar' iv9pamov, 'according to the 
 measure of a man,' 'according to human nature.' 
 
 To this place should be referred also the case in which 
 the comparative is followed by ^ and xard with the accusa- 
 tive of a noun added to mark the standard with which the 
 comparison is made. E.g. Xen. Hell. iii. 3, 1, xat iroj^e 
 aepvoTepaz :§ xara ivSpionov raifffi, 'and obtained funeral 
 obsequies more splendid than befits a man,' that is, ' than 
 are according to the measure or standard of a man ;' Id. 
 Memorab. Socr. i. 7, 4, rpoardTTeoi^ou yap ahroit;, i<prj, /ul(^(o ^ 
 xara Swa/jtVy 'for there was assigned them, he said, what 
 was too great for their powers,' that is, what was too great 
 when measured against their powers. 
 
 g. ' About,' ' near.' In the same way must be explained 
 the cxumples in which xard is used with the accusative of 
 numeruls to introduce, not the exact measure of any action, 
 but a standard of measure to which it is referred for com- 
 parison, and where it may be rendered in English by ' about,' 
 'near.' E.g. Ilerod. ii. 145, Jtowaip ftdv wv . . . xard i^a- 
 
 Kurd. 
 
 833 
 
 x6ata irm xul ^iha pdXiaTd iau i; i/ii, * for Dionysus, now, 
 there are, at the most, about sixteen hundred years to my 
 time;' properly, the time assigned to Dionysus is repre- 
 sented as conforming to, answering to, like, a measure or 
 standard of sixteen hundred years; and this sense, when 
 speaking of numbers, is sufficiently expressed by ' about,' 
 'near,' although these terms do not exactly express the idea 
 conveyed by the Greek. 
 
 A. « At,' ' near.' Another instance of the use oixard with 
 the accusative, differing, however, from those which have 
 • been thus far examined, as do also the remaining examples 
 to be considered, in the sense which the accusative bears, is 
 that in which it occurs with the accusative case of names 
 of places and of some other nouns, being employed to 
 describe the position of objects and actions relatively to 
 thoHO, where the English uses the terras 'at,' 'near.' E.g. 
 Ilcrod. vii. 137, ^Xataav xara Dtadu»7jv rijv iv ' EUrjanbvTtp, 
 'they were captured at, or near, Bisanthe;' Xen. Anab. vii. 
 5, 13, xai ol 6p/fxe<: of xard rawa oixouvrs; hjiZovrat, 'the 
 Thracians who dwell in this region are robbers.' 
 
 In such examples, the accusative is introduced to mark, 
 not simply the extent or measure of the action which is to 
 be defined, but the object in space to which exclusively it 
 is referred for its relative position, that one to which alone, 
 in this respect of relative position, it may be said to have 
 regard ; and has, therefore, the sense of ' as to,' * as regards,' 
 'having regard to,' or indicates, not merely how far the 
 action goes, but what object it embraces. Thus, in the 
 first example cited, the capture {^waav) is represented as 
 having for Bisanthe a certain relative position or aspect, 
 namely, a position or aspect defined by saying that the cap- 
 ture is confined in its local relation to Bisanthe, or that it is 
 to be understood as having a position 'as to,' 'as regards,' 
 Bisanthe. That is, its scene is determined, not by noting 
 the very place at which it occurred, which would require 
 the ablative of position (locativus), or other equivalent form 
 of expression, but by naming an object with regard to 
 which alone it is asserted to have a relative local position. 
 The accusative, in this construction, may tie regarded aa 
 
834 
 
 OF THE BKVBBAt PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 having tbe same senee aa in auch phrasea aa xar' olxov (iivtiv, 
 above considered. The prepoaition xard, aa in xar' oTxw 
 fiiveiVf serves to point the action which ia to bo defined to 
 the object named by the accusative, or to indicate its relative 
 direction, the primary notion of ' down' being lost sight of. 
 Here, again, xard ia merely a general sign of reference ; and 
 the preposition and accusative being, not so much the note 
 of the exact scene of an action, as the description of an object 
 to which, in determining the local relations of the action, 
 it is to be understood as having an exclusive regard, may 
 be translated in English by 'at,' 'near,' although these 
 terms cannot be said to be a complete transcript of the 
 Greek expression. They agree with it, however, in not 
 giving an exact designation of position. 
 
 i. 'In,' 'of the time of.' Not materially different ia the 
 use of xard with the accusative of a variety of terms to 
 denote the period of time to which any action or object ia 
 referred, where the English employs the expressions 'in,' 
 'in or of the time of.' E.g. Herod, vii. 137, {fj TaXdu^iou 
 /Jifjvii) Xf'^^f ft'fi^si'^o' TtolXifi insj-ipd^)], xaz& tov IliXonovvtjoiuai 
 xai 'A&jjvaiiov KoXefiov, ' the wrath of Tal thy bins wus aroused 
 a long time after, namely, in the time of the war of the 
 Peloponncsians and Athenians.' Properly, the accusative, 
 in the sense of 'aa to,' 'as regards,' introduces a term 
 expressing the period of time to wliich the action or state is 
 referred, and with regard to which alone it has a relative 
 direction. That the idea of the time or period to which an 
 action is referred may be indicated by the accusative case 
 of a suitable noun, in virtue of its meaning of 'as to,* 'as 
 regards,' that ia, by its power of marking the object to which 
 an action is restricted in ita aapect, ia seen also by the uae 
 of turn and qiium in Latin, and ' then' and 'when' in English. 
 Kurd, in this construction, aa in previoua instances, does no 
 mo,re than point the action to the object in the accusative 
 or show ita relative direction, ita proper sense of ' down' 
 being entirely disregarded. Thus, in the example cited 
 above, to the statement ij TaXdufiiou fjrjVK; X('^*"l* /'sr^Te"** 
 noXitji irayiftdi^, ' the wrath of Talthybius was aroused a long 
 time after,' the phrase xava rbv rwv IleXonowTjaUoi/ xai 'A9ijviuwv 
 
 Kurd. 
 
 385 
 
 ■i 
 
 ndXefiov ia added to ahow that it is to be referred to the period 
 of the war between the Pelopounesiana and Atheniana, and 
 to be considered »h having regard to it exclusively ; and this 
 is equivalent in English to 'in the time of the war between 
 the Peloponncsians and Athenians.' Of course the notion 
 of time ia suggested by the noun in the accusative, which, 
 either properly or figuratively, expresses a period of time. 
 Compare Xcn. Cyrop. i. 3, 14, dfec ndwai; roue xar' ifj^ 
 Sidixetv, ' permit all those of my age to engage in the chase ;' 
 Id. Rep. Laced, x. 8, 6 yay AuxoupYOZ xard rouf 'HpaxXelda^ 
 Xi^eToe yevea&ae, ' for Lycurgus ia said to have been of the 
 time of the Ilcrucleidui ;' Id. Agea. x. 4, iruxe rourou [idkurca 
 xiov xud' kauTov, ' he had this good fortune more than any of 
 his time;' Id. Mcmor. Socr. n\.5,'i(i,ivo}(:itaaiv ixuvoe 8rjXoe 
 yeyovaat uov xa9' lauzohz dvdpdtniav dptoTiuaavrez, 'in all these 
 instances it is plain that they were the first of the men of 
 their day;' Ilcrod. ii. 134, npoz dk 5n xard "Afiaaiv paadeitovra 
 J^v ilx/id;^outfa 'I'odwm^, d?J.' ou xard Tourov,- ' besides that Rho- 
 dopis nourished in the time when Amasis was king, and not 
 in his time.' Add Id. ii. 67, and see Passow's Lexicon, 
 s. V. xard. 
 
 k. ' Against,' ' over against,' ' opposite to.' Kard with the 
 accusative is used to mark the relative position of any thing 
 by introducing an object to which its aspect is confined, or 
 with regard to which alone it has its relative position, not 
 only in the sense of ' at,' ' near,' and, where a period of time 
 is concerned, in that of ' in,' ' in the time of,' but also in 
 that of ' against,' ' over against,' ' opposite to.' E.g. Xen. 
 Anab. i. 10, 7, 6 yap Tiaaaipepvrjz . . . oux Ifuyev dkXd Sei^Xaae 
 Ttapd Tov Tcorapbv xard rouf " EXhjvaz neXraaTd^, ' over agains*, 
 opposite to, the Greek pcltastse;' Id. Anab. vi. 8, 28, uliv Sk 
 izoXsfuutv tb pen eiiwvufiov eh&hz dteajcdprj, xai}' b o{ "EXXrjvec 
 Innei^ f/aav, 'opposite to which the Greek cavalrj' were 
 posted;' Id. Anab. vii. 5, 13, xai oi dpq.xez ol xard raura 
 olxowrez, arijXaz bptadjuvoe, zd xad-' aSrouf exaazoz ixn'mzovra 
 Xijt^ovzat, ' plunder each the vessels that are stranded oppo- 
 site to, or at, his own station.' 
 
 It can hardly be doubted that the accusative has here the 
 sense of ' as to,' ' aa regards,' nor that it defines the position 
 
336 
 
 OF THB BBVBKAJ. PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 of an object of action by introducing aometbing with regard 
 to which alone it is to be considered as having its relative 
 position or direction, and by thus restricting the view .to 
 this, just as iu /tivetv xar* oJkou, • to stay at homo,' as above 
 explained ; nor, again, that xard, as in many of the preceding 
 cases, merely points the action to the object in the accusar 
 tive by which it is defined, or shows that it has a relative 
 position or aspect with regard to it, its proper sense of * down* 
 being Icll out of view ; nor, lastly, that the idea of 'against,' 
 * over agaiiiat,' ' opposite to,' is not proper to either xard or 
 the accusative, but is derived from the circumstances of 
 local opposition in which the object or action defined and 
 that by which it is defined stand to each other; just as it 
 was seen to be true of ini in the sense of * against' with the 
 idea of hostility, and as it will be seen to be equally true 
 of nafid and jr^oic in the same serise, that this meaning of 
 'against' is suggested by the mutual relations of the parties 
 to the action. Thus, in the first example above given, 
 « Tissaphcrnes forced his way along the river over against, 
 or opposite to, the Greek peltastas,' the scuse properly is, he 
 forced his way {dcjXaas) in a direction {xard) that had regard 
 to the Greek peltastse (rouf 'EXXrjvaz Tcshaardi:) ; or, his 
 march is described as having a direction that pointed 
 exclusively to the Greek peltastse. But it being known 
 that Tissaphernes and the Greeks, the parties concerned in 
 the action of Sti^Xaae, were engaged in battle on opposite 
 sides, and that the actual march of Tissaphernes along the 
 river could hardly be otherwise directed than in a way 
 opposite to and against the Greeks, who had their post on 
 the river, the sense attached to xard and the accusative must 
 needs bo that of ' against,' • opposite to.' And, in the last 
 example, the Thracians having been described as occupying 
 each a separate post on the marshy shore of the Euxine, 
 when it is added that they plundered the vessels that were 
 stranded xa9' alizoui;, that is, in a position or direction that 
 had regard to and pointed to these posts respectively, so aa 
 to have, in the matter of situation, exclusive relation to 
 these, it is easily understood, from the condition of things 
 presented, that the vessels stranded and plundered were 
 
 Kurd. 
 
 337 
 
 ' over against' or ' opposite to' the robbers' stations. Com- 
 pare the Latin advcrsus, 'against,' properly, 'turned to- 
 wards,' or » having a direction or aspect towards,' which has 
 an accusative of the object 'as to' or 'with regard to' which 
 there is this relation existing. 
 
 I. 'For,' 'on,' 'upon,' 'after.' ^arcE with the accusative is 
 used also to express the object had in view in an action, or 
 that engages the eiforts of a person, where in English wo 
 employ the terms ' for,' ' on,' ' upon,' ' after.' E.g. Od. iii. 72, 
 ^ Ti xard npfj^tv, ^ imipeSiioz dXdXtjadt ; ' do you rove on some 
 enterprise T Od. iii. 106, nXal^dfitvoi xard k^id', ' roving for, 
 in pursuit of, plunder;' Herod, ii. 152, xard Xnjtrjv ixnlMaavzez, 
 'who had sailed from home in quest of booty;' Id. i. 94, 
 AnonXiuv xard ^iou re xai fffi l^^TTjaiv, ' sailed away in search 
 of subsistence and a country (home).' 
 
 Here, again, xard added to the action does no more than 
 indicate its direction relatively to the object introduced by 
 the accusative and to which it is referred, no regard being 
 had to its proper sense of 'down.' And the accusative, 
 having the sense of 'as to,' 'as regards,' is brought in to 
 mark the object with regard to which alone the action is 
 performed. In other words, it restricts the action to a 
 definite case, showing, for example, that the sailing was 
 performed, not in any possible regard, but with regard to a 
 particular thing, and so may be said, in one sense, to set a 
 limit to its extent. Thus viewed, TtXa^i/isvot xara kijtda 
 would mean, 'roving with a direction or aim ... as re- 
 gards booty ;' and anonUau xari ^iou (^^JTrjaiv, ' to sail away 
 with a direction or aim ... as regards a search for sub- 
 sistence.' Of course, if this representation be true, the 
 sense of object had in view is more properly to be referred 
 to the accusative than to the preposition ; but is partly to 
 be inferred from the nature of the action and the corre- 
 sponding character of the noun. 
 
 m. 'For,' 'on account of.' Admitting of the same inter- 
 pretation is the case in which xard with the accusative is 
 used to express the ground or motive of an action, ren> 
 dercd in English by ' for,' ' on account of,' and very nearly 
 
 related to that just mentioned.' E.g. Herod, i. 143, dTre- 
 
 22 
 
838 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREFOEITIONS. 
 
 trtiadrjaaai Si dni twv UXwu 'Iwvwv olnot tar' dXXo ftev oiidiv, 
 'these were separated from the rest of the lonians for no 
 other cause, on account of nothing else;' properly, 'as 
 regards nothing else ;' Id. iii. 137, xard dij tooto [lot Soxiu 
 mttwKu Tov fd/iov TouTOU rtXiao/z XPVf"^^"- l"^^^ ^Tjtior^drjz, 
 'Dcmoccdcs seems to me to have hastened this marriage 
 for this reason,' 'on account of this,' or 'with this view or 
 motive ;* Id. v. 3, liai Sij xaru touto da&eviez, ' they arc, then, 
 on this account weak.' Kara touto, in this last example, 
 shows in what regard the proposition elai dadevhz is af- 
 firmed. "Whether the limitation is to express a ground or 
 motive, the object had in view, or simply the sense of 
 •witli regard to,' can only be decided from the circum- 
 stances of the case. 
 
 n. 'Relating to,' 'belonging to.' Very similar, and re- 
 quiring the same explanation both of the case and of the 
 preposition, is the use of xmi with the accusative in th^ 
 sense of 'what relates to,' 'what belongs to,' 'as far as 
 concerns.' E.g. Ilerod. i. 124, xata fitv jap riyw toutoo irpo- 
 du/uT^v TsSvijxaz, TO di xara &eouz re xai i/ih nepiuz, ' so far as 
 concerns, so far as regards, this man's purposes, you are 
 dead ; but in so far as relates to the gods and to mc, you 
 survive ;' Xen. Anab. i. 6, 9, iaz "X"^! V 'jfi^'^t ^^ xoxu toutov 
 duat, rewc ideXovrac fiXouc toutou^ sS noceif, 'that we may 
 have leisure, so fur as relates to this man, to confer bcncfita 
 upon these that are willing friends.' It may bo observed 
 that the accusative here, even more plainly than in the 
 preceding instances, has the sense of ' as to,' ' as regards,' 
 or is employed to show in what extent, and in w^hat regard, 
 tlie proposition which it qualifies is to be taken. So plain, 
 indeed, is the meaning of the accusative case in this class 
 of examples, that they might be alleged in proof of the inter- 
 pretation given to this case in former instances, in which, 
 although the accusative must be admitted to be of the 
 same construction, its sense is less obvious. That xard, in 
 these examples, serves merely to show the reference of the 
 action or state which is defined to the object by which it 
 is defined, will scarcely be doubted if it be considered in the 
 light afibrded by the instances of its use already explained. 
 
 Kazd. Mtrd. 
 
 339 
 
 lABLB Of IHB HOSmOATIONS OF ..,d WITH TIB OABM. 
 
 SlgnUamoni of 
 nri. 
 
 Down.* 
 2. iUUUn dlrecUoD. 
 
 Oonlthro; 
 'with rapecC to.' 
 
 1. ' Down from.* 
 *l>own upuD.' 
 ('I>uwn)uudor.' 
 
 a 'At.* 
 
 'Of, 'concoralnir. 
 
 'Ui»n,"bj.* 
 
 'Agalut.' 
 
 AocsMtln: 
 B-'AifcTM,* (ezlnt) t. < A« to,"M ngmttiL' 
 
 I. 'TbnnchoQi,* < ill 
 tbraigh.' 
 
 L 'Down.' 
 
 *-;*V'oii,"ln,"lT.* S. 'AV'iMNW.' 
 
 inbuUnlT.) 'ualut.' 
 
 '0ptOj*'«.irMg0M.* 'Ibr,* 'on, 'upon- 
 According IV ' lOtor/ 'rtw.^lUMtbi^ 
 
 ■Aboot,' 'n«ar,* (of of 
 
 nnmben,Ac) 'IMnting to,' 'be- 
 
 longlng to.' 
 
 Herd. 
 MtTd has the same radical with ida-oz, 'middle,' 'in the 
 midst,' with the Latin medUius, the German wit, and the 
 Jinghsh vud, as in mid-way, middle, mid^t. 
 
 Significations of /urd. 
 Examined as it stands apart, in compounds, and in its 
 connection with nouns, ,urd presents a considerable va- 
 riety of meanings, all of which involve the idea of 'in the 
 midst' 
 
 I. a 'In the midst,' 'amid,' 'among.' Firat to be men- 
 tioned, as belonging to ptTd, is the sense of 'iu the midst,' 
 'amid,' 'among,' containing more or less distinctly the 
 Idea of one object having its position among several, so as 
 to bo one of a number, and to be encompassed by. or 
 mther, grouped with, them. Thus, in such compounds as 
 luraoijiuoz, 'among the people,' imojdtfuoz, 'in the midst of 
 the waves,' liBza/Uhtoiiat, 'I sing in the midst,' 'among 
 others,' ;.£r«/««5>/xfoc, 'counted among;' and so in construc- 
 tion with nouns; as Od. xvi. 140-1, ntza 8[iwo,v t' ipi oTxto I 
 
 oro '"' ^'f' ''^""^ ''"'^ *'''* ""'"''S the servants;' II. i. 
 J.>-, fUTa Sk TpndTotaiv ivaaaev, 'ruled among the thii-d 
 generation;' II. xxiii. 476, o5« v£«ir«r6c ^*« ^' 'Aprdotac 
 ToaouTov, ' the youngest among the Argives.' 
 
 b. * With.' Immediately connected with the sense of 'in 
 the midst,' 'among,' is that of 'with,' having the notion 
 of community, of partaking or sharing with othere, and 
 
840 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 being thus distinguished from m>v, ' with,' which has only 
 the notion of conjunction. Thus, in many compounds ; as, 
 fUTadaivufteu, ' I share ia a feast,' ' I partake with others of a 
 feast:' e.g. Od. xiii. 48, alee 8' aM' ^fuv fieTadataeTot, 'will 
 share the feast with us;' ftera/icprnfit, 'I mingle with or 
 among:' e.g. Od. xviii. 310, xai daidai /urifuaj-ov, 'and 
 mingled torches with it;' fieranetv, 'to demand a share,' 
 imaXaj^dveiv, 'to obtain a share by lot.' And so in con- 
 struction with nouns, in such examples as Od. ii. 148, rat 8' 
 la»C ftlv l> inirovTo fieri nvot^z dvifioto, ' flew with, together 
 with, accompanying, the blasts of the wind;' Xcn. Cyrop. 
 ii. 1, 12, vofti^ovrez (tera TcXecdvwv drfotvieladat, 'thinking that 
 they would share the contest with a greater number;' Xen. 
 Hell. iv. 1, 32, auric Anb ro't "mtou iiayibiievoz fieS^ 6/«Sv kz tif> 
 MXuTTut/ xareditoxov roue itoXejuouz, ' fighting on horse with 
 you,' that is, ' sharing with you in the tight ;' Id. ib. iv. 1, 
 35, vw 8k iieari aot /ie&' ■fjfiwv yevo/iiufft, • if you be with us ;' 
 Id. \h. vi. 5, 32, aweoTpareuovTO rotz ftera Br/^tuiov, 'joined 
 the expedition with those who were with (allied with) the 
 Thcbans.' 
 
 c. 'Between.' To the sense of * among,' 'in the midst,' 
 belongs also the case in which furd corresponds to 'be- 
 tween' in English, where an object is represented as being, 
 BO to speak, in the midst with reference to two groups of 
 things, and even to two objects alone, rather than with 
 reference to a number of individuals. This sense is more 
 exactly expressed by the English ' between,' which by its 
 radical 'two' makes distinct reference to two objects or 
 sets of objects; and by the Latin inter, in which the ending 
 ter shows that two objects are had in view, while in conveys 
 the notion of 'in,' 'within,' the compound meaning 'within 
 . . . with regard to two objects or sets of objects.' E.g. II. 
 xix. 110, 3c xtv in' ^/mri ripde nitrg fiera noaai yuvaixoi;, ' who- 
 ever shall this day fall between the feet of a woman ;' 
 H. V. 461, Tpioaz 8i orixnz oiXoz 'Afnjz Arpuve pereX^MV, 
 'going between (among) the ranks;' II. iii. 85, . . . "f'xuop 
 8k per' Apiforipotaiv ieme, 'Hector spoke in the midst of 
 (between) both armies.' The same sense is seen in the 
 derivative peraSu, 'in the space between,' and in com- 
 
 JUerd. 
 
 341 
 
 pounds; as, peroinij^coz, 'between the breasts,' peToiyjuoz^ 
 ' between two armies.' 
 
 2. a. 'After.' Merd has also the sense of 'after,' with 
 the idea of ecqueuce, both in compounds and in its use 
 witlt the cases of nouns. Thus, in compounds ; as, pera- 
 jSwuv, 'to live after,' 'to survive,' perayeu^z, 'born after or 
 Bubucquuntly,' peruaTivecv, ' to lament afterwards :' e.g. 
 ^sxih. Eunicn. 50, p^ peraazivetv ndvaip, ' the not groaning 
 after trouble,' that is, ' the not having trouble and uttering 
 groans afterwards;' peraupiuv, 'the day after to-morrow.' 
 And so when used with the cases of nouns, in such ex- 
 amples as II. xiii. 492, Xaoi enou^', iiaei re pera xriXov eanero 
 prjXa, ' ua sheep follow the bell-wether ;' Xen. IIcU. vi. 5, 
 49, pera rahra i^ouXeuovro ot 'A&rjvaeot, * after this the Athe- 
 nians deliberated.' In fact, however, as will be shown 
 more fully bulow, perd, in this case also, has properly the 
 sense of 'with,' 'in company with,' 'amid,' the meaning of 
 'after' not really belonging to perd, but being suggested by 
 the attending eircumstiinccs. Thus, in the example above 
 cited, pera xriXov eazero pf^Xa, the sheep are represented as 
 following after the bull-wether ; but belonging, as they do, 
 to the same flock with him, they properly follow with him, 
 in company with him. And the very oflico of the xriXoz 
 being to load the way, and the practice of the sheep to 
 follow after, the xuXuz and the pr^Xa still forming one flock 
 or company, and the p7^Xa being ' with' (fterd) the xriXoz, this 
 familiar relation of the parlies, namely, the one habitually 
 going before and the other following after, suggests, if it 
 does nut make necessary, the sense of ' after' as suited in 
 English to convey the meaning which the circumstances 
 give to fterd. The same is to be said of peri raura i^ouXeih- 
 ovro, 'after this they deliberated.' A series of events, 
 which raura recalls, is set before the hearer, and with them, 
 as forming one of the series, is conjoined another by means 
 of pe-d, the sense of peri raura being properly 'among, 
 with, these.' The order of events, however, clearly enough 
 indicates that the act of deliberating {ifiouXtuovro), though 
 one of the group or series, is really subsequent to the 
 other events recited; and, hence, we prefer in English 
 
842 
 
 or THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 J 
 
 to UBO ihe term < after,' and thus to mark distinctly this 
 relation of coming after, altogether omitting the notion 
 of 'with,' 'among.' 
 
 Yet, when this meaning of 'after' had once come to be 
 familiarly coupled with ftfcd, it became not uncommon to 
 attach it to the preposition, in many compound words at 
 least, where there was little if any thing present to suggest 
 the circumstances from which it originally sprang. Thus, 
 in the above-mentioned and in many like compounds, as, 
 laTourixa, * immediately after,' faraaivuv, » to drink after or 
 subsequently,' furaxXaietv, 'to weep after,' that is, 'siibseir 
 quently,' and also ' to share one's grief,' it may be that /lerd 
 had this signification assigned to it from its having been 
 already commonly used in this sense in cases where the 
 circumstances sufficiently indicated that the object referred 
 to a group by /urd did in reality come after the other objects 
 composing the group. But, even in these more obscure 
 cafiCB, it is not impossible, once it is seen how in any case 
 furd came to bear the- meaning of ' after,' to discern the 
 condition of things that rendered the employment of the 
 preposition in the sense of ' after' altogether appropriate. 
 Thus, fterayei^i, 'born subsequently," properiy means a 
 person ' born among, that is, so as to be one of a number of, 
 children.' But the statement itself of being thus born will 
 imply, under circumstances easily imagined, what the prepo- 
 sition does not express, that the' subject of it is born subse- 
 quently to the other members of the group to which fierd 
 shows that it belongs. In fiETaarivsiv nSvwv, ^sch. Eum. 
 59, 'to utter groans after experiencing trouble," although 
 the proper sense, as indicated by the preposition, is that the 
 lamentation belongs to the group of evils expressed by n6um 
 so far as to be counted with or among them, yet the circum- 
 stances sufficiently suggest that it comes after them in point 
 of order. 
 
 6. 'After,' expressing aim, object had in view. Merd 
 further obtains, apparently, the sense of ' after,' with the 
 idea of a thing to be obtained, of aim, or of the object had 
 in view, rendered in English by 'after,' and also by 'for.' 
 Thus, in many compounds, as fttradiwxetv, ' to pursue after,' 
 
 't 
 
 »1 
 
 Mnd. 
 
 843 
 
 IttTa&uv, ' to run after,' ' to chase," fierajti/joteaSai, ' to send 
 after," ' to send for,' /jteTaaTiUtai^at, ' to send after,' ' to sum- 
 mon." And BO, likewise, when used with nouns, as Od. i. 
 18^-4, niiwv . . . I ic Te/iiaiQv fieri j^aixov, ' sailing to Tcmcsa 
 for, after, in quest of, copper;" Od. ii. 308, fxera navpbz dxauiji/, 
 (iva daaaov ixijot,) ' that you may quickly arrive (at Pylos) in 
 search of news of your father;' literally, 'for, after, news of 
 your father." 
 
 Here, again, the proper sense of fierd is 'amid,' 'in the 
 midst of," and the notion of 'after,' 'for,' 'in pursuit of,' is 
 suggested by the known business or object of the party to 
 whom the action qualified by /lerd is attributed. In the 
 example from the Odyssey, i. 184, the person sailing to the 
 * midst' of copper {jisru j^ahcov) is a merchant carrying with 
 him iron to give in exchange, and his known business, 
 together with the circumstances of the narrative, at once 
 suggest that the voyage is made with the object of obtaining 
 a return cargo of copper. This we express directly in Eng- 
 lish, or imagine that we express directly, by using the terms 
 'after' and ' for," which from their familiar use in this sense, 
 and not from any thing in the primary meaning that is more 
 suitable to convey it, seem to express more definitely the 
 idea of aim or object had in view. In truth, if called upon 
 to say how tbe Euglish ' after," a comparative form of ' oft",' 
 Latin ab, Greek dno, and commonly marking the being 
 relatively subsequent, and how ' for," another form of ' fro,' 
 as in ' fro-ward," the same with the Latin pro, and the Greek 
 nfjo and ;r/>6c, and properly expressing the idea of being 'in 
 front of," 'before," and 'forwards," came to express aim or 
 object had in view, a person might find it quite as difficult 
 to render a satisfactory answer as it is to show how /xezd 
 obtains the same meaning. And if, upon examination, ho 
 found, as is really the case, that both ' after' and ' for," when 
 expressing object or aim, retained their proper sense, and 
 that the peculiar meaning they seemed to have obtained 
 arose from the circumstances in which they were used, it 
 would lend strong confirmation to the above explanation 
 of tbe way in which /lerd obtained this signification. 
 
 When fierd is used in compounds with this notion of the 
 
844 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 a^xa or object had in view, it no doubt had originally the 
 sense of 'amid,' and the signification of 'after' was sug? 
 gested,^ just explained in regard to its use with nouns, bj 
 the attending circumstances. But, in many instances, these 
 circumstances are so imperfectly marked as to be incapable 
 of satisfactory exhibition ; and, hence, it may be admitted as 
 probably true thal^ from familiar use of fisrd in this signifi- 
 cation, the idea of aim or object had in view was sometimes 
 immediately attached to it without any regard to its proper 
 sense. Yet in many other compounds, as fteramiUea^ae, /lera- 
 nifeteadat, the proper notion of find may be discerned, and 
 it may be seen that the meaning of ' after,' that is, of aim or 
 object had in view, was suggested by the nature of the action 
 and by the obvious relation of the party performing the action 
 to its object. Thus, fisTaxifjateadat means, properly, ' to send 
 (on one's own account) into the midst, among, or so as to be 
 with, in the company of.' But the sending into the midst 
 of, among, or so as to be with, in the company of, any object 
 or number of objects admitting this relation, allows and 
 leads to the inference of aim, or of an object which, the 
 sender has in view. If, at the same time, the object into 
 the midst of which, or into the company of which, the 
 sending is made, is of such a nature as to be obviously a 
 thing sought for by the person that sends, the condition of 
 things is such as to make it highly probable that fiezd has 
 the sense of ' after,' ' for.' Thus, in Herod, i. 77, Kpoiaot 
 . . . furcaiefi^idfavoz Ba^uXmniooz, the circumstances under 
 which Croesus sends, namely, when he is anxiously seeking 
 recruits for his army, and, in the immediate context, is said 
 to have summoned his Egyptian allies, show plainly enough 
 that the Babylonians, into the midst of whom he sends, are 
 an object sought for, and lead at once to the inference that 
 the sending 'into the midst' is, in fact, a sending 'for' or 
 ' alter.' See also Uerod. i. 41, and 108, cited by Schweigh. 
 Lex. Herod. 
 
 c. 'Change,' 'alteration.' In many compounds, although 
 not in its use with the cases of nouns, /jxtd is apparently 
 the sign of change, of transfer, of the passing over from 
 one place or thing to another, of alteration, and the 
 
 Merd. 
 
 845 
 
 like. Thus, /jieTa^alvetv, ' to pass over from one place to 
 another ;' as, Herod, i. 57, fUTa^aivovrez iz Taura tol "j/atpia, ' ia 
 migrating into these places,' that is, 'in passing from another 
 into these places;' fterafidUeev, 'to change,' 'to alter,' that 
 is, 'from one thing to another;' as, Herod, i. 57, 8aa dUa 
 neXcuTfixa ioi/ra noXia/mTa to owofta /leri^aXe, ' as many other 
 Pclasgic states as changed their name ;' /UTofiouXeuea&ae, ' to 
 change one's plan,' fterdyYi^eiVf 'to transfer from one vessel 
 into another,' fteTaj-rfvaiaxsev, ' to alter one's opinion or judg- 
 ment,' fitrafiatiddvetv, 'to unlearn,' 'to alter or exchange by 
 learning ;' as, Herod, i. 57, to 'Attcx6v i&voz d/M r^ /itTafioij 
 T^ iz "E^rjvaz xae ttjv f^waaav fierifia&e, ' the Attic nation, at 
 the same time that it was changed into Hellenes, exchanged ; 
 (unlearned) also its tongue.' 
 
 Tliis sense attributed to /'£r<£, by which it expresses change, : 
 is immediately connected with that of ' after' in the mean- ' 
 ing of sequence, and, of course, has the same origin. Thus, 
 fUTufidXXeiv, ' to alter,' ' to change by throwing,' means, 
 properly, ' to throw afterwards,' that is, to throw after 
 having already thrown, and, hence, ' to alter one's throw- 
 ing;' lUToPouhdeadat, 'to alter one's plan,' means properly, 
 'to have an after-plan,' just as in English we say, 'to have 
 an after-thought ;' /teTajfyil^etv, ' to transfer from one vessel 
 to another,* means, properly, ' to pour into a vessel after 
 having already poured into a vessel,' the mind readily sup- 
 plying what is necessary to make an ' afl«r-pouring into a 
 vessel' into * a pouring from one vessel into a difi'erent vessel.' 
 
 Summary of the significations of (isxd. 
 Mnd. 1. o. ' In the midst of,' ' amid,' ' among.' 
 
 b. ' With,' ' having community with,' ' sharing with 
 
 others.' 
 
 c. Between. 
 
 2. a. ' After ;' sequence. 
 
 6. ' After," ' for ;' object had in view, aim. 
 c. Change, alteration. 
 
346 
 
 OF THB BBVEBAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 BIQNIFIOATION AND USB OF (JtETd WITH CASES OF NOUNS. 
 
 ' I. Merd with the genitive case, 
 
 1. 'Among,' 'in the raidat of.' itferrf with the genitive 
 case is employed in its proper sense of 'among,' 'in the 
 midst of:' e.g. Od. xvi. 140, . . . fiera dfiwtov r' ivc oixtfj \ 
 mve xai t;ad', 'drink and eat in the house with or among 
 the servants ;' Od. x. 320, //er' aXXmv Xko haipwv, ' among your 
 other comrades." Here it is plain that /tezd has the sense 
 of ' among,' ' in the midst,' and that the genitive has the 
 meaning of ' with respect to.' Thus, in the first example, 
 the meaning is, 'drink and eat in the midst . . . with 
 respect to the servants,' the drinking and eating in the 
 midst being shown by the genitive case to have reference 
 specifically to the servants. 
 
 2. 'With;' having community with, sharing with others. 
 Very nearly akin to the above signification of /istd, and 
 immediately Uowing from it, is that of ' witli,' which it fre- 
 quently has, and in which is contained the idea of being in 
 the midst of a number, and hence of sharing with them. 
 This, as before observed, distinguishes /jterd from auv, the 
 latter expressing mere conjunction. E.g. II. xxiv. 400, 
 rmv fteru iraUoftevoc xi^pq* U-iov Ivdd^' ema9m, 'casting lota 
 with them (in the midst of and in common with them), I 
 obtained by lot to come hither with the expedition;' II. 
 xiii. 700, //era Domzmv iftdxovTo, 'they fought with the 
 Boeotians,' that is, 'in their midst,' and 'in common with 
 them.' Add II. iii. 460, iv. 2, 16, 61, 341; and Od. xvii. 
 256-7, uitum S etaw hv, fiera de fivt^arr^pat xddt^^ev, \ dvriop 
 Eupu/idxou, ' with, in the midst of, the suitors.' 
 
 Hence, further, /lerd, 'with,' is used also even where one 
 person only is named with whom another acts in common, 
 it being easy, when once the idea of community was 
 attached to /lerd, to employ it with reference to a single 
 object instead of many. Thus, in Xen. Cyrop. ii. 1, 12, the 
 plural is employed, w/^'Covref /teri ^rXeidvtov driovieTadtu, 
 'thinking that they would contend with (in company with) 
 a greater number;' but in Cyrop. ii. 1, 20, irretpuTo b Kupoz 
 daxilv xa awpara twp fu»' iaoTou npbz lafjjv, the singular is 
 
 Mtrd. 
 
 347 
 
 i 
 
 used, imrd having the same force, 'Cyrus endeavored to 
 exercise the bodies of those who were with him so as to 
 make them strong,' that is, 'of those who were in his com- 
 pany,' or 'were associated with him iu his army.' Xcn. 
 Anab. i. 7, 10, rwv Je ptru Kupou ^ap^dpaiv {dpt&fibc iyivero) 
 Sixa pufiidos;, ' the number of the barbarians who were with 
 Cyrus;' Xen. Hell. iii. 3, 11, /laaTtyou/uiioz . . . aurS^ re xai 
 o! per' auTotJ, 'both himself and those with him,' ' that were 
 associated with him;' Id. Anab. i. 10, 1, of ptrd 'Apiaiou, 
 'those with Ariasus,' 'belonging to his division of the 
 army.' ' 
 
 3. In the sense of 'with' or community, pexd is employed' 
 with the genitive variously according to the nature of thei 
 action qualified by the preposition, and to the relation in I 
 which the noun following psrd stands to the subject of the ' 
 proposition. Thus : { 
 
 a. ' Of the party of,' ' on the side of." Mtxd with the : 
 genitive sometimes expresses the being ' of the party of,' j 
 ' on the side of E.g. Xen. Hell. iv. 1, 15, f«<rW aoe psd^ ' 
 ^p&v jsvopivip, ' if you become of our party,' ' take sides with 
 us,' si nohiscum te conjunxeris; Id. Cyrop. ii. 4, 6, 3« tpaiTj pera 
 Tou ddixoupivuo iatadac, ' that he would be on the side of, take 
 part with, the injured party.' 
 
 h. ' With,' marking accompanying circumstances. Some- 
 times p&rd with the genitive introduces the accompanying ■ 
 circumstances of an action, answering to the English ' with.' , 
 E.g. Xen. de Veuat. xiii. 15, xai roiz pkv ^ dypa perd aaxppo- ' 
 aiiVTjz, ro<c 8h ptzd aiaj^pou dpdaouz, ' some pursue the chase ' 
 with moderation, some with reprehensible daring;' Id. 
 Agesil. xi. 9, dXld pr^v dvSpiav ye rb nXiov per' eu^ouXia^ ^ perd j 
 xtvduvcou inedeixvuTO, ' but; indeed, he exhibited manly spirit j 
 more by (with) prudent counsel than by (with) encounter- ' 
 ing peril ;' yEscliin. 84, 15, duyjp ovrmz per' dperr^z fie^Koxw^, 
 'a man that really lived virtuously.' 
 
 c. 'With,' expressing the accompanying means or agent. 
 Mtrd with the genitive denotes also the accompanying 
 means or agent, rendered in English by 'with,' 'by means 
 of,' 'with the help of.' E.g. Xen. Anab. iii. 5, 8, tou pet' 
 doer^; nptareuav impeXsiadae, 'to be at pains to bo distin- 
 
S48 
 
 OF THB 6EVEBAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 guished by means of virtue,' that is, 'with virtue for a 
 compaDion and helper;' Id. Cyrop. iv. 6, 7, el iXmia rtvdt 
 idfioifu Ttj) ifiXift itatdi Ttfjuofnaz iv rivoz fitra om rwfiiv, ' that I 
 would obtain, with your help, some revenge for myson ;' 
 having you for a companion and helper. 
 
 d. ' With,' in conformity with, couiiistently with. Mtxi 
 with the genitive, in the eense of ' with,' has, further, the 
 meaning of in conformity with, consistently with : e.g. 
 Antiph. 13G, 25, ^crd rwv vSfuov (i/zeriptov dnoXiaat, ' to ruin in 
 couforniity with your laws;' Plat. Apol. 82, c, /isra rou 
 voitou xui Sixaiou ^/ajv ftSMov /le Sexv deaixtuduveuav ^ ftei}' ifiwv 
 jiviadat fiij Sinata pouituopivtov, ' I suppose that I ought rather 
 to incur every risk in conformity with law and right, than 
 to take part with yon.' (See Passow's Lex.) 
 
 e. 'Against' Lastly, /lerd with the genitive, just as the 
 English 'with' and the Latin cum, is occasionally used in 
 the sense of ' against,' the notion of ' against' being sug- 
 gested by the known relations of the parties to the action 
 qualified by furd. ' E.g. Xen. de Rep. Laced, xi. 7, ftera too 
 napuTu^oi/Toz bfioiioz ftdj^etrdat, ' to fight with (against) any one 
 indiifercntly.' 
 
 In nil the above instances, the genitive with fierd lias the 
 meaning of 'with respect to;' that is, shows the specific 
 object to which the action or statement qualified by /lerd is 
 to be referred, so that it shall be understood of this, and not 
 of any other object. 
 
 n. Merd with the dative case. 
 
 Herd with the dative case is met with only in the poets, 
 cliiefly epic ; and in Homer occurs only with the plural and 
 with collective nouns. (See Passow's Lex.) 
 
 1. 'Among,' 'with.' a. Merd in the sense of 'among,' 
 and hence of 'with,' is used with the dative of persons: e.g. 
 II. i. 252, it is said of Nestor, una. rpadrotaiv dvaaaeu, 'he 
 ruled among or with the third generation.' Here, while 
 fierd retains its proper sense of 'among,' or may have 
 assigned to it that of 'with,' the dative case is used in its 
 common signification of the object ultimately affected, or 
 that fur which as an end any thing is or is done. The 
 
 Merd. 
 
 349 
 
 sense hero is, 'Nestor ruled in the midst ... for the third 
 generation.' Od. ix. 335, auTup iytb ni/urro; /jtera roTrnv 
 ilirt^^v, ' I chose myself as the fifth with (among) them." 
 Here, however, four having been choseu before, /jerJ, 
 though really signifying 'among,' 'with,' and thus showing 
 th.at the firth person chosen was to be considered of the 
 same company with the four, might, under the circum- 
 stances, be regarded as equivalent to 'after;' * I chose mj'self 
 as the fifth among, but after them.' Od. x. 203-4, . . . 
 haipouz I 9jpidpsov, dp^dv Si per' dpforipotdiu Srcaaaa, 'and 
 gave them with each a leader,' properly, 'and with (in 
 company with) them both sent a leader each;* II. i. 368, xai 
 Ta ftku 6(5 SdaaatiTo ptTu aipimv uUi; 'Axaiwv, ' ond these things 
 the sons of the Achsei rightly divided among themselves ;' 
 II. i. 503, Zeti ndrep, einore 3ij ae per' d&avdrotaeu Sutjaa, 'if I 
 have ever rendered thee help among the immortal gods.' 
 
 b. The preposition psrd, having the same sense, is used 
 also with the dative of the names of things : e.g. 11. xix. 
 110, 3f xiv in' ^pau rijids nioig perd noaat 'yuvaatdt;, ' whoever 
 shall this day full between the feet of a woman,' that is, 
 'shall fall in the midst . . . for the feet of a woman,' the 
 dative here, as in the case of persona, marking the object 
 for, or in the interest of which, any thing occurs or is done. 
 II. xxiii. 367, y^uirat S' ipfxitovro psrd xuoi^z dvipoto, 'and their 
 hair flew with the blasts of the wind ;' II. xv. 118, xsta&at 
 bpvo vexueaat ped' atpau xai xovir^atv, ' to lie with dead bodies 
 amid blood and dust.' 
 
 2. 'After.' Aferd, as used with the dative case, obtains 
 also, apparently at least, the sense of ' after.' E.g. Od. ix. 
 309-70, OuTiv ifto TtupaTou tdopat perd etc hdpotat, \ robe d' 
 diXouc npbadiv, ' I will cat Outis last, after his comrades, and 
 the rest of tlicm previously.' Here the meaning of psrd 
 seems to be that of ' after,' the term Kpdadev, which refers 
 to roof dXXouz, making it plain that, of the two parties into 
 which Polyphemus divides Outis and his comrades, one was 
 to be devoured previously, and Outis, of course, as being 
 the other party, afterwards ; and this seems to be expressed 
 by pnd. Admitting this, and it cannot be denied, it may 
 notwithstanding be affirmed that psrd has really the signifi- 
 
850 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 cation of ' with' or ' among.' For what Polyphemus says is, 
 that he will eat Outis with, in common with, his comrades ; 
 that is, him as well as them, so that they shall share a 
 common fate ; but adds, that ho will devour the rest before, 
 and him afterwards. The idea conveyed is that of two 
 parties to a transaction, the one of which is marked as being 
 a sharer with the other, and as stauding in such relations to 
 it as to admit the antecedence in point of time of the party 
 with which, it is associated, and, of course, its own coming 
 after. Outis is associated with his companions in Poly- 
 phemus's declaration that he will eat them all, and this is 
 expressed by fierd, 'with,' 'among;' but, according to the 
 arrangement of the Cyclops, they are to be eaten before, 
 and he is to be eaten afterwards. The notion of afterwards 
 is not, properly speaking, expressed by /ierd, but is sug- 
 gested by the relative position in regard to the order of time 
 which the parties to a common transaction are made to hold 
 to each other. It is true, then, according to this view, that 
 while /iezd of itself means no more than * among,' and ' with,' 
 'in common with,' it maybe used to express community 
 of action or condition under such circumstances that of the 
 parties associated one shall be understood to come after the 
 rest; aruli that, as the object which is marked as being 
 associated with others is constantly that one which, under 
 the circumstances, is to be understood as coming after those 
 with which it is associated, fierd, the sign of its being thus 
 associated, is naturally made to assume the sense of ' after.' 
 The only condition necessary in order that /xerd, ' among,' 
 •with,' 'in common with,' may bear for the time the sense 
 of ' after,' is that the object introduced into a number or 
 group of objects by furd as sharing in common with them, 
 shall at the time be regarded as standing after them in point 
 of time or order. 
 
 Here, also, the dative used with /xerd may be considered 
 as denoting the final object, that, namely, to which an 
 action or state is referred as that for which, in some sort, it 
 is or is done. 
 
 ■1 
 
 Afevd. 
 
 III. Merd with the accusative case. 
 
 351 
 
 1. 'Among.' il/£rc(, in the sense of 'among,' is used with 
 the accusative case both with and without motion preceding. 
 a. With motion preceding : e.g. II. xvii. 457-8, ro» 3' dnd 
 latTdwv xoviijv ouSdode PaXovrt \ pin*p' ifcpou &ohv iftfia fjierd 
 Tpioaz xai 'Aj^ouou!:, ' they bore the swift chariot among the 
 Trojans and the Achvcans.' The accusative has hero the 
 sense of ' as to,' ' as regards,' the meaning being, ' the horses 
 bore the swift chariot among, in the midst, ... as regards 
 the Trojans and the Achtcans.' II. xvii. 460, Zmrorc diaatov, 
 iuax' alyuitxhz ftezd X^l^^^t ' rushing with his horses, as a vul- 
 ture (darts) among geese ;' II. iv. 70, aHipa /idX iz orparbv kXdh 
 fUTo. Tfiioai; xai 'A^atouz, ' go quickly to the host among the 
 Trojans and Acheeans ;' II. i. 423, Zebc ydp iz 'Sxeavdu per' 
 dpupovat; Aidimc^oji: \ x^il^hz i^, ' for Zeus went yesterday to 
 Oceanus among the noble Ethiopians.' Here ptrd, as well 
 as ic, attaches itself to S^, and means ' among,' ' in the 
 midst,' while the accusative signifies 'as regards,' showing 
 that Zeus went ' in the midst,' ' among,' only ' as regarded 
 the Ethiopians.' Compare II. xvii. 581, and ii. 37 G, dc p£ 
 per' dnp^xTou; IptSaz xai veixea ^dXht. 
 
 b. Without motion : e.g. II. ii. 142-3, . . - rdiat 8k &u/ibv 
 ii/i anjdeaatu uptvev, | n-uir; pera itXrj9uv, ' he excited dusire in 
 the breasts of nil among the multitude ;' that is, ' excited 
 desire among or in the midst ... as regards the multitude,' 
 'as far as the multitude went;' Herod, vii. 16, raurjyw rijv 
 atpaTTjlaaiTjv xai rb xdpza etj^opev perd j^eTpu^, 'we were very 
 much occupied with this expedition,' literally, 'had it very 
 much in the midst of, between, our hands,' or 'had it very 
 much on our hands.' Xen. Ages. ii. 14, izap^v drj dedaaadat 
 . . . ij-^etpidea rd pkv X""/^"'} r« 8' iv aiopaai, to d' in perd ynitpaz, 
 ' one might sec daggers, some on the ground, some in the 
 bodies (of the slain), some still in the hands,' that is, ' in the 
 midst of, between, the hands.' 
 
 c. As an instance of this use of psrd in the sense of 
 'among,' may be mentioned its employment with the 
 accusative after a superlative to mark the number of 
 objects among which some one stands preeminent: e.g. II. 
 

 352 
 
 OF THK BEVEBAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 ix. 53, To5k% T.ipt fikv TcoXifup Ive xaprepoc iaai, \ xal fioui.^ 
 Ittra itdvTa: o/ajXixac InXeu dptazo^, ' the best among all your 
 fellowa.' 
 
 d. The sense of in the midst of would seem to belong to 
 perd ip tho phrase fH»' ^pipav, ' in the daytime," inUrdiu, 
 opposed to vunwp, ' in the night,' 'by night,* occurring com- 
 tnouly in Herodotus, and frequently met with in Attic 
 Greek. Thus, Xen. Anab. iv. 6, 12, wxtwp dpaxei pu^ov dv 
 xa npo nodwu bptprj «c, 7 /i**' ^pip<^ pax^^voz, ' one would see 
 better what was in his way by night when not fighting, than 
 in the daytime, if engaged in fighting ;■ that is, ' in the midst 
 of the day,' ' in the daytime," to which almost exactly cor- 
 responds the Latin inierdiu. Admitting pezd to have here 
 the sense of ' in the midst of,' the accusative has the meaning 
 of ' as to,' ' as regards ;' and the construction will be, ' in the 
 midst . '. . as regards the day.' Plat. Phsedr. 251, e, init., 
 xcd Ippavrfi ohaa oore voxxoa Swarat xa^eudav oore pe»' ^pipav 
 oh Sm » pivw, ' can neither sleep by night, nor in the day 
 remain wherever it may be,' (anywhere at all.) ^schin. 
 64, 36, StaXiyea&at tpyjoiv iaurtp wxziop robe dtohz oBf pzS-' 
 ^fJpJimopxet, 'he says that he meditates by night on the 
 gods by whom in the daytime he swears falsely;' Id. 72, 31, 
 fu»' ij/tipau itiap ix xifi 'EUdSoi iv^pnaaztu, ('Thebes) has in 
 OHC day been torn from Greece;' that is, 'in the midst of 
 one day.' The same interpretation is to be given when psrd 
 is used with fjidpav and a numeral; as, /«r« Tpirrjv ^pipav, 
 'in the third day," properly, 'amid the third day." If this 
 use of /urd with the accusative of a word expressing time 
 {ijpipav) be compared with that in which it is used with 
 oilier nouns in the accusative, as Tp&w;, xupaz, it will 
 seem quite as easy to admit that the preposition has the 
 meaning of 'in the midst of,' 'amid,' in the former case as 
 in the latter. If it is intelligible to say, &tdaaa»ai irX^iptdca 
 «er« y£r/>ac, 'to see daggers in the midst of (between) the 
 hands,' it ought to be equally so to say, rd npb itodmv bpav 
 pt9' ^pipau, 'to see obstructions in the midst of (in) the 
 day.' Any difficulty in the explanation of fied' ^pipav, 
 accordingly, may seem to belong more to the want in our 
 language of modes of expression in regard to time that cor- 
 
 Merd. 
 
 853 
 
 i 
 
 respond to ped^" ^pipav than to any thing in the Qreek con- 
 struction ptd^ i^pipau itself. 
 
 e. 'According to,' 'in conformity with,' 'after.' Mtrd 
 with the accusative case is sometimes used in the sense of 
 'according to,' 'in conformity with,' which may be also 
 expressed in English by ' after.' E.g. II. xv. 52, eHi^a psra- 
 orpiil'ue v6ov, pera abv xal ipov x^p, ' he would quickly change 
 his mind in conformity with your and my wishes ;' properly, 
 'with,' 'in common with,' 'sharing with,' and hence 'ac- 
 cording to,' ' in conformity with,' ' after.' So Od. viii. 582-8, 
 . . . oire pdkara \ rjiiaroi TtXi&ouat, ped^' td/jd re xat yivoz 
 oAuov, 'according to their race (blood) and fainilj-;' that is, 
 'having community with, standing with, or being in the 
 midst of, them ... as regards their race and family,' 
 
 /. ' To,' 'against.' In a variety of examples perd is used 
 with the accusative case, especially after verbs of motion, to 
 mark the object with which another, the subject of the 
 nfiirination, is brought into company, whether in friendly 
 relations or otherwise, where the rendering in English is 
 simply by ' to' or ' against.' E.g. II. x. 73, aurap b ^rj (>' iivat 
 peTfi Niazopa rrotpiua Xawv, ' he proceeded to go to (visit) 
 Nestor.' Here the proper office of /«r«£ is to express the 
 idea of being 'with,' the having conipunioiiship ; that is, it 
 marks the same relation in regard to one pcrHon or thing 
 that in the signification of 'among,' 'in the midst," it con- 
 veys in regard to many. Just as peru Tptoaz iivat, ' to go 
 among, in the midst of, the Trojans," gives the idea of going 
 into tiie midst of, and so forming one of the number or host 
 of Trojans, iivm peril Niaropa, ' to go to Nestor," conveys the 
 notion of going to Nestor so as to be in his company. In 
 the latter case, however, the use of the English language 
 does not represent distinctly' this meaning of perd, but is 
 content with naming the object merely to which the motion 
 is directed, or with regard to which it is affirmed. We 
 translate fifj Uuat ptra Niaropa by 'he proceeded to go to 
 Nestor,' whereas, if the full sense were represented, we 
 should say, ' he proceeded to go so as to be with, in the 
 company of, Nestor.' In II. xviii. 188, ;ro>f r' dp fw peri 
 mkov; ' how, then, shall I go into the battle?' the sense of 
 
 23 
 
4 OF TOB 8EVEHAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 rd IB more manifest, and the sentence might be rendered 
 ' 'how shall I go into the midst of the battle ?' 
 'Against.' In such examples ai^ II. t. 152, p^ dk fieri 
 ivdov re dotovA re 0aivoKoz uU, ' he (Tydeides) went agaipst 
 mthuB and Thoon, sons of Phsenops,' the sense of /terd is 
 e same as in the preceding case ; namely, it expresses the 
 ing in the company of, mingling with, and having a share 
 the same action or condition with others. When the 
 rtics between whom fterd shows this relation to exist are 
 imiciil, and the action or state in which they share in 
 mnioii is such as belongs to enemies, the sense of 'against' 
 attributed to /xerd; but it is obvious, from what has been 
 d, tliat this s^nse is due to the known mutual relations of 
 B parties brought into company or community of action 
 th each other, and not to /^rd, which merely indicates 
 K being ' with,' ' in company or community of action with,' 
 lether the persons forming the group be friends or foes, 
 hctlicr [terd is to be rendered by ' to' or ' against' must be 
 termined in every case by the context, that is, by a refer- 
 ice to the mutual relations of the parties having the con- 
 iction expressed by fterd, and to the nature of the action 
 state which they may be considered as sharing. In the 
 ample above cited, Tydeides is represented as raging in 
 ttle on the side of the Qroeks like a lion, and, after slaying 
 c and another of the Trojan leaders, as going into the 
 iipany of, and sharing a common action with, Xanthus 
 J Thoon, and other Trojan foes. They being foes, and 
 ! common action to share which ho comes being the 
 liting in battle, it is manifest that Tydeides is brought 
 o their company, not for friendly purposes, but to fight 
 th or against them. It may be observed, here, that the 
 tin cum and the English 'with,' equally with fterd, have a 
 jfold employment in regard to friendly and unfriendly 
 ■ties and actions; so that pit</nare cum aliquo, and 'to fight 
 h a person,' may mean, according to the relations of the 
 •tics, ' to fight on the side of a person,' or ' to fight against 
 lerson.' 
 
 I. 'After.' Merd with the accusative is used also in the 
 ise of ' after;' and this in two ways chiefly, to express the 
 
 Merd. 
 
 365 
 
 is S.o^im ni'^ the accusative case denotes the object which 
 attcr, for: e.g. II. xvii. 605-6, 'E^ropa 3' '/dofteX uera 
 
 hud rushed after Leitus.' Here the sense of fterd is LI 
 mny the «ame as .n the immediately preceding case, /J,- Sk 
 f T«<d w' """^ "''^ ^" "iterpreted in the same way. Od. 
 ; r i' '"'^""' ^''^ "'"'""' '"""^"^ ^'^' dUo»p6oui dv»pd,n^r, I 
 iz leftiy fteri fa^6^, ir*" S' aX^wva aidr,pov, 'sailing after 
 copper, or 'for copper.' Eurip. Ale 66-7, £4-iyi«,c 
 nep^'uvro, .Knuov ,tira\S^rjpa, 'Eurystheus having sent him 
 after the chariot with horses.' In the last two examples, 
 the proper force oi fterd is not at once so obvious, the mean! 
 H.g ot the proposition having bo entirely vanished out of 
 view, at least in the Engliah rendering. Looking, however, 
 to the previous mstances in which the proper sense of the 
 preposition, although hardly discernible at the first view is 
 yet made manifest by a more careful examination, it maybe 
 not unfairly surmised that, here also, however hidden from 
 siglit, It may be really involved. When ^« h' Hum fterd 
 Nearopa, II. x. 73, is translated by 'he proceeded to go to 
 see) Nestor," the force of fterd is, nevertheless, that of ' with ' 
 into the company of,' and the preposition is there seen to 
 have Its proper sense, or, at least, one immediately derived 
 Irom It. Now, in this very example, it appears from the 
 af ter-interview of Agamemnon and Nestor that Agamemnon 
 really went to bring Nestor forth from his tent, or went 
 alter bim. In line 97, Agamemnon says to Nestor, 3eop' ir 
 ro.c <pvktua, xaralieiofteu, S.fpa Idwpev, x.r.X., 'let us descend 
 among the watches, that we may see,' &c. ; and, line 108 
 Nestor answers aai Sh ftaX' S^oft' irti, « I will, by all means 
 follow you ; and again, line 126, Agamemnon urges him to 
 come forth, dW ropeu, 'well, let us go.' Thus, seen in its 
 connection, /9x; ^' U.at peru Niaropa might be rendered, 'he 
 pro<.-eeded to go after Nestor.' And then it would be plain 
 that while the proper sense is, 'he went so as to be with in 
 company with, Nestor,' the attendant circumstances show 
 
356 
 
 OF TUB SEVERAL PKEPOSITIOSS. 
 
 that this going into tho company of Nestor was with an 
 aim or object which we express in English by ' going after,' 
 'going for.' If so, the sense of 'after,' that is, of aim or 
 object had in view, attributed to /tfrd, is due, not to the 
 preposition itself, retaining, as it does, its proper sig- 
 nification of 'with,' 'in company with,' but to the cir- 
 cumstances in which it stands; just as in /3^ dk fura 
 Edvdov, fierd obtains the meaning of 'against' from tho 
 known relations of the parties and from the nature of the 
 
 action. 
 
 If this be admitted as the proper explanation of the origin 
 of the meaning 'after,' 'for,' when attributed to ftezd and 
 the accusative of a person, it may also be admitted for that 
 of tho same sense of ;i£r«f when used with the accusative of 
 a thing. The only diflerence is that a personal object easily 
 admits the idea of ' with,' in the sense of companionship, 
 while the inanimate object can allow this notion of 'with 
 to be connected with it only in a modified or accommodated 
 way, or else takes the meaning of 'in the midst of,' where 
 the personal object has that of 'with' or community and 
 companionship, muu psri t'^ov cannot well mean ' to sail 
 BO as to be with, in the company of, copper,' as Uvat (itxa 
 Nearopa means 'to go bo as to be with, in the company of, 
 Nestor;' but it may readily have the sense of 'to sail so as 
 to be in the midst of copper,' that is, 'in the midst • • • ns 
 far as copper is concerned.' So far, then, ,azd may bo said 
 to have the same meaning essentially in livm fiera Nearopa 
 and in jrA«v ^era xa}x6v, being in the former equivalent to 
 'with," in the company of,' and in the latter to 'in the 
 midst ' For the rest, it is as easy in the one case as in the 
 other to conceive that the sense of 'after,' 'for,' is suggested 
 by the circumstances in which the preposition /i^xd is em- 
 ployed, that is, by the relation of the party performing the 
 action, and of the action itself, to the object of the action. 
 If the going so as to be 'with, in the company of,' Nestor, 
 is understood, from the circumstances in which it is per- 
 formed, to mean, in fact, the going 'after' or 'for' Nestor, 
 80 may the sailing so as to be 'in the midst of copper be 
 understood, from the circumstances of the case, namely, 
 
 MeTd. 
 
 357 
 
 when a merchant is sailing into the midst of copper, laden 
 with a cargo of iron which he seeks to exchange for copper, 
 to rneun really the sailing 'after' or 'for' copper. 
 
 b. 'After,' subsequent to. Mtxd with the accusative ia 
 used also in the sense of ' after,' denoting tho being subse- 
 quent to in point of time or order. Thus, furd is so em- 
 ployed with verbs signifying to follow, and the like, where 
 it may be rendered in English by 'after,' 'next after,* 
 ' behind.' (See Passow's Lex. s. v. iii.) E.g. II. xiii. 491-3, 
 . . . auTiip inuza \ Xaoi inovd-' i>aei ze fisza xzUov itmezo pajXa | 
 zoiiiev ix ^ozduij^, ' then the people followed, as sheep after 
 (behind) the bell-wether follow the shepherd from the pas- 
 ture.' In such examples, the proper meaning of /ttzd is 
 'with,' ' in the company of,' a meaning derived immediately 
 from that of ' in the midst,' ' among.' But, while this is the 
 only idea here expressed by fiezd, the relation of ' with,' ' in 
 company with,' 'of the same number,' which it denotes, 
 does not exclude the notion of a part of the company or 
 group being before and another part behind or after in 
 point of time or order. This was seen in considering /xszd 
 as used with the dative in the meaning of 'after.' The 
 obvious relations in which one part of a company stands to 
 the other parts may suggest the idea of its being cither 
 subsequent to them in point of time, or coming after in 
 respect of order, that is, of 'after' or 'behind,' and this idea 
 may be expressed in English even to the suppression of the 
 proper sense of ' with,' ' in company with.' Thus, in the 
 example above cited, the sheep follow 'with,' 'in company 
 with,' the bell-wether, they with Lim belonging to, or 
 rather forming, a flock ; and this is all that pezd expresses. 
 But the moat familiar idea of the relation of the sheep of a 
 flock (/i7^).a) to the bell-wether (xzlXoc) is that of the latter 
 as leader and of the former as following after or behind. 
 Hence, when it is said of the sheep that they follow the 
 shepherd from the pasture luzaniXov, 'with,' 'in company 
 with,' the bell-wether, we properly enough, according to the 
 English use, and in conformity with the known relative 
 position or order of the parties, say that the sheep follow tho 
 shepherd ' after' or ' behind' the bell-wether, and this though 
 
OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 proper meaning of fterd be thus wholly left out of view.* 
 ipare H. xviii. 320-2, . . . 6 8i t' Arfymat Zarepoz mwv 
 liia Si t' dpie' imjl9e /ur' dvipiK 'x"'' ipiuv&v, \ et no9tv 
 poty 'he (the lion), coming subsequently (too late), is 
 iged, and visits many a vale, searching after the tracks of 
 man,' that is, following after and searching or trailing. 
 e the proper sense of /«r<£ is ' among,' ' amid.' The lion 
 ipresentcd as hunting, searching, or trailing ' among the 
 ks of the man.' But the whole context, consistently 
 I the habits of the lion, gives the idea of the lion hunting 
 leeking for a man by following after and tracing his 
 IS, as the dog trails his game. And, allowing this notion 
 lecome the prominent and prevailing one, wc properly 
 ier /icr' ixvi iptuvwv, not by 'hunting among, in the 
 Ist of, the tracks,' but by 'hunting or searching after 
 liind) the tracks.' Merd, it is true, might here be under- 
 jd in the sense of ' after,' ' for,' that is, as indicating the 
 ect had in view; and then the interpretation of the 
 position would be according to what has been said in 
 I preceding paragraph. An unequivocal example of 
 d in the sense of 'after,' 'subsequently to,' is seen in II. 
 ii. 183, np6ffde/iiv lint^ec, [lerd 8k vifoc elnero nelfiv, 'before 
 Qt the horsemen, and after followed a cloud of infantry.' 
 e antecedent term 7tp6a9e shows that furd has the sense 
 'after;' and yet this meaning springs only from the 
 sumstanccs furnished by the context, the proper signifi- 
 ion of lurd, here also, being 'with,' or 'in the same 
 ipany or host.' The body of the Myrmidons, ordered by 
 (lilies, rush forward in chariots, on horses, and on foot: the 
 t adds, that of this host the horsemen went before, and 
 
 infantry followed with them, in the same company or 
 t; but, if the horsemen went before, plainly the in- 
 try, though of the same host, came after. 
 . ' After,* subsequent to. And so, generally, in describing ■ 
 amber of events forming a connected series or group, 
 so that some one or more of the number shall bo subse- 
 snt to the rest in point of time or order, associated with 
 
 rest, and of the same number, but following them, /«er«{ 
 th the accusative case is employed to mark this after- 
 
 Mizd. 
 
 359 
 
 t 
 
 , coming event as belonging to the group or series. The fact 
 of its being after, and not before or simply of the number, 
 is gathered from the context. Mnd does no more than 
 show that it belongs to the series, or is to be counted among 
 the number composing it. Thus, Xen. Anab. vii. 3, 13, 
 after reciting the meeting with Seuthes, and the circum- 
 stances of the interview, the demands of the Greeks, and the 
 promiscH of the king, the historian adds, find xmza idtdoro 
 Xiyetv rip ^ouXofUvip, ' after this leave was granted to any that 
 pleased to speak.' The leave to speak, whoever pleased, is 
 associated in the narrative with the series of facts already 
 recounted, so aa to form one of the number, and to be 
 counted 'among' them or 'with' them. This is expressed 
 by perd prefixed to raura, the latter term being the sign or 
 representative of the facts just recited. Literally, the sense 
 would be, ' among ... as regards these facts.' But the 
 fact thus introduced by pexd is, by the very order of the 
 events in the narrative, shown to be subsequent in regard 
 to time, and hence is in English connected by the term 
 ' after.' The Greek method of connecting an event actually 
 subsequent in order of time with a preceding series, us here 
 seen, is to mark it so as to be counted among the series ; 
 this is done by p^rd, 'among,' 'with;' the English method, 
 as here seen, is to ninrk the subsequent event us being 
 reached by proceeding from the antecedent series ; this is 
 done by 'after,' signifj'ing relatively 'oflf' or away from, said 
 with respect to the preceding series of events. 
 
 d. 'After,' 'with.' But pezd with the accusative is not 
 only thus employed when there are several events with 
 which a subsequent one is to be associated, but also when 
 a single fact is mentioned with which another of after- 
 occurrence is to be connected as belonging to the same 
 narrative. Thus, Xcn. Anab. vii. 3, 7, p&Ta zouto Sevoip&v 
 pkv iJ^-eTro, oi d' etnovzo, ' after this Xenophon led the way, 
 and they followed.' The preceding narrative contained a 
 speech of Xenophon to the assembled army, and the fact 
 that Xenophon led the way and the rest followed is marked 
 by pizd as forming a part of the recital. Properly, p^zd 
 TouTo signifies ' with this,' ' ia association with this,' that is, 
 
360 
 
 OF TUB SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Merd. 
 
 361 
 
 •with ... as regards this.' That tho preposition is ren-> 
 dercd by ' after,' and not by * with,' is owing to the fact 
 that the time of Xenophon's leading the way and the rest 
 following is subsequent to the speech with which it is 
 grouped in the narrative. In this, as in the preceding 
 examples, the accusative used with //errf has the sense of 
 'as to,' *as regards," marking to what extent, and in what 
 regard, the action or statement qualified by furd is to be 
 considered as affirmed ; as, in fiera touto 6 fikv fjxtno, his 
 leading the way is to be understood as belonging to the 
 same group of events ... as far as regards the preceding 
 speech. 
 
 e. 'After,' 'next after,' commonly with a superlative. 
 Of tho same nature, and requiring the same explanation, is 
 lurd. with the accusative usually following a superlative, 
 and marking an object as being 'after,' 'next after,' an- 
 other in any property, as number, rank, and the like.' E.g. 
 II. ii. 673-4, Ntfttitz, 8c xdUtaroz dvr,p imb " Ihov I^X^ev \ trnv 
 iXXtov JauMov fxer' d/jtu/iova Iljjkdaiva, ' the handsomest of all 
 the Danai after next to, the son of Peleus.' Here the 
 proper sense of fterd is ' with,' ' of the same company with ;' 
 so that, the accusative nrjXeiutva being added in the sense of 
 'as regards the son of Peleus,' Nireus is said to be the 
 handsomest of all the Danai, with, in company with, that 
 is, in comparison with, the son of Peleus. And so far as 
 the preposition itself is concerned, nay, more, so far as the 
 mere tern»a with wHtch it is connected are all together con- 
 cerned, this is the only sense conveyed. The idea of Nireus 
 being the handsomest of all the Danai only 'after' or ' next 
 after' the son of Peleus is merely inferred from the circum- 
 stances of tho case, especially from the unqualified pre- 
 emiucnuo accorded by the poet to the son of Peleus in 
 regard to personal qualities. This was a thing so fully 
 admitted in the poet's mind, that when Nireus is said to be 
 the handsomest of all the Danai, and it is then added, 
 • with,' ' in company with' (jierd), the son of Peleus, this, so 
 far from placing them on an absolute equality and ex- 
 cluding precedency, actually suggests the superiority of the 
 son of Peleus and the inferiority of Nireus. So, in Herod. 
 
 . 
 
 T 
 
 V. 3, dfir^ixwu dh Idvoz fiiyurTov iau, fierd ys ' hduhz ndvrtou 
 dv&immov, < the nation of the Thracians is the largest of all 
 men, after tho Indians at least.' The Indi are assumed to 
 be the most numerous nation in the world; and when it is 
 stated that the Thrakes are the most numerous of all men 
 in company with the Indi, it is readily inferred that the com- 
 panionship is one, not of superiority, but of inferiority on 
 their part. Besides, the intended superiority of the Indi 
 . and inferiority of the Thrakes, while they are put into the 
 same group, is suggested by the very fact of iierd being 
 employed to introduce the latter into the same group with 
 the former, it being almost necessarily implied, as has been 
 shown above, that the object brought in by lard comes 
 after and allows tho precedence to that into whose company 
 or group it is brought. Ilcrod. iv. 53, rirapTo^ Sk Boftua&ivtjz 
 Ttora/iSz, oc iuTt /iifiaroz ftsri ' larpov toutsiov, 'the fourth 
 river is the Borysthenes, which after the Ister is the largest 
 of these rivers.' As the historian considers the Ister to be 
 the largest river of all that he knew, see iv. 48 and 50, the 
 Borj'sthcnes must be understood to be the largest of the 
 rivers referred to in common with the Ister {jxezd "larpov), 
 yet so as to yield to it the precedency or come 'after' it. 
 
 That /lerd when used after the superlative has really the 
 sense of 'with,' 'in company with,' and that the idea of 
 'after' is to be inferred from the relative position of the 
 parties, might be further shown from the examples in which 
 perd so employed actually retains the meaning of 'among.' 
 E.g. II. ix. 54, {TudeiSrj) . . . /9oo^j pErd ndvrac 6/s^/(txac 
 inktu dptaroz, ' the best in counsel among all your fellows,' 
 that is, 'the best of all,' 'the best compared with all.' 
 Here, there being nothing in the condition of the parties 
 with whom Tydeus is associated to mark precedency on 
 their part, except the suggestion above referred to as con- 
 tained in the mere fact of perd introducing an after- 
 coming object among a prior group, while, on the other 
 hand, the superlative attached to Tydeides presupposes 
 his preeminence, pnd retains its sense of 'among,' and 
 with tho accusative denotes the company over which ho 
 has superiority. 
 
362 
 
 OF THK BBVKRAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 TABLE 0» TUB 8IONIFI0ATIONB AND C3B 0? |i(r< WITH CASES. 
 
 Blgnlllatloiu of luri. 
 
 Qeuitln: 'with rapcct 
 to.' 
 
 1.0. 'In tha mldii, 
 ' nmuDg.* 
 h. 'With,' 'of tha 
 lauia cumpauy;' 
 ihariDg. 
 
 I. a. 
 
 X ' Anar* tvnongf 
 
 Willi.) 
 
 a. Hiibieciuent lo. 
 h. Aim. 
 
 In the midit of^ 
 'nmoDg.' 
 
 b. 'With,' 'In com- 
 
 mon with.* 
 
 c. 'Of tha partx of,' 
 
 'on tha altlo of.' 
 
 d. 'Wllh;'atl(indlng 
 
 circumatauoua. 
 
 I. 'With;' acrom. 
 pauylng mt 
 rir agt>nt. 
 /. 'With," 111 confor- 
 mity with.' 
 
 g, 'Agnluat.' 
 
 DatlTa: 'for.' 
 
 AcniaatlTa : ' aa to,"u 
 regards.* 
 
 I. a. 'Among.' 
 t. 'With.' 
 
 l.n. 
 b. 
 
 'Amonp;.' 
 ■Ill' (amid); «.g. 
 (iiS* iiitpan. 
 
 
 t. 
 
 'AcconllnKto/'ln 
 ciinrurudly 
 with,' • a(t«r.' 
 
 
 d. 
 
 'Ti»,' 'uKuliwt.' 
 
 After,' of tima or 
 
 2. a. 
 
 ' Aftar,' iif linio or 
 
 ordar. 
 
 
 order. 
 
 
 6. 
 
 'Afli'r,"for;'alm, 
 oliject had In 
 
 TllfW. 
 
 
 c. 
 
 'After,' 'next af- 
 ter;' with a BU- 
 perlatlva. 
 
 " Oiziade, and before vowels Smadev. 
 'Omade, before vowels omadev, and having an epic form 
 offf(?£ and ontSev, has probably the same radical with omc, 
 'retribution,' and occurs in the compounds dvomv, 'back- 
 wards,' xarSTiiv, 'behind,' 'after,' fieroTttv,' 'behind.' Some 
 consider it to be connected with inofiat, sequor, ' I follow,' 
 others with &r' in oipo/tai, &/>, 'the seeing.' See Tassow's 
 Lex. 8. V. The etymology of om<t9e is, however, uncertain, 
 there being nothing satisfactory in what is here stated. 
 
 1. 'Behind,' 'at the back.' 'Omade has the sense of 
 'behind,' ' at the back^ and is used with the genitive case : 
 e.g. II. xvii. 468, arrj 8' oizidsv Stfpoto, 'he stood behind the 
 chariot,' or, ' at the back of the chariot;' II. xiii. 536, onta^e 
 fuLxri^ liHi itroU/wio | SaTuaav, 'they stood behind (in the 
 rear of) the battle.' Sometimes it stands after the noun: 
 e.g. II. xxiv. 15, "ExTopa d' ehieodat dr^adaxeTo Siifpot) Smai^ev, 
 ' he wished to drag Hector behind his chariot." (See Taa- 
 Bow's Lex. 8. v.) 
 
 2. 'After,' 'in future,' 'hereafter.' 'OrctaDehaa also the 
 meaning of ' after,' ' in future,' ' hereafter,' opposed to aurixa, 
 'immediately.' E.g. Od. ii. 270, oW dmdev xaxb: iaaeat, 
 « tbou wilt not bo a coward hereafter, in the future ;' II. ix. 
 
 'Ontade: Ilapd. 
 
 863 
 
 619,- j/ov S'ina r' abuxa TtoUa di8o7, to. 8' oma9ev [miar^, ' both 
 now presently gives much, and made promises for the 
 future.' In this second case omtrde would claim to be re- 
 garded as simply adverbial ; but, so far aa the nature and 
 ineaning of the word itself are concerned, the distinction 
 which is made between omade as used with a case, and the 
 same word as employed without a case, can scarcely be con- 
 sidered of any importance. (See Pasaow's Lex.) 
 
 The' genitive case used with 5nia9e has the meaning of 
 ' with respect to,' showing to what specific object the pre- 
 vious statement is to be referred. Thus, in the first exam- 
 ple, arrj 8' omdtv 8'tippoio, the meaning ia, 'he stood behind 
 . . , with respect to the chariot.' 
 
 TADLE OF TUB BIONIFICATIONS AND USE OV feiaSi WITH ITB CABS. 
 
 Significatlona of ftriafc. 
 
 OanitlTa : 'with reapaot to.' 
 
 1. 'Behind,' 'at the back.' 
 
 2. 'After,' 'in the future,' 
 
 * hereafter,' used adver- 
 bially. 
 
 'Behind," at the back of.' 
 
 Ilapd. 
 
 In epic poetry icdp and itapai occur as variations of izapd. 
 Of the etymology of rcapd nothing satisfactory, so far aa the 
 writer knows, has yet been determined. 
 
 Significations of napd. 
 1. a. ' Alongside,' ' beside,' ' by the side of.' The primary 
 signification of napd ia 'alongside,' 'beside,' 'by the side 
 of,' aa aeon both in compounda and in the use of napd with 
 the cases of nouns. Thus, in napa^dUetv, ' to cast along- 
 side,' ' to throw by the side of, or beside :' e.g. II. viii. 
 503—4, . . . drrip xaXitrptj^a^ cTtnou^ | I6aa&' 6n' iS d^iwv, napA 
 8i a<piat ^Mer' i8(o8^v, ' loose the horses from the chariots, 
 and throw food for them alongside;' Thuc. ii. 77, tpopowrez 
 8k ZXr]z tpaxiXouz napi^akXov dnb too ^Stpaxoz, 'carrying fagots 
 of wood, they would cast them alongside ;' napal^euyvuvat, 
 ' to yoke beside ;' napadaXdomoz, ' by the sea-aide,' ' dwelling 
 along the sea ;' napaxa^ij^uv, ' to seat beside.' So likewise 
 
864 
 
 OF THB SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 with cases of nouns: e.g. Herod, ix. 15, xaTiTeiue dk {rh 
 OTparimedov) Iz Tiyv IlXarattSa -pffV napii rbv 'AauTtov noruftbu 
 TtT(f]'ftivou, ' druwn up along the river Asopus ;' Xen. Anab. 
 i. 2, 13, ivrauda f^v napa r^v b8ov xftijvij ■^ MiSou xaXouidvij, < there 
 was a fountain bj' the roadside ;' Id. i. 3, 24, i/isiuau dk xai 
 oi nafia tt^u ddXazrav oixoiivrtz ^v S6)mz xai Iv 'laaoTz, ' those 
 who dwell along the sea,' ' by the sea-side.' 
 
 b. 'During.' A mere variety of this signification of 
 ' alongside' is that of Muring,' arising from the idea of one 
 thing keeping alongside of another, and so maintaining an 
 equal measure with it ; as, Ttapd riju ^/lipau, ' during tlic day,' 
 tliat is, ' running alongside of, and having the same measure 
 with, the day :' e.g. Demosth. 395, 11, napa rauTr^v ttjv dico- 
 iijpiav, < during this sojourn abroad.' 
 
 c. ' With,' ' at,' ' near.' Nearly connected with the mean- 
 ingof beside,' 'alongside,' is that of 'with,' 'at,' ' near,' which 
 vapa sometimes has, the transitioi^ being very ready from 
 the idea of ' beside' an object to tlio being ' with,' ' at,' ' near' 
 it. E.g. II. i. 2G, /iij ffe, yipov, xoilrjoiv ij-w napa ur^uai xcj^eiw, 
 Mest I find thee at the hollow ships;' Herod, viii. 140, 
 TTUuddueode Sk xai r^v vw nap iftk iouaau duva/uv, ' the force 
 that is now with me ;' Id. iv. 87, ooroc dk XiSo^ xarthetpdi^ 
 napa. tou Jtoyuaou rijv vr^ov, ' at the temple of Dionysus.' 
 
 d. 'Among.' Amere variety of the sense just mentioned 
 is that of ' among' or ' with,' wliich napa obtains when used 
 in such circumstances that the being 'alongside,' 'with,' 
 ' near,' relates to a nitraber of objects : e.g. Od. i. 154, 3c /5' 
 ^u8i napa pi/r^ar^patv dvdyrg,- ' he sang among the suitors by 
 compulsion.' Here the meaning of napd is properly * by 
 the side of,' ' near,' ' with ;' and the notion of ' among' by 
 which it may be rendered in English is due to the plurality 
 of objects represented by pv^arijpatv, and does not strictly 
 belong to napd. 
 
 e. ' To' (alongside of.) Ilapd is very commonly used with 
 an accusative case after verbs of motion seemingly in the 
 sense of ' to,' by which it is rendered in English. In such 
 cases, however, the proper meaning of napd is 'alongside,' 
 ' near,' that of ' to' being due to the accusative case as con- 
 nected with a verb of motion, and as marking the object 
 
 Napd. 
 
 865 
 
 reached by it, or the extent to which it goes. The proper 
 significution of napd with an accusative case attending a 
 verb of motion would be ' to go,' for example, * alongside 
 ... as regards.' The English use compels us, in rendering 
 napd thus employed, to omit its proper notion of ' alongside.' 
 E.g. II. i. 347, TO) d' uiiuz cTTjv napa v^ac ^Axaiaiv, ' they went 
 again to the ships of the Acha;i,' that is, ♦ they went along- 
 side or near . . . as regards the ships of the Achoei;' Od. i. 285, 
 xei9eu 8k I'ndpTrjvSs (Hdi) napa ^avdbv Mei/ikaov, ' thence go 
 to Sparta, to Menelaus,' properly, 'go alongside, near, . . . 
 as regards Menelaus;' Herod, i. 36, dnixopevot napa tov 
 Kpoiaov, 'having reached Croesus,' properly, 'having arrived 
 alongside, near, at, ... as regards Croesus ;' Id. i. 86, fffoxov 
 napa Kupov, ' they brought him to Cyrus,' properly, ' they 
 brought him alongside, near, at, ... as regards Cyrus,' or, 
 'brought him beside Cyrus.' So in compounds; as, napa- 
 xaiuu, 'to call to one's side,' 'to summon;' napakap§dvetv, 
 ' to take to one's side,' ' to receive.' 
 
 /. 'From (alongside).' In very many examples, napd, 
 occurring with the genitive case as the qualification of verbs 
 of motion, has apparently the signification of ' from,' and 
 is 80 rendered. E.g. II. xxi. 443-4, . . . Sr' Af^vopt Auopi- 
 8ouu I nap debz IX&ovre^ 9/^TBuaapeu ei^ ii/iauzov, ' having come 
 from Jupiter;' Herod, viii. 140, djjeXiJi f*« '^°/'« (iaadffiz, 'a 
 message has arrived from the king.' And so in a number 
 of compounds; as, napaepuv, 'to take from,' that is, 'from 
 beside;' napaiTiiadat, 'to beg from,' In such instances, 
 however, napd has, in fact, its proper meaning of ' alongside,' 
 ' beside,' that of ' from' being suggested by the circum- 
 stances in which the preposition is employed, chiefly by the 
 known relation in which the parties to the action stand to 
 each other. Thus, in the example cited from Homer, when 
 Poseidon says that he and Apollo came (to Ilium) and 
 served Laomedon, and the coming is further qualified by 
 the addition of napd, 'alongside,' so as to mean a coming 
 that is alongside ; and when this, again, is more precisely 
 defined by the genitive J«5f, « with respect to Jupiter,' thus 
 giving the idea of ' a coming that is alongside in respect of 
 Zeus;' it is naturally understood from the circumstances of 
 
36G 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 the action, and from the mutual relation of the parties to it, 
 that the coming is ' from heaide Zeus,' and not ' to hesido Zeus.' 
 For, while the motion contained in ^^Wwec will allow either 
 • to' or 'from' to be supplied with izapd, * alongside,' it is not 
 only fitting to the relation existing between the parties to the 
 action or motion that Poseidon and Apollo, as inferior to him, 
 should come on their errand to Ilium from Zeus, but the other 
 words of the sentence show that the object reached by the 
 coming was Ilium, and thus render it certain that, in the con- 
 nection in which it stands, the motion qualified by itapd and 
 the genitive is one 'from' and not 'to' Zeus. The inferred 
 sense of ' from' is alone expressed in the English rendering; 
 the idea of 'beside,' 'alongside,' contained in ffo/>rf, being 
 wholly omitted. If it be not true that mipd has obtained its 
 apparent sense of 'from' in the way here stated, then this 
 meaning, it being utterly inconsistent with the otlier signi- 
 fications of Tiaftd, and therefore not to be referred to the pre- 
 position, at least with any degree of plausibility, must be 
 attributed to the genitive case. But this case, rightly 
 understood, has no such signification, any more than the 
 preposition has, and, of course, cannot communicate it to 
 rcixpd. The only meaning that the genitive can convey, con- 
 sistently with its use elsewhere, is that of ' with respect to ;' 
 that is, it can only show that the action as qualified by napd 
 is to be understood as having special reference to the noun 
 marked by the genitive ; that, for example, ' the coming along- 
 side or beside,' in the instance cited above, is to be taken as 
 having specific reference to Zeus. Then, the action being 
 referred to a specific person, if it be of such a nature as 
 fitly to come from him, and if his relative position and rank 
 be sueli that the action may suitably proceed from him, it 
 may be aHsunied that it intended to be so understood. The 
 coming of I'oseidon and Apollo to Ilium as servants of 
 Laomedon being referred to Zeus, and it being he alone 
 that could send them upon such a degrading service, it is 
 at once inferred tliat the coming was 'from' him; and it is 
 then true that this idea of 'from' is derived from the relative 
 position of the parties to the action, regard being had to 
 
 77a<xi. 
 
 3G7 
 
 the character of the action, and not from the genitive by 
 itself considered, nor yet from the preposition napd. 
 
 That the origin here given of the signification of ' from,' 
 as attributed to 7:apd with the genitive case, is the true one, 
 might be further shown to be probable from the fact already 
 noticed, that xaxd, 'down,' is used with the genitive case 
 both in the sense of ' down from' and ' down upon.' In 
 that case, it is plain that the idea of 'from' and that of 
 ' upon' are to be inferred from the circumstances in which 
 xazd stands, and that if the signification of 'from' be 
 attributed to the genitive case, that of ' upon' must.equally, 
 and for the same reason, be given to this case. But this 
 latter is by no one pretended to be among the meanings of 
 the genitive. A like confirmation might be derived from 
 the use of npoz with the genitive in the sense of ' from ;' but 
 it can hardly be required. 
 
 An additional example or two may be given, in which 
 Ttapd, having apparently the signification of ' from,' is joined 
 with the genitive case of the object from which, more obvi- 
 ously than in the examples already cited, the action proceeds. 
 Thus, ^schin. 23, 31, xpaupj noUrj napa twv Sexaartov Aizav- 
 T^asTfu, ' a great outcry from the dicastoe will meet him ;' Id. 
 G2, 3, Jtap' ixovTwv zwv ' EXX'^vmv dnoXa^iiv Trpi ^}-epouiav, 'to 
 receive the hegemony from the Greeks voluntarily bestow- 
 ing if 
 
 2. 'Like,' 'equivalent to,' 'as much as,' 'by,' 'lacking,' 
 various forms of comparison of values, &c. From the proper 
 sense of 'alongside,' 'beside,' napd obtains the notion of 
 comparison, which is readily suggested by placing objects 
 alongside of each other. (See I'assow's Lexicon, s. v.) This 
 meaning ofm/pd will vary with the varying results obtained 
 by comparing objects according to this method, and is 
 expressed in English by such terms as 'like,' 'equivalent 
 to,' 'as much as,' 'by,' 'lacking.' Thus, in a number of 
 compounds, as, TtapajXuipsiv, ' to carve alike,' ' to counterfeit,' 
 napaSuxvuvai, 'to show alongside,' 'to show us a pattern,' 
 itapddsq-/M, ' an example,' ' a pattern,' ' something exhibited 
 alongside for comparison.' And so in a variety of uses with 
 tho nccusutive case : e.g. Xen. Mcmor. i. 4, 14, napu rai dXXa 
 
368 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 faia woTiep dsoi of dv^pamoi ^tmtuouot, 'compared with the 
 rest of auimals ;' Orat. Att. 1416, 21, r^v ^iXoaoipiav iav fii/ 
 Kopa luxftov iJj7J<nj, ' if you do not consider philosophy u thing 
 of little moment,' that is, * a thing that is placed alongside 
 of, and so is counted equal to, what is small.' 
 
 3. a. 'On one side of.' Ilapd not only expresses the idea* 
 of ' alongside,' ' beside,' or of an object placed by the side 
 of another, but conveys also the meaning of ' on one side 
 of,' that is, of not coinciding with ; and this will be ren- 
 dered in lOnglish by other terms also, as ' by,' ' past,' &c. 
 Thus, in some compounds, as, nafm^ahetv, 'to go on one 
 eido of,' 'to pass by,' also, 'to transgress;' nufid^aatz, 'a 
 deviation,' that is, 'a going on one side,' not in a line with, 
 'a transgression;' napafiXiTzeiv, 'to overlook,' 'to omit,' 'to 
 sec amiss,' properly, 'to look on one side' and not in a line 
 with, and so ' to miss seeing aright ;' Ttapdyeiv, ' to lead past,' 
 ' to lead by,' that is, ' to lead on one side of;' napaSpo/jc^, ' a 
 running past;' tzapadueodtu, 'to steal in,' that is, 'to enter 
 at one side of, by, past, a person,' and so, without being 
 observed ; napanhiv, ' to sail by,' ' to sail past,' that is, ' on 
 one side :' e.g. Xen. Anab. v. 1, 11, bptH nXdla noXXdxez napa- 
 niiovTo, 'I see \'cssel8 frequently sailing by;' Id. IIcll. i. 5, 
 12, nap' aoTo.^ rac npdpac rwv Aoodvdpou vewv rrapeTrXet, ' he 
 would sail past the very prows of Lysander'a ships.' So like- 
 wise where Tzapd is used with the accusative case of a noun : 
 e.g. Xen. Cyrop. v. 2, 29, nap' aur^v rrjv liuliul&va 3u nape- 
 iuat, 'one must pass-Jiy Babylon itself,' that is, 'on one 
 side of Babylon.' 
 
 6. 'Beyond.' The sense of 'beyond,' which napd often 
 has, is a variety of that just noticed, and has its origin in 
 the idea of going 'by' or 'past' an object, that is, 'on one 
 side of it.' Thus, in compounds, as, Ttapaipipeadae, 'to be 
 borne beyond,' that is, ' to bo borne past' or ' on one side 
 of;' napuTpij^uv, 'to run past,' * to run beyond,' ' to outrun.' 
 And 80 when Tzapd is used apart with the accusative case : 
 e.g. Xen. Ages. v. 3, kxwv iadvei napd rob; dXXouz, ' he volun- 
 tarily toiled more than all others,' that is, ' beyond, past, 
 all others.' 
 
 'Very.' In some compounds this sense of 'beyond' 
 
 , 
 
 Ilapd. 369 
 
 becomes equivalent to 'very,' 'in excess," the idea con- 
 veyed by napd being that an action or state goes beyond or 
 past what is usual or reasonable. Thus, napaj^pau, ' to be 
 too old,' and, hence, 'to be childish;' napadepfiaivstv, 'to 
 heat to excess.' 
 
 c. 'Besides.' Another variety merely of this same sense 
 of 'beyond' is that of 'besides,' the Latin praeta-: e.g. Xen. 
 Cyrop. i. 2, 9, fjrav 8k 8u roue i^ivrai rd^a, xal napd riju 
 fapirpav iv xoXeip xoalda, 'besides the quiver;' Id. (Econ. 
 viii. 12, yiftet de napd ndvra (popuwv, ' it is full, besides every 
 thing (already mentioned), of lading.' 
 
 d. 'Against,' 'contrary to.' In many instances napd has 
 the meaning of 'against,' 'contrary to.' Thus, in com- 
 pounds, as, napdvofioi;, 'contrary to law,' 'in violation of 
 law;' nupapuiiiuv rooc vi/iooc, 'to transgress the laws;' napd- 
 iofoc, 'unreasonable,' 'contrary to reason,' 'unexpected,' 
 'contrary to what is counted upon.' So also with the 
 accusative case: e.g. Xen. Cyrop. i. 6, 6, napd j-dp roue Toiv 
 dtwv d&opohz ndura rd Totaura tlvat, ' contrary to the divine 
 laws ;• Id. Anab. v. 8, 17, izeauv abrdiz . . . e? « Im' ipoii 
 inadov napd to Sixatov, dixijv Xafietv, ' if they suffered any thing 
 at my hands contrary to right;' Plat. Thsed. 95, a, dati/taarM^ 
 pot e?ffec ui; napd d6$av, « contrary to my expectation,' 2>rcBler 
 opinioncni; Id ib. 93, a, ou8i u ndaxeiv dJUo nap' d &v ixuva tj 
 noi^ ^ nda-jfj^, ' contrary to whatever they do or suffer.' 
 
 This sense of 'against,' 'contrary to,' is plainly of the 
 same nature with that of ' on one side of,' and, hence, not 
 coinciding with ; thus, napaftaiveiv rooc v6fA0U(:, ' to violate the 
 laws,' properly means 'to go (act) otherwise than in accord- 
 ance with the laws,' to act so as to be 'at one side of,' that 
 is, not coinciding with, the laws, not in the same line with 
 them ; napd doSav eimTv signifies ' to speak not in conformity 
 with, so as not to coincide with, one's expectations.' This 
 origin of the sense of 'against,' 'contrary to,' as had by 
 napd, is more manifest in such compounds as napatppovuv, 
 ' to be out of one's senses,' or, as it is accurately expressed 
 in English, 'to be beside one's self;' that is, 'to think in 
 a wrong way,' to direct one's thoughts, not in the right 
 way, but on one side of the proper line; and so In napanaieiv, 
 
370 
 
 OF THB SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 •to commit a blunder," literally, 'to etrike amiss,' 'to strike 
 on one side of a string,' as in playing with a plectrum, 'to 
 go out of the furrow," (see Passow's Lexicon,) 'to be out of 
 one's mind ;' compare the Latin ddirarc, ' to bo mad,' pro- 
 perty, 'to go out of the furrow," {lira-) icapdXrjpoc 'talking 
 amiss,' 'talking foolishly." 
 
 e. 'Lacking,' "wanting." To the instances in which itapd 
 means 'on one side of," 'not coinciding with," belongs its 
 use with the accusative to express how much a thing lacks 
 of a certain measure, where it is rendered in English by 
 'lacking,' 'wanting." E.g. Orat. Att. 743, 21, nap' dXtraz 
 ^fouz 1,rtiuoaaxe, 'you condemned him to irtfjia, lacking a 
 few votes;' that is, 'your judgment fell on one side of, 
 was not coincident with, a condemnation to dxtfila, failed 
 of accomplishing this result, by (to the extent of) a few 
 votes;' Orat. Att. 41, 36, napi zirrapaz 4'i^<pouc, 'lacking, 
 wanting, four votes.' (See Index Orat. Att.) According to 
 the view here presented, it is easily understood how napd 
 may have meanings so entirely different as 'like,' 'as much 
 as,' ' equivalent to,' and ' lacking,' ' wanting.' In the former 
 case, an object stands 'alongside of another, and conforms 
 to it; in the latter, it falls 'on one side of it, and does not 
 coincide with or conform to it, and hence comes short of it, 
 or is lacking. 
 
 Summary of the siffiujicatums of napd. 
 
 Ilapd. 1. 'Beside,' 'alongside." 
 
 a. ' Beside," ' alongside ;' ' during.' 
 
 b. 'By,' 'at,' 'near,' 'with,' 'among." 
 
 c. 'To," (beside, near.) 
 
 d. 'From," (beside;) 'by,' (agent.) 
 
 e. 'Compared with," 'like," 'as much as. 
 2. 'At, or on, one side;' not coinciding with. 
 
 a. 'At, or on, one side," 'past," *by." 
 
 b. 'Past,' 'beyond;' 'very.' 
 
 c. 'Besides." 
 
 d. 'Against,' 'contrary to.' 
 
 e. 'Lacking," 'wanting.' 
 
 Uapd. 
 
 371 
 
 ] 
 
 BIONIFICATION AND DSB OF TCapd WITH CASES OF NOUNS. 
 
 I. JIapd with the gmilive case. 
 
 1. ' By," ' at," ' near." Uapd with the genitive in the sense 
 of ' by,' ' at,' ' near,' is used seldom, and only in lyric poetry, 
 the dative being commuuly used with itapd in this signili- 
 cation. E.g. Soph. Autig. 96G, itapa 8e Kuai/iwv neXaj-eatv \ 
 Sidufiac d^oc, I dxrai Doanopeat, ' by the dark sea,' or, ' by the 
 sea of the Cyanean rocks;' Id. ib. 1122, scqq., <b liax-jieu, 
 Daxjfiv le^rplmoXtv d^fiav | vaiwi/ nap' bypwu '/a/jt^vouHieii&patv, 
 ' by the watery stream of Ismenus.' (See Passow's Lexicon.) 
 
 Ilapd is here used in a sense immediately derived from 
 that of ' beside ;' and the genitive has the meaning of ' with 
 respect to.' Thus, in the latter example, nap' ijpiov^ lofi^vou 
 ftei^poiu means 'by,' 'near,' properly, 'beside,' . . . with 
 respect to the stream of Ismenus. The example cited from 
 the Iliad, iv. 4G8-9, nXvipd, to. ol rdnpavci nap' dani3o<; izefa- 
 dvdi^, I uuTTjae ^uarip j^aXx^psi, 'he wounded his side, which, as 
 he stooped, was exposed at one side of his shield," and which 
 Passow makes to mean 'was exposed by going from his 
 shield,' may rather be regarded as an instuuco of the use of 
 napd with the genitive in the sense of < at, or on, one side 
 of.' Otherwise, it is better to attribute to napd in this place 
 its usual meaning of ' beside.' It would surely seem better 
 to say that the side was exposed, or was displayed, without 
 the shield at one side or alongside of it, than to admit so 
 far-futchud an interpretation as ' was exposed by going from 
 the shield.' 
 
 2. a. 'From.' The common sense of ;r(i/)<£ with the geni- 
 tive is that apparently of ' from," occurring chiefly with verbs 
 of motion : e.g. II. i. 190, ^ 8j-e fdayavov d$h ipuaadftevoz napu 
 fjojpou, 'having drawn his sharp sword from (beside) his 
 thigh ;' Herod, viii. 140, ifwi dyj^sXtTi ^xet napd ^aaiXffi^, ' a 
 message to (for) me has arrived from the king ;' Xen. Anab. 
 i. 7, 13, of auTOfwXi^aavTez • • • napd pefdXou fiaacXiw^, ' those 
 who deserted from the great king ;' Id. ib, i. 3, 7, napd di 
 Seniou xiu Ilaaitovoz nXeiouz ^ Sta-j/iXtot, ' more than two thou- 
 sand (went away) from Xenias and Pasion." And even 
 where motion is not expressed, but an action ia described 
 
72 
 
 OF THE BEVBRAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 hat involves the notion of aomothing proceeding from, or 
 be obtained from, a person, itapd is employed in the same 
 ense. E.g. Xen. Anab. v. 1, 11, el ohv air^ad/ievoe jrapi 
 Tpaxt^ouvritttv ftaxpi nldla xardyoefuv, ' if we should ask and 
 ibtain long ships (of war) from the people of Trapezus.' 
 In such examples, the sense of ' from,' seemingly repre- 
 entcd by napd, does not properly belong to this preposition, 
 ut is suggested by the obvious relation in which the parties 
 9 the action or motion stand to each other. Thus, in the 
 xample above cited from Uerodotus, i/iol dyyeXii] yxer irapa 
 \aatXrjoi, ' a message to (for) me has arrived from the king,' 
 he coming of a message implies a messenger and a person 
 ty whom he has been sent, and the action of coming can be 
 lardly otherwise conceived by us than as being from the 
 icrson by whom the message or messenger is sent. So that 
 he moment a person is pointed out as being the sender of 
 he message, he is at the same time understood to be the 
 )er8on from whom the action or motion proceeds. The 
 dea of 'from' is most readily suggested by bringing 
 together, with their proper connection marked, the action 
 jr motion, its subject, and the person from whom it 
 naturally proceeds. Now, not only is paatXeix;, ' the king,' 
 laturally so related to d^jre^il, 'a message,' and to dyyekot, 
 a messenger,' which is implied in djjeXii^, that it is at once 
 leen that the latter may properly proceed from the former; 
 )ut the genitive case ^aadfjo^ is employed to show that the 
 l^e^ljiy is to be taken as appertaining to the fiaadsu':, that it 
 s a message, not of any other, but specifically of the king, 
 furthermore, the words of the example are spoken by Mar- 
 lonius, the king's officer; and nothing can be more natural 
 ban to assume that the message which he says has arrived 
 or him, and is referred to the king, is from the king. These 
 hings, then, concurring, a message represented as having 
 lomo, and u person from whom naturally it would proceed, 
 md who is marked by the genitive case as the object to 
 rhom the message is to be referred, the mind at once con- 
 iccts them in their proper relation, and regards the message 
 IS pnu'codiiig 'from' the king. If this be so, the idea of 
 from" is derived from neither the preposition nor the geni- 
 
 riapd. 
 
 373 
 
 tivo case, but from the relation seen to exist between the 
 action and the parties to it, and between these parties them- 
 selves. In fact, the genitive case, as seen above, does no 
 more than point out the object to which the action is to be 
 referred as appertaining to it ; and, so far as the case alone 
 is considered, the action might be regarded either as coming 
 from it or going to it; just as of Aaiou ^[prjafioi, Herod, v. 43, 
 for any thing contained in the genitive case itself, might as 
 well mean the oracles given by Laius, or proceeding from 
 Laius, as the oracles received by Laius. And, as regards 
 T[apd, it merely marks the action or motion as having the 
 relative position of ' beside,' * alongside,' * near,' with refer- 
 ence to the object to which the action qualified by the prepo- 
 sition belongs ; so that, when the coming of a message from 
 a person is further defined by napd, it means 'the coming 
 of a message from beside or near a person.' But if, as it 
 thus appears, the idea of 'from' is due, not to the prepo- 
 sition napd, nor yet to the genitive case, but to the obvious 
 relations of the action or motion, and of the parties to it, 
 the one to the other, it might seem difficult to say why the 
 nionning of 'from,' as connected with napd, arises only when 
 the preposition is used with the genitive case and with the 
 vcrl>3 of motion or action implying motion. The answer is, 
 that the only other case that is used with napd and verbs of 
 motion is the accusative, and that here the idea of ' from' 
 can hardly arise, because this case, coupled with such verbs, 
 marks either the object actually reached by the motion, or 
 its measure or extent ; and, in either case, the idea suggested 
 by the relation in which the accusative stands to the action 
 or motion is that of ' to,' and not of ' from.' Indeed, the 
 fact that napd is used with the accusative case apparently in 
 the sense of ' to' after the very verbs with which, when the 
 genitive is employed, it seems to mean 'from,' goes to con- 
 firm the view here taken, that napd really signifies neither 
 'to' nor 'from,' but onlj' 'beside,' 'near.' 
 
 In the same way is to be explained the use of napd with 
 the genitive to mark the object from which any thing is 
 derived or is regarded as proceeding, occurring with such 
 verbs as panddvuv, 'to learn,' nuv&di/sadat, 'to be informed,' 
 
374 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 • to learn,' dxouetv, * to hear,' diSSvat, ' to give.' (See Passow's 
 Lex.) Thus, in pau9dvtiv itapd Ttv<K, 'to learn from a person,' 
 the only use of napd is to show that the act of learning, or 
 the person who learns, is 'beside,' 'near,' the party from 
 whom instruction comes. The genitive «v6c points out the 
 object to which the act of learning, or the being a learner, 
 is referred as specifically appertaining to it, so as to convey 
 the notion of the relation of pupil and teacher ; and to be a 
 person's learner or disciple means the same thing as to learn 
 from a person. And thus the natural relations of the parties 
 connected with the act of learning suggest the notion of 
 'from,' and Ttaftd merely marks the relative position of the 
 learner and of the person from whom the teaching comes. 
 
 6. ' By,' marking the agent. Of the same nature essen- 
 tially, and requiring the same explanation, is the use of napd 
 with the genitive case, not rarely met with, to- express, as 
 do also Into, ebri, ff/>6c, i», with the genitive, the agent, or 
 the object from whom an action proceeds. E.g. Soph. 
 Trach. 59G, /idpov nap' bp&v e5 artjoiptd', 'only might we be 
 well concealed by j'ou,' that is, 'have a covering from you ;' 
 Plat. Symp. 175, e, cited by Passow, awpiai: napd uvoz nXig- 
 pmiadatf ' to be filled with wisdom by a person.' 
 
 II. Ilupd with the dative case. 
 
 ♦ Beside,' ' by,' ' near,' ♦ at,' ' with.' Ilapd with the dative 
 case retains its proper sense of 'beside,' 'by,' or has the 
 nearly related meaning of ' near,' ' at,' ' with.' E.g. II. v. 
 572, (L; ildev duo ip&rt nap" dXX^Xotoi pivovre, ' remaining along- 
 side of each other,' or ' beside, near, with, each other.' Od. 
 i. 154, 0rjpitp, 3c l>' ^etSe napa pinjor^paiu dvdyxji, ' who sang 
 among the suitors by compulsion ;' properly, • beside, near, 
 with, or among, before, the suitors.' And. so in a variety 
 of uses, and admitting of a diversity of rendering in Eng- 
 lish according to the circumstances. E.g. Herod, iii. 160, 
 Zwnupou dk ouSuz . . . Imepe^dXero napd Japeltp xptr^, 'no 
 one surpassed Zopyrus in the judgment of Darius ;' that is, 
 'with, near, beside, Darius (if ho were) judge;' Id. i. 82, 
 ooroc nap' ipoi t6 ouvopa 8txai6i iart fipeatfm, 'he, in my 
 opinion, has a right to bear the title,' properly, ' with me 
 
 Ilapd. 
 
 37J 
 
 he has a right;' Id. i. 86, xat pdhara {Xifom) Tohz napd a<pia 
 auTutac doxiovrac dk^iouz eTvai, ' and saying it of those cspe 
 cially who think they are happy,' that is, 'who with them 
 selves seem to be happy;' Id. i. 105, xai bpdv nap' Iwurdia 
 roue dntxvsopivooz iz r^v SxudtxijV, X'^P^^t ^ Scaxiazai, 'anc 
 that those who arrive in the Scythian country see amon^ 
 the Scythians themselves, or in their own land, ho\v 
 they are afl'ected;' properly, 'see with, that is, among, 
 themselves.' Add Xen. Anab. 11. 5, 8; and Herod, 
 vi. 86, fin. 
 
 In all these and like instances of the use of napd with thie 
 case, the dative introduces the object to which any action 
 or state qualified by napd is referred as being that ulti- 
 mately afiectcd by it, or as that which it concerns ; and the 
 dative case depends for its use more immediately on the 
 sense of ' beside,' 'near,' contained in the preposition itself; 
 for it is aa easy to attach the dative in the sense of the final 
 object to the notion of 'beside,' 'near,' conveyed by the 
 preposition napd, as to the idea of ' sameness' in 6 aux6i, or 
 to that of ' equality' in taoz. 
 
 III. Ilapd with the accusative case. 
 
 1. a. ' Alongside of,' ' beside.' Ilapd is very commonly 
 employed with the accusative case in the sense of ' along- 
 side of,' 'beside.' a. Without accompanying motion, and 
 simply to mark position by the side of: e.g. Od. xii. 82, 
 of piv xoi/jcjaavTo napd npupv^ata v^6z, 'they slept by the 
 side of the moorings of the ship;' II. i. 463, i/iot dk nap' 
 aurbv i-jgov ne/mtifioXa )re/>«'v, ' by his side, beside him, the 
 young men held spits in their hands;' Xen. Anab. i. 9, 
 13, noXXdxtz S' ^v iSuv napd ra; au^opivaz 6Sobz xai noddiu xai 
 ^eipaiv xai dfdaXpiov arepoopiuouz dv&ptonouz, 'along, by the 
 side of, frequented roads ;' Id. ib. i. 2, 13, ivzau&a ^v napd 
 rijv bobv xp^vtj, ' there was a fountain by the roadside.' See 
 Id. ib. i. 2, 24 ; iii. 5, 1. 
 
 /3. With a verb of motion, which napd qualifies: e.g. 
 Xen. Anab. v. 10, 1, inXiov ^pipac 8vo napd ziju y^v, ' they 
 sailed two days along the land;' Id. ib. iv. 3, 26, nap' dant- 
 Saz napaxajbuzaz rijv ivatpmiau ini fditcffoz, 'leading the 
 
376 
 
 OF TOE SEVEBAI. PKEP0SITI0N8. 
 
 onomoty to the left in the form of a phalanx," that is, *by 
 the side of, alongside of, the shield or left hand.' 
 
 In both sets of examples, the accusative has the sense of 
 « as to,' ' as regards.' Thus, in jjw Ttapa Tr,v bSbv xp^jvrj, the 
 construction is, 'there was a fountain alongside ... as 
 regards the road ;' and in inXeov itapa ri^v j^w, ' they sailed 
 alongside ... as regards the land,' • as far as the land was 
 concerned.' 
 
 h. ' IJcsidc,' ' near,' ' by,' ' at.' In a sense very nearly re- 
 lated to that above noticed, Ttapi with the accusative case 
 is used to mean 'beside,' 'near,' 'by,' 'at,' the relative 
 poHitioii indicated by these terms very naturally following 
 that of ' alongside.' E.g. Ilerod. iv. 87, ooroc 8k (U9oz) xaxt- 
 hiipdij Itapa rou Jiovuaou rbv urjbv iu Bu(^avTt({i, 'this stone was 
 left at, near, the temple of Dionysus in Byzantium,' pro- 
 perly, 'alongside of, beside, the temple.' The example, 
 Od. xii. 32, of fikv xoifajaavTO napa npufivijaea Mj6f, might be 
 rendered, quite as well, ' they slept by, near, the moorings 
 of the ship.' Ilere, also, the accusative has the sense of 
 'as to,' 'as regards;' thus, oorof 8k xarelelf^ itapa rbu vijbu 
 means, properly, ' this stone was left near, at, ... as regards 
 the temple.' 
 
 c. ' With.' JTapd with the accusative case has also the 
 signification of 'with,' retaining, however, enough of its 
 primary meaning of « alongside' to distinguish it from auv 
 and perd. E.g. llcrod. vi. 86, SooU pot r« ^piaea ndarjz rrfi 
 ohahfZ izaprupiiaauTO-dia^at rtapa ai, 'I determined to de- . 
 poBit the half of my substance with you ;' Id. i. 86, xai 8k 
 inrd Au8(ov itap' aurbv 7tiu8a<: {inl ttjv nup^v dye/?t/9««re,) « and 
 placed on the funeral pile fourteen sons of Lydians with 
 him ;' Id. viii. 140, mv&dveade 8e xai rrjV vw Ttap' ipk ioiiaav 
 8waiuv, 'you are aware of the force that is now with me;Vj^ 
 Xen. Hell. i. 6, 29, itapi Sk JiopiSovra oi Idptoi . . . rero;^ 
 uivot, 'and with Diomedon were posted the Samians,' 
 or, ' alongside of, beside, Diomedon,' the sense being really 
 the same. The accusative case, in this, as in the preceding 
 uses of napd with this case, has the sense of 'as to,' 'as 
 regards,' or marks the extent in which the action or 
 state as qualified by napd is to be taken. Thus, in th« 
 
 Uapd. 
 
 377 
 
 1 
 
 t 
 
 ■: 
 
 
 example 8iz kitri Au8civ Ttap' outov tccuSoq ini ttjv 7tup^i> dve- 
 fii^aae, the meaning properly is, 'he caused fourteen sons 
 of Lydians to ascend the funeral pile beside, near, with, 
 ... as regards him.' Compare, in Herod, vi. 86, the ex- 
 ample above given with the use of rta^d with the dative, in 
 the same sense of ' with,' at the end of the chapter ; eS 
 i^atcoTapivtp Sk pot xeipeva larat Jtapd aoi aba (rd j^pi^para). 
 
 d. 'During (the time of).' Ilapd with the accusative 
 case is frequently employed to denote the period of time 
 with which an action runs parallel, or to which it corre- 
 sponds, the idea being that of lying or running alongside 
 of a thing, keeping pace with it, and so answering to it 
 exactly in measure or extent. In English this is expressed 
 by 'during,' 'in the time of,' 'in.' E.g. Xen. Anab. ii. 3, 
 15, xai fjU xai itapa itbrov ■^8h pkv xstpaXaXykz 8i, ' and it (the 
 date wine, olvoz tpotvixwv) was sweet in, during, at the time 
 of, drinking it, but caused headache.' Here itapa itb-cov 
 marks the sweet taste of the wine as corresponding in 
 extent of time with the drinking it, that is, as lying, in 
 point of time, alongside of it, or as keeping pace with it, 
 the one exactly answering to the other; and this is in 
 accordance with the proper sense of napd. Orat. Att. 395, 
 11, Itapa xaiiTJjv tijv dito8rjfuav, 'during this journey,' or 
 ' throughout this journey,' that is, coinciding in extent of 
 time with this journey, and running parallel with it ; Id. 
 470, 12, napa roof pipaTOuz xatpouz, ' iu, during the time of, 
 the greatest exigency ;' Id. 614, 8, itapa itdaav riju ^oprjiav, 
 ' during, throughout, the whole time that he was choregus;' 
 DcmoHtli. 229, 19, raiz ix rwv ubpatu rtputpiatz nap' aura 
 Td8txjjpuTa, j(prjaifat, ' to use the legal punishment at the 
 very time of the wrong-doing ;' that is, making the punish- 
 ^ meat keep pace with the wrong-doing, answering to it 
 throughout. 
 
 In such examples, it is sufficiently plain that itapd scarcely 
 departs at all from its original sense of ' alongside,' and 
 that the accusative case has the meaning of ' as regards,' 
 ' as far as goes,' giving the measure of the parallelism ex- 
 pressed by Itapd. Thus, in the first example, the accusative 
 itbrov shows the extent to which the sweet taste of the wine 
 
878 
 
 OF THB SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 {^86) was ' alongside' (xapd), or was coincident, namely, ' aa 
 for aa the drinking went,' ' as regarded the drinking it.' 
 
 e. 'On account o(,' 'because of,' 'by reason of,' properly, 
 'conformably to,' 'with a just regard to,' 'in view of,' 'in 
 consideration of.' Ilapd with the accusative case is occa- 
 sionally capable of being rendered in English by ' on ac- 
 count of,' ' because of,' ' by reason of.' E.g. Dcmosth. 43, 
 14, oiiSk yap oijtoz izapu ttju abTou fni/oju toouutov iinj{»^T^Tai, 
 iaov napa tt^u ^pevipuv d/iihiav, * for neither has this man 
 (Philip) aggrandized himself so much by reason of his own 
 strength, as on account of our neglect;' Id. 110, 15, ob nap' 
 2v oudk duo etc ruuro ra irpdfpaTa dftxrae, ' our affairs have 
 come to this pass, not by reason of one thing, nor of two.' 
 
 In such examples, the proper sense of napd with the 
 accusative is 'conformably to,' 'consistently with,' 'accord- 
 ing to the measure of,' that is, it marks the object with which 
 an action or proposition corresponds in its measure or 
 extent. This sense is nearly akin to the idea of comparison, 
 which napd with the accusative has been seen to express, 
 and, like it, is derived from the meaning of 'alongside,' 
 'beside,' both these notions springing from the conceiving 
 an object as placed alongside of another. Thus, in the first 
 example, the moaning is, ' this man has aggrandized him- 
 self, not so much in conformity with, according to the 
 measure of, his own strength, as in conformity with, accord- 
 ing to the measure of, our neglect.' And so, in the second 
 example, the meaning is, ' our affairs have come to this pass, , 
 not conformably to, as properly accords with or answers to, 
 one thing, nor even two things;' that is, 'not one thing, 
 nor yet two things, furnish a just measure with which our 
 present condition of affairs shall be found conforming/ 
 The rendering of napd with the accusative in English byj^. 
 *on account of,' 'by reason of,' though not strictly aocn^ 
 rate, is yet not very remote from the true meaning, pro- 
 vided the terms be understood somewhat in the sense of 
 'in view of,' 'in consideration of.' When it is said, 
 'this man has aggrandized himself, not so much in con- 
 formity with his own strength as in conformity with oar 
 neglect,' it is not far from saying, 'in view of, in con- 
 
 .; 
 
 ■i 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 J 
 
 Ilapd. 879 
 
 Bideration of, not so much his own strength as our neg- 
 lect;' nor is this very different from saying, 'by reason 
 of, on account of, not so much his own strength as our 
 neglect.' 
 
 Here, again, the accusative case used after napd has the 
 sense of 'as regards,' 'as far as concerns.' Thus, in the 
 example oudk yap oliroi napd rijvaliTou ftrnpi^v Toaourov inrjuSrjTai, 
 the construction is, 'nor has this man aggrandized him- 
 self so much in exact accordance with, with a corresponding 
 measure ... as regards his own strength.' That is, the 
 accusative marks the extent to which the conformity ex- 
 pressed by napd is to be understood as asserted. 
 
 /. ' To (beside).' Ilapd with the accusative case, chiefly 
 of persons, is frequently used after verbs of motion, to mark, 
 in the most obvious view, the object which the motion 
 reaches, and is rendered in English by 'to.' E.g. Od. i, 
 284-5, npwra phv Iz mXov iXdi, xai ecpeo Niaropa 8iov \ xEi9ev 
 Sk Sndprijvds napa ^av»bv MeviXaou, ' and thence go to golden- 
 haired Menelaus ;' Herod, i. 36, riXo^ dk, dmz6pzi>ot napd rdu 
 KpoTaov TMV Muawv dyreXot, iXeyov rdSe, 'at length messengers 
 of the Mysians reached Croesus, and spoke as follows;' Xen. 
 Anab. i. 2, 12, iuraMa d^ptxvetrat 'EnuaSa . , . napd Kupov, 
 'here Epyaxa reached Cyrus;' Id. ib. i. 2, 17, nipipai: niyp^ra 
 ■cbv ip/ojvia napd roue arparrjiyohz rwv ^EU^vtov, 'sending 
 Pigres to the Greek officers.' 
 
 In such examples, napd really means ' by the side of,' 
 'beside,' 'near,' and the sense of 'to,' by which seemingly 
 napd is rendered in English, is due to the accusative as 
 connected with a verb of motion and expressing the object 
 reached. Thus, in the last example, the sending to the 
 officers is expressed by nip^a,; and robz orpar^odi:, but is 
 ^ ftirther qualified by napd, so as to signify that the interpreter 
 Pigres came to them and was 'alongside of them or 'near' 
 them; that is, Pigres was sent to the officers so as to be 
 alongside of or near them. Compare what was said above 
 of the use of napd with the genitive case in the sense of 
 'from alongside of.' 
 
 The accusative, however, in this construction, may either 
 be considered, in the more obvious view, as directly marking 
 
380 
 
 OF THB SBTEKAL PRKP06ITI0NS. 
 
 the object reached by the verb's motion, or, as is probably 
 more correct, may be regarded as attending upon the action 
 of the verb as qualified by aapd, in the sense of 'as regards,' 
 that is, to define with regard to what object, or within what 
 limits, this combined meaning is to be taken. Thus, using 
 the same example, in ne/t^ac IUfpi^a. irapa roue orpaTijfouZt 
 the action of sending is qualified by napd, so as to mean, 
 ' having sent Pigres alongside or near,' and the accusative 
 roue tnpuv^ouz marks in what regard, within what limits, 
 this is affirmed, ' as regards the officers.' So that, according 
 to this latter view, which seems more satisfactory, the sen- 
 tence will mean, 'having sent Pigres alongside . . . aa 
 regards the officers,' the officers alone being regarded as 
 directly concerned in the message. 
 
 g. Comparison: 'as much as,' 'as good as,' 'equivalent 
 to,' &c. Ilapd with the accusative case expresses, in a 
 variety of ways, the idea of comparison, rendered in English 
 by a diversity of phrases, according to the circumstances of 
 the comparison, as will be seen presently in detail. This 
 notion of comparison readily springs from the sense of 
 ' alongside,' ' beside,' proper to the preposition, objects being 
 placed alongside of each other for the purpose of comparison, 
 and comparison being readily suggested by the fact of such 
 juxtaposition. And it may be remarked generally, as ncces- 
 saiy to the right interpretation of such forms of comparison 
 as arc cxfircsscd by vapd with the accusative in its sense of 
 'alongside of,' that, when an object is placed beside another 
 for comparison, cither of two cases may occur; first, it may 
 equal the standard of comparison ; as, nap oiiSiu, * as much 
 as nothing;' or, secondly, it may exceed the standard; as, 
 napa robz diiouz iitdvet, ' he toiled more than the rest. ' Mean- 
 wbile, Traiid expressing no more than the being alongside, 
 and so suggesting comparison merely, these relations of 
 equality and superiority must be gathered from the condi- 
 tions of the comparison, which ordinarily leave no great 
 room for ambiguity. There is, it may be mentioned, still 
 a third case of comparison expressed by napd, that of in- 
 feriority, or coming short of the standard of comparison ; 
 bat that belongs to xapd in the sense of ' at or on one sida 
 
 napd. 
 
 381 
 
 of,' 'not coinciding with,' and does not come under consi- 
 deration in this place. 
 
 a.) ' As much as,' ' as good as,' ' as.' Hapd wiUi the accu- 
 sative case is used to mark an object to which, as to a 
 standard of comparison, another is referred and counted 
 as equal. This is expressed in English by ' as much as,' 
 'as good as,' 'as.' E.g. Soph. Antig. 465-6, oSrwf i/ux^e 
 ToudsToH popou Tuxuv I nap oudhv Ojoz, 'so, for me, forsooth, 
 to meet with this doom is a sorrow of no moment,' « as good 
 as nothing ;' Id. ib. 34-5, . . . ml rb npaj-fi dreiv \ oux Hk nap' 
 oudeu, ' and to account the matter not as a thing of naught,' 
 properly, ' as equal to nothing ;' Id. Electr. 1327, ndrepa nap' 
 o-tdk-^ ru'j ,iiuu x/^dsoS" f«; 'do you still have no care for life V 
 Id. (Ed. Tyr. 982-3, . . . dHa tmtff ortf, \ nap' oodiv ion, 
 p^ora Tov ^ioi> tfipUy 'to whom this is as nothing,' 'who 
 values it as nothing worth;' Eurip. Or. 569, nap' ouSkv 
 ourorc ffv dv dXXuvai noaetz, 'it were to them a thing of 
 nothing to destroy their husbands.' (See Bothe's note on 
 Soph. Antig. 36.) Uerod. i. J20, napd apapd yap xcu riov 
 iofiwv ^fuv ivea xej[dipT]xe, ' for some oracles even have turned 
 out of little moment,' that is, ' as much as, equivalent to, 
 a small matter;' Demosth. 1416, 21, tva ft&Uou npozpi^at ae 
 npoz ZTju ipdoaofiau, idv ftjj napd ftixpbv noejaji, ' unless you 
 account philosophy a thing of littie moment,' ' equal to a 
 small thing;' Id. 693, 22, ij-at toIvuv raura ftkv oi napd paepbv 
 drwvt(^6/ieuo<: nap' bfSv dneXuadfajv, * with no littie struggle.' 
 Here belong napd fipaxu, and nap' ilij-ov, which, like napd 
 pixpbv, are rendered commonly by 'by a littie,' and mean, 
 properly, 'equal to a littie,' 'as much as a littie;' napd 
 noiu, 'by much,' 'equal to much,' nap' 5aov, 'by how much,' 
 napd ToaoiJTov, 'by so much.' (See Passow's Lex. s. v. 
 napd.) 
 
 In such examples, napd with the accusative marks an 
 object alongside of which another is placed for comparison, 
 or, which is the same thing essentially, gives a standard to 
 which any proposition is referred to determine its mea- 
 sure; and, when the circumstances suggest no idea of 
 superiority nor of inferiority, the relation of equality is 
 assumed to exist. Thus, in the last example, napd pcxpov is 
 
882 
 
 OF THB BBVBaAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 added to the proposition rijv ftXoaofiav iav /i^ noaj<rg, to giv« 
 a standard of measure alongside of which it is placed, and 
 with which, consequently, it is compared ; • unless you con- 
 sider philosophy as standing alongside of, on the same foot- 
 ing witli, equal to, a small matter.' 
 
 The accusative case, as here used with napd, has the 
 meaning of 'as regards,' 'as far as is concerned,' or shows 
 with regard to what object, within what limits, the corre- 
 gpoudenco in measure or the exact conformity expressed 
 hy na(>d is to be regarded as affirmed. Thus, tjjv fdoaoipiav 
 iav firj naiia fuxpbv noc^a^, ' unless you account philosophy as 
 being of equal measure, exactly corresponding, ... as re- 
 gards u little matter.' 
 
 Of the same nature are a number of expressions in which 
 Kopd with the accusative denotes an object or action to 
 which another answers. Thus, Aristoph. Ran. C43, itXqjfijv 
 itafM nkr^jT/V kxdrepov, 'I will give to each blow for blow,' 
 the blow given to the one answering to a blow given to the 
 other. This mode of expression has the same origin with 
 the preceding, namely, in the idea of one thing placed 
 alongside of another, and hence regarded as corresponding 
 to it exactly in measure, number, or any other point of 
 comparison. Demosth. 1360, 20, mve7vat 8k (Niatpav) hariptp 
 Jjftipav iia/t' Jj/iipav, 'and that Neaera should spend a day 
 with each of the two alternately ;' that is, a day with one 
 should answer to a day with the other, or, what is the same 
 thing, should spend 'every other day' with one of the 
 two. The phrase Trap' iva fipovTez xai peca/ieu, 'old men and 
 young men alternately,' cited in Passow's Lexicon, may 
 mean 'old men and young men counted one for one,' ' one 
 of the one age answering to one of the other age.' But, 
 if this be the interpretation, it should be observed as being 
 peculiar in this, that the objects intended to be counted 
 one against the other are not formally placed one alongside 
 of the other, as in nkjjrrjp irapa nhpp^v above ; but they are 
 namdd in contrasted classes, j-ipovrsi xai ueaptat, 'old men 
 and young men,' and then xap' iva, 'alongside of, answer- 
 ing to, one,' is added to show that the two classes of per- 
 sons are to be regarded as answering to each other, not aa 
 
 Ilapd, 
 
 888 
 
 classes merely, and generally, but individually, an old man 
 to a young man, and a young man to an old man; and 
 this it does by setting up a standard to which the two 
 classes of old men and young men are equally referred, so 
 as to answer to the standard of ' one.' Instead of saying, ' an 
 old man for a young man,' that is, ' an old man alongside 
 of, with (napd), a young man,' yipttv icapa veaviav, and ' a 
 young man for an old man,' vtaviaz napd fipovra, a briefer 
 form of expression is used, ' old men and young men ar- 
 ranged according to the standard of one' (^ap' iva), the 
 mind supplying, from the contradistinction in which the 
 one class stands to the other, that they are not only gene- 
 rally arranged according to the standard of one, but that 
 they answer to each other, one of the one class to another 
 of the other class, one for one {nap' iva). The phi-ase napd 
 p^va Tpizov, cited from Arist. H. A. vii. 2, 1, in Passow's 
 Lexicon, and translated ' every third month,' means, pro- 
 perly, 'answering to, coinciding with, the third month,' 
 the notion of 'every' third month, or of a succession of 
 actions occurring at equal periods of three months, is 
 suggested by the circumstances of the case ; for napd pa^va 
 TptTov furnishes merely the standard of measure to which 
 the action corresponds, and, in order that the sense of 
 •every,' or of successive actions corresponding to the 
 standard, may be conveyed, there must be present also 
 some sign of a plurality of actions to be thus distributed. 
 Soph. Aj. 475, «' fdp nap' l^/mp ^pipa ripnav i-gu; 'for 
 what pleasure has day alternating with day?' that is, 'day 
 answering to day;' Demosth. 467, 6, ohxaSv napd pkv rdc 
 rptdxovTa pupcdBaz puptou; Sidaiat pr/dipvou^ ;J/£p, napd Sk r«kc 
 Sixa uMntepapei rpiaj^tkiou; ; ' for every three hundred thousand 
 bushels (mcdimni) of corn he makes us a present of ten 
 thousand bushels, and for every hundred thousand about 
 three thousand bushels;' that is, 'answering to, correspond- 
 ently with, three hundred thousand bushels he bestows on 
 us ten thousand.' (For the examples, see Passow's lexi- 
 con, s. V. napd, and Index Orat. Att.) 
 
 fi.) In some examples, napd is used with the accusative to 
 mark a comparison, but with the idea of a superiority on 
 
1 
 
 M 
 
 OF TBB BBVBEAL PRBPOBIXIONS. 
 
 le part of tho subject of comparison to the standard with 
 rbich it is compared, or alongside of which it is placed. 
 I.g. Xon. Monior. i. 4, 14, napa ra HkXa (^aia wanep 6eol of 
 vdpamot fitwreuouae, ' compared with, and above, all other 
 nimals, men live as gods ;' Id. Ages. v. 3, in6vei napa roue 
 IXouz, ' he toiled more than all the rest ;' Id. Mcmor. iv. 4, 
 , WOTS Stddrjko; that napa roue ^ouc euroxrcSi/, ' so that he 
 as manifestly of good order above all the rest.' 
 
 In such examples, it is plain that the notion of superiority 
 ) the standard of comparison is suggested by the circum- 
 tances of the case, napd with the accusative serving only, 
 a in the instances above considered, to mark the compari- 
 }n with a standard. This being so, neither the preposi- 
 ,on nor the accusative, as here used, require further expla- 
 ation. 
 
 f.) As was above mentioned, Ttapd with the accusative, 
 a another set of examples, is employed to mark the amount 
 ly which u fact or statement fails or comes short of being 
 rue just as set forth ; as, i:apu pcxpov, ' by a little,' nap' dXlj-ov, 
 by a little,' napa Ppaj[u, 'by a small amount,' or 'within a 
 ittle,' ' wcUnigh.' E.g. Isocr. 178, d, rauTijv iv iUjip XP^^V 
 aituoai xat kudfjvat napd ptxpbv inoi^aav, ' this, in a little space 
 f time, tliey caused to be agitated and wellnigh dissolved ;' 
 ^at is, 'tu be within a little, to be wanting a little, uf being 
 issolvcd.' But this form of the comparison made by napd 
 ith the accusative is more appropriately referred to a di8< 
 net signification of napd to be mentioned presently. 
 
 2. 'At or on one side of,' 'not coincident with.' ITapd 
 ith the accusative occurs, in a variety of cases, with a 
 leaning clearly distinct from that of 'alongside of,' 'be- 
 de,' which has prevailed in all tho examples of the us» 
 ' napd with the accusative hitherto considered ; namely,' 
 ith the meaning of *at or on one side of,' in contradis*' 
 action to being coincident with. This is not contrary to 
 e idea of 'alongside of,' and does not exclude it; but ia,' 
 
 f&ct, the same sense so modified as to make prominent 
 le notion of being 'on one side of as opposed to that of-* 
 sing ill the same line with. 
 a. 'At or on ouo side of,' 'by,' 'past.' Ilapd with th» 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 * 
 
 ^"M 885 
 
 accusative is used in the sense of ' at or on one side of.' 'by ' 
 pas : e.g. II xxii. 145, of 31 „api cxonciju xai ^^«veoJ.W 
 evr« I ruxeaz atkv bnkx xar' dp^a^nbu iaaeoo^o, 'they rushed 
 by, past, the watch-tower;' Od. iii. 172, nap' Lui,tuza 
 Mtpavra, 'by, past, windy Mimas;' Xen. Cyrop. v 2 29 
 
 TimT ""'■ ^r/r^"'" "" """f"^""' '°"« ">"«* needs pass 
 b Babylon itself;' that is, 'on one side of Babylon.' In 
 these and many such examples, the meaning of napd is that 
 above mdacated . at or on one side of;' and the signification 
 of' past, and that of ' beyond' also, which napd fometimes 
 has, .8 partly due to the verb of motion with which the 
 preposition IS used. It hardly requires to be added, that 
 the accusative, here also, has the meaning of 'as to" as 
 regards;' as in the last example, 'it is required to pass by 
 ... as regards Babylon itself.' 
 
 b. a) 'Beside,' ' except.' Hapd with the accusative has 
 also the meaning of 'beside,' 'except,' which is derived 
 immediately from that of 'on one side of,' the idea of 'be- 
 side, 'except,' as expressed by the preposition, being that 
 the proposition thus qualified by napd does not e.nbrace 
 the object introduced by napd, but leaves it ' on one side.' 
 Eg. Ilorod. IX. 33, napa 2. ndXatapa idpape uxav 'OhpndSa, 
 he ran so as to be victorious in the Olympic games, ex- 
 cepting one contest;' Aristoph. Nub. 698, obx iau napd 
 raur <!;.;«, 'there is nothing else beside, except, this;' that 
 IS. 'apart from this.' So in the example cited from Polyb. 
 HI. 110, 4, napa piav, 'every other day,' that is, 'one day 
 excepted omitted,' 'left on one side.' (See, for other ex- 
 amples, Wessel. ad Herod, ix. 33.) 
 
 /9.) 'Wanting,' 'lacking,' 'less by,' 'within.' Little dif- 
 ferent from the signification o{napdv,\th the accusative just 
 noticed IS the case in which it is rendered by 'wanting,' 
 'lacking, less by,' the sense here being that the action or 
 proposition qualified by napd and the accusative fails of 
 being complete, or comes short, by the amount expressed 
 by the accusative introduced by napd. E.g. Isocr. 36?, 6 
 S>ortnapa ptxpbv ^Sov Axp„o, Ano&avuu, 'so that I came 
 within a little of being put to death without a trial ' The 
 statement is that the being put to death failed of occurring 
 
 26 "' 
 
386 
 
 f 
 
 OF THK 6BVKRAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 fell short of being effected, by a little {jiixpiv) ; and itapd fiat- 
 fi6v conveys the idea of this limitation by showing that the 
 matter affirmed fell on one side, did not meet the full mea- 
 sure, or did not coincide with {naftd), what the terms express- 
 ing the action imply, and that it thus comes short by the 
 amount of a little (/uxpov). Patting icapa /uxp6v aside, the 
 proposition would be that he was put to death without a 
 trial ; r:a(>d being added with fjk9ov shows that he came on 
 one side of this, and so missed it, or came short of it ; and 
 ftixpdv as an accusative marks how far he came short of or 
 missed the being put to death without a triah Demosth. 
 743, 21, {0i).t7:7:ou) [utpov /ikv Satexreivart, •j^pr^fidrwv 8k noUwv 
 . . . nap' iUyaz ^'i^ipouz ijUftwaare, 'you came near to putting 
 Philip to death, and failed of this only by a few votes, visit- 
 ing him, for a deal of money, with degradation instead.' 
 The putting Philip to death fell short of being effected, and 
 had another penalty substituted, by a few votes ; properly, 
 it fell ou one side, and did not attain to completion, by the 
 amount of a few votes. Isceus, 41, 36, napa Tirrapac ^''^fou^ 
 /lirinj^e r^f rcohto^, ' he came within four votes of obtaining 
 citizenship;' Jacobs Anthol., p. 695, cited by Passow, 
 Mdpxoz, t^T/ptov elnapi j-pdftfta, 'you are a bear {dpxo^), Marcus, 
 but for a letter;' that is, 'missing a letter, coming short by 
 a letter, if you wanted a letter, you would bo a bear.' From 
 such examples it may be considered as true that napd obtains 
 the meaning of 'wanting,' ' lacking," 'less by,' 'within,' from 
 that of 'on one side of,' 'not coinciding with,' and hence 
 not reaching, a given line or measure; that this measure is 
 an action or statement as it is set forth by the word qualified 
 by Ttapd ; and that the accusative case attending napd is the 
 measure of the amount by which this action or statement 
 comes short of the proper standard. 
 
 Here belong such expressions as napd fitxp6p, nap' dXiyov, 
 napd fipa-jny, 'within a little,' 'wanting or lacking a little:' 
 e.g. Isocr. 178, d, above cited, Tai-rju iv i^ip "jlpbvtp aaXeuaat 
 xai iudffVat napd /uxpov inotifaav, ' this, within a little space of 
 tinio, tlioy caused to be agitated and wcllnigh dissolved,' 
 that is, to come only a little short of being dissolved. 
 
 c. ' liosidc," ' beyond,' ' against,' ' contrary to.' Ilapd with 
 
 ^<V^ 887 
 
 the accusative case has frequently the signifieation of ' be- 
 but' ..7° ' Tr'' ''°"*""7 to.' This meaning ia 
 but another variety of 'on one side of,' that is, -not coin- 
 c:d.ng w.th;- for when it is said. Plat. Ph«d. c. 44, thlt a 
 thing occurs r«^,« SiSau, - contrary to my expectation,' praicr 
 o;.u.,6«.m, the meaning really is, that it does not coincide 
 with, but fulls on oue side of, and so is out of keeping with 
 and contrary to, my expectation. In the same way? naod 
 o/xaco. 'contrary to justice,' means, properly, what is 
 beside, 'on one side of,' ' not coinciding with,' and, hence, 
 out ot conformity with, opposed to, justice. E.g. II, xiii. 787, 
 nap d-:>i.afui> ff obx Sou xai iaauptvov noXtpil^uu, 'a man cannot 
 light beyond his strength, even though he be eager to 
 do it ;' that is, ' a man cannot fight otherwise than according 
 to, in keeping with, in proportion to, his strength;' Xen. 
 Cyrop. i. 6, 6, napd ydp rohc zwv &ewv deafjuAc ndt^a rd rotaura 
 e?wtf, ' that all such things were contrary to the divine laws ;' 
 Id. Anab. v. 8, 17, etrt l>n' gpou InaSov napd rb dixatov, ' if in 
 any thing they wore treated by me contrary to justice;' Id. 
 Anab. ii. 6, 41, el napd roue Spxouz IXue rdc mouSdi;, riju'dix^il 
 iX^t, ' if he was breaking the truce in violation of the oaths •' 
 Orat. Att 121, 25, «To;,^^y9,xe noXu napd r^v rt'ii/^v, 'it hw 
 fallen out very much contrary to their mind," 'otherwise 
 than in conformity with their judgment.' 
 
 The accusative case, in these examples, has the signifi- 
 cation of 'as to,' 'as regards.' Thus, in the last example, 
 auplJiftr^xe napd rf^v rf'Wfejv, ' it has occurred very much out 
 of coincidence, contrariwise, ... as regards their mind.' 
 
 (For the table of napd with cases, see the next page.) 
 
388 OF THB SBVBBAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 TABLS or TUC SIONinOATIONB AND UBES OF wafi WITU OABEB. 
 
 ngaiat>iicHiiorn|i<. 
 
 Oen. : ' wtib iMpeot to.' 
 
 DntlTe: 'for.' 
 
 Aocnaatlre : ' aa to,' • ai tegarda,' 
 ' aa far aa goea.' 
 
 L •AloI■|>l<l^' <l» 
 ltd*.' 
 
 
 
 1. a.'Alongalde,' ' bealde," along.' 
 
 0. JuiUDMltion : 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •ld>.- 
 
 
 
 
 ». Pn>ilinltj:<l>7,' 
 
 ». <B7,'<nt,"Baw-' 
 
 6. 'By,' 'at,' 
 
 6.<BMtda,' <by,' 'at,' 'mar,' 
 
 *«t,' 'now.* 
 
 'rrom(bealde.') 
 
 'near," with," 
 
 • Willi.' 
 
 
 ■B»'(agoBt) 
 
 'nmoDg.' 
 
 'iy> (bealde.') 
 
 c Pumllel dur»- 
 
 
 
 t. 'During.' 
 
 UoD : 'duriniE.' 
 
 
 
 
 ACooronnlljwilh: 
 
 
 
 * 'On acconnt of,' 'by reaaon 
 
 ■on account oV 
 
 
 
 of,' pntperly, 'in conform- 
 
 ' bj reuuo oV 
 
 
 
 ity with,' 'according to 
 
 
 
 
 e. 'Aa much aa,' 'aa good aa,* 
 
 
 
 
 ■aa;* 
 'aiiawiTlDK to,' • — for — ^» 
 e.g. wXiiyt npi irXiiffa; 
 'rnoro than,* 'beyond,' pro- 
 perly, 'aimpand with.' 
 
 1 <0n ran Mt oV 
 
 
 
 2. a. 'On vm liilu uf,' 'by,' 'paat' 
 
 •not eoinddiog 
 
 
 
 'beyond.' 
 
 with.' 
 
 
 
 
 a. 'On ono fld« of.* 
 
 
 
 
 •l»it,- -by.' 
 
 
 
 
 t. 'Atone aldaof,' 
 
 
 
 6. 'Bealde," except.' 
 
 not Including : 
 
 
 
 
 •iMaide,' 'ai- 
 
 
 
 
 ??'■■ .. . 
 
 
 
 ,;. 'Wanting,' 'lacking,' 'with- 
 
 c* At one aide,' not 
 
 
 
 in.' 
 
 eonfamilng to a 
 
 
 
 
 meaaura, eoming 
 
 
 
 
 abort 
 
 
 
 
 i. 'At one aide,' 
 
 
 
 d. • Beeidea,' < beyond,' ■ agalnit' 
 
 notlttconlbnnlty 
 
 
 
 
 wltta,autofkarp- 
 
 
 
 
 ilgwltb. 
 
 
 
 
 Hepl. 
 
 SignifiDations of ntpi. 
 
 1. a. 'Around,' 'about.' Hepi, the eame with the San- 
 skrit pariy ^circum,' Bignifies, properly, 'around,' 'about,' 
 including the idea of an entire circuit, more fully expressed 
 by nept xuxX<p, aa in Flat. Phsed. c. 61, fiiov nepi xuxXtp, * flow- 
 ing round about in a circle,' and being hereby distinguished 
 from dpfi. This proper sense of nepi is seen in the deriva- 
 tive stiptS, ' round about,' which seems to be formed upon 
 Kepi by the addition of an ending xc, probably akin to -1x6;. 
 Many compounds also exhibit nepi in this meaning; as, 
 neptauxiveo;, 'around the' neck,* neptxeipetu, 'to shear all 
 SLTOMna,' Tceptid/acetv, 'to shine all around,' 'on every side.' 
 And so, likewise, in many examples of its use with the cases 
 of nouuB nepi has this same local sense of ' around :' e.g. II. 
 
 ^«/"'- 389 
 
 X. 139, . . .rbu aT^-a mpl ^pi^a; ^Xu»' lani, 'quickly the crv 
 
 about , Xen. Cyrop. ,. 2, 4, of 8i t^^fio, xal xoc,M!iur<u nepi ri 
 d^ua, 'the cphebi sleep also round about the public build- 
 
 frnt W'^'f ^r*'*'"''" ""f' " "*«^ ^° " «e°«« different 
 W J':\"^T'.\"* »«"ly connected with it, namely, in 
 hat of 'about' wuh the idea of nearness or approximation 
 to a thing as distmguished from exact position, measure, 
 and the like, as m regard to space, time, and numbers! 
 Ji.g. Anab u. 1, 7, xa} ^S^ „ ^„ „^i „hj»oucw> dropdu, Mt 
 was now about the time of full market;' Id. Hell ii 4 5 
 ,r^.e.hr,U.a>p i, riju (Poiiju nepi inraxoaioo,, 'about seven 
 hun<lrcd men,' that is, a number something near, not 
 exactly, seven hundred. It will be remembered that da^i 
 has Uie same accommodated sense of 'about;' and the Ene- i 
 hsh word 'about,' by which both dpfl and Kepi in this ufe 
 are translated, affords an instance of the same modification 
 ot a mere local meaning. 
 
 c 'About,' 'of,' 'concerning,' the Latin de. Hepi, in no , 
 distant connection with its primary sense, is very frequently ' 
 used metaphorically to indicate an object about which the 
 thoughts, feeliug.s, words, or actions are employed, answer- ' 
 ing to the JingliBh 'about,' 'of,' 'concerning,' 'touching' ' 
 and to the Latin .fc. E.g. Xeu. Cyrop. i. 5, 18, ei 8k rJra I 
 ir<o^e7<o nep, uf^i., ' if I eay this of, about, concerning, you ;' ! 
 Id. Mcmor. i. 2, 19, irw 3k nepi ro6ra,u ov^ oZro, rrp'LL 'I i 
 ( o not thus judge concerning these things.' Here, again, 1 
 tiie Lnghsh word 'about' furnishes precisely a simiW 
 instsiiice of tiie accommodated use of a term properly 
 expressing a merely local relation. r t- j 
 
 d 'Kespecting,' 'with respect to.' Very nearly related 
 to the sense of nepi just mentioned is that in which it cor- 
 responds to the English 'respecting,' 'with respect to.' E g 
 Xeu. Cyrop. i. 6, 15, ix toutou dij mt^u roinoiz ijw oBc udhara 
 ifpovt^ou; Ktpi toCtwu ^xouoi, eKat, 'I had intercourse with 
 those whom I understood to be most intelligent with respect 
 to these matters.' 
 
 e. ' For,' ' on account of,' ' because of.' Immediately con- 
 
[90 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 lected with the two next preceding significations of itepi is 
 that in which it expresses the occasion, ground, or reason 
 Bf an action, where it is rendered in English by 'for,' 'on 
 account of,' 'because of.' E.g. II. xvii. 146-7, ou r^jt «c 
 Auntov ye ftajpjao/iewz Javaotaev \ elm mpi mbXtoz, 'will go to 
 fight for, on account of, the city;' II. xvi. 497, auTup inena 
 mi aiiToc ipeu nepi pdpvao xaixtfi, 'do you yourself fight for 
 mo with the spear ;' II. vii. 301, ^ pkv iftapvdo&rjv IpeSoz nipe 
 dupofiSpoto, 'they fought on account of a quarrel ;' properly, 
 'they fought about, touching, concerning, a quarrel or occa- 
 sion of strife,' the fighting being referred to a quarrel for its 
 subject or occasion, this being the thing to which it relates, 
 and hence furnishing the occasion, ground, or reason of the 
 
 action. 
 
 /. « For,' object had in view. To this sense of Jtepi may 
 be referred also the case in which it introduces the final 
 object or end of an action, where it is rendered in English 
 by 'for.' E.g. II. xxii. 161, dXXd nepl ^lyji^fi ^eov " Exropot; 
 litTioddpoto (TO^ec) ' but the feet of Hector ran for life,' that is, 
 properly, 'about, concerning, on account of, life;' Herod, 
 viii. 26, o? ou nepi j^ptjpdrwv zbv dyaiva itoKUvrai, dXld nepi 
 dperijc, 'who contend not for money, but about virtue." 
 The proper sense otnepi, in these examples, is 'about,' 'con- 
 cerning.' Thus, in the latter example, nepi XPW'^^'"^ ^T<^va 
 noieupTot means strictly no more than ' they contend about 
 money,' just as nepi dpezrfi signifies 'about, concerning, the 
 question of virtue or m^ihood,' XPW'^'"^ heing, as dperi^ is, 
 the subject of the contest. But, when the matter about 
 which an action is performed constitutes at the same time 
 the motive to it, it is both its subject and its final object. 
 The eases in which nepi may have this signification can be 
 determined only by the nature of the noun with which it is 
 connected and that of the action which it qualifies. 
 
 g. ' Of the value of.' Of the same nature, most probably, 
 is nepi when used with noXXou, nXeiovoc, nXeiorou, navrbc 
 noieiadat, ' to consider of much, of more, of very great, of all 
 possible moment or value.' E.g. Xen. Anab. v. 6, 22, obSh ^ 
 Tifi'DldSoz ohdev nepi nhiovoz noieiadat, 'to consider nothmg 
 of more value than Hellas ;' Id. ib. i. 9, 7, ou nepi nXeiaroo 
 
 nepi. 
 
 391 
 
 noioiTo p^dku ^euSeadae, ' (he showed) that he considered it a 
 matter of the highest moment not to prove false at all.' The 
 meaning of nepi, here also, is immediately connected with 
 that of 'about;' for by giving a thing the relative position 
 of about an object, there is suggested the idea of its belong- 
 ing to the class or category of such object; so tliat nepi 
 noXXou noceia&at signifies to consider or account a thing as 
 being of the class or category of what is much, or of much 
 value. This is what is meant by Passow, when he says that 
 " the thing belongs to the sphere or region of great, small, 
 &c." (See Passow's Lexicon, s. v. nepi.) Compare for the 
 genitive, as here used, the Latin genitives magni, parvi, &c., 
 after such verbs as cestimare, signifying with them ' to value 
 at much,' &c. ; and, for the meaning of nepi here assumed, 
 compare its use in such phrases as ol nepi Ilpiapov, ' those 
 about Priam,' meaning, ' of the company of Priam.' The 
 term noteiadm containing the notion of valuing, and noUm, 
 nhiovoz, and the rest of these genitives, being expressions 
 of value, ' much,' ' more,' 'very much,' and nepi being added 
 to show that it is about or around these signs of value that 
 the object to be valued is to be considered as placed, and, 
 hence, as being referred to or appertaining to them, and as 
 belonging to the particular value which any one of them 
 denotes ; it is easy to see how noieiadat nepi nokXuu signifies 
 ' to consider of much value,' and so of the rest. It is really 
 the same thing as to say, 'to consider an object as being 
 about, as having to do with, as appertaining to,' the several 
 kinds of value expressed by noUuu, nieiouoz, &c. 
 
 2. a. 'Quite,' 'altogether,' 'exceedingly,' 'very.' In many 
 compounds nepi has the sense of 'quite,' 'altogether,' 'very,' 
 'exceedingly:' e.g. neptaXyiji, 'exceedingly sorrowful,' nepi- 
 ftapu;, 'vcrj' heavy,' nepikapnpoz, 'very brilliant,' nepiaahz, 
 ' extraordinary.' This meaning would seem to be originally 
 the intensive notion of around, namely, 'round and round,' 
 ' quite round,' of which was retained only the intensive sense 
 of ' quite,' ' altogether,' without any reference ordinarily to 
 the primary idea of around. Compare the intensive sense 
 of xard above mentioned, that of the Latin -per, and 'the 
 English ' out and out.' In the case of the English ' out and 
 
392 
 
 or THE 8EVEBAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 out • the notion of intenBity is indicated by the repetiiion 
 of the term. But in Ijiat of xard and Ttepi the same idea w 
 conveyed without such repetition. There is agreement, 
 however, in tliis, that the notion of intensity does not seem 
 to belong to the primary meaning of the term used, but to 
 spring from the manner of its employment. In English, as 
 in the Hebrew, the notion of intensity is conveyed by repe- 
 tition ; in Greek it may have been indicated by mere em- 
 phasis. This docs not exclude the opinion that this or that 
 term in English or Greek is better fitted than another to 
 take on it the sense of intensity; but it is affirmed only, 
 that this notion is not inherent in the term itself. What is 
 here said of the origin of the sense of 'quite,' 'altogether, 
 'very,' as had by «/»«', may be confirmed by those com- 
 pounds in which Ttepl has at the same time the meanmg of 
 'all around,' and of 'quite,' 'very;' as, nepdaieHu, ' to chatter 
 all round,' and 'to chatter excessively,' ireplpono^, 'dirtyall 
 round,' or, as we say, ' dirty all over,' and ' very dirty.' 
 
 6. 'Above,' 'more than,' 'beyond.' The signification of 
 •quite," 'very,' 'exceedingly,' when employed relatively to 
 one or more persons, conveys the idea of 'above,' 'more 
 than,' 'beyond.' E.g. II. i. 417, v5v d' dpa r' d,xofwpo<: xal 
 diCupk Tzepi ndpTtovl SnXeo. Here the sense is, 'of early 
 death exceedingly . . . with respect to all men,' which is 
 the same as to say, 'of early death above, or more than, all 
 men.' II. i. 287, AXX Sd'dvijp idiXee nepl ndvuov Ippevai dXitov, 
 'this man wishes to be exceedingly (great, or the like,) . . . 
 with respect to all others,' or 'to be in excess, to be above, 
 . . . with respect to all others.' 
 
 It may be remarked • that this relative sense of nepi ia 
 seen in several compounds; as, neptyirvMSai, 'to survive,' 
 'to outlive,' 'to overcome,' 'to excel,' mpie'tvut, 'to be 
 above,' 'to surpass," the same verb having also the sense 
 of 'to be around;' mptix^tv, 'to surpass,' 'to overcome,' 
 this verb signifying also ' to encompass,' 'to embrace,' 'to 
 surround;' itepnoUMiv, 'to out shoot,' also 'to shoot all 
 round," 'to shoot on all sides;' mptfpove7u, 'to be wiser 
 than others," as well as 'to turn over in the mind,' 'to con- 
 eider on all sides.' 
 
 HepL 
 
 893 
 
 ' 
 
 Summary of the significations of Tiepl. 
 
 Ilepl. 1. a. 'Around," 'about.' 
 
 b. 'About,' 'near.' 
 
 c. 'About,' 'of,' 'concerning;* (object.) 
 
 d. 'For,' 'on account of,' 'because of;' (subject.) 
 
 e. 'For," 'with the view of;' (motive.) 
 /. ' Respecting,' ' with respect to.' 
 
 g. 'Of the value of.' 
 2. a. ' Quite,' ' altogether,' ' very,' ' exceedingly.' 
 b, ' Above,' ' more than,' • beyond.' 
 
 BIQNIFICATION AND USE OF TTSpi WITH CASES OP NO0N8. 
 
 I. Ilepc with the genitive case. 
 
 1. a. 'Around,' 'about.' JJepi in its proper local sense 
 of 'around," 'about," is employed rarely with the genitive 
 case, and only in poetry. E.g. Od. v. 68-9, ^d' aurou zerd- 
 puazo Trepi oTreeou; ylaifupoto \ ^ftepis ^^matau, red^Xei de araipD- 
 X^atv, ' and there was spread about the hollow cave a flour- 
 ishing vine, and it was full of clusters of grapes." (See 
 Passow's Lexicon.) The genitive as hero used with itepi 
 has the sense of ' with respect to ;' as in the example cited, 
 ' a vine was spread about, around, . . . with respect to the 
 cave.' 
 
 b. 'About,' 'of,' 'concerning,' 'touching,' the Latin de. 
 Ilepi is very commonly used with the genitive case, as 
 after verbs of hearing, knowing, speaking, and the like, in 
 a metaphorical sense, to mark the object about which a 
 persons hears, knows, speaks, &c., corresponding to the 
 English 'about," 'of," 'concerning,' 'touching,' and to the 
 Latin dc. E.g. Xcn. Cyrop. i. 1, 3, oSrwf iyiYvwaxoftev ntpl 
 auuov, 'we thus judged concerning them;' Id. ib. i. 2, 13, 
 el Sk Toura ijm Xij-<o nept bpuiv, ' if I say this of, concerning, 
 about, you;' Id. Mcmor. i. 1, 16, abzhz St nepl twu iv&pio- 
 Tzelwv dee SeeXijreTo, ' ho was himself forever discoursing about 
 human afliiirs.' 
 
 c. ' About,' ' for,' * on account of.' In the same way Jtepi 
 with the genitive is used iu the sense of ' about,' ' for,' ' on 
 
894 
 
 OF THS SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 nccouiit of,' to mark the object about which the thoughts, 
 feelings, words, or actjons are occupied : e.g. II. xx. 17, 1j 
 u mpi Tfitowv xai 'Aj^ataiv lupfojpi^uz ; ' hast thou, indeed, 
 some anxious care about the Trojans and the Achsei ?' Xen. 
 Cyrop. ii. 1, 22, iwo^aa^ on ntpi 6n6awv iv yivtovrat Av9pdt- 
 mc; fdoveixiau, nofh fiuKkov idiXouai raora daxetu, ' all those 
 matters about which men have emulation ;' Id. ib. iii. 1, 25, 
 ou pouov Tzepi iauruu, dMa xai ntpi i/wu, xai irepi pjvcuxbCf xai 
 nepi TzdvTwv uou Texuatu, SouMaz tpo^urai, ' ho stands in fear of 
 bondugc, not only for himself, but also for me, and for his 
 wife, and for all his children ;' Id. ib. iii. 3, 44, vDv ntpl 
 ^<\>fStv Twu bptreptov 6 dymv, xai nepi j^^, . . . xai nepi ocxtuv . . ., 
 xai ntpi fuvatxwv 5k xai rixvtou, xai itepi ndvrwv <uv ninaadt 
 dyaffiov, ' now the struggle is for life, and for country*, and 
 for homo, and for wives, moreover, and children, and for 
 all the blessings you have.' 
 
 d. ' For,' object had in view. In some examples, japl 
 with the genitive obtains more distinctly the sense of the 
 object had in view in an action, or that which is its motive. 
 Thus, II. xxii. 161, cited above, dXkd nspi 4"*X¥ ^^^^ "f'xTopo^ 
 Imtoddpoeo, ' Ilcctor (the feet of Hector) ran for life ;' and so 
 Herod, ix. 37, Siare r/>i;fa»v nepi ipuxrfi, ' running for his life;' 
 and Id. viii. 20, o? ou nepi j^p^ftdrwu rbv dfiova noteuvrai, dUi 
 nepi dperr^z, ' who contend not for money, but about virtue 
 (manhood).' It is plain, however, that the proper sense of 
 nepi with the genitive, in these examples, as well as in those 
 in which it expresses rather the occasion, ground, or reason 
 of an action or feeling, is to mark that about which the 
 action is employed. The nature of the object, and the 
 relation in which it stands to the subject of whom the 
 action is aflirmcd, as being naturally an object of hia 
 dcoirc, or tlic subject merely of his thoughts, words, or 
 actinns, will suggest whether it constitutes the motive for 
 an iiodon, or its subject only. 
 
 f. 'For,' 'booause of,' 'by reason of,' 'from.' Diflering 
 sonicwliiit from the above uses of rept with the genitive, 
 ahliougli liaviiig the same proper sense of 'about,' 'con- 
 cerning,' is tliat in which it marks the occasion, ground, or* 
 reason of an action, where it is rendered in English by 
 
 ITepi. 
 
 395 
 
 'for,'.becau8eof,"byreasonof,"from.' E.g. II. vii 301 
 
 fnor 1 *^*'*'"^ """^ " q»a"el or strife. Strictly 
 pcakmg, the sense is, 'they fought about, con;erni„l I 
 tnfe or quarrel.' and it is only from the ua^ZTZtr^ 
 
 ipeSo, and from its obvious relation to the action and t^ 
 
 aui n?-f'"'"" '' r.^"^""'^'^' *^^* •* becomirapp re : 
 
 that the stnfe or quarrel is not merely the subject, but the 
 
 ccas,on or ground of the fighting, ft is in this way alone 
 
 that the distinction is readily made between nepi tpZ 
 
 M^-'J«, ' to fight from strife,' and nepi .ix,, pd-^LJ^Z 
 
 also the genitive; but, in the {otm^r, nepHp,9o,, f^om the 
 nature and relations of the idea expressed by the tern 
 
 w«, from the like cause, denotes the final object or end 
 had III view in the action. 
 
 /. 'Ifespecting,' -with respect to,' 'relating to.' Not 
 materially diflering from the above uses of 4«' with the 
 genitive IS the case in which it is used to mark the olject 
 to which any thing is referred as having relation toTt 
 whcpo .t IS equ valent in English to ' respfcting,' ' elati g 
 h.g. Herod. v„. 102, dpoJpou Sk nip, pij no%j „W rJ, 
 i6.re raora node,. oUi ri eio, ' but respecting, as elates to 
 numbers do not inquire how many they ar^ that they are 
 aWe to do this;' Xen. Cyrop. i. 6. 15, i^r^rooro,, t/^ o 
 ,dh.ra fpou^poo, nepi ro6uo. ^xouou eha,, 'I had iutercours; 
 witl those whom I understood to be most knowing respect- 
 ng those matters ;' Id. ib., xai nepi ptu rpo,r,, inei.%u iZL 
 ehac, and respecting subsistence, I was persuaded that it 
 jva. Biiflieient Here there is no difficulty in admUt Ig 
 bat by describing an object as being 'about' or 'around' 
 another, as by its proper sense nepi does, it is in fact marked 
 as rela.ug to it ; and that nepi with the genitive,"ily more 
 
 fpectto.' "''^■' ^ ''' signification of 'with re- 
 
 g. 'Of the value of.' Hepi i„ connection with the verbs 
 
396 
 
 OF THB SBVBBAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 tJvat, 'to be,' and itotiia9at and ^fsia^at, 'to consider,' 'to 
 account,' 'to esteem,' is ased with the genitive case of 
 several nouns containing a general expression of value, 
 namely, noliiou, 'much,' nXelovoz, 'more,' nieiarou, *veiy 
 much,' diiyot}, 'little,' iXdrrovoc, 'less,' oMevdz, 'nothing,' 
 itavtoz, ' every thing,' so as to express various estimates of 
 worth: as, itept noMoU;, nleiovo^, niettnou, diiyou, iXdrrovof, 
 ob8evbi:,e7veu, ' to be of much, of more, of very much, of little, 
 of less, of no, value ;' Tcept noXXou, nXeiouoz, x.t.X. notiio&at or 
 ^yetodai, 'to consider of much, of more, &c. value,' or 'to 
 value highly,' &c. E.g. Herod, i. 73, Tttpt noUou note6/t€voc 
 auTouz, ' accounting them of much value ;' Id. i. 120, ^pSv 
 mpi xoUou iari xaxop^outrdat Ap-juj^v rrpi OTJv, ' it is of much 
 moment to us that your dominion shall bo maintained;' 
 Xcn. Anab. i. 9, 7, Su nepi nXeiaruu nocdtTo . . . fiTfdlv i/'eudur9ai, 
 ' that he consiUorcd it a matter of the highest moment not 
 to prove false at all ;' Id. Anab. i. 9, 16, nepe navToz inoietro 
 TOUToui nkouatcDTipouz notuv, ' lie accounted it altogether im- 
 portant (worth every thing) to make these persons richer;* 
 Demosth. 341, 6, de^aofiau dk . . . fir^oeplav p^ze X^ptv fi^r' 
 ivSpa noiuodat nept itXeiovoz ^ rb dixaiov xai r6v opxov, 'I shall 
 beg you to set a higher value upon no favor, and upon no 
 person, than upon justice and your oath.' 
 
 In such examples, nepi, when used with the genitive, would 
 seem, by virtue of its sense of ' about,' to mark the object 
 to which any thing is to be referred as appertaining to it, 
 as belonging to its class or category. If ol nepi Ilpiapov, 
 ' those about or around Priam,' may signify ' those belonging 
 to the company of Priam,' and if ol <fp6vtpot nepi toutwv may 
 mean 'tliose who are intelligent about or in these matters,' 
 nepi in both cases denoting the object to which any thing is 
 to be referred for a more exact designation of class or cha- 
 racter, and tliis by giving to it a relative position of ' about' 
 or 'around,' it is clear that ffe/«' with a genitive of value, 
 standing in connection with an object of which the worth 
 is to be determined, may indicate the kind of value to 
 which tills object is to be referred, that is, the j)articuliir 
 category of values to which it belongs. When it is said, 
 ifp6wp6z iart Jttpi toutou, 'he is intelligent respecting this,' 
 
 i 
 
 -' 
 
 :S 
 
 1 
 
 Hepi. 89T 
 
 or in this particular, mpi roCtrou marks the thing to which 
 the character of being 'intelligent' expressed by y>/>6w/.oc is 
 to be referred for its exact specification ; and so, when it is 
 said, nepi nXsiarou inoieho pjjdkv ^eudea&ai, 'he considered it 
 of very great moment to prove false in nothing,' nepi nXela- 
 ton denotes the particular kind of value to which lajdhu 
 <Pe{,Seod(u, «the being false in nothing,' is to be referred. 
 The office of the preposition, and that of the genitive, is the 
 same m both cases: in both «/«' with the genitive, by point- 
 ing out the relative position of a thing as being 'about' or 
 'around' another, shows the definite object to which it is to 
 be understood as being referred. The only diflerence is, 
 that in the case of noXXou, dUyou, and the rest of the geni- 
 tives, the noun introduced by nepi denotes value; and this 
 peculiarity fits them to become the qualification oinoteiadtu, 
 ^reta&at, und ehat, where estimation of value is concerned 
 See Passow's Lex. s. v. nepi, a. iv, who explains this use of 
 i:epi by saying that it expresses, properly, that "the thing 
 belongs to the region or sphere of great, small," &c. 
 
 2. ' Above,' • more than,' ' beyond.' Ihpi with the geni- 
 tive IS sometimes used in the sense of ' above,' ' more than ' 
 'beyond:' e.g. II. i. 258, ol nepi pku ^ouXiju Jauaoiu, nepi S" 
 ini pd^eadat, 'who are above the Danai in counsel, and 
 above them in battle,' that is, 'superior to them;' Od. i. 66, 
 k nepi pkv t,6ov iari ^pormv, 'who is above, superior to] 
 mortals in intelligence.' 
 
 In such instances nepi obtains its meaning from the 
 employment relatively of the intensive force of 'quite,' 
 'altogether,' 'very,' 'exceedingly,' which it had already 
 acquired. Thus, in the example cited above, Sj nepi pkv 
 v6ov iftri iipoTwv, 'who is above mortals in intelligence," 
 •more intelligent than mortals,' the meaning, strictly re- 
 garded, is, that Odysseus is ' very, exceedingly, intelligent 
 {^6oi> 7:epi) . . . with respect to mortals;' and from this 
 relative sense in which nepi is employed springs that of 
 •above,' ' beyond,' ' more than.' If to any it should appear 
 Btrange that the notion of 'above,' 'more than,' can have 
 this origin, let it bo considered that the idea of • the most,' 
 •more than all others of a class of objects,' expressed by 
 
898 
 
 OF TUB SBVEKAL PEBPOBITIONS. 
 
 the superlative and a genitive case, arisea in the same way, 
 ndvTwv aotpottazoz, 'the wisest of all,' properly meaning! 
 'very wise, distinguished for wisdom, . . . with respect to 
 all.' The superlative ending raroc, being no more than 
 the demonstrative r-oc doubled with the substitution of • 
 different vowel a with the former of the two demonstnu 
 tives, ra-roc, serves, as the article or demonstrative z-o (ri) 
 does, and as the ordinal numeral-ending roc (r-oc) does, to 
 point out, and so to distinguish or separate an object from 
 others of its class ; so that aofarraroz means one that is di»> 
 tingnished from his class for wisdom. And when ao^wzaxo^ 
 is used with ndvzwv, it means, as was said above, ' diBtin>< 
 guisbcd for wisdom, very wise, . . . with respect to all;': * 
 the sense 'wisest of all' being conveyed by this form of ex- 
 pression precisely in the same way that ' more intelligent 
 than mortals' is conveyed by that of * very intelligent . . « 
 with respect to mortals,' which is the proper meaning of v6oif- 
 ntfti fifioTwv. 
 
 It was seen above that ittpi has this relative sense of ' 
 'above' in compounds also, such as neptpYi^ea&at, 'to sur- 
 vive,' ' to come off superior;' and with such compounds th* 
 genitive case is used, just as with nepi when employed in 
 this sense as a preposition. As an adverb, moreover, that 
 is, when used apart, and without being joined with a noun, 
 Tiepi has the meaning of 'very much,' 'exceedingly:' e.g. 
 II. viii. 161, Tudddj], itipt pkv at ziou Javaol za^imwiot, ' very- 
 much have the Danai honored you, Tydeides.' 
 
 n. Ilepe with the dative ease. 
 
 1. a. 'About,' 'around,' marking relative position. The 
 preposition Tcepi is frequently used with the dative case in 
 the local sense of 'about,' 'around.' E.g. II. ii. 389, . . . 
 ntpt 8' ijx^' jiupa xaptizut, 'and he will be wearied in hia 
 hand about the spear;' II. viii. 86, mtv 8' trmouc hdpaSt, 
 nuituSo/uvoz nepi x^'^V' '^nd together with himself dis- 
 turbed the (other) horses, by rolling himself round about' 
 the arrow ;' Od. ii. 244-5, . . . dpyuXiov 8i | AvUpdai xaii 
 nXtiusaai /laxijiTaa&at Tiepi datzi, ' it is hard to fight, and with 
 a greater number of men too, around a feast;' II. xviii. 
 
 H 
 
 ^ 
 
 .■I 
 
 y 
 
 ■I 
 
 ntpi. 393 
 
 453, na^8' l^pap pdpmvzo mpi Ixa^„, „{,x^„ 'all the day 
 ^ey fought about the Sc^an gate ;' II. xvi. 156-7, I 
 
 at, Aoxoi «,c \wpofdroi, rocoiu ze mpi ^peah Anreroc dybn,' Mike 
 ^venous wolves, about whose heart is invincible Sage^' 
 ileiod ,. m,nepc rdict ahxim zt xai dpiaztpoloc &aocac {ztXa- 
 tmmz) mpuztpsx>o,, -placing bands around their necks 
 .ud the.r left shoulders;' Id. vii. 61, ..pi ^,. ,,-« ^^y,; 
 Uxo^ztdpazxaXtopimuz, 'around their heads they had what 
 were called tiaraa;' Plat. Repub. 359, b, ro5ro. 8k diXo alu 
 
 1 "^.l ""T ** ^ ^"/'' ^/"""'"'' 8axtbhov,^\^ had nothing 
 else but had a golden ring about the hand;' Soph. A,\ 
 82(^-7,^/,^rof a;c pz jiaazdajg | ncT^zaiza z^^e nepi veodSd^L 
 
 T' T f .^? "'''^' '° ^"^y^""" ^f «" others, take me up 
 when I shall have fallen upon (about) this reeking sword.' 
 
 In these examples, which have been borrowed from 
 Passow 8 Lexicon, while it is plain that the preposition is 
 to be taken in the sense of ' about,' ' around,' it might admit 
 of a question whether the noun which follows it is to be 
 considered as a dative or an ublutivo (locativus). It would 
 seem to be more probable, taking into the account the 
 examples to be adduced presently in which W is used in 
 the metaphorical sense of 'about' and 'for,' and where the 
 noun 19 more pali.al,Iy in the dative case, that in the 
 lustaMce under consideration the dative is employed Ad 
 mitting it to be the dative case, it depends on the prepo- 
 sition Itself, that lis, it follows as the final object upon Sie 
 sense of 'around,' 'about,' contained in nepi, just as this 
 case follows upon ini from its sense of 'upon' or super- 
 position, upon dpfi from its meaning of 'about,' and upon 
 «aof, baozoz, opo,o^, from the notions of equality, sameness, 
 and likeness, which these contain. It is not more difficult 
 to conceive tiiat the dative, as the sign of the object ulti- 
 mately affected, may appropriately follow upon nepi with the 
 Idea of 'round about' an object, than upon inl with the 
 meaning of 'upon;' nor is it greatly more difficult to con- 
 sider the dative to be attached in this same sense to ini and 
 ntpi than to tao;, b auzoz, o,moz. In all such cases the dative 
 introduces an object that may be regarded, in a figurative 
 sense at least, as concerned in, or affected by, the notions 
 
400 
 
 or THB BBVBRAIi PRBPOSITIONS. 
 
 of equality, identity, likeness, euporposition, what is circum^ 
 jacctit, proximity, &o. oxprenaod by tVoc, b al>r6z, 8fm»i, inl; 
 xtpi, d/ifi, 4c. 
 
 b. 'About,' •for.' In a metaphorical sense, mpl is used 
 with the dative in the signification of 'about,' 'for,' to mark 
 the object concerning or for which an action is pcrformedi 
 such as is contained in the verbs meaning 'to fight,' 'to 
 contend,' ' to struggle," or for which a feeling is entertained, 
 such as care, anxiety, fear. E.g. II. xvi. 567-8, Zebz d' ial 
 vuxt' dXoijv rdpuae xparep^ ^/«''^» | ^f /<« 9'^f ^^P' ^'"^^ f^lC^ 
 ilobz nbviK etij, ' that there might be the destructive toil of 
 battle about (for) his dear son ;' Od. xvii. 471, imnor dv^p 
 ntpt o'tai paxeeoftewz xredxeaatv \ pk^erat, r/ nepi fiouaiv, ^ dpyew^i f , 
 dteaatv, ' fighting for his possessions ;' II. xvii. 132-3, Ata^ fr 
 dpfi MevoiridSr) adxo; eupb xaXuipaz, \ iavjxet, ax; «c « Xiwv nepl 
 o?« rixeaatv, ' like a lion about, or for, hia young.' Cf. U. 
 xvii. 137 and 355. II. v. 566, . . . nepi rap 8U Tzutpivt lawv, \ 
 ftj Ti nddj), ' for he feared for the Bhepberd of the people ;' 
 U. xvii. 22-3, oure piyanoz \ dupbz ivi arrj^saai mpi a^iusi 
 phpeahee, ' (nor does that one) whose spirit in bis breast is 
 the greatest, vaunt himself about, on account of, for, his 
 strength;' Plat. Phsed. 114, D, dai>^e7v -j^pij mpt rg Sooroo 
 j^o;^ di/dpa, 'a man must be of good comfort about his 
 soul.' 
 
 c. 'For,' 'on account of,' 'by reason of.' Of nearly the 
 same nature is itepi with the dative case used to mark the 
 cause or the occasion of any thing, corresponding to thft. 
 English 'for,' 'on account of,' 'by reason of.' E.g. ^ach. 
 Pers. 691-2, ai^opae 8' dvzia Xizat \ ai&ev, dpx^(p ^^pi rdpfiu, 
 ' I am ashamed to speak in your presence by reason of my 
 old reverence for you ;' Id. Choeph. 32-3, puxb&ev IXaxe, mpi. 
 fb^tp I YUiieaxecotatv iv dwfuiatv fiapbt: mrvatv, 'out of fear.' 
 
 In these examples, the use of Ttepi with the dative is to 
 mark the object with reference to which a state or condition 
 exists ; and this relation is indicated by describing the state 
 or condition as being 'about' the object, .and so as being 
 connected with it in the same way as when nspi with the 
 genitive signifies • concerning.' In the first example cited, 
 ai^lim S' dvTiu Xi^at ai9iv, ' I am ashamed to speak before 
 
 If 
 
 IlepL 
 
 401 
 
 you,' is qualified by dp-jfaltp ntpi rdp^u, so as to show that 
 the feeling of shame has reference to an old sense of vene- 
 ration ; and this is expressed by saying that the feeling of 
 shame is 'about,' and is thus nearly associated with, an 
 ancient sense of veneration. The further notion of cause or 
 occaaion, which the mind supplies from this immediate con- 
 nection with and reference of the state or condition to an 
 appropriate object, can hardly be said to be directly ex- 
 pressed by the preposition and case, but is readily inferred. 
 When it is said, 'I am ashamed to speak before you,' and 
 it is added that this feeling of shame is immediately con- 
 nected with an ancient sense of veneration, being figura- 
 tively placed * about' or ' around' it, it is at once and obvi- 
 ously inferred that the feeling of shame is occasioned by the 
 ancient sense of veneration. It may be added, that there 
 can be little room to doubt that the noun after mpi is here 
 in the dative case, depending upon the sense of ' about' con- 
 tained in Ttepl. 
 
 III. Ihpi with the ablative {instrumentalis and hcaiivus). 
 
 Ihpt, in the sense of ' about,' * around,' is found in con- 
 nection with the ablative (both instrumentalis and loca- 
 tivus), the preposition, however, being used rather distinctly 
 as an adverb, and the ablative denoting at one time the 
 instrument and at another time position. E.g. II. i. 317, 
 xutaarj a' obpavbv Jxev, ihaaopiv^ nepi xamiip, ' the odor went up 
 to heaven, wrapped in smoke,' that is, 'enveloped with 
 smoke round about,' xvatvip, as the ablative of the instm- 
 ment, expressing the thing with which the odor was 
 enveloped ; II. xxi. 577, d}J.d re xal nepl 8oupi iceitapfUvij olix 
 dnoXrjxet \ dhr^, 'and yet, even when pierced with a spear 
 round about, it ceases not from its.bravery.' Here jcepi is 
 to be considered as the qualification of izenappivij, and as 
 meant to describe the manner in which the piercing of the 
 flesh with the spear is made, namely, so that the flesh is 
 round about the spear. The case is, of course, to be inter- 
 preted independently of the preposition or adverb iztpi. 
 
 27 
 
402 
 
 OF THE BEVBtLlL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 IV. Ilepl with the accusative case. 
 
 1. a. 'Around,' 'about.' /7e/0(, as marking a merely local 
 relation of ' around,' ' about,' is used with the accusative 
 cose of both porsonB and things. Thus: a.) With the 
 aucusntivo of nouns denoting things: e.g. II. x. 139, rbu i" 
 el^a ns/ii f/iiva; ijXu&' lai^, ' and quickly the cry reached his 
 heart round about;' II. xviii. 373-4, . . . rpiitodaz yap ieixoat 
 ndvTOZ ireu'j^eu, | kard/teucu nepi xoi-jfov iuaxadkoz iieydpoto, ' for 
 he fushioncd twenty tripods in all to stand around the wall 
 of the well-built hall ;' Uerod. ii. 96, rotat 3k nepi ra iXta 
 olxiouai rdde duri raiv nupj-wv diXa peptj'jiduriTat, ' those w^ho 
 dwell about the marshes have contrived these other things > 
 instead of towers;' Xen. Cyrop. i. 2, 4, o{ 3t iiprjliot xai 
 xotpwvToi Tiepi ra ip-/ua, ' the cphcbi sleep also round about 
 the public oilices ;' Thuc. i. 6, Staf^aipara ij^ovrez nept to. aiSaita, 
 'having girdles about the loins.' 
 
 j9.) With persons : e.g. Xen. Cyrop. i. 4, 18, i^e^oij^ei . . . 
 ow Tolz Ttspt auTov, ' he went forth to give succor together 
 with those about him ;' Id. Anab. i. 8, 27, xai dxru} ol dpaiToe 
 Twv nepi auTov ixsit^ro in' ai)T<p, ' and upou him full eight of 
 the noblest about him ;' Id. Hell. iii. 2, 27. 
 
 Hence Trepi is frequently used with the accusative of a 
 person to show that to him certain other persons are 
 referred as being about or around him, in the sense of 
 his party or friends: e.g. Xen. Hell. iii. 2, 27, o! jtepi 
 Sevtav, ' the party of Xenias,' properly, < the persons about 
 Xenius.' 
 
 In many examples, the sense of nepi with the accusative 
 of a person is so modified as to mean little more than the 
 person himself, who is to be regarded, however, as a chief 
 or leader with his attendants. E.g. Xen. Anab. ii. 4, 2, 
 tvSijXoi Jjoav ol nepi rbv 'Apiatov f^rrov toiz " EiXijat Trpoai^ovre^ 
 rov vouv^ 'Ariocus and his attendants,' or, simply, ' Arieeus;' 
 Thuc. i. 5, noU-u. rffi" ElXAHoz tip naXatip rpdxip vipeToi, nepi r« 
 Aoxpohz roue 'O^oXa; xou AiratXohz xai 'Axapvuuaz, 'the Locri 
 Ozoloi, ^tolians, and Acarnanians.' In this last example, 
 the object of the author may be to include with the Locri 
 Ozohe, yl'^toliuns, and Acarnanians severally, their imrae- 
 
 j 
 
 JltpL 4Qg 
 
 diate neighbors, or, at least, to show that he would not 
 Xl'.^ir''' ^ ''^''' " ''' -^ ''-^- o^ the^ 
 l>. 'About,' 'near,' 'in the region of.' Hepi with the 
 accusative is frequently used in the sense of 'ab'out/ 'neir ' 
 ... the regjon of,' that is, to describe an object L S 
 •about ' as distinguished from 'at.' 'on,' 'in,'i place, e/ 
 X n. HelU 3, 10, 'AX.,fiM,, Sk . . . olx Uj^a^e nap£, 
 a « nep, laXopPpia. ^., 'was about, near, in th? regio.f of 
 ealy„.bna; Id. Hell. ii. 1, 20, dryiXXera. a^ro7,^d 1] 
 ^%W 'the events that had occurred near Lampsachus!' 
 
 ' f..„ n"'; ^''"'l'«"<^'>»«-' Here, however, the sense may be, 
 the matters concerning Lampsachus.' 
 In the same way nepi is employed with the accusative 
 of numbers, and of denominations of time, to mark a mere 
 api.rox„nation, and to exclude the idea of exactness as to 
 the number or time given. E.g. Xen. Hell. ii. 4, 5, 2 
 
 hund.ed Id. Anab. n. 1, 7, xai IjS^ ^„ „,,; „x^9„^„^, 
 Ttl :\r' "«; ^'^:>"* th« time of full markit;' Id. 
 ti ' '■. n ' '"'"J' ^""'""' ™"^ Xfo^ouc, 'and about this 
 
 l: me': -iT "" "' '"''' "'' '^' """^^*"'^ ^" *^« 
 c. 'About,' 'concerning,' the Latin de. Hepi taken 
 metaphorically, is employed with the accusative ease in 
 the sense of 'about,' 'concerning,' the Latin de, to denote 
 the object about or concerning which an action is per! 
 formed, or any thought or feeling is had. E.g. Xen IZ 
 ".. 5. 7,o(pt. mo. nepi rd in.^3e.a ^aau, 'fhe rest wet 
 occupied about the supply of provisions;' Id. De re Eq vT 
 3. ec3e.ac 3e xp^ r6u nepi rb.lnnou, 'it is requisite for the 
 persoa occupied about the horse,' 'whose business s w Uh 
 he lK,rse ; d. ib § 1 d^dyx, r6u 7nno. xai. nepi r6 ^aX^uoLaZ 
 ^acnepi zo j*yjrea«?«, SooxoXd.repou elva,, 'the horse is neces- 
 sarily more ill-tempered about, in relation to, the beW 
 bridled and rubbed;' Id. Cyrop. vi. 1, 54, i^ei sl 3 
 ... .ry,« aor^ rd nepi rol, nipyo.,, 'every thing relating 
 to the towers;' Id Anab. ii. 1, 7, W^/, , ^^.^c rrf^lf 
 re xa. onXopa^.au, 'knowing about, in matters relating to 
 
4 OF THB BBVKBAL PKKP0SITI0N8. 
 
 jtics and the use of arms;' Id. Hell. i. 6, 87, rtihra i^if. 
 ■Xe Ti ntpi djv vaupaxia^, 'he reported every thing that 
 lated to, ahout, the sea-fight' 
 
 When used in this sense with the accusative of persons, 
 pi may sometimes be rendered by Howards,' 'for,' 'of,' 
 e Latin erga and in. E.g. Xen. Cyrop. i. 2, 7, oTourai r^p rooc 
 mMTo»z *'i\ ntpi tfeobc d>, itdhora d/ze^wc tx^tv, xal mpl 
 viae xalnurplda xai yMouc, 'tlioy suppose that those who 
 ungrateful will also be more than all others neglectM 
 ■ the pods, of their parents, of their country, and of their 
 ionda;' Id. Anab. vii. 6, 11, ^ Tthlan^u npodufdav i[iauT<p j' 
 ury) aovtiSivai nep't i/iSz naptajpjitivoz, ' wherein I think I am 
 )iiBoio«m of having shown the greatest zeal for you,' 'the 
 lOst reiuly service towards you.' 
 
 In the above uses of nepi there is no difficulty in seeing 
 lat the meaning of 'about,' from which that of ' concern- 
 jg,' 'relating to,' 'towards,' 'of,' is immediately de- 
 lved, is the same with the local sense of 'about,' used 
 letaphorically, just as the English 'about,' in like cases, is 
 he local term ' about' employed figuratively. Thus, as we 
 ay, ' he went about (around) the city,' we say also, ' he 
 rent about his task,' ' he wrote about the war.' 
 
 In all the instances of the use of nepl with the accusative 
 hove noticed, this case is to be taken in the sense of ' as 
 ),■ ' as regards.' Thus, in 'AixtPcdSi^z Ttepi SaXunPpiav Jjv, 
 Alcibiadcs was about Salymbria,' the meaning is, « Alcibia- 
 es was about, near, ... as regards Salymbria;' and in mpl 
 eoue diiiXwz Ix^iv, ' to be careless about ... as regards the 
 ods,' « as far as the gods are concerned." 
 
 (For the table of the significations and use of nepi with 
 ases, see the next page.) 
 
 " 
 
 i 
 
 IlepL m^v. 
 
 405 
 
 TABLE OF THE SIQNinOATIONS AND USB OF rtft WTTB OASES. 
 
 Signlflotioiu of 
 ttpl. 
 
 Deo.: 'with iMpoct 
 to.' 
 
 Dttin: 'for.' 
 
 Accaaat.;*aa ta' 
 
 Instr.and Locat. : 
 ' by/ ' with/ -In.* 
 
 1.0.' Arowid,' 
 
 1. a. < Amnnd,' 
 
 1. a.' Around,' 
 
 1. a. 'Around,' 
 
 PreiioHltlon ubihI 
 
 '•liont.' 
 
 '■bout' 
 
 '■bont' 
 
 ■about' 
 
 only adverlii- 
 
 ».'AlK.nt,' 
 
 
 
 t. 'About," near/ 
 
 ally. 
 
 * nMr.* 
 
 
 
 
 
 c. 'Almiit, 'of,' 
 
 c'Ahont,* 'of,' 
 
 «.' About,' 'fcr.' 
 
 0.' About/ 'for/ 
 
 
 'rfiiiainiluK.* 
 
 ' conciTnlnK.' 
 
 
 •toward!/ 
 
 1 
 
 d. 'Fur."uUBO> 
 niiiiii of.* 
 
 cf. ' Alioiit/ * for/ 
 
 (1. 'For.' 'on HO- 
 oouDt o^* 'by 
 rouonoL' 
 
 
 1 
 
 'iinBocouiitiif.' 
 
 
 1 
 
 e. ' For,* olfjfict 
 
 e. 'For/ objHCt 
 
 
 1 
 
 liad Id tIow. 
 
 hull In Tlow. 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 /'For,* 'b> 
 
 /. 'For/ 'by nm- 
 
 
 
 
 reoflon of.' 
 
 •on of.' 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 p.'li«8ii«Ung,* 
 
 ^. 'nrnpoctlng,' 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 'wlthnapoct 
 
 ■with reipect 
 
 
 
 
 to.* 
 
 to.' 
 
 
 
 
 A. 'Ortbenlue 
 
 A. ■ or the Talua 
 
 
 
 
 of.' 
 
 of.' 
 
 
 
 
 i'QultV 'Tory.' 
 
 
 2. 'AboTfl/ 'noro 
 
 
 
 
 than/ 'beyond.' 
 
 
 
 nX-jv is said to bo the same with the comparative nXiov, 
 'more.' See Passow's Lexicon, s. v. and Pott's Etym. 
 Forsch. ii. pp. 30 and 323. It has the signification of ' ex- 
 cept,' which prevails in all its uses, being varied only as it 
 is modified by the terms with which it is coupled, such as 
 e/, idv, ^, AXXd. The signification of ' except' belonging to 
 n):^v would seem to be hardly consistent with either the 
 ooiuuioii meaning of 'more' in which nXiov is used, or with 
 its primary sense of 'fuller;' and, until this apparent incon- 
 sistency shall have been removed, the common origin of 
 7t)j^v and nXim must be doubted. Its connection with iteXdw, 
 TteXd^to, is quite as doubtful. 
 
 IlXrju is employed both as a preposition and as an adverb ; 
 that is, both with and without being connected with the 
 case of a noun. 
 
 1. As a preposition, nX^u is used with the genitive case 
 alone, and thus employed is frequently met with in Hero- 
 dotus and the Attic writers. Homer and Uesiod furnish but 
 one example each, namely, Od. viii. 207, . . . nXijv f aurou 
 AaoM/iavTo^f ' except Laodamas himself,' and Hesiod, Scut. 
 74. Xen. Cyrop. i. 2, 4, of Sk iiptj^ot xai xot/twvrau nepi ra 
 dpxsta . . . TtX^v Twv ys^rafi^xduov, 'except those who are 
 married.' (See Passow's Lexicon.) In such examples the 
 
406 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PBEPOSITIONS. 
 
 genitive is used in the eenae of • with respect to,' or ' in the 
 
 case of.' 
 
 2. As an adverh, nX^v occurs in connection with other 
 cases also besides the genitive ; but so that the case of the 
 noun cannot be considered to depend in any way upon nXijv, 
 but upon other parts of the sentence. Thus, it is found 
 witli iu and the ablative (locativus) : e.g. Xen. Cyrop. i. 2, 4, 
 rrX^v iv Tfuz TeTay/tivcuz i^fAipau^, •except on the appointed 
 days ;' with the nominative : e.g. Xcn. Cyrop. i. 2, 13, ai 
 d-pX"-' ^'^"'^ ^* Touuov xadioravToi, nk^v o! uou naidtov SiSdaxedoi, 
 •except the teachers of the boys;' and with the accusative: 
 e.g. Id. ib. ii. 4, 17, ij-o) 8i aoi oux ideH^ao) Sidovat nXrjv fisTptoui 
 T(vdc, 'and I, on my part, will refuse to give them, except 
 some moderate number.' 
 
 It may be added, that Jtk^v, considered as an adverb, is 
 found coupled with several particles; thus, with ec and idv, 
 ' if,' ' if perchance :' e.g. Xen. Anab. iv. 1, 14, of 8' inei- 
 OovTO, nkjjv ei «c ixXei/ieu, •except in the case (if) any one 
 secreted something;' also with ei /joj; with Su, the two 
 words meaning 'except that;' with dXXd, 'but,' 'on the 
 other band,' giving the sense of • except on the other hand,' 
 'on the contrary,' and •notwithstanding;' and with Saov, 
 the united meaning being, •except in so far as.' (See Fas- 
 sow's Lex. s. V.) 
 
 A consideration of the uses otnX^v, both as a preposition 
 and as an adverb, would seem to lead to the conclusion that 
 it has the proper meaning of 'except,' or possibly that of 
 ' beside,' wliicli would be not very far removed from that 
 of 'except.' This same sense is found also in the com- 
 pounds nk^niieXi^z, * out of tune,' and, hence, ' erring,' ' fail- 
 ing,' composed of nX^^v and lAiXoz, ' tunc,' and nXrjfi/ieXeev, 'to 
 be out of tune,' 'to make a false note,' 'to err,' 'to do 
 wrong.' The origin of TtXiju, however, and the way in 
 which the sense of ' except,' • beside,' arises, can hardly be 
 derived from these forms.' 
 
 In the compound 7tX:j/i/iupa, ' a flood' or • tide,' and itXiifi- 
 papk, • a flood-tide,' which have probably the proper sense 
 of 'ovor-fulness,' itk^v, if it be really the former part of the 
 compound, and this be not rather nX'^ for i:Xt \i\ itXioz, ' full,' 
 
 • i 
 
 IIXtjv. Ilp6. 
 
 407 
 
 (cf. nXrj-doi;, 'a crowd,' which has the same radical with 
 itXe-o^,) the fi being doubled merely, has the sense of jzXiov, 
 at least of its radical ::Xe, ' full.' But the marked difl'erence 
 between the signification of these compounds and that of 
 i:XrjnneXi^Z and nXij/ifteXeev, so far as it depends on the former 
 part of the compound, goes rather to show that this is not 
 the sanie in both sets of words. And as irX^v, • except,' is 
 more obviously related to nX^v in xX^jfjifuX^z and nXijfi/ieXecv, 
 the greater probability is that it is dift'erent from rtXiov. 
 Certainly, until something more satisfactory shall have been 
 adduced, it will be safer not to assume thatn'Aj^vis connected 
 with the comparative xXiov, •more.' 
 
 np6. 
 Upb corresponds to the Sanskrit pro, the Latin pro and 
 IwoE, the German vor, the Slavonic pro and pri, the Gothic 
 fni aiid/ri, the Irish fur, for, foir^ and the English for, and 
 fro, as seen iu the compound fro-ward. (See Bopp, Glossar. 
 p. 225.) 
 
 Significations of itp6. 
 
 1. a. The proper sense of itp6 is •before,' •in front,' as 
 opposed to omo9e, 'behind.' E.g. Ilerod. ix. 52, to 8k itpo, 
 r^f 7:6Xtn^ iare rf^z flXarouSmv, • this is in front of the city of 
 the PIntieans ;' Xen. Cyrop. iii. 3, 33, nopd troXXa 8k itp^ r&v 
 ifuXdjuov xauaavTSz, ' having kindled many fires in front of the 
 guards.' The same meaning is common in compounds ; as, 
 npoij^eiv, 'to hold before,' or 'in front:' e.g. Xen. Cyrop. ii. 
 8, 10, ub i^'tpt npoi^tov, ' holding out my hands before me ;' 
 npoMv, ' to run before,' ' to run in front of,' Ttpotffratr&at, ' to 
 8tan<l before,' ' to stand in front of:' e.g. Xen. Hell. iv. 1, 18, 
 npotrrr^ad/ievoz xu Kpfima, ahxoz 8k Sma&ev j-et/d/Huo^, ' having 
 stationed chariots in front;' Ttpo^wptoz, 'before, in front ofi 
 the altar.' 
 
 h. 'Forwards,' •onwards.' Immediately connected with 
 the notion of • before,' ' in front,' is that of ' forwards,' ' on- 
 wards:' e.g. II. iv, 382, of S iml olv ^ixowo, i8k irpb b8ou 
 iyiuovTo, 'and \fere on their way,' that is, 'were forwards 
 . . . with respect to their journey.' Compare the deriva- 
 tive ff(i/l/5<u and npdam, uEol. nbpaw, and the Latin j:>orro, which 
 

 408 
 
 OF THB SBVBBAIi PBBPOSITIONS. 
 
 properly means 'forwiards,' 'forth.' The same meaning of 
 itpi is seen in compounds also ; as, npo^dXhtv, < to throw or 
 put forward,' itpoiivat, ' to go forward,' ' to advance,' npo^al- 
 vew, 'to step forward,' 'to advance.' 
 
 c. 'Before,' 'in advance of.' Very nearly allied to the 
 preceding significations of npo is that of ' before,' ' in ad- 
 vance of,' with the idea of preceding: o.g. II. x. 285-6, 
 mtttS fiot, &C ^e icarpi d/i irnieo Tudii Slip | ^c ^^ac, Sre Tt 
 7ip6 'Axaiwv djjeioz ^Bt, ' when he went as a messenger before, 
 iu advance of, the Achsei.' And so in compounds ; as, npo- 
 jpdipav, ' to write before or first,' npoSetxvuvat, ' to show be- 
 forehand.' 
 
 In the same sense np6 is used also with reference to time ; 
 as in npb toutou and itpb rou {icporou), 'before this time;' 
 Herod, i. 122, <paz npb rou fjtiv oiix eiSivat, ' saying that hitherto 
 he did not know.' (See Passow's Lex.) 
 
 d. 'Before,' 'sooner than,' 'rather than.' This same 
 meaning of ' before,' when used of one object relatively to 
 another, gives the idea of preference, expressed in English 
 by ' before,' ' sooner than,' ' rather than.' E.g. Herod, i. 62, 
 (Urn ^ Tupawiz npb iXtudepv^ f^v dmraarSTepov, ' by whom the 
 tyranny was preferred before freedom ;' aipua9ai re np6 nvof, 
 ' to choose a thing before another,' ap6 noKiou notuadat, ' to 
 value before, above, much,' ' to value highly.' So, likewise, 
 in compounds; as, nponpav, 'to honor before or above.' 
 
 e. 'For,' 'in behalf of.' With various actions, such aa 
 fighting, contending, npS obtains the secondary sense of 
 'for,' • in behalf of:' e.g. H. xxiv. 215, dXXd itpb Tptoiov xai 
 Tpmiddwv Padux6)i3twv \ iora&r', 'standing (as a defender) be- 
 fore, in front of, on behalf of, the Trojans;' II. iv. 156, 
 {pdj[e.odut) . . . xpi re naidotv xai npd jvvatxioVf ' to fight for 
 both children and wives;' properly, 'to fight before, ia 
 front of,' tlie notion of ' for,' ' on behalf of,' being imme- 
 diately suggested by this. 
 
 /. 'For,' 'in the room of,' 'instead of.' In many cases 
 itp6 has a sense somewhat dificrent from that just mentioned, 
 namely, tlmt of ' for,' 'in the room of,' ' instead of.' Here 
 itpo properly means 'before,' whence comes the idea of 
 occupying the place of another, or becoming bia substitute: 
 
 
 J 
 
 np6. 
 
 409 
 
 e.g. 8ouio,„p6Szan6Too, 'a slave for, instead of, a master-' 
 
 T't S,' f r'"' ; "^ '^ '"^^" ^™- ^-d t° 1- " t at 
 8 to one land m the room ot; in the stead of, another 
 land; or, more obviously, the sense may be, 'driven for 
 wards, onwards, from land to land ;' np6 rLninfZZeZ 
 mg of « forwards.' (See Passow's Lex ) ^ 
 
 'Z^X'Vf-''""^''' P-P-ly. 'before." in view o^' 
 of" from • O ^ " occasionally used in the sense of 'out 
 
 reason oTal^ T"" ^Jf "'''* ''' *° ^^P'««« '^^ ground or 
 reason of an action. Thus, II. xvii. 667, :rp6 a>6alo iinoseu 
 
 of u„Lr tT ' . '""" "f^ ^"^'''^ '*o «o»t«»d because 
 
 °L?nr^' .• .?^" °^' ''^ "'° ^'•'^'^'"S of' ^ lord;' properly 
 before, 'm the presence of,' 'in view of T1.„ „ ^' 
 
 sense of .^^. i„ this construction^Ifbefore ' '^n thrn^J 
 
 expressed by for, 'from," out of," by reason of,' is derived 
 from the relation into which np6, iith the meal" of 
 
 .erSso^irLVi;:/.^ " ^'^ '^'^"- '^- ''- '-^^^'' 
 
 Sumrmry of the significatims of npi. 
 Ilpb. a. 'Before, in front.' 
 
 6. 'Forwards,' • onwards.' 
 
 c. 'Before,' 'in advance of.' 
 
 d. 'Before,' 'sooner than,' 'rather than.' 
 
 e. 'For,' 'on behalf of.' 
 
 /• 'For,' 'in the room of,' 'instead of.' 
 ff. ' For ' ' from,' 'out of,' ' by reason of;' properly, 
 'before,' 'm the view of.' '*'*'/' 
 
 Hpb with thi genitive case. 
 The preposition npd is used with the genitive case aln„o 
 
 to in from of tbe g„,>ri,;. u. X^ib i 4 4 'i'"'' »'',°»°J' 
 
410 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 is, ' fronting Cilicia ;' Id; Hell. ii. 4, 33, xai AUoi of Te&a/i/iivot 
 Aaxedat/iOi'iiuv nfio uov rcuXmv iv Ktpafittxift, ' buried before, in 
 front of, the gates in Ceramicus ;' Id. Anab. i. 7, 11, ohroi dk 
 nob auTou fiamXiw; Teraj-fthot ^oav, ' these were posted in front' 
 of the king himself;' Herod, viii. 53, Ifjocpoade iLv npb tijc 
 dxpoaoiioz, mtade 8k rtuv ituXiutv xai rrfi dvodou, . . . rourg 
 dvi^jodv rwsc, ' before the citadel, but behind the gates and 
 the roiid that leads up to the citadel.' 
 
 4. ' Forwards,' ' onwards.' A modification merely of this 
 mcuning of 7r//d with the genitive is that in which it may be 
 rendered in English by ' forwards,' 'forth,' 'onwards.' Ill 
 this Bcimu, npd with the genitive is connected with an action 
 or motion, and marks it as directed ' forwards' or 'onwards,' 
 that is, 'in frortt,' 'forth,' from a given point. E.g. II. iv. 
 182, ol o' inei uuv tpj^ouro idk itpb b8ou iyivovro, ' when they 
 had departed and were on their road,' that is, ' forwards on 
 their way,' 'forwards . . • with respect to their journey.' 
 
 c. 'Before,' with the idea of antecedence. From the 
 mere local sense of 'before,' 'in front of,' comes the relative 
 notion of ' before' implying the antecedence of one object 
 witli respect to another. In this meaning npb occurs with 
 the genitive case in several ways : a.) To denote any object 
 with respect to which another is represented as being 
 ' before' or ' in advance :' e.g. II. x. 286, Sre re npb 'A^auwu 
 djjekoi fjee, 'when he went as a messenger before, in advance 
 of, the Achaji.' 
 
 p.) To mark a period of time ' before,' ' in advance of 
 which an event is said to have occurred : e.g. Xen. Cyrop. 
 iv. 5, 13, oiix eiaiuprjxav airobz npb ^jiipaz, ' they did not admit 
 them before daylight;' Id. Anab. i. 7, 12, raura dk ^jjeiiov 
 npbz Kopov . . . npb rrfi pdf^z, ' and this they reported to 
 (!yru8 before the battle ;' Id. Memor. iii. 5, 11, oi) noXo Si npb 
 fjpwv yiYuuozez, 'born not long before our time.' 
 
 ;-.) 'Before,' 'sooner than,' 'rather than.' IJp6 with the 
 genitive is used also in a more general way to express 
 preference, that is, relative priority of one object with 
 respect to another, where it is rendered in English by 
 'before,' 'sooner than,' 'rather than :' e.g. Herod, i. 62, olat 
 ^ Tupa\>ntz 7:pb iXsudtpirjz f^v dartcutTbrtpov, ' who preferred the 
 
 np6. 
 
 411 
 
 tyrannybefore freedom ;' Xen. Memor. ii. 6, 3. rd. Si xai npb 
 
 npm,a,ui. ^ao. ^ot e7uc., -J would choose before, in pre- 
 ference to, ten minse.' ^ 
 
 J' '*'°'-'';;« behalf of.' /7/>i with the genitive is used in 
 the sense of ' for.' ' in behalf of,' this meaning being imme^ 
 dmtely connected with that of ' before,' ' in front If' and 
 occurring more commonly after such actions as ^.^^ffae, 
 'to fight:' e.g. I. xxiv. 215, dm npb TpJ..,, xaiTpo^dS.l 
 Muxona.. M<rra<5r',' standing (in battle) before the Trojans 
 and Trojan dames.' tlmt is, 'to stand in battle on behalf of;' 
 11. IV. lo6, olov npocryjaa, npb \\^auo» Tpa,oi /.rfve^^o,. « when I 
 
 Aclm , ; Herod. IX. 48. ri Sij ob npb pi, uo. ^FMrjua,u ip.7,, 
 
 nj^Si uo. pappdpa.u ^pu,, ,W npb: .Wc dp^^pb. pa-^.,6Ua\ 
 
 why, then shall we not fight, an equil number wifh aj 
 
 beSa f "ft'""', ^r °" ''•"'' °^ the Greeks, and we ^n 
 behalf of the barbarians V Xen. Anab. vii. 6 27, xa.&,l 
 
 hit? T ^'P"'''''"!^'^ ^P' 'f^^ ' ' would I appear to you to 
 have taken an unwise measure on your behalf?' 
 e. 'For,' 'in the room of,' 'instead of.' Hpd with the 
 
 nstcvd of; and this moaning of np6, it has been seen 
 above, comes from that of ' before,' ' in front of,' Zs 72 
 nearly related to the one just mentioned. It unposes on^ 
 
 £ ' : S'o?" tT'-' ^''' "^ "'^- *''--^^^^^ 
 
 its substitute Tin ""^ '"' ^°""^^ ''' P'"'^^ ""' b<^^«™« 
 
 ot anmstcr, ^Esch. Trom. Vinct. 68^-3, . . . oiarponArS S' 
 
 aTd'to S '7P' y' n^f^'^^^o,^, 'I am driv'en from 
 
 But t n ' ,"' *° """ '"'"^ '" "^« ^°«"^ «*■ 'another.' 
 
 But, .„ tins example, ,t would, perhaps, be better to undc - 
 
 stand np6 m the sense of 'forwards,' ' onwards ;' "lal 
 
 'lookiL L ' in ' ' P?P'''^' '^^^°'-«'' '>" -i«W of,' 
 
 looking to In some examples np6 with the genitive case 
 expresses the ground or the motive of an Lion The 
 object „.troduced by np6 is that ' in view of ^h^eh or"' loot 
 ing to' which, the action is performed, and so is regard dt 
 
412 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 ita ground or its motive. And, again, it is obvious that the 
 notion of looking to,' or 'having in view,' is to be referred 
 immediately to the primary sense of 'before,' 'in front of,' 
 belonging to 7r/)i. E.g. II. xvii. 666-7, . . . ff£/>« r«P SIb /rj fuv 
 'Axaioi I df>r<diou itpb <p6[ioco Uwp Sifiotat Xkoxv, ' he very much 
 feared lest the Achsei oiit of great fear might leave him a 
 prey to the enemy;' that is, 'before, in the presence of, in 
 view of,' and hence, 'from, out of, because of, great fear;' 
 B. xxiv. 734, deWeiioiv itph ivaxroi: dfieiXixou, 'toiling for a 
 relentless lord,' that is, 'because of him,' *in view of his 
 authority,' properly, 'before him;' Soph. Electr. 495, nplt 
 T&v8e, 'in view of these things,' 'therefore.' (For the 
 examples, see Passow's Lexicon, s. v. The explanation of 
 this meaning of npS there given is different.) 
 
 In all these various uses of npd with the genitive the case 
 has the meaning of 'with respect to,' that is, marks the 
 specific object to which exclusively the preceding term, as 
 qualified by npo, is to be referred. Thus, in the phrase itpb 
 abzoo ^(wdiwz Terarpivoi, the sense is, 'posted before, in 
 front, . . . with respect to the king himself;' and in j^v npb 
 rxc iXauvopm, the construction would be, adopting the com- 
 mon interpretation, 'I am driven to one land so that it 
 occupies the room of another land ;' or, allowing npd to have 
 its sense of 'forwards,' 'onwards,' 'I am driven onwards 
 from one laud to another,' that is, ' I am driven to one land 
 onwards with respect to another.' 
 
 TABLB OP THE SIONmCATIONB AND USB 0» .(.« WTH ITS CASE. 
 
 Signifiution of wft. 
 
 QeoitiTs : ' with reipect to.' 
 
 •rather 
 
 a. ' Before,' ' in front of.' 
 
 b. • Forwards,' 'onwards.' 
 e. 'Before,' 'in adTonceof.' 
 d. ' Before,' in point of time. 
 t. 'Before,' 'sooner thon,' 
 
 than.' 
 
 /. ' For,' ' in behalf of.' 
 y. 'For,' 'in the room of,' 'instead 
 
 of." , 
 
 ft. 'For,' 'from,' 'out of;' properly, 
 
 ' in »iew of.' 
 
 a. ' Before,' ' in front of.' 
 *. ' Forwards,' ' onwards.' 
 
 c. ' Before,' ' in advance of.' 
 
 d. ' Before,' in point of time. 
 
 e. 'Before,' 'sooner than,' 
 
 than.' 
 /. ' For,' ' on beholf of.' 
 g. ' For," ' in the room of,' 
 
 A. 'For,' 'from,' 'out of;' properly, 
 'in view of.' 
 
 •rather 
 
 'instead 
 
 /7o(5f. 
 
 413 
 
 Ilpdc. 
 
 The preposition Ttpd^ has also a Doric form rrpori, which, 
 in a form called Cretan, by transposition becomes izopri ; and 
 this corresponds to the Sanskrit prati. In Homer the words 
 iTOu and ndr occur in the sense of np6z, and appear to be 
 shortened forms of it. JIpS^ is only an augmented form of 
 np6, just as el^ {ivc) is a fuller form of iv, and as oux is of oli, 
 and has the same root with the Latin pro and prce, with the 
 English for and fore, seen in forehead, forecast, and fro, a 
 transposed form of for, seen in froward. The radical fir in 
 first is only another form of for, as pri in pruor and pri-mus 
 is of pro or jrroi. Whether the c at the end of np6(: is in- 
 flectional, or merely formative, may admit of question. Of 
 the same radical with npi^ and npb is nbp^w, 'onwards,' 
 ' forwards,' having the same relation to these that the Latin 
 porro has to pro. Akin to npb and npb^, both in form and 
 sense, are mlpoc and ndpoidev. In these words the radical 
 nap would seem to be the same with npb, and has the same 
 form, allowing for the metathesis, with the Sanskrit pra. 
 See also what has been said above of npb, p. 407. 
 
 Significations of npb^. 
 
 1. a. 'Before.' The primary signification of npb^ is 
 'before,' with the idea of 'fronting,' or 'having the face 
 forwards,' which is also the meaning of npb. This sense is 
 attributed to npbz by the ancient grammarians. Thus, 
 Moschopulus, cited by Sturtz, Lex. Xenoph. s. v., says, ^ 
 npb&eaiz npbi . . . *ai {iartv) ire dvrt ivwmov xae npbad-ev Xap.- 
 pdverai, and Phavorinus, Xapfiduerat i^ npb9eaez npb^ xat dirci 
 zou ivdmiov. This meaning is seen slightly modified in those 
 compounds that have the sense of ' towards,' ' looking to ;' 
 as, npoa^Xinecv, ' to look towards or upon,' npoa[io(tf)6z, • to- 
 wards, looking towards, the north wind,' npoaeipoc, ' looking 
 towards the east,' ' eastward,' npoa/jXtoz, ' towards the sun,' 
 ' sunny,' npoaxatvuv, ' to gape in the face,' and, figuratively, 
 npooYeXav ziva, ' to look at one with a laugh,' (Aristoph. Pax, 
 600,) npoai^yopeiv, 'to accost,' that is, 'to speak to face to 
 face.' It is seen also in many instances of the use of npb^ 
 
4U 
 
 OF THB 6EVBBAL PKEPOSITIONS. 
 
 with the cswes, aa II. i. 338-9, . . . fdpwpo, d' Scro^v \ itp6cTt 
 &ti!>u ftaxdpwv, i:pbz re ^r&v du»p<I,nwv, 'before, m the 
 presence of, the blessed gods, and before mortal men; 
 ff/>dcrorc«/«raZc,' before the judges.' ^ 
 
 b 'By,' 'before,' in adjurations. The sense of 'by, 
 •before ' ' in the presence of,' the Latin per, which np6<: has 
 in adjurations, is really the same with that just mentioned: 
 eg npbz <?«5v, 'by,' that is, 'before, in the presence of, the 
 eods;' and so ttaoc t?£ouc, per deos, 'by,' that is, 'before m 
 Uie presence of, the gods.' The English language cmployB 
 the word 'before,' which has the same radical and the same 
 sense with jzpoc, in the same way. ^ 
 
 c « Towards,' ' on the quarter of.' The sense of ' towards, 
 'looking to,' 'on the quarter of,' which npdc frequently has 
 in marking the relative position of objects, as with regard 
 to the points of the compass, is the same in fact with that 
 of 'before,' 'having the face towards.' E.g. Herod, i. 84, 
 twpiou npk roD Tpiiho urpapphov, ' a place looking towards 
 Tmolus,' properly, 'facing, having the direction towards 
 Tmolus;' Id. iii. 101, ;r/,6c v6tou dui,wu, 'on the quarter of 
 the south,' that is, 'looking towards, facing, the south. 
 For the Greeks, in marking the point of the compass lO 
 which the position of an object is referred, either suppose 
 the object described to look towards the point of the com- 
 pass, as here, where np6c is used, or regard it as looking 
 from the point of the compass towards the speaker, as where 
 d^o is used, or considbr it as having the relative direction of 
 •upon,' or us 'looking upon' the point of the compass, ^ 
 where im is used. And the same may be said of their mode 
 of denoting the position of an object generally by means of 
 these prepositions. . , 
 
 •Against.' To this place belongs the case in which ;r/,of, 
 employed in describing the relative position of an objec^ 
 and living the meaning of 'on the quarter 0^..- expjes^d 
 in English by the term ' against.' E.g. Uerod. ii. fO. <?"A««J 
 xarW«v 4oC Acdc6.o,u, 'garrisons were establ^hed on the 
 quarter of. on the side of, or against, the Ethiopians 
 Here, obviously, the preposition ha. the same signification 
 as in .,.6c .oridvi^. above, and allows the term 'against 
 
 Upoz. 
 
 415 
 
 to be employed in translating it only because of the under- 
 stood hostile relations of the parties whose position towards 
 each other is indicated by ::p6z, 
 
 d. * On or by the side of.' ' near.' Hence, again, i:p6z is 
 used also to convey the idea of proximity, expressed in Eng- 
 lish by ' on or by the side of,' ' near,' and by the "Latin juxta. 
 E.g. II. xxii. 198, aorof 8k Ttori nrdJitoz nizer' alee, ' himself 
 sped ever on the side of, near, the city;' Herod, ii. 154, elai 
 Sk oliToi o{ j(wpoi Kpbz ^addaoTjz, ' these places are near, on the 
 side of, the sea.' Admitting the explanation above given 
 of npSz in the sense of 'towards,' 'on the quarter of.' it will 
 scarcely bo doubted that in npoz {nou) 7tT6hoz, npbz rfaldaoTji, 
 the preposition has the same force materially, nor. conse- 
 quently, that the signification of ' on the side of.' < near,' has 
 its origin in that of ' before,' ' looking towards.' 
 
 e. ' On the side of,' the Latin a or ab c. Abl. Hence, again, 
 xpoz is used in denoting descent, expressed in English by 
 •on the side of;' as, npbz Ttarpdz, 'on the father's side :' e.g. 
 Isocr. 228, b. Jtpbc 8i prjvpbz inb Jibz <Lv, 'on the mother's 
 side descended from Jove.' The meaning oinpbz pijrpoz is, 
 properly. ' looking to.' ' on the quarter of, on the side of, 
 the mother.' npoz and the noun pr^Tpbz defining in what view, 
 with reference to what specific object, that is, literally, with 
 the face turned towards what object, a person is said to be 
 descended from Jove. Precisely in the same way that izpbz 
 v6tou dvipoo, ' on the quarter of the south wind,' defines the 
 position of an object with reference to the points of the 
 compass by marking which way it looks, iipbz pijTpbz defines 
 the relation in which a person's descent from Jove stands to 
 his human parents by marking which way the divine descent 
 is to be taken as looking, or in what specific view it is to be 
 understood that he is Jove-descended. The only dillcrence 
 is to be found in the nature of the objects to which the 
 thing described is referred for the determination of its rela- 
 tive position, and in the fact that in the one case the thing 
 to be determined is a local position, in the other a natural 
 descent. 
 
 /. ' On the side of,' ' of the party of,' ' in favor of.' Hardly 
 to be distinguished from the ' immediately preceding sense 
 
416 
 
 OF THE SBVBRAt PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 of np6z, except in regard to the nature of the objects the 
 relative position of which is defined, is that in which it 
 marks the party or sect to which a person belongs, expressed 
 in English by ' on the side of,' ' of the party of,' ' in favor 
 of.' E.g. Ilerod. viii. 22, Iva noajajj 'lutvaz itera^aXhcv xal 
 jtviadm Tcpbi; Iworwf, 'that he may cause the lonians to 
 change sides and become of their party ;' Eurip. Ale. 58, 
 ff/>6c Tiov l-pvriov, <Po7i3e, tov uSfxov r/(?5yc, ' you make your law 
 in fevor of the rich.' For, here also, the sense which npSz 
 has is immediately derived from that of ' on the quarter of,' 
 which has been above explained to be one of the appli- 
 cations of the meaning of 'before,' 'with the face to,' or 
 'looking towards.' To be of the party of, as expressed by 
 np6(;, means, strictly considered, to have the inclinations 
 turned that way, to stand in the same relative position to a 
 person or party that an object described as being ff/>6c vStou 
 dvi/tou does to a point of the compass. 
 
 g. ' On the part of," 'with,' ' among.' A merely diflerent 
 application of the above sense of nfi6(: is that in which it 
 marks the party to whom any state or quality is referred as 
 existing ' on its part,' where in English are used the terms 
 'with,' 'among,' 'on the part of,' and In Latin the prepo- 
 sition apud. E.g. Ilerod. iv. 144, ««rac rSde to inoz ihcnero 
 d&dvarou /ti^/iTjU Ttfib; ' ElbjtniovTuov, ' he left behind him an un- 
 dying memory on the part of, with, among, the people of the 
 Hellespont,' apud Hellespontinos. Here npb(: ^ EXhjonovrimv 
 defines the people with^reference to whom, on the part of 
 whom, there is said to be left a deathless memory, in the 
 same way that 7r/>oc votou dvi/ioo describes locally the point 
 of the compass to which the position of an object is referred. 
 In the former case, just as in the latter, 7rp6(: shows towards 
 what object another looks or has its aspect; and this it 
 does, in both cases alike, by representing that it has the 
 relative position of 'before,' 'fronting,' and, hence, ' looking 
 towards.' 
 
 h. 'According to the custom, character, or nature of.' 
 In the same way is to be explained the case in which an 
 action or quality is referred by w/b(5c to an object as belong- 
 ing to it, as comporting with, or being according to, its 
 
 K' 
 
 np6<:. 
 
 417 
 
 'Kf 
 
 character, as being its property, where in Latin the genitive 
 stands alone, and where in English such phrases are used 
 as, ' it belongs to,' ' it is the property of,' 'it is according to 
 the custom, character, &c. of.' E.g. Herod, v. 12, outi 
 Fltpaad f^v ourt Addta rd noieiifitva, ourt npbz twv ix r^c ^Aal^i 
 obSafi&v, ' nor according to the practice or customs of any 
 of the Asiatics.' Ilpbz, as here used, simply refers the 
 actions described to certain persons, the people of Asia, as 
 those on the part of whom they are found existing ; so that 
 nphz Ttov ix Tyjz^ Aa'tTiz obSafi&v points out the parties to whom 
 certain acts (ra iroieu/ieva) are referred by way of determining 
 their character, in the same way that Jipb^ vbrou dvi/tou 
 marks the point of the compass to which an object is 
 referred for its position. In the one case, as in the other, 
 np6z obtains this force from its sense of 'towards,' 'looking 
 to;' and this is but another phase of the primary signifi- 
 cation of ' before,' ' fronting,' ' having the face towards.' 
 
 To this place may be referred -the use of npb; in such 
 expressions as npbc A'»jc» 'conformably to justice,* npbz 
 yovaixbi; iari, ' it is according to a woman's way or naCure,' 
 Od. vi. 207-8, Tzpbc ydp Moz elaiv inavrsz \ Selvol re nrofj^ol 
 re, ' for both strangers and the poor all appertain to Jove,' 
 'are under his protection.' 
 
 i. 'From,' 'at the hands of,' 'by,' 'by means of.' Not 
 really ditierent is the sense of Trpb^ where it is employed 
 with various actions to denote the persons from whom they 
 proceed, or, properly speaking, to whom they are referred 
 as done on their part, and where the English uses the expres- 
 sions 'from,' 'at the hands of,' 'by,' 'by means of.' E.g. 
 Od. xi. 302, l^etv ti/j.j]v itpbz Zijviz, 'to have honor from 
 Jove,' that is, ' to be honored on the part of Jove ;' Herod, 
 iii. 115, oure jdp iftDxe ivdixo/tat 'ffpidauou rcva xaXhadou npb^ 
 [iapfidpwv noTUfibv ixdtdbvra ic ddXaaaav, ' called Eridanus by 
 the barbarians,' ' on the part of the barbarians ;' that is, by 
 means ofnpbi; the calling the river by the name of Eridanus 
 is referred to the barbarians as an act done on their part, in 
 the same way that by jipb^ vlnou dviftou the position of an 
 object is referred to the south wind. And this reference is 
 made in the same way, namely, by representing the action 
 
 27 
 
418 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 as •looking towards' the object, and hence as being 'on the 
 part of,' or belonging to it. 
 
 2. Thus far the proper signification of 7r/)(5c, namely, that 
 of ' before,' ' having the face towards,' or ' looking towards,' 
 has been seen to be easily traced in a variety of the uses of 
 the preposition where it has been more or less modified by 
 the circumstances in which it is employed. The same sig- 
 nification is present, furthermore, in a considerable number 
 of the uses of npiz in which it is, perhaps, even more 
 obscured, either by the complication of the meaning of 
 itphz with that of the case, and with that of the action of 
 the verb which it qualifies, or by its being thrown almost 
 entirely out of view by the predominating influence of the 
 case and verb. It may be better, on this account, to refer 
 these uses of nphz to a separate head, although it will 
 appear, as the result of the consideration of them, that TTjotSc 
 has throughout one and the same fundamental notion. 
 
 a. 'At,' 'near.' When ;r/76c is translated by 'at,' 'near,' 
 answering to the Latin ad, apud, as Tipb; ra Upa napecvat, ' to 
 assist at the sacrifices,' its proper sense is that of ' before,' 
 * in the presence or face of.' Thus, in the example cited, 
 the meaning is ' to be near at hand before, in the face of, 
 the sacrifices.' And in the same way npS^ obtains the signi- 
 fication of 'near:' e.g. Xen. Cyrop. vii. 5, 1, inei 3k itpbz 
 BafiuXwvi ^u b Kupo^, 'when Cyrus was near to Babylon,' 
 that is, ' when Cyrus was before, in the presence of Baby- 
 lon ;' Id. Anab. i. 8, ^fJCUapj^o; jikv . . . Tcpbz rip Eittppd'og 
 jioTaptp {xadtararo), ' Clearchus was posted at, or near, the 
 river Euphrates.' In this and other examples, jt/joj- having 
 once obtained the sense of nearness, readily suggested by 
 its proper notion of ' before,' ' in the presence of,' seems to 
 bo used with little reference to its primary signification. 
 Although Clearchus was posted in view of the river Euphra- 
 tes, and, accordingly, might j ustly be said to be ' at' or ' near' 
 the river, in the sense of npbz rtp EixppdT/j rtora/ji^, it would 
 not be correct to say that he was posted ' before,' 'fronting,' 
 'with the face to' it. 
 
 b. ' At,' ' about.' The same interpretation is to be adopted 
 when npoz is used apparently in the sense of 'at,' 'about,' 
 
 flpii- 419 
 
 in such phrases as jrpbi toi^ Jtpdffittot elpcu, 'to be at or about 
 one's business.' From its proper meaning of ' before,' ' in 
 the presence of,' jt/ooc has here obtained that of ' at,' ' about,' 
 •near,' as in the preceding case, and this idea of proximity 
 it is that, in such examples as Ttpb; rotz npdj-fiaat elvai, sug- 
 gests the peculiar sense in which the preposition is there 
 employed. The mode in which this peculiar meaning 
 arises from the source referred to, is so exactly the same 
 with that in which the English « at' and * about' obtain the 
 same signification, that it can occasion no difficulty to a 
 person familiar with this language. Just as 'at,' 'about,' 
 are used with words expressing occupation, the being em- 
 ployed, and the like, and even with the word 'to be,' to 
 mark the thing with which one is engaged, and this by 
 merely expressing the proximity to it of the person em- 
 ployed, so npbz, having acquired the same meaning of near- 
 ness, may serve the same purpose. Ilpbi; is, perhaps, all the 
 more suited to assume this peculiar seuse of ' at,' ' about ' 
 from the fact that there is involved in it, from its proper 
 notion of ' before,' ' in the presence of,' the signification 
 also of 'towards' or 'looking towards;' so that npbz rot^ 
 Tipdyiiaaev elvai may mean, not only the being 'near' to, and 
 hence the being employed at or about, one's business, but 
 also the having the interest or attention directed towards it. 
 This point, however, need not be insisted upon as necessary 
 to the interpretation. 
 
 c. ' To.' Ilpbz is very frequently used in the sense of « to,' 
 as after verbs of motion: e.g. Xen, Anab. v. 9, 20, voful^mv 
 npbz roue tfiXouz xai elz ttjp nbhv rouvofta fuOlov dfkea&at adrou, 
 ' considering that a greater report of himself would come 
 to his friends.' In such examples ff/)6c is rendered by ' to ;' 
 and yet, strictly speaking, this meaning is due to the verb 
 of motion and the accusative case. The proper meaning 
 of TTpoi: is 'before,' 'in the face or presence of,' and it 
 expresses the relative position or direction in which the 
 action, or that of which the action is affirmed, stands to the 
 object named by the noun in the accusative case. The 
 phrase voiu^^wv npbz robe ipiXouQ rowopa pter^ov dfl^ea^ai might 
 bo literally rendered, ' thinking that a greater report of him 
 
420 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 would come before, into the presence of, his friends.' So, 
 in the expression Xij-etv rpic uva, 'to speak to or with a 
 person,' the meaning is, 'to speak before a person,' ' to speak 
 face to face with a person.' 
 
 d. 'Against,' the Latin contra, adveraus, in, cum. When 
 npd; is translated by * against,' or by ' with' in the sense of 
 'against,' namely, after such verbs as fid^eadae, 'to fight,' 
 zoXeftiiv, ' to be at war,' Ayoptuetv, ' to speak,' this significa- 
 tion arises from the relation of hostility or opposition in 
 which the parties to the action stand to each other, and the 
 preposition itself really expresses no more than the being 
 'before,' 'in the presence of,' 'face to face,' 'towards.' 
 Thus, /jtdj^eadat iTp6z rtva, ' to fight against a person,' properly 
 means, 'to fight face to face with a person,' and ^dyopeustu 
 npoz uva, ' to speak against one,' is ' to speak with the face 
 towards one,' that is, so that the speech is made 'in one's 
 presence,' ' face to face' with a person. 
 
 'With,' in Latin ctim. In the same way, again, when 
 ffpoc is used in the sense of ' with,' and of the Latin cum, 
 in such phrases as mtovSaz nocuadat npdc rtva, ' to make a 
 truce witli a person,' elp^vrjv djretv npbz uva, ' to be at peace 
 with a person,' the proper meaning of itpdz is 'before,' 'in 
 the presence of,' ' face to face,' answering to the Latin coram. 
 And this sense of ' in the presence of is altogether suitable 
 to the circumstances in which it is here used ; and these, 
 again, suggest the sense of ' with' by which the preposition 
 is rendered in Englishr^ Thus, when a truce is made, and 
 when a period of peace is passing, there must be parties to 
 the truce and to the peace, and they are properly conceived 
 as standing, as it were, 'face to face,' as being 'in the 
 presence of each other; that is, they have the relative 
 position the one to the other which is expressed by i:p6<:. 
 On the other hand, the connection which they have with 
 each other as parties to a common action or state, or the 
 mutuality of their relations, is expressed by the English 
 'with' and the Latin cum, and arises not from the word 
 itpbz itself, but froYn the relation to each other of the parties 
 to an action or state. 
 
 e. ' For,' * with a view to.' Ilpbz is also used to express 
 
 Ilpoz. 
 
 421 
 
 the object, purpose, or view, with which a thing is done 
 and ,« rendered in English by 'for,' ^with a view to: e"! 
 Xen. Cyrop. V. 4 7, Uiho. 8.^.uv rob, npb, roDro reraruivour 
 •those appomted for this,' 'with a view to this'^lTre 
 again the proper sense of npd, i, tliat of 'before,' with the 
 .modihed meaning of 'looking towards,' 'with T f^ce 
 turned towards.' and has exactly corresponding to it the 
 
 Idea m the same way. From the use of this expression in 
 Engh8h,and of the very similar one 'with an eye Z'Z 
 well as from the employment of the Greek .^<}/to Irk 
 ohject or purpose, or the end had in view, it is o'bvious hit 
 he dee,gna .ng an object as that towards which a pWson 
 looks m doing any thing is equivalent, under certain T 
 cumsances. to n.arking it as the end aimed at, T tie 
 object or purpose of the action. 
 
 U8e?f';.?ilT"'; T"^- '^° ^' diBtinguished from this 
 lat 0^ TC rt^"\"^ ''""'** '"^^*'>^ *^« «^™« t->- 
 atta uc^ the purpose served, and is rendered by ' for.' E s 
 Soph. E ectr. 900, „i npo, ^dovi,, ,,,„ ,,,,, .[ j„ .^^^^^'^^ 
 this to please you.' or 'for your pleasure,' tLat is. 'so as tJ 
 give you pleasure.' Here .p6, has the Lme sense of 'to! 
 wards, looking to,' that belongs to it in the expression of 
 pui^ose or end had in view; but the object wiSi a regard 
 or with reference to which the action is performed is not 
 the tlnng aimed at, but the result of the action or the end 
 attained. The diflerence of meaning in np6, as here used 
 
 objec had in view, is not owing to any change in the si^ 
 
 cfr'Thif b?" T' '"* *° ''' P-cIomiLnee of t?e 
 case. This being the accusative, and marking the ex- 
 t nt of the action, goes at the same time to cVress its 
 attained end or result. v-a^icss us 
 
 /. 'For,' 'in exchange for.' The same explanation that 
 was given in the case of .p6, used to express pi"rpo e 
 applies when this preposition is rendered by 'for' and i! 
 the sign of the exchange of one thing 'for' or 'ag^st' 
 another: e.g. -^.ovd: r:p6, ^Sovd, dpu^l^a., 'to exdinll 
 
422 
 
 OF THK SBVSaAL PBEFOSITIONS. 
 
 1 
 
 pleasures for pleasures.' For, here also, 7rp6^ properly meaos 
 ' towards,' ' looking to,' ' with the face towards ;' and from 
 this comes the notion of ' over against,' and then that of 
 'for.' The objects interchanged are regarded as having 
 a direction or aspect towards each other, and this is suf- 
 ficiently denoted by npS^. And when objects are standing 
 jace to face, the one looking towards the other, the rela- 
 tion of * over against' is of obvious suggestion. The only 
 thing wanting to express exchange, when objects stand in 
 this mutual relation, is some action, such as dfteifiea9at, ' to 
 pass from one to the other,' 'to answer.' The introduction - 
 of some such action as would serve to mark mutual trans- 
 fer would seem to be required to make the sense of ex- 
 change complete. /7/>oc with the help of the case may 
 convey the notion of mutual correspondence, of one thing 
 being over against another, and tallying with it; but it can 
 hardly suffice to mark exchange, which implies, not only 
 that the objects answer the one to the other, but that the 
 one is made by actual transfer to take the place of the 
 other. It should be observed that the English ' for,' having 
 the same origin and primary signification with np6<:, is like 
 it used to express purpose or object had in view, and as a 
 sign of exchange ; and that ' for' in English, as well as np6c 
 in Greek, requires, in the cose of exchange, some suitable 
 action to render the expression complete. 
 
 g. *In regard to,' 'concerning.' /7/w5c is rendered also 
 by 'in regard to,' ' concerning:' e.g. Xen. Cyrop. iv. 5, 26, 
 iva eidat^ aura oftoiojrjz ^ «' *e "P^ raura ipaiTf, ' if he aak ^ 
 you any question in regard to, concerning, these matters ;* 
 Id. Anab. ii. 3, 21, npb^ raura ol 'EXkijvec ipouXeuovro, ' ia 
 regard to these things the Greeks held a consultation.' 
 Very commonly npoc reuira is rendered in English by ' there- 
 fore;' and this is equivalent to 'with regard to this.' In 
 this use of itpo; it is easily seen to have properly the mean- 
 ing of 'with the face towards,' or 'looking towards,' which 
 is also the notion of the phrase 'with regard to' in English; 
 and the idea of ' looking towards' is to be referred to the 
 prin\ary sense of np6;. 
 
 A. 'By,' &c Adverbial phrases. To the same case witk 
 
 'i 
 
 
 fte preceding, so far as the inteT>retation is concerned, 
 belongs the use of np6c in a number of phrases called 
 adverbm such a. np6, filau, 'by force." despite of.' rpt 
 ^m^, by necessity,' • of necessity,' .pi, „ J«. . ;, 'ev^ry 
 regard. In such expressions, np6, has the meaning of 
 looking to.' 'having regard to,' and retains, accorfifgW 
 
 'fook?nl o^^'l, ^'' P'-r"*'""- Thus, npi, ftiau means 
 
 looking to, having regard to, fon^e,' .p6, dvrf;^., . Jookin^ 
 
 to, having regard to, necessity.' ° 
 
 wiih'^"Am3''tr ■'''*'/ '"'"""*'"« *°'' •conformably 
 with Among the significations of np6c is that of 'in 
 ^cordance with,' 'according to,' 'eonfomably with!' eg 
 Xen. Cyrop. vui. 5. 16. np6, r6 auf^hrro. dsi LrdrL it 
 
 to the occasion;' Id. ib. viii. 4. 29, i8iSoo npb, rhu dSiau 
 i^Arr^. 'he gave to each according to his merit.' Here the 
 meamng of ./,^ is the same as in the preceding cases 
 namely, it sign fies ' looking to.' 'having r^rd tof' which 
 
 'bote:' 'i: t^t^r ""'-'-' ''' '-' ^--^'^' - ^4 
 
 k. 'Compared with,' 'in comparison with.' Hod- is 
 some imes translated by 'compared with,' 'in compariso^^ 
 with, answering to the Latin prce: e.g. ion Ana^ ti 7 
 
 had to. money;- and this, again, is thf sa'meTn. as 
 •having the face towards' money. So that, in th s cas^ 
 t^;^Z::^^ "^ '- -^'^ ^- Pri™ary\e„sf rf 'Te! 
 y.L T^T\ ^°'''"^''' ' '° "^^*°'=«' In tbe cases which 
 
 and expresses one prevailing relation, that of^an ol^ject 
 
t 
 
 424 
 
 OF TUB SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 feeing another, standing in its presence, and looking to- 
 •wards it. There are, however, other instances of its use ia, 
 which it has the meaning of ' hefore,' it is true, but dif- 
 ferently applied, and so that it conveys the notion of an 
 object being ' forwards," * in advance,' with respect to an- 
 other object, and looking or facing, not towards this object, 
 BO as to be 'face to face,' but 'forwards,' 'onwards,' 'in 
 advance of it,' and with the face from it. The sense of the • 
 preposition is in one view, and that the most essential, the 
 Bame that it has been found to have in other cases, namely, 
 that of 'fronting,' and 'looking forward*;' and the only 
 diifercnce is to be found in the direction of the looking, 
 relatively considered, or in the way in which the face ia 
 turned. 
 
 o. • On.' To this head should probably be referred the 
 examples, occasionally met with, in which w/uoc, standing iii 
 connection with a verb of action or motion, and a dative 
 case, bears apparently the sense of 'on,' by which it is 
 rendered. E.g. II. i. 245, . . . nori (w/i^c) Sk cxr^nrfrnv pdi» 
 yai^, 'and cast his sceptre on the ground.' The proper 
 notion conveyed by ;r/>ic, in this and like examples, would 
 seem to be that of 'before,' 'forwards,' with reference to 
 the subject of the verb ; so that, while the action looks, so 
 to speak, with the face forwards, towards some other object, 
 it has also the relation of 'forwards,' 'in advance,' with re. 
 spcct to the subject of the verb. Thus, TrorJ 8e axr^nrfjov pdiM 
 foiji would be rendered, strictly, ' he cast his sceptre for- 
 wards, in front of him, on the ground." If so, itpbt; is to be 
 considered as the immediate qualification of the action of 
 throwing, and has the same meaning with i:p6 in npopdXittu, 
 •to throw forward.' 
 
 b. 'In addition to,' 'besides.' Here belongs also another 
 instance of the use of itpk, where it has a sense seemingly 
 very different from its meanings hitherto considered, and 
 which is yet probably referable to the primary sense of the 
 preposition, namely, that in which it is rendered by 'in 
 addition,' 'besides.' E.g. Soph. Trach. 45, Sixa la^vaz ff/»4c 
 motz nifTs, 'ten months in addition to five other months;' 
 Xcn. Cyrop. i. 2, 8, npbi; dk touzoh ituuddwuat ro^euuv xai 
 
 ITp6i. 
 
 425 
 
 •i 
 
 dxovul^ati, 'and in addition to, besides this, they learn to 
 shoot with the bow and to throw with the dart.' Here the 
 proper sense of xpdz would seem to be ' in front of,' ' to- 
 wards,' so that the action which it defines shall b^ regarded 
 as ' before' relatively to some object, not with the idea of 
 'face to face' or 'fronting' it, but with that of being 'in 
 advance,' 'forwards,' 'onwards,' with respect to it, and 
 counting from it. This is the same sense that is so often 
 seen to belong to the preposition np6, as in xpotivai, which 
 signifies ' to go forwards,' progredi, as well aa ' to go before,' 
 anleire. From this meaning of ' forwards,' ' onwards,' ' in 
 advance,' relatively to some object, that of 'in addition to,' 
 'besides,' is derived; for the being 'before,' 'forwards,' 'on- 
 wards,' ' in advance,' with regard to an object, is in certain 
 circumstances the same as being counted ' in addition to.' 
 Thus, in the example from Xenophon, Cyrop. i. 2, 8, when, 
 i|i describing the discipline of the Persian youth, their 
 learning to shoot with the bow and to tlirow with the dart 
 is represented as something that is ' forwards,' ' in advance,' 
 with regard to the other parts of their discipline already 
 mentioned, npd^ rourotc, that is, as an advance upon it, it is 
 easy to see that the exercises thus presented are intended 
 to be set forth as an addition to them, either actually or in 
 the order of narration. The Latin porro, used in the mean- 
 ing of 'henceforward,' of 'moreover,' 'for the future,' pre- 
 sents the two significations of ' forwards' and 'in addition' 
 in the same word, and so may be adduced in confirmation 
 of the above explanation. It may be observed, further, that 
 in many compounds also npoi; has the sense of ' in addition,' 
 as, npoaduv, ' to be wanting besides,' npoadiddvat, ' to give in 
 addition.' 
 
 Summary of the significations of npit^. 
 
 Ilpitz. 1. 'Before,' 'fronting,' 'with the face towards,' 'in 
 
 the presence of.' 
 o. 'Before,' 'with the face towards,' 'towards.' 
 6. 'Before,' 'in the presence of,' 'by;' as in 
 
 adjurations. 
 
426 OF THB 8BVBBAL PRBPOPITIONB. 
 
 c. 'At,' 'near;' properly, 'before,' «in the pre- 
 sence of.' 
 
 d. 'At,' 'about;' properly, 'before,' 'in the pre- 
 eence of,' * near.' 
 
 e. ' Looking towards,' ' towards ;' ' on the quarter 
 of,' 'on,' 'against;' Latin, ex, a parte.- 
 
 f. « On the Bide of,' ' near.' 
 
 g. 'On the side of,' in marking descent; Latin, 
 
 e, ab. 
 h. ' On the side of,' ' of the party of.' 
 i. ' On the part of,' 'with,' ' among.' 
 k. (' On the part of,') ' according to the customs, 
 
 character, &c. of.' 
 I. 'At the hands of,' 'from,' 'by;' marking the 
 
 agent, author, means. 
 
 2. 'Before,' 'with the face towards,' 'looking to- 
 wards ;' the signification of npSz obscured by 
 the case, &c. 
 
 a. ' To (before) ;' with verbs of motion. 
 
 b. 'Against,' 'with;' in relation to hostile 
 parties; Latin, contra, adversus, in, cum; pro- 
 perly, ' face to face.' 
 
 c. 'With,' in relation to parties to a mutual 
 action ; properly, ' face to face.' 
 
 ' With,' ' in the eyes of.' 
 
 d. 'That concerns,' 'having relation to;' pro- 
 pcrly, 'with the face towards,' 'looking to- 
 wards.' 
 
 e. 'In regard to,' 'concerning;' icpdi raura, 
 
 ' therefore' . 
 
 /. 'For,' 'with a view to;' properly, 'looking 
 
 towards.' 
 ' For ;' the end served. 
 
 g. « For," in exchange for;' properly, ' lookmg 
 towards,' ' over against.' 
 
 h «In accordance with,' ' conformably to ; pro- 
 perly, 'looking towards,' 'having regard to. 
 
 t. 'By,' &c., adverbially; npbi ?iav, ' by force. 
 
 •5 
 
 1 
 
 ITpdc. 
 
 427 
 
 1 
 
 
 k. 'Compared with,' 'in comparison with;' 'in 
 proportion to;' properly, 'looking towards,' 
 'having regard to.' 
 
 8. 'Before,' 'forwards,' with respect to an object, 
 'onwards,' 'in advance.' 
 
 a. ' On ;' properly, ' forwards,' ♦ before,' with 
 respect to one object, and 'with the face 
 towards' another: e.g. nori (itpbi;) dk ax^rpoi- 
 ^dXe T^aijj, 
 
 b. • In addition to,' ' besides ;' properly, ' before,' 
 ' forwards,' ' in advance,' relatively. 
 
 BIONiriCATIONS AND USE OF np6z WITH CASES. 
 
 I. IIp6i with the genitive case. 
 
 1. a. 'Before,' 'in the presence of,' 'by,' in adjurations. 
 np6c with the genitive case is used in the sense of ' before,' 
 ' in the presence of,' equivalent to the Latin coram, and in 
 adjurations to ' by,' and to the Latin per. E.g. II. i. 838-9, 
 ftdprupot ioToiv I npd^ re iJeaiv fiaxdpatv, np6c re &vtjTciv dv- 
 i^pdmtov, ' let them be witnesses before, in the presence of, 
 both the blessed gods and mortal men ;' H. xix. 188, oud' 
 imopx^aat jcpbz dainovoi;, ' nor will I swear falsely by the 
 divinity;' Dcmosth. 842, 7, hereuai, duri^oiw, npbi naiSwv, 
 npbc j-uuatxwv, npbz rwv ovrtuv £i/itv dj-aSwv, 'I beseech, I 
 implore you, by your children, by your wives, by whatever 
 blessings you have ;' Xen. Cyrop. iii. 1, 35, npb^ rdiv dsmv, 
 IfTj, d> Kupe, pi] ofjTo) Xiye, ' before, by, the gods, do not speak 
 thus ;' Id. ib. iii. 3, 31, ptjdapwz, IfTj, npbz r&v &ea>v . . . outio 
 nov^awpsv, ' before the gods, let us by no means do so.' In 
 such examples, the preposition obviously means 'before,' 
 < in the presence of,' and the genitive has its ordinary signi- 
 fication of 'with respect to.' Thus, in the first example 
 cited, the meaning is, ' let them be witnesses before, in the 
 presence of, . . . with respect to the gods,' the genitive 
 defining the precise object with respect to which the term 
 itpbz, and the action or state which it qualifies, fidprupoe 
 toTwv, are to be understood as set forth. 
 
 b. ' Towards,* ' on the quarter of,' ' on.' IIpoz with the 
 
428 
 
 OF THE 6EVBBAL PRBP06ITI0NB. 
 
 genitive case is freqaently used iu describing the position 
 of an object witli reference to the points of the compass and 
 to other objects, being rendered in English by ' towards,' 
 *on the quarter of,' <on.' E.g. Od. xiii. 109-11, duct Si ri 
 of diipa uaiv | ai (ikv npd( Bopiao, xaTm^axai du&pwnotaiv, \ ai 
 d' ab npbz Notou eiai, Searepat, ' they have two doors, one 
 towards, on, the north, the other towards, on, the south;' 
 Uerod. i. 84, j^mpiov nphz too Tfuokou Terpap/tivov, 'a place 
 towards Tiuolus;' Id. iii. 101, npb^ v6xoo dvipoo (ohiotxn,) 
 'they dwelt towards, on the quarter of, the south wind;' 
 Maclu Suppl. 252, I'rpu/juiv re npbz duvovroz ^Xldu, ' and the 
 Strymou on the west, on the quarter of the setting sun.' 
 In such examples, npS^ signifies 'towards,' 'looking to- 
 wards,' ' on the quarter of,' and the genitive defines it by 
 marking the object with respect to which this relative 
 position is affirmed. Thus, in the last example, the Strymon 
 has its position determined by saying that it ' looks towards,' 
 (Irpupaiu re Tipbz,) and, to complete the definition, the geni- 
 tive is added, showing with respect to what specific object 
 it has this relation of looking towards, namely, ' with respect 
 to the setting sun,' (duvowoc i^/l/ou.) 
 
 c. 'Towards,' 'on the quarter of,' 'on the side o^' 
 'against.' To this construction belongs the case iu which 
 jrpic with the genitive is rendered either by ' on the quarter, 
 of,' 'on the side of,' or by 'against.' E.g. Herod, ii. 80,, 
 ipuXcacal xariaToaav . . . itpb^ Ai&i6nwv, ' guards were stationed 
 against the ./Ethiopians,' that is, ' on the side or quarter of 
 the .Ethiopians ;' Xcn. Anab. iv. 3, 26, npbz twv Kapdouj^atv 
 livat, ' to move aguinst the Carduchi,' properly, ' on the side 
 or quarter of the Carduchi.' 
 
 d. 'Towards,' 'on the side or quarter of,' 'near.' To 
 this same use of npix; with the genitive is to be referred,the 
 case in which it has the meaning of ' on the side of,' ' near.' 
 E.g. Xen. Anab. iv. 3, 26, oupofohz ii xaraari^oaa^at npb^ row 
 Ttorapou, 'to station the rear-guards on, near, the river,' that 
 is, ' on the side or quarter of the river ;' Herod, ii. 154, tlal 
 oJtToi oi ywpot Ttpbc ^aXdamjc, ' these places are near the sea,' 
 properly, 'towards, on the quarter of, the sea;' Id. i. 145, 
 ntl}r,vq npb; ^ixuaiw;, 'FelloQO on the side of, or near, 
 
 ffpbc. 429 
 
 Sicyon.' Here both the preposition and the genitive have 
 the same explanation as in the preceding cases 
 e Towards,' .in the eyes of.' Of the same nature is 
 
 JtowardV'"'" h' "''' "'*' **^^ ^^°^«- '^^ '^^ --e of 
 toward ,',n the eyes of:' e.g. Xen. Anab. v. 7, 12 Soa 
 
 the vitr Zt'^'^''"'""'' '^"'' "« «^'*" ^« ««e" to be 
 ml TT . ^^''' "^'" •" '^^ ^y^" l>oth of gods and 
 
 of Z? id i! r ""'"" " *'^ ^^" '' ''"' »'«'-*^ 
 
 er{; ' ^T.X- "^' °f'' ''^^'""^ *° °^*°™1 ^««««»t or pedi- 
 gree. To this construction of np6, with the genitive be- 
 long a so the examples in which it is used to mark natural 
 descen^t or pedigree, expressed in English by 'on the s"Te 
 on ti^' ^°'':^^\^' ^P^': ^^ mrpb, d^b M, d,v, 'being 
 1803, n\t ipaurbu ^A^.alou Sura xal r« ,rpbz irarpb, xa} ri 
 
 MherT 'i "^''"' "'° ""^ ''^ ^*»»«°i^° both on »; 
 fathers and on my mother's side;' Id. 1806, 16, rHu Zl 
 
 fathers kmdred, both on the male and oS the femat' side ' 
 It has been already explained, that ^p6, has herTalso the 
 sense of 'towards,' 'looking towards^' and hen ^on tL 
 quarter or side of,' just as in npb, viro. d^iJ^Z the 
 
 2rro°f tt 'rV'".'' *'« ^"'y «iifferenceTi„g?n he 
 IT\ V ■"? '^^ '■''"*^°" °f ""^^^^^ » defined by 
 
 cases has the meaning of 'with respect to,' marking thf 
 specific object to which another holds'the relltion indkaLd 
 
 'fLmble to • "'t?''' 'JV' P^^ *'''' ''° *^« •"*«-«* of,' 
 iritl 1 ^'^ ^"^°°^ ''•'o ^^"^ ^'^"'"Ples in which 
 
430 
 
 OF THE 8EVEBAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 9aiwv (tSJiXov ^ npbziaaiTwv, 'having made a treaty rather 
 ia the interest of the Thebans than in their own interest ;' 
 Demosth. 921, ixonov ei r^c Ixsivou napvupiaz rh [ikv rcpbz ro5 
 dxoarepouvTo; tuotwz dxouaeade, rb dh Imhp zwv djcotnepoufiivmv 
 imazov iarat nap' bfitv, ' it is unreasonable if you shall hear 
 and give credit to that part of his testimony which favors 
 him that robbed, while faith shall not bo given to the part 
 which favors the persons robbed.' Soph. (Ed. Tyr. 1434, 
 itpbz ooit yap oi>3' i/iou ippdao), 'I will mention what is for 
 your advantage, not for mine;' Id. Trach. 150, i^rot xpb^ 
 dvipbz 7 rixvotv tpo^oupivrj, 'through fear either for a hus- 
 band or for children ;' Od. vi. 207, npbz yap Mc elaev Sbtau- 
 xtz I ^tivoi re nrtaj^oi re, 'for all, both strangers and the 
 poor, are under the protection of Jove,' that is, ' appertain 
 to Jove,' ' belong to his side or party ;' ^sch. Sept. c. 
 Theb. 511, npb; tUv xpazowrtav d' iaphv ol d' ^aaat/iiutou, ' we 
 are on the side of the conquerors, they on the side of the 
 conquered.' In such examples, both the preposition and 
 the genitive case are so obviously to be interpreted in the 
 same way with the cases of this class already considered, 
 that they need not special remark. 
 
 h. 'On the part of,' 'with,' 'among.' To be assigned to 
 this same class of the uses of TtpS^ with the genitive case are 
 the examples in which it is employed to denote the party to 
 whom a sentiment is referred as existing ' on his part,' where 
 in English we use the expressions ' on the part of,' ' with,' 
 'among,' and in Latin apud. E.g. Ilerod. iv. 144, e«rac 
 rSde TO ircoz iXeinezo dSdvarov fiv^fijjv itpbz ' EXXijffjzouTiiov, ' he 
 left behind him an undying memory among, on the part 
 of, the people of the Hellespont;' Xen. Anab. i. 9, 20, 
 b/toXoj-etrat Tipb; Ttdvrwu xpdrtaroz 3ij jeviadat ^epuTieueiv, * it is 
 agreed among all,' apud omnes constat; Id. ib. ii.- 3y 18, 
 olftat fup oux dv d^apiarwc pot Sj(eiv, ovre npbz bpmv oure rtpb^ 
 r^c 'llUddot; Siizdarfi, 'for I think I shall fail of meeting 
 with gratitude neither on your part nor on that of all 
 Greece;' Id. (Econ. vi. 10, 8id -zaura dk xal ivdoSordnj elvai 
 itphz Tuiv j:6}xwv aurrj ^ Pioreia, ' for this reason this occupa- 
 tion is most respected on the part of states.' See Lex. 
 Xenoph. Uere, again, the same interpretation of both the 
 
 ■J 
 
 Ilpbi. 
 
 431 
 
 .'i .- 
 
 preposition and the case applies, the former having the 
 sense of 'looking towards,' and, hence, being 'on thf side 
 ot, on the part of,' just as in the phraae npb; ^zou d^imu 
 . and BO being 'with,' 'among;' and the latter meaning 
 with respect to,' or marking the specific object to whom a 
 preceding sentiment or the like is placed in the relation 
 expressed by np6<:. , 
 
 i. 'According to the custom, character, or whatever is 
 proper to a person. Of the same nature with the fore- 
 going uses o{np6, with the genitive is that also in which it 
 marks the object to which any thing is referred as belong- 
 ing to, or being conformable to, its character, habits, die- 
 position, or whatever else is proper to it, corresponding to 
 the Lnghsh phrases 'it belongs to,' 'is the part of.' 'is 
 accorchng to, or conformable to, the eharacfer, &c of.' 
 E.g. nerod._v. 12, oJire Hsp.uu 9^. o5„ A63,a rd no.eifu.a, 
 o^eyb, r^. i, ,,, VW,, oi.3apai., 'nor according to the 
 practice of any of the Asiatics;' Anab. i. 2, 11. o! yap I 
 ^pb,ro. Kupourphnou ly_o.ra p^ dnoMo.a., 'for t was not 
 according to the character of Cyrus not o pay if he had 
 the nieans;'_Id. Memor. ii. 3, 15, drca >.^,.c. . iolT 
 P<ocjrpb<: aou, 'you say what is unreasonable and not be- 
 coming your character;' Soph. Aj. 1071. xairo, xa.ou npb, 
 
 S78. ^ xdpra npb^ jru,^a«cbc aXptadat xiap, 'surely it quite be 
 ongs to the disposition of a woman to\e excited.'' In such 
 
 tr^'T' -A^"« the meaning of 'looking towards.' 'on 
 he part of, and the genitive signifies 'with respec to;' 
 
 both just as in the preceding cases of this class. 
 
 To this head may be referred the expression npb, Sir,, 
 
 'justly,' 'according to justice,' having a sense nearl^ equi^^ 
 lent, to 8.0.0,,: e.g Soph. (Ed. Tyr. 1014, dp' oLa %« 
 JC ours^ou,, rpd,.a>.; 'dost know now that thou art 
 alarmed wholly without just cause?' that. is. 'not at all 
 conformably to what is right.' The idea conveyed by .J 
 &^C « that, in being alarmed, the person spoken of i no 
 of the part of, on the side of, right, does not belong to 
 righ does not conform to right; and the notion of bfing 
 'on the side of,' 'of the party of,' in this, and in the imme 
 
••♦T 
 
 482 OF THB 6EVEBAI. PRKPOSmONS, 
 
 diatcly preceding examples, very readily Buggests that of 
 being 'in accordance of in conformity with.' 
 
 k. ' At the hands of,' * from,' ' by.' Upiz with* the gpnilav* 
 case is used also in the sense of 'at the hands of,' 'from,' 
 ' by ;' that is, to express the personal object chiefly to whwh 
 an action is referred as being done on its part, or as pro- 
 ceeding from it, and thus to denotf the author, source, or 
 agent of such action. E.g. Od. xi'. 302, di xai uip&ev fffi 
 Ttftrjv Kfibz Z-^vbz tjpvrei, 'honored by Jove,' properly, 
 'having honor on the part of, at the hands of, Jove.' ITpdc^ 
 having regard to its original sense, hero means ' looking 
 to,' and hence ' on the part of,' just as in npbz v6rou duiftou 
 it signifies 'ou the quarter of;' an^ the genitive denotes 
 the personal or other object with respect to which any 
 thing is to bo understood to have this relation of >r/>6c, ' oa 
 the part of.' The only difference, strictly speaking, be- 
 tween npb^ voTou dvifiou, ' on the quarter of the south wind,' 
 and Tcpb; Zr^ubt; n/i^i/ ^;(av, ' to have honor at the hands of 
 Jove,' is due to the presence in the latter case of an action 
 and of a personal object ; ' to be honored on the part of 
 Jove' being the same thing as 'to receive honor at the 
 hands of Jove.' And it is plain that when it is said 
 of persons that they have honor ' on the part of or ' at 
 the hands of Jove, Jove is the personal object 'from' 
 whom they receive honor, or • by' whom they are honored; 
 that is to say, the author or agent of the conferring honor 
 upon them. A few additional examples may be given. 
 Soph. OSd. Col. 73, xai «'c npbc dvdpbi; [oj ^Umvroz dpxeaiz; 
 ' and what help is there from a man if he see not ?' Id. 
 Antig. 910, ipjjpo^ npbz tpiXwv, ' deserted by friends j' Id. 
 (Ed. Tyr. 1235-6, ridvrjxt betov ^loxdtmjz xdpa. \ Xop .v . w/oic 
 rtvoz hot' ahiaz ; | 'E^ay. abr^ Tzpbf aor^c, ' locasta is dead. 
 Cbor. From what caase? Mess. By her own hand.' la 
 this example, npbz rtVoc nor' ahiaz furnishes an instance 
 of a noun not personal used in the genitive with npbi; in the 
 sense under consideration. And although ;r^oc with the 
 genitive of such notins may not admit of the same render- 
 ing throughout as when joined with personal nouns, the 
 sense which it conveys is essentially the same, and has the 
 
 <' 
 
 
 np6z. 
 
 433 
 
 
 •: 
 
 . { 
 
 \ 
 
 
 ame ong,„ ; namely ;r/,<Jc, by marking an action as 'look- 
 ing towards- and being 'on the part of an object to 
 wh.ch the genitive shows that it is specifically referred sui? 
 * ficently md.cates that it appertains to this o^bject; and as 
 
 Idea of author or agent is readily suggested by the relation 
 of 'on the part of,' 'atthe hands of,' eo here that of origin 
 o source is suggested by the same relation. Xen. An!b. 
 III. 1,5, ononr^uoaz foj « „pbz rfc n6k,^z ol {maiztov err,, ' appre- 
 hendmg that there might be attached to him some bLme 
 J on the part of the state;' Soph. Electr. 783-4, . . ^,21 
 rap rjid drnjlXari^a, ^6^^ \ npb, r^„8' i,el,oo re, 'for this day 
 am I freed from fear both from her and from him.' ^ 
 
 ir. flpbc with the dative case, 
 l.a. 'Before,' ' in front of,' • in the presence of.' HpSc is 
 empoyed with the dative case in the sense of 'before'"in 
 front of. .,n the presence of:' e. g. (Ed. Tyr. 20, dM. 
 ^--, l^po, re namSo, S^Xol, | ,ao7,, -is sitting in^he 
 markeH.lace and before in front of. the doubl! temple 
 
 adnd ed for ""r ''"*'■ '"''••'' ™'e^*' however,'be 
 admitted for Tzpo^ ,„ this example, it being easily derived 
 
 rom that of 'before,' 'in front of,' 'in th^e pres'^nce of ' 
 Id. ,b 130.J .W^aoc i-y/rf rd .pb, .oai axanl. I f^eai^L 
 ^,m, rd„ npoariyero,^\^ii us to attend to what was urgent ' 
 properly.Jto the things before our feet;' Demosth. 52?. 22 
 S^a iur^ Sripu. r^Toueu, ^ „pb, roT, xpnal, iu ra, ^edrpj 
 
 what has occurred before, in the presence of. Z judgef' 
 In such examples it admits of no doubt that the preposilion 
 jc lias the sense of 'before.' either in the local meaning 
 of in front of.' as ,n the fii^t and second, or in the figurf 
 T °"?, "f. 1'" /^« P'-'^««"«e of,' as in the last example 
 Nor IS It difhcult to admit that the dative case is used to 
 mark the object ultimately affected, and depends on the 
 meaning contained in the preposition itself. Thus, in the 
 first example the dative case 8,nXot, yaot, follows up^n np6<:, 
 before, in the same way that the dative attends upon 
 
 Sr'' . W " ''^' '"'' ^'^™^'' '""'^ ' «1"^' •• That i8,Z 
 Idea of 'before,' 'fronting,' contained in rp6,, requires a 
 
434 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 dative case to denote the object ultiinat3ly aifectcd by this 
 relation, in the same way that the notions of likeness, iden- 
 tity, and equality contained in Sfwioc, b oor«5c, toot;, require 
 the same case to mark the final object of these relations. 
 
 h. 'At,' 'near.' Ilpbz with the dative case occurs also in 
 the sense of * at,' * near :' e.g. ^schyl. Prom. 810, npbz 
 ijHtou i/aiouat rrrjatz, ' they dwell at the fountains of the sun.' 
 Hero ff/jof means, properly, * before,' ' facing,' * in the pre- 
 sence of;' that is, it shows the position of the dwellers 
 spoken of relatively to the fountains of the sun by declariug 
 that they dwell ' before, in the presence of them,' and 
 •looking towards' them. And from this notion of standing 
 before or in the presence of an object is very readily de- 
 rived that of nearness to it. Id, ib. 849, lartv noXic . . . 
 Neii.ou nfib; m>Tijt arSfiaTe, ' there is a city at the very mouth 
 of the Nile,' that is, ' before, in the presence of, facing, the 
 mouth of the Nile,' Id. Sept. c. Theb. 359, ;r/>oc nuXatai IJpot- 
 Ttai Pf'ifJtei, ' he is raging at or near the gate of Proetus ;' Id. 
 Eumen. 272-3, noratviov yap dv (sc. ft^zpoxzovov /tiaapa) npb^ 
 %aziq. 9eou | 001^00 xa&appotz ijM&rj ^oepoxzovot^, ' the pollution 
 of my mother's murder was driven away by purifications at 
 the altar (hearth) of the god Phoebus ;' Id. ib. 295, rrpbi 
 fiwpui ff^ajfei;, 'slain at the altar;* Id. Aj. 579, 9pijveiv intpdi/f 
 Ttpb; Tu/uopze n^pazt, ' to utter cries of lamentation for keen 
 afiliction.' In this last example np6z has the same sense of 
 * before,' ' in presence of,' but is used figuratively with the 
 meaning of ' at,' ' for.' 
 
 In all these examples alike, the use of the dative, as 
 already stated, is to designate the object ultimately afiected 
 by the relation of ' before,' ' looking towards,' ' fronting,' 
 expressed by ff/>oc; or, which is the same thing in effect, 
 the dative depends for its use upon the relation of ' before,* 
 'looking towards,' 'fronting,' in which some action or 
 object is placed to it by Ttpb^. If such terms as dvrt'oc, ' op- 
 posite,' ?ffof, 'equal,' 6 aliroz, 'the same,' S/iotoc, 'like,' ar« 
 followed by the dative case, so may Trpoc, ' before,' ' looking 
 towards,' be followed by the same case used for the same 
 purpose. 
 
 c. 'At,' 'about,' said of employments. Upb; with the 
 
 ^p6^. 435 
 
 'S'i'thi'lh'' """ '' '"''' '"^-^' *« ^--te the 
 enZed E f S " T2 '' ""P'^^'^'^' «* ^^ich he is 
 
 'Philip hat^: the betTerTo '^^'Vf '^/"^r.*'^- V^-^^ 
 by bei„gbef!rehl,l in 1; "^^."^i^^^ ^^ ""'hing more than 
 
 'if you be persuadL b^mT a'd breZr" ^ ' ,; ''^"''^ 
 Bidering.' Hobc in ^Jh TJ. . ^"P'°3'ed about con- 
 when speakinfof the ten ? '' "' ^"' ^'^" «^P'«'»«d 
 probability be^Lpreted L t"" T.'*' "'^^ ^'^"^ ™°«t 
 
 way, and these and the Greet *„^. I ^® ^'*"® 
 
 b-ke interpretation. The noUon' tS "' ^""^ "«ed. admit a 
 the English 'at ' 'about.'ln7 ?, °^ "^''^^^s. <=ommon to 
 bere oi,^oy.^, aSsL ^nt e "c";: Irt^l' " ^^T^ "'^ 
 standing .before,' Mn' the pLence of -^tnd Tth ' j' 
 involved in it the u\c^ ^f A , . ' "°"» " ^bere be 
 
 will render Vt ie uliarlv fi«T T^"""'^' ''''""^'' *^- 
 en.ployed abou't'a.'u ""ng lit tha^it"'"" ?^ "^^^"^ 
 
 ca.^ats.«r;-:--%^ 
 
 used iH vari'ety ;f "Z ^■1^''''''' ^^ ^« ^-ther 
 Hnctly traceable to the nrim '"°'' '' ^''' ^'«- 
 
 tbe dative retaini ,Val tTe^hLT *^' ^'"^ ^"P"'"°"' 
 this case. ^ ^''° *''^ meaumg proper to 
 
436 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PBEPOSITIONS. 
 
 6. •To,' 'on,' or 'against,' the Latin qd. np6(: with the 
 dative case ia sometimea used in the sense of *on' or 
 ' against,' conveying, even when rendered hy ' on,' not the 
 idea of superposition, aa ini does, but rather that of being 
 connected by the relation of * looking towards,' ' facing.' 
 E.g. Herod, iii. Ill, ipopiuv dh ri^ Bpvtdaz iz veoaata^ irpoa- 
 nrnXaapivftz ix tttjXou itpbz dnoxp^ftvotat oupeat, ' the birds cariy 
 it (the cinnamon, xiwdfiatpop) into neats built against, or 
 attached to, precipitous mountains.' Here it is seen from 
 the facta of the description that irp6z means 'against,' 
 with the notion of having the face towards, looking towards; 
 the neats being formed of soft clay and attached to pre- 
 cipitous cliffs, the relative position which they hold to the 
 rocks is precisely that cxprcased by npo; in ita proper sense 
 of 'looking towards,' 'with the face towards,' and ia that 
 which would be conveyed in English by the phrase ' against 
 the face of.' 
 
 In iEach. Choeph. 88S-4, fiaarbv npbz fp ah noXXdi dij 
 Ppil^wv i/ia I oukoeaev i^^fxeX^az ibvpatpiz ydXa, ' the bosom on 
 which you often slept, and at the aame time aucked with 
 your guma nutritious milk,' the meaning of 7tp6^ seems, at 
 first view, to be more distinctly that of * on ;' but, more 
 nearly considered, and having regard to .the proper notion 
 of the preposition as seen in all the examples hitherto exa- 
 mined, it will be found to have the meaning of 'looking 
 or having a direction towards,' and to mark the position 
 which the infant has relatively to the mother's breast 
 np6z is used in the same way in Boph. Antig. 1188-9, . . . 
 &rn'a 3k xMi/opai \ deiaaira npdz Spwodat, xd3ro7r?.)ja<To/iai, 'and 
 in my fright I recline backwards upon my attendants;' 
 for the preposition ahowa that the act of reclining had its 
 direction 'towarda' or 'facing' the attendants. And so 
 in other examples, with different actions and motions ; as, 
 ^ach. Prom. 887-8, &aXepot dh Xityoc Tcaioua^ eixrj | arupv^i 
 npbz xu/tamv Attjc, 'stout words strike in vain against the 
 waves of a hated fate,' that ia, ' strike in the face of,' ' with 
 a direction towards,' ' facing,' the waves of fate ; Id. ib. 
 928, nxMaaz Sk TtpSe rtpbt; xaxtp, ' when he shall have incurred 
 this calamity,' properly, ' when he shall have struck against 
 
 1 
 
 ■, 
 
 'i 
 
 .IIp6i. 
 
 437 
 
 h with r''?'" "''^'■'^T"^ »»>«* '^' direction of the action 
 18 With the face towards the object struck; II. i. 245 
 
 Z' S' w""'T'''''"'^'^»' '^''^' ^^' ^o^Ptre on'tLe 
 frZ'r *^/"f "''f^'^-^rds,' 'towanis,' the ground; ^ach. 
 Prom. 5, W. ,^^, ,^,^^, 6^^Xoxpi^,o,, rbu Lprb. dy/«W 
 
 nerlvT'-.. '^"'•'■^°'''• °" '"'^'^ Precipitous Tcks/'t^o! 
 
 rocks, see Id ib. 15, and 56, and Soph. (Ed. Tyr. 181 
 
 exalr ' '•7"P'''«*^ °" *fa« d««dly plaiL' In this last 
 showf fV.-T'"'^^ . '%"°* '^P'""^^ ™«™ euperpoflition, but 
 towll^ J? ", fr""'"^ °' ''°™'^«'' ' -'^^ the' face 
 grZd "'*""'' *° '"PP''""*" '^'"S «° "'« 
 
 is %'rtt '"^*^'""'' *°/ ' ^''^^''' "f^' ^>*»» th« dative case 
 s furthermore employed in the sense of 'in addition to' 
 'besides:' e.ff. ^sch Pmm 9';9 - - - > ""'""" "»> 
 
 Zm T"' '," "k''*^'""'' '"^ '^''^ ^'^^"g^. l»«^«v«'-, I gave 
 them fire; Id ib. 625, xul npb, ye roiro,, rip,.a rrA2 
 r:M^,, ^«.,., ',„ addition to, beaides, thia;'x/„. Qy^X 
 
 h dirt ' 7n T- '^ ?"°* "•^'^ '"^ ^*'^' -d 'to throw 
 he dait Id. Hell. ,. 7, 1, ^pf,, si rour^ .Uovro \UuaauTou 
 
 iVnTn -^M"!".*'-^ Ph- AdeinTantus;- Soph. ^1 
 
 xyr. 1ZZ6, npo; aixeiuo^a, « ^5'f ; 'in addition to that, what 
 
 do you say r Id CEd. Col. 601, .^W« Hei^a .pb, xaxoi xJd, 
 
 I have suffered terrible ills upon ills.' How .p6, obtain 
 
 tl-TVl "''•*'"" ^^' ^^"^ «"«^"«"t'^ plained in 
 
 trea ng ,f .^he meanings of the preposition separately; anS 
 
 only remains to be added, that the dative. L here Lsed, 
 
 cases. ' "^"''' "' '^' '''"'' "'^^^ ^'^ *h« Pr«-ding' 
 
 in. /7/Jof with the accusative case. 
 
 with the accusative case is uacd in the sense of ' before ' 'in 
 he presence of,' correaponding to the Latin apvd in such 
 
 rpa^ia^., npo, rob, 9ea^»ira, 6 fiouX6p,.o,, 'let him tha 
 
438 
 
 OF TUB 8EVBBAL FJIEPOSITIONB. 
 
 chooBes be enrolled before, in the presence of, the thesmo- 
 thetse;' Id. 602, 8, 7r/>6; diarnjriju fju altxip iaj^ttv, 'he had 
 opportunity to obtain it by lot before the court of disetetre ;' 
 Id. 1075, 1, of Aftiovrtz ff/aifoBc ^«' ^ >} ^'*?» 'before whatever 
 archons the trial may be;' ^ach. Prom. 614, dnmep iixatov 
 icpb^ (fiXooz otjeiv aro/ia, ' since it is right to speak out in the 
 presence of friends ;' Id. Agam. 818, rd 8' dXia zpiK ^^^f re xai 
 ^tohz I . . ■ pooXeuadfJteffda, 'the rest we will consult about ia 
 the presence of the city and of the gods.' It is obvious, in 
 such examples, both that the preposition has the sense 
 assigned to it, and that the accusative is used in the mean- 
 ing of ' as to,' ' as regards,' and further explanation is not 
 required. 
 
 'In the eyes of,' 'with.' Very nearly in the same sense 
 npoz is used with the accusative to mark the personal object 
 •with' or 'in the eyes of whom, that is, in whoso opinion 
 or judgment, any thing is affirmed to bo as it is represented. 
 E.g. Xen. Mcmorab. i. 2, 61, AkXa Iwxpdrrjz ye xai Ttpb^ roue 
 dJUouc dni9pibnouz x6a/wv rg nohe napeJ'j^e, ' Socrates brought 
 honor to the state in the eyes of the rest of men also ;' Id. 
 Anab. v. 9, 20. Here, as in the examples just before cited, 
 it is plain that npoz has the meaning of 'before,' 'with the 
 face towards,' 'in the presence of,' and that the accusative 
 has that of 'as to,' 'as regards.' Thus, when it is said that 
 'Socrates brought honor to the state in the eyes,' that is, 
 'in the view or opinion, of the rest of men also,' the proper 
 meaning is, ' he brought honor to the state before, in the 
 presence of, . . . as regards the rest of men,' ' as far as the 
 rest of men were concerned.' 
 
 b. 'Towards,' 'to,' Latin versMS, in. /Tjoic is used with the 
 accusative case in the sense of ' towards,' ' to,' the prepo- 
 sition, however, having properly the force of ' before,' ' with 
 the fuce towards,' ' looking towards,' and the accusative that 
 of 'as to,' 'as regards.' This construction occurs, a,) in 
 cases of actual motion and local direction: e.g. II. xii. 239, 
 ci'r' ini Sezi' tioai npb; 'IIio r' ' HeXtov re, | sir' In dpitrrepa Tolyt 
 nori l^oipou ijtpoeura, 'whether they go to the right hand 
 towards the cast and the sun, or to the left hand towards 
 the murky west;' ^sch. Prom. 709, ^kwu npbz dvro^ac | 
 
 ^ 
 
 \ 
 
 \ 
 
 Upk. 439 
 
 arpi^aaa aaurr^v, 'having turned thyself towards tho east;' 
 Soi)h. Electr. 564, Xuai(: arparmi Ttpbz ohov, * a dismission of 
 the army to its home;' Xen. Oyrop. i. 1, 6, Snot £u dp^rai 
 «C noptUa&ai, idv re npbz ew, idt> re npbi; lanipav, ^v re npbz 
 dpxTov, ijv re npbi; psmjp^piav, 'whithersoever one shall 
 begin to journey, whether towards the east, or towards 
 the west, or towards the north, or towards the south;' Id. 
 ib. i. 4, 11, af 8' Uatpot ^XXovro npbi olipaudu, ' leapt towards 
 heaven.' 
 
 ^.) In other examples, again, Ttpbi; with the acctl'sative is 
 used in the same sense materially, where it is not preceded 
 by a verb of motion : e.g. 11. viii. 364, ^ro< 6 pkv xXaieaxe npbi; 
 obpavov, 'he wept towards heaven,' that is, 'with the face 
 towards heaven;' Herod. vi..22, ij 8h KaX^aZrrj'Axiij xaXeoiiivri 
 iart piv ^txiXwv, npb; 3t TupaijMTjv rerpappiv^ r^c StxeXdrji;, 
 ' lying (turned) towards Tyrsenia.' ' 
 
 r) '%.' *to.' Here belong such expressions as npbz rrv 
 atXrjuTjU, ' by moonlight,' npbz auXbu dpxuadat, ' to dance to the 
 flute.' E.g. Xen. Hell. v. 9, 1, vaupaxiaz dh Ttpbz riju atX^vj^v 
 Xtmpiwfi, 'a sea-fight having occurred by moonlight,' that 
 is, ' in the face, in the presence of, the moon ;' or, according 
 to the proper meaning of T:p6z and of the accusative, « before, 
 in the presence of, . . . as regards the moon.' Id. Anab. v! 
 9, 5, Ttpoz ahXbv lopxoMTo aw rate imXotz, ' they danced to the 
 flute,' keeping time to its music, and regulating their move- 
 ments by it. This itpbz expresses by marking the dancing 
 as performed 'before,' 'with the face to,' 'towards,' and, 
 hence, 'with a direction towards,' and an implied con- 
 formity with, the flute. 
 
 8.) To this place may be referred the use oiitpbz with tho 
 accusative after verbs of speaking, and the like, where it is 
 rendered in English by 'to,' but has properly the meaning 
 of 'in the presence of," 'face to face.' Thus, after tlntiv, 
 fdatiat, &c.: e.g. ^sch. Agam. 1375, npbz ii86zw: Xir<», 'I 
 speak to persons who are aware,' that is, 'I speak before, in 
 the presence of, face to face, ... as regards persons who are 
 aware;' Soph. CEd. Tyr. 1419, . . . „' 8^xa XiSopeu npbz tM' 
 iTcoz ; ' what, then, shall I say to him ?' Id. Trach. 369, idoStu 
 odu put npoz ae drjXdiaai rb nuv, « I determined, therefore, to 
 
440 
 
 OF THE BKVBKAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 reveal every thing to you.' (For otHer examples, see , 
 Ellendt, Lex. Sophocl.) ' 
 
 e.) ' Towards," ' for." Slightly different is the case in which 
 ' npk with the accusative ia ased metaphorically, after words 
 expressing moral affections and inclinations, in the sense of , 
 the Latin erga and in, where it is rendered in English by^ 
 •towards' and 'for:' e.g. ^sch. Prom. 489, npoc dXX^loO^ 
 rivef I Ix^pai re xai arippj^pa xat auvt^piat, ' what enpiitiw, 
 ' and affections they have for each other, and what occusions 
 of concdurse ;' Id. Suppl. 335, n&z ohv npk OfMC tuas^rfi iyoi 
 - 'itHw, 'how, then, shall I show you kindness?" Soph. A|- 1 
 157 ;r/.ic r^p rbv lxov9' h f96voz epr.st, 'envy is indulged 
 towards him that is rich;" Id. (Ed. Tyr. 142i; ff/>Ac oinhu 
 ' ffdvr" iifeupi]/i<u xaxoz, 'I am discovered to be utterly base 
 towards him." Iiu»uch examples, Tip6<: has properly th^ 
 same meaning of 'befofe,' 'with the face towards," and thus 
 '. marks the object towards which any feeling, disposition, or 
 ' quality is directed. The accusative, as in the other cases 
 already considered, has the force of 'as to," 'as regards," or 
 defines the limits as to its objects within which the feeling, 
 disposition, or quality is to be understood as existing. 
 
 c. ' To." ripk with the accusative case is very frequently 
 used with verbs of motion, where it is rendered in English 
 by 'to •• e.g. ^sch. Eum. 734, inuju npbz do/iouz, ' I will go 
 back to my home;" Soph. Pliil. 915-16, . . .del r^p K' 
 Tpoiav ffs izXeiy \ rrpbz rooc Axaiohc xal rbu \kpu8wv aroXov, 
 •you must needs sail to Troy, and to the host of the 
 Atrcidffi;' ^sch. Prom. 655, mx&^ npbz Aipur^z fiadbu A«- 
 iiiom, 'go forth to the deep meadow of Lerne;" Id. ib. 721, 
 Lv d. npb, aMu Kauxcuroy pbXjfi, 'before you come. to 
 Caucasus itself;" Id. Sept. c. Theb. 449, aruxu npoz ifp^oy 
 jti^frrov, 'he goes to, against, the tower of the enemy ; J^en. 
 Anab. V. 9, 20, i.o^'C^uv . . - i^pbz rok fiXooz - . . rouvo/^apu. 
 rov dvi^eadcu aLroi,, ' thinking that a greater report of him- 
 self would come to his friends." In such examples, the 
 signification of 'to" does not belong to Tzpbz itself, but is 
 due rather to the verb of motion and the accusative case. 
 I7«6c, as already explained, marks, properly speaking, the 
 relative position of ' before,' 'in the presence of, into which 
 
 Ilpdi. 
 
 441 
 
 ^•* 
 
 ii'Jil,' 
 
 1 1 
 
 
 . -i 
 
 the subject of the motion is brought with regard to the 
 object denoted by the accusative case ; and this case has | 
 the meaning of 'as to," 'as regards," or shows iu what 
 regard the relative position described by ^rpb^ is to be i^d- 
 mittcd. Thus, in the example Set ae TtXetv npbz roi»c 'Axatou^, 
 'you must sail to the Achasans," the meaning is, 'you must 
 sail into the presence, so as to be face to face, ... as re- 
 gards the Achtcans,,' or, which is the same thing, 'you 
 mu8t,sail into the presence of the Achseans." But although 
 this may be safely taken as the true meaning of np6i with 
 , the accusative in the examples in which it is rendered by 
 ' to' after verbs of motion, yet instances may be cited ii^ 
 which the proper sense of the preposition seems to be dis- 
 regarded. Thus, Xen. Anab. iv. 5, 2, Seifiatvov ahrbv fipe^i- 
 peuot jT/oof rbv d/t^aiov, 'wetted up to th^ waist;' where npbz' 
 with the accusative is equivalent & the Latin usque ad. ! 
 (Sec Lex. Xenoph.) Yet, even here, the proper meaning '• j 
 may be 'in front of," 'facing/ the idea of 'up*o," that is, 
 of corresponding in measure or height, arising in the 
 same way tiiat it docs where npo^ obtains the sense of ' at," 
 'near," and, especially, where it has that of 'in proportion 
 to," ' in comparison with." 
 
 d. 'Against," the Latin contra, adoersus, in. Ilpbz with the 
 accusative is used in ^he sense of ' against," answering to the 
 Latin contra, advcrsus, in. E.g. II. xvii. 471, oJov npiz TpiSim: 
 fidxeai npdiTip iv bpiXip, ' that thus you fight single-handed ' 
 against the Trojans in the . foremost throng ;" II. .xvii. 98, 
 hTntdr' dvijp l&eXy npb; Saipova ipwrt pdxeadat, 'wlienever a 
 man wishes to fight against a divine being;" ^schyl. Prom. 
 823, o'jxouv Ipoiye jr^«u/i£i/oc dt8aaxdX<p \ npbz xivzpa x&Xov 
 ixreveiz, ' if you take me for your instructor, you will not i 
 kick against the goads;' Id. Choeph. 453, ^wdh yevou npbz 
 iX^pouz, 'unite with us against our enemies;" Xen. Cyrop. 
 i. 4, 21, &a:iep Sk xutov Yeuvawz . . . fipezat npbz xdbrpou, ' as a 
 spirited dog rushes against a boar;' Id. .Anab. i. 8, 8, r^c 
 ftkv npbz iaurbv im^ouXr^z oux jjaddvero, ' he did perceive the 
 design against himself;" Deni'osth. 1089, 10, npbz dvdpun:ou<: 
 ^paz TtiurjTaz noXh nepieau, 'he has much the advantage 
 against us who arc poor.' 
 
442 
 
 OF TOE 8BTBRAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 i 
 
 In Buch examples, the preposition ir/o6c, as has been 
 explained above, has properly the meaning of 'with the 
 face towards,' 'face to face,' which is matoriully the same 
 with the signiiication of 'before,' 'in the presence of;' that of 
 ' against,' by which it is here rendered, arising from the hos- 
 tile relations of the parties to the action, or being suggested 
 by the nature of the action itself. The accusative, mean- 
 time, has the sense of ' as to,' ' as regards,' or denotes the 
 object with regard to which alone the action qualified by 
 itphz is to be understood as affirmed. Thus, in the first 
 example cited, npbz Tfmaz fjdj^eat, 'you fight against the 
 Trojans,' the meaning is, 'you fight face to face . . . witli 
 regard to the Trojans,' that is, ' so far as the Trojans are 
 concerned.' And in that from Xenophon, Cyrop. i. 4, 21, 
 the idea presented is that of a dog rushing ' in the face of* 
 a boar, or ' with his face towards' a boar ; that is, ' rushing in 
 the face, or with the face towards, ... as regards a boar ;' the 
 preposition showing merely the relative direction of the 
 action, the accusative that the action having this relative di- 
 rection is affirmed only within definite limits, namely, 'as far 
 as a boar is concerned ;' and, for the rest, the known rela- 
 tions of the dog and the boar in the chase, and partly, also, 
 the character of the action itself, showing that the move- 
 ment is one of hostility, and that npS^, accordingly, is to be 
 rendered by 'against.' 
 
 e. 'At,' 'near.' JIpoz with the accusative has also the 
 signification of 'ut,' and that of 'near,' corresponding to 
 the Latin apud and juxta; but both these meanings arise 
 from the idea of an object standing ' with the face towards' 
 a thing, or 'looking towards' it, and being 'in its presence.' 
 This was seen above, and may be readily gathered from the 
 examples in which i:p6z has these meanings of ' at' and 
 'near.' E.g. Xen. Hell. vi. 5, 8, dvaxej^iopjixdre; Imb id 7cp6( 
 Mavrivetav Tet^o^ xai ra^ nuXa^, 'having retired under the 
 wall and gates at Mantinea,' properly, 'before, facing, 
 Mantinea ;' Id. Cyrop. iii. 3, 34, Trap^ryetXe ii xai toTc dXioi^ 
 . . . ff//«c r« fe/»« napunat, ' he gave orders to the rest also 
 to asriist at the sacrifices,' that is, ' to be near at hand, be- 
 fore, in the presence of, the sacrifices ;' Id. Hell. ii. 1, 25, 
 
 ♦-.. 
 
 « 
 
 np6:. 
 
 443 
 
 ne saw that the enemy were anchoring in a harbor and 
 U2r%''-'^V''' '^°«-«. i" thefronforface oTa eit;.' 
 
 JoV'hrvtVsI; ' ''f ".^^r- -w^r/'^-c .;.c dX'- 
 
 r I, A ^ *°"^' ^""^•^ "' t^« ground near each other •• 
 
 j.:j...^emw;r;:;^^ 
 
 at, m the presence of, a tomb.' «*"""« 
 
 'Near,' 'towards,' of time. In the sense of near' node with 
 
 the accusative ,s used likewise with reference to tie Tnd 
 
 iv. 5, 21, inuSrjSe npb^ f^^Upav iju, 'and when, now it was 
 
 laVn Tit'' t'Tr^'' ''°°^'"^ t;warl;''*d:; 
 
 ™,;twS ' "'^'' °^ ""'"''^"- ^nd so likewise \Lp6' 
 
 zir^Xz^'T "r'"' r'""^"^™ '" *»>« sen::o?t: 
 
 wards,, near, where it is rendered also by 'about ' but nnf 
 quite accurately: e.g. Xen. Hell i 2 18 7 '"' ,* "°* 
 
 '^r^.^pb, w„.4 .,, that tL ie uHedTf t;::^ir 
 
 wards seven hundred.' The English use of ' toward "" the" 
 ZirtheTcf; '' T'> "'^'""^''•^'^ howTe'idero; 
 
 to an action, and where the relation denoted by JZ ?« con 
 jeyed in Eng ish by 'with.' E.g. Xen. Ana'L Hi 5 iS" 
 i>n6r.^.ro..pb,rb.aarpdn,. . . .W«vro, 'yet whet v!; 
 they made a treaty with the satrap;' Id. Vecti^ v iq 7 J 
 
 say that we must be at peacet'it'h ht too 1° 'That'i t 
 
444 
 
 OF THE BEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Id. Rep. Athen. i. 12, ia^fopiav xai rcitz douXotz npbz robe 
 iXiudifiouz inor^oa/uv, ' we created even for the slaves equa- 
 lity with the freemen,' that is, ' towards, with regard to, 
 looking to, the freemen ;' Dcmosth. 143, 27, af /tiparae z&v 
 Ttikiwv Tipbz a(rcaz Sutpipovro, ' the greatest states were at 
 variance with themselves,' that is, 'towards, with regard 
 to, themselves ;' Id. 528, 16, oudev auT<f» rcpoz tjjv noXiv iariv, 
 'he has nothing to do with the state;' literally, 'there is 
 nothing for him, he has nothing, he has no business, with 
 regard to the state,' that is, ' looking towards,' * having the 
 face towards, ... as regards the state.' In such examples, 
 while it is plain that the preposition has the sense of ' look- 
 ing towards,' ' having the face towards,' and hence ' having 
 regard to,' it is equally manifest that the accusative has the 
 meaning of ' as to,' ' as regards,' or is introduced to mark 
 the extent in which the preceding action qualified by npS^ 
 is to be taken. 
 
 'Pertaining to,' 'having relation to,' 'that concerns.' 
 Very nearly related to the use of Tipoz with the accusative 
 just mentioned is that in which it is equivalent to the Eng- 
 lish expressions 'pertaining to,' 'having relation to,' 'that 
 concerns.' E.g. Demosth. 232, 6, ou8iv iau toutwv itpbz ipi, 
 'none of these things concerns me;' that is, 'has relation 
 to, looks to, me;' Id. 1026, 21, iau 3e fiutf . . . fOjSev itpbz rd 
 itpaypa, 'if he vociferate nothing to the purpose,' 'nothing 
 that relates to,' literally, ' that has its face towards, looks to, 
 the subjcut in hand.' Here, also, npiz signifies, properly, 
 'looking to,' 'having regard to,' and from this comes the 
 sense of 'that cunccrns;' and the accusative has the meaning 
 of ' as to,' ' as regards.' 
 
 g. 'In regard to,' 'concerning.' IIp6i; with the accusfr- 
 tive, having a meaning and an interpretation almost iden- 
 tical with that just mentioned, is sometimes to be ren- 
 dered by 'in regard to,' 'concerning.' E.g. Xen. Cyrop. 
 iv. 5, 26, dv Tt ae itpbz raura ipwr«f, ' if he ask you any ques- 
 tion in regard to, concerning, these matters;' Id. Anab. ii. 
 8, 21, npbz TWJTa o! 'EXXijvtz ipooXeuoi/ro, ' in regard to these 
 things the Greeks held a consultation.' 
 
 Here properly belongs the use of 7tp6i with the accusative 
 
 ■ 
 
 Ilpo^. 
 
 445 
 
 to g,ve the ground or reason of a statement, iu such expres- 
 sions as npo; raura, rpb: rdde, 'therefore,' that is, 'looking 
 to having regard to, these things.' E.g. Soph. (FA. Tyr 
 
 therefore, looking to this, treat with contempt both Creoa 
 and my words ;' Id. ib. 456, .pb, raura .al KpLa nsX^l 
 
 Sonhf nrA"" '"""^ ^'■•'"" "'«''•' (See Ellendt, Lex. 
 Boph.) Of the same nature also is the expression 7:pb, 
 
 "•• 3. 10, x«, i,,oi fliXuo, erm do.unpb, „dvra, 'and to mo it 
 seoms better u. every way,' ' better in every regard.' In all 
 these examples, both np6, and the accusative have the same 
 
 {ymg looking to,' having regard to,' and the accusative 
 •as to, 'as regards. 
 
 h. 'For,"withaviewto.' Of the same nature essentially 
 with the case just mentioned, so far as the construction is 
 concerned, is that in which np6, with the accusative is used 
 m the sense of 'for,' 'with a view to,' that is, to mark the 
 object had in view. E.g. ^sch. Eumen. 238, r.rpaouau„. 
 piy rap OK .uo>. .epp6., | npb, alpa .al araXayiL Lf^aa- 
 blT' ;*«'-,^%'t,^«grvounded fawn, we hunt for dripping 
 blood; Soph (Ed Tyr. 1027, i.Soa:6pu, 8k npb, ri Zol 
 rou, roTTou,; 'for what did you journey to this place ?' Xen 
 
 oh7/' ' I' ''''"' '"''"'' ""^ '^Z'*' """ rerlrf^^ou,, 'he 
 ordered on he pursuit those who had been appointed for 
 ths service;' Id. Anab. vii. 2. 12. .ai i^ rcpb, Zro in.^^Z 
 iui^doe, 'he sent me hither for this;' Id. Hell. i. 7, 34, rL 
 npo, rrju dua,pea,u (raxifiura,), ' those who were app;i„t;d to 
 recover the men,' or 'for the recovery of the men 'Id 
 Cyrop. .0, 40 npb, 8' a, rbu Xar^ , . .',,.«, .^^ '«/ «- 
 da/^rj aurbu d,eopcn.o., 'for the hare,' that is, 'to hunt tS 
 bare, you kept dogs that found it by the s^ent.' In this 
 example, npb, rb. Xaym may be also rendered by 'with 
 regard to the hare,' and it is thus seen very plainly that the 
 preposition has the meaning of ' looking to/ 'having egL 
 ^, and that the accusative has that of ' as to,' ' as regards/ 
 What 18 obviously true of this example is equally to be 
 
446 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 admitted in the other instances of this use of itpi^ with th« 
 
 accusative. . ., ' 
 
 ». «For,' denoting the end served. To be disfangmshe^ 
 from jr/>oc with the accusative as above used to express the 
 object had in view, is the case in which it denotes the end 
 to which a thing serves, the object subserved, in which, 
 however, equally, it is rendered by «for.' E.g. ^sch. 
 Agara 278, laxi>Z Tzopaixou XafrndSoz irpk ^Souijv, 'the power 
 for pleasure of a moving torch,' that is, 'the power of » 
 moving torch to give pleasure;' Soph. Electr. 909, ou irphc 
 Mowiv iirw rd8e, ' I say not this so as to please you, for your 
 pleasure;' Id. ib. 369, fajdiv npd^ iprju, '(say) nothing 
 angrily,' or rather, perhaps, ' that will excite anger. 1 lat 
 Symp. 176, d, mWr«c 7:pk ijSourjp, 'drinking for pleasure, 
 'BO as to give pleasure.' Both the preposition and the 
 accusative have the same interpretation here as where they 
 express purpose, or the object had in view. And it may be 
 observed, that whether the meaning that results from the 
 employment of np6z with the accusative case shall be the 
 ground or reason of an action, or the object had in view, or 
 the end to which it serves, must depend on the connection. 
 For when an object is pointed to by r:p6<: as being that to 
 which the view is directed, or which is had in view, it may 
 stand in any one of these relations equally ; which one of 
 them is intended in any particular instance can be dete^ 
 mined only by the attending circumstances. . 
 
 k 'For,' 'in exchange for,' 'against,' 'with. 77/,<5c with 
 the accusative case is used also in the sense of 'for in 
 
 1 „ «v.r' 'flffainsf 'with.' E.g. riat. Phaed. 69, A, 
 exchange for, against, wiiu. ^-e, 
 
 laralUrLdL, 'to exchange pleasures for pleasures, or 
 . pleasures with pleasures,' or ' pleasures against ?!««««;;«». 
 II vi. 235, 8c Tzpk Tudeidrj^ Jio,MJdea rs^x* l/ie^i^e^ who ex- 
 changed arms with Diomcdes son of Tydcus;' where it . 
 to bt remarked that np6, with the accusat.ve marks he 
 person 'with' whom the exchange is made, not the thmg 
 .for' which another is exchanged. In such a case ^^ic 
 could not be rendered by 'for' or 'ngamst, »>"* ?»ly Jj 
 •with ' Yet the interpretation of both the preposition and 
 
 JIp6:. 
 
 447 
 
 ;' 
 
 the accusative case is the same as where the object for which 
 another is exchanged is intended. As above explained, np6^ 
 ^ere, properly speaking, marks merely the relative position 
 of the objects interchanged, namely, that the one is regarded 
 as ' looking towards' the other, as standing ' face to face' 
 with regard to it; whence comes the idea of the one being 
 ' over against' the other. The notion of actual exchange, 
 which alone distinguishes this from a number of other cases 
 in which Tcpd; has the sense of 'looking towards,' standing 
 * face to face,' is suggested chiefly by the nature of the action 
 qualified by TrpSi;. This remark applies only where one 
 thing is exchanged for another. Where npdz with the 
 accusative denotes the person with whom the exchange is 
 made, it is to bo considered as expressing simply the mean- 
 ing of ' face to face.' The accusative in this construction 
 has plainly the sense of ' as to,' ' as regards.' Thus, in the 
 first example given, ^dov&i; rcpbi; ^dovaz xarMdrrea^ou, 'to 
 exchange pleasures for pleasures,' the meaning is, 'to ex- 
 change pleasures for or against ... as regards pleasures,' 
 ' as far as pleasures are concerned,' the accusative showing 
 that the exchange is confined within the limits marked 
 by it. 
 
 I. 'In accordance with,' 'as becomes,' ' suitably to.' Im- 
 mediately connected with the preceding uses of Ttpo^ with 
 the accusative is that in which it expresses conformity with, 
 where it is rendered in English by 'in accordance with,' 
 'as becomes,' 'suitably to.' E.g. ^sch. Prom. 1002-3, 
 ToX/ir^abv nore \ npb^ rac napouaaz iv^povaz dp&wz ippoviiv, 
 ' have the heart to think rightly, as becomes, in accordance 
 with, your present ills ;' Id. Soph. c. Theb. 501, ff/>df X6yov 
 rod aijfmvoz, ' suitably to the expression (legend) of the device.' 
 The office of npdc in this construction is to show that an 
 action or stateraent 'looks towards' or has regard to an 
 object, which is introduced by the accusative case as de- 
 fining the extent to which this relation is to be admitted. 
 The idea of conformity on the part of the action to the 
 object towards which it looks, with which it stands ' face to 
 face,' as expressed by np6c, is not directly conveyed by the 
 preposition, but is supplied by the mind, just as, in other 
 
448 
 
 OF THE 8BVKBAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 coBCS, it is left to be inferred that the relation between • ' 
 foregoing atatement and the object towards which it looks 
 is that of ground or reason, object had in view, proportion, 
 comparison, &c. As additional examples may be cited, 
 Xen. Cjrop. i. 6, 43, '3e? obv npk za aw^aivovra, olfiae, roorofC 
 Xpf^aSae, 'it behooves us, therefore, methinks, to use these 
 things according to circumstances ;' Id. ib. ii. 2, 18, 7 {*p4^ 
 xtaxov ^/uv) axcmo'juraz to Ipya kxdaroo, npbz raoro xa< T<ic 
 «//<ic i*<i^orv itpoartdivat; 'or is it best for tis to consider 
 each man's deeds, and to bestow upon each honors also in 
 conformity with these ?' 
 
 To this place belong the examples in which nphz is used 
 with the accusative case of pronouns in the sense of 'in 
 conformity with one's' mind or views,' of 'what is agreeable 
 to or suits' a person, and, hence, with the idea of being 'of 
 one's party.' E.g. Xen. Anab, vii. 7, 30, i:oTip(o<: oiv oTu 
 fiaUov dv . . . tppovetv xa npbz ae; 'do you suppose that they 
 would think more in acc<yd with you?' properly, 'that 
 they would more entertain the thoughts that look to or Have 
 regard to you ?' 
 
 Hero also belong certain forms of expression callei^ 
 adverbial; as, npbz ^iau, 'by force of,' 'by dint of,' that is, 
 ' according to, as belongs to, after the way of, force.' E.g. 
 ^sch. Prom. 208, ^ow' d/iox»ei nphz ^iau re aeairSasiu, ' they 
 supposed that they would exercise dominion without trouble 
 and by dint of force.' In the same way, jr/.6c dvdr'^v, 'by 
 necessity,' that is, ' conformably to necessity,' ' as accords 
 with necessity,' ff/)6c hx^oc xpdxoc, ' by the force of strength, 
 ' by dint of might,' Soph. Thii. 594, and some others. (See 
 Passow's Lex. s. v. rrpoi, c. iv.) But npd^ ^Suviju, ' to please, 
 'for the pleasure of,' ff/>ic X^f/"". '*« gratify,' 'for the gratifi- 
 cation of,' and, hence, 'for the sake of,' mentioned m this 
 connection by Tassow, have a different interpretation, and 
 should bo referred to the case in which w/<oc with the accu- 
 sative marks the end to which a thing serves. (See above, 
 p. 44G.) To the above list may be added npbi: xb xapxepdv, 
 ' by might,' that is, ' according to the rule of the stronger,' 
 ^8ch. Prom. 212; npbc dXx^v, 'vigorously,' that is, 'in 
 accordance with, as becomes, energetic action,' Id. SuppL 
 
 Upb;. 
 
 449 
 
 812 ; Id. Pers. 5G1, Xuip&ivxez npbz dvdpojv, ' left of necessity,' 
 that is, ' as belongs to, in accordance with, necessity ;' Id. 
 Choe])h. 871, npbz 8ixt]u natXij^/tiuiji, ' struck justly,' that is, 
 'in accordance with jastice.' (See, for the examples, Lex. 
 ^schyl. Ed. Wunder.) 
 
 m. ' In proportion to,' 'in comparison with,' 'in relation 
 to.' Ilpb^ with the accusative is used also in a sense 
 kindred to the above, when it conveys the idea that an 
 object is to be«onBidered as bearing a proportion to another, 
 or as being compared with it, and may be rendered in 
 English by 'in proportion to,' 'in comparison with.' E.g. 
 Xen. de re Equest. i. 16, Jipbz Si raurac (r<ic xvjfiaz), iK ^^ 
 aufipixptDQ ixjj, auuauSexat xai xb dXXo awfUL, ' the rest of the 
 body also, in order to be symmetrical, grows in proportion 
 to the knees ;' Id. ib. xii. 1, ipapkv XPV"" ^^^ ^tipaxa izpbz rb 
 aCofta TzsTroir^adiu, ' we say that it is necessary that the breast- 
 plate should be in proportion to the body;' Ilcrod. iii. 34, 
 tipsxo Kufi^uajjz xoioz xiz doxioi dvjjp eivtu npb; xov itaxepa xsM- 
 aat Aupou, 'Cambyses asked what sort of a man he ap- 
 peared to be in comparison with his father Cyrus;' Id. viii. 
 44, \Wijuatoi npbz itdvxa^ roof dXXouz napixofievoc vrjuz dySioxovxa 
 xai kxaxbv, ' the Athenians fnrnished a hundred and eighty 
 ships, compared with, counted against, in proportion to, 
 all the rest ;' Id. iii. 94, and ii. 35, Iftj^a Xbj-ou fii(^a> napix^xat 
 Ttpbc ndaav X'^PWf 'exhibits greater works in comparison 
 with every other country,' that is, ' above every other 
 country.' (See, for the examples, Schweigh. Lex. Ilerod.) 
 The notion of 'in proportion to,' and 'in comparison with,' 
 conveyed by ::pbz, arises from the preposition representing 
 an object as standing 'face to face' with another, and so 
 ' over against' it. And this second object is appropriately 
 introduced by the accusative case in the sense of 'as to,' 
 ' as regards,' or as marking the object with regard to which 
 exclusively the relation signified by npbz is affirmed. 
 
 (For the table of the significations and use of itpb^ with 
 cases of nouns, see the next page.) 
 
 29 
 
450 
 
 OF TUB BBVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 TABLK 01 THE glONinCATIONB AND 088 0» »p<f WITU CA8B8. 
 
 glgnlflntloiH oT 
 
 O«o.!'wlthr««peetto.' 
 
 .. • Before,' 'ftonU 
 Inn,' 'In the 
 preHDce of.* 
 
 LooklDg towards. 
 
 Dattn: 'for.' 
 
 AccuutlTS : ■ M to," H nf^iM.' 
 
 I.O.' Before,' Mn the 
 
 Krcnnceof;"b;,' 
 ■ eiUurmtlou. 
 (liOoklDf to- 
 
 werill.) 
 t. ■ On the qnerler ol,' 
 
 •on," 'egelnit' 
 (.•On the ride o(' 
 
 • neer.' 
 d-'Intheeyeeof.' 
 c'Od theddeoCd*' 
 
 ■eent. 
 /.'On the ride ofi' 'of 
 
 the party ot' 
 a.'On the part oV 
 •with,' 'amoog.' 
 A. 'According to the 
 
 character of.* 
 
 i.<At the hande at,' 
 
 •tma,"bj; 
 
 .a.<Be*>re,' 'to 
 
 traai eV 
 ».'At,' 'ne 
 •about.' 
 (Looking to- 
 wardaO 
 e. ' To,' ' on,' 
 •agalnat.' 
 
 2. 'Brfiiro,' 'for- 
 wiirilH* rela- 
 tl»Hjr, 'In ad- 
 
 TKIICO of.' 
 
 in<'i<l<le>."lnad- 
 ilillon to.' 
 
 1. n. ' llefor»,"ln thepreaencao(' 
 ' In the oyoe of," with,' 
 
 I. 'At," near.' 
 (liOoUng towaidij 
 
 e. 'Toward!,' 'to,' 'fcr,' Ut 
 nya,<n. 
 
 d.'To.' 
 
 (.'Agalnit.' 
 
 /.'With,' where partm ■» 
 concerned. * That CO^ 
 corne," relating to.' 
 
 t' In regard to," ' couceiBUC.' 
 'For,' 'with a view to.' 
 i. * For;' the end eerred. 
 i.'For,' 'In exc'iange te, 
 
 'again«t,'^wlth.' 
 L ' In acconlance with," aa »•■ 
 
 comee,' 'BuitaWyto.' 
 m. ' In proportion to,' ' In OOB- 
 parleon with.' 
 
 4. ('Before,' 'foi^ 
 warda' relar 
 tlToly, 'In ad- 
 Tanee of.') 
 <Beeidea,"ln ad- 
 Uon to.' 
 
 npbedtx', which has also a poetic and Ionic form i:p6ads 
 is compounded of the preposition np6z, 'before and the 
 ending &.v, signifying 'from," seen also in o«o-,5>ev, from 
 horae>i/>a.i.,?e., 'from heaven,' dib-^^v, 'from Jove, ft- 
 &,u, 'thence.' 'from thence.' In some cases «?£.. seems to 
 he equivalent in meaning to the genitive-ending, as ^ri-M 
 •of thee,' Ifii-^^v, 'of me,' ?-,?e., 'of himself.' (See Pas- 
 sow's Lex.) 
 
 Signification and use of itp6adtv with tlie genUioe case. 
 1. 'Before,' 'in front of.' a.) Of space: e.g. II. xil 145, 
 i. ,n uh diiavT. noXda>. ^p6a9e f^axiadrj., ' they fought before, 
 in front of, the gates;' H. xxii. 463-t, . . • ro.^ hor,a.v\ 
 kMueuou ,tp6a9eu ndJi^o,, ' he saw him dragged before, in front 
 of, the city;' JS«ch. Ters. 439, urja&, u<:iau r:pba9e laXa. 
 Jvoz rhnmv, 'there is an island in front of Salamis. 6.) Of 
 time: e.g. II. ii. 359, ^pa ^pbaff m^o. Muaro. x«f n&rfm^ 
 iManri, nhat he may reach death and his fate before others 
 Soph. rhil. 767, ipoi re xai np np6a»' ipoo xMr,/.iv<^, that 
 poBscsscd them before me.' (See Passow's Lexicon.) In 
 
 /Ipoadtv: 2'6v. 
 
 451 
 
 such examples, allowing that npbadev has the proper sense 
 of 'from before,' its use may be explained by observing 
 that, in Greek, the posidon of an object is sometimes 
 marked by regarding the point to which it is referred as 
 that from which it looks towards the speaker; as in Ttarpd- 
 9ev, ' from his father,' where we would say, ' on his father's 
 side.' (See Ilerod. ii.'14, and what has been said on this 
 subject above in treating of dnS, p. 183.) With this use may 
 be compared the Latin ab orienle, 'on the east,' properly, 
 'from the cast.' So that the expression nuXdtop itpdtr&e pro- . 
 perly means, ' from before,' or rather ' looking forth from the i 
 front or face, and, hence, on the quarter of the face or fl^t 
 of the gates ;' and this would be equivalent to ' before or in 
 front of the gates,' just as dnb vdrou dvipou, 'from the south 
 wind,' would bo equivalent to 'on the south.' In the same 
 way may be understood np6a&e nodSz, 'before the foot:' e.g. 
 II. xxiii. 877, np6a9zv Mrjpidvao i:dpj i:o8&z, ' stuck fast before 
 the foot of Meriones.' 
 
 2. 'Before,' in the sense of 'in defence of.' This is 
 merely another application of the sense of 'before' just 
 mentioned, where the object which stands before another 
 is a shield or protection from danger. E.g. II. vii. 224, to 
 npba&e azepvoto tpipiov^ TeXapwvto^ AiaZt ' bearing this before 
 liis breast,' tliut is, 'in defence of his breast,' spoken of the 
 shield of Aias. 
 
 'For,' 'in behalf of.' So also, in the sense of 'for,' 'in 
 behalf of:' e.g. II. xxi. 587, oi xe Jipdade tpiXtov roxiwv, dXSxaiu 
 re xai ulwv \ ' Ihov eipu6ftea9a, ' who defended Ilium on behalf 
 of our dear parents, and wives, and children;' properly, 
 ' before, in front of, our dear parents ;' or, recurring to the 
 proper notion of npba&ev and the genitive, as above ex- 
 plained, ' on the quarter of, that is, before or in front ... 
 with respect to our dear parents.' (For the examples, see 
 Passow's Lexicon.) 
 
 Suv. 
 
 Iw, of which the fuller form fiiw, equivalent to yauv or 
 xauu, was common in the more ancient Attic dialept, as in 
 Thucydides and the tragic writers, and occurs more rarely 
 
452 
 
 OF THE 6BVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 ia Homer and Hesiod, is the same with the Latin cum, 
 which retains the guttural of the form Sou, (jauv or xadv,) but 
 loses the a, and has m instead of v at the end. It is supposed 
 to be related to the Sanskrit so-, aam-, and to the Greek &/t 
 in ifta. (See Liddell and Scott's Lexicon, s. v., Pott Etym. 
 Forseh. i. 130, and P. Knight, Proleg. ad Homerum.) 
 
 Signification of auv. 
 
 The proper sense of auv is 'together with,' 'with,' having 
 the notion of conjunction. Thus, in compounds, as auXXiyetv, 
 ' to collect,' ' to gather together,' aMexrpoc, ' a bed-fellow,* 
 auiXofil^eadat, ' to reckon up together,' au/tfiiUXav, ' to throw 
 together.' And so when used with nouns: as. Soph. Phil. 
 920, ^bv aoi ri Tpoiac neiia Ttopd^oat ftoXmv, ' to waste the 
 plains of Troy in company with you ;' yEschyl. S. c. Theb. 
 445, auv T &Uot(: dediz, ' in company with the other gods.' 
 And this same sense of accompaniment and conjunction is 
 involved in the other uses of auv, even in the case where it 
 seems to express the instrument or means, and is translated 
 by 'with' and 'by:' e.g. ^sch. Pers. 741, itIoutov ixvjao) aiiv 
 aijyt^, 'you acquired wealth with the spear;' for here the 
 sense is, 'with the help of the spear,' just as where it is 
 said, Soph. (Ed. Tyr. 146, ^ ^d/> eorojrerc Suv rtp &eif> ipavoufiida 
 ^ nenrtoxdrez, 'with the help of the god.' ^uv, having. this 
 sense, differs from ifia in expressing merely conjunction 
 and accompaniment, while the latter conveys the idea of 
 contemporaneousness, being equivalent to 'at the same 
 time with.' 
 
 Signification and use of auv with its case. 
 
 Suv is employed with the dative case alone, the case being 
 dependent upon the signification of conjunction or accom- 
 paniment contained in the preposition itself, just as it 
 depends upon the notion of equality in (<roc, ' equal,' upon 
 that of likeness in 8/io<oc, ' like,' and upon that of identity 
 in 6 auxdz, ' the same.' 
 
 1. a. 'With,' ' together with,' Suv is used with the dative 
 case to denote the companionship or conjunction of one 
 object with another in any action, or the accompaniment of 
 
 ,< 
 
 luv. 
 
 453 
 
 one action by another, and is expressed in Engliah by ' with ' 
 together w.th ' Eg. I,, v. 47^, ^, „ou Lp ,L2>^ 
 
 ZiuL7 )"' """ r"' ^"'"^ *'^ '^'y -^*^«"* *»>« people 
 
 and the alhes, alone with your brothers-in-law and your b^o- 
 thcr3, that IS. 'together with,' 'in conjunction with ;' Id. ib. 
 494, auuxa3- 6^io.v ahv reij^ca^u d^ro ;f«;,«f e. 'he leapt upon 
 ^e ground with his arms,' that is, ' together with his'^arm^s ■' 
 ^sch. Sept c Theb. 586, SXa>X.v dv8paiv Vu. ^eo.ruar<p ,i J. 
 
 b. 746, dd3o.xa 3k ahv fiaadeua, | f^ nbh^ Saumfdr, 'I fear lest 
 the city be subdued together with the kin^ ' 
 
 case i7wSi'" '*^' ''"'' of 'against' Remarkable is the 
 case in which auv, m connection with lidfta^a,, «to fight' is 
 used in the sense of 'against:' e.g. Xen CyrJp. v. Itl 
 
 him, tbat IS 'against him.' Here the community of which 
 ...IS the sign refers to the act of fighting considered Z 
 
 a'l: \r'""r% ^"° P^"°°« fig^^^^g tt one with o^ 
 against tbe other Lave community in the action, though it 
 be one of hostility. Whether they join in an actof fighdng 
 
 o^Le ;f : '^'""'* : '"':*' ^'"'•*^' °^ ^ ^"^'"•^^ o- with thf 
 anton . '""'/-^ ^-"junction expressed by auv is equally 
 appropriate, and .8 the same in both cases. The sense of 
 against, as attributed to a6v, arises wholly from the hostile 
 relations of the parties to a conjoint action!^ The lLL cm 
 and the tngl.sh 'with' are employed in the same way T 
 pugnare cum hostibus, 'to fight with the enemy,' thai h 
 'against the enemy.' ^' ' "' 
 
 2. 'Wit!..' Zuv is further used with the dative in a 
 variety of cases, in all of which, however, the pr ^os tion 
 has the san.e idea of accompaniment or conjunction They 
 
 tiero7s° ?°/ "' 'T^'^'^'y °° account'of the peculiarT 
 tes of signification which auv acquires from the circum- 
 stances attending its use. Thus • circum- 
 
 .wl')r*l' r'".*'"'^ °^-' ^" '"""^ examples as <iuv c?e<5 
 
 with the be p of god:' e.g. Soph. Aj. 766, ^ dv yJjS' 
 
 auToo auv &e^ awr^p^o., 'we shall soon be there as savH 
 
 with the help of god:' Id ib 752 fl„,'j„,. - ! T ' 
 f 5 «, iu. ID. io£, poulou xpaxuv ftiv, ahv dtq, 
 
454 
 
 Ot THE 8EVEBAL FBEPOSITIONB. 
 
 I 
 
 d' dei xparttv, 'with the help of god to be always anperior.' 
 It is obvious that the only sense, properly speaking, Con- 
 veycd by auv, in such examples, is that of ' together with,' 
 ' in company or conjunction with,' and that the notion of 
 help afforded is suggested by the character and attributes 
 of tbe being represented by the term ^c^. 
 
 b. 'With,' to mark an accompanying quality. Again, 
 auv introduces an accompanying quality of an object : e.g. 
 Od. xxiv. 193, i} dpa auv /ttydLXji dpery ixnjaa) ixomv, 'surely, 
 then, you obtained a spouse with (having) great virtue/ 
 Here, also, the sense of auv is the same as in the cases 
 already mentioned, for it merely shows that the quality 
 added is something accompanying, or found in conjunction 
 tvith, a person. 
 
 In the same way are to be regarded the examples in which 
 ow introduces any accompanying circumstances or condition 
 of an action : e.g. II. v. 219, auv Imtotaiv xai oj[eayiv | dvrt^b^v 
 ikSovre, ' coming against ns with horses and chariots,' that 
 is, 'with the accompaniment of horses and chariots ;' Soph. 
 Autig. IIG, $uv &' iTmoxd/ioec xopudeaatv, 'with crested hel- 
 mets,' that is, ' with the accompaniment of crested helmets ;' 
 Id. (Ed. Tyr. 585, ti rev' dv doxeiz dpj[€ev iXiadat Suv foftotaiv, 
 ' if you think that any one will choose to reign attended by 
 alarms,' that is, 'with the attendant condition of alarms.' 
 
 Here belong such expressions as ahvTuj[jg, 'happily,' 'with 
 good success:' e.g. Soph. Philoct. 775, . . . fov riijfjj 3i 
 npoa^epe ; aw anoud^, ' with haste,' ' hastily,' ' with earnest- 
 ness,' 'earnestly:' e.g. Id. ib. 1222-S, oux dv fpdaecaz i^vrtv' 
 0.7) mtXivrpoTToc | xiXeu&ov epnuz wde auv aitouS^ 'f'^X^^i (^^^ 
 Ellendt, Lex. Sophocl.) 
 
 c. ' On the side of.' luv admits of the same explanation 
 when it occurs with the dative after elvat ^nd pyveaffai in the 
 sense of ' on the side of:' e.g. Xen. Anab. iii. 1, 21, dyatvO' 
 dirat d' of &eoe eiatv, o! auv ^/uv, ic t6 elxd^, laovrae, ' who will 
 be on our side,' that is, 'who will be conjoined with us.' 
 
 d. 'With,' 'in accordance with.' I'uv with the dative is 
 used also in the sense of 'with,' 'in accordance with:' e.g. 
 Xen. Anab. ii. 6, 18, dkkd auv rip dixacift xai xaXip <piro dttv 
 Touuov rufX'^vav, ' but he considered that he onght to obtain 
 
 £uv. 
 
 456 
 
 these things in accordance or conformity with justice and 
 honor,' or ' fairly and honorably,' that is, ' with accompanying 
 justice and honor.' 
 
 e. 'With,' marking the instrument or meaos. luv with 
 the dative case is used seemingly to express the instrument 
 or moans with which an action is performed : e.g. Soph. 
 Pliil. 1334-5, (Tipiv) Td nipra/ta \...Sbv roiade r(Jfo«c . . . nipaa^ 
 ifavf,(:, ' before you shall be seen to have destroyed the citadel 
 with these arrows.' Here, however, a6v does no more, in 
 fact, than introduce the concomitant circumstances or con- 
 ditions of an action, or the accompanying means, and not 
 the simple instrument: the arrows of Philoctetus are not 
 represented simply and directly as the instrument to be 
 employed for the destruction of the Trojan citadel, but as 
 that with which as a concomitant means the deed is to be 
 accomplished. Ellendt, Lex. Sophocl., p. 763, vol. ii., cor- 
 rectly interprets the passage by "jumni enim exddium tela 
 non sola efficiunt." The Latin cum is used in the same way 
 with auv, so far as the meaning of the preposition itself is 
 concerned, in such examples aa oppidum cum vi cepil, 'he 
 took the town by (with an) assault,' that is, ' he took the 
 town, and with attending force (storming) as a means." Soph. 
 CEd. Tyr. 123-4, | ^jjirrac xravetv viv . . . auv nXijdse ;fe/>aiv, 
 •that robbers slew him with a multitude of hands,' that is, 
 'with the accompanying agency of maty hands;' Id. Antig! 
 1252, i/ioc fitp Suv p6p(p l&ave<:, 'you died in youth with a 
 strange fate,' that is, 'the circumstances by which your 
 death was attended and procured were strange ;' Xen. OScon. 
 v. 13, mkkdxiz d' iv Tip noXiptp xai daipaXiartpdv iare abv to7c 
 StiXui: t^v rpoipr,v paareuetv ij abv ro7f r^wpyixoiz dpydvoez, 'in 
 war also it is oftentimes safer to seek subsistence with arms 
 than with implements of husbandry,' that is, 'with the em- 
 ployment of arms'rather than with the employment of imple- 
 ments of husbandry as an accompanying means.' In these 
 and similar cases, the chief attention of the speaker or writer 
 is directed to the action itself by which any thing is eftected, 
 while the means by which the result is attained are regarded 
 as merely attendant or concomitant. (See Ellendt, 1. c.) 
 This signification of <rw is obvious in the expression auv^i^, 
 
456 0? THB BBVEKAL PRBFOSITIONS. 
 
 ' with (accompanying) force,' frequently met with in AttijO 
 Greek. ' • .■ 
 
 TABLE Of THB UONinOATIONB 01 rir WITH IIS OASB. 
 
 SigniflekUon <ff ttr. 
 
 DaUre: 'for.' 
 
 'Wilh,"<ogetherwUh.' 
 
 1. a. 'With,' 'together with.' 
 
 b. 'With,' 'agaiiMt;' u with iiAxta9at. 
 
 e. 'With the help of;' u, aiiv tfcv- 
 
 d. 'With,' 'hkTiiig,' marking an attendant quali- 
 ty, ciroumatance, or coniUtion ; as, avvfuyti^ 
 aprry iKT^au Akoitiv. *' 
 
 <. •With,"ontbeaideof.' 
 
 /. 'With,' 'in accordance with;' a«, ovv Siiei). 
 
 g. ' With,' marlcing the accompanying meana ; a^ 
 eini pif. 
 
 ' Yirip, in Epic Greek written also Imtip, is the same with 
 the Sanskrit upari, the Latin super, the German Uber, old- 
 German ohar, the Gothic ufar, the Anglo-Saxon ofer, English 
 over, and is probably nearly akin to up and upper, the Ger- 
 man auf. (See Bopp, Glossar. Sanskr.) If it should he 
 found to have the same radical with the English up and the 
 German auf, then its formation would he Im -I- ep, just as 
 upper is composed of up+er, the p being doubled by the 
 stress of the voice in the pronunciation, and its ending ep, 
 like er in ov-er, up-per, wis-er, bold-er, may possibly give 
 it the relative sense which, in the same way with upper and 
 over, it always has. But this is at least doubtful. 
 
 Significations of Imip. 
 
 1. ' Over.' The proper signification of Imip is * over,' 
 with the idea of a relative position 'above' or 'up' with 
 respect to an object that is 'under' or 'below.' Accord- 
 ingly, it stands opposed to bn6, ' under.' If Cmip bo a com- 
 pound form, as above suggested as bain^ not impossible, 
 this relative sense will be appropriate to the form. That 
 this is the meaning of larip is seen from its use in comr 
 pounds; as, Catpcdpeiv, 'to lift above or over,' inepfialvttv, 
 'to step over,' 'to ascend above:' e.g. B. xii. 468, r«rjroc 
 imtp^aivuv, ' to pass, to go over, the wall ;' Od. viii. 80, nu9dl 
 in dyadhj, o9' Imipfiij idivou o!)86v | xnaofaitoz, 'when he 
 
 'Tnip. 457 
 
 crossed the stone threshold to consult the oracle;' Herod, 
 iv. 25, ouduz ffjpeo (rd oupea) imep^aivu, ' no one passes over, 
 or crosses, the mountains;' Id. ii. 13, obx Imepfiaivu (6 noraftdc) 
 ^C rijv x^pi^v, « the river does not overflow upon the district ;' 
 limpixuv, ' to hold over or above ;' e.g. B. ii. 426, {onXdj-xva) 
 lmupcji;ov 'Hifaia-cpii, ' they held the entrails over or above the 
 fixft-; bntpdupiov, 'the lintel of the doorway;' Od. vii. 90, 
 bntpxdnntv, ' to stoop over,' ' to peep ;' (mtpxtivuv, « to stretch 
 over;' e.g. Uerod. iv. 71, napajv^avzzz aij^du; l^>9tv »ai tvdtv 
 TOO vtxpoi, f Wa bneprehouat, ' they fasten spears (in the ground) 
 along8ide of the dead body on this side and that, and place 
 pieces of wood over these.' This sense of Imip is seen also 
 in ito use with nouns: e.g. II. iv. 527-S, ^dXs doupi | aript^ov 
 UTtkp paCoco, 'he struck him with his spear on the breast 
 above or over the paps;' Id. ib. ii. 20, or^ 3' dp' Imkp xea>aX^z, 
 'stood over, above, his head.' (See Passow's Lexicon, from 
 which the above examples have been borrowed.) 
 
 2. a. 'For,' 'on behalf of.' From the signification of 
 ' over,' ' above,' is derived that of ' for,' « on behalf of,' which 
 Imip very often has. Thus, in compounds, as, ImzpStxuv, ' to 
 plead for, in behalf of;' bmpixuv, 'to hold over' as a pro- 
 tection ; e.g. B. V. 433, 3 ol aurd^ &;:eipexe x^'pa<: 'Anbilmv, ' on 
 which account Apollo himself held his hands over him,' 
 that is, 'covered or protected him with his hands;' bn^p- 
 xrf/iMfv, 'to toil for' or 'on bebalf of;' l>7:tp7covuv, 'to labor i 
 for- or 'on behalf of.' And so in its use with nouns: e.g. 
 II. vii. 449, «7;|roc iruxiaamno vmv Imp, ' they built a wall 
 for the protection of the ships ;' bnlp r^c itmpidoz dp{ivuv, ' to ' 
 fight for one's country.' (For the examples, see Passow's 
 Lexicon.) That tbe meaning of ' for,' ' on behalf of,' springs 
 immediately from the local relation of 'over,' 'above,' is ' 
 plain from such instances as the second above cited] in ' 
 which the action that affords protection, or that is done 
 'for,' 'on behalf of,' an object, is one that contains the local 
 relation of • over,' ' above.' 
 
 h. 'For,' 'to the end that.' Obviously referable to the 
 sense of 'for," on behalf of,' is that of 'for,' 'to the end 
 that,' ' for the purpose of,' in which bnip is not uncommonly 
 employed with the infinitive: e.g. Xen. Hieron iv 8 
 
458 
 
 OF THB SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 iopuipopouot d' inl rooc xaamupyouz Imhp too /jojdiva r&v itokr&v 
 Pauift daudrtfi djiodv/joxetv, 'to the end that no one of the 
 citizens may perish hy a violent death,' that is, 'on the 
 behalf of their not dying by a violent death.' 
 
 e. 'For,' 'instead of.' Very nearly related to the sense 
 of 'for,' 'on behalf of,' is that in which it is rendered by 
 'for,' 'instead of,' ' in the name of:' e.g. Thuc. i. 141, iiiXuv 
 di Ttvt xac dXX(fj (otercu) Imkp iaurou ti npoiSuv, ' ho considers 
 that it is the concern of some other one, in fact, to have 
 forecast in his room ;' Xen. Anab. vii. 4, 9, i} xal i^iXoi^ 
 dv . . . uitkp roiiroo ino&aveiv ; ' would you, indeed, be willing 
 to die for, in the room of, this lad ?' The proper sense of 
 Imip, in such examples, is ' on the behalf of,' which, how- 
 ever, in certain circumstances, and with certain actions, is 
 the same as ' in the place or room of.' To die ' for,' ' on bfl- 
 half of,' another, when the alternative is that he shall die 
 himself, is to die ' in his stead.' 
 
 3. a. 'Of,' 'concerning,' 'about,' the Latin de. Another 
 meaning of iT:i(> figuratively employed is that of 'of,' 'con- 
 cerning,' ' about,' answering to the Latin de. E.g. II. vi. 
 524, 3i?' {mkp aidev dtaft' dxoxtat \ i:poz Tpioutv, ' when I hear 
 words of reproach about you from the Trojans ;' Herod, ii. 
 128, rd Xej-d/ieva Imip ixdtnaiv Axoij fpdipto, 'I write from 
 hearsay what is said about each matter,' Here the meaning 
 of l)itip would seem to be the proper signification of the 
 preposition used metaphorically. As the Greeks said, bnip 
 ni/«c /td^eadau, 'to fight over a person,' in the Bcnse of 'to 
 fight for, in behalf of, a person,' so also they said &7cip nvoc 
 Xiyttv, ' to speak over, above, a person or thing,' in the sense 
 of ' to speak about a person or thing.' And, although this 
 mode of speaking is utterly foreign to our ideas, there does 
 not appear to- bo any ground in the nature of things to doubt 
 that a thing may bo represented as said or done about, con- 
 cerning, an object as well by placing it ' over' {Imip) as by 
 making it to stand 'about' it {jiepi), which is continually 
 done both in English and Greek. The only difference 
 would be that, when nepi was employed, the action of 
 speaking, for example, was referred to an object by being 
 made to occupy the relative position of ' around,' ' about' it, 
 
 'Titip. 
 
 459 
 
 while, when Imip was employed, it was regarded as standing 
 to It m the relative position of ' over,' ' above ' 
 
 J^iif"'' ?f *."'' °^'' ' ^y '■^^'°" •'''' ' «" "'^"""nt of,' ' in re- 
 Wl . ,^'^"'«'"g^hat has just been said, there may be 
 found a tolerably satisfactory solution of the case in which 
 onip has the sense of 'for,' 'because of,' 'by reason of,' and 
 on account of,' 'i„ regard to,' the meaning here being im- 
 mediately connected with that of 'concerning,' 'abou™ 
 .»h *™""*'''" " '^'^^y fro™ the notion of 'concerning.' 
 'about,' to that of | in regard to,' 'on account of,' ' becaut 
 of, by reason of:' e.g. Xen. Cyrop. vii. 1, 7, Mf,hu Imhp 
 
 JaT k^- To^'''' "^°"* *'^«™'' °' '•'^ ™g"d to them r 
 Id. Anab. 1. 7, 8, rrj, iieoSepiac . . . Mp ^, tpac ir^ eWoi- 
 pou^Ca, 'concerning, in regard to, on account of, which I 
 eongratulate you ;' Eurip. Suppl. 1130, fldpo, ,.ku oix dfipc^k, 
 dXria.u Znep, 'a burthen not light because of in regard to 
 on account of, by reason of. my sorrows;' ^sch Prom! 
 66, a,ov unkp ariua. nd.cou, 'I am sorry for, because of, on 
 account of, your afflictions,' or the rendering might be 
 concerning, and. possibly, on behalf of, your afflictions:' 
 there is seen, at least, in this example, how very near tho 
 sense of 'for, 'because of,' 'on account of,' is^o being 
 confounded with that of 'about,' 'concerning.' Such in! 
 stances go far to show that the relative position of 'over' 
 'atrr. .'"f^ff'^^ "°* °«'y the notion of 'concerning,'' 
 about, but also that of 'in regard to,' 'because of,' 'W 
 
 forTr ' *^' '^"'^ " "'"'y '''^''^^ t° the 
 
 4 a. 'Over,' 'beyond.' ^Tnip has also the signification 
 of -over, 'beyond;' and this, considered in a local re J 
 ^on. may be regarded as springing directly from the proper 
 meaning of ' over,' 'above.' For, confining the view to ihe 
 relation had by .above,' 'over,' to its opposite 'bllow' « 
 
 under,' it is easy to see that an action that goes 'abovT' or 
 
 irof'b ''"* .'""' '" *""*' ^° '""'y^-^' '* - the direc- 
 tion of above and as regards a point from below. And, to 
 
 provide for the case in which 6.ip expresses 'beyond' for 
 other directions also, as it very often does, it is only neces- 
 sary to observe that an object may reach a position 'he- 
 
460 
 
 OF THB 6BVBBAI. PUBPOSITIONS. 
 
 yond' another by passing < over' it in any direction ; and 
 then, further, that Imip^ * over,' in its secondary meaning 
 of ' beyond,' is used generally of other directions besides 
 the proper one of above. Thus, in Od. viii. 192, 6 d' Imip- 
 nraro ajj/xara ndvra, ' it (the discus) flew beyond every mark,' 
 it is plain that the discus reached a point ' beyond' the marks 
 made for previous throws by passing 'over' them. And so 
 in many compounds; as, Imep^atvetv, 'to step over,' and, 
 hence, * to pass beyond ;' e.g. Od. viii. 80, 5i>' Imip^rj Xdivov 
 oudov, ' when he passed the stone threshold,' that is, ' stepped 
 over' and 'wont beyond;' Herod, iv. 25, oudelc atpta (r^ 
 oitpta) tmepPatpei, ' no one passes over, or crosses, the moun- 
 tains,' that is, ' goes beyond them.' In such examples, th« 
 notion of 'beyond' follows upon that of 'over,' though the 
 reference may be to other directions than that of ' above' or 
 upwards. The English ' over' obtains in many compound* 
 the same secondary sense of 'beyond;' as, 'to overleap,' 
 • to overdo,' ' to overwork.' 
 
 6. 'Beyond,' 'against,' 'contrary to.' To the sense of 
 Imip juat mentioned belongs also that of ' beyond,' ' against,' 
 ' contrary to,' in such expressions as Imip alaav, ' contrary 
 to destiny,' dnkp potpav, ' against one's fate or allotment,' 
 and others. E.g. II. xx. 836, p^ xal Cmip poTpav Sopov "Aido^ 
 tlaafix^at, 'lest you enter the abode of Ilades contrary even 
 to your appointed lot.' (See Passow's Lexicon.) So like', 
 wise in some few compounds ; as, Imepfiofveiv, ' to go beyond,' 
 and, hence, 'to transgress;' thus, inepfialvetv robe vipoiKt 
 'to transgress the laws;' ImepTnjdav, 'to overleap,' and 'to 
 transgress;' thus, bntpnrjiuv ra u6/upa, 'to transgress what 
 is lawful.' Here ditip has properly the sense of 'over,' 
 'above,' and, hence, of 'beyond ;' and from this comes that 
 of 'against,' ' contrary to ;' or, rather, the meaning of 'be- 
 yond' is equivalent in certain circumstances to that of 
 'against,' 'contrary to.' 
 
 Summary of the significations of Imip. 
 
 'Ynip. 1. 'Over,' 'above.' 
 
 2. a. 'For,' 'on behalf of.' 
 6. 'For,' 'to the end that.' 
 
 'r^ip. 
 
 461 
 
 c. 'For,' 'instead of. 
 8. a. 
 b. 
 
 'Of,' 'concerning,' 'about,' Latin dc. 
 'For ' 'because of,' 'by reason of,' ' on account 
 or, 'in regard to.' 
 4. a. 'Over,' 'above,' 'beyond.' 
 
 b. 'Beyond,' 'against,' 'contrary to.' 
 
 SIGNIFICATION AND USB OF Imip WITH CASES. 
 
 I. ' Tnip with tne genitive case. 
 
 in th:?^:::::^'.,:^^:;^^,^^-;*!- -is used 
 
 the object with respcTio whTh Ip Sir^^X"! 
 occup.es tins relative position. E.g. if xv. 881-2^ Z^e 
 pira .upa mdcari, '^P<^n6po,o | ur,b, Mp r«,/v«,v xaraaicerm I 
 'as a huge wave of the wide sea will come'down otir tTe ' 
 sides walls) of a ship;' H. ^^, 279, . . . W, Jdl' foi! ^ 
 vo.roo iui raijl \ i.r, Upi^, .fcut the spear 'flyiU oCer Ms ' 
 back stood in the ground;' Soph. Andg. 117, ^dc7feL : 
 H«l^,..v, 'standing over, above, the hofse;' id. ij 1258^ 
 
 Sch-'\ef 7"' ''^n """'^ ''^ ^«*=*°' '««P' -- the 
 
 shooting over those in advance of them;' Id. iii.'^i, 29 
 
 iZ r"' ^t"""" ^''^P "''" ^'"'f^"'""' '^t-^n these ^ere 
 above those who came after,' that is, 'when they were 
 
 following; ^8ch Agam. 559, 6nkp ^aXdca^, ,„; „^„,, 
 nor<opiuo,,, 'that fly over the sea and the knd;' that is 
 •over . with respect to the sea and the land.' 
 
 2 a tor, 'ou behalf of.' Trrip with the genitive is 
 used, further, in the sense of 'for," on behalf of in 1 ! 
 variety of applications, the prepositro^halV Vope .^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 forS bv a7'v";'' '"""• °' protection t'defenTeaf! 
 forded by an object covering and shielding another bv 
 
 that an action is performed for it, or on its behalf. E.g 11 
 
462 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 i. 443-4, . . . ^oi^tf) ff Uptjv kxaroftlhju | ^i^at imhp JavaSv, 
 'to offer to Apollo a eacred hecatomb on behalf of the 
 Danai ;' Soph. (Ed. Tyr. 253, Intar^nzm reXeiv \ linip r' ifiouKou 
 TOO &eou re r^aSi re y^f, 'I enjoia it upon you to perform it 
 for both myself, and the god, and this land ;' Xen. Anab. 
 vii. 7, 21, w^ ou dtxaiwz fiot i^j^&ia^T^z 8u tmkp t&v arpaTt'wTwv 
 diiTgrouv ae, ' because I demanded it of you on behalf of the 
 soldiers,' that is, ' on the behalf . . . with respect to the 
 soldiers ;' Id. Cyrop. ii. 1, 13, ei Kuptp aup^ouXedaat « elmXv 
 !mhp ^ftwv, ' to say any thing on our behalf.' 
 
 b. ' For,' • instead of,' ' in the room of.' To this class of 
 the uses of ^nip with the genitive belongs the case in which 
 it is rendered in English by 'for,' 'instead of,' 'in the room 
 of.' E.g. Xen. Anab. vii. 4, 9, fj xai i&iXoti; Sv . , . bnkp toutou 
 Aitodavuv ; ' indeed, would you be willing to die for, in the 
 stead of, this lad ?' Id. Hell. iii. 4, 15, SMinep dv nc tou Imip 
 auTou dxoSavoopevou Trpo^upw^ {^''j'^oii], ' as if a person were to 
 be seeking eagerly for him who was going to die in bis 
 stead ;' Id. Cyrop. iii. 3, 14, inel ohv au mutng^z, ^fio XiSto Imkp 
 eou xai Imkp ^p&v, ' I will speak for you and for us,' that is, 
 ' in the place of you and us.' The genitive, here also, re- 
 tains its proper sense of 'with respect to,' and the pre- 
 position contains the notion of being 'over,' and so of 
 receiving or doing an action in the place of another, just 
 as a shield that covers a person receives the blow aimed 
 at him. 
 
 c. 'For,' 'to the end that.' 'Ynip is used with the intioi- 
 tive attended by the article in the genitive case to mark a pur- 
 pose, or the cud had in view, expressed in English by ' for,' 
 ' to the end that,' ' with the view of.' E.g. Xen. Ilieron, iv. 3, 
 dopuifopoitai 3' im rot>c xcaioupj-ouz Itnhp too pr^diva twv noitrttv 
 ^taiip l)uM(k(p d7iol}v^axett>, ' to the end that no citizen may die 
 a violent death ;' Dcmosth. Phil. 52, 20, rijudk Teieuriju (bpSti) 
 oiaau tjStj bjtip too pij nadeiv mnohz xaotwz Imo (PiXItztiou, ' seeing, 
 as he does, that the putting an end to the war has now for 
 its aim that we may not ourselves be injured by Philip,' or, 
 •that the end of the war is now made with a view to our- 
 selves not being injured by Philip.' Properly, the meaning 
 of imep roD pjj naditv aurouc xax&z Otto 0tUTatou is, ' on behalf 
 
 <] 
 
 . 
 
 ^^""^P- 463 
 
 of, for, the not being ourselves injured bv Philin ' t\.. 
 
 -.boa./ .„d l„ L.«„ iy ^. £ Vmcft 9 ,7 ™'"??'' 
 
 whm LrLTu2^lT T °'"°' "* "'•"J'' 
 
 behalf of «.eir J^ ;f n'ti'^^i"™ Lr?? °° «" 
 
 Jan.. bu. ii";z";„v.r 7z^rtm *:Jr 
 
 .bow», byoo„.ltlgi l'Lirf„':,2>«'°'«'. " """' 
 'over,' 'above ' in thZ L . *^® P^P^r sense of 
 
 •abouV'coreVni^^^lZjnTfo W^ t''^''^^" «^ 
 local relation of 'about ''tound'^ \V*" °"^'" '" '^^ 
 word 'about' obtains melplS A Zntl If ' ^"^"^' 
 mg,' ' touching.' Namciv as « ihl i • "^ 'conceru- 
 
 rd nepi „voc L.. 1^^' tn ^^'^ ^l^'^'^'^">S«bout a person.' 
 apeak' of, concISng. a ' so.: ' ZTr''''^t «-'-' '^^ 
 person.' r6 inip uJ, iiZ Z't-^r I '^'"''"'^ °^<^'- * 
 speaking of, coLrningTouflr '^^f^^S of 'the 
 
4U4 
 
 OF THE SEVEBAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 in the other. It will be admitted, however, should this 
 cxplanationTbe accepted, that the much rarer occurrence of 
 {mip in this signification compared with ittpl, and the shade, 
 at least, of the notion of ' on behalf of,' * on account of,' 
 which is seen in some of the' instances in which Imip is 
 rendered by » concerning,' ' about,' go some good way to 
 prove that this preposition was not confounded by the 
 Qrecks with rttpi even where we translate them by the 
 same terms. 
 
 e. 'For,' 'because of,' 'by reason of,' and 'on account of,' 
 'in regard to.' ^Yi:ip with the genitive has, lastly, the 
 sense of ' for,' • because of,' ' by reason of,' and that of 'on 
 account of,' ' in regard to ;' and this signification is nearly 
 related to that of 'concerning,' 'about.' E.g. Xen. Anab. 
 i. 7, 3, rffi iXeudeplaz . . . Imkp jjc 6/'«C ^T*'' fu8cupovi([w, ' on 
 account of, in regard to which, I congratulate you ;' Eurip. 
 Suppl. 1130, pdpoz fikv oox d^pi&kc diyitav unep, 'a heavy bur- 
 then because of, on account of, ray sorrows ;' Lys. 148, 41, 
 Imip dJStxtjpdriav rtpiopta, ' requital for, on account of, wrongs 
 done;' ^iisch. Sept. c. Theb. 107, Mere Ttap&ivmv Iximov 
 Xojiov douXoauvaz Zntp, 'ye behold a company of virgins sup- 
 'pliant because of, on account of, their bondage.' In such 
 examples Imip not only has obviously a sense not far re- 
 moved from that of 'concerning,' 'about,' but one that 
 seems to connect the latter with that of 'on behalf of.' 
 
 In both the last cases of l)i:ip with the genitive, this case 
 has its proper signification of ' with respect to,' and requires 
 no further explanation. 
 
 II. ' Tnip with the acextsative case. 
 
 1. 'Over,' 'above,' 'beyond.' Tnip is employed with 
 the accusative case in the sense of 'over,' ' beyond ;' that is, 
 to mark the object or limit over or bcj'ond which an action 
 or state goes or extends, whether this object or limit refers 
 to space, to time, or to measure of any kind. 
 
 a. Of space, or any object in space : e.g. II. v. 16, Tudtl- 
 dew 8' imep dtpov dptarepw ^XuSf dxwxij \ lyj^eoz, ' the point of 
 the spear passed over, beyond, the left shoulder of Tydeides.' 
 Here the preposition plainly derives the notion of ' beyond' 
 
 from that of 'over,' 'above,' by which terms it may indeed 
 be rendered; and the accusative case is used iTfu sS' 
 
 olt "l35 ""^^^' '^^l'^ «^°".'''«'' «^ Tydeides.' So 
 l^a. vu. 135, xapnaXlfiwz Crrlp obdbu moaro dcbuaror .Xr 
 
 it over he wT-2 ^ir! t't "• *''"'■■ '""' ■»■' 
 
 joars paat hi, manhood;' H. Omn iii 2 47 .7 • .J 
 above more than, a hundred and thirty talenta' 
 
 Antig. 303-4, ao^iv « t6 /^ywrfev I riymc (mho nJl^- i 
 'having art beyond expectltfon.' SoS^Z^X^' 
 above one s means,' Imlp X^o., ' beyond what is'^e'asonab e ' 
 vnkp !j//«c, ' beyond our capacitv ' Imhn r^u JIJ ' . i! ', 
 
 wl.t be,ong« to his years..%sl^eVatwtLt:::'n ^°"' 
 d. 'Jcyond,' 'against,' 'contrary to.' ^r„i„ Jth tV,« 
 accusofye, in the sense of 'beyond,' may be rerde'd al" 
 .« cer am connections, by 'against,' ' contrary to 'as ttn 
 alaa,, ' contrary to what is appointed bv fat? ^L - ^ 
 
 unkp alna., 'smce you have reproached me justly^and no^ 
 
 80 
 
466 
 
 OF THE SEVEBAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 contrary to what is right,' literally, * beyond what is ap^ 
 pointed by destiny ;' II. iii. 299, bitn6ttpot nporepoc Imhp Spxta 
 mjfojifeeavy * whichever party shall inflict injury contrary to 
 the oaths,' literally, ^ beyond the oaths.' It is plain that, 
 in such examples, the sense of 'contrary to,' * against,' is 
 equivalent to *• beyond,' modified only by the circumstances 
 in which it is used, and that the accusative, as in the pre- 
 ceding cases, has the force of 'as to,' 'as regards.' 
 
 TABLE OF THE BlGNinCATIONS AND USB Off Ulp WITH 0ABE8. 
 
 BlgnlflcAtloiu of iw(p. 
 
 I. '(hrer,* 'aboTe.' 
 
 3. a. 'Kur.'MnlKlialfof 
 
 6. * K4(r,' * to tlio «n<l that' 
 c. 'Fur/ 'iDNtuail uV 
 I. a, Mir,'*c<iDC<iriiIng/ 'almiit.* 
 b. *V(>r,' *lN-i:Hii«t u(,' *hy 
 
 nwiHon of/ * on account o^' 
 
 Mu regard to/ 
 
 4. a. *(>vcr,' 'aboTO,' *lieyond.' 
 h. * lloyiind,* * against,' ' coo* 
 
 trary to/ 
 
 GenltlTa : * with reaiMct to.' 
 
 1. 'Over/ 'above.' 
 
 2. a. <ror/'onl>ehairof.' 
 
 ft. 'For/ *lo the end that.* 
 c. * For/ ' Initcad of.* 
 
 3. a. *Qff' 'eoncernlng/ 'aboat.* 
 ft. * For/ * brcauRO of/ * by 
 
 reaaon o(* ' on aooount of/ 
 ' in regard to.* 
 
 Accuwt. : < as to/ ' aa ragarda.' 
 
 4. a. 'Over/ 'above," beyond.' 
 
 ft. 'Itcyoud/ ' contrary t(^' 
 
 ' against.' 
 
 ' TtcS has also the poetical, and more especially Epic, form 
 &ra/, like Stat for dtd, and ia the Banio with the Sanskrit upa 
 and the Latin sjib. (See Liddell and Scott's Lexicon, s. v.) 
 ^Tnai and Stai seem to have the same relation to bnd and 8td 
 that prce in Latin has to pro. Of the exact value of the 
 added t, with the change to the feminine form in Ojiau and 
 prcc, whether it be the sign of the locativus or ablative of 
 position, as in my; 'in what way?' or a demonstrative 
 ending, as in rourooi, olnool, or Imai and prcB be mere aug- 
 mented forms, as in Imeip for bnip, it is difficult to speak 
 positively. 
 
 Significations of lm6. 
 
 1. The proper signification of Imi is ' under,' ' beneath,' 
 opposed to uniif, ' above,' ' over.' This signification is seen 
 in many compounds; as, bito^dXXttv, 'to cast under;' e.g. 
 Od. X. 3.53, (mhef}&e it )ii&' CmejidUev, 'and placed stones 
 underneath ;' Imoaropewuviu, ' to strew or spread under ;' e.g. 
 Od. XX. 139, cited by Passow, ij nkv di/tvt' duioj-sv Imotnopitrtu 
 ifuit^aiv, 'she ordered couches to be spread under tb« 
 
 'rn6. 
 
 467 
 
 (See PassowriextonT And' ^°"f '^°^'''' '" -"<^*'-' 
 preposition with nZs;lg^S^i%8tr/'^r ^' *^« 
 ^^r« 'TTeuaxiC.ro r^ta, 'so the earth 1 '^^ ^^^ ^"" ^^ '"^"^ 
 their feet;' Od. xx 176 .aiJ . lo«dly resounded under 
 
 sounding comdor.' "* ^*°*''*^ *»»« ^ond- 
 
 Tiro'^ftttir^rth^^^ 
 
 Od. xix IH f - '^f ? ''^'"^""'^^'do'amion. Ei. 
 virtuous u!.dtt%atis'tnt' f "'' '''' ^^^^'^ - 
 
 Bubjoctlol unde hi':.Txii*'9?"?rr '""^^* -*° 
 be brought into subject on undeVtLto[''''TA/^^^^^^ '*« 
 • . . oippa xai Mn I L», r , Trojans;' Od. iv. 294-5. 
 
 'tbateCon not I'etlv hri' "''^ '"f""''^^'' '"'f^^'^-'l 
 (the power of) Z^'.^^I^'V^T ""^ ''^^^^4 v^nAel 
 place.) The sime sense beTongs^t^.T'r°*\- ^bis 
 
 an action. ' rZtZl'iZ"""'"'''''''' '' ^^"'^i*!""^ of 
 Btanccs orconditi:sT,^: thUTn\^:r' ^'%^™- 
 corresponding exactly to the Engli;; ' "der' ' '''^T *^' 
 pressionsas'hedid it und^r .^^ , • ^ *° ^"''b ex- 
 -., .^.;^„,,,,,,ll"^j- -^^^^^^ II. vi. 171. 
 
 under the holy conduct of th Zd "^^^^^ n T'' 1° ^^'^''^ 
 sound of the lluto pw!uv2n ^^'"' '^" ^""' *" ^''^ 
 
 or motive. ' Fnd h furthpr „ J^ i , ' "^^king a cause 
 
 the moving carseortj.r^'^'^^'"^^ 
 
 of which aVhngi Tone 'in"" ""'"*'« ^"«--« 
 / "ing IS done, and has answering to it tlio 
 
468 
 
 OF THE SEVBRAI. PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 English 'under,' 'for,' 'from,' 'by reason of:' e.g. Herod. 
 Tii. 22, &puaaov Imb ficurrtyav, ' they dug under whips,' that 
 is, ' under the impulse of whips,' ' impelled by whips.' Here 
 it is to be observed that &r6 /icunifwv may mean 'under 
 whips' in a literal sense, and that the idea of moving cause 
 is rather inferred from the nature and common office of the 
 object under which an act is done than properly inherent 
 in &r(i. For ImS has the same sense in Sirae detvbv Imb 
 pXtfdpwv i^efdavdev, 'his eyes shone terribly under his 
 eyelids,' as in Imb /Jtaarifwv dtpuaaou, 'they dug under whips.' 
 But, in the latter case, the digging under whips suggests, in 
 the circumstances, the idea of digging under the impulse 
 of whips. Xcn. Cyrop. i. 4, 15, xai rift K6pw ^Sero, oi 3uva- 
 ftivtp aqav Imb r^c "J^oi^C, 'and he was delighted with Cyrus, 
 who was not able to contain himself by reason of his ple»< 
 sure,' or ' for, from, his pleasure.' The sense is, that under 
 the iniluenco of his gratification he could not hold his peace. 
 Id. ib. vi. 1, 35, ware rbv 'Apdarcav TcoUa /ikv daxpueiv birb iCmrji, 
 ' so that Araspas shed many tears from distress,' ' under the 
 feeling of distress,' influenced by it. For the natural con- 
 nection between distress or grief and tears makes it obvious 
 at once that, when a person is said to shed tears under 
 distress, the distress is the moving cause of his tears. 
 
 d. 'By,' 'by means of.' Of the same nature very nearly 
 with the preceding is the case in which [mo, corresponding 
 to the English ' by,' * by means of,' introduces the personal 
 agent by whom an action is performed ; the person * under' 
 whom, that is, under whose active power, any thing is repre- 
 sented as occurring, being naturally regarded as the agent 
 'by' whom it is done. E.g. Herod, ix. 98, &ri xjpuxoi 
 TtpoTjYbpEue, 'he proclaimed by a herald,' or 'by the agency 
 of a herald.' If, in Herod, vii. 22, above cited, Spuaaov Imb 
 /taffTiywu, 'they dug under whips,' the whips under which 
 they dug may be regarded as the moving cause of the 
 digging, so also, in the last example given, Orrb xijpuxoi 
 nporjopeue, ' he proclaimed by (under) a herald,' the herald 
 under whom, that is, under whom considered in his proper 
 character and office, the proclamation was made, may be 
 regarded as the agent of the proclamation. In the latter 
 
 t 
 
 TTtd. 
 
 469 
 
 case, as m the former, the preposition shows merely that the 
 thing done stands to some object in the relation of 'under.' 
 and the notion of agent, just as that of the moving cause, is 
 inferred from the character and office of the object under 
 ^h,ch the action is represented as being performed, and 
 fiom Its obvious natural relation to the action. Thus, as in 
 ^^yy^ro Au^,, .he shed tears from distress,' the nature 
 ot the feeling expressed by ^^;r, is such, and such its obvious 
 natural relation to Sdxpua, that, when it is said that a person 
 shed tears under grief,' it is plain that the grief is the 
 moving cause of the tears; so, when it is said that 'a pro- 
 clamation was made under a herald,' Imb x^puxo, npa^bLe, 
 It » readily inferred, from the character and off of a 
 herald, and from his known relation to the act of proclaim- 
 ing, that the proclamation represented as made ' under' him 
 was made ' by' him, or by his agency. 
 
 8 'Under,' .near,' 'not quite,' 'hardly,' 'in part only,' 
 ;a little;' 'about,' .towards.' From the signification of 
 under y;r<5 obtains also that of coming short df, falling 
 below, a measure or standard of comparison, and so of 
 being only near to without reaching it; and this is ex- 
 pressed in English by .near,' .not%uite,' 'haVdW' 'h 
 part only, ' a little,' > about,' ' towards.'" It Is distinguished 
 from ;r«H which also conveys the idea of coming short of 
 or failing to meet a given standard of measure, by the fact 
 that while nap, marks the coming short or failure to mee 
 the s andard of measure simply and without qualification 
 ono always implies, like the Latin sub in the like use a 
 mere failure to meet, a coming just under the standard' a 
 coming short by a little. Hence it is that 0.6, like 1' is 
 translated not only by other terms involving the idea of 
 coming nearly up to a certain measure, wl^Ie failing to 
 reach i . but also by ' about," towards,' which could hafdW 
 be explained without admitting for this preposition the 
 peculiar sense here attributed to it. This meaning is seen 
 in qui a large number of compounds; as, tmoJZZ 
 wet a little. ^.„,.,,z., -to laugh a little,' 'to L^sltle^ 
 unSriuuxo,, somewhat grey,' 'greyish,' Ondpropo,, 'part^ 
 silver,' 'not quite altogether silver.' And so in iteu^ 
 
470 
 
 OF THE 8BVBRAL PBEP0SITI0N8. 
 
 witb nouns in the sense of ' near,' ' about,' ' towards :' e.g. 
 Herod, i. 51, /arextv^dTjaav di »ai ourot Imb tov vrfiv xaraxaivTa, 
 ' and these two were removed about, just before, the time 
 when the temple waa burned down ;' Id. ii. 36, of Aeiyrmot 
 Imb roue davdTouz di/tetae r«ic rptj^a^ au^eadat, ' the Egyptians 
 let their hair grow just after the death of their friends;' 
 that is, not at the very moment of their death, but at a 
 time that just falls short of this, and which may be properly 
 expressed in English by 'just after,' 'immediately after,' 
 in the same way that, in the preceding example, the ren- 
 dering was made by 'just before.' Thuc. ii. 27, cited by 
 Passow, xai Su aif&v thtpfirat ^aav Imb rbv aaafjAv, 'and 
 because they did them a service just after the time of the 
 earthquake.' It should be observed that here, as in the 
 second example given from Herodotus, (mb marks a time 
 that is a little after, while in other examples, as in the 
 former one cited from Herodotus, it denotes a time that is 
 just before, a little before, a given point. The prevailing 
 idea, in this use of 6>ro, being the coming short of a stand- 
 ard of meosuro while yet approaching very near to it, or of 
 just confing short of the standard, the failing to meet it by 
 a little, it is a matter of indifference on which side of a 
 thing the failure to meet its measure occurs ; or, with re- 
 gard to a given point of time, whether the coming short 
 of it, the failure to meet it exactly, occur on this side or that, 
 before or after. Sub in Latin agrees with inb in this pecu- 
 liar use, not only in general, but in this particular also, 
 that it means indifferently 'just before' or 'just after,' the 
 circumstances in which the preposition is used alone de- 
 termining which of the two meanings it has in any par- 
 ticular case.. 
 
 4. ' Secretly,' ' imperceptibly,' ' a little at a time,' ' little 
 by little.' Very nearly related to the proper signification 
 of Imb is that in which it convej's the idea of secrecy or con- 
 cealment, and hence of a progress in an action or motion so 
 gradual as to be scarcely discernible, expressed in English 
 by such terms as ' secretly,' ' imperceptibly,' ' a little at a 
 time,' * little by little.' This meaning oilmb is seen only in 
 some compounds, and is readily suggested by the conneo- 
 
 Tffc}. 
 
 471 
 
 'Tnb. 1 
 2. 
 
 tion there is between the being 'under' a thing and the 
 being covered and hidden from view by it. And then 
 agam, the general notion of being hidd^en from view ?s' 
 
 as to be scarcely observable, and which may, accordiLly 
 bo described as proceeding 'imperceptibly,' « a little at a 
 tZ'' .oLf '^ "m-^'. °;' -- --tiy, 'tt a liS: a a 
 Z\m^ r J"«'.Jf « V ««le/ the promment idea being 
 the hidden insensible character of the action oi; motion 
 
 chuZ^"?' r'^^"*"*'^" ^y «t«'^lth,' as of supposititiou 
 children; lmoxXi.ruu 'to steal in a sly underhanded way,' 
 W;«r«., .to send covertly,' Imane^Xd^a,, 'to fill by £- 
 b;iiule.'"^ ' '"'' "* "" *'"^'' ^2.«.,'.to drink little 
 Summary of the synificaiiona of 6jtb. 
 'Under,; ' below,' 'beneath.' 
 
 a. ' Under,' in subjection to. 
 
 b. ' Under,' marking the circumstances or condi- 
 
 tions under which any thing occurs. 
 
 c. 'Under," for,' 'from,' 'by reason of,' marking 
 
 a moving cause or motive. . 
 
 o '^•'■?y''°'"'''"g the agent, Latin aJ,»er. 
 
 3. 'Under the standard,' coming near to, but not 
 
 qui e reaching it; 'near,' 'not quite,' 'hardly' 
 only m part," a little.' 'mher,' 'just before ' 
 'just after,' « about,' ' towards ' 
 
 4. 'Secretly' or 'covertly,' 'imperceptibly' or 'in- 
 
 iSe/ ^ '' '?"'^ " ""^' ^* * *^'"''' '«"'y ""'« by 
 
 BiaNIFICATION AND USB OF &ri WITH 0A8B8. 
 
 I. ^Tnb with the genitive ease. 
 1. a 'Under ■ 'beneath,' in a local sense. ^Tnb is used 
 with the genitive case in the local sense of 'under ' 'be 
 neath the gemtive marking the object with resnLt to 
 which specficaliy another holds this relative posiZ Kg 
 I . IV 106, 3. l>d ;ror' aurb, l>:,b avip^oco ruLa,, ' having 
 Btruck It under the breast,' that is, 'unde^ Sow. ^ 
 
472 
 
 OF THE BBVKSAL PBBP06ITION8. 
 
 with respect to the hreast;' H. xvi. 647, iipu xdixeop i^i- 
 nipyjffev \ vipStv bit' iyxefdioio, 'the hrazen spear passed 
 beneath, under, the brain ;' Xen. Anab. vi. 4, 22, Pouv dk 6tp' 
 &/uiSiiz nptdfievot ii^uopTo, 'they bought an ox (that was) 
 under the yoke and sacrificed him.' Here, howevei', the- 
 sense may be 'from under the yoke.' Soph. Antig. 65, 
 alroutra rooc Imd idov6z, 'making request of those who are 
 under, beneath; the earth ;' Id. ib. 1233, bnb oTipjc loot, 
 ' within, under, beneath, the roof.' 
 
 b. 'From under.' TwA with the genitive, connected 
 with words expressing action or motion, especially with 
 verbs signifying « to rescue,' and the like, as S-frndl^etv, ' to 
 snatch away,' fiuetrdat, ipueiv, ipusa&at, 'to rescue,' 'to save,' 
 is frequently to be rendered by ' from under.' E.g. II. xxi. 66, 
 aire; dvaarijaoyrac Imb (^ofou, ' they will rise up again from 
 under the darkness ;' II. xiii. 198, cuare Su' alya Xiovre xoviov ' 
 Imo xapyrapoSovToiv \ iipndiavTe, 'as two lions having torn a 
 goat from under the sharp-toothed dogs ;' II. viii. 543, of d' 
 fcffooc pev Xuaav Lno (^uyou ISpdivraz, ' they loosed the sweat- 
 ing horses from under the yoke.' In such examples, the 
 preposition means no more than ' under,' and the genitive 
 no more than ' with respect to ;' neither of them contains^ 
 the idea of 'from.' This sense of 'from,' by which, to- 
 gether with that of ' under,' Imo is here rendered, is sug- 
 gested, in fact, by the obvious relation in which the action 
 or motion qualified by fori stands to the object marked by 
 the genitive. Thus, in the last example, the untying or 
 letting loose the horses, bito l^trfou, 'under the yoke,' does, 
 under the circumstances, that is, considering the action of 
 untying, that horses sweating from the battle-field are the 
 object of the action, and that the untying the horses has 
 reference to the yoke under which they ran in the war- 
 chariot, convey the idea of letting them loose from the 
 yoke, although Imb ^uj-ou does not by itself express this, any 
 more than &3i6 aripvoto, in the phrase Imi aripvoeo Tuju^oa;^ 
 'striking him under the breast,' conveys the sense of 'from 
 under the breast.' The same thing was seen to be true of 
 *azd; namely, that while with the genitive it signifies ' down,' 
 and nothiug more, it was upon occasion to be rendered by 
 
 .d 
 
 i 
 
 ^Tno. 
 
 478 
 
 : 
 
 •down from' and 'down upon,' according to the relations 
 
 Aum on aurou, the people are virtuous under lum ' that 
 
 rlelytuoZ Z'' '^'° ^"''^'^^ ''''^' which much'more 
 th dafiv Ts We'7T'- '"• '"' ''' *'"« ««"- t^«» does 
 respect lo'- 03 1 ti:o ./" '*' °''^""^^ "^''•""^ °^ '^^^h 
 
 useu with the genitivp pnao +/^ .i ^ .■ . " 
 
 or condition uifde whlcr„. . ' '^'^ circumstances 
 
 Herod ii 45 A^/,™! J^ ''^'*'' *^° ^^outs of the Achai:' 
 proccsion or'wir?; '"'''"^ '"^^'-^ I"™ forth in k 
 
 — ance;:;Ce:^:::;^s{5ST2"^r'^^^^'^ 
 
 paniment of, the Ll lfV\ Z'^""' ""''^ '^' ^'^'=o»- 
 492-3,.^/Vca'LZl ?T"/"*''-P''^^«'-«'' I'- >^viii. 
 
 with flaming torches 't at '"^ l>ndes from their chamber 
 
 of the lyre,' 'ac'loniTed ty"^ h^'r ™VV'' ^^"^ 
 Uesiod. Scut. Ilercul. 278 la ™ ,"T^ °^ *^« '^''^J' 
 
474 
 
 OF THE 8BTERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Jioav aud^v \ iS SacaXSv mofidrwv, . . . \ af S' Imh fop/dfytov 
 ivajov j[opi>v ifuphsura' | {vdtv d' ab&' Mpatdt viae xii/ial^oii bif 
 altioo, 'Bome sang (sent forth the voice from delicate mouths) 
 to the loud pipe, . . . others led up the charming dance to 
 the (strains of the) lyre, and hithci; and thither revelled 
 young men to the (sound of the) flute;' ^sch. Agam. 1533, 
 xaTaddiponev oii^ imb xiaudftwv rwv if otxwv, 'we will bury 
 him without the lamentations that come from his home ;' 
 Herod, i. 17, iarpmeuouro [mb aaXmYyiov, ' they marched to 
 the sound of trumpets.' (See Passow's Lex., and Thiersch. 
 Gr. Ilom. p. 445.) In such examples, the preposition has 
 properly the meaning of ' under,' taken in an accommodated 
 sense, and the genitive has its usual signification of ' with 
 respect to,' or denotes the object to which specifically some- 
 thing is said to hold the relation of Imo, ' under.' 
 
 c. 'Under,' denoting the moving cause. Tff«J with the 
 genitive is used also to express the impelling motive or 
 influence under which an action is performed, being ren- 
 dered in English by 'under,' and corresponding to the 
 Latin sub. E.g. Herod, vii. 22, dtpoaaou foo naauymv, ' they 
 dug under (the influence of) whips,' that is, 'impelled by 
 whips;' Id. ib. 5C, iSijeiro rbv arparbv 6nb pamiytov Sta^al- 
 vovra, ' he reviewed the army as it crossed under whips,' that 
 is, * driven by whips.' In such examples, the preposition, as 
 above explained, has properly the signification of ' under,' 
 and the notion of motive or impelling cause is suggested by 
 the nature and character of the object introduced by th6 
 genitive and to which Imb refers, and by its obvious relation 
 to the action qualified by bno. The genitive has its usual 
 signification, as in the preceding case. 
 
 •For,' 'from,' 'out of,' 'on account of,' 'by reason of,' 
 'of,' ' through.' To this place belongs the use of 6,to with 
 the genitive case of a number of nouns, chiefly such as 
 express various emotions and states of the mind, as joy, 
 fear, ignorance, and the like, to mark the moving cause of 
 an action, where the English employs ' for,' ' from,' ' out of,' 
 •on account of,' 'by reason of,' 'of,' 'through,' and the 
 Latin prce, prceter; thus, 67:b xapaz, 'for joy,' Cnb <pd6vou, 
 'from, of, envy,' [at' ipp^i, 'tlirough, from, passion,' 6a' 
 
 Ttto. 
 
 475 
 
 or^Stl'T^t"""?/'^' '"'""^^^' '*™«^'^. ^y reason 
 
 Kupv ?5.ro oh Solpiu^ o^aTZjT,'3oJ; t iV "^ 
 delighted witb Pvr.fa i, ^^ * '^^' ^"'^ ^^ was 
 
 uuigniea with Cyrus, who was not able to contain himself 
 by reason of his pleasure;' Id. ib iv 2 fl ,WA - -y , 
 
 ceeded sWly by reason^f the crowdVlXo^''"' 
 
 person, ^6 uuo, nda^e^u, 'to suffer at one's hands •' and so 
 6t6 tcuo; dxoheiu, ' to hear a thing from a person 'thof .1 ' 
 means of a person,' V Wof °^ l^Z ' I' ^^ 
 
 sponte, V 6/.L ahrL, Thuc iv 64 ^of ^ ''""'''^' "^ 
 
 times, also, with a ve ba no«„ as' jf L°"™f ''• ^°™^- 
 Rep. 350, .., 'an injunction of^:^taU;" "7? T'*: 
 (See Passow's Lex. s. v ) E ^ y1„ a \ " ^ ^^ ''''^• 
 
 .r«..r., 'chancedTbe'harT^Crbvt """ ''^" 
 party at homo;' Id. ib i 2 2'". „; 1/ ^ ,''" o^y^obMb 
 
 plundering they woro Tut toT V'"! '" "''"'' «^' "^ 
 Cyrop iv 6 6 LT ° *« P eces by the Cilicians;' Id. 
 
 reeled maVacttf'';S^erdV 'T'"^ '^' ''''"""' ' ^^ ^ 
 treated with frielhfp ly""'^^ ZZ '''^\:^''' '''*«'' 
 
476 
 
 OF THE BBVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 of Dariua ;' Id. vii. 72, of 3i I'uftot ohroi Imb Uepaiwv Kamta- 
 ioxtu xaiioi/Tot, ' these Syrians are by the Persians called Cap- 
 padocse ;' Soph. (Ed. Col. 741, du8pwv Imb itdvvtov xeXeua9ui^ 
 * bidden by all men ;' Id. Phil. 334, ri9vijxev^ ivdpbz oltdevb^, 
 deoit 8' uzo, ' he hath perished by the hands, not of any man, 
 but of a god.' (Sec Ellendt, Lex. Soph.) Ilcrod. ix. 98, dsri 
 xijpuxoi; rporjopeue, 'he proclaimed by a herald ;' Xen. Cj'rop. 
 ii. 1, 8, noXb yap S.v datrov ol dXij-oi Into uou rtoXXiuu Tirpaiaxd/ievoi 
 dvaXtudeir^aau ^ iizb rwv dkij-wu ol itoXXo't, ' for the few would bo 
 much sooner consumed when wounded by the many than 
 the many when wounded by the few ;* Id. ib. iii. 3, 2, o5r«»c 
 iv vo/d(^<ov xai rbv Kupou [laXkov ^deadat tj (mb itdvTtov ri/^, 
 ' thinking that so Cyrus also would be more gratified with 
 the honor bestowed by all ;' Id. de Venat. vi. 23, l><p' aOrdiv 
 di/affvjffouae rbv Xayw, 'they will of themselves start the 
 hare ;' Id. Hell. ii. 3, 6, of 8k Sdptot TtoXeopxou/iepoe Imb Auadu- 
 8pou, ' the Samians besieged by Lysander.' 
 
 lu such examples, the preposition l>7[6, as has been shown 
 above, marks the action or state which it qualifies as stand- 
 ing figuratively in the relation of 'under' with respect to 
 the object introduced by the genitive, and the notion of the 
 agent, or that the object in the genitive case is that by 
 whom the action referred to it is performed, is inferred from 
 the character of the object and from its obvious and natural 
 relation to the action. When it is said, Xen. Anab. i. 1, 10, 
 cited above, that Aristippus 'was hard pressed by the 
 opposite faction at home,' iruy^aue mel^bfievoi [mb rwu oixot 
 duTcaTaacwTiov, all that is actually expressed is, that 'ho was 
 hard pressed under the opposite faction;' but the act of 
 pressing hard upon, or bringing into straits, being placed 
 by [i-6 in the relation of ' under' to the opposite faction, Imb 
 Twv di/TtaraauaTwv ocxoi mel^opefoz, and the often violent 
 hostility between the opposite political factions in Qreek 
 communities being such as to make the act of bringing the 
 one into straits by the other a thing natural and of common 
 occurrence, it is at once inferred that the political faction 
 under which the other is represented as being put to straits 
 is the agent by whom this efi'ect of political animosity is 
 produced. 
 
 Tm 
 
 477 
 
 If the preceding cases of the use of &k6 be considered, it 
 will bo seen that this preposition, besides marking with the 
 genitive the object with respect to which any thing occupies 
 the local relation of ' under,' denotes, also, in its meta- 
 phorical sense of ' under,' the circumstances and conditions, 
 and, further, the impelling motive or influence, the cause, 
 ground, or reason, under or by which an action is performed 
 or an effect produced ; and that in all these cases alike, the 
 indication of circumstances, condition, motive, ground, 
 cause, is made by merely placing the action of which the 
 circumstances, condition, &c. are described in the relation 
 of ' under' with respect to the object which is to be under- 
 stood as constituting the condition, circumstances, motive, 
 &c. under which it is performed. That, when it is said, 
 dipuoaov tmb (uwurtov, 'they dug under whips,' the digging 
 is represented as occurring under the influence of whips by 
 simply placing it in the relation of 'under' with reference 
 to whips; and that, when it is said, rd rei^' xaTiaxaatTov l>n' 
 auXrjTpiSwv, ' they razed the walls to (under) the sound of 
 flutes,' the razing the walls is represented as occurring 
 under the accompaniment of music by merely placing it in 
 the relation of 'under' with respect to the muwic. °And, 
 again, that when bno with the genitive is used to mark the 
 agent by whom the action io performed, it does tliis by 
 placing the thing effected in the relation of 'under' with 
 respect to a person. Thus, when it is said, Imb nwc dni^ave, 
 'he died by a person's hands,' the reference of the death 
 suffered to the agent mdi; is made by placing it in the 
 relation of 'under' with respect to this person; 'he died 
 under a person.' And if this be so, then it is true that 
 when an action or eflect is placed by the preposition l,tr6 and 
 the genitive case in the relation of ' under' with respect to 
 any object, the precise character of this relation, whether it 
 shall be one of merely local relative position, or, in a more 
 general way, of the circumstances under which the action 
 occurs, or of an influential motive, or of the effective agent, 
 will depend upon the nature of the object introduced by the 
 genitive and referred to by Ojid, and upon the obvious cor- 
 respondence of tho character of the action or effect. In 
 
478 
 
 OF THE BEVBBAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 each case, the mind of the hearer will assign to the noun 
 introduced by the genitive and referred to by imb the o£Bce 
 which is most appropriate under the circumstances. Thus, 
 when it is said of a fountain, Horn. Od. iz. 140-1, that 'it 
 flows (from) under a cave,' ^iet iyiabv Z8wp, \ xpi^vtj ^b 
 oTtuouZj the very nature of the object to which the flowing 
 of the fountain is referred as being 'under' it suggests a 
 merely local relation ; when it is said of the men laboring 
 on the canal at Mount Athos that 'they dug under whips,' 
 Apuaaov Imb /jtcurrtj-wv, the most obvious and natural office 
 to attribute to the whips, considering the circumstances 
 and the Persian treatment of soldiers, is that of compelling 
 to dig, so that the sense will be, 'they dug under the com- 
 pulsion of whips ;' and when it is said of any one that ' he 
 died under a person,'' 6;r(i Ttvo; Aitidave, the most natural 
 character to assign to rtvbz is that of the efi'ective agent 
 by whom death is procured, it being most appropriate, when 
 the death of any one is painted to the mind, and referred 
 to a person of active powers, and otherwise suited in his 
 character and dispositions, as being in the relation of 
 'under' with respect to him, to attribute to such person the 
 action or efibrt by which death is procured ; that is, to re- 
 gard him as the effective agent. 
 
 II. ' Ynb with the dative. 
 
 1. ' Under,' ' beneath,' in a local sense. 'Yrt6 is used with 
 the dative case iu tlie sense of 'under,' 'beneath,' marking 
 a merely local relation : e.g. II. ii. 784, &; &pa zwv Imb noaal 
 ftij-a «Tr£va;f/^ero jrata, 'so the earth loud resounded under 
 their feet;' 11. ii. 300-7, ipdopev d^uvdrotat TsXrjiaaaz kxarbp^az 
 I xa).fj imb rcXuTuviaTip, ' we offered to the immortal gods 
 perfect hecatombs beneath a beautiful plane-tree ;' Herod, 
 vi. 105, topoaavTo oko tj Axponoh llavbz ipbv, ' they built a 
 temple to I'an under, that is, at the foot of, the citadel;' 
 jdSscli. Agani. 824, iaovnep ourof l^v iiz' ^lUtp, ' so long as he 
 was under (the walls of) Ilium;' Id. Eumen. 955, llaXkAhoz 
 d' u-ii nnpoiz ovroc dt^ertu irar^p, *our father (Jove) has 
 respect to [lersons who are under the protection of Pallas,' 
 literally, ' under the wings of Pallas ;' Id. Pers. 186, dppaatv 
 
 'Ind. 
 
 479 
 
 4/0 
 
 Col. 671-3. Ip^a :/"„ ,^,o°^ *'''"""*«" Soi''j- <Ed. 
 
 Of ':2 -rt d^ zt:i:sir -^-^-^«-on 
 
 it marks that for which as ite finriK-"^ '°'^"'°^' ""™«'y. 
 formed, or a state or c^Ht on ext^'C for"?? ^' ■''- 
 i« done. I„ this sense the dativT^^ ^^'""^ '* '« °' 
 
 M 'under,' just as it foUowst "1^7,"'*^'^ '"'"'" 
 way that it attends „..«., • ' ^ ' ""*^ '" ^^^ ««me 
 
 adjectives as ,VriuT'/""°o-7'''^'' ''"'^ "P°° «"ch 
 That is, as the did ve"!'/^'''''^^'^' ^ «"-'5^. 'the same.' 
 
 Mike,' l «^..C 'thrsVm;Tsh:tThat 7' ',?^"^''' ^''"-' 
 designates is to be re^nr 1„-? ^°V * *''® °^J®^* ^'^ic^ it 
 equality, likenl or ! ,t tt Tn l^'T '^ *'^« ^'^'^^'^ "f 
 it, so it may be used with 2/^ 1^"^ "° ''^^''' ''^^'^^ ^ 
 object which it marksTs in Tu u *° '"'^'"^*^ t^'«t the 
 and ' upon' i„ w"ieh 7^:^^''' '^ *?' ^^'^*'°»« "f ' under' 
 dative Ly be s^i'f to^tl S 1", 'f f « '^^' ^^^ 
 'under.' as it does on i.i, 'Von,' b^vC 'jl"?- '^'' 
 Bignihcation of the preposition T» • 1 inherent 
 
 exclude the concurrfnt'h fluen;e of 17 ""*' '' '''''''' 
 ^o. Thus in lar. /?„ 'J ° , "*=® of the terms qualified by 
 
 contained in bn6, it may nronorlv 1^ , '^"'^ °^ ' ""^er' 
 
 united influenced ?r/Xi^°.TV° '"""""P''" "'^ 
 is to be preferred. ' ^"*^ '° '"ost cases this 
 
 2. 'Under, 'in a metaphorical sense 'r,/ •.^..^. , 
 18 used in the sense of 'under ' unZ;* f '^^ *^' ^'^^'^^ 
 and, when so employed nl ""'^*'"*°°d metaphorically, 
 Thus: ''"P'oyed, presents a variety of meaning! 
 
 .-% ^^^0- ?:;- i;fe -t;^ 
 
480 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 8k }moz ii:' auryi, ' the people ^|»d been subjected under him,' 
 that is, 'under his power or sway;' Od. vii. 68, 8aaai 'wv yi 
 pjvalxsz Im' dvdfidaiv ohov t][ouaiu, * of all the women that now 
 at least occupy a home under (subjection to) men ;' Herod, 
 vii. 11, tva T^ rdSe ndvra Imb "EiXijai, ij ixetva ndyra [mb flipirgae 
 yivtftat, 'thiit cither every thing hero may be under the 
 Qreekp, or every thing there under the Persians ;' Id. vii. 
 157, iv wtu dk ij^iov izaaav r^v 'ElXdda bn^ iwuTtfi noe^aaad-at, 
 'having it in mind to bring all Hellas under bis power;' 
 Xen. Aiiab. vii. 2, 2, ei bizb AaoteSatfioviotz yivono, ' if it should 
 come to be under the sway of the Lacedaemonians.' Here 
 the preposition l>n6 has the same meaning as in the pre- 
 ceding case, with the difference only of its being used 
 metaphorically; and the idea of subjection to authority or 
 dominion, as expressed by &r<i, ' under,' is suggested by the 
 character and relations of the noun introduced by the dative 
 and by the action qualified. And the dative case, yet more 
 clearly, pcrliai)8, than where the mere local relation of 
 'under' is denoted, follows in its proper sense upon the 
 notion of subjectiou conveyed by Imd, aided, however, in 
 some cases by the terms qualified by the preposition. Thus, 
 in diS/t^To 8k Xabz Im' aurip, the dative edtrfp may be said to 
 depend upon the combined meaning of 8i8/ajTo bit/), ' had 
 been brought into subjection under;' while, in the last 
 example given, the dative iwuTip follows chiefly, if not 
 wholly, upon Onb itself. 
 
 b. ' Under,' ' to,' marking the circumstances or conditions 
 under which an event occurs or an action is performed: e.g. 
 II. vi. 171, aurap b ^ Auxirjv8z dewu bit' dfiufvavt Jto/in^, 'he 
 went to Lycia under the holy conduct of the gods ;' Ilcsiod. 
 Scut. II., 283, seqq., rot ye pkv au nail^ovTei: im' dpj^j^Dfi^ xai 
 dot8^, I . . . W't' auXrffjpt 8' exaaroz \ Ttpba9' Ixiov, ' some sport- 
 ing to (under) the dance and song, . . . they advanced each 
 to the music of the flute-player;' that is, 'they sported in 
 measured steps to the movement of the dance and song, or 
 under llieir guidance, and advanced each to (under) the 
 accompaniment of the flute.' ^sch. Eumen. 405, ^u/upipu 
 aioiffmviiv unb aripsi, ' it is of advantage to be temperate in 
 grief,' that is, 'under circumstances of grief.' In such 
 
 'rnb. 
 
 481 
 
 • .l.n»M or condition. mi^M^^T^J'^""'"'- 
 
 the phrase is to h.. I '?' '"«^''* '^^ ««"«« i» which 
 
 undrr\riren etr^^Zct^fte*'^ ^^"^^!,"5 '' '^^^ 
 with these for its condfnnn ^ ""^ """^ '^*»''®' o"- 
 
 difference betweeVl Z-n^^ 07^"'' '"' '"^ ''' '""^ 
 -W/..^, .to sport under rbeauStlnr^T''^^"'^' 
 
 s^^^^'^djsiii^r ^"'^-^^^^^ lit 
 
 ^^^'^^oailr^^^^^ ^.^«-- of its 
 
 8ame in both examuler T Ll k T' " P''''''"^'^^ *he 
 
 -seeaelose rZ^JS^Z^:^:itr 
 here employed, and that mentioned in thl nrl/l ' ^' 
 
 graph. The dative here occurrinrha hi ^'"""'''"5 P'''™- 
 that has been given in the or^ -se TomS "f "" 
 ever, with this use of £^6 with the 2? .f°™P'\™' ^^o^- 
 with the genitive in thTJrll ! '^ employment 
 
 by the rendering in E^gir "' " '" ""' '' '"'^'-^^'^ 
 
 ea^s^^ ;::r:f ^ ;:^;-- ^2:''^- ----^ 
 
 Eff II xi 191 A}]' 7^, 7/° ^^">ch any thing is due. 
 
 th^ t!;^;^i:^; -™^ tlitr If ^- ^"^ -- 
 
 in fear by reason of the Argives ' herd f ?'' "" 7'^' 
 under the Argives;' II. xv. 63I7, ' t "£■ T™ • f ?'' 
 
 spoaka.;y'J!ightered 1^ ^XjlleX'' if ^7^ "I ')": 
 
 A,o..,i. .0. .iMj^^jSii C": s'sTr 
 
 Ampoz8 dufjp Imb 8opi xaivsr,u 'man Jo d • ' ^ * 
 
482 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 * tbo heavens blazing with stars ;' Id. ib. 808, itinafx$v cffu 
 YcT Im' dU^Xwv f6vift, ' the earth hath drunken blood from 
 their mutual slaughter,' properly, ' under their slaughter of 
 each other;' Soph. (Ed. Tjr. 202, t6v . . . <b Zed ndrtp \ !mb 
 aip f&ioov xepauvift, 'him, O father Jupiter, do thou destroy 
 with thy thunderbolt.' 
 
 The preposition lm6 hero properly signifies < under,' taken 
 in a metaphorical sense; and the idea of moving cause, 
 means, or agent, which, in conjunction with the noun it con- 
 veys, is referable to the character of the object introduced 
 by the dative, and to its suitableness to the effect referred 
 to it. What is represented as standing in the relation of 
 'under' with respect to an object, may be considered as 
 subject to whatever action or influence is appropriate to it 
 in tlie circumstances. When the Achivi are said to be in 
 fear ' under Hector,' the idea suggested is that their fear was 
 caused by Hector, or that they were in fear as being the sub- 
 jects of whatever action or influence is naturally attributable 
 to Hector in the circumstances. The scene is a battle-field ; 
 and Hector, as a man-slaying warrior and victorious over 
 his foes, aided too by Jupiter, was fitted to inspire fear. So 
 that, when the Achivi are represented as being afraid ' under 
 Hector,' the most obvious sense is that they were made 
 afraid by the prowess of Hector, or were fiiglitoiied by 
 Hector. In the same way we say in English, ' he got relief 
 under the surgeon,' meaning * by the skill of the surgeon.' 
 
 III. * Y7t6 with the accusative. 
 
 1. 'Under,' 'beneath.' TnS in the local sense of ' under,' 
 'beneath,' is used with the accusative case both with and 
 without motion preceding. 
 
 a. 'Under,' 'beneath,' without motion: e.g. H. ii. 603, o? 
 i' i][ov ^Apxadiijv, Imb KuUijvtjz opoz alnu, ' they who occupied 
 Arcadia under the steep mountain of 'Kyllene ;' Od. ii. 181, 
 opvt9e; Si re noUoi bit' aufo^'NeXioeo | fonwa', ' and many birds 
 too go to and fro beneath the rays of the sun.' Here there 
 is motion, it is true, but such that it has not the accusative 
 as the object reached; so that this example need not be 
 considered as thereby excluded from the present class ; XL 
 
 Tno. 
 
 483 
 
 «. 'iL^htitbeit's ^:v-" r ^' ' '"''- 
 
 the east and thesun;' Od xx g.g o^J '""^^/'^'^V^ ""'^^ 
 grove of far-shootin^ApdLT'Herf^'; Ztbr^f"'' 
 , the.^ ZZl7lr "''^^rj^^ m 'for neither a"; 
 
 olTm ?ZC!''' '.'^"' 'r^' ^" «^««p undt the cav ; 
 
 883, «5 !i>nlTe^^Z!rl°''^^' ""f^"- ^^e yoke;' II. xviii 
 after you;' oJ^ W wte TV -'''" ^° ^°'''**^ *^« ^^^^^^ 
 181 d;;^^ W. came under (the walls of) Troy -TJ 
 
 that is, 'at the foot:fit:tiT'rrptr55ot^f ^' 
 
 brought unde the vok.t''"''' \"'"' '^'^''^'""^ ''^'«'- '^e 
 Anab^ i. 10, 14 1 £,'1°"? !^''' '°^« *''° rein;' Xen. 
 
 ^t^i^^^^^-^' but posting 
 
 considered arhav^^. .V '^'^^' *^° accusative may be 
 
 although, wrenrie^^^^^^^^^ ^^l '^ -^-^«^' 
 
 mark its limit or the ol? f •!/ "''" " ^'"'^^ °^ ""otion to 
 
484 
 
 OF TBE SEVERAL FnEPOBITIONS. 
 
 2. ' Under' in a metaphorical sense. ' Titb is also used 
 with the accusative case in the sense of 'under,' taken 
 metaphorically; and this in a variety of applications, in 
 some of which it does not admit of being rendered in Eng> 
 lish by ' under,' but requires to be expressed by some other 
 term. 
 
 a. 'Under,' in the sense of 'under the dominion or 
 power of.' E.g. Xen. Hell. v. 2, 17, el dk Im' ixeivoui; laovrat, 
 'if they shall be under them,' that is, 'under their domi- 
 nion ;' Id. Cyrop. i. 5, 3, dtcarifjotu npbz roue If' iaurdv nduraff 
 'he sent to all who were under him,' that is, 'under hia 
 sway.' Id. ib. vi. 2, 11, Iv9a »ai w>v h aiilXarjoz r&v Imh 
 fiaatiia ^apfidfuov, ' where even now is the place of gathering 
 of the barbarians who are under the king,' that is, ' undei 
 his dominion ;' Soph. Electr. 1081, Zv^ M"' *o^^i>^^p9^v • • • 
 I . . . rwv ij[dpwu iaov \ wv Imb x^'P"' vcdtiz, ' may you live as 
 much above your enemies as you are now dwelling under 
 their power.' In this last example, however, some question 
 the reading. (See EUendt, Lex. Soph. s. v.) In this significa- 
 tion, 1)7(6 is more used with the dative, but occurs also with 
 the genitive. When it is used with the accusative, the case 
 has the meaning of 'as to,' 'as regards;' as in the first 
 example above given, ei ii 6n' ixeivouz laovrat, ' if they shall 
 be under, in subjection .... as regards them ;' and the 
 difference between the use of the accusative and that of the 
 dative or genitive with bno, when it has this meaning of 
 subjection under, is readily made, so far as the Qreek is 
 concerned, by referring to the appropriate relations ex- 
 pressed by these cases severally. The English makes no 
 corresponding distinction, and renders Imi with all three 
 cases by the same term. 
 
 6. ' Under,' in the sense of ' before.' Nearly related to 
 the preceding use of lm6 with the accusative is that in which 
 it is employed to represent the relative position of a person 
 brought ' before' a tribunal, that is, ' under its cognizance.' 
 E.g. Ilcrod. vi. 72, Ifuye Ix Sitdpvrjz (mb dtKoavjpeov 6iraj[9elc, 
 'having been brought before the court, he fled from Sparta;' 
 Id. ix. 93, i)KaYaj6vnz jav imb dtxaarrjpiov xarixptvav, ' thay 
 brought him before a court and condemned him.' T^J, 
 
 'rn6. 
 
 485 
 
 b"t it is, perhaps, better tr^TLT.''' ^'" ^^'^^^^ 
 character as having a .Z • • • , ''""'^ '" "» obvious 
 
 dominion, and ThatVecrlVn'^^r' '^ ^'"^^ »•-« 
 a- subjects are brougL Zer th« i . ""'^'' *''"' J"^* 
 So understood, both the nl ^*- "**'°"*^ °^ **>« king, 
 have the same intorpretationT-*'°". ""'^ '^'^ '^'^'^^'^'^-^ 
 
 c- 'Under,' with tSa of K-° '^^ '^''"'^'^S case, 
 tection, or shelter or ^r^^ is'em rV "f "• ^ ''°^«^' P^^ 
 tive, in a M-ay very like tha«S-?f •'"'''' *^« '»«''"«»- 
 paragraphs, to' expC thl Lfo ' '^^ ," ''? P""'^'"^' 
 
 cover, p™tectio„,o^helterof't" bit iT ""'" ''^ 
 far as ,t is peculiar, being inferred tnr^^^ °''"°'"«' «° 
 cumstances, and bein^ snn !r " *^® attending cir- 
 other terms boskles 'u^dr T.u"'*^^'^ ''^'^^^^^ V 
 
 hind, under cover ^;h7satT:,'''Vr«««'« ^im be- 
 paasage, chapter 9, the' terms bTwh'hthf" "^ ^'""^'•"^ 
 of concealment is described are ^2? - . """^ P°«^^'«n 
 "^V-o., ' I wiil.place you bebfnd Z ^'^/^^^"^^ »^pr^^ 
 plain that, in chapter 12 S ^'" '^°°'"'' ""^^^S t 
 
 ' under' the door.C • u^dt' tl ""' "''*" '''''' P°«'««« 
 the circumstance , namely 1 oJ f'"? accommodated to 
 
 concealmenV such as woild be 1^""^ '' ^°'"" "^ ' "°^''" 
 hind a door. So Xen. Zb iv 7T ' '^ '"'"'"'^ ^«- 
 
 under (shelter of^) theTeef fcr f '"■ ''''' '''''' '"^^•'■ed 
 eame chapter, the^ame posrUo,! ofT."*^ '"°"-' ^"§6ofthe 
 the terms di.^' ^',, 'ZZZ\f ?' ""'^ '' ^'''"^^^ ^7 
 trees between th p7ny72n: T'' ''"'' '«' ^''"^ *he 
 they were exposed S kr"! "f *^° danger to which 
 height above, or so tZhl 1 '^°"^\™"«d down from a 
 in the example from lie od™f" ""''' ^'^"'^ '^^ *■•«««. As, 
 tioni^qulred^tha^^J^ndaul J 'r''"*'°" ^^^ ^hserva- 
 BO here the sheUer ^ougit btTh^ '^^^ 
 rolled down from the £hteUolT"n '? *'^ '''''''' 
 Btandiug -behind,' not mereW Zj^''^'^ °"'^ ^' ^'''^ ^y 
 
 «-fore, .. wiih therLi:et;;i:-:„/jf|. 
 
486 
 
 OF THE BEVEBAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 'under the cover, shelter, or protection of,' the circum- 
 stances justify the rendering it by ' behind.' Herod, ix. 
 96, Imb TOUTOV fikv 3ij arparhv rbv ifiouXtuoavTO xara<puy6vTtz 
 X. r. h, 'taking refuge under the protection of this army.' 
 
 d. ' Under,' referring to the circumstances or conditions 
 under whicii any thing is done, and hence to its moving 
 cause. E.g. Ilerod. ii. 142, xal oiSiv r&v xar' Aij-imTou Imb 
 xdura irepotwdfjuat, ' and that nothing in Egypt was altered 
 under these circumstances,' that is, under the condition of 
 things just before described, the sun rising in the west and 
 setting in the east, &c. To render £mb raura, in this place, 
 by ' during these occurrences,' although, perhaps, in some 
 sort allowable, is objectionable as not giving so distinct a 
 reference to the proper sense of 6:16 as is both desirable 
 and practicable. Here would seem to belong the expres- 
 sion 7:dv&' Imb (ajvidfibv, 'in all the period of my wrath,' 
 occurring II. xvi. 202, and cited by Passow among other 
 passages as an example of Imb in the sense of ' during,' 
 'throughout.' It may fairly be questioned whether l>nb 
 has this sense in any one of the instances cited in proof; 
 and, if really present when Imb is employed with the accusa- 
 tive, it is due to the accusative case, and not to the prepo- 
 sition. Here, at least, itdvd' imb p^vt^iibv may better be 
 understood as describing the whole period of Achilleus' 
 wrath as the condition of things under which the Myrmi- 
 dons uttered threats against the Trojans ; and, accordingly, 
 the sense is more accurately rendered by 'in the whole 
 period of my wrath,' that is, ' under the condition of things 
 belonging to the whole period of my wrath.' 
 
 ' Under,' ' to.' To this place belong also the examples in 
 which bnb is employed with the accusative, as it is also 
 with the genitive and dative cases, to denote that under 
 the direction, guidance, or influence of which an action is 
 performed ; as where dancing is conducted under or to the 
 sound of music. In this case bnb is rendered in English 
 by 'to.' The Greek language used icpbz also with the 
 accusative in the same sense, and the Latin ad. E.g. Xen. 
 Symp. vi. 3, 1\ ohv ^ouXea&t . . . imb rbv abXbv bfuv dtaXiyat- 
 ficu; 'would you, indeed, therefore, have me to converse 
 
 'rnb. 
 
 487 
 
 with you to the sound of the flute V Th« « 
 'under the sound or leadin/of i I ^'''P" '^°«« "» 
 crates talks of reguUt 2 "f ,r ^"*''' ^^ ^^^'^ 80- 
 
 was regulated byU^ " discourse, just as the dance 
 
 '^^ i-edC;rtt^ruX';;' n' f ^™°^^ *° «-• 
 
 pr condition of time TderThU" V^' circumstances 
 
 t is to be rendered in Eugh'h't Mn^nd """' "'"^ 
 'under cover of,' bein^ in Z i .! ' ^ sometimes by 
 nature precisely' witTtVtel^^^^^^ °^ ? '"''' 
 
 aidered above under paragraph ' L Tt'T^ '' ''"'■ 
 
 next night,' that is, ' iinde7thT.^^^ J f'^'^'"'^> 'in the 
 'under the favoring citl. '^ °^ ^'^^ °«^* "'ght.' or 
 night;' Herod. L si oTlT" '^''''' '^ *'" ^^^* 
 d.oarm^, 'they rlolvTdTo Z^'^'' ^'^'^'« ""^ ^/"-'^C 
 half of the men' Zl If '^"^ '" '^''' "'S^the 
 nigbt,' 'under thelvori^frdf' '""''^ "''''' °^ *»"- 
 tbiB night.' It is prober to^reTar^^^^^^^^^ T'"'""^*^ '' 
 cases, Passow and others cm,^i * ! ' '" ^^^^^ """^ "ke 
 wards,- 'about,' ' nean' Bra^Itho t ^/'S^'fy-g 'to- 
 this sense, as w'aa shown above wJ^^f 'r' '' "'^^^''^^ «^ 
 fieations of this propositi^, ; ^^ "n ^^^^^^^^ ""l "" «'^"^- 
 as consistent here with the facts of fh! -^ ''^ '""^""^'^ 
 
 the latter example, it is clear tll^T"'"'''''- '^^^'' ^^ 
 reference is had in MrCZlr' ""''''' *" ''^^'^ 
 night, under the favorin/LeTnfTT """' '""'^^ '" ^^e 
 fore, under the very condltion-^K ! ?'!''"'''' *^^* "' t^^^re- 
 as above interpretfdrrildTn t^ 1 15 t '^- ^"f^ 
 r^v >^oxra rauryjv the meaning of ' near ' 'tl . ? ^"'^ *° ^^ 
 this night,' would be to alter Ih.?' ""*' o*" 'towards 
 historian. And so ikL r b ,tT"'" ^^^^" ''^ *»>« 
 circumstances would seem tn 1 *'^!/°™«'- sample, the 
 ti«us from Sardis to whkhlfr ''^* '^« ^'^^^ ^^ His- 
 refers, was made ' undir coveTof " '^^^^ i^^^»ouaa. ^„a 
 scarcely convey the histoZ'- ^ "'^ ^ ""'* *''"* '' ^""'^ 
 away towards.Lar, aCrtVe nT^^gVt" ''' *'" '^« ^ 
 
 '-^^Sr:^^-<^-;the«meo. 
 
 "ove, wiien the significations 
 
488 
 
 Of THK SETKBAL':PRBP08ITI0I(S. 
 
 of this preposition were considered apart, to ha^ the 
 meaning of *^under' with the idea of falling belowy- Mr 
 coming short of, a given point or measnre, while yetHhero 
 is 'a near approach to it ; that is, of jnst failing to reach it ; 
 and in this sens^jj; was fonnd to correspond to sncl) terms 
 in English as < near,' ' not qnite,' * just before,' 'just'after,' 
 *abont^' ' towards, and the like. It was further seen that, 
 • the notion conveyed by lm6 being that of just coming short 
 of a given point or standard of measure, it was a matter of 
 indifference whether the failure to come up to the standard 
 fixed occurred on this side or that, before or after. That, 
 consequently, it might mean either 'just before.' or 'just 
 after' a point of time, as well as ' near,' < about,' ' towards,' 
 it. In this meaning lm6 is employed with the accusative 
 case. E.g. Herod, i. 51, fttvextv^rjaav dk xai ouroi Imb rhv 
 v^v xaraxaivra, 'these too were removed just before the 
 time that the temple was burned down ;' Id. ii. 86, of Alyunrtot 
 tmh roue ^avdrouz dvietot rcic ^P^X"^ au^etr&at, ' the Egyptians 
 let their hair grow long JQSt after the time of the death (of 
 their friends).' This example might, indeed, be placed in 
 a difierent class, above considered, and Imb roue ^avdrouz be 
 understood to mean ' under the drcumstances of the death 
 of their*friends,' or 'on occasion of the death of their 
 fnenSs;' but the sense* ^ven seems the more probable. 
 Assuming this to be the meaning, the present example 
 furnishes an instance of lm6 marking an action as done 
 'just aft^r' a given point of time, while the former one, on the 
 other bland, furnishes an instance of its marking an action as 
 done 'just before' a given point of time. The allowing the 
 hair to grow as a sign of giief would naturally be placed 
 '-immediately after' the' death of a friend ; and the removal 
 of offerings from a temple that was burned down would 
 necessarily be made, if at all, and if in connection with the 
 burning, 'just before' the time of that event. The only 
 other possible interpretation of Imb rbv vijbv xaraxaivra 
 would be to make it express, as was mentioned to be pos- 
 sibly true of Imb roue Oavdrou^, the circumstances or condi- 
 tions under which an action is performed ; so that it would 
 be rendered, 'these too were removed under the ciroum- 
 
 .»'. 
 
 'rz6. 
 
 489 
 
 accusative might exoress Jh! M ' i '° ^^ ^'^^ *^« 
 i under which an ac2 n.. <"~"°'8tan<,M or conditions 
 
 the ci«umlrcerXrdr;hV'e:rtr^'^' '""^^^ 
 occasion of the earthquake 'Xe^ earthquake/ or -upon 
 
 M^^ rip. xardX... roo X^ I'^ZZ'- "'. I' '' '^' 
 
 ayjourn abroad just afte'r the cloteTft^C;'- ^"^ 
 place may perhaps, be properly referred Il.^U mill 
 
 ' Who bade me conduct the Trojans to E -f ^*'* ''^'^•'' 
 of this disastrous night ' ^ ^* *'*^ °" *^« «^« 
 
 met with, in whth i't^lS^ti* *'*7'''' occasionally 
 measure,'^rather,^ otwT^t^at^ *'' "".^ °'''°^ 
 not quite reaching a celin ^easJre eT 'pT. *« ^''* ""' 
 
 a measure straSg^ ;• Id. Ph«dr 2^2 T'2' ^I' ^^w '^'' " '" 
 •foolish, and in a measure impiou!'."Tristonh v' " '"'''' 
 raHra xau8cbu Imb rt mxobv ^^^s! ' .''^^^- V««P- 1290, 
 iim a very littrrb t wL ^' T' '"""« *^'«' I-flattered 
 above anL^r SerentaV'Th: ,7 ", ''' *''^ P'''"^' *^« 
 « would be 'not q^ omLLt ' ' W "3'"r V''' 
 Bomething,' for which it irnl ^ ^^''' ^*'' *'>'^°» 
 approximSeexprest-tjUVver'^ '"^ ^""^^'^T *^« ' 
 
 The mgnMcation of the aocnmtive h.m. ti,. 
 the above example, n.mel/tbat „f 'I^*, '. "' '" "" 
 •na U. i„.e,preta'ti„^ being'^'l "blio H'b^nT,""-' 
 
 ^. .eawo, .he .z::^'."'^:^'^:^^- 
 
490 OF THE BEVERAL PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 TAULK OF THE EIONIFICATIOMB AND USE OF iirf WITII OASES. 
 
 'ii<:. 
 
 Signlflcatluni of vn6. 
 
 UeDlUve: *wlth reapect 
 to.* 
 
 Datlfa: 'for/ 
 
 Accusative: <a« to,**H 
 regarda/ 
 
 1. Locally : * iiikIit,' ' 1h>- 
 
 1.a.'lTiiili!r,'*boncatli.' 
 
 1.* Under/* at the r>joi 
 
 l.«Undor/ 'beneath/ 
 
 law,**bi'uunlli/ 
 
 6. * From under/ 
 
 ot* 
 
 ■at the foot of/ 
 
 2.Hi!lJipliurirBlly: 'ud- 
 il.-r.* 
 a. 'L'lKlfr,' *{o luU- 
 
 
 
 
 2.a.'U»dcr/MaaaliJao> 
 
 2.a.*Undor/'tnHuUec- 
 
 3.a.*Un4]er/'lnBuVJeo- 
 
 JiTlinli tu.* 
 
 tluD !()/ 
 
 tluu to/ 
 
 tli.n to/ 
 b.* Under/ 'before/ 
 c. * Under cotit, shel- 
 ter, uV 
 
 6.*TIni|.T.' M*i/ Mil,' 
 
 6. 'Under/ 'to/ Mn/ 
 
 ft.'Undnr/ *to;» clr- 
 
 •Under cover of/ 
 
 * Willi;' liiaiMi- 
 
 ' with ;' vlrnitii- 
 
 cimiHtttnou or 
 
 Mn;' of time. 
 
 HtmiL-tn ur ciiudi- 
 
 HlHncus or condi- 
 
 ciiuditlun. 
 
 d. 'Under/ *t.i/ clr- 
 
 tinii. 
 
 tion. 
 
 
 ciiniKtiinced or 
 
 cMIiMliir,' 'f-.r,' 
 
 c'Undi'r/ 'fnr/ 
 
 c.«lly/Mlirongb/*by 
 
 coudltiun. 
 
 'fruiii,' *liy rt'ii- 
 
 *frfiin/ *by ren- 
 
 ruaaunoC 
 
 
 Win of;* moviiif; 
 
 wm of;* moving 
 
 
 
 rHUHj. 
 
 rauw!. 
 
 
 
 d. • By/ * liy meiinB 
 
 d. ' By/ * liy mrana 
 
 
 
 iif;* tliti agotit, 
 
 of/'liy tlie Imnda 
 
 
 
 iiifunR. 
 
 of/ agent, uieano. 
 
 
 
 3. * JuhC uitdcr tlio 
 
 
 
 3. 'Near;* 'Just Iwfore/ 
 
 vtaiiilnnl.' *ncflr;* 
 
 
 
 'Just affrr/ 'l<»- 
 
 *JU!(t tiernrc,' 'jiiKt 
 
 
 
 wardx/ 'about tlio 
 
 after ;* * towurdii,* 
 
 
 
 time of/ 
 
 'about* 
 
 
 
 'In a measure/ 'ra- 
 ther/ ' Homowhnt' | 
 
 By many grammarians, u^c, besides the oflSce of a relative 
 adverb and conjunction, is considered to discharge that of a 
 proposition also. So regarded, it occurs with the accusative 
 alone, and that almost exclusively of persons. The Attic 
 writers employ it much the most frequently. Yet it occurs 
 in Herodotus also^nd an example is found in the 0<l3'ssey 
 of Homer. Apparently it has the signification of ' to' in 
 English, and is so rendered : e.g. Od. xvii. 218, <Lc aht rdv 
 o/tocijv ajei debz wz ofwTov, ' since god always brings like to 
 like ;' Herod, ii. 121, ias?j%i/Ta ok w^ ttjv tou ftaadr^oi; i^i/faripa, 
 'having gone in to the king's daughter;' Xen. (Jyrop. i. 8, 
 14, oTtorav fiouhj eiaiivat cue i/jti, 'whenever you choose to 
 come in to me;' Id. Anab. ii. 6, 1, d.vr^'^&riaav ui; jiaadia, 
 * they were carried up to the king.' Examples, however, 
 are not wanting, in which &k is used with the names of 
 towns and other like objects. In these, however, according 
 to most grammarians, regard is had rather to the dwellers 
 in the places than to the places themselves. Thus, in Xen. 
 Cyrop. v. 3, 12, xai x/J/xaxaz oij to ifpoiifiioi) dj oi/rec, ' to bring 
 
 491 
 
 fort 1 ^f ?"''r °^*^"PJ'5»g the fort rather than of the 
 fort Itself; and m Thucydides viii. 36, ^xouro: iK rruMiXrro^ 
 'when he was come to Miletus,' Miletus is corsidlred tlbe 
 put for the people of Miletus. Here, however aU t he W 
 
 ^TZ7' i ": ^" ''*''*"■ •''^^"n^les, allowing the read- 
 totlon Tim"''-'' V "^° ''"^'^"'* "^ "<^»'t "'•' -terirc- 
 
 «« «^.Vo„,, ,vhen many fled to tht, l'ira,us ' it is noieasv 
 
 Either f.7 r' "" f "' ''' '''' P-P^*^ «f «-"^-T 
 Either the readmg must be altered, or &, must be admitted 
 
 to occur with names of places. But see Passow's Lexi^tn 
 8. v., and Kuhn. Ausf. Gr. § 604, ■^-'-Jticon, 
 
 thf^'r^"]'' 'T'"^"*^' '« **•« '■^I'^t'^e adverb formed from 
 the radica o m 5,, ' who,' just as the correlative ra,, is formed 
 from the demonstrative ro, seen also in the compou S 
 
 the En2h n ''T'T''' '."*' '" '"^"' ^^^ ai^nfication to 
 the Enghsh 'how,' and may be compared, in regard to its 
 adverb,,, form and sense, with the numbc'riess e.xampl s of 
 adverbs m .c from adjectives in -o, as W.5c from^o^^,, 
 V^^a,, from y.;,oc. Including the correlative demonstrative 
 which m such cases is always necessary to complete the 
 sense, (ra., . .) i^ would mean ' soN . as,' showing that an 
 action IS o be considered as taken^l. one view in'^hesamo 
 way, whether as to exteut or any other accident, that the 
 same action is taken in another view. Thus, when it is said 
 in the example above cited, du^^»r,aau Af [iaadia, ' they were 
 earned up to the king,' the sense properly is ,.,{,™ 
 M o-c (Ian ro a.,j.^>«) pacdia, 'they were carried up 
 (so) as (IS the being carried up) to the king,' properly Z 
 regards the king.' The being carried up, in th^ ca^se L^n 
 IS made to answer, in the manner of it, whether as to extent 
 or any other condition, to the absolute notion of beins 
 carried up to the king. It is set forth simply that ' person! 
 were carried up,' and then, in answer to the question 'how 
 hey were earned up,' it is added. ^ ■ • • as is the bein^ 
 earned up to the king;' or, the proposition is, that assuming 
 
492 
 
 OF THE SEVERAL PREPOSITIONS^ 
 
 a carrying up that is to the king, or brings men to the king, 
 they were so carried up as is such a carrying up to the king ; 
 and this amounts to saying that they were carried up to the 
 king. For the action or matter affirmed, namely, 'the 
 being carried up,' being the same in both members ; and the 
 qualification of the action as to object or measure, &c., . 
 namely, 'to the king,' *as regards the king,' introduced in 
 the one member, being, by the force of the correlative sign, 
 attributed to the other member as well ; and the one mem- 
 ber, namely, the relative, Hk Paurdia, involving the affirma- 
 tion of the action with its qualification of object, measure, 
 &c., and the other member, the demonstrative, (riuc) ^*4X' 
 drjaau, by virtue of the correlative form of the proposition, 
 repeating the affirmation of the action with its qualification 
 as to object, measure, &c.; it is plain that, when it is said 
 of persons, dvrjj[9r^aav i; fiaaiUa, that is (rwc) dvij^di^aav Hk 
 (iare to dM};f(5'^va«) fiaodia, ' they were (so) carried up (as is 
 the being carried up) to (as regards) the king,' it is meant 
 to be declared that ' they were carried up to the king.' To 
 those familiar with the use of the correlatives turn . . . quum, 
 tarn , . . quam, ila . . .ut, in Latin, with that of oDra>c • . • u)OTt 
 in Greek, and with that of ' so . . . as' in English, and with 
 the frequent omission of the demonstrative member in, a 
 correlative proposition, the seemingly strange use of (rw; . . .) 
 djc in Greek will present comparatively little difficulty. It 
 scarcely needs to be added that the demonstrative correlative 
 T<uf, above a8sumed,~'1s found in common use in the com- 
 pound o5r«c, • so,' answering to ware, ' as,' which, if any one 
 choose, may be substituted for r<u; in the above statement. 
 
 It may not be amiss, notwithstanding this doctrine of <S)c 
 seems to be so simple and obvious as little to require either 
 confirmation or illustration, to add that Hk, with its correla- 
 tive sense of ('so . . .) as,' is used in various connections, all 
 to be explained in the same way, allowance being made for 
 the difl'erence of the objects brought into correlation by 
 (rctfc • • •) ^i- '^^^ office of d)c remains essentially the same, 
 whatever be the character and condition of the action or 
 other object introduced by it. Thus it occurs with the parti- 
 ciple : e.g. Xen. Anab. i. 1, 3, aukXufi^dvu Kufiov (L; dnoxxtvwv^ 
 
 4.- 
 
 'Si. 
 
 493 
 
 >»?' 
 
 :.i 
 
 he arrested Cyrus as ,f he were going to put him to death ;' 
 that ,8 .he (so) arrested Cyrus as the king arrests a man 
 when he means to put him to death.' Here it should be 
 observed that the notion of 'going to,' 'meaning to,' do a 
 thing, that 18, of 'being on the eve of doing a thing, is 
 
 vhich, although It maybe rendered in this connection by 
 as ,f, 'a8 though,' has really no more than the force of 
 as, or, including the demonstrative, of (' so . . .) as ' And 
 in fact, the notion of a conditional qualification involved in 
 the If or 'though' added to 'as' in the expressions 'as if,' 
 as though, belongs to the attributive meaning of the parti- 
 ciple, in the same way with 'when,' 'since,' 'because.' 
 ^C IS used also with the infinitive, in such phrases as «5< 
 
 one's\ If '^^'\^:,^^'^ «--' '«o to say,' 'so to expre^ 
 ones self ,n words,' i^ u,daca, ^to conjecture.' 'so to con- 
 ceive what 18 likely in the future.' <k auur6^, «';rerv. &^ 
 cuueMuuur,.., no speak briefly,' 'to speak summarily' 6^ 
 fooc ««•«., '80 to speak,' 'if one may use the expression.' 
 In such instances, the correlative use of &;, though less 
 obvious and more difficult to set forth intelligibly in Eng- ' 
 hsh phrase, must yet be equally admitted. In all the variefv 
 of expressions in which <5< is thus used with the infinitive, 
 the object, as correctly represented by Passow (s. v. &:) and 
 others, IS to give notice to the hearer that the statement to 
 which <., with the infinitive is attached is to be taken with 
 some limitation ; that the speaker, having used terms for 
 
 ■ ;,^'",\''«^f ""ot absolutely vouch, would have him under- 
 stand that r.e employs them only as the best expression and 
 the nearest the truth that he can find. Sometimes, how 
 ever, he would convey the idea that, in what he says, ho 
 only conforms himself to the received expression, as when 
 UK ho: «^«v IS used in the sense of 'as the phrase goes' 
 and at other tmies. that he ventures to make the statemen , 
 hough It be hM, and may offend, as where d^ i„o: .inerl 
 answers to the English phrase 'to venture the expression.' 
 If one may dare to say so.' It would be curious to notice 
 the way in which this variety of limitation is expressed by 
 
 the same terms, as in the several uses of i^ Ino^ ccmTu just 
 
404 
 
 OF THB BEVBBAL PBBFOSITIONS. ^. 
 
 referred to; but to do this, BXeept as it may occur iDcif 
 dentally, does not belong to tbe objects of tbis treatise. All 
 tbat thes^ riqnire is to show tbe correlative nature of sucb 
 expressions. And tbis may be done by exbibiting the con- 
 nection in which &z is used witb the infinitive. Thusj 
 Herod, vi. 95, dca vJjaatv xmi itXbov iaoteuvroy&i fiiv ifiol doxittv 
 duaaxirtz ftiitaraabv ittpinXoou roD 'A&w, 'they sailed through 
 the islands, chiefly, as it seems to me, from fejir of doubling 
 AtboB,' that is, < so to represent the matter as it seems to 
 me,' or, ' as is the seeming to me.' The correlative demon- 
 strative has reference to the writer's manner of setting forth' - 
 the reason why the Persians sailed through the islands, and 
 is to be supplied, either from the general terms that ordi- 
 narily stand as signs of narration, such as elTreiv, so.as to be 
 equivalent to the English phrase ' so to state the matter,' or, 
 in this particular instance), ' so to state the reason,' or, from 
 the phrase itself, &z_ ipoi ioxietv, so tbat it will mean ' so to 
 seem as it seems to me.' The objection to the former mode 
 of supplying the demonstrative correlative member is, that, 
 admitting it, there would appear to be no good reason to 
 allege why the author did not employ the expression com- 
 monly used in that veiy case, fo wit, die elxe7u, or £< l7io( ' 
 eitttcu. The latter mode seems preferable, as being more' 
 natural and obvious, because more in accordance with the 
 usage in ix; XAfip elnetv, &c., and as affording quite as satis- 
 factory a meaning, at the same time that it retains the variety 
 in the manner of qualifying a statement which the author 
 meant to use. The qualification here intended is not < so to 
 speak,' tbc eiitetti, but * so to seem as it seems to me,' or ' so 
 to think as I think;' that is, the author does not warn the 
 reader to take his allegation of the reason for sailing through 
 the islands with some qualification as to the mode of ex- 
 pressing it, but with some qualification as to bis way of 
 thinking about it. Assuming the demonstrative member 
 to be Bupplicd from &k ifoi doxieiu, the most probable way 
 of accounting for tbe construction is to consider the infini- 
 tive Soxiuv, which should properly stand in the* demon- 
 strative member, to be carried over into the relative mem- 
 ber, and to usurp the place of doxel, which ought to be 
 
 *.. 
 
 %>. 
 
 ■4 
 
 h 
 
 r-.^ 
 
 'i?f. 
 
 495 
 
 connected with ifwi in this member. 8o that Ac iuol doxiu, 
 shall be equivale^t to r«f (oM 9oxiu^ i>^ i^i ^,r, 'so to 
 seem as it seems to me,' or 'so to think as I think.' The 
 whole sentence may be said, then, to contain.' first, the 
 mam statement, 'the Persians sailed through the islands:' 
 secopdly, the, writer's allegation of tbe reason for this, 
 because they were afraid of the doubling qf Mo^nt Athos? 
 and, lastly, the qualification with which he would have his 
 allegation of the reason taken, * so to seem as it seems to 
 me, or 'so to think as I think.' The infinitive 3oxiau, in 
 this construction, might possibly be explained as a nomi- 
 native case m sense, being used absolutely, that is, without 
 a verb but more probably has the force of an accusative 
 case the sense being, 'as far as goes the so thinking as I 
 think. Herod, ii. 134, i, Hju raXd^a.u x^i^dde, Auapi&anrou 
 wc %v> e/;r«v, dv«a(^vrar, ' on which (a pyramid) countless 
 thousands of talents, so to say, are expended;' that is, 'so 
 to Slate the^ sum as is done in the terms used;' literally 
 supplying the demonstrative member from the correlative 
 UK Hf^^^', 'so to express it as is the expressing it in 
 words The author means to say, tbat the sum named, 
 countless thousands of talents,' is not to be taken as exact, 
 and adds, accordingly, that it is to be so understood as is 
 such a sum conveyed in the extravagant terms used. Plat 
 bymp. 179. a. ol rotoTno, vtxip.u du dUroc Sx^ez, d^ feoc «Wv. 
 ndura^ dudpmnoo<:, 'such persons, though f&y, iu number 
 would conquer all men. so to speak;' that is. 'so to repre! 
 sent the matter as is done by the expression used.' or, more 
 literally, 'so to speak as the word used gives utterance.' as 
 IS the expression as regards speaking. r<ic {oiva,) einuu 6^ 
 {iau) ^^of ««.v The reader is warned that the expression 
 w*y;«v A. dXtroi ov«f nduTw: Hvdpdmonz may not be exact, and 
 18 to be accepted so. or in such sense only as. under the 
 circumstances, the writer finds it a fit mode of utterance 
 m this case the demonstrative member is supplied from the 
 correlative «,c l^o^ .irre7u, and the infinitive ./«rv in the 
 latter may have one of two difterent constructions. ' It mav 
 be the subject of iari to be supplied. i>; l„, t„^ eteer., Sno, 
 being m the accusative as the object of «'«rv, 'as is tlic 
 
496 
 
 OF TBI 8BVBRAL PBEPOSITIONS. 
 
 speaking of a word;' or it may follow l;roc, which will then 
 be the subject of iari, as its qnalification, in the same way 
 that the infinitive follows upon many verbs, as iuva/uu, and 
 a number of adjectives, as /uMeotb^ <Lroucn>, ' soft to hear,' in 
 the same way too that the English employs the infinitive 
 after some adjectives, as ' sweet to bear,' ' good to eat' As 
 such a qualification, tlnitv will have the force of an accusa- 
 tive in the sense of 'as to,' ' as regards ;' so that itc 'iroc tlrrttv 
 will mean *as a word or term is as regards, for, speaking,' 
 that is, ' as is a word or term regarded as a means of utter- 
 ance.' The former of these two constructions is at least 
 questionable, even if it be admitted that ilntiv may be so 
 used without the article ; and the latter is every way to be 
 preferred, both as affording a more satisfiictory meaning, 
 and as being altogether consistent with the common use of 
 the infinitive. The same interpretation is to be given of (!>c 
 feoc einelv when it signifies ' as the saying goes,' the meaning 
 being, ' so to speak as the saying is ;' only, here, the qualifi- 
 cation which the speaker gives of som^ expression he has 
 used by adding ^ Inoz elnetv, ' so to speak as the saying is,' 
 < as the expression is for speaking,' ' as a term is as regards 
 speaking,' has reference to other parties than the speaker or 
 writer. Instead of giving notice that he does not absolutely 
 affirm what he has said as being so by adding ' so to speak 
 as I have spoken,' he does it by saying ' so to speak as the 
 terms I employ are used for speaking,' namely, by others, 
 by men generally. Whether Uie qualification is intended 
 in the one sense or in the other, the expression iLc ino^ einetv 
 being capable of being used either way, and the Greeks 
 making, therefore, no distinction in the form of expression, 
 can only be gathered from the nature of the case in which 
 the phrase is employed. Herod, ii. 8, rb <bv d^ ditb 'HXtou- 
 icokfK oitxiu KoXXbu j^top'tov, 6k tlvai Aijinroo, ' now the region 
 after UeliopoHs is not any more a large one, considering 
 that it belongs to Egypt,' or * for Egypt ;' in another and 
 less extensive country it might be accounted large, but for 
 Egypt, and counted as a part of it, it is not large. Con- 
 sidering tlvai to have the force of an accusative, in the sense 
 of ' as regards being,' the construction would be, ' it is not a 
 
 'J[?C. 
 
 497 
 
 arge country, so being as is a region considered with regard 
 rll rf • P'"* "^ ^^yP*-* °'' ' 80 to be as a region I in 
 to _sa^, «fo^ to be, a country of Egypt;' just as aakdaxb. 
 d«oo.« -soft tb hear,' is the same as «soft fir hearing,' and 
 as Ac fcoc ./«Fv «as a word is with ,^gard to spefking,' 
 means 'as a word is for speaking,'. or ' considering what a 
 word IS for expressing one's self.' Thus would result the 
 toeamng above given, and which seems to be altoeether 
 consistent with the author's namtive, and with the L of 
 &c with the infinitive elsewhere. 
 
 J.^\ "^'",'7" ""^'^ ^'^^ **** Buperiative, and has, here 
 ?.^n; V°'"'^w-'' "'"'"' *^' '^^'"o^^tmtive being supplied 
 from the relative: e.g. Xen. Anab. iv. 2. 2, .al % ^Z 
 M9oc,u o n^pnbuT,,, 'that those who were' makinVthe X 
 cuit might escape observation as much as possible,' that is, 
 the' mosT- '''p observation so as is the escaping observation 
 the most. Compare the corresponding Latin expression 
 qmm rmxime, 'as much as possible,' which likewise is cor- 
 relative, being equivalent to tam . . . guam maxime. 
 
 To mention one other instance, icis used in a correlative 
 sense with the accusative case attended by «V. inl nobc- 
 
 r Ir f^'J^' ^''^^ '"'*•* ""^"y "'^ i^ they were sailing 
 to Athens that is, 'they so sailed away as if they werf 
 saihng to Athens ■ or 'as is the sailing to Athens.' This 
 case of the use of &c is by some considered to furnish an 
 explanation of that in which it is employed with the 
 accusative without a preposition. They regard the prepo- 
 sition as having been omitted in this latter case, and as 
 being properiy supplied ; so that «Lc fiacMa would be fullv 
 expressed by «Lc npb, ^aadia. (See Passow's Lex. s. y J 
 
 Gr. §604. and Anmerk.) But if it be considered that the 
 preposition is not necessary to the signification expressed 
 by the accusative namely, that of the measure or extent 
 of the object reached, or of the object as to which, as re- 
 gards which, any thing is aflirmed; that elsewhere, as in 
 poetry very frequently, the accusative without a preposi- 
 
 82 
 
498 OF TBI SBVERAL PBSP0SITI0N8. 
 
 tion is usod as the measure or as the object of the action 
 or motiop of verbs ; that the introdaction of the preposition 
 would net render it less necessary to admit and explain the 
 correlative use of &c ; that i^ is used precisely in the same 
 way where no one would think of supplying a preposition, 
 as with the participle and infinitive and superlative ; and, 
 finally, that a proper attention to the correlative nature of 
 i)C furnishes an adequate explanation of all the other cases 
 and of this one as well ; it will hardly be deemed necessary 
 or proper to supply a preposition with 6k, as it certainly is 
 wrong to call (S< itself a preposition. 
 
 The above-given explanation of &c assumes it to be a 
 correlative adverb, and, if satisfactory, needs not the aid of 
 doubtful etymologies. All that is required is that it shall 
 be shown to be the relative answering to the demonstrative 
 form rtuc ; and this has been done above. Hartung, cited 
 by Kuhn. Ausfuhr. Oram. §593, in the foot-note, considers 
 JJc to be identical with the Latin ar for ad, as seen in ar- 
 eeasere, arcere, arbiter, (the two last words, however, not 
 containing ad at all,) and with Iok, ' until.' But, even if the 
 etymology were worth any thing, it leaves the interpreta- 
 tion of the actual use of 6k just where it found it. Pott, 
 Etym. Forsch. ii. p. 270, referring to this speculation of 
 Hartung, indirectly rejects it ; but, admitting the claim of 
 6k to be counted among the prepositions, so far at least as 
 may be inferred from his giving it the name without ques-- 
 tion, does not say what he esteems ^ to be. 
 
 TBB IHD.